Fields, Columns, and Options Dictionary
The list provides detailed descriptions for all of the:
-
Values you specify in fields or select from lists
-
Values displayed in the interface (such as the descriptions for column headings)
-
Options in the interface (such as the check boxes you can select)
-
Specifies the percentage of matching SEOG grant funds provided by your institution. You must select the SEOG Match check box to enable the field. You can specify 2 decimal places. This information is important when returning Title IV funds. The amount of SEOG funds received and expected is reduced by the matching percentage at your institution.
-
This field indicates the total number of Validated and Not Validated records gathered in the batch. The field is hidden by default but can be enabled in the Column options.
-
Select the condition for % Program Complete output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (50 ; 60) in the respective value field, the report displays the % Program Complete value between 50 and 60 only.
-
Percentage of program hours completed to date as of a specific date.
-
The R2T4 Transaction Percentage you wish to apply to the selected population(s).
-
If the fund was configured to have a distribute authorization by campus, the percentage of the authorized amount that is allocated to the campus.
-
The percentage of attendance achieved by the student. It should be greater than or equal to the minimum value defined in the criteria. When specified as criteria for disbursement approval, in most cases, you will specify either Min Hours Attended or Min Pct Attended. If you specify both, the disbursement must meet both criteria.
-
Number of additional guests that are approved for the student to bring with them in their graduation ceremony event.
-
Number of additional guests that are approved for the student to bring with them in their post-graduation reception event.
-
Number of students that can be accommodated in the Graduation Ceremony Venue.
-
Number of students that can be accommodated in the Reception Venue
-
Additional number of guests a student can bring with them in their Graduation Ceremony.
-
Additional number of guests a student can bring with them in their post-graduation reception event.
-
Number of guests a student can bring with them in their Graduation Ceremony.
-
Number of guests a student can bring with them in their post-graduation reception event.
-
Select Yes to send invites to the students for their post-graduation reception event. Only post-graduate students will receive the invites for the reception.
-
Additional number of guests a student has requested to bring with them in their graduation ceremony event.
-
Additional number of guests a student has requested to bring with them in their post-graduation reception event.
-
Determines the priority order for students to receive their degree certificates based on the program version they belong to. For example, if there are two program versions, A and B, and you want the students from program version A to receive their degree certificate first, then the Sequence Number for program version A will be 1, and for program version B it will be 2.
-
The place where graduation ceremony will be held. Venues configured under Configuration > Student Services > Venues, are available here for selection.
-
The place where post-graduation reception event will be held. Venues configured under Configuration > Student Services > Venues are available here for selection.
-
Indicates appropriate IRS 1098 -T electronic filing information. For additional information on 1098-T Electronic Processing, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
When selected, specifies that the grade level is a Graduate Student for 1098-T Processing. This should only be selected if the Department of Education Code is 6 or 7.
-
Specify the appropriate phone number of the 1098-T information contact.
-
Select this option to specify the number of students to be included in print jobs for 1098-T Form B Reports. The purpose of dividing large print jobs into chunks is so that the chunks can render within the SSRS Rendering limit without timing out. The recommended value range is up to 10,000. The ability to print a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
Select this option to specify the number of students to be included in print jobs for 1098-T Form C Reports. The purpose of dividing large print jobs into chunks is so that the chunks can render within the SSRS Rendering limit without timing out. The recommended value range is up to 10,000. The ability to print a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
When Yes is selected, it specifies that students in this citizenship category should receive 1098-T forms. The 1098-T Processing tool allows administrators to select which citizenships should always be included in the batch and which citizenships support the Allow Manual Add feature. By default, any citizenship with this check box selected has the Allow Add check box selected by default when 1098-Ts are processed.
-
Select this option and specify the first year your institution used Box 1 reporting on the 1098-T forms.
-
Select this option to specify the number of students to be included in print jobs for 1098-T Substitute Statement Reports. The purpose of dividing large print jobs into chunks is so that the chunks can render within the SSRS Rendering limit without timing out. The recommended value range is up to 10,000. The ability to print a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
Select this option to specify the number of students to be included in print jobs for 1098-T Excel Summary Reports. The purpose of dividing large print jobs into chunks is so that the chunks can render within the SSRS Rendering limit without timing out. The recommended value range is up to 999,999. The ability to print a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
Select this option to specify the number of students to be included in print jobs for 1098-T Summary Reports. The purpose of dividing large print jobs into chunks is so that the chunks can render within the SSRS Rendering limit without timing out. The recommended value range is up to 999,999. The ability to print a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
Select this option and specify the maximum number of records to be extracted from the database and displayed in the grid of the 1098-T Cleanup Tool. You can specify up to 6 digits. The default is 100000. The ability to gather a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
Select this option and specify the chunk size for a 1098-T print group. You can specify up to 6 digits. Recommended value range is up to 100,000. The ability to insert at one time a larger number of records is dependent on system resources.
-
The date should be within the start and end date of the selected report period.
-
First choice of program version.
-
First choice of program version code.
-
Select the check box to indicate if the program is a "2 - Years Credits Fully Acceptable toward Bachelor's degree" program.
-
Second choice of program version.
-
First choice of program version code
-
If a secondary review is configured, who is assigned to that review.
-
The minimum number of credits required for a student to be considered as 3/4 time.
-
Third choice of program version.
-
First choice of program version code.
-
Indicates whether the borrower wants to defer repayment of their Direct PLUS loan for 6 months beginning on the date the student on whose behalf the loan was obtained ceases to be enrolled on at least a half-time basis. True indicates that the 6-month deferment option is used. False indicates the 6-month deferment option is not used.
-
The Accounts Receivable Balance included in Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
The Academic Year Sequence or Payment Period associated with the transaction.
-
The name of the ability to benefit (ATB) test that was taken.
-
The Ability to Benefit code required by Common Origination and Disbursement (COD). COD specifies valid ATB codes for each award year. If you have students with invalid ATB codes, you must change the code for their records to pass COD validation.
-
Indicates whether the test was taken at a testing center or administered using another method.
-
The date the Ability to Benefit test was completed.
-
The number of hours that the student was absent from the class section.
-
Select this check box if the grade is the grade to given if the student is absent from the exam. Only one grade om a grade scale can have the check boxes selected.
-
The end date for the academic year.
-
The start date for the academic year.
-
Specifies the sequence in the academic year. When you add a disbursement for a Pell grant or other loan, the default is the academic year being packaged.
-
Name of the student's academic advisor.
-
First and then last name of the Academic Advisor for the student.
-
Name of the student's academic advisor. You can change the value, but you cannot delete it.
-
The academic calendar. The values correspond to calendar options required by the Department of Education. They are non-standard terms, standard terms of quarters, standard terms of semesters, standard terms of trimesters, clock hours, and credit hours without terms. The default is the academic calendar configured for the program version. If you are configuring program versions from Financial Aid, the list is filtered to show the academic calendars appropriate for the Curriculum Standard selected when the program version was configured from Academic Records.
-
The Academic Calendar (AC) types are: AC1 Credit hours - non-standard terms = not semester, trimester or quarter terms; AC2 Credit hours - standard terms of quarters (fall, spring, winter, summer) FT=12 credits per quarter; AC3 Credit hours - standard terms of semesters (fall, spring) FT=12 credits per semester; AC4 Credit hours - standard terms of trimesters (fall, spring, summer) FT=12 credits per trimester; AC5 Clock hours (non-term) Courses that do not begin and end within a set period of time; AC6 Credit hours without terms (non-term)
-
Indicates the type of academic calendars that apply to your institution. You can select one or more academic calendars based on the number of calendars that your institution uses. The options are: - Non-standard terms - Standard terms of quarters - Standard terms of semesters - Standard terms of trimesters - Clock Hours - Credit hours without terms
-
Displays the Academic Information along with its associated Amend and Remove check boxes. Select or clear the check boxes to indicate whether the Academic Information details are to be amended or removed.
-
Student’s academic or grade level in school at the beginning of the specific period covered by the loan.
-
The academic session created for the school year by grouping terms.
-
The academic session created for the school year by grouping terms. The list displays the valid academic sessions configured for the term. This field is only displayed if the Curriculum Registration advanced feature is enabled. If you are registering a student and it is selected, Anthology Student displays the selected value when the student registers for a different course in the same term.
-
Select the field to indicate the charges which need to be posted once for an academic session per enrollment. This field is visible when the Enable Curriculum Based Registration flag under Select the Settings tile > expand System > select Advanced Features is enabled.
-
Indicate the academic term month.
-
The academic year configured by your institution.
-
The academic year. Specify Academic Year sequence to be used to gather students who have the academic year sequence in their enrollments. This field becomes required if a Payment Period is specified.
-
The academic year associated with the earnings summary record. This column is displayed only if an academic year sequence is associated with at least one earnings summary record in the list.
-
The Academic Year associated with the record.
-
Specify an academic year sequence if you want to search for transactions associated with a specific academic year sequence only.
-
The program version’s academic year for which the stipends will be scheduled.
-
Select the check box if you want student pace evaluation to change the dates for academic years when you queue the evaluation.
-
Enter the academic year sequence associated with the payment period. This field is visible only if the Billing Period selected is Payment Period.
-
The academic year associated with the transaction.
-
The definition of the academic year configured by your institution.
-
The month in which the academic year for the institution ends.
-
The end date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to a date calculated from the enrollment date for the student plus the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. The end date of the second and subsequent academic years are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If your institution configured calendars, holidays are added to the calculation of the end date of the sequence. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods in most cases, the date should not be after the graduation date. For loan periods, the end date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The end date of the academic year. If there are no loan periods, the default date is the end date of the academic year. The default date for students in non-term program versions that do use loan periods is the end date for the borrower-based academic year (BBAY) for the loan period. The date does not have to be within the loan period start and end dates. If the Direct Loan is associated with a Loan Period, you can only modify the value for loans with an origination status of Accepted or Batched to send through an origination change or by changing the start and end dates for the BBAY on the Loan Periods tab.
-
The academic year for which the student requires housing. Academic year is configured by your institution. When you select Academic Year based application, you must define rooms with a billing frequency other than Term (such as Daily or Monthly).
-
Select the academic year for which the housing is required. You can select more than one value at a time.
-
The student's grade level during the selected academic year.
-
Indicates whether the academic year is included in the housing lease.
-
Indicate whether or not the student's academic year has been met.
-
This column enables you to see which specific academic year payment period the exception is for without having to navigate to the student on the Award form.
-
Enter a value for the academic year sequence selected in the report. Valid entries are numeric values from 1-99 (no special characters).
-
Specifies the sequence in the academic year.
-
The academic year sequence. This column is displayed only, if the billing method selected has billing frequency of Academic Year.
-
The academic year sequence. This column is displayed only if the billing method is set to academic year.
-
The start date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to the start date in the student's enrollment record. The start dates of the student's second and succeeding sequences are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods, in most cases, the date should not be before the start date of the program version. For loan periods, the start date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The start date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to the start date in the student's enrollment record. The start dates of the student's second and succeeding sequences are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods, in most cases, the date should not be before the start date of the program version. For loan periods, the start date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
Specifies the range of start dates for the academic year.
-
The start date of the academic year. If there are no loan periods, the default date is the start date of the academic year. The default date for students in non-term program versions that do use loan periods is the start date for the borrower-based academic year (BBAY) for the loan period. The date does not have to be within the loan period start and end dates. If the Direct loan is associated with a Loan Period, you can only modify the value for loans with an origination status of Accepted or Batched to send through an origination change or by changing the start and end dates for the BBAY on the Loan Periods tab.
-
The type of academic year. If you selected Non-standard terms, Credit hours without terms, or Clock Hours in the Academic Calendar list, Borrower-Based Academic Year is selected by default and the list is disabled. If you select any other value in the Academic Calendar list, the field is enabled and you can select either Borrower-Based Academic Year or Scheduled Academic Year. When a student enrolls in a program version that has the Scheduled Academic Year selected, the process for enrolling the student is filtered to standard terms. If you selected Standard term of quarters for Academic Calendar, Anthology Student sets the value in No. of Terms in Academic Year to 3. If you selected Standard terms of semesters or Standard term of trimesters, Anthology Student sets it to 2. When Scheduled Academic Year is selected, academic years do not need to be associated with the program version. If academic years are configured, they are ignored because Anthology Student creates the academic year based on the value you specified for Full Academic Year – Credits and Weeks specified on this form. (They must be specified for Anthology Student to create the correct academic years.)
-
Enter a numeric value for the academic year sequence for which you want to generate the report.
-
The academic year sequence. This field is available only if the Tuition Discount Policy Type selected is Payment Period.
-
Select the condition for the academic year sequence in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All.
-
The academic year. Academic years are configured by your institution. This field is enabled only when you have selected Academic Year option in the Housing Type field.
-
Specify whether you want to enable the Academic Year/Loan Period Notification field. For additional information on Academic Year/ Loan Period, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Select the staff member who will receive a notification when the system did not change a student's credits/hours or weeks values due to an award being fully disbursed. This field is available only when Academic Year / Loan Period is set to Yes.
-
The academic year or payment period (such as A1|P1 and A1|P2). For SAP-audit based on payment periods, Term Sequence is not populated.
-
The date range of the academic year.
-
Select the check box if you want SPE to change the dates for academic years, Title IV payment periods, and Title IV disbursements when you queue the evaluation.
-
The academic year sequence.
-
Select this option to indicate that your institution will/cannot post charges to a subsidiary ledger using this transaction code. Subsidiary ledgers are used for student services that are handled outside the student's account balance. Examples of charges to a subsidiary ledger are housing, meal plans, parking, etc.
-
Select this option to indicate that your institution will allow this transaction code to be associated with admission deposits.
-
If your institution has a range of dates that a transfer course is valid, the end date of the range.
-
Select Yes to use the SEVIS features. To use this feature, your institution must accept International Students covered by the Student and Exchange Visitor Program (SEVP) regulations and you must gather the required data.
-
If your institution has a range of dates that a transfer course is valid, the start date of the range.
-
Select this check box to include specific student records.
-
The date when the institution accepted the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
Displays the identifier received from COD.
-
When selected, specifies that the Pell Grant, Direct PLUS loan, Direct Subsidized loan, or Direct Unsubsidized loan must have an origination status of Accepted for the disbursement for the grant or loan to meet the criteria.
-
The access expiration date for posting attendance. The expiration date must be on or after the system date.
-
Whether there is other access to the trigger from any external system source (ex. API).
-
The Access Name values are displayed from the Person Name (column) under Academic Information in the student's FERPA record.
-
The name of the person or student as stored in the institution's records.
-
The account number for the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) authorization. The account number is specified by your institution when the fund is configured.
-
Indicates the account number used for processing the batch.
-
The bank account to which the funds are deposited.
-
The amount due for the statement period.
-
The student’s overall ledger card balance.
-
The student’s account balance amount when the interest batch was generated based on Student Account Balance.
-
Indicates whether you want to show student’s account balance on the statement.
-
The student’s account balance at the time when the statement is generated.
-
The student's current account balance.
-
The date of the account balance.
-
The closing date that is used to calculate the account balance.
-
Specify the student's minimum account balance for the payments.
-
Only students with an account balance that is equal to or greater than the specified value will receive an Activity statement.
-
Only students with an account balance that is equal to or greater than the specified value will receive an Activity statement.
-
Specify the student's minimum account balance to have statements generated.
-
This drop-down is used to identify the bank account owner - Self or Parent.
-
The name of the bank account holder.
-
Select the Account Locked check box to prevent the user from logging on to Anthology Student.
-
The name of the account.
-
Indicates the Stipend Account information configured for separate debit and credit account numbers for stipends.
-
The bank account number.
-
The number of the financial aid general ledger account. The format is nnnn-nnn.
-
The general ledger account numbers that are associated with the transaction codes.
-
Specify the general ledger account number to show only transactions that are associated with that account number.
-
The account number of the bank account associated with the transaction.
-
The account statuses that apply to the student.
-
Select an account status that will be automatically applied when the student status changes to the selected system status. This field is enabled only when you select Allow Account Status Change check box.
-
The account status on the student accounts ledger.
-
The account type can be Checking (C) or Saving (S).
-
Indicates the type of bank account. The options are Checking and Saving.
-
Indicates if the vendor is accredited. Yes indicates accreditation. No indicates no acrreditation.
-
If Accreditation is set to Yes, the accreditation number. The maximum is 20 digits.
-
Specify the name of the agency that is programmatically accrediting the program. This field is editable and required if the record is marked with Yes in the "Programmatically accredited" column, otherwise, the field is not editable. You can enter up to 35 characters in the text box.
-
When selected, specifies that the student completed a rigorous high school curriculum at their high school that qualifies them for the Academic Competitiveness Grant (ACG) grant.
-
Automated Clearing House
-
Indicates the name of the selected ACH processor.
-
Select an ACI transaction fee to be a percentage of the payment or a flat amount. This field is visible when ACI Transaction Fee Enabled is set to Yes.
-
Specify the ACI transaction fee amount. This field is visible when ACI Transaction Fee Enabled is set to Yes.
-
Indicates that there is a transaction fee associated with the credit card payment. The fee is calculated and collected by ACI. This field is visible only when the Payment Gateway Provider is ACI.
-
Select the option for ACK file received for which you want to generate the report.
-
Displays the identification number of the promissory note acknowledgment batch.
-
Date when the borrower acknowledged the promissory note.
-
The action associated with a visa type for an international student. The actions depend on the value for Transmission Status. If the status is R or D, the list displays actions for a new student. If the Transmission Status displays A (Accepted), you can select actions for making changes and communicating other changes with SEVIS. Action is enabled only if you select either F-1, M-1, or J-1 visa type.
-
Select Re-Assign Student Advisor to change the advisors assigned to students. Select Assign Students without an Advisor to assign advisors to students who have not yet had advisors assigned.
-
The action taken after the status change, for example, course registered and so on.
-
The action taken to configure each transaction code individually for course refund adjustment. The values are: - Reverse (default): Select this option to reverse the original charge on the student's ledger card. The full amount of the original charge is refunded. - Earn: Select this option to earn 100% of the original charge. The full amount of the original charge is retained on the student’s ledger card. - Calculate: Select this option to include the charge in refund calculations. The percentage of charges earned for the dropped course is determined based on the configuration in the Calculation Based on Length/Percentage grid.
-
The action associated with each class as it relates to the student's schedule folder.
-
Indicates the action associated with the batch.
-
Indicates the action to be blocked while a student is a member of the hold group.
-
Select the action to be blocked while a student is a member of the hold group. Hold action options are: - Schedule Financial Aid: Financial Aid may not be scheduled for students on hold. - Disburse Financial Aid: Financial Aid may not be disbursed for students on hold. - Servicer SAP Financial Aid: When a student is in this group, Anthology Student causes the flag to be set in the next weekly extract to Global indicating that the student is not making Satisfactory Academic Progress. When the student is removed from the group, the flag sent to Global indicates that the student is making SAP. - Attendance Violation: Institutions must have a process that prevents disbursements of financial aid funds to students who violated the institutions attendance policy. To accommodate the institutions that use Global,Anthology Student incorporates the use of a student Group in tracking students on attendance violation.
-
New indicates a new group was created for the imported students. Append indicates the students were added to the list of existing students in the group. Remove indicates only the list of students were removed from the group. Replace indicates that the existing students in the group were deleted and replaced with the students in the batch.
-
Select Append to add the students in the batch to the list of existing students in the group. Select Remove to remove only the list of students from the group. Select Replace to delete the existing students in the group and replace them with the students in the batch.
-
Indicates the action for the batch (such as an import or update)
-
The action for the record (such as created for change).
-
Indicates the action for the record (such as created or deleted).
-
Indicates the action taken for the student GPA. For example, if it was recalculated, it displays Updated.
-
The action associated with the employer.
-
Indicates the type of change to the residency status. The values are New, Edit, and Delete.
-
The action associated with the student course.
-
Indicates the action taken for the tasks in the batch (such as update, delete, or unlock).
-
If you want the staff member to take an action based on an answer, specify the action. For example, the action could be to begin to end a call.
-
Select the transaction adjustment action. The options are Include All, Amount Adjustment, Deleted, Miscellaneous, and Void. You can select Include All or a specific option.
-
The action that Anthology Student will take for future and scheduled courses if you click the Next button to proceed with the program change. **Add** indicates that Anthology Student will add the course to the student's Student Courses list. **Delete** indicates it will delete the course from the student record. **Unregister** indicates it will unregister the course. If no action is required for the course, the Action field displays the value of none. For example, if the course is also in the course list for the new program, Anthology Student displays none and takes no action for the course.
-
The value is only populated if the fund source is a Direct loan. Anthology Student calculates the date based on the date of the disbursement + 120 days.
-
Specified the action that is taken in the policy if the student does not make satisfactory academic progress (SAP) for the sequence.
-
Enables test mode, allowing testing of the Auto Award engine without making updates to Anthology Student. Whoever you select (staff member or staff group) can see the processing of events, the calculating of awards, and the results without actually committing an update.
-
Enables test mode, allowing testing of the Auto Award engine without making updates to Anthology Student. Whoever you select (staff member or staff group) can see the processing of events, the calculating of awards, and the results without actually committing an update. The default setting for this field is None.
-
Specifies whether the associated record is active.
-
Select whether the package is available as a choice when you set up Accounting procedures for your institution in Settings.
-
Specifies whether the associated record is active.
-
Notates whether the listed Document Status trigger is Active or not.
-
Used to set the Employer-Location association. (enabled by default)
-
Indicates whether the fund sources or transaction codes are active.
-
Specifies whether or not the policy is active for the program version. Select Yes to specify that the policy is active. You must specify values for Effective Start Date, Effective End Date, and Percentage to select Yes.
-
Specifies whether or not the GPA is active. When Yes is selected, Anthology Student uses the GPA to calculate the GPAs for students with student statuses configured with an Active, Enrollment, or Temporary Out status categories. If No is selected, Anthology Student continues to use the GPA to calculate the GPA for students who have a version start date less than the date the GPA became inactive. If the version start date and the date the GPA became inactive are equal, the deactivated additional GPA is not calculated for the student.
-
Specifies whether or not the associated record is active. This field is not editable. The value depends on the Effective To date field. If the Effective To date is less than the current date, the Active field is set to No. If it is greater than and equal to the current date, the Active field is set to Yes.
-
Specifies whether or not the associated line item is active.
-
Species whether the program version is active.
-
Indicates whether the schedule is active or not.
-
Specifies whether or not the staff member is active. Inactive staff members cannot be selected once deactivated. Deactivated staff member can still access Anthology Student if they have passwords and their account is unlocked.
-
Specifies whether or not the associated record is active. This field is not editable. The value depends on the Valid To field. If the Valid To date is less than the current date, the Active field is set to No. If it is greater than and equal to the current date, the Active field is set to Yes.
-
Whether the Term Payment Period Enrollment Allocation is currently configured to be used or if it is inactive.
-
Specifies whether or not the associated line item is active. By default, the check box is selected indicating Active status. Unselect the checkbox to remove the item from Active status.
-
Select whether you want to process active applications.
-
Indicates whether or not the staff employment is active or not. If Yes, staff is employed. If No, the staff is relieved, terminated, or employment has ended.
-
Indicates the campus can be used for application and enrollment purposes.
-
Number of students active in this population.
-
The source of the active prospect specified on the Student Profile or inquiry. The values are configured by your institution and they indicate how a student heard about your institution.
-
Filters the students who were active in the program version during the specified date range. The report will display students who were in a school status associated with a School Status with a GE status of E (Enrolled) at any point throughout the specified date range. The report will also include students enrolled in a program version during the defined range. When you specify a date range, Award Year selection defaults to All because the criteria will not be limited based on start date.
-
The Active Unit Type for the program version. The options are: - Credits have been Registered - Credits Currently Taking - Days from Term Start Date after - Days from Term Start Date before - Hours of Attendance Recorded - Lesson Grades Recorded
-
The numeric value for the Active Unit Type that triggers an update of the student's status to Active. Decimal values are not allowed.
-
Select whether you want all records to be displayed in the report.
-
Select whether the associated record is active. This field is enabled only when you have selected Renewal Type as Housing Dates.
-
Select the color code required for active category.
-
Specifies whether or not the associated topic is active. The administrator can only activate a topic. In case of any issues and the need to deactivate a topic, it can be done through SQL scripts.
-
The name of the activity. For teaching activities, it is the name of the course. For non-teaching activities, it is the name specified when it was configured.
-
Select the type of activity for which you want to generate the report. The options are: Teaching and Non Teaching.
-
Select the type of activity for which you want to generate the report. The options are: Teaching and Non Teaching.
-
Categories your institution can use to organize task types. They are configured by your institution and can be associated with task types.
-
The name of the activity. For teaching activities, it is the name of the course. For non-teaching activities, it is the name specified when it was configured. Note: Faculty Workload Management displays a blank value when the policy line belongs to the Parent (FTE).
-
Anthology Student indicates the actvity for a course on the DPA. For example, if the course was fulfilled using an equivalent, the column indicates Fulfilled by followed by the course code.
-
The type of activity configured by your institution for teaching and non-teaching activities. Activity types are associated with courses and classes for teaching and their equivalents for non-teaching (non-teaching types and non-teaching activities). Teaching and non-teaching activities are associated with load types and limits in the policy lines in load validation policies so that their load can be validated. Note: Faculty Workload Management displays a blank value when the policy line belongs to the Parent (FTE).
-
The types of activities configured by your institution for teaching and non-teaching activities. Activity types are associated with courses and classes for teaching and their equivalents for non-teaching (non-teaching types and non-teaching activities). Teaching and non-teaching activities are associated with load types and limits in the policy lines in load validation policies so that their load can be validated.
-
Indicates the action performed to inform about an incident. For example, Phone call, Email, and so on.
-
The Automated COD Export Process enables users to configure if the COD Export Process should exclude Holidays and/or Weekends when determining the Actual Disbursement Date (calculation) that is reported to COD for the day disbursements are to be paid. When the Financial Aid Automation license is activated, authorized users can view the calculated date in the Act Disb Date column in the Scheduled Disbursements grid. If neither option is selected, NA is displayed in this column.
-
Specify the actual date of disbursement.
-
The actual last date that the item is effective or can be used.
-
The Actual Enroll Intensity displays the value based on courses the student is taking in the term. This field is not editable and is used to help guide users in determining if they want to manually change the Packaged Enrollment Intensity and recalculate.
-
Select an option for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - Actual and Estimate - Actual - Estimated
-
Select the academic advisor grade level for which you want to generate the report.
-
The configured stipend schedule is an add-on to the standard stipend planned for students who match a certain criterion. For example, a merit student may be eligible to get additional allowance in your institution.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be configured as Add. You can also select all the options under employer contact type by checking the box beside Add button.
-
Specify if you want to add bank fees to the Cost of Attendance (COA) when loans are added in packaging. The options are Yes, No, and Prompt User. The Prompt User option is supported only for backward compatibility.
-
You can add conditions page by adding the courses from the left menu and select the course you want to add. Multiple courses can be selected and added under one condition group. Rules can be added with AND and OR statements. Only the courses part of the elective pool is displayed.
-
You can add requirement rules conditions to manage and enforce course requirements by defining specific conditions and constraints. Add condition page allows you to add Requirement Rule type. Select the condition type from the left menu then select the arrow. Add requirement rule condition specific information and select Save.
-
You can create condition groups. You can add requirement rule conditions based on the program requirements.
-
You can create condition groups. You can add courses based on the program requirements.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to add a course on the Transfer Credits page using the + next to the Course field. Any institutions they add will be available to other staff members to select. If you do not select the check box, the staff member will only be able to select an existing course from the list.
-
The date and time before which the class must be added to the student's schedule. The specified date value must be between the Registration Start Date and the term End Date.
-
The time before which the class must be added to the student's schedule.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to select a value in the Campus and Admissions Representative lists when they add an enrollment for a student on their Enrollments list. There is one permission because the Admissions Representative must be authorized for the campus.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to select a value in the Previous Education list when they add or edit an enrollment on the Enrollments page for a student.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to add an institution on the Transfer Credits page using the + next to the Institution field. Any institutions they add will be available to other staff members to select. If you do not select the check box, the staff member will only be able to select an existing institution from the list.
-
Specify if you want to add loan fees to the Cost of Attendance (COA) when Title IV loans are added in packaging. If you select Yes, the system will calculate and add loan fees to the COA only from Title IV loans. The fees will be displayed in the Bank Fees field on the Academic Years page.
-
Adds the student to a group. This activity enables your institution to track the students and send notifications or performing reporting by group.
-
Select the student group to associate a Response Code Group with an existing campus group.
-
The last and then first name of the staff member that added the item.
-
The additional refund amount based on configuration of the refund policy. If the result of the Net Payments minus Net Charges is greater than the Total Return of Title IV amount, additional refunds by the institution are needed. CNS adds the amounts for each fund source in the grid in the order that is configured in the refund policy. If there was no Return of Title IV calculation, no value is calculated. If you change the value, you cannot recalculate the refund. You must create a new refund calculation.
-
The date when the student was added to or dropped from the course.
-
The last day that students can register or unregister from the class section. This field becomes available only when the Class Section Enforced Add Drop Dates are configured for the campus. If the campus is set to use the Term Enforced Add Drop Dates, this field will not be displayed on Class Section page, and the AddDropDate from the Online Registration configuration for the term is applied.
-
Select the option for the Add/Drop flag. The options are: - Not Enforced: Campus does not enforce an Add/Drop date. This is the default option. - Campus Enforced: Enables number of days after start date for the Add/Drop date for all terms for the campus location where user entries the number. - Term Enforced : The Add/Drop date for the campus (specified during Term) is enforced on a Term basis (each term defines a date). - Course Section Enforced : The Add/Drop date for the campus is enforced based on the course section.
-
Enter the number of calendar days or class meeting days (depending on the Number of Days in Units (Add/Drop)), starting with the course section's start date that are allowed for Add/Drop. This field is enabled only when you select Course Section Enforced option in the Add/Drop Flag field.
-
Enter the term’s add/drop date. This field is available only in if the Include Add/Drop Date option is selected.
-
The name of the staff member who added the person or item.
-
Indicates the User ID from which the Application API Key was added.
-
Name of the student/individual who added the document via the Portal
-
The name of the staff member who added the template.
-
The name of the staff member that added the attachment. Located under the Attachments heading.
-
The name of the staff member who added the employer record.
-
The name of the staff member who added the jobs record.
-
The name of the staff member who added the transaction.
-
Indicates how the course was added. If it is from the course list for the program version or area of study, it is blank. If it was added manually from another location, it displays the name (such as Student Courses or Degree Progress Audit).
-
Indicates whether the course was added via rules engine or manually added into the pools.
-
The total credits or hours for courses that have been manually added to or waived from the Degree Progress Audit.
-
Select this flag if the student has received a Pell amount greater than 100% at another school. You can then populate the prior percentage disbursed for packaging to determine whether the student should be packaged for Additional Eligibility and determine the remaining Pell amount above 100% that can be packaged.
-
Select whether you want to include the additional eligibility indicator in the report. By default, it is disabled.
-
Select the option to include the additional eligibility indicator in the report.
-
The field is only displayed for loans configured to be DIRUNSUB.
-
The address associated with a person or organization. If you change the address for a student, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to save the address before your changes to the Related Addresses list for the student (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Related Addresses tile.). You can also specify the type of address. For example, if your institution has a value of Previous configured for the address type, you can select the value for any previous addresses.
-
The address associated with a student.
-
The name and address of the person making the payments. The list displays all of the contacts and addresses specified for the student in the Related Addresses list for the student (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Related Addresses tile.).
-
Address information for the student.
-
The category of the Address. For example, Home, Vacation, Work, and so on. If billing address is selected as the Address Type, the address information is displayed in the student's ledger card on the Billing Address tab.
-
The address type and method of contact. The values include Student Master - Mail, Student Master - Phone, Student Master - Work Phone, Student Master - Mobile Number, Student Master - Other Phone, Student Master - e-Mail, Student Master - Other e-Mail.
-
The address type and method of contact. The values include Student Master - Mail, Student Master - Phone, Student Master - Work Phone, Student Master - Mobile Number, Student Master - Other Phone, Student Master - e-Mail, Student Master - Other e-Mail.
-
The address category for the payee.
-
The category of the Address. For example, ParentHome, Billing Address Vacation, Work, and s and so on. If billing address is selected as the Address Type, the address information is displayed in the student's ledger card on the Billing Address tab.
-
Address Type used in the institutional refund policy, e.g., student or campus address.
-
The category of address for the student.
-
Filters the search list for the address. The address associated with a person or organization. If you change the address for a student, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to save the address before your changes to the Related Addresses list for the student (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Related Addresses tile.). You can also specify the type of address. For example, if your institution has a value of Previous configured for the address type, you can select the value for any previous addresses.
-
The address of the building.
-
Select the check box to prevent the final Academic Year/ Loan Period Evaluation logic from over-adjusting or deleting academic year (AY) and payment period (PP) data for enrollments using non-term program versions. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
If you selected Calendar Days for Revenue Basis (Earning Unit), select the check box to have Anthology Student remove holidays from earned or total days.
-
If you selected Calendar Days for Revenue Basis (Earning Unit), select the check box to have Anthology Student exclude holidays from the total revenue units or units to be earned.
-
Indicates the adjustment to the student's program will change the Total Credits/Hours required for the enrollment as seen on the Progress tab of the Enrollment folder.
-
Indicates whether the refund policy is adjusted for holidays.
-
Select this check box to extend the graduation date to the last course on the schedule even if it does not apply to the student's chosen area of study. This setting is not optional if Extend Final AY/LP by Course type is configured.
-
Indicates the adjustment to the student's program will change the requirement units for the enrollment as seen on the Progress tab of the Enrollment folder.
-
Specify the marks to be adjusted on moderated marks for reaching Max/Min Mark range.
-
Select the Check Box to enable marks adjustment on Moderated Marks.
-
Indicates the adjusted load value. If you use load factors, the adjusted load value is calculated by multiplying the load factor with a default value. For example, if the load factor is 1.33 and the default value is 40, the adjusted load value is 53.20. If you do not use the load factor, Anthology Student displays N/A the same value as load factor.
-
The difference between the original payout and the recalculated payout.
-
The amount of the adjustment. When the disbursement is adjusted by the amount you specify, it cannot be less than $0. For Pell grants, when the disbursement is adjusted by the amount you specify, it cannot exceed the maximum Pell amount calculated by Common Origination and Disbursements (COD).
-
Assign a unique adjustment code to a Transaction Code. The Adjustment Code list displays Transaction Codes that are: - Active - Associated with campuses that are assigned to the refund policy - Bill Type is S (Student) or B (Both) Use N/A to remove any existing mapping. By default, Adjustment Code displays N/A for those transaction codes that have not been assigned.
-
The date when the adjustment is effective.
-
The amount of the adjustment to the net amount. When the disbursement is adjusted by the amount you specify, it cannot be less than $0.
-
The total of the Adjustments in the Charges & Adjustments grid. The column displays N/A for the Return of Title IV calculation.
-
The Admissions Representative for the student. If a staff member is removed from an Admissions Representative group after having been assigned to a student, Anthology Student retains the name of the former representative on the student record.
-
The Admissions Representative for the student. If a staff member is removed from an Admissions Representative group after having been assigned to a student, Anthology Student retains the name of the former representative on the student record.
-
Indicates whether an administrative fee will be charged for the transaction.
-
The number of hours allocated to the committee member for exam related administrative tasks.
-
If you are using the Financial Aid Automation COD Export feature and your institution has been granted Administrative Relief, select the check box to ensure that records for the closed award year are included in the COD Export process.
-
The Admissions Representative for the student. If a staff member is removed from an Admissions Representative group after having been assigned to a student, Anthology Studentretains the name of the former representative on the student record. This property is populated based on the campus selection. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
If one or more of the staff groups selected for the staff member were configured with a Parent Group of Admission Rep Group, select the type. Representative types are configured by your institution under Configuration > Admissions > Representative Types.
-
Indicates whether or not the staff group was configured with a Parent Group of Admission Rep Group. If the column displays Yes, the staff group is an Admission Rep Group and was configured as a template. Templates can be configured to specify specialized permissions.
-
Name of the student's admission advisor.
-
The Admissions Representative for the student. If a staff member is removed from an Admissions Representative group after having been assigned to a student, Anthology Student retains the name of the former representative on the student record.
-
The Admissions Representative for the student. You can select Do Not Update for students that you are updating, but not for students with Student Profiles you are creating When you select Do Not Update the Admissions Representative is not updated on their enrollment or their inquiry.
-
The alpha-numeric code assigned to the admissions representative for the student.
-
Representative that is assigned to the student at the time of admission.
-
The alphanumeric code associated with an admissions representatives.
-
Date on which the advertisement ended.
-
Date on which the advertisement started.
-
Time that the ad occurs on radio or TV.
-
Includes information related to the registration group the student is associated with and the auto-generated password, if a password is configured for the group.
-
Name of the student advisor and the staff group that the advisor is associated with.
-
If the staff group is for advisors, select the advisor code. When you assign a staff member to one or more of these staff groups, the staff member appears in the drop-down list for that advisor type. Do not select an advisor code for non-advisor staff groups. If you select Admissions, Anthology Student does not display the group in the drop-down list displayed when select Advisor Group for Assign To while configuring scheduled tasks.
-
Name of the student advisor.
-
The type of advisor based on whether the advisor is assigned at the time of enrollment or within the assignment dialog box.
-
Choose the specific person or group, based on your choice in the Assignment Method field.
-
Indicates that the staff group has been configured as a group of advisors. If yes, the type of advisor (such as Academic Records or Admissions).
-
Designate the letter grade as a default grade to be posted on courses automatically during a status change to a system status of ’Dropped’.
-
Age that Anthology Student calculated based on the date of birth (DOB) that was specified for the student.
-
The student’s age requirement as of the start date of the Course Section or the Term.
-
The system configured number of days after the student’s Post Withdrawal Disbursement (PWD) notification is sent that triggers assignment of a color level based on priority. First configured number of days equals Caution/Yellow. Second number equals Critical/Red.
-
Start date option for age requirement. Select between the two options: Course Section or Term.
-
Number of days this record has been retrieved as an exception since it was first created.
-
Agencies for which the document is required.
-
The agency name that the student is associated with.
-
Select an Agency value from the drop-down list.
-
The agency or sponsor that the student is associated with. If you want to add additional agencies or specify specific branches of the agencies, use the Agency Affiliations tile (Select the Students tile > select the student name in the list > expand Contact Manager).
-
The agency branch that the student is associated with. If you are adding or editing an agency or affiliation for a student, the field is read-only if there is only one branch for the agency.
-
Indicates the agency branch that the student is associated with. This field is auto-populated based on Agency Affiliations under the Contact Manager tile. If the Agency has multiple branches, the first branch is used to populate the Agency Branch field.
-
Select an Agency Branch value from the drop-down list.
-
The branch or fund source name.
-
The branch associated with the selected agency. When you select an agency that has branches, its branches are displayed in this field. If you choose an agency that has branches, you must choose specific branches.
-
The agency or sponsor that the student is associated with. If you want to add additional agencies or specify specific branches of the agencies, use the Agency Affiliations tile (Select the Students tile > select the student name in the list > expand Contact Manager).
-
Select the agency or sponsor that the student is associated with. If you want to add additional agencies or specify specific branches of the agencies, use the Agency Affiliations tile (Students tile > select the student name > Contact Manager).
-
Select whether or not you want aggregate charge applied for the room.
-
Select whether or not you want aggregate charge applied for the suite.
-
Select the date to calculate the age of the transactions. The age of the transactions determines into which age range (e.g., 0-30 days, 31-60 days, 61-90 days, or 90+ days) the transactions are placed. Totals for each age range are listed at the bottom of the report.
-
Identifier for the Agreement to Serve (ATS). The ATS is required for TEACH grants.
-
Select the check box to specify that the amount packaged for the student must be greater than or equal to their cost of attendance (COA) for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
Select the check box to specify that the amount packaged for the student must be greater than or equal to their institutional charges for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
Configuration for the Aid Acceptance that is being awarded: Passive or Active.
-
Select a confirmation option to configure the awarded Aid Acceptance. You can select the following options: Passive Confirmation or Active Confirmation.
-
If selected, specifies that the tolerance amount that you configured for the campus is used in the validations Anthology Student performs when you select the Aid > COA, Aid > Inst Costs, Approved > COA, and Approved > Inst Costs check boxes. The tolerance amount should account for any small differences that might occur in the award for the student that would cause the student to fall out of the promoted packaging status when it is reevaluated (such as bank fees or disbursement schedule changes). If no tolerance is specified or 0 is specified, there is no tolerance.
-
Select the option for aid status for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the aid statuses you want to include in the statement. The options are Estimated, Pending, and Approved.
-
Indicates the status of the aid that needs to be included. The options are Estimated, Pending, and Approved. You can select one or more options.
-
Select the aid statuses which you want to include in expected payments evaluation. The options are Estimated, Pending or Approved.
-
Select the aid statuses which you want to include in past due payments evaluation. The options are Estimated, Pending or Approved.
-
Indicates the alerted record type e.g., Type 1: Aggregates, Perkins, and Flags Record Type 2: Name History Record Type 3: Overpayment Record Type 4: Grant Payment Record Type 5: Loan Detail Record
-
If the student is not a U.S. citizen, the alien registration number for the student. The number is up to 9 digits.
-
Select the check box if you want the SPE process to use the following logic: • If a course ends before the PP end date, the PP end date is considered as the end of PP unless credits are not met. • If a course ends after the PP end date and the credit milestone has not been met, the course end date is considered the end of the PP.
-
When selected, displays all groups (both expired and not expired).
-
Indicates whether all campuses support the integrated document management service. If you select Yes, it disables the Campuses field.
-
Indicates whether all campuses support integrated document management service.
-
Specifies that the building remains open all days of the week.
-
Select whether your institution will offer non-degree-seeking courses or programs to students. The default value is No when you add a campus.
-
Use this option for payment types not otherwise designated as defaults.
-
Select to display all of the public groups and the private groups you own or have been given access by the owner to use. It does not include private groups that you do not own or that the owner has not granted you access.
-
Specifies that all students should be displayed.
-
The total number of students that were successfully allocated to a building and room.
-
The number of seats allotted to the room.
-
The number of students allotted seats for an exam.
-
Select the check box to give staff members permission to change programs and reenter students for enrollments. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile > More button.)
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to this option to allow the staff member access to connect or edit a connected enrollment on the Enrollments page for a student. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile > More button.)
-
Select this check box if you want the staff member to be able to use the search in the command bar to search all students in all campuses in the system. If a student belongs to a campus where the staff member is not authorized, the student will show up in the search results, but they will not be able to display their Student Profile. For this option to work for staff members, your institution must also have selected Yes for Allow Global Search on the Settings page. (Select the Settings tile > locate System in the list > select General.) When not selected, Anthology Student limits the search to the authorized staff member campuses.
-
Select this option to allow the staff member to view social security numbers (SSNs) on specific forms and on the Setup Template for Instructor Groups and Admissions Rep Groups.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to transfer a student to another campus on their Enrollments page using the To Campus option in the Transfer Type list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile > More button > Transfer option.)
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to transfer a student to another enrollment and campus on their Enrollments page using the To Enrollment and Campus option in the Transfer Type list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile > More button > Transfer option.)
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to transfer a student to another campus on their Enrollments page using the To Enrollment option in the Transfer Type list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile > More button > Transfer option.)
-
Specifies whether or not you want to allow account status change automatically.
-
Select this check box to allow account status changes automatically. If you select this check box, it enables the Account Status field.
-
Select whether accounting transactions are allowed.
-
Select the check box to allow student bank account payments in the Student Portal for this campus. The Staff field and the ACH Processors list are enabled when you select this check box. You can add, edit, delete, or duplicate the ACH processors. When you select this check box, the campus is set for live ACH processing.
-
Select Yes if you want the activity type to be selectable when staff members configure course and class load type details and their equivalents for non-teaching activities (non-teaching types and non-teaching activities). Otherwise, select No. For example, if you have parents and children, you might want to have the children selectable, but not the parent.
-
Select Yes to enable additional integrated document management providers. If you enable this feature, the Document Integration settings for Campuses in the Contact Manager & Admissions tiles are disabled. Select No if you only want to use the options in document integration.
-
Select Yes to enable additional integrated document providers other than Perceptive. If you enable this feature, the Document Integration settings for Campuses in the Contact Manager and Admissions tiles are disabled. Select No if you only want to use the native Contact Manager functionality or use Perceptive under Document Integration settings for Campuses in the Contact Manager & Admissions tiles.
-
Indicate whether you want to configure fund source as a trigger field from payments processed for tasks being sent from Contact Manager. If you enable this feature, the Fund Sources field is added as a criterion under Trigger when configuring Task Schedules in Contact Manager. When this feature is enabled, you have the option to notify students associated with a specific fund source as opposed to all students associated with any fund source. For example, you can notify the students of disbursement funds for Direct loans only as opposed to all students associated with Financial Aid payments processing.
-
Select Yes to use the new feature in 21.2 that lets you configure Advanced Transfer Credits. When selected, you can configure more complex Transfer Types such as one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-one, and many-to-many transfers. Select No if you only want to use the existing options of transfer credits.
-
Selecting this check box lets you configure a determined end date for the job schedule. An End Date field appears for selection of this date.
-
Specifies whether or not an appeal can be allowed.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can raise appeal from Service Bot.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can raise appeal from Portal.
-
Select whether to enable or disable auditing of credits for the campus. This field is available when the How Should Credits be Applied option is set to Auto Apply Using Hierarchy. The default value is set to No. If you set this option to Yes, all changes related to the credits associated with that campus will be audited. To access audit data for credits application for a student, select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Student Accounts > select the Audit tile.
-
Select Yes to enable Allow Approved Transfer Credit Restrictions in program versions and areas of study.
-
Select this check box if you want to automatically create a new class section when the maximum for the class section or waitlist is full. If you select this check box, this enables the list of properties to add to the new class section. You can select all or individual properties from the list. If you select Secondary Instructors, Anthology Student copies all secondary instructors and their period details.
-
Select the check box if you want the staff member to receive automatically assigned tasks from Contact Manager.
-
Select Yes to enable the Cancel Class Section button on the Class Scheduling page. When the button is enabled, staff members with permission can select and then cancel a class section and unregister the students. Canceled class sections can also be reinstated.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to create or recreate a batch of Hold/Release Change Transaction file for CommonLine (Processes > Financial Aid > Approve Disbursements to Pay).
-
Indicates whether or not a registrar can select a course fee schedule when registering students for a course. This option is only displayed for the Course and Payment Period frequencies. It is displayed for Term frequency if you select Use Rate Schedule.
-
Select Yes to allow substitutions to be selected for courses during course registration. The only courses that can be selected as a substitute are specified on the course lists for the PV or AOS during configuration.
-
Select this check box to measure student progression using only courses that are part of the program version course list and to meet a minimum grade point if configured. For additional information on Allow Courses to be Exempt from Progression, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Select the check box to allow credit card payments on Student Portal for this campus. The Staff field and the Credit Card Processors list are enabled when you select this check box. You can add, edit, delete, or duplicate the credit card processors.
-
Select the check box to allow credit card payments on Student Portal for this campus. The Staff field and the Credit Card Processors list are enabled when you select this check box. You can add, edit, delete, or duplicate the credit card processors. When you select this check box, the campus is set for live credit card processing.
-
Select whether to enable or disable Credit Source Order for the campus. This field is visible when the How Should Credits be Applied option is set to Auto Apply Using Hierarchy. The default value is No. • If set to Yes for the campus, you can configure the order in which credit sources will be applied against debit transactions (regardless of when the credit sources were posted). • If set to No, you cannot configure the credit source order and the system will continue to apply credits using FIFO (first in first out) methodology.
-
This check box is displayed only if you select the Allow Override check box on the Courses Code Setup. If this check box is selected, students registering for the class section can select the number of credits they can attempt. If this check box is cleared, students registering for the class section cannot select the number of credits they can attempt.
-
Select Yes to enable cross-referencing of courses. When a course is defined as cross referenced, you can offer the classes to students from other campuses. It gives students additional options to register for course sections that may be filled at their home campus.
-
Select this check box to enable the Attendance Message text box, so that you can edit the default message and save the modified. If the check box is not selected, the text box remains populated with the default message.
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to delete a lease with billed charges using the Delete button on the Housing Leases page (Students tile > select the studfent name > Student Services > Housing Lease tile).
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to delete a lease with unbilled charges using the Delete button on the Housing Leases page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Student Services > select the Housing Lease tile.)
-
Indicates that the student is allowed to drop the class after the class starts. The student can Drop/Withdraw from a class on their schedule without penalty after the timeframe that changes are allowed. The configured Drop End Date determines the timeframe.
-
Specifies how you want Anthology Student to handle the same Social Security Numbers (SSNs). If you select No Duplicates in Database, there cannot be more than one Student Profile with an SSN. If you select No Duplicates in Campus, there can be more than one Student Profile with an SSN in the database, but only one for a campus. If you select Yes, you can create more than one Student Profile with the same SSN in the database and there can be more than one for a campus.
-
Select the option to allow the user to select prospects found during the duplicate check that belong to campuses to which the user has no access.
-
Select Yes if you want staff members to be able to create dynamic groups. Dynamic groups use views to create the list of students. If you select Yes, you can also specify how often the student groups are refreshed on the Dynamic Groups tab. (Select the Settings tile > expand System > select Staff.)
-
Select this check box to enter the file name. If this check box is selected, you cannot set a file extension in this form.
-
Select this option to enable the authorized user to specify a General Ledger account when posting miscellaneous cash receipts or override the G /L Account numbers for the transaction code. This option is disabled for Bill Type Student.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to edit disbursements when packaging financial aid. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile > Awards tab.)
-
If the staff member is authorized to work with campuses that use a servicer such as Global, you can select this option to allow the staff group to edit exception details for servicers during exception review (Processes > Financial Aid > Servicer Exception Review).
-
Select the check box to allow users to change the amount of institutional charges in the refund calculation. This option is editable when you enable Use Title IV Refund Calculation. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to add or edit the payment periods on the Academic Years and Loan Periods tabs on the Awarding page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile.)
-
Select the check box to allow users to edit the return amounts for Title IV refunds in "Step 1: Student's Title IV Aid Information" and "Step 6: Return of Funds by the School" of the refund processing worksheets.
-
Select the check box if you want the staff member to have permission to edit the advisors for students.
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to edit the housing period on housing leases.
-
If the check box is selected, specifies that staff members can change the payee when a refund is edited in Student Accounts.
-
If the check box is selected, specifies that staff members can change the payee when a stipend check is processed.
-
When selected, Anthology Student displays a Source button in the Email Message area of the page for configuring task templates with an event type of Email and Auto Disb. Cancellation/Disb. To Re-expect Alert. The staff members with permission can then click the button to add or edit the HTML source for the email.
-
Select this option is you want to give the staff member permission to change the value in the Region on a student inquiry. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Admissions > select the Inquiries tile.)
-
Select Yes if you want to let staff members search across all campuses in the system for employers. If you select Yes, Anthology Student searches all campuses when staff members use the search in the command bar to search for employers. Select No to limit their search to their authorized campuses.
-
Enables the new feature for configuring requisite rules. Using the feature, you can configure prerequisite or corequisite rules that you can apply to more than one course. When you enable this feature, a Course Requisite Rules option is available from the Configuration tile and the Prerequisite and Corequisite tiles are replaced with one Requisites tile in course configuration. When you select Yes, Anthology Student automatically migrates your existing prerequisite and corequisite rules to requisite rules so that you can modify and consolidate them as needed to make your rule management more efficient. During the migration, Anthology Student prefixes your existing prerequisite rules with pr- and corequisites rules with -cr. For example, if the course code for a prerequisite is ENG101 (course name: English Composition) the code of the rule will be pr-ENG101 and the name of the rule will be Legacy Pre-Req migrated rule for English Composition. If the course code for a corequisite is BIO101LAB, the name of the rule will be cr-BIO101LAB. Enabling this feature permanently disables features in the legacy interface related to rules (such as prerequisites and corequisite rules and actions for courses like register, unregister, and drop). Other changes can still be made to courses in the legacy interface (such as edits to the course, books, and fees).
-
Select Yes to add an application for the campus listed in the student's Student Profile and also for the campus you have access to. Select No if you only want to add an application for the campus in the student's Student Profile.
-
Select Yes to add a test score with the ability to specify an expiration date in the student's Student Profile. If you enable this feature, the Tests folder in Legacy will be permanently disabled. Select No if you only want to add a test score without the ability to specify an expiration date in the student's Student Profile.
-
Select Yes to enable the More menu > Reentry option on the Enrollment form. Staff members with permission can then select the option to re-enter their existing program version. When re-entry can be used will depend on the policies and procedures at your institution.
-
Select this check box to allow enrollments. If you do not select this check box, no students can be enrolled at the selected campus.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can register for exam from Portal.
-
Select Yes to enable the enhanced academic year budget functionality in the Student Web App and legacy interface, so that any academic year that starts on or after this feature is enabled will display the extended budget view (to include automated awarding). This functionality permanently disables the Budget configuration in the legacy interface. All existing budgets can be calculated but only newly configured budgets will have the additional three budget fee fields.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override a Financial Aid (FA) hold group and approve disbursements for existing and future terms (Processes > expand Financial Aid > Approve Disbursements to Pay or Servicer Paid Disbursement Validation).
-
Based on the extension of the student loan payment pause announced by the U.S administration in 2022, the Department of Education allows all borrowers with paused loans to receive a “fresh start” on their repayment by eliminating the impact of delinquency and default. As a result of this change, the ISIR Import process has been updated so that students with ISIRs having Comment/C-Codes related to a student loan default status are not added to the C-Code Hold Group. Comment codes related to student default are 124, 132, 134, 135, and 136. This change is not for a specific award year. A registry key (“Fresh Start Exclusion”) has been added so that this logic can be turned off if the Department of Education announces that the exclusion has ended and is no longer in effect. The registry key default value = OFF. Select "Yes" for "Allow Fresh Start Exclusion" if you want to allow all borrowers with paused loans to receive a Fresh Start Exclusion. The default is "No".
-
Select Yes if you want to let staff members search across all campuses in the system for students. If you select Yes, Anthology Student searches all campuses when staff members use the search in the command bar to search for students. Select No to limit their search to their authorized campuses.
-
Enable or disable Grading for each sub-component. Options are Yes and No.
-
Enable or disable Grading for each sub-component. Options are Yes and No. Anthology Student International 7.0 restricts only one gradable sub-component per Course, i.e., only one sub-component can be set as gradable.
-
Select Yes if you want Faculty Workload Management (FWM) HR-related feature configurations to integrate with your Human Resources (HR) system data/records. When integrated, Anthology Student uses the data available in the Human Resources system database. For example, you can use the jobs and positions already existing for faculty in your HR system.
-
Select this check box if you allow instructors to edit the final grades after they are posted and before the final grades deadline. If you do not select this option, instructors cannot edit the grades once they have submitted the final grades.
-
If this check box is selected, and a valid ISIR is imported or matched, the housing status is automatically updated on the Academic Year form.
-
Select this check box to allow makeup hours. If you select this check box, this enables the Update LDA With Makeup Date check box.
-
For Financial Aid G/L funds, select this option to allow posting funds directly to the student's ledger.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the maximum class size when registering students in a class section for all campuses. During registration, a message is displayed when maximum class size is about to be exceeded on their Student Courses page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.) The staff member can determine if it is okay to register the student anyway. If this check box is selected, the campus setting for Add/Drop is overridden.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the maximum class size when registering students in a class section for the campuses they are authorized to work with. During registration, a message is displayed when maximum class size is about to be exceeded on their Student Courses page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.) The staff member can determine if it is okay to register the student anyway. If this check box is selected, the campus setting for Add/Drop is overridden.
-
Select the check box to enable multiple disbursements within the same month.
-
Indicates whether or not the Cash Payment Name can be edited when selected in a cash payment process.
-
If you want staff members to be able to create new employer groups from report output, select the type of report. Manual indicates you can only update the employers in the group by manually adding or removing them. Static indicates you can rerun the report to update the employers or manually add and remove them. If you do not want staff members to create employer groups from reports, select No.
-
If you selected the Enable CRM Integration check box, select Yes if you want to allow staff members to add new prospect and students for the campus using the Anthology Student interface. If you select No, Anthology Student does not display the campus as an option to select when a new prospect or student is being added. Staff members must then use the CRM package to add the new prospects and students.
-
If you want staff members to be able to create new student groups from report output, select the type of report. Manual indicates you can only update the students in the group by manually adding or removing them. Static indicates you can rerun the report to update the students or manually add and remove them. If you do not want staff members to create student groups from reports, select No.
-
This check box is enabled if online access is allowed for this employer.
-
Indicates if online access is allowed for the employer.
-
Allows applications to be submitted online.
-
Enables students to submit an online application for the program.
-
Indicates that the perpetual term will be displayed in Portal. The Allow Online Usage check box is enabled only if the term is a perpetual term without a start or end date.
-
Indicates whether the grade scale allows to define duplicate letter grades for any overlapping or similar range of grade points. Select 'No' if you want the grade scale to include unique letter grades across different grade points.
-
Specifies whether or not the default amount or the assigned value specified for the activity can be overridden when the activity is assigned using the Assignment Manager page. (Select the Processes tile > locate Faculty Workload > select Assignment Manager.)
-
Indicates that the staff member is allowed to override the number of credits and hours awarded to the student after completing the course successfully. When you select Allow Override, Minimum Credits and Maximum Credits fields are enabled. When you select Allow Override, the Minimum Credits and Maximum Credits fields are enabled, and the Match Override Credits check box is selected. If the student has a registration lock and you select Allow Override, Registration Locks are evaluated when you update Credits and Hours. If you update the values for a course in a status other than Future, it can affect registration locks configured for the student.
-
Select this option whether or not you want the flat fee to be overridden and alternate amount to be applied at the time of association with the service.
-
Select this option whether or not you want to override dates on the class sections.
-
Specifies whether a staff member will be allowed to override the default vendor/ sub vendor used in the advertising expense.
-
This check box is displayed only if you select the Allow Override check box on the Courses Code Setup. If this check box is selected, students registering for the class section can select the number of credits they can attempt. If this check box is cleared, students registering for the class section cannot select the number of credits they can attempt.
-
Select the staff group to have override permission to create a new student profile for a new prospect where possible duplicates have been identified. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to.
-
If your institution selected Yes for Enforce Disbursement Batch Integrity when it configured Financial Aid, select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the option when they manually create batches for approving disbursements (Processes > Financial Aid > Approve Disbursements to Pay).
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to change the Status column on the Override COD Originations page (Processes > Financial Aid > Override COD Originations).
-
Select the check box to permit users to override the "Include unearned Title IV aid due from student" option for individual students. This allows users to exclude the unearned Title IV aid due from the student in the scheduled refunds from the institution within each refund calculation. This option is editable when you enable "Include unearned Title IV aid due from student".
-
Indicates the term allows students to make payments at the end of the billing cycle.
-
Select Yes if you want to use Anthology Student to export earning lines. Once exported, they can be imported to your payroll system for payroll processing.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to student's placement to automatically change to the defined status even if the student is currently in a system status of Placed.
-
Select this check box if you want the student's placement to automatically change to the defined status even if the student is currently in a system status of Placed. When you select this check box, the "Placement Status" and "Override Placed Status" fields are enabled.
-
Indicates preregistration is allowed. Preregistration Start Date and Time fields are enabled only if you select the Allow Preregistration check box.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override prerequisite and corequisite course requirements when processing a single student drop or unregister from a course which is a prerequisite or corequisite to another course on their Student Courses page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
Select this option if you want the staff member to be able to override any course requirement rules (prerequisites, corequisites or antirequisites) and proceed to register students for courses.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override prerequisite and corequisite course requirements when processing a single student registration in a course for which there are other courses required as prerequisites or corequisites. It also gives a staff member permission to override the maximum course attempts rule when registering a student on their Student Courses page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
Select the check box if you want to allow re-import of the CommonLine response file.
-
Select the check box to allow the institution to create a refund calculation for a student who is in re-entry status. A use case for this scenario is when a student dropped but the institution did not have a chance to perform refund calculation before the student re-entered. When “Allow Refund Calculation for reentry system statuses” is not selected, for a student in re-entry status, the + New button is disabled on the Student profile > Student Accounts > Refund Calculation tile. When “Allow Refund Calculation for reentry system statuses” is selected for a campus, the + New button is enabled so that you can add a new refund calculation for the student.
-
Indicates the program version allows outside registration. If this option is enabled, the student can see a list of all courses available for the term. An audit entry is made every time the student registers for a course, even if the course is included in the student's present schedule.
-
Select Yes to enable the new Registration Relationships feature and user interface in the Student Web App. If you enable this feature, registration will be disabled in Legacy for: - Student course registration - Batch registration
-
Select the check box if you want the staff member to view, print, and export social security numbers (SSNs) for all reports from the Reports tile and when they export lists that contain columns with the social security number. The social security number will be a selectable option from the Student ID to Print drop-down list on the Report Selection Information page, will appear on the selected report, and will be available for export. This feature applies to custom reports that use Anthology Student stored procedures. If the SSN is a specified field on the report and the staff member or staff group does not have permission, the phrase "SSN Blocked" is printed on the report instead of the social security number. The SSN is also not displayed for export.
-
Select Yes if you want to be able to select the activity when you configure policy lines in load validation policies. Otherwise, select No. For example, if you have parents and children, you might want to have the children selectable, but not the parent.
-
Select Yes to allow previous permanent out enrollments to be linked to subsequent enrollments for SAP calculations and link enrollments using the Enrollment Wizard and the Re-Entry Wizard, as long as the user is also configured as a member of the Staff Group AD - SAP Linked Enrollment. Select No to link only enrollments from the Enrollment folder.
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to exclude specific academic years and payment periods from being adjusted during or as a result of Student Pace Evaluation (SPE). (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile.)
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether stipends are allowed.
-
Allows students to register online for this term.
-
Select the option to allow associate employer with campuses outside of the assigned campus group.
-
If a script can be run multiple times, the value is this field is set to 'true'. If a script can be run only once, 'Allow To Run' is set to 'false', and the Execute Script button is disabled.
-
Select whether to display the Transaction Due Date field while posting charges by campus level. By default the option is disabled. This option is also used to determine whether a due date will be calculated and populated for debit transactions when posted.
-
Select Yes to enable the More > Reverse Transfer option on the Enrollment page. Staff members with permission can use the option to reverse an enrollment transfer.
-
Select this option to allow transfers to be queued for batch processing.
-
Select this check box to reverse a particular status change. When you select this check box, the Number of Days Allowed field is enabled.
-
Indicates the student is allowed to unregister from the course in the Student Portal, The student can remove a class from their schedule if it is still within the timeframe that changes are allowed without penalty. The configured Unregister End Date determines the timeframe. If an Unregister End Date is configured for the parent term, it should also be configured for the child term in which a course is registered. The Allow Unregister should be selected for both the parent and child terms.
-
Select the check box to allow the "All Transaction" evaluation for the time period being evaluated and to validate if there are up to $200 of unsatisfied Title IV charges in the prior period that have not been satisfied before applying the Title IV funds to the current period calculations. This option is available for Time Period Evaluation calculations.
-
Select this option if you want to prevent students with an imported ISIR for the 2021-22 award year with a verification category of V1 from being added to a hold group. Upon ISIR import, the verification status will be set to "E - Selected, Qualified Exclusion". The verification status of "S" is reported in Pell origination and disbursement records of the COD Common Record for the 2021-2022 award year when a student's system verification status is set to “E”.
-
Select Yes if you want staff members to be able to change their own passwords. If you select Yes, Anthology Student displays an option to change their password when they select their user ID in the command bar. If you select No, the option is not displayed.
-
Indicates if you want the user to be able to provide more information related to the response you have provided.
-
Select the check box to give staff members who are Career Services Advisors permission to associate an employer with campuses outside of their assigned campus group. If selected and the staff member is assigned as a Career Services Advisor, the staff member can edit existing employers and associate them with campuses outside their assigned campus group.
-
Select this check box if you want the staff member to be able to use the Cancel Class Section option on the class scheduling page.
-
Select the specialized permission if you want the staff member to be able to use the Clear Term Waitlists option from the More menu on the Class Schedules tab on the Class Scheduling page. The option clears term waitlists before the next term begins. It also gives the staff member permission to use the Clear Waitlist button on the Waitlist tab on the Class Scheduling page. The button clears all waitlists from the scheduled classes grid for a specific term.
-
If you selected the Allow Access to Global Student Search check box, you can then select this check box to specify that staff members can customize the Search results page displayed using the search in the command bar. The default is Yes.
-
If you selected the Allow Access to Global Student Search check box, you can then select this check box to specify that staff members can customize the Search results page displayed using the search in the command bar. The default is No.
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to edit refund calculations that have been configured with the Manual Calculation check box selected. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Student Accounts > select the Refund Calculations tile.) When a staff member has permission to edit, the fields that can be edited have a white background and the columns that can be edited have a green background. For example, Time in Period and Period Base. If a staff member does not have permission, the fields are read-only. The setting does not change permissions a staff member has for refund calculations that do not have the Manual Calculation check box selected.
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to edit the primary contact for placement employers.
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to edit the comment fields on student statements, third part invoices, or subsidiary statements (Processes > Student Accounts > select the option for the statement or invoice you want to print).
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to edit the Job Type field in the placement record for the student on the Placements & Internships page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Career Services > select the Placements & Internships tile.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to allow the staff member to fulfill or undo fulfill requirements on their Degree Progress Audit (DPA) page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Degree Progress Audit tile.)
-
Select the check box to give the staff member permission to modify the course section fee schedule during registration. Select the Class Scheduling tile, filter for a term, course, or instructor, and click Apply Filters. Select a section and open it with the hyperlink, and select the Fee Schedule tile.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the holds for students in Academic transcript hold groups.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the Audit Designation Date configured for the term when converting a course from full credit to audit. The staff member can override access to convert a course from full credit to audit after the date has passed.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to reopen a term when it is closed.(Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
When a staff member is creating or editing a class section, select the check box to give them permission to override the comparison Anthology Student does of the values for Course Contact Hours and Scheduled Hours. (Select the Class Scheduling tile.)
-
Select this option to allow a staff member to post exam grades past the cut-off date enforced for grade posting.
-
If your institution selected Global or Campus Based for Enable Duplicate Employer Check when it configured Career Services, select the check box to give the staff member permission to override the check for duplicate employers.
-
Select the check box if you want the FAFSA calculation to prompt you to store the recalculated EFC or SAI value. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to override the value for Incomplete Exp Date when the staff member is posting final grades (Processes > Academic Records > Gradebook).
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the instructor course association.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the instructor course association. When the check box is selected, a Show All Instructors check box will be available on the Schedule page from Class Scheduling. If the staff member selects the Show All Instructors check box, all of the instructors are displayed. If the staff member removes the check, the list contains only the instructors associated with the class section.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to drop a course for a student even after the Last Day to Withdraw date has passed. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile > select a course in the list > Drop button.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override a locked term sequence.
-
Select the check box if you want the staff members to be able to place a student in a room that is over maximum occupancy using the Housing Roommate Matching page (Processes > Student Services > Housing Roommate Matching). When the check box is selected, the staff member will also be able to update a lease if the room is over maximum capacity (Students > select the student name > Student Services > Housing Lease).
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to manually exclude SAP terms for a student from the term sequence calculation during SAP evaluation. The staff member can then skip counting partial SAP terms as a full term sequence (Configuration > Financial Aid > SAP Policies).
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to register a student and assign the student to a group even though the student does not meet the criteria for the registration group. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile > add or select a course in the list > click the Register button.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override a registration hold on their Student Courses page and register students without needing to remove these students from a registration hold group. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile > add or select a course in the list > select the Register button.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override any configured registration locks. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override Registration Relationships conflicts.
-
Your institution can configure the number of days after a payment period ends during which SAP calculations can take place for a campus. Select the check box to give the staff member permission to calculate the SAP status for a student past the end date calculated using the value for Continue calculation days after payment period end configured for the campus. Normally, a staff member is not allowed to perform a manual SAP calculation after that period. If this check box is selected, the staff member can perform a SAP calculation beyond the regular cutoff date. (Select the Processes tile > expand Financial Aid > select SAP Calculation.)
-
Select the check box to give staff members permission to override the SAP status for a student during the SAP calculation process. (Select the Processes tile > expand Financial Aid > select SAP Calculation.) In addition, the staff member may override a SAP status that had been set to not be recalculated.
-
Your institution can configure the number of days after a term ends during which SAP calculations can take place for a campus. Select the check box to give the staff member permission to calculate the SAP status for a student past the end date calculated using the value for Continue calculation days after term end configured for the campus. Normally, a staff member is not allowed to perform a manual SAP calculation after that period. If this check box is selected, the staff member can perform a SAP calculation beyond the regular cutoff date. (Select the Processes tile > expand Financial Aid > select SAP Calculation.)
-
If the Allow courses to be exempt from progression check box was selected when Financial Aid was configured for the system, select the check box to give a staff member permission to use the master override selection on the student courses which allows the course to complete a requirement (Students > select the student name > Academic Records > Student Courses tile > select a course in the list > More button > View Course Progression). Use this feature in non-term configurations when a course is taken that is not part of the student course list (program version course list). This way allows the course to be an elective. Or to manually correct the course usage when the system is missing information.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override the Number of Days for Status Changes configured for the campus and change the effective date for a status change for a student. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Status History tile.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override transfer options your institution configured for Academic Records for the campus (Settings > System > Campuses > select the name of a campus or click the New button, specify the required information and save the campus > Academic Records). If selected, staff members can change the defaults when they transfer a student. (Students > select the student name > Academic Records > Enrollments > highlight a record > More > Transfer).
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to override and approve transfer credits for a student on their Transfer credits page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Transfer Credits tile.)
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to place a student in a room based on individual lease dates when they are using the Housing Roommate Matching page (Processes > Student Services > Housing Roommate Matching).
-
Select this option if you want to allow a staff member to reallocate the exam center for a student after exam hall ticket has been generated.
-
Select the check box if you want to allow reassigning financial aid from one academic year to another.
-
Select this option to allow the staff member to reassign for a student. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to rebuild term relationships on the Enrollment page for the student. Use the rebuild Term Summary Relationships by click the Rebuild Relationships button on the Enrollment form. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Enrollments tile.) Before selecting this option for staff members, you should be familiar with how your institution configures terms, modifying term relationships, and satisfactory academic progress (SAP) and SAP calculations.
-
This option has not been implemented yet.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member the permission to waive retake fees. When a staff member is authorized to waive a retake fee and attempts to register a retake course, a message is displayed asking whether to charge a retake fee. The response to this message determines whether a retake fee should be charged. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Student Courses tile.)
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to waive or undo a waive on course requirements on the Degree Progress Audit (DPA) for a student. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Degree Progress Audit tile.)
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can view Hall Ticket in Service Bot.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can view Hall Ticket on Portal.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can view Exam Schedule in Service Bot.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether student can view Exam Schedule on Portal.
-
Select the check box to enable students to be placed on a waitlist. The Waitlist Maximum Seats field is enabled only if you select the Allow Waitlist check box.
-
Select the check box to give a staff member permission to specify a maximum number of waitlist seats that exceeds the maximum class seats when they are configuring attendance rules and waitlist options. (Select the Class Scheduling tile > select the course in the Class Schedule list > select the Attendance Rules & Waitlist/Auto Add Class Section tile.)
-
Select this check box to allow a waitlist/reservations for selected classes.
-
Select this option to enable 0.00 tuition adjustments to be posted. Allow Zero Adjustment is enabled only when Manual Calculation is selected. By default, Allow Zero Adjustment is disabled.
-
Select the check box to allow the system to adjust a packaged academic year (AY) and loan period (LP) when Course work to reduce AY/LPs is enabled. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Indicates whether or not a conflict was overridden when the student was registered individually or in batch. For example, if a requisite rule had Allow configured for Allow/Deny Registration and the prerequisites or corequisites were overridden, the column displays Allow. If a requisite rule had Deny configured for Allow/Deny registration and an anti-requisite was overridden, the column displays Deny. By default, the column is hidden.
-
Indicates the program version allows/denies outside registration. If this option is enabled/disabled, the student can/cannot see a list of all courses available for the term.
-
Allow/Deny Registration indicates a student is allowed/denied registration for the class section when the registration relationship conditions are met. If you have permission, you can override the conditions that are not met. This field is set to read-only once you select and click one of the Save buttons. The field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of Allow/Deny registration.
-
Allow Registration indicates a student is allowed to complete registration for a course when the prerequisites and/or corequisites are met. If you have permission, you can override prerequisites and corequisites that are not met. For this release, the field is set to Allow Registration and it is display only. Once you select the type of requisite and select one of the Save buttons, the field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of requisite.
-
Allow Registration indicates a student is allowed to complete registration for a course when the prerequisites and/or corequisites are met. Deny Registration denies registration when they are met. For example, if the anti-requisite specifies MAT120 or MAT125 with a minimum required GPA of 2.0, prevents a student from registering for MAT101 if the student completed MAT120 or MAT125 with a GPA of 2.0 or higher. If you have permission, you can override prerequisites, corequisites, and anti-requisites. Once you select the type of requisite and click one of the Save buttons, the field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of requisite.
-
Select to specify that applications can be made before the student is registered.
-
Total amount of outstanding education loan debt for alternative loan borrower prior to this application.
-
Name of the student's alumni advisor.
-
Select this option for transaction codes such as tuition, fees, and room and board as Title IV disbursement may be used by the institution without obtaining a waiver from the student or parent. Clear this option for transaction codes, such as books/supplies since a waiver must be obtained before Title IV disbursements may be used to pay these types of charges.
-
Indicates whether or not the REG bill code will be charged to students who have school statuses of N or W. This option will work only if the REG bill code is configured as part of the rate schedule or configured in the students' fees folders.
-
Select the check box to designate which ledger card should be posted with a registration billing, that is, the ledger card at the campus at which the student is enrolled (recommended option) or the ledger card at the campus at which a course is offered. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select Yes or No in the "Always Update Last Earn Date" field. When set to Yes, the system will update the Last Earn Date for the campus when there's no revenue detail data at all for the campus for the revenue period being recognized. When set to No (default), the system will not update the Last Earn Date for the campus when there's no revenue detail data at all for the campus for the revenue period being recognized. The "Always Update Last Earn Date" option will be audited as part of the campus audit.
-
Specifies the revenue that will be amortized over all units of earnings in the revenue period. If you select this option, Anthology Student disables the Earn in month after end of period option under Half-Month Allocation Rule.
-
The amount in dollars.
-
The reported amount in dollars. Negative amounts (refunds) are enclosed in parentheses ().
-
The amount the faculty member should be paid for the pay period. Anthology Student calculates the Amount by multiplying the value in the Quantity column by the value in the Earning Rate column. For example, if the Quantity is 1.5 and the Earning Rate is 100, the Value is 150.
-
The auto charge amount.
-
The amount in dollars. For some awards, a default amount is set. For example, for a Pell grant, the amount is calculated by COD from the student's FAFSA.
-
The amount in dollars for the transaction.
-
Indicates the amount in dollars. This field is editable.
-
The amount in the system defined using the local currency.
-
The amount that was sent to COD.
-
The amount of the disbursement. If you are adding disbursements using Anthology Student, the total of the amounts should equal the amount of the award.
-
The amount of the earnings detail record.
-
The amount Anthology Student calculated by dividing the assigned value for the load type by the number of pay periods. For example, if the assigned value for the load type is 15 and there are 10 pay periods, the amount is 1.5.
-
The revenue amount. It is acceptable to post with a zero amount to adjust the units.
-
Specifies the amount. To add, transfer, or carry an amount forward, specify a positive amount. To decrease, transfer, or carry an amount back, specify a negative number.
-
The amount of the statement.
-
The amount to be paid in a specific currency. Your institution configures the number of decimal places you can specify for amounts.
-
The amount in dollars. The amount entered should be greater than zero.
-
The amount in charge/adjustment amount posted for the students.
-
The amount of charge/adjustment to be posted.
-
The batch amount.
-
The disbursement amount.
-
The dollar amount range of the receipt. Leave blank to retrieve receipts of all amounts.
-
The amount for the charge.
-
The refunded amount for the subsidiary.
-
The adjustment amount. You can post with a zero amount to adjust the units.
-
The refund amount.
-
The refund amount that has been scheduled.
-
The transaction amount.
-
The individual stipend amount.
-
The amount of the statement.
-
The amount for the charge or payment.
-
The amount applied to be credited.
-
Indicates the amount of the transaction that has been applied.
-
The amount of that has been applied for the debit transaction.
-
The amount approved by the FA department.
-
Amount in the batch approved for posting.
-
The amount that has been approved.
-
The amount authorized for the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
The amount of a canceled award (if any).
-
The amount you want certified with CommonLine. The field is enabled if the loan has not been sent. You can edit the amount certified only if the CommonLine Application Status is null, R, N, or D. If you are adding a new loan, the default amount is the maximum amount the student is eligible to receive for this fund source. This is the amount for the method you selected in the Packaging Method list. The amount entered here cannot be less than the loan amount or greater than the maximum amount from the packaging method. The borrower is eligible to receive the loan amount specified by the school . The value does not always match the amount of the loan.
-
The date the amount was certified with CommonLine.
-
Displays the date received from COD.
-
Total amount deferred for the earnings summary record.
-
Indicates the remaining payment from the transaction amount that is available to be applied.
-
The amount from the fund source being packaged.
-
Amount paid.
-
Enter amount of STRF fee to charge the student per $1,000.00 of institutional charges.
-
The percentage of tuition to charge the student.
-
Enter amount of STRF fee to charge the student per 1000.00 The percentage of tuition to charged to the student for the term.
-
The stipend amount scheduled for disbursement with each recurrence in the schedule.
-
The award amount that was posted.
-
The amount of payment received.
-
The refunded amount.
-
The total amount of funds you are requesting.
-
The amount returned.
-
The stipend amount scheduled for disbursement.
-
The amount scheduled to be refunded.
-
The refund amount scheduled for disbursement.
-
The amount still expected from the fund source. It equals the Gross Award Amt minus the Gross Amount Disbursed minus the Amount Canceled.
-
Specify the overload amount amount to bank. Once an assigned load is validated and split between an onload and overload, the banking action is available for the overload portion of the assignment. The assignment may have been validated from the Load Validations batch process but banking the load is accomplished only from the Assignment Manager.
-
The amount that will be posted as a tuition discount for the discount policy. This field is editable.
-
The difference between the amounts in the Calculated Discount and Previous Discount. Discount To Post will be zero when the course charge is completely used for tuition discounts. You can edit this column.
-
Total amount of the funds being transferred.
-
Select the condition for the amount in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the amount records between 1 and 5 only.
-
The amount in doallars. The Amount field is disabled when you select the following Mode values: "Pell eligible but no Pell awarded", "COA limited Pell awards", "Award Year COA close to Max Pell", or "Award Year COA close to calculated Annual Scheduled Amount".
-
The discount amount for each student.
-
The statement amount.
-
The amount in dollars. This is an editable field.
-
The Annual Pell Award is the Scheduled Pell Award adjusted for enrollment intensity for awards year 2024-25 and later. The Scheduled Pell Award is the maximum amount a student can receive during the award year if the student attends full-time for a full academic year. The value indicates either the Max Pell, Min Pell, or Temporary Scheduled Award (TSA) amount based on the ISIR flags. Initial awarding will always package to a default of 100% enrollment intensity. For more details, see "Background for Pell Grants".
-
Specifies the answer to the question. Anthology Student uses the answer with the operator to determine the action and whether or not to schedule any selected task.
-
The alphanumeric code of the Answer Booklet.
-
Specified the answer to the selected question.
-
Indicates the answer type for the selected question. The available values for answer type are - Multiple Answer Multiple Select, Multiple Answer Single Select, Text, True/False, Yes/No.
-
The date when the student is expected to complete the program.
-
The total amount of loan requested by a borrower when completing a PLUS Loan Application.
-
The date when the application was submitted.
-
Type of appeal raised on grades.
-
Indicates whether you want to append or replace students in an existing student group. The options are Append and Replace.
-
The first day the job policy association is applicable from or in use. The default value is the current date. In edit mode, this field is not editable.
-
The last date that the job policy association is applicable or will be in use. This field is not editable. The value depends on the jobs effective to date.
-
The status and program to which the task applies. The list is only displayed if the student has a Anthology Student Status Category of Applicant Processing (such as Application Received or Pending Applicant).
-
Descriptive text added at the bottom of the institution's Shopping Sheet for applicants or enrolled students.
-
Select the color code required for applicant processing category.
-
The student status from Portal. If the status you selected for Student Status under Proposed Changes to Student has a status category of enrollment, then the status here must also have a status category of enrollment for Anthology Student to process the applicant.
-
Types of applicants configured for your institution.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the type of application you select in the Value list is selected or changed on the application. The values in the Values list are the types configured by your institution.
-
The status and program to which the task applies. The list is only displayed if the student has a Anthology Student Status Category of Applicant Processing and Active or Enrolled (such as Application Received and Future Start).
-
Displays only the applications which have at least one question configured by your institution. Students use these applications during the admission process.
-
Displays the application which the students will use during the admission process. They are configured by your institution.
-
Select the housing application. When you select a campus, the active application associated with the campus is automatically populated in this field. If you want to run the match for an inactive housing application associated with the campus, select the inactive application from the drop-down list.
-
The date when the application was acknowledged by the lender.
-
The date when the PLUS application was completed by the borrower.
-
The introduction of the FTI-SAIG Mailbox and FT Numbers for 2024-25 and later required a new Campus EDE path to import ISIR files. The system uses the Application Data EDE Path (FT) path for the import of ISIR Files for award years 2024-25 and later.
-
Select an option for the Application Data Export Selection. The options are: - All Applications in the Database - Based on the User's Campus List - Only for Selected School Id - For Selected School Id and User's Campus List
-
The date when the application was processed.
-
Select the starting date to filter a range for Applications received within a time period.
-
Select the end date to filter a range for Applications received within a time period.
-
The end time of submitting the application.
-
The first day the job policy association is applicable from or in use.
-
Unique identifier that is returned to institutions on PLUS Application Acknowledgments.
-
Indicates the key required for API integration. This field is disabled. Each system-generated application key is associated with a system-generated staff member (for example, StudentApiUser@anthology.local).
-
Unique identifier for an application.
-
The processing status of the application for CommonLine.
-
The application program version.
-
Displays the status of the application from Portal. The values are All Stages, Complete 999, or In Progress (Step 1-8).
-
Select an option for application received for which you want to generate the report.
-
The date when the application was received.
-
A score assigned to an application's strength based on the applicant's eligibility.
-
Enter the date the application was sent to the lender.
-
The date when the application was sent to the lender.
-
The start time of the application period.
-
The status of the application submitted by the employer.
-
The date of the application submission.
-
The type of application. The application types are configured by your organization.
-
Select the housing application.
-
The payment or credit amount applied to the charges.
-
Specifies the Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) factor value associated with an item. This field is displayed only when the Non-Teaching Type selected belongs to a Non-Teaching Group that is associated with an FTE.
-
The payment or credit amount applied to the charges.
-
Indicates the transaction number of the credit transaction that was applied to the debit transaction. This field is populated for debit transactions only.
-
Courses that are used to satisfy the elective requirement. Courses can be automatically applied or manually applied. In edit mode, automatically applied courses are not linked but manually applied courses are linked.
-
Displays a list of courses for your authorized campuses so that you can select the courses you want to apply the rule to. You cannot select a course that is specified in the rule.
-
The "Applied from Bank" column indicates Yes if the assignment was created from the bank (see Processes > Faculty Workload > Load Banks) and No if the assignment was not created from the bank. The column is hidden by default. If you try to reset the validation status and re-validate the load, the following message appears: "This assignment was created from the bank, it cannot be reset here. If you wish to edit the loads, please delete the assignment and recreate it with the edited loads from the bank."
-
Specifies the Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) factor applied to an associated item. This field is displayed only when the selected course belongs to a Course Group that is associated with an FTE.
-
Specifies the Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) factor value associated with an item. This field is displayed only when the Non-Teaching Type selected belongs to a Non-Teaching Group that is associated with an FTE.
-
Indicates the multiple disbursement policies that are applied to a campus. These policies are applied in order. The policy on the top has greater priority than the following policies.
-
Indicates the document is applied to the program or the program version. If the document is applied to the program, you cannot select, add, or remove the document.
-
Indicates the course is applied to the program version and area of study.
-
Indicates whether the test is applied to the program or the program version.
-
Indicates what the requirement rule is applied to. For example, it can be applied to the area of study or the catalog category for the area of study.
-
Displays the number of credits or hours applied towards fulfillment. For example, if the student did not meet the minimum GPA configured for a completed course, the column contains 0 and it displays Unfulfilled.
-
Indicates the transaction number of the debit transaction that the credit transaction was applied to. This field is populated for credit transactions only.
-
Indicates that the CIP code is applied to the program or the program version.
-
The amount that will be applied against payments or charges.
-
Indicates the name of the program or area of study that the category applies to.
-
The type of event that the task applies to.
-
Select the check box to apply a particular Notification of Change (NOC) code.
-
You can enable this button when 'Campus' and 'Override Campus amount by Program Version' are selected and an amount is specified for a program with multiple program versions.
-
Staff members can only view records of colleges linked to their own department. Additional, program versions should also be selected to decentralize access to these records.
-
Indicates the effective date for Apply Credits Source Order configuration so that transactions earlier than the effective date will not be affected. This field is only populated when Allow Credit Source Order option is set to Yes.
-
Allows a staff member to only view records that are linked to their department.
-
Select this option whether or not you want to apply directly to the employer.
-
You can enable this button when 'Campus' and 'Override Campus amount by Program Version' are selected and an amount is specified for a program with multiple program versions. The available events are - 'Student Payment', 'Enrollment Payment', 'New Enrollment', 'First Enrollment Only', 'Require Housing', and 'Returned Check Fee.'
-
You can assign priority levels in the hierarchy to indicate how the payment must be applied to a transaction code or to the remaining balance forward. For example, if you want to specify the hierarchy for tuition, books, and administrative fees, set the Apply Order of Transaction Code as Tuition - 1, Books - 2, Administrative Fees 3.
-
Assign the priority levels in the hierarchy to indicate how the credit should be applied to a transaction code or to the remaining balance forward. Example: To set up the hierarchy for the credit to pay for Transaction Codes for Tuition first, Books second, and Administration Fees third, and the remainder to be on the basis of Balance Forward, you would set the Apply Order of Transaction Code for Tuition = 1, Books = 2, Administration Fee = 3, and Balance Forward = 4.
-
If you selected Cash or Other Outside Resources in the Type list and Post Interest Charges for Payments in the Interest Charges list, select the option to specify payments are applied to the interest before the principal.
-
Select this check box if you want to manually apply overload for the assignment. This check box is displayed based on the selection of Assignment Type.
-
Staff members can only see records of students that belong to their own department.
-
Applies the payment to a specific charge or multiple charges on the student ledger card.
-
Specify whether you want the system to apply a payment to outstanding charges. Select No if you can elect to apply a payment at the time of the transaction. By default, the value is set to Yes.
-
Enabled only if you select Post Directly to Ledger Card. You can apply the specified refund amount to various charges associated with the student.
-
Select this check box to apply requirement rules to courses available for self-service registration.
-
Select your institution's official document containing the student approval to apply Title IV funds to Other Charges in the current year evaluation. Title IV funds regulations have made it mandatory to seek student authorization before applying Title IV funds to institutional charges except tuition, fees, room, and board. If the Student Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with an Approved status, the system applies Title IV Funds to Other Charges that are configured to require the waiver.
-
Select your institution's official document containing the parental approval to apply Title IV funds to Other Charges in the current year evaluation. This document is required in case the Title IV fund sources packaged for the student include a PLUS fund. If the Parent Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with an Approved status, the system applies Title IV Funds to Other Charges configured to require the waiver.
-
Select your institution's official document containing the student approval to allow up to $200 of current year funds to pay prior year charges which is applicable to Credit Balance Evaluation Types: FSA Title IV (only) Evaluation, all configurations where Include Title IV Evaluation is selected. If the Student Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with an Approved status, the system includes Other Charges that have occurred in a prior year in the calculation to determine if there is a prior year debit balance up to $200. The waiver allows Student level Title IV disbursements to pay Other charges that are configured to require the waiver.
-
Select your institution's official document containing the parental approval to allow up to $200 of current year funds to pay prior year charges which is applicable to Credit Balance Evaluation Types: FSA Title IV (only) Evaluation, all configurations where Include Title IV Evaluation is selected. If the Parent Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with an Approved status, the system includes Other Charges that have occurred in a prior year in the calculation to determine if there is a prior year debit balance up to $200. The waiver allows Parent Loan Title IV disbursements to pay Other charges that are configured to require the waiver.
-
Select one of the following options: Transaction Code - Indicates that the payment apply hierarchy is configured on the basis of transaction codes. Balance Forward - Indicates that the payment apply hierarchy is configured on the basis of the remaining balance forward.
-
Indicates what the requirement rule applies to. There are options for applying it to the area of study, category level of a catalog for an area of study, or category level of a catalog for an elective or substitution pool for an area of study. The options that are displayed will depend on how your institution configured advanced features.
-
Select one of the following options: • Transaction Code - Select this option to set up the payment apply hierarchy on the basis of transaction codes. • Balance Forward - Select this option to set up the payment apply hierarchy on the basis of the remaining balance forward.
-
Indicates what the requirement rule applies to. There are options for applying it to the program version, category level of a catalog for a program version, or category level of a catalog for an elective or substitution pool for a program version. The options that are displayed will depend on how your institution configured advanced features.
-
Indicates the level to which the requirement rule will be applied to. The levels are: 1. Program 2. Program Version 3. Area of Study 4. Program Version - Catalog/Category 5. Area of Study- Catalog/Category 6. Program Version- Catalog/Category - Substitution Pool 7. Area of Study - Catalog/Category - Substitution Pool 8. Program Version - Catalog/Category - Elective Pool 9. Area of Study - Catalog/Category - Elective Pool
-
Indicates the comments added during while adding the approval status. This is a mandatory field.
-
Specifies the name of the set of disbursement approval criteria that you want Anthology Student to use to approve disbursements for the fund source. The disbursement approval criteria in the list are configured by your institution.
-
The date when the internship application for CPT or OPT was approved.
-
The approval status for the disbursement. If it is approved, it displays Approved. If it was not approved, it displays either View or Failed. Click the link to display the reason why it was not approved. For View, review the information at the top of the dialog. For Failed, review the reasons under DAC Failure Reasons. If there are missing documents, the number of documents is shown. Click the 'i' icon next to the number to display the names of the documents. If the disbursement approval criteria are not configured to check for missing documents, it displays the number of award year specific documents that are not approved, but does not prevent the disbursement from being approved. If the disbursement approval criteria are configured to check for missing documents and some are missing, it will not be approved.
-
Specifies one or more approval statuses that the approver can select. Approval statuses are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the status of approval. The options are Submitted, Approved, Rejected, and On-Hold. This is a mandatory field.
-
Indicates the approval status of the disbursement.
-
Select the check box to prevent users from saving the students' award status to Approved when their verification status is Selected, Not Verified. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Select the check box to approve disbursement batches for posting when payment file import exceptions exist.
-
When selected, any document selected with this status is also approved by your institution.
-
Select the check box to indicate whether the aid status to be included is Approved (recommended option).
-
Indicates whether the selected document selected is approved by your institution.
-
Select the Approved check box to indicate that the document is in an approved status when it is associated with the Code and Description entered above, otherwise clear the check box.
-
The approved disbursement amount.
-
The approved amount.
-
The approval indicator, whether Yes or No.
-
Indicates whether or not the servicer approved the disbursement. Indicates whether or not the disbursement was approved. No indicates that it has an exception that must be resolved. Yes indicates the disbursement has been approved and is ready to post.
-
Specifies whether you want Approved aid status to be included when evaluating student’s funding for the bills.
-
Select the check box to specify that the amount packaged for the student must have a status of Approved and must be greater than or equal to their cost of attendance (COA) for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
Select the check box to specify that the amount packaged for the student must have a status of Approved and must be greater than or equal to their institutional charges for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
The amount of approved awards that will come from this Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
The date when the institution accepted the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student. If you are adding or assigning the document and you select a status of Approved, the date approved is automatically set to the current date.
-
The approved financial aid disbursements.
-
Number of approved disbursements in the batch.
-
The date when the application was approved.
-
Specifies whether or not the batch has been approved so that it can be posted for the students by Student Accounts. Yes indicates it is approved to post. No indicates it has not been approved to post.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include the approved aid status.
-
Indicates whether or not the student is approved.
-
The approver role assigned to staff that can approve, reject, or place applications on hold.
-
Annual Percentage Yield (APY) interest rate to be provided in the Truth in Lending documentation. This value will be used to calculate the interest for the payments generated; the information from this field will be used as a selection to format the Cash Promissory Note.
-
Select the condition you want for AR Balance output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (300 ; 400) in the respective value field, the report displays the AR Balance value between 300 and 400 only.
-
Currently, the Archived column displays the value "No" for all message transfers because there is no concept of archiving in Mailbox Manager. Instead, there is a clean-up process that removes successfully transferred files from storage after a configured time (usually after 2 months).
-
A Yes in the column indicates that the student has archived attendance for the program version displayed in the Program Versions list.
-
Indicates the area of interest. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The various areas such as Major, Minor, or Concentration that the students have taken to complete their degree. The areas of study are configured by your institution.
-
The various areas such as Major, Minor, or Concentration that the students have taken to complete their degree. The areas of study are configured by your institution.
-
Select Area of Study Required to specify that students cannot graduate from the program version unless an area of study is declared. Select None to specify that students can graduate from the program version without declaring an area of study. Select Undeclared to specify that students are not required to declare an area of study.
-
The code specified for the area of study. Area of Study is configured by your institution.
-
The code for the area of study.
-
The name of the area of study. Areas of study are configured by your institution.
-
Specifies the maximum number of credits approved for area of study transfer.
-
The type of area of study (such as major, minor, or concentration).
-
The areas of study you are applying the COA to - listed by Name and Code.
-
Specifies that you want the report to contain data up to this date.
-
The method you want Anthology Student to use for the assessment. The values are Average of All, Best of Lessons, Weighted Average.
-
When selected, gives the staff member permission to add the type of document or list of documents to the Document list for a student and specify the status and dates (if applicable).
-
When selected, the staff member can assign tasks for the tasks templates with Assign permission in the Task Templates grid to the staff members for the group. For a staff member to be assigned a task for the task template, they must also have a minimum of read permission for the task template in their policy.
-
When selected staff members can assign tasks to themselves and any staff members in staff groups with Assign permission selected in the Staff Groups grid. The staff member and staff members in the group must also have a minimum of Read permission for the task template in their policy.
-
Select this option whether or not you want to assign an advisor to the group. If an advisor has already been assigned to any of the students in this group, this procedure overwrites the existing advisor assignment.
-
Specifies who the task is assigned to. If you select Student, the task is assigned to the student. If you select Staff Member, you must select the staff member. If you select Advisor Group, you must select the name of the group. For information about how Anthology Student determines the advisor to select, see the Background for Predefined Staff Groups.
-
Indicates whether the book is assigned for the class section.
-
The amount assigned. If Allow Override for the load type is No, the value will be the default value configured for the load type and cannot be changed.
-
Specifies the Assigned FTE (Full-Time Equivalency) value. Anthology Student multiplies the FTE Factor and Assigned values and displays the Assigned FTE value for that Load.
-
Specifies the Assigned FTE (Full-Time Equivalency) value for each existing assignment. This is accurately calculated based on the assignment details and policy limits.
-
The date when the application was assigned to the staff member
-
The assigned representative for the student.
-
Select a staff member associated with the trigger task.
-
The person assigned or sent the item task (such as task, document, or message). For a new task, the default is your user ID. If you have permission in the policy, the names of other staff members are displayed.
-
The staff member the item is assigned to.
-
The person assigned to the activity.
-
Filters the list by the person assigned to the task. By default, it displays your user ID. If you have permission in the policy, you can select the names of other staff members. If you select the search icon and are using the Select Assigned To dialog to select staff members, you can select a maximum of 50 staff members. To select all staff members, use the delete icon (X) or search icon to remove the existing staff members. Once you remove all the staff members, All Staff is displayed in the field. If needed, you can filter the list using the column filters after you select Apply Filter.
-
Indicates the amount assigned. If Allow Override for the load type is set to No, the value will be the default value configured for the load type and it cannot be changed. In this case the contribution percentage is enabled and assigned value is equal to the contribution percentage of default load value. If Allow Override for the load type is set to Yes, the assigned value, rate, earning code is editable. In this case the contribution percentage is disabled and assigned value is equal to the remaining value. However, you can edit the value.
-
Specifies the Assigned value for each existing assignment.
-
Select Yes if you want the activity type to be selectable when staff members configure course and class load type details and their equivalents for non-teaching activities (non-teaching types and non-teaching activities). Otherwise, select No. For example, if you have parents and children, you might want to have the children selectable, but not the parent.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the assignment item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
Indicates the reason for assignment exceptions only if the assignment configuration is missing. For example, if the Rate is not defined for the Assignment Type in the compensation structure.
-
A unique identifier of the Assignment.
-
How the exception was assigned.
-
The assignment method currently configured for the Campus (Advisor, Staff Group, Staff Member).
-
Advisor, Staff Group, or Staff Member.
-
Who the job is assigned to (Staff Group or Staff Member).
-
Select whether a Staff Group or Staff Member should be notified.
-
Triggers that will cause the auto-awarding process to award a stipend.
-
Specifies the onload assignment types used in workload validation and pay generation. They are configured by your institution. Assignment types that were configured with No for Has Payroll field, cannot be selected for compensation plans or added to the payroll information for staff.
-
Specifies the assignment type name associated with the policy line.
-
Indicates the default assignment type associated with this class section. The assignment types are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the default assignment type associated with this course. The assignment types are configured by your institution.
-
Specifies the assignment types used in workload validation and pay generation. They are configured by your institution. For example, an adjunct assignment that is paid or an on-load assignment that does not require payroll. Assignment types that were configured with No for Has Payroll, cannot be selected for compensation plans or added to the payroll information for staff.
-
Specifies the name of the onload assignment type applied to the assignment.
-
Specifies the list of active onload assignment types. They are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the default onload assignment type associated with the non-teaching activity configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the default onload assignment type associated with the non-teaching type configured by your institution.
-
Indicates that the student requires assistance when registering for a course.
-
Specify the dollar amount for assistantships available to graduate students.
-
If you selected Cash, Other Outside Resources, or Scholarship in the Type list, select this option to associate a course with a payment. The courses associated with the payments can be required by third parties or agencies and selecting the option prints the courses on the invoice.
-
Enrollments associated with the selected course.
-
The assigned number for that batch.
-
Placement records associated with the student.
-
You can select one of the following association types: - Non Standard Term: Select this option if FA Academic Calendar 1 is selected in the FA Program Version Setup. This option disables Standard Term lists. - Standard Term: Select this option when configuring scheduled academic years (SAYs). Terms that are configured with these options are used in scheduled academic years.
-
The date when the test or exam was taken by the student.
-
Specify the Athletic Association Code (e.g. NCAA).
-
ID assigned to the student by an athletic association.
-
The current athletic status of the student.
-
Specifies the athletic statuses for which the report is generated.
-
The status of the agreement to serve (ATS) as recorded at COD.
-
Indicates the status of the electronic signature for the agreement to serve (ATS) document associated with this grant.
-
ID of the agreement to serve (ATS) document.
-
Displays confirmation that the agreement to serve (ATS) has been linked to the award.
-
The status of the agreement to serve (ATS) as recorded at COD.
-
When selected, gives the staff member permission to view attached documents. When staff members have the appropriate authorization, they can also upload and clear attachments.
-
This field is cleared by default. When the job is run with this option selected, the paperclip icon is displayed in the left column of the History tab of the Automated Job Management grid. Select the paperclip icon to download the packaging Details and Summary for the awarded student(s) included in the job (either via the Run Now option or the Scheduled Job option). Note: When this field is selected, the Staff Notification for Assignment Method is required. You will not be able to save the job without this being configured. After being downloaded: The Awarding Results Summary file will be displayed as AwardingResultsSummaryTest and the Awarding Results Details file will be displayed as AwardingResultsDetailsTest for any auto-awarding job run in Test Mode regardless of whether the new field is enabled or not. The Awarding Results Summary file will be displayed as AwardingResultsSummaryLive and the Awarding Results Details file will display as AwardingResultsDetailsLive for any auto-awarding job run in Live Mode when the new field is enabled.
-
Select the field to display a list of documents that are automatically added to the task when the task template is selected. The list contains the documents that your institution has configured with Send Out or Send & Return for Document Type.
-
Indicates the credits attempted.
-
This configuration allows you to specify a specific number of attempts to extend the final AY/LP date.
-
Specifies the type of attendance. Available options are Absent, Present, Permitted and Exempted.
-
Specifies the type of attendance. Available options are Absent, Present.
-
Specifies the attendance of the Invigilator
-
The date to view attendance information.
-
The date or date range within which you will post the attendance.
-
Specify the time absent, time present, or units for each student. For example, if your student is absent, you can specify Absent and Anthology Student automatically converts the absence to the number of minutes scheduled for the class. Alternatively, you can specify the number of minutes scheduled for the class. If your student has an excused absence, select Excused to record the absence for the scheduled class time. If your student is tardy in the time absent scenario, specify the number of minutes that the student missed. For example, if the student is 10 minutes late, specify 10. You cannot enter a value greater than the scheduled time for the class.
-
The start date of attendance for the student.
-
The last date of attendance (LDA) used to archive attendance. Any attendance prior to the date was archived.
-
Enter the attendance message. This text box is enabled only if you selected the Allow Custom Message check box. You can also edit the default message and save the modified, custom message of up to 2000 characters. If the check box is not selected, the text box remains populated with the default message.
-
Specifies the minimum percentage of attendance required by each student to justify earned tuition for the student. If you do not use a minimum percentage, enter zero.
-
The start and end date range for posting attendance. These dates must be on or before the Last Earn Date for all campuses included in the request.
-
Indicates whether the attendance is required by an external entity.
-
Select this check box if you want all students enrolled at the campus to be reported to the SSCR (NSLDS). This check box must be selected to report to the SSCR (NSLDS). If you select this check box, this disables the Status Date for Withdrawals and Number of Days to Add to LDA on Unofficial Withdrawal fields. For more information, see the Background for Academic Records for Campuses.
-
Determines how attendance is maintained for the course. The available options are: - Time Absent-All - Time Present Only - Time Present-All - None However, if the course is set up to measure the units completed instead of time, you must select either Time Present Only or None.
-
Specifies the type of attendance. The options are Time Absent – All (default), Time Present - Only, Time Present - All, and None. For any option, you can still enter when a student is present or absent. For additional information about the options, see Details for Attendance Type in this topic.
-
Specify whether the student is attending the graduation ceremony or not.
-
Specifies whether or not the student has attended the exam.
-
If you select Attendance Totals - Payment Period End Date, Anthology Student uses the end of the payment period date to evaluate SAP and counts hours as the sum of the attended and absent totals from the attendance records for the student. It includes hours for courses in progress and assumes that the student is passing the course and hours can be applied. As no final grade is present, the course in progress is not included in the GPA calculation. If you select Attendance Totals - SAP Milestone, Anthology Student uses the end of the SAP milestone date to evaluate SAP and counts hours as the sum of the attended and absent totals from the attendance records for the student. If you select Scheduled Hours, Anthology Student uses the SAP milestone date for SAP evaluation and evaluates when the scheduled hours for the payment period have elapsed.
-
The Attending Pell ID that is used when processing Pell Grants for students who are attending this campus. It is also used on ISIRs.
-
Select the condition you want for the attending Pell ID records in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the attending Pell ID records between 1 and 5 only.
-
Enter the attending Pell ID value.
-
Select the attending Pell ID for which you want to generate the report.
-
The attending Pell ID.
-
Attributes associated with the instructor. Attributes are configured by your institution and associated with the instructor when they are added as a staff member to Anthology Student.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the attributes specified for the course using the Attributes, Skills & Resources tile to the new course.
-
The course attributes that will be associated with the course on the program version level.
-
Attributes defined by the institution that will be associated with the course.
-
The course list attributes.
-
Select the check box to indicate that the rate schedule applies to audit courses. You can set up a flat rate or schedule for the courses taken as an Audit (as is done with a Full Credits course). The rate schedule has an audit form that can be displayed by selecting the Audit button. Any changes to the rate schedule are posted on the audit form where they may be monitored.
-
Indicates whether the selected letter grade is configured as an audit grade (for audit courses).
-
The fees for the audit course.
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to audit the changes made during course registration.
-
The deadline based on the term associated with the course. You cannot register a student for a course as an Audit after the specified date.
-
An audit grade associates the grade letter only with the audit courses.
-
Indicates the audit period.
-
Select the audit start and end period for which you want to generate the report.
-
The reason to enable the student to drop the course load. The options are Illness or medical condition, Improper course level placement, Initial difficulty with reading requirements, Initial difficulty with the english language, Special student relief employment, To complete course of study in current term, and Unfamiliarity with american teaching methods.
-
The number to authorize or decline the deposit.
-
Specify the server authentication. The options are SQL and Windows.
-
Displays the method used to authenticate users. For information about the modes or to configure the mode, search for "Authentication Modes" in this help system.
-
Name of the book authors. Use last name of first author to make search easy.
-
The authorization number for the credit card. This option is displayed if you select Payment Method as Credit Card.
-
Specify the authorization amount to be used to authorize the credit card when adding a new credit card. This amount can be changed based on the requirements of the credit card processor, as some credit card processors do not allow an authorization amount of $0.00.
-
The end date after which the authorization is no longer applicable.
-
The five or six character code sent by the issuing bank to indicate whether the payment was successful or declined.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether your institution enforces carrying over of credit balances. Authorization Prevents Auto-Stipends uses the Parent and Student Credit Balance Waivers.
-
The reason to enable the student to drop the course load.
-
Any remarks or notes associated with the authorization.
-
The start date when the authorization is applicable.
-
Indicates the deposit is authorized.
-
Indicates whether a bank account has been authorized by an actual ACH processor.
-
Indicates whether a card has been authorized by an actual credit card processor.
-
Specify the name of the Financial Aid Administrator for Direct Loans. This name will be included in loan manifests sent to the Department of Education.
-
Available payment sources that a student can use to make payments.
-
Indicate the source of payment you want to authorize. The options are 'Bank Authorized for Automatic Payment' and 'Credit Card Authorized for Automatic Payment'.
-
Specifies if the credit card used for payment is authorized.
-
Automatically applies refunds to charges in the student's ledger card.
-
Select this check box to auto-associate complete/dropped courses with other enrollments that share the same course requirements. If the check box is selected, courses are auto-associated when you post grades and change the Enrollment and/or Area of Study.
-
Auto-Packaging provides regulatory compliance within the automated processes and ensures that all necessary rules are enforced during the Automated Eligibility evaluation. The logic calculates and validates award amounts for all Pell formulas and ensures that aid received by students from prior institutions is also considered when Title IV aid awarded by an institution is being evaluated for disbursement approval.
-
Auto-Repackaging ensures that all aid is awarded evenly throughout all terms/payment periods, enabling the Cost of Attendance (COA) and all need/non-need-based aid to be awarded per federal regulations. When a fund source passes or fails a configured fund source rule, all funds within that academic year will be increased or decreased accordingly. All increases or decreases are auto-repackaged within the academic year for all terms and non-standard terms SE9W, regardless of whether the Term Repackaging Effective Dates have been reached or not.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the class sections with this delivery method are automatically added when the class section or waitlist is full. The campuses where the class section is being offered must also be configured to autmatically add class sections.
-
Indicates whether you want to auto-apply the overload policy. By default, the value is set to Yes. This field is displayed only when you have selected Assignment Type with the Is Overload field set to Yes.
-
Indicates a blank value for Onload policy lines or whether or not you want to auto apply the overload policy to overload policy lines based on your institution's configuration in the Load Validation Policy Configuration.
-
Select to ensure the record is set to "Approved" status during the auto-packaging process.
-
Select whether automated awarding is enabled (Yes or No).
-
Populate this field if auto-charges are configured. The term selected in this field will be used to post the auto charges to the student's ledger card. The Auto Charges Term field will display all active terms: - Regular Terms if parent/child terms are not configured - Parent Term if parent/child terms are configured
-
Indicates whether an auto-correct job is enabled. This job assesses the total amount billed for bill codes set up on the rate schedule and adjusts or creates detailed support records per course for the courses comprising the charge.
-
Select whether you want to auto-correct course details to configure term billing methods to post detailed billing charges for each course registered in the term. Selecting this option enables an automated procedure (auto-correct job) that assesses the total amount billed for bill codes set up on the rate schedule. Selecting this option also adjusts the ledger appropriately depending on the courses dropped. This field is enabled when the Posting Type is set to Aggregate. This field is disabled when the Posting Type is set to Detail for the Term billing frequency. When Frequency = Term, Use Rate Schedule = Yes, and Automate Registration Charges = Yes, Auto Correct Course Details = Yes by default.
-
Specify whether you want to auto-correct course details to configure Term billing methods to post detailed billing charges for each course registered in the term. This field is enabled when Posting Type is set to Aggregate. This field is disabled when Posting Type is set to Detail for the Term billing method.
-
Select the check box if you want the system to compare the Direct Loans' scheduled payment dates and the actual paid dates. For additional information, refer to Background for Direct Loans. NOTE: The background service for date adjustment will run only when any one of the automated processes is activated under Configuration > Financial Aid > Automated Process Activation. This date adjustment service will run only for the payments made on a different date than the date COD has accepted the loan.
-
Select the check box if you want the system to compare the COD Grants' scheduled payment dates and the actual paid dates. For additional information, refer to Compare Transactions and Adjust Other Grants. NOTE: The background service for date adjustment will run only when any one of the automated processes is activated under Configuration > Financial Aid > Automated Process Activation. This date adjustment service will run only for the payments made on a different date than the date COD has accepted the loan. The date adjustments apply only to Pell Grants. For TEACH Grants, you must create a date adjustment record manually and send it to COD.
-
Select the check box to automatically create Origination changes for the Loan Period End Date. This setting applies to Direct Loans that have an Origination status of Accepted or Batched to Send. For additional information, see Background for Direct Loans.
-
Auto create Origination Changes/Adjustments for canceled disbursements/refunds (Origination Changes)Select the check box to automatically create origination changes for canceled disbursements and loan amounts when a student is moved to a Permanent Out category.
-
This option is available only if a system registry key for this feature is enabled. Contact Anthology for more information. If you also select the Associate Courses to Schedule check box, you can select the check box to link course registration through Portal to the creation of scheduled disbursements. When you select this option, your system administrators can configure fund source types of Cash, Other Outside Resources, and Scholarships for students to select from to pay for a course on Portal. When the student selects the fund source to pay for a course, Anthology Student automatically creates an award for the fund source with a disbursement to pay for the course. If the student selects more than one fund source to pay for a course, Anthology Student creates an award for each fund source with the corresponding disbursement. If you select this option, you must also use the buttons and fields under Schedule Payment Due Date to specify the due dates. If the award is paying for a course and the award is being paid for by third party agencies not linked to a credit card, you should manually create the payment plan for the agency (such as Military Tuition Assistance and Corporate Tuition Assistance). The Remaining Balance to Schedule by Course report displays the amounts remaining to schedule for each student by course.
-
Specifies how the total award is determined when financial aid is automatically packaged. The options are Institutional Charges and Cost of Attendance (COA). The list is enabled and defaults to Cost of Attendance when you select Student Payments, Direct Plus Loan, Grant (Other than Pell), Other Need Based Loans, Other Non-Need Based Loans, PLUS Loan, or Scholarship in the Type list. It is enabled and defaults to Institutional Charges when you select Other Outside Resources in the Type list. For all other types, it is disabled.
-
Indicates whether or not drop adjustments are automatically posted. This setting is applicable and editable only when Automate Registration Charges = No.
-
When selected, specifies that the packaging status is included Anthology Student automatically promotes packages. When selected, Anthology Student can evaluate the packages with this status and promote other packages to this packaging status as long as you configure one or more requirements (such as ISIR Received or Aid > COA). If you do not specify requirements and you also select the Reevaluate option, Anthology Student will not select this packaging status, but a package can be changed from this status to another packaging status. If you do not specify requirements and you do not select the Reevaluate option, a package that no longer meets any requirements specified by other statuses would be set to this status. If Anthology Student reevaluates a package for automatic promotion and it does not meet the requirements for any other packaging statuses and a new status could not be selected, the package is set to the NEW status.
-
When a campus is configured to use the “Auto Apply Using Hierarchy” option, you can specify whether the system should auto-reapply transactions that have already been applied using the “Auto Reapply Credits” option. If “Auto Reapply Credits” is set to: - “Yes” (default), the Apply Credits logic will reapply all transactions (including those that have already been applied) to ensure that the transactions are applied based on the Apply Credits rules configured for the campus. - “No”, the Apply Credits logic will not un-apply transactions that have already been applied. The system will only apply outstanding credit balance to debit balance based on the Apply Credits rules configured for the campus. Note: This logic can result in credit transactions being applied to debit transactions that are not aligned with the Apply Credits rules configured for the campus (depending on the timing of when the transactions are posted).
-
For program versions for academic calendars that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms (non-term), specifies whether to display program versions based on their financial aid configuration option to auto-recalculate budgets when the instructional weeks (IW) and instructional months (IM) change. You must select Yes in the Include Program Versions list to select a value. If No is selected, the list is disabled.
-
Select the check box to enable recalculation of Multiple Disbursements at your campus. Selecting the Auto Recalculate Multiple Disbursements check box triggers a reevaluation of the scheduled and canceled disbursement dates under specified conditions. Disbursements in a scheduled status can be reevaluated but those that have been paid or batched to send cannot be reevaluated using this feature. Anthology Student will use configuration settings from the Configure Multiple Disbursements form to reevaluate scheduled disbursements when specific information is changed, like payment period dates, state, or residence for rules that are different based on state, or when a student changes courses or has different course start dates.
-
Select the check box to enable the Auto Repackage functionality or clear the check box to disable it.
-
Select the applicable initial student awarding population(s) from the Select Auto Repackage Populations pop-up form. Populations are displayed by their configured system Code and Name.
-
Setting to Yes enables you to configure the population for auto repackaging. All students who are queued for the repackaging job and who are within the population set to Yes will be repackaged. Note: Once a population is configured to Yes, it cannot be used as part of the Auto Packaging job - only as part of the Auto Repackaging job.
-
Select one or more triggers for auto repackaging from the list configured within your system.
-
Whether there is a configured Auto Resolve rule configured in the system for the specific exception (Yes or No).
-
Select this check box to automatically update a student status from a Leave of Absence (LOA) or a Standard Period of Non-Enrollment (SPN) to the student's last active status when attendance is posted. This update will not occur unless the student's LOA period has ended.
-
When selected, indicates that the student qualifies for an automatic expected family (EFC) contribution amount of 0. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Specifies whether to automate the tuition discount with a posting order and calculate the discount up to 100% of the course charge. When automated, the pending tuition discount transactions are posted to the student’s Ledger Card automatically. Otherwise, the pending tuition discount transactions are deleted when TUIT charges are posted.
-
Select the option to specify that applications can be automated.
-
This field is enabled only when you select Term or Course for Frequency. Specify Yes if you want to enable automatic registration billing and automated adjustment of fees in the student ledger. If you select Yes, any time a student is registered or unregistered from a course, the change is displayed in the student ledger as a pending charge or adjustment. The Automate Registration Changes field is disabled when Use Term Group Billing is enabled.
-
Indicates the settings for posting order for the campuses selected for a tuition discount.
-
Indicates the system generated auto stipends.
-
This field provides an effective date that determines which budget view is displayed and which academic years can be processed for auto-awarding. All academic years before the selected effective date are displayed with the Anthology Student budget. All academic years that are on or after the selected effective date are displayed with the Automated Awarding budget and will also be displayed when you use the Auto Package/Auto Repackage button on the Awards form.
-
Select Yes to activate this feature which will permanently remove the Activate Test Mode Notification field on the Automated Awarding Campus Settings page. This enables you to have more control over test mode at the student and/or job level. The Advanced Feature "Enable Advanced Auto Packaging" must be enabled to use this functionality.
-
Select the check box to enable the user to auto-post approved disbursements to a new batch. This check box is enabled when Automated Disbursement Approval is enabled.
-
Select the check box to specify that the campus uses the auto-approval feature when approving disbursements to pay.
-
Indicates the process you want to run as an automated month end process.
-
Name of the automated process advisor for the student.
-
Automated Refund Calculation provides institutions the ability to automate Return to Title IV (R2T4) and Institutional Refund (IR) calculations along with Post-Withdrawal Disbursement management and monitoring features.
-
If you select the check box, the rent billing process is automated for Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Flat Rate billing Frequencies. Automated Rent Billing will not be effective for leases generated for rooms with Term Frequency. If you clear the check box, manual billing of rent charges based on lease and charge schedule dates is enabled.
-
If you are using Financial Aid Automation (FAA), select the check box to specify that the staff member is the automated user. You can only specify one staff member. The staff member must be active, unlocked, must have a password that does not expire, and All Campuses selected must be selected for Campus Group. The automated user can then be selected from the drop-down list to resolve Exception Processing Auto Resolve Type III exceptions. Anthology Student assigns all exceptions that are auto resolved by the pool to the Automated User except for the original exception that was resolved.
-
Select the check box to have the system automatically update the application processing status from Not Ready to Ready to Send when a valid ISIR is on file and a CommonLine loan is in approved status.
-
Select the check box to manage the timing of refund calculations for students who drop out. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Specifies whether or not students are automatically removed from the group when they make satisfactory academic progress (SAP). Yes indicates you want them removed. No indicates you do not want them removed.
-
Select this check box if you want Anthology Student to automatically unconfirm a term when all courses for that term are unregistered.
-
Select this check box if a conditional course is automatically unregistered when a grade is posted that causes the prerequisite rule to fail.
-
Select this check box if a conditional course is automatically unregistered when an action occurs that causes the prerequisite rule to fail (For example, when a course is dropped or unregistered).
-
When you select this option, the latest imported and matched transfer student monitoring (TSM) or financial aid history (FAH) data will be used to automatically update the student's NSLDS > Current Data tab. By default, this option is not selected.
-
Select the check box to automatically promote the origination status from "Not Ready to Send" to "Ready to Send" when a valid ISIR is on file for the student AND the Direct Loan is in "Approved" status.
-
Select the check box to automatically promote the origination status from "Not Ready to Send" to "Ready to Send" when a valid ISIR is on file for the student AND the grant is in "Approved" status. The system will not update the origination status to "Ready to Send" when the grant is in "Estimated" status.
-
Displays the campuses for the fund source where automation is enabled.
-
Either Manual or Automated.
-
The balance amount remaining after the refund has been posted or scheduled.
-
Indicates the total amount of received.
-
Select this option to specify whether or not the job comes with employee benefits.
-
The date when the item or person is available.
-
Indicates the entire list of available fields. Blank field is available when File Type in General Export File Information is set to Fixed Length.
-
Select 'Yes' if you want the lesson to be taken by students in a supplementary attempt for the same course. This field can be selected if your institution has configured the course as a supplementary course.
-
Specifies when the employer will first accept applications for this job and defaults to the current date. You can modify the date, if needed.
-
Specify the date when the job will be available to be applied online.
-
Indicates the multiple disbursement policies that are available to a campus.
-
Displays the list of student properties that you can add.
-
The seating capacity of the exam Center. This is the total number of securable seats from all the Rooms included in the Center.
-
This is the total number of securable seats from all the Rooms included in the Center.
-
Specifies the date after which applications will no longer be accepted.
-
Indicates the available the tuition discount policies.
-
The average of grades earned in lessons.
-
Indicates the average score of the internal assessments.
-
Indicates the average score of the internal assessments.
-
The average grades earned in exams.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether all transaction codes are to be awarded.
-
Total amount of the award.
-
The date when the award was booked.
-
Select if the award notification is delivered via Email, Web Alert, or Print (letter).
-
Used to configure the scheduled disbursement dates for all aid that has been awarded. You can select the following options: Scheduled Disbursement Days From Start of Payment Period or Scheduled Disbursement Using Configured Disbursement Scheduled.
-
The date when the award was funded.
-
ID assigned to the specific award by Common Origination and Disbursement (COD).
-
Select the check box to specify that the fund source is included in the financial aid packaging for summer terms. When the check box is not selected, the packaging process excludes the fund source for summer.
-
If you select this check box and there is no valid ISIR on file, the fund source will not be awarded. If there is no valid ISIR on file and the check box is cleared, the fund source (except for Pell and SEOG) will be awarded. Note: This functionality supersedes the configuration in the Campus Information form for Award Students for ISIRs Only.
-
The type of award letter. The letters are configured by your institution.
-
Select the check box to specify that an award letter must be printed for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
Select the type of award letter. Anthology Student uses SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) for predefined reports available from the Reports tile and printable documents such as financial aid award letters. For details about customizing reports and printable documents, see the Administration and Configuration Help at www.help.anthology.com. The Award Letter Type option in Settings > Financial Aid > Packaging determines if the award letter is based on Academic Year or Award Year.
-
When Yes is selected, the student can view their award letter on the Anthology Student Portal when the packaging status is achieved.
-
The name of the template used to create the award letter. Anthology Student is installed with default templates and additional templates can be configured by your institution. For information about creating award letter templates, see the chapter on creating custom reports and document in the Anthology Student Administration and Configuration Guide.
-
Select the award letter type. The options are Award Year and Academic Year.
-
The Award Level Distribution value determines the payment periods affected by repackaging fund eligibility adjustments. The options are: 1 — All Payment Periods (Past, Current & Future), 2 — Current & Future Payment Periods, and 3 — Future Payment Periods. The default is “All Payment Periods (Past, Current & Future)” for all fund sources except Pell. Pell will default to “Current & Future Payment Periods”. The default priority order of funds will remain but if the form was already configured, it retains the priority values configured by the user.
-
Maximum dollar limit of the award.
-
Maximum percentage amount of the award.
-
This option informs the user if the fund source has at least one rule configured.
-
Indicates whether fees apply to the loan award. Select Yes or No.
-
Configure to apply any loan fees against the last awarded loan fund source.
-
Indicates whether auto packaging applies the award to one or multiple academic years. Select either Annual or Multiple.
-
The description of the fund source.
-
The date when the award notice was printed manually or in batch mode.
-
The date when the award letter was signed by the student.
-
The end date for which the borrower is requesting the loan.
-
The start date for which the borrower is requesting the loan.
-
Date range for the award.
-
Specify a number to sort the award letters.
-
The current state of the student's award in the system.
-
The status of the award. The possible statuses are Estimated, Pending Approval, Approved, and Canceled.
-
The options for disbursement eligibility award statuses are Approved (A), Estimated (E), and Pending Approval (P).
-
Select the award statuses for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the check box to prevent awarding Title IV financial aid to students without ISIR. This ensures compliance with Title IV regulations. Once this feature is set up, the user may award non-Title IV aid to a student without an ISIR but is prevented from awarding fund sources that have a fund source type of Title IV.
-
Select the check box to provide estimated financial aid packages after the EFC/SAI has been changed, but before a new ISIR has been received. This enables you to provide prospective students with accurate packaging information while waiting for the corrected ISIR from the Central Processing System. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Choose to award Top-Up financial assistance (supplemental funds through the GI Bill).
-
Total amount of year-to-date disbursements.
-
The type of award. The values are Gift, Loan, and Work.
-
The type of the estimated award. The values are Grant, Loan, Student Payment/Other, and Work-Study.
-
The financial aid award year.
-
Select a single Award Year from the list. This Award Year is only applied to the selected Campus Location(s).
-
The financial aid award year. This control gets enabled only if the selected module is Financial Aid and the selected document is Award Year specific.
-
The financial aid award year associated with packaged awards that was selected for stipends evaluation.
-
The award year that is captured at the time of export. If there are multiple award years, this field will be hidden.
-
The application award year.
-
The financial aid award year associated with the fund source.
-
The financial aid award year. This field is populated only if the credit transaction is associated with a Financial Aid award.
-
The specific award year the student(s) is eligible for administrative relief (Grant or Loan).
-
The financial aid award year associated with the award which the refund is scheduled against.
-
Select a single financial aid award. This field is a single select list. This award year is only applied to the selected campus location.
-
Select the financial aid award year that is associated with packaged awards to be evaluated for stipends.
-
The financial aid award year associated with the fund source.
-
The financial aid award year associated with the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
The Award Year field is displayed if the selected document is associated with the Financial Aid Module and is configured as "Award Year Specific" in Configuration > Contact Manager > Documents. Select the appropriate award year.
-
The first award year in the academic year.
-
The packaging status for the award year. If your institution has configured promotion levels for packages, the list contains levels that have been configured to allow manual changes. Your institution can also configure document schedules that automatically send documents when the packaging status changes. Anthology Student only requires a completed FAFSA for the first award year to package an academic year. In some cases, a student can submit documents for both award years 1 and 2 in the same academic year (crossover students). You can have 2 award years and packaging statuses so that you can manage both in the same academic year. Award Year 2 Packaging Status is only available if you specify a value for Award Year 2.
-
The second award year for the sequence. The field is optional. Anthology Student only requires a completed FAFSA for the first award year to package an academic year. In some cases, a student can submit documents for both award years 1 and 2 in the same academic year (crossover students). You can have 2 award years and packaging statuses, so that you can manage both in the same academic year.
-
Select the check box to specify that the packaging status only applies to the second award year.
-
The packaging status for the award year. If your institution has configured promotion levels for packages, the list contains levels that have been configured to allow manual changes. Your institution can also configure document schedules that automatically send documents when the packaging status changes. Anthology Student only requires a completed FAFSA for the first award year to package an academic year. In some cases, a student can submit documents for both award years 1 and 2 in the same academic year (crossover students). You can have 2 award years and packaging statuses so that you can manage both in the same academic year. Award Year 2 Packaging Status is only available if you specify a value for Award Year 2.
-
This check box is displayed if the the module selected is Financial Aid. Selecting this check box indicates the document is award year-specific.
-
Select the condition for the award year in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (2017-18;2019-20) in the respective value field, the report displays the award years between 2017-18 and 2019-20 only.
-
The financial aid award year. Anthology Student gathers students who have only posted Title IV charges and Title IV grants for the specified award year. Fund Source types configured as Title IV Grants are Pell, Perkins, ACG, SMART, TEACH, or SEOG.
-
Select the financial aid award year to be evaluated for Title IV credit balance.
-
The first award year in the academic year.
-
The second award year for the sequence. The field is optional. Anthology Student only requires a completed FAFSA for the first award year to package an academic year. In some cases, a student can submit documents for both award years 1 and 2 in the same academic year (crossover students). You can have 2 award years and packaging statuses, so that you can manage both in the same academic year.
-
The specific award years.
-
Informs the user if the specific fund source has at least one rule configured.
-
Configure the awarding up to the cost of either the Cost of Attendance or Institutional Charges.
-
The order in which a student’s eligibility to a bursary will be checked. Ideally, the award with the highest value should be checked against a student’s eligibility first followed by others in descending order.
-
The number representing the awarding order for the fund source.
-
If you selected Grant (Other than Pell) or Scholarship in the Fund Source Type drop-down list, you can specify the state to identify the fund source as a state fund source.
-
Indicates the type of fund sources.
-
Specify the appropriate status to prevent the awarding of Title IV funds. The statuses are Approved (read-only), Pending Approval, and Estimated. Based on the value(s) selected, the Packaged amount for fund sources will be adjusted when awards are made with Estimated and Approved statuses. This option is enabled only when 'Prevent awarding when authorization is expended' is set to Yes.
-
The financial aid award year evaluated for Title IV credit balance, if Award Year was for the evaluation Period Type.
-
Number assigned by the system to the academic year, loan period, or payment period record.
-
The end date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to a date calculated from the enrollment date for the student plus the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. The end date of the second and subsequent academic years are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If your institution configured calendars, holidays are added to the calculation of the end date of the sequence. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods in most cases, the date should not be after the graduation date. For loan periods, the end date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The start date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to the start date in the student's enrollment record. The start dates of the student's second and succeeding sequences are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods, in most cases, the date should not be before the start date of the program version. For loan periods, the start date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The start date of the academic year (AY).
-
The academic year and payment period (such as A1|P1 and A1|P2).
-
The academic year and payment period (such as A1|P1 and A1|P2).
-
If the Academic Calendar for the refund record is 1, 5, or 6, you can select or change the academic year sequence (AY) and payment period (PP). Otherwise, it is blank.
-
The academic year/payment period associated with the transaction.
-
This field is visible only when Anthology Student is integrated with Great Plains. This URL indicates the location of Azure functions required for Anthology Student and Great Plains integration. This URL is not editable and is automatically populated when the necessary components for the integration are installed by Anthology’s Cloud Services.
-
Select Bachelor Degree to specify that the student must have a bachelor's degree to meet the criteria. Select CANNOT have Bachelor Degree to specify that the student must not have a bachelor's degree to meet the criteria.
-
Select the background color from the color picker.
-
Indicates the backup rule associated with the payment period.
-
Specify the number of days associated with the backup rule. The value must range from 1 to 999.
-
Specify the percentage of the payment period associated with the backup rule. The value must range from 1 to 100.
-
When selected, specifies that there is one more error in the address for the student (such as the address is incomplete or mail has been returned).
-
Select an option for bad address for which you want to generate generate the report. The options are: - All - Yes - No
-
When selected, specifies that there is an error in the phone number for the student.
-
Select an option for bad phone for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - All - Yes - No
-
Total balance due after the payment was made.
-
The cumulative sum of all transactions.
-
The total balance in the account.
-
Total stipend balance due to the student.
-
Select a balance criterion. The available criteria are: Equal to, Not equal to, Greater than, Less than, Between, Include All. The default criterion is Include All.
-
Indicates the options based on which summary and detail reports are to be filtered. You can select one or more options.
-
The source of the student’s account balance that is displayed on the student payment statement. The options are overall student balance or current enrollment balance.
-
Select the option for balance source for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specifies the Transaction Codes which will be used as the default if a subsidiary balance is transferred through the Subsidiary Refund/Balance Transfers process.
-
Specify the balance value for the selected Balance criterion.
-
The student's bank account associated with the transaction.
-
Specify the type of bank account associated with the transaction. This field is editable.
-
The bank account associated with the transaction.
-
The bank account associated with the transaction.
-
The bank account from which the disbursements will be distributed. When the refund is posted, the bank account will be debited and the student ledger account will be credited.
-
The Bank Account from which the check will be drawn.
-
Select a bank account to be associated with the refunds/stipends to be processed. This field is populated with active bank accounts that are shared by the selected campuses.
-
The student's bank account associated with the transaction. This option is only available when the Refund option is set to Post Directly to Ledger Card (No Check Required).
-
The institution’s bank account that will be associated with the transaction.
-
The bank account associated with the fund source.
-
A read-only field that displays the student’s bank account that will be used for direct deposit. This field is blank if the student does not have any bank accounts configured for direct deposit. If this field is populated then the “Use EFT as Default Return Method for Student’s Stipends” option will be disabled.
-
The name given to the bank account by your institution.
-
The name given to your bank by your institution. To change the bank account name, select it from the list.
-
The bank account number associated with the transaction.
-
The bank accounts associated with the transactions. Only transactions associated with the selected bank accounts will be gathered in the batch for bank deposit.
-
Select one or more bank accounts if you want to search for transactions that are associated with certain bank accounts only.
-
Confirmation number issued by the bank.
-
Specifies the fee charged by the lender for processing the loan. Fees can be configured for the lender by your institution.
-
The action you can take depends on how your institution configured the option to add bank fees for loans. If the field is read-only, your institution automatically adds the fees. If the field is editable, you can manually add the fees. If your institution installed an earlier release of Anthology Student, a message can also be displayed that asks you whether you want to automatically add or manually add the fees.
-
Specify the Bank Header. The system produces an export file that the Automated Clearing House (ACH) uses to execute transactions between banking institutions and clients. Some banks may require a formatted header record to appear as the first record in the file for processing the export file correctly. Since it is time-consuming, the system provides an automated process for adding the header records. When processing an ACH file through the Process Electronic Draft wizard, the system inserts the header records that you have set up and places the header in the exported ACH file.
-
When the Advanced Feature flag "Enable Load Banking" is set to Yes, you can specify and save a Bank Load Limit value. The maximum value is 9999.99999. This is also the default value if you do not enter a value. The system enforces the configured Bank Load Limit. You will receive the following message if you edit the Bank Load Limit value and loads are already banked: "The Load Type Load Bank Limit is in use on banked loads for faculty. If you reduce the limit, faculty bank balances may be over the new limit and no new loads can be banked for that faculty member until the balance is reduced to less than the limit applied." The Bank Load Limits will be applied to faculty member positions and will be reflected in the Bank Statement per Faculty.
-
Select the Bank Loads check box if you want to convert overloads to banked loads as partial or total assigned loads.
-
The name of the bank.
-
The bank account associated with the master check.
-
The banked amount of work hours for the faculty member.
-
Specifies the basis for the SAP calculation and determines how the overall SAP evaluation works for a given student who is associated with this SAP policy. It also affects how your institution validates the 150% rule requirement for SAP. Credit Hours specifies the total number of credit hours a student attempted versus earned in a program for the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) time period. Clock Hours By Attendance displays an additional Attended Hours Basis field so that you can select the method (attendance totals or scheduled hours). Clock Hours By Course specifies that when run by term or payment period, how many clock hours are attempted versus the number of clock hours earned by a student for completed courses.
-
The basis used to determine when the fund source is awarded. The values are Merit Based, Need Base, Other, Premium Academic, and Talent Based.
-
Specify the scope (basis) for which the payment of the selected fund source to can be applied. The options are: • Student - All unapplied debit transactions for the student across all enrollments. • Enrollment - All unapplied debit transactions that were posted to the same enrollment as the payment. • Payment Period - All unapplied debit transactions that were posted in the same payment period as the payment. Only transactions within the same enrollment period are evaluated. • Previous Payment Periods - All unapplied debit transactions that were posted prior to the payment period or term of the payment. Only transactions within the same enrollment period are evaluated. This field is editable.
-
You can limit the basis of the payment application based on the following: - Student: All debit transactions for the Student - Enrollment: Debit transactions that were posted to the same Enrollment as the payment - Payment Period: Debit transactions that were posted in the same Payment Period as the payment - Previous Payment Periods: Debit transactions that were posted prior to the payment period of the payment
-
The batch name. The name includes the date when the process was started.
-
The batch name. The name includes the date when the process was started.
-
The batch number. Based on the selection criteria, the job processes data and creates batches asynchronously in the background.
-
The name and time stamp of the batch.
-
The name of the batch.
-
The total amount of funds for the fund source.
-
The total amount of all of the disbursements in the batch.
-
Date for the creation of the batch.
-
Date range that indicates the creation date of the batch.
-
Indicates the date of the batch.
-
The date range that the batch was created.
-
The batch ID of the transmission file.
-
If you selected Regenerate Batch in the File Options list, select the ID of the batch you want to replace with the regenerated and updated file. The list is filtered to the batch IDs for the school, award year, and recipient you selected in the other fields on the page.
-
Select the condition for the batch ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the batch ID records between 1 and 5 only.
-
The ID of the credit balance evaluation batch.
-
Indicates the batch ID of the exported batch to Talisma Fundraising.
-
Number of the batch in which the disbursement was posted to the ledger card for the student.
-
Enter a specific Batch ID to retrieve records associated to that Batch ID or leave blank.
-
Specify a Batch ID. This field is only visible when you set General Ledger System to Great Plains.
-
Name of the Title IV credit balance evaluation batch.
-
Enter the batch ID value.
-
The batch Id of the job.
-
The Batch Inform Date is the Monitoring Start Date. It is used to determine the monitoring duration. The Batch Inform Date must be manually populated in the Results grid of the Transfer Student Monitoring Review page for the TSM main record to be built in the Anthology Student database.
-
Every Transfer Student Monitoring Batch Inform file that is sent should receive a corresponding Error/Acknowledgement file from NSLDS with a Batch Inform File Date. Users can review the import history and compare it with the export history to determine if any files are missing.
-
Every Transfer Student Monitoring Batch Inform file that is sent should receive a corresponding Error/Acknowledgement file from NSLDS with a Batch Inform Sequence number. Users can review the import history and compare it with the export history to determine if any files are missing.
-
Indicates whether the batch was locked at the time of queueing.
-
The disbursement batch name.
-
The transcript batch name.
-
Name of the batch.
-
Name of the batch which has the student's record.
-
The name of the batch.
-
The batch number.
-
The number assigned by Anthology Student to the batch.
-
This is message transfer batch number obtained from the SAIG Portal.
-
The Batch Open options are Yes, No, and All (default). Select whether you want to generate the report for all batches, only batches that are in use/open, or batches that are not open.
-
Specifies the column that Anthology Student uses to sort the lists of students generated on the tabs of the Processes > Registration page. The options are Student Last Name, Student Number, Student Program Version.
-
Reconciled or Not Reconciled.
-
Indicates the status of the batch of student funding records, for example, Open, Partially Processed, Pending Review, or Removed. For a newly imported batch, the default status is Open. When the process fails to process a record from the selection of records, the batch status is set to Partially Processed.
-
The total revenue being recognized in the batch.
-
Specifies the type of file imported. Select either Response File or Disbursement Roster. Response files contain lender responses to new applications submitted by exporting and sending the Application Send files to lenders. Disbursement Roster files list disbursements that have been made by the lender to students. The information is then used to update the records for the students at your institution.
-
Select the type of batch. The options are Post Charges, Calculate Registration Billing, Registration Billing Charges, and Recalculate Pending Charges. The drop-down field will not auto-populate with a batch type.
-
Displays the name of the background job.
-
The batch types for electronic draft processing include ACH (payment, refunds, stipends) and credit card (payments, refunds) batches.
-
The module name associated with the batch.
-
The batch that is being referred to.
-
Specifies the type of file imported. The values are Eligible and Ineligible.
-
The batch types for electronic draft processing include ACH (payment, refunds, stipends), and credit card (payments, refunds) batches.
-
Indicates whether the batch is a Reapply batch or an Unapply batch.
-
When displayed, the Batch Type contains the internal name of the process used by the background system to process the job.
-
The type of process performed in the system: either Copy Configuration or AY Build.
-
The Batch Type options for Transfer Student Monitoring are New (default) and Students To Delete. The New option requires the Request Type, Start Type, Student Group, and Status Category fields to be completed.
-
Specifies the type of test file imported.
-
Disbursements in a disbursement batch are evaluated against eligibility criteria before the batch is posted to the ledger card.
-
The General Ledger batch number.
-
The start date or the borrower-based academic year (BBAY). When combined with the value for BBAY Start Date, it represents a full academic year. The date is independent of the end date for the loan period. For overlapping loans, the value is always the end date for the loan at the previous institution.
-
The start date of the borrower-based academic year (BBAY). With the BBAY end date, it represents a full academic year. The date is independent of start date for the loan period. For overlapping loans, the BBAY Start Date depends on the value for Previous Academic Year Week on the NSLDS page. If it is greater than or equal to the minimum full year definition of 30, the start date is the loan start date at the previous institution. If it is less than or equal to 30, the start date is calculated using the formula (BBAY End Date – previous institution academic year weeks) + 1 day.
-
Indicates all billing statements before the specified date will be filtered. The displayed records can then be deleted.
-
The date when the status change becomes effective.
-
The start date of the loan.
-
The opening balance at the beginning of the cash summary report.
-
The requirement rule that belongs to the area of study.
-
The name and code of the benefits provided to the student veteran.
-
Select this option to specify whether or not the job benefits are for the employee.
-
Indicates whether benefits such as vacation, insurance, holidays, retirement plan, etc. were included with the job offer. The options are Yes and No.
-
Specifies the number of lessons considered for calculating best of lesson score for students.
-
This field is activated when the test assessment scheme is set to Best of Tests. It allows the user to specify the number of top tests to be considered for evaluation from the entered tests.
-
The best time mentioned by the student when he can be contacted.
-
Specify the minimum marks that can be reached after marks moderation.
-
Specify the maximum marks that can be reached after marks moderation.
-
The Bill Code associated with the student fees.
-
The transaction code to which the adjustment applies. This field is read-only.
-
The Bill Code associated with the transaction.
-
If enabled, only students who have classes registered for the term being processed are billed.
-
The Name and Code of the billable service.
-
The Name and Code of the category of the billable service that the students will be assigned to.
-
Use the Billed check box to have the fees gathered or not gathered based on the following rules: - If you select both the Billed check box and the One Time Fee check box, fees will not be gathered when you run registration billing. - If you select only the Billed check box and clear the One Time Fee check box, fees will not be gathered when you run registration billing. - If you do not select Billed, fees will be gathered when you run registration billing.
-
Indicates who the payment is billed to.
-
If you selected "Yes" in the "Unregistered Billing Adjustments" field, specify the number of days from the start of the term that you want auto-repackaging to reduce the COA budget to $0 for unregistered students. You can specify a value between 0 and 99. The default is 0.
-
The method used to bill for the student. For example, monthly, term, course, and so on. They are configured by your institution.
-
Select the default billing method for the program version. The list displays all billing methods that your institution configured to bill students under Configuration > Student Accounts > Billing Methods.
-
The method used to bill for the student. For example, monthly, term, course, and so on. They are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the method used to bill for the student. For example, monthly, term, course, and so on. Billing Methods are configured by your institution. This field allows multiple selections.
-
Indicates the method used to bill for the student. The options are "Frequency = Term" and "Posting Type = Detail".
-
Specifies the billing period. The options are - Payment Period, Term, Transaction Date, and Term Group.
-
The date range for the billing method.
-
Specifies the date range for the billing period. The options are - Payment Period, Term, Transaction Date and Term Group.
-
Available terms for billing with start and end dates for each term. This field is enabled based on the values configured in the Housing Lease Status field.
-
The billing transaction code. This field is enabled based on the values configured in the Housing Lease Status field.
-
The default billing method for the program version.
-
Joint research funds between two specified countries.
-
The city the student or person was born. For international students, the Birth City field is required when the Visa type is J-1, Trans Status is either R or D and Action is ‘Begin New program’ or ‘Continuing Exchange Visitor'.
-
The person's date of birth.
-
The person's date of birth. For this property, the Operator list displays the Equal option only.
-
The student's birthday month.
-
The first two columns on the ISIR Verification form contain question numbers and questions from the FAFSA. The form selects the questions based on the V1, V4, or V5 filters for Dependent/Independent verification.
-
The blind grade ID generated by Anthology Student to conceal the student names for the class. This value is generated when a student registers for the first course that requires blind grading within a term.
-
Indicates that the class uses blind grade IDs to conceal student names. This blind grade ID is used in place of the student's name and is displayed on the reports generated by the system.
-
Indicates outsourced statements will be blocked, if selected.
-
The book name.
-
The book code.
-
Specify the date range when the loan was booked at COD.
-
The book list name.
-
The unique code for the book list.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the book lists specified using the Books Lists.
-
Select the status at COD. The options are Booked, Unbooked, and Include All (default). Booked indicates that the COD has accepted and acknowledged the origination, first disbursement, and promissory notes. Until this occurs, the status is Unbooked.
-
Name of the student's book store advisor.
-
Indicates the amount of booked adjustments.
-
Indicates the amount of booked disbursements.
-
The total net amount of disbursements accepted and booked at COD.
-
The date the loan was booked at COD.
-
Number of Answer Booklets in a Bundle.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to a Answer Booklet.
-
The total cost of books and supplies for the program version.
-
The cost of books and supplies. If a fee schedule is entered for the student's enrollment, the books and supplies default to the value in the fee schedule (if any). If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value. The Extended Budget allows for the books to be configured as Institutional or Non-Institutional.
-
Cost of books and supplies for a program per award year
-
Borrower's last name and first name
-
The code assigned to the borrower.
-
Indicates the code assigned to the borrower. The options are Yes or No. This field is enabled only if the borrower is not the student.
-
Specifies whether or a borrower is in default on previous loans. If you want to override the existing value, select Z to override by your institution.
-
The identifier for the borrower in the format SSN without dashes + date of birth in format YYYY-MM-DD + first 25 characters of last name in upper case. It is a read-only field displayed only for loans configured to be DIRPLUS. The field is populated after you select the Save button on the toolbar.
-
Status of the interest indicator for the student.
-
Indicates the status of the interest indicator for the student. The options are Yes or No.
-
If you selected Other Need Based Loans or Other Non-Need Based Loans in the Type list, you can select this check box to specify that the student is the borrower. If the check box is not selected, the borrower can be someone other than the student.
-
Status of the reference information on the application. Y specifies that it is complete. N specifies that it is not complete.
-
Indicates the status of the reference information on the application. The options are Yes which specifies that reference information on the application is complete or No which specifies that it is not complete.
-
Indicates whether the borrower has signed the promissory note.
-
The Social Security Number (SSN) associated with the borrower of the loan. You must be authorized to work with SSNs.
-
State of legal residence for the borrower. This field is enabled only if the fund source type configured for the loan is LOANNB or LOANNNB and the borrower is not the student, or the fund source type is PLUS.
-
If the state of residence of the borrower is different from their legal state of residence, their current state.
-
Indicates the citizenship status of the borrower. This field is enabled only if the fund source type for the loan is configured as LOANNB or LOANNNB and the borrower is not the student, or the fund source type is PLUS. The options are US Citizen, US National, Permanent Resident of Palau, or Eligible Non-Citizen.
-
Indicates the citizenship status of the borrower. This field is enabled only if the fund source type for the loan is configured as LOANNB or LOANNNB and the borrower is not the student, or the fund source type is PLUS. 1 specifies that the borrower is a US citizen, US national, or permanent resident of Palau. 2 specifies that the borrower is an eligible non-citizen.
-
Specifies whether the PLUS/Alternative Loan borrower has any outstanding loans disbursed before July 1, 1993. The values are Y, N, or null. This field is enabled only if the borrower is not the student.
-
Box 3 indicates a change in the reporting method. There are two 1098-T reporting methods: "Amounts Billed" and "Amounts Paid". Anthology Student may be configured to indicate that the reporting method has changed. If this is the case, the 1098-T Tool places a check mark in Box 3 of the processed 1098-T forms.
-
If selected, Box 7 indicates that Box 1 includes amounts for an academic period beginning in the next calendar year. For example, if a student registered and paid for the upcoming Spring semester during November or December, Box 7 will be selected.
-
If selected, Box 8 indicates that the student was at least a half-time student during any academic period that began in the calendar year. If Box 8 is selected, the student meets one of the requirements for the Hope tax credit.
-
If selected, Box 9 indicates whether the student is considered to be enrolled in a program leading to a graduate degree, graduate-level certificate, or other recognized graduate-level educational credential. If enrolled in a graduate program, a student qualifies for the tuition and fee deduction or the lifetime learning credit.
-
The agency branch that the student is associated with. If you are adding or editing an agency or affiliation for a student, the field is read-only if there is only one branch for the agency.
-
Indicates the Department of Education branch code if this campus is a branch of another school.
-
The Name and Code of the branch that the student is associated with. For example, Marine Corps.
-
Two-digit number used with the OPEID number that identifies the specific location the program version is associated with.
-
This code helps customers and bankers identify a particular bank branch.
-
Specifies the type of budget for the student. Budgets are configured by your institution. If amounts are specified in the budget, they are displayed in the fields (such as Room and Board and Books and Supplies).
-
The bank account number of the bursary.
-
'Configured' for the Budget Allocation to be enabled or 'Not Configured' for it to be disabled.
-
The budget available for the selected bursary.
-
Specifies a predefined budget and values that your institution configured. If a student is enrolled in different program versions at multiple campuses, select the budget that is configured for the appropriate campus and program version.
-
The percentage of leads that led to enrollments required for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify .25.
-
The percentage of leads that led to students starting for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify .25. These values are used to calculate the Budget Starts PTD, Budget Starts MTD, and Budget Starts to YTD values on the Show Rate By Rep tab in the Executive Summary Report.
-
You should be able to enter Specific value in Budgeted Percentage of Leads to Enrollments.
-
The percentage of prospects that led to enrollments required for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify 25.
-
The percentage of prospects that led to students starting for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify 25.
-
The estimated number of enrollments or starts for this program version on the start date.
-
The total tuition revenue expected to be earned as result of enrollments for the selected start date. The default value for Budget Tuition is zero. The default is used if no value is entered.
-
The percentage of prospects that led to students starting for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify .25. These values are used to calculate the Budget Starts PTD, Budget Starts MTD, and Budget Starts to YTD values on the Show Rate By Rep tab in the Executive Summary Report.
-
The percentage of prospects that led to enrollments required for the type of Admissions Representative. Specify the percentage as a decimal. For example, to specify 25%, specify .25.
-
Admissions directors set goals for student recruitments. To achieve a specific number student starts, recruitment objectives are allocated to admissions representatives. It is expected that admissions representatives achieve or over-achieve the number of allocated budgeted starts.
-
The name of the building. The values are configured by your institution.
-
The name of the building where the class is taken. The values are configured by your institution.
-
Name and code of the building included in an Exam Center.
-
Specifies the building for which you want to generate the report.
-
Building category for the building.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the building by your institution. In most cases, codes must be unique.
-
The building code.
-
The value for the maximum occupant capacity of the building.
-
The name of the building.
-
Specifies the building name for which the report is generated.
-
The value for the normal occupant capacity of the building.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to a Bundle.
-
The bursary applicable for the selected academic session or program.
-
The bursary that the student has applied to.
-
The name of the selected bursary.
-
The amount from the bursary budget that is available for disbursement to students.
-
The amount from the bursary budget that has been disbursed to students.
-
The category that the bursary belongs to. The values available here are External and Internal.
-
The Bursary Criteria used to determine if a student is eligible for a bursary. This is configured under Configuration > Bursary Central > Bursary Criteria.
-
The status of bursar eligibility. The field is read-only and displays Yes.
-
A member from the bursary office that manages a type of bursary.
-
The number assigned to the bursary application. This number is generated using the format defined in bursary configuration.
-
Customize the date format and number separator to automatically generate bursary application numbers for applicants. Example, “BUDDMMYY####” where “####” would be the bursary number, and the DDMMYYY section is auto populated using the system date and time to generate a new sequence of application numbers.
-
Enable the auto-generation of bursary application numbers using the method defined in Bursary Number settings. The options available here are “Do Not Generate”, “Sequential Number”, and “Use Bursary Number Format”. Sequential Numbers settings uses the Bursary Number as the starting number to generate a sequence of numbers. Use Bursary Number Format uses the format defined in the Bursary Number Format and Bursary Number to generate a sequence of application numbers. No application number is generated if the Do Not Generate setting is selected.
-
The current status of the bursary application.
-
Indicates the status that is set on a student’s application if they fail the bursary evaluation.
-
Indicates the status that is set on a student’s application if the bursary evaluation is successful.
-
The reason associated to the status of the bursary application.
-
Indicates the status that triggers bursary evaluation on a student’s application.
-
The budget available for a bursary that your institution has configured. Changing the values in this field will refresh the Bursary Budget Available and Bursary Budget Disbursed fields.
-
The bursary type that is awarded to certain students or prospective students.
-
Displays the name of the business event associated with the topic.
-
The businees process going throught the approval process. Currently the only option is Bursary Application.
-
Select the course attributes. The GPA calculation will include courses from all enrollments that share the course attributes you select.
-
Select the degree levels. The GPA calculation will include courses from all enrollments with the degree level.
-
Select the programs. The GPA calculation will include courses from all enrollments that are common to a specific program.
-
Select Yes to manually create a refund calculation through Student Accounts when Auto Refund Calculation is enabled. Additionally, all Automated Refund Calculation configuration forms will be read-only in the legacy interface and configurable only within the Student Web App.
-
When you have the permission Financial Aid - Student Award Pell - Bypass Pell Grant Amount - Edit, you can enable and disable this option to package Pell awards for the 2023-24 award year and later to the student's full eligibility, for example, when the student’s Pell LEU % has changed since a new ISIR was received. When the bypass logic is enabled, the only validation against saving the fund source updates will be that the award amount equals the sum of all disbursements. If you don't have the Financial Aid - Student Award Pell - Bypass Pell Grant Amount - Edit permission, the Bypass Pell Grant Amount field is displayed if it was previously selected by an authorized user, otherwise, the field is not displayed.
-
Select the C code groups that result from problems with one or more of the data matches on the ISIR. C codes must be resolved for financial aid to be processed.
-
Codes that result from problems with one or more of the data matches on the ISIR. C Codes must be resolved for financial aid to be processed.
-
In the Set Default Due Date section, select or clear the Calculate option as required. If you select the Calculate check box, the Days, When, and What fields are enabled and required. These values are used to determine the Due Date when the documents are automatically added to the student document list. They are also used when selecting "fulfillment" documents for a Contact Manager item that has attached documents. These fields are not used when a user manually adds documents to the student's document folder. In Days, enter the number of days. In When, select Before or After. In What, select Lead Date or Start Date.
-
Select this check box to allow the posting of grades for lessons.
-
Indicates whether the calculation is based on amount to refund or amount to retain. The options are: Calculate, Earn, Reverse or N/A.
-
Select the check box to allow calculating parental contribution on independent students.
-
Select whether the zone is determined by distance or country. Distance Range in Miles specifies that the zone is based on distance and enables the Range Start and End fields. Foreign Country specifies that the zone is based on another country.
-
Select whether you want the report to display the student's school status (Active, Enrolled, Future Start, etc.) based on the date the student status was added (select "As of Date Added") or based on the date the status became effective (select "As of Effective Date").
-
Indicate if you want to update the selected transactions based on configured transaction due date rules. The due date for the transaction will not be updated if the due date cannot be calculated for the transaction. For example, if the due date rule does not exist for the transaction code that is associated with that debit transaction or if the due date rule is configured to calculate based on Term Start Date but the transaction is not associated with a term, then due date cannot be calculated.
-
The amount of tuition discount that should be paid to the student based on the tuition discount policy. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
The amount of tuition discount calculated for the student based on the tuition discount policy. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
If selected, indicates that the calculated amounts were edited and saved.
-
The number of courses calculated for the category.
-
The number of credits calculated for the category.
-
The amount of tuition discount that should be paid to the student based on the tuition discount policy. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
The percentage of discount as defined in the tuition discount policy. In case the discount amount for the tuition discount policy has to be calculated on a flat rate basis, this column will be blank. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
The number of hours calculated for the category.
-
Select how you want [%=GlobalVariables.NexusStudent% ] to calculate the total number of weeks in the course for your institution. The options are: - Start Day: The second week of the course starts on the 7th day after the course section’s start date. - Standard Weeks: The next week starts the day after the selected Last Day of Week. For additional information about calculated weeks usage, see background for academic records for campuses.
-
The course refund calculation can be based on Length (of attendance) or Percentage (of enrollment). Depending on your selection, either the Calculation Based On Length grid is enabled or the Calculation Based On Percent grid is enabled.
-
Indicates the calculations based on length for a refund policy. This grid is editable when Manual Calculation is set to No.
-
Indicates the calculations based on percentage for a refund policy. This grid is visible when the Policy Type is set to Post Enrollment. It is editable when Manual Calculation is set to No.
-
Details why the student was awarded that fund source amount.
-
The name of the refund calculation record.
-
Indicates whether the calculation is based on amount to refund or amount to retain.
-
The calculation option that will be associated with each transaction code: - Calc: The charges are included in refund calculation - Earn -The charges are completely earned when charged - Reverse - The charges are reversed before the refund is calculated - N/A - The charges are not applicable to the refund calculation
-
The current system status of the refund calculation (Approved, Not Approved, Review, etc...).
-
Indicates whether the refund calculation is actual or hypothetical. You can select Actual if the student status is graduate, complete, or drop. Hypothetical is selected and cannot be changed for all other student statuses. Even though you can select Actual for a student with a status of graduated or complete, the Return of Title IV calculation does not apply to those students.
-
Indicates how the disbursement amount is calculated. The options are Flat Amount, Percentage, and Maximum Amount.
-
Select the amount to refund or the amount to retain.
-
Indicates whether the refund calculation is actual or hypothetical. You can perform both hypothetical and actual calculations. Only actual calculations can be posted.
-
Indicate whether the refund calculation is actual or hypothetical. You can select Actual if the student status is graduate, complete, or drop. Hypothetical is selected and cannot be changed for all other student statuses. Even though you can select Actual for a student with a status of graduated or complete, the Return of Title IV calculation does not apply to those students.
-
Select Yes if you want the California STRF process to recognize students who are enrolled in a California residency program and allow them to be charged a California STRF fee even if those students do not have a California address. The default setting is No.
-
Indicates the name of application that uses the CampusLink API for the integrations. This field is limited to 200 characters and cannot contain any space. Special characters and numbers are allowed. This field has to be unique. At the time of key generation, record the application key’s value for use in your client application code. This value is never displayed again after you leave this page.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. It is filtered to display the campuses to which you have access. In some cases, it is also used to filter a list to only those items for the campus. In some lists, you can select more than one campus or select All. In lists that display columns, if the column contains more than one campus, you cannot sort or filter on that column.
-
6-digit number assigned by the Department of Education.
-
The campus or campuses to which student is assigned.
-
Specify the campus or campuses to post or edit attendance for dates that are on or before the Last Earn Date. This field is displayed only if you select Campus as the Campus Type.
-
The campus to which the alumni student was assigned.
-
The campus associated with the course.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. Select a campus to configure auto charges for that campus. This Campus field is available only if the Configure By Campus option is selected.
-
The campus associated with the transactions. Only transactions associated with the selected campus will be gathered for bank deposit.
-
The campus which you want to run the STRF process against.
-
The campus that the term is associated with.
-
The campuses the program version is associated with.
-
Specify the campus for which you want to configure general ledger accounts.
-
The campus where the student attends.
-
The campus for which transactions are to be posted or reviewed.
-
The campus to which a student or item is assigned. By default, it displays the Student Profile campus. The list only contains campuses for the staff member associated with it.
-
Select the campus that you wish to configure the payment apply order.
-
The campus for which you will change the minimum transaction date.
-
The campus associated with the disbursement.
-
The campus that will be associated with the prerequisite rule.
-
The campus associated with the credit card or bank transaction.
-
The campus associated with the credit card or bank transaction.
-
The campus that the prospective student or student expressed an interest.
-
The campus or campuses to which the staff member has access. Select the campus or campuses for which the report’s data will be filtered.
-
Indicates the campus for which automated payment apply method is configured.
-
The campus associated with the batch.
-
Indicates the campus where the reassignment will occur.
-
The campuses to which the refund policy applies. Multiple campuses can be related to the same refund policy. At least one campus must be selected before a new refund policy record can be saved.
-
The campus(es) for which the schedule is associated.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. The list is filtered to display the campuses where you have access.
-
Select the campus to release transactions to the General Ledger for that campus. When integrated with Great Plains, this field defaults to the current signed-in campus and is not editable. If Anthology Student is not integrated with Great Plains or any other General Ledger system, this field is labelled Campus Group and allows you to release to the General Ledger for all campuses associated with the selected campus group.
-
The campus associated with the revenue earning.
-
The campus associated with the refund.
-
The campus where refunds are scheduled.
-
Select the campus in which you would like to search for transactions.
-
The specific campus associated to the mailbox.
-
The campus associated with the activity statement batch.
-
The campus associated with the activity statement batch.
-
The campus associated with the hangfire batch.
-
Select the campus to generate student payment statements. You will see only campuses which you have access. This field is enabled only if statement type is Batch.
-
The campus for the student. The list only contains campuses you are associated with. You can only change the campus if the student is a prospect. Otherwise, the campus is specified during enrollment and the field is read-only.
-
The campus where the student is enrolled.
-
The campus where the student is enrolled.
-
The campus associated with the balance batch statement.
-
The campus associated with the transaction.
-
The campus where the student is enrolled.
-
The campus associated with the subsidiary.
-
The campus where the student is enrolled.
-
The campus where the transaction was posted.
-
Select the campus which to search for unapplied credits.
-
The campus associated with the course that you want to unregister from.
-
Select the campus where the document is associated. If the document is configured for more than one campus, the same external identifier will be used for all the campuses where the document is associated.
-
The campus to which the update placement status process applies.
-
Indicates the campuses that are associated with the new processor. You can set up multiple ACH processors per Campus.
-
The code assigned to the campus by the State of Georgia for reporting. The State of Georgia requires that all extract files submitted for HOPE processing contain this unique, 2-digit State ID for the school. When the HOPE Extract report is generated, the Campus Code is pulled into the HOPE Extract File for processing as required by the State of Georgia.
-
Indicates the specified code assigned to the campus.
-
The equivalent course offered by the campus. If you select a value for Campus Course for a status other than APPROVED, the course is displayed on the Degree Progress Audit under Course Taken not Applied.
-
The code of the campus course.
-
The name of the campus course.
-
Select the Campus Document that corresponds to each listed Global document.
-
The UNC-compliant file path used for file transfers between Anthology Student and the CPS/FPS system. The Campus EDE path is used for campus-specific file transfers.
-
The introduction of the FTI-SAIG Mailbox and FT Numbers for 2024-25 and later required a new Campus EDE path to import ISIR files. The system uses the Campus EDE Path (TG) path for all award years for the import/export of COD files, export of correction files, etc.
-
Indicates whether or not the location is considered on campus.
-
Indicates the campus file code. You can assign code representative of your institution. This field must reflect in Student Verification to ensure that the student import file is uploaded in Student Verification from Anthology Student with no errors.
-
Select the campus used to determine the add and drop settings for courses. For example, there is a setting that specifies whether or not drop dates are enforced. If they are, the method used to enforce them. The options are Student’s Enrollment Campus and Course Section’s Campus.
-
Specifies whether the default campus selected when staff members use Global/Advanced Search is their default campus or All Campuses. If you select Default Campus for Staff Member, the default campus displayed when a staff member accesses the search is the default campus they selected during log in. If you select All Campuses, the default displayed when a staff member accesses search is All Campuses. Selecting All Campuses can affect the performance of search. Before searching, staff members will still have the option to change it from the default value.
-
The group you specified for the campus. Your institution configures the groups for campuses.
-
Select a Campus Group to which this budget applies. If you want the budget to apply to all campuses, select ALL.
-
Specifies the campus group for which the report is generated.
-
Select the Campus Group to which the corporate record applies.
-
Specify the campus groups to view transactions released to the General Ledger for the campuses that are part of the selected campus groups only.
-
The campus group that will use the registration tracks.
-
Specify the campus groups to post or edit attendance for dates that are on or before the Last Earn Date. This field is displayed only if you select Campus Group as the Campus Type.
-
Select group(s) of campuses for which you would like to view cash drawer sessions data.
-
Select group(s) of campuses for which you would like to view student ledger transactions.
-
Select group(s) of campuses for which you would like to view the refunds and stipends.
-
Select campus groups to be evaluated for Title IV credit balance.
-
Select campus groups to be evaluated for Title IV credit balance.
-
The campus where the student or students were enrolled.
-
Select a Campus License Units (CLU) option: Full or Half. There are no limitations on full license units. All programs that receive financial aid are set up with full license units. A program version that is set up with half license units is usually for continuing education or distance education that does not require financial aid or degree audits. Anthology Student recognizes this lesser requirement and processes data accordingly. If a program version is set up with half license units, the Course List button is disabled. Example: If an institution is licensed for 900 ASRs (Active Student Records), and they go over that amount, they will receive a pop-up message to inform them that they have gone over their Max Campus License Unit (CLU) by X amount, and that they have 45- days to resolve the matter.
-
If you have a logo that you want to merge in documents, the location of the logo on the LAN (such as the logo to insert into transcripts).
-
Name of the campus for which the Transfer Student Monitoring (TSM) hold group is configured.
-
The campus where the student or students were enrolled.
-
Select the campus to map the Campus Tests to actual Test Fields at the campus level. You can configure one test type differently for multiple campuses; however, only one campus can use one configuration per test type.
-
Specifies all the active campuses for a test.
-
Indicates the Campus list will display either campuses or campus groups.
-
The name of the campus.
-
Select the campus associated with the payment apply order that you would like to copy from.
-
Select the campus associated with the payment apply order that you would like to delete.
-
The campus which you would like to process tuition discounts.
-
The current signed-in campus.
-
The campus where the student is enrolled.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. It is filtered to display the campuses to which you have access. In some cases, it is also used to filter a list to only those items for the campus. In some lists, you can select more than one campus or select All. In lists that display columns, if the column contains more than one campus, you cannot sort or filter on that column.
-
The campus or campuses that the account status will be associated.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item to which they have been given access. It is filtered to display the campuses where you have access. It is also used to filter a list to only those items for the campus. You can select more than one campus.
-
Select the campuses where the area of study is available.
-
The campus or campuses to which the term association is assigned. When selecting additional campuses for a preconfigured term association, you must select the “Configure AY Track” button. This is needed to initiate a validation to make sure the selected terms are associated with the selected campuses.
-
The campuses associated with the transcript batch.
-
Select campus(es) for which you would like to view cash drawer sessions data.
-
The campus that will be associated with the cash drawer.
-
The campuses that the cash payment name will be associated with.
-
Select the campuses to be included in the duplicate search when a student is entered for the currently selected campus.
-
Indicates the campuses that will offer or share this course. When you save the record, a campus group is dynamically created or updated for all the selected campuses.
-
The campus or campuses that the credit card types will be associated.
-
Select campuses for which you would like to view student ledger transactions.
-
Indicates the campus or campuses for which you want to disable the fund source.
-
The campuses that was selected for stipends evaluation. Only students enrolled at the selected campuses will be evaluated for stipends.
-
Select the campuses to view transactions released to the General Ledger for the selected campuses only.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. It is filtered to display the campuses where you have access. In some cases, it is also used to filter a list to only those items for the campus. In some lists, you can select more than one campus. In lists that display columns, if the column contains more than one campus, you cannot sort or filter on that column. This field is disabled when you select Yes in All Campuses field.
-
The campus(es) the job is configured for. All campuses displayed and available for selection are filtered by the selected Reporting Entity ID.
-
The campus or campuses to which this policy has been applied. This field is not editable.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned.
-
The campus or campuses to which a person or item is assigned. This field gets enabled when you select the option Campus Based, in If In Field of Study is No, Student is Considered Not Placed column.
-
The campus or campuses selected for the batch.
-
Select campuses for which you would like to view refunds and stipends.
-
Select the campuses associated with the refunds/stipends that you would like to process.
-
This drop-down display the campuses where you have access. Only students enrolled at the selected campuses will be evaluated for stipends.
-
Select campuses to generate students’ bills. Only students who are enrolled in the selected campuses will have bills generated.
-
Select the campus to generate subsidiary statements.
-
Select the campuses for the process.
-
The campuses that are associated with the term.
-
The campuses that will be associated with the default billing term.
-
The campus or campuses for the term. You can associate the same code with campuses that are not already associated with the code. The term page displays only campuses that are not associated with a code.
-
The campuses to which the update job status process applies.
-
Select the campus or campuses that will check for duplicate employer entries.
-
Indicates the campus group to which the Contact Type code applies.
-
The group of campuses associated with the item. Your institution configures the groups for campuses.
-
Specifies the campus group to which the job type applies.
-
The campus group to which the Reason Code applies.
-
If Anthology Student is integrated with CampusVue Finance, HR & Payroll, specify the location of the executable.
-
The student gives this person permission to amend or remove a review request.
-
The student gives this person permission to add a review request.
-
The reason the class was cancelled.
-
The date to stop enrollment for the program version. The program version will no longer be offered on the start of this date. Students who are already enrolled in the program version must be unenrolled or updated to include another start date. You can specify a cancel date for example, if you do not meet the minimum number of enrollments or starts required for the program version.
-
Select whether you want to notify a staff member when a Direct Loan is canceled/cannot be cancelled by SPE. When you select Yes, the Cancel Direct Loan Notification field becomes editable. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Select the staff member to be notified when a Direct Loan is canceled/cannot be cancelled by SPE. This field is editable only when Cancel Direct Loan is set to Yes.
-
Select the disbursement template. This field is editable only when Cancel Direct Loan is set to Yes.
-
Specify whether you want to notify a staff member when Title IV grant disbursements are canceled by SPE. When you select Yes, the Cancel Disbursement Template, Re-expect Disbursement Template, and Notify Staff fields become editable. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Select the check box to allow the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) feature to cancel a Direct Loan or any remaining scheduled disbursements of the Direct Loan when the SPE update causes the loan’s BBAY start date to be later than the Award Year’s end date or when the SPE update causes the BBAY end date to be earlier than the Award Year’s start date.
-
Specifies the number of days within which the student is permitted to cancel or drop the enrollment and loan without having to repay a portion of the loan.
-
Shows the date and time when the batch was canceled. Blank if the batch was not canceled.
-
Indicates whether the batch process was canceled.
-
Refers to the canceled batch.
-
The total amount from canceled awards for this Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
The seating capacity of the room.
-
Select whether you want maximum or normal capacity for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specifies the number of students that can be seated in the room.
-
The capture profile that you configured in Perceptive Content that defines the capture files in Perceptive Content.
-
The credit card number. The card number is required only if your institution has configured online payment and enabled verification of credit cards.
-
The credit card type, for example, visa or master card.
-
The career field associated with the employer.
-
Select this check box to package and award the financial aid for a student eligible to receive a Career Pathway Alternative Pell grant. This field is only displayed if ATB code 12 or 14 was specified for the education on their Previous Education (Students > Admissions > Previous Education). The Career Pathway Alternative Pell Grant Disbursement Schedules use the same maximum Pell Grant eligible expected EFC/SAI that was used to develop the Regular Federal Pell Grant Payment and Disbursement Schedules. Once the annual award amount for the student is determined using the Alternative Pell Grant Disbursement Schedules, all other Pell funding calculations are the same as those used for regular Pell Grant awards, but based on the Alternative Pell Grant Disbursement Schedules. Calculation of the grant is based on the student’s full scheduled award under the Regular Federal Pell Grant Payment Schedule.
-
First and then last of the Career Services Advisor for the student. By default the list is sorted by first name.
-
First and then last of the Career Services Advisor for the employers.
-
This field get enabled only when you select Yes in the Assign Career Service Advisor field. You can select multiple career service advisors at a time.
-
Select the career services advisor whose employers are being reassigned.
-
Select the career service advisor for which you want to generate the report.
-
The Career Service Representative for the student. If a staff member is removed from a Career Service Representative group after having been assigned to a student, Anthology Student retains the name of the former representative on the student record.
-
Select the Career Services Advisor.
-
The Career Services Advisor to assigned to the employer.
-
Select the check box to enable the system to automatically carry over estimated aid to an enrollment. Leave the check box cleared if you want to do this manually.
-
Total of other funding sources paid directly to the student.
-
This is the total of other funding sources paid directly to the student. This amount is the total paid for Cash plans and includes the interest. It is display only and not used in the top-down math to determine the Remaining Balance to Schedule.
-
Indicates the amount of cash accepted.
-
The session information for the cash drawer. This field is displayed only if cashiering is enabled.
-
Indicates the session information for the cash drawer. This field is displayed only if cashiering is enabled. This field also indicates the deposit receipt number or DRN.
-
The cash drawer session for the transaction.
-
Specify a cash drawer session ID if you want to search for transactions that are associated with certain bank accounts only.
-
The session information for the cash drawer. This field is displayed only if cashiering is enabled.
-
Select cash drawer(s) for which you would like to view cash drawer sessions data.
-
Indicates the difference between total net drawdowns/payments and total Net Accepted & Posted Disbursements (NAPD).
-
The Code and Name of the available cash payment records.
-
The Code and Name of the available cash payment records. This field is enabled when the selected payment type is cash payment.
-
Current system status of the selected cash payment plan. These are: Sent for Approval, Approved, Not able to obtain, No Longer Needed, Not Requested, Not Sent, On File, Out for Approval, Portal Required, Received but Rejected, Required, Requested – not Required, Requested – Required, Sent.
-
Indicates the amount of cash received.
-
Indicates the cash summary report type, for example, yearly or monthly.
-
The catalog configured by your institution. The catalog contains the courses required for a program version or area of study. The Default - None catalog should not be used.
-
Indicates the course catalog that the requirement rule will be applied to. The Default - None catalog should not be used.
-
The code that will be assigned to the catalog.
-
Displays the catalog code associated with the program version that you select for a student. The catalog contains the courses required for a program version or area of study. They are configured by your institution.
-
Select the catalog for which you want to generate the report.
-
When selected, Anthology Student adds the new course to the catalog years displayed on the Catalog tiles for the course being copied.
-
The catalog contains the courses required for a program version or area of study. They are configured by your institution. If all the campuses within a campus group are configured with Enable Catalogs, this field is displayed as required. The Default - None catalog should not be used.
-
If the Configured column displays Yes, the Category field indicates the Code for the configured the fund source category. Select Update Fund Source Category to edit the values in this column.
-
The category for advertisement is decided by your institution.
-
Displays the category for the catalog for the associated program version for the student.
-
The category of citizenship. The categories are Ineligible Non-Citizen, Eligible Non-Citizen, US National, and US Citizen.
-
The course category that will be associated with the program version.
-
The course category name. The category column displays dynamic information against the program version selection.
-
The category for the course. A course must have a category if you want Anthology Student to include the course in the appropriate locations in the student degree pathway and degree progress audit. If you do not select a value, it is not included in the Degree Pathway and displayed under Course Taken Not Applied in the Degree Progress Audit.
-
Specifies the type of activity associated with examination on which fee is calculated.
-
The Category for the J-1 student or exchange visitor. The Category field is required when Transmission Status is D or R and Action is Begin New Program or Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
Specifies the category. Packaged indicates the status applies to academic years that are packaged. Not packaged indicates the status applies to academic years that are not packaged yet.
-
The course category name.
-
Indicates the course category that the requirement rule will be applied to.
-
The course category required for the selected program version or area of study.
-
The category for the course. A course must have a category if you want Anthology Student to include the course in the appropriate locations in the student degree pathway and degree progress audit. If you do not select a value, it is not included in the Degree Pathway and displayed under Course Taken Not Applied in the Degree Progress Audit. On the Student Course list, the category is disabled if the course is in the course list for the program version. The field is enabled if you are adding the course or Anthology Student automatically added the course because a student did not receive a passing score on the test and it was configured to automatically add the class to their list.
-
The category of task. The categories are configured by your institution.
-
Number of days after Post Withdrawal Disbursement notification to send a cautionary message to the user.
-
The mobile phone number.
-
Paid disbursements are evaluated against eligibility criteria at the census date.
-
Select the Census Period: Course, Payment Period, or Child Term/Module.
-
When the Census occurs. Select either Number of Days, Add/Drop Date, or Percentage of Period. Note: the fields underneath Census Recurrence change based on your selection - either multiple Days fields display when Number of Days is chosen or multiple Value fields display when Percentage of Period is chosen.
-
End date of the Graduation Ceremony.
-
Number of addiotional guests student requested to bring with them in their graduation ceremony event.
-
Start date of the Graduation Ceremony.
-
Name of the certificate.
-
Indicates where or no this course providing any certificate. Default value this field is set to No. In case the course is providing any certificate, the value of this field needs to be set to Yes.
-
The date when the institution certified the enrollment information.
-
The certification type associated with the veteran student.
-
Name of the completed Certification
-
The certifications associated with the admissions representative.
-
The certifications held by the staff member.
-
The COD system returns <CFHEligible> in the response file ifor Pell awards with schema version 5.0b. This tag will only be returned from COD if there is a CFH Indicator = Yes or No on the Pell Award. Anthology Student stores this tag as YES or NO when imported under Import Response (COMREC, CRPG, CRAA, CRWB, CRND). The flag on the Award form is updated if the value is YES.
-
The Children of Fallen Heroes (CFH) Indicator for PGRC, PGYR, PGMR message classes is Y, N, or blank. It will only be populated in files for award year 2019-20 or later.
-
If your institution is sending enrollment reporting data to Clearinghouse, select the check box if the student does not want their name and/or attendance dates sent to third parties by Clearinghouse.
-
Indicates whether the record was changed.
-
Select this check box to change the application status.
-
Indicates changed values in the TSM/FAH Details Record Types, where: Type 1: Aggregates, Perkins, and Flags Record Type 2: Name History Record Type 3: Overpayment Record Type 4: Grant Payment Record Type 5: Loan Detail Record Click the links to view the details.
-
The number assigned to the change by Anthology Student.
-
When completing the task results in a new status for the lead, select the check box and select a new status. The check box and list are only displayed if the student has a Anthology Student Status Category of Lead (such as New Lead, Interview Schedule, or Interviewed).
-
This option allows you to configure the automated process by Change Send Type, such as releases, disbursement cancellations/changes, refunds, and loan cancellations/reinstatements, which can all be multi-selected. Additionally, you can configure the fund type, fund source, and award year based on the options available, which can also be multi-selected.
-
The exact change made to that job.
-
The value for the field in the Anthology Student database before it was changed.
-
The field value before the adjustment was made.
-
The value for the field of the subsidiary transaction before it was updated.
-
The value for the field in the Anthology Student database after it was changed.
-
The field value after the adjustment was made.
-
The value for the field of the subsidiary transaction after it was updated.
-
Indicates the changes made for Registration Relationships under audit.
-
Specifies the value before it is changed. Anthology Student populates the list with values appropriate for the value you selected in the Schedule Task For and When list. For example, if you selected Applicant/Enrollment for Schedule Task For and Enrollment Status Change in the When list, it displays all the enrollment statuses (such as Half Time, 3/4 Time, Full Time, and Less than half time). If there is no previous value or action, the field is disabled.
-
Specifies the value after it is changed or the status after an action that does not have a previous value. If it is a status following an action that does not have a previous action, the Changes From field is disabled. For example, Ledger Transaction Added. Anthology Student populates the list with values appropriate for the value you selected in the Schedule Task For and When list. For example, if you selected Applicant/Enrollment for Schedule Task For and Enrollment Status Change in the When list, it displays all the enrollment statuses (such as Half Time, 3/4 Time, Full Time, and Less than half time).
-
The charges posted to the student's ledger card.
-
The charge period of the housing.
-
If the course has a retake Fee, use this setting to define the number of attempts after which a retake fee is charged. This list is enabled only when Retake Fee is set to Yes. You must specify a value greater than zero.
-
The charge or adjustment amount that has been posted.
-
The charges or adjustment amount.
-
The charges posted to the student's subsidiary card.
-
One of the transaction types available when searching for transactions. Select this transaction type to search for standard charges.
-
Indicates the Actual/Expected charges calculated for each student for the terms specified.
-
Indicates that charges for new classes will be included.
-
The check used for payment.
-
The amount specified in the check.
-
The master check's amount.
-
The amount of the master check.
-
Specifies if student attendance in class is required to earn tuition and other deferred charges. If you select the check box, you must also specify values for Attendance Percent, Cumulative Hours Attended, or both fields.
-
If your institution releases to Great Plains, the name of the account for the check book. The check book was configured when accounts for banks were configured by your institution.
-
The date when the check was cleared for payment.
-
The date when the check was cleared.
-
The date when the check was issued.
-
Select the check box if you do not want to include students who have pending payments or payouts in progress.
-
This indicates whether conflict checking has to be enabled for the selected room.
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to display a message when you try to schedule an instructor for a class when the instructor is already scheduled for the same time in another class section on the Class Schedules page. (Select the Class Schedules tile.)
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to check for scheduling conflicts when an instructor is added with Yes selected for Check for Scheduling Conflicts. When Yes is selected, Anthology Student checks to see if the instructor is already scheduled for the same time in another class section on the Class Schedules page. (Select the Class Schedules tile.)
-
Indicates if the students meeting the assignment criteria are registered to a term.
-
The check number used for the payment. This is displayed only if you select Check as the Payment Method.
-
The check number and reference number for the transaction.
-
The check number used for the payment. This is displayed only if you select Check as the Payment Method.
-
The check number for the stipend.
-
The check number used for the payment.
-
The check number used for the transaction. Use this field to search for transactions that are associated with a specific check number.
-
The check number used for the payment. This option is only available when the Refund option is set to Post Directly to Ledger Card (No Check Required).
-
The master check number.
-
The number of the check issued for the work-study payment.
-
Select this check box to ensure that the stipends check number can be edited.
-
The check number associated with the individual records of the master checks.
-
Select the check box to check Servicer disbursements against the approval criteria.
-
Indicate the status of the check. The options are Include All, Cleared, Sent, Unclaimed, Void.
-
Determines the status of the check whether it is cleared, sent, unclaimed, or void.
-
The kind of check you wish to issue.
-
The check number or the electronic funds transfer (EFT) number.
-
Enter a value for the Checkpoint field, if applicable. The Checkpoint value is a number between 1 and 255. A zero value indicates that there is no checkpoint associated with the SAP detail. For more details, see Note below.
-
The benchmarks established by the institution's SAP policy. For term-based programs, specifies that SAP evaluation is modified to determine the previous checkpoint value for the last time SAP was executed for the student. Anthology Student ignores sequences that have a checkpoint greater than 0, but less than or equal to any previous checkpoints evaluated. A student is then evaluated if the student details meet the SAP evaluation criteria and the student has not previously been evaluated for the sequence checkpoint. SAP evaluation includes checkpoint evaluation only on SAP sequences where a checkpoint number is specified. The checkpoint value is stored in the SAP Audit table to indicate the last checkpoint evaluated. If the students are not evaluated due to not meeting any of the checkpoints, they are still evaluated for the items on the SAP policy (such as maximum tine frame validation and maximum attempts). Specify a value between 0 and 255. 0 indicates that there is no checkpoint. Checkpoints are evaluated across linked enrollments. The checkpoint information is displayed on the SAP related reports.
-
Amount of refund checks being released to the check book/account.
-
Name of the person designated as Chief Invigilator by your institution.
-
The child term to which the adjustment applies.
-
This view option is visible only if the student earns revenue on child terms. If Child Term view is selected, then the Earnings Summary grid will display earnings summary records for the child terms only. The Earnings Detail grid will display only earnings detail records for the child term earnings summary record.
-
Enforce that the child term’s end date must fall within the end date of the parent term.
-
Indicates the name of the child term as part of a parent term. A child term can be a parent term to other terms and can have one or more parent terms.
-
Displays available child terms. Anthology Student displays this column only when you select the Show Parent Terms Only check box.
-
Select this check box once you have confirmed that a student is eligible for the Children of Fallen Heroes scholarship (only applicable for award year 2018-2019 or higher).
-
The programs that an applicant has applied for.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status field in the Choices under an Application when an Applicant does not meet the minimum requirements for any of their Choices.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status field in the Choices under an Application when an Applicant meets the minimum requirements for any of their Choices.
-
The Classification of Instructional Program (CIP) code associated with the record.
-
The classification of instructional program (CIP) code associated with the program version. If the program is associated with a CIP Code, the CIP Code field displays the same value.
-
The descriptive name of the Classification of Instructional Programs (CIP) code.
-
Select the check box to apply the CIP code reporting assignment.
-
The year when the CIP code was introduced.
-
The Classification of Instructional Program (CIP) code associated with the Associate CIP Code with Area of Study or Program.
-
The Name, Code, and Description of the CIP Code that will be associated with the program. The CIP Code assigned to the program will be automatically assigned to the program version. This option enables institutions to accurately report all program-related activity to COD.
-
Description of the program associated with the CIP code.
-
The CIP Year field is available in Regulatory 12.1 and later. The CIP Year can be 2010 or 2020.
-
Indicates the type of US citizenship or if the student is not a citizen.
-
The citizenship status of the student. The citizenship status is used to determine whether a student is eligible for financial aid. A citizenship status of a Non-Citizen is usually associated with an alien registration number. A Non-Citizen who is eligible for financial aid should be designated as an Eligible Non-Citizen. A Non-Citizen who is not eligible for financial aid should be designated as an Ineligible Non-Citizen.
-
The citizenship status for the student.
-
The citizenship status code configured in Anthology Student for Non-Citizen, Eligible Non-Citizen, US National, and US Citizen.
-
The name of the city.
-
Indicates the city. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operators.
-
The city the agency is located in.
-
The city where the building is located.
-
The name of the city.
-
Name of the employer's city.
-
City where the building is located.
-
The name of the city to which the student or person belongs to.
-
Select the condition for the city in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (Aventura;Coral Springs) in the respective value field, the report displays the academic years between Aventura and Coral Springs only.
-
The city where the location is.
-
The payee's city.
-
Select the condition for the City output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Contains' and enter the characters (Al) in the respective value field, the report displays all City values containing the entered characters.
-
Enter the city value.
-
The name of the city.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for city. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
Select the option for college application status for which you want to generate the report.
-
The CommonLine hold code or release code. H indicates hold disbursement until release notification is given. R indicates release the disbursement as scheduled. The code can also be blank. When you add a loan, the default value is the hold or release indicator code specified for the CommonLine recipient (lender or servicer) of this loan. This can be located in the record in the CL Recipient table that matches the lender or guarantor criteria specified for the loan.
-
The recipient of the CommonLine file. Recipients are configured by your institution.
-
The CommonLine status for the disbursement.
-
The class duration.
-
Indicates that the class does not have regularly scheduled meeting dates and times. This option allows instructors to create a class schedule for a course section as the class progresses.
-
The start and end time of the class period, along with the duration in minutes.
-
A unique identifier of the Class Schedule.
-
The Class Schedule that represents the class section into which the student is registered.
-
Choose to switch between Name or Employee ID when searching for an instructor on Class Scheduling.
-
The class or course section name.
-
The class or course section name. The Class Section drop-down list is enabled only if the following criteria are met: - Billing Method is set to 'Bill by Course' - Earning Method is set to 'Course Section' - Transactions are posted to the ledger under 'TUIT' code
-
The date when the class or class section ends.
-
Displays the section name of the class schedule.
-
Name of the Class Section.
-
The start date of the class or class section.
-
Indicates the status of the class section, for example, scheduled.
-
The status of the student for the class section.
-
The class section start and end date.
-
The date when the class or class section ends.
-
The end of the date class or class section.
-
The start date of the class or class section.
-
The start date of the class or class section.
-
Specifies if the position type is full-time or part-time.
-
If you select Yes, Anthology Student clears the request from the system. If you select No, the request remains in the system and will be printed the next time a batch is created if it meets the selection criteria. In both cases, Anthology Student maintains the record of the request in Tasks list (Students tile > select the student name > Contact Manager > Tasks tile).
-
Indicates removing open revenue records created by the Revenue Recognition process. This action is not available if the revenue record selected is a deferred revenue recognition record.
-
The Clearinghouse assigned branch code is a 2-digit numerical value that will be associated with each batch run if provided. It has no impact on the data gathered to be sent.
-
If the Program Version is set up as a clock hour program, values are displayed as hours instead of credits.
-
Indicate the number of credits in the Credit Hour program that the student must achieve in the beginning of the academic year.
-
The clock hours earned for the course.
-
For program versions that have been configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours, specifies the number of hours associated with the disbursement.
-
Clock to credit conversion display.
-
When selected, the staff member can close tasks created for other staff members in the staff group if they also have Close selected for the task template in the Task Templates grid. Once a task is assigned to a staff member, they can edit and close the task even if the Edit and Close options are not selected in the Activity Policy grid. While a staff member can edit and close any task assigned to them, including tasks they add for themselves, it is recommended you select Edit and Close in the grid to track their available permissions.
-
When selected staff members can close their tasks and close any staff members in staff groups with Close permission selected in the Staff Groups grid. Once a task is assigned to a staff member, they can edit and close the task even if the Edit and Close options are not selected in the Activity Policy grid. While a staff member can edit and close any task assigned to them, including tasks they add for themselves, it is recommended you select Edit and Close in the grid to track their available permissions.
-
Specifies the time of closure of the building.
-
The closing balance. The balance of the bank plus all cash, checks, and receipts received.
-
The end date for billing.
-
Cutoff date that is used to gather payments from student’s payment plans to be included in the statement.
-
The statement’s closing date.
-
The cutoff date for subsidiary transactions to be included in the statement.
-
Indicates the identification number displayed on the URL of the particular document when you edit an existing document status on the Document Statuses from Contact Manager under Configuration tile.
-
The number assigned to the batch by Anthology Finance & HCM (CNF).
-
The number assigned by Anthology Student to the batch that released the transactions to Anthology Finance & HCM
-
Which budget methodology to use with the COA: choose either: Current, Future, Past, or COA as of (and enter date in field to the right). Note that the date field is only enabled when you choose COA as of.
-
Indicates the Cost of Attendance. It is the cost that a student pays for the category he selects for that academic year.
-
Indicates the total cost of all direct and indirect costs associated with a student within an academic year. The amount includes tuition, books, room, board, and any fees the institution wants to include as long as Federal Regulations are applied. There are specific regulations to follow so that some funds can only be used if they are applied to the COA or cost of attendance.
-
The budgeted cost of attendance (COA) minus the total aid packaged.
-
The Central Processing System (CPS) adds comment codes and text to the student’s transaction to provide information to the student and the Financial Aid Administration (FAA) about the student’s processed FAFSA.
-
Collects and validates files for export to Common Origination and Disbursement (COD).
-
When an institution opts to export funds being disbursed in a batch during COD Export.
-
Gathers and imports files from Common Origination and Disbursement (COD).
-
COD Edit code.
-
Status of the transaction at COD. The statuses are: A=Approved; B=Batched sent; E=Error; R=Received
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution. In most cases, codes must be unique.
-
The account status code.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution. In this case, code must be of up to eight characters.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution. This column displays the: • Campus code if Configure By is set to Transaction Code • Transaction code if Configure By is set to Campus • Program Version code if Configure By is set to Campus and Override Campus Amount By Program Version is selected
-
The cash drawer code.
-
The cash drawer code. The cash drawer code includes a pre-defined system cash drawer, INTEGRATION and the System attribute for this cash is set to Yes. This cash drawer is initially associated with all campuses that currently have cashiering enabled and you can edit this association as needed. To use this cash drawer, the cash drawer's code "INTEGRATION" can be referenced through APIs when posting payments to Anthology Student. The cash drawer's code "INTEGRATION" cannot be edited since it is used to identify this system-defined cash drawer.
-
The cash payment code.
-
Specify a Code of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the export file definition. Code should be similar to name of the product.
-
In most cases, it is the internal code for the course.
-
The credit card type code.
-
The internal code assigned to the selected document.
-
The drawdown or return source code.
-
Indicates a unique code to identify the employer. The Employer Code field can accommodate 16 characters.
-
The charge code associated with the fee schedule.
-
Code of the building.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution. In most cases, codes must be unique.
-
The alphanumeric transaction code assigned to the transaction by your institution.
-
If you selected Yes for Use Midterm as Code, the field displays the word Midterm and the field is disabled. If you select No, you can use the field to specify a value for your own tracking purposes. The option to print and scan a roster to record midterm grades requires the use of form number F-15173-CMC-L. The class section must also have a lesson set up with a code of Midterm.
-
The Program Version code.
-
The refund policy code.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the requisite rule by your institution. While the names can be the same, the code must be unique.
-
Program code (when in programs view) or program version code (when in program versions view).
-
The user name for the staff member.
-
The user name of the Admissions Representative.
-
Unique mailbox identifier for a campus or group of campuses. (max. 10 characters in length)
-
Enter the alphanumeric code for the subsidiary.
-
The term code.
-
The term group code.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the Term. You can associate the same code with campuses that are not already associated with the code. The term page displays only campuses that are not associated with the code.
-
Indicates the Transaction code associated with the debit transaction.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to workflow. In most cases, the code must be unique.
-
Code showing the priority order for the transaction category.
-
Identifies the cohort period associated with the report.
-
Display field that applies to 90/10 Report calculations. It is displayed after you save the award and only if the fund source for the award was configured to use individual institution loan calculations.
-
The collections status. More than one statuses can be selected.
-
The college to which the transcript request was sent.
-
Name of the college.
-
The college to which the prospect belongs to.
-
Select this option to enter a new college code manually.
-
The number of columns in the seating arrangement of a Room.
-
Indicates the value for column delimiter character. This field is enabled only when you select Variable Length option in File Delimiter Option field.
-
The name of column which was modified.
-
The number of columns in the seating arrangement of a Room.
-
Amount of the subsidized and unsubsidized loan balance applicable to the student.
-
Aggregate Outstanding Principal Balance (OPB) for all subsidized and unsubsidized loans held by the borrower that counts against the student's overall loan limits.
-
Area you can use to specify comments or additional information about a change or a request.
-
Area you can use to specify comments or additional information about the final grade change reason, for example, extra credit.
-
Information about the changes made to the incident.
-
Area you can use to specify comments or additional information about a change or a request. The text hat you enter into this field appears in the Employer Audit table.
-
The Central Processing System (CPS) adds comment codes and text to the student’s transaction to provide information to the student and the Financial Aid Administration (FAA) about the student’s processed FAFSA.
-
A text field reserved to add comments.
-
Displays any notes specified for the enrollment.
-
Specify comment when students are marked as not eligible.
-
You can use this option to see system-generated comments related to the status change.
-
Specify comment when attendance is marked as Absent.
-
Specifies the details of the error in view earning lines status.
-
If a fund source is configured as a non-Title IV Federal education assistance fund for 90/10 calculation purposes, you can select this check box to indicate whether the fund source is a commingled fund source where the fund comes from non-Federal entities that are commingled with Federal education assistance funds. The default value for this setting is false (not a commingled fund).
-
The amount of the authorized amount that has been committed. The committed value is a percentage of the authorized amount that your institution configured for the fund. For Pell Grants, Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grants (IASG), and Gap funds, it is set to 100% of the amount authorized. For all other fund types, you can specify the value. (Typically the value is set to 100% for other fund types as well.)
-
The committee of people authorized by your institution to conduct exams and perform tasks associated with them. Committees are configured by your institution. The list contains committees configured for the slots and campus.
-
Name of the examination committee configured by your institution.
-
When adding a loan, the value of this column for each disbursement defaults to the default hold/release indicator code specified for the CommonLine recipient of this loan. The CommonLine recipient is determined by finding the record in the CL Recipient table that matches the lender/guarantor criteria specified for the loan.
-
If a new loan is added or the contents of the CommonLine Loan ID is null, Anthology Student displays NOT CREATED. The CommonLine Loan ID will be created for each loan that is extracted during the routine that creates the Application Send file. This ID is 17 characters and cannot be edited here.
-
The ID assigned to the loan by CommonLine.
-
Specify the CommonLine import path directory.
-
Indicates the code associated with CommonLine Fund Source. This field is editable.
-
CommonLine Loan ID associated with the loan.
-
CommonLine disbursement sequence number.
-
Indicates the CommonLine System identification number. The CommonLine System ID will be created for each loan that is extracted by the process that creates the Application Send file. This ID cannot be edited here. If a new loan is added or the contents of the CommonLine Loan ID is null, Anthology Student displays NOT CREATED.
-
Indicates whether or not a service component is required for reporting. Yes indicates it is required.
-
The student commutes to the United States of America to study at the institution.
-
Specifies the company details of the person to be filled in the General Public form.
-
Specify the company's identification number. This field supports up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
-
The Corporate, Company, Institution, or Campus name in official student records or reports.
-
Enter the corporate, company, institution, or campus name that you want Anthology Student to use at the bottom of the predefined reports.
-
Indicates that the campus is configured to compare Course Contact Hours with class Scheduled Hours. In this comparison, the hours specified in the course or class section is used in the comparison, instead of the course contact hours for variable credit course.
-
Select this check box to compare class hours scheduled to the contact hours configured at the course level.
-
If you select the Track Multiple Inquiries check box, specifies the date you want Anthology Student to use when it compares inquiries to find the latest entry. Prospect Date specifies you want use the Prospect Date on the inquiry. Last Task Date speficies the date that the most recent task was opened.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the compensation item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
Specifies the compensation plan based on the assignment type. They are configured by your institution. For example, you can have different compensation plans for overload assignments and adjunct assignments. Compensation plans are associated with assignment types configured with Yes for Has Payroll. They also specify the pay type and levels for the load types for the course groups and non-teaching groups.
-
The total credits or hours earned on courses that fulfill the Degree Progress Audit's required courses.
-
Indicates the exact time and date when the job completed.
-
Indicates the date and time when the job was completed.
-
The last and then first name of the staff member who completed the item.
-
The date and time when the batch was posted for rent charges.
-
The date when the item was completed.
-
After borrowers acknowledge that they have reviewed their outstanding loan balance at StudentAid.gov, COD returns the Informed Borrowing Completion Dates in CCYY-MM-DD format at the Award Level for each Direct Loan in the response file.
-
Indicate the type of completion.
-
This field is enabled when you select Literal as Component 1. Specify any literal name convention. Your entry is visible in Name Convention field.
-
This field is enabled when you select Literal as Component 2. Specify any literal name convention. Your entry is visible in Name Convention field.
-
This field is enabled when you select Literal as Component 2. Specify any literal name convention. Your entry is visible in Name Convention field.
-
Select an option for Component 1. The options are Date, GL Company Number, and Literal. When you select Literal, the Component 1 Text field is enabled. You cannot select same option in more than one component.
-
Select an option for Component 2. The options are Date, GL Company Number, and Literal. When you select Literal, the Component 2 Text field is enabled. You cannot select the same option in more than one component.
-
Select an option for Component 3. The options are Date, GL Company Number, and Literal. When you select Literal, the Component 3 Text field is enabled. You cannot select same option in more than one component.
-
The concentration that the requirement rule will be applied to.
-
A concentration is a specific area of emphasis within a student's chosen major.
-
Displays the course with the failed prerequisite.
-
Select the option to configure the course status that will be applied upon automatic unregistration if either of the automatic unregistration check boxes is selected.
-
Specifies the status of the courses with the failed prerequisite. The valid values are Current, Dropped, Future, Grade Posted, LOA, and Scheduled.
-
The type of offer that is conditional for the Applicant. These conditional offers may vary for Examination Boards based on when applications are processed and on additional requirements from the institution to be converted them to a final offer.
-
Select this option to designate sets of fields in which one data entry is sufficient for each set.
-
Configuration type for the institutional refund policy: either 'Setup by Campus Address' or 'Setup by Student Address'.
-
If you want to specify a value, select Enter a Value. If you want Anthology Student to use a value you specified during configuration, select Value from Configuration. For example, for a program version, if you want to require the number of credits specified using the Required Credits field when the program versions were configured, select Value from Configuration.
-
Indicates the options you can choose from to configure auto charge transactions. The options are Campus and Transaction Code.
-
Choose an option to configure auto charge transactions. The options are Campus and Transaction Code.
-
Select the check box if you want to configure tests for the lesson. When you select it, Anthology Student displays the Test Assessment Scheme list.
-
Indicates whether the registration lock is configured for a student or a student group.
-
Indicates whether the record is configured.
-
Re-enter the word or characters entered in the Password Column.
-
Specifies the term confirmation status for that student in a term. If your institution has configured to automatically unconfirm a term when a student unregisters for all of the courses in the term, Anthology Student changes the term to unconfirmed when all the courses are unregistered. Otherwise, a term remains confirmed when a student unregisters for all of the courses in the term unless it is manually unconfirmed.
-
A confirmation number your or your institution has picked.
-
All the receivables are displayed along with the totals for each type. When you confirm a receivable, all associated transactions are automatically confirmed in the Transactions grid.
-
Indication that the student will be returning to the course after the module break.
-
The date when the conflict started.
-
The type of the conflict.
-
Indicates connected enrollments. One enrollment must be specified as the default.
-
Indicates whether you want to generate bills for students with connected enrollments. When you select this option, the Term, Transaction Date, and Term Group fields are enabled. For students with connected enrollments at different campuses, the history grid only shows the enrollment/s for a student in the staff member’s campus group/s. If the staff member belongs to a specific campus and the student has connected enrollments at multiple campuses with a different default campus than the staff member, then the staff member is not able to view any information for the student. The information is not visible since the default campus of the student's enrollment is not part of the staff member's campus group access.
-
This field is displayed only when the billing frequency is set to Term. The options are Yes/No. The default is No. If you select Yes, the following fields are populated as shown below and cannot be edited: Automate Registration Charges =Yes, Auto Correct Course Detail = Yes, Posting Type = Aggregate, Use Term Group Billing = No. The Range options Credits and Hours are enabled. All other Range options are unavailable. Use this option if want to have the billing charges for both enrollments, which are connected, to post only to the designated default enrollment. The non-default enrollment ledger card will not have any charges when this option is used. The billing method configuration of the default enrollment will take precedence when billing with this option. Do not configure Term Groups when you use a billing method with the 'Connected Enrollment Billing' option set to 'Yes'.
-
The list of connected enrollments. When you select this, the options that get enabled are - Term, Transaction Date and Term Group.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to generate bills for students with connected enrollments. When you select this, the options that get enabled are - Term, Transaction Date and Term Group.
-
The number of consecutive hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the warning flag is set on the class section rosters.
-
The number of consecutive hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the student will be considered as dropped.
-
Indicates if the selected student can be identified as an athlete.
-
If the same activity is assigned to another staff member, the amount consumed by that staff member.
-
The hours used from the banked amount of hours for the faculty member.
-
The used FTE banked value for the faculty member.
-
The name of the contact within the institution. If you are selecting a contact in a list, it contains the contacts configured for your institution.
-
Select one of the previously established contacts or enter a new name.
-
Used to group characteristics for employer contacts.
-
Select the applicable contact attributes from the drop-down list.
-
Email address of the person who deals with building-related issues.
-
If the contact for the invoice is available.
-
The student's actual contact details, for example, email ID, phone number, and so on.
-
Select the name of the contact if it is a staff member of the campus.
-
The specific activity assigned to the contact manager (Refund Calculation, Verification Review, Scholarship Review, etc...)
-
Name of the contact manager advisor.
-
The descriptive name of the item.
-
Name of the person who deals with building-related issues on a daily basis.
-
The title of the contact.
-
Title of the person who deals with building-related issues on a daily basis.
-
The type of contact. Contact types are configured by your institution.
-
Select the contact type from the llist.
-
The contact types for employer. They are configured by your institution.
-
Specify the number of days after a payment period end date during which Automated SAP processing occurs. Once this value has been exceeded, automatic or manual SAP processing no longer occurs, unless you have the authority to override this setting. If the field blank, manual processing may be done at any time but no Automatic SAP processing occurs.
-
Specify the number of days after a term end date during which Automated SAP processing occurs. Once this value has been exceeded, automatic or manual SAP processing no longer occurs, unless you have the authority to override this setting. If the field is blank, manual processing may be done at any time but no Automatic SAP processing occurs.
-
Specifies the length of time for which the policy is evaluated. For example, you can specify a contract duration of a year. Contract durations are configured as terms.
-
The contract duration associated with the staff position assigned.
-
Indicates whether or not a contract that was rejected by faculty has been re-opened to associate a new template to a faculty or generate a new contract for a faculty.
-
Indicates the contract template.
-
Indicates the contract type.
-
If all load types for the activity were configured with a value of No for Allow Override, specifies the percentage the staff member is contributing. For example, if the default is 12 credit hours, the value for the remaining is 12, and you specify 50%, Anthology Student displays 6 credit hours.
-
The row number of the transmission batch.
-
Specifies the Conversion From Field to be used for the conversion of a test score to an equivalent score. The maximum length is 100 characters. It cannot consist of only spaces. For example, Equivalent SAT scores. Conversion From Field value can be specified, only when the Conversion Table is specified.
-
If you selected Yes for Use Clock to Credit – As of 07/01/2011, specify the rate (typically 25 for quarter-based program versions and 30 for semester or term-based program versions). Anthology Student will use the rate for students who enroll in the program version with a start date for the program version after 06/30/2011. The rate is divided into the clock hours completed to get the FA credits completed.
-
If you selected Yes for Use Clock to Credit, specify the rate (typically 20 for quarter-based program versions and 37.5 for semester or term-based program versions). The rate is divided into the clock hours completed to get the FA credits completed.
-
Specifies the table to be used for the conversion of an ACT score to an equivalent SAT score. The expected value is SyACTtoSATConversion. If Conversion Table is specified, Conversion From Field and Conversion To Field columns must also be defined.
-
Specifies the Conversion To Field to be used for the conversion of a test score to an equivalent score. The maximum length is 100 characters. It cannot consist of only spaces. For example, ACT scores. Conversion To Field value can be specified, only when the Conversion Table is specified.
-
When you select Do Not Convert (default), uses the same value as Credit Hours when the course is added to the Transfer Credit lists for a student. When you select Quarter Credits, multiplies the value for Credit Hours by 1.5 and uses the result when the course is added to the Transfer Credits list for a student. When you select Semester credits, multiplies the value for Credit hours by .67 and uses the result when the course is added to the Transfer Credits list for a student. The results are also displayed in the Converted Credits field. You can override the value.
-
Specifies whether or not the converted placement status for which you want to generate the report.
-
If you select Quarter Credits or Semester Credits in the Convert Credit Type list, it displays the result of the calculation. You can override the value.
-
The term that contains copied non-date information from the term that you will configure.
-
Enables you to copy a class schedule from one term to another or copy a class section to another section within the same term. After the copy process is complete, you still need to ensure that the dates, times, locations, and instructions are valid for the new class section.
-
Enables you to copy a class schedule. The options are: All Class Sections to Term, Single Class Section and Selected Class Sections. After the copy process is complete, you still need to ensure that the dates, times, locations, and instructions are valid for the new class section.
-
Enables you to copy a class schedule. The options are: All Class Sections to Term, Single Class Section and Selected Class Sections. After the copy process is complete, you still need to ensure that the dates, times, locations, and instructions are valid for the new class section. If you have checked Cross List property and selected Single Class Section, which has partially filled cross listed classes, then Anthology Student displays the below options: 1. Create new class section for partially filled classes and add to the new cross listed group. 2. Do not create new class section for partially filled classes and move them to a new cross listed group. 3. Do not create new class section for partially filled classes. If you have selected the option Selected Class Sections, Anthology Student displays the below options: 1.Copy only the selected course and cross list them 2.Copy all the related cross listed courses Select the required option.
-
Enables you to copy a class schedule from one term to another. After the copy process is complete, you still need to ensure that the dates, times, locations, and instructions are valid for the new term.
-
Enables you to copy a class section to another section within the same term. After the copy process is complete, you still need to ensure that the dates, times, locations, and instructions are valid for the new class section.
-
Include address information from the values stored in the student's profile.
-
The high school address is automatically used to populate the address values. Use this option if the address information for the transcript office or the contact is the same as the school.
-
Indicates that you want to copy non-date information from the selected term to the copied term. The Copied Term list is enabled only if you select the check box.
-
Set award limits for more than one award years. This field is a mult select list. The selected award years are applied only to the selected campus location.
-
Select the program versions. Anthology Student filters the list to display only the program versions that have the same value for Academic calendar, for Academic Year Type, for Uses Summer, and where the term sequences match.
-
Select Copy date and time information to blank columns only if you have existing dates in the grid you want to use and use the values you specify to complete the entries in the grid. Select Copy date and time information to all columns if you want to add or replace the dates for all of the entries in the grid.
-
Copies the associated prospect vendor address and contact information.
-
Year of copyright for the book.
-
Select Yes to specify the category is core. In the course fulfillment order, Anthology Student will fulfill core courses before non core courses.
-
The name of the corequisite course that was overridden during registration. By default, this column is hidden.
-
The name of the corporate city.
-
The corporate country of residence. If you are specifying a country, it defaults to the country for the campus. The country also determines the format of phone numbers. If you change the country, the phone numbers are automatically reformatted to the format for that country.
-
The location address of the corporate office for employers.
-
If within the United States, the name of the corporate state.
-
The corporate street address. For student addresses, if an address has more than 40 characters, the additional characters in the address line will not be extracted to be sent to COD but will be truncated.
-
The postal code for the corporate address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
Indicates the date of the correction if a financial aid administrator initiated the ISIR correction process.
-
Specifies whether or not this is a correction record for a student sent in a previous extract for the same term.
-
Cost of the item in dollars.
-
The cost of attendance. The source of the value can be the budget configured for the program version.
-
The cost of attendance (COA) calculated for the payment period.
-
The date when the student completed the FA Awareness Counseling on the https://studentloans.gov/myDirectLoan/index.action website. Note: Financial Awareness Counseling does not satisfy the regulatory requirements for Entrance Counseling and cannot be required as a condition for disbursement of loan funds.
-
Counseling Type Indicator: S = Subsidized & Unsubsidized Entrance Counseling; P = Subsidized, Unsubsidized, & PLUS Entrance Counseling; L = Financial Awareness Counseling; X = Exit Counseling
-
Number assigned by the system to the academic year and payment period combination.
-
The Record count.
-
The number of members assigned to a staff group.
-
The country of residence. If you are specifying a country, it defaults to the country for the campus. The country also determines the format of phone numbers. If you change the country, the phone numbers are automatically reformatted to the format for that country.
-
The country of residence. The system checks the student configured against a country. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The country of residence used for billing purposes.
-
The name of the employer's country.
-
The payee's country.
-
The country of the address.
-
International calling code.
-
The country of birth indicated in the student or person's passport. For J-1 visas, the Country of Birth field is required when Transmission Status is D or R and Action is Begin New Program or Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
The country that the international student or person is a citizen of. The Country of Citizenship field is required when the Visa type is J-1, Trans Status is either R or D and Action is ‘Begin New program’ or ‘Continuing Exchange Visitor'.
-
Country where the building is located.
-
The county for the address.
-
Name of the employer's county.
-
The county of residence used for billing purpose.
-
The payee's county.
-
The code and name identifying the course the student is enrolled in.
-
Specifies the course and the section code for the class.
-
The Code and Name identifying the course the student will register for.
-
The name of the course associated with the class.
-
The code, name, and status (Active or Inactive) identifying the course the student is enrolled in.
-
Select the code and name identifying the course the student is enrolled in. You can select one course at a time.
-
The name and code for the course.
-
The course list name.
-
The course code and course name of the equivalent or cross-referenced course.
-
Specifies the course associated with a term.
-
Indicates the course associated with an exam schedule.
-
Specify the number of days associated with the course which is mentioned in the rule.
-
The course code and course name of the course that will be designated as the parent course.
-
The code and name identifying the course the student is enrolled in. The course code and course name is displayed even if the course is inactive.
-
The course name in the substitution or elective pool.
-
The code and name of the course associated with the selected term.
-
The name of the course at another institution being transferred to your institution.
-
The course taken by the student that qualifies for the discount policy: - Displays the Code and Name of the course - Displays an arrow button for each parent record and enables you to view the different discount policies applicable for that course
-
The tuition amount charged for the course or for the term.
-
Specific features of the course. Course attributes are configured by your institution.
-
Course attributes enable you to define an attribute for a course and specify the number of credits that you need in a course.
-
The course categories required for the Area of Study.
-
The course categories required for the program version.
-
The course categories required for the program version. Course categories are displayed in the order they were set up for the program version.
-
The course category that the requirement rule will be applied to.
-
Displays the category name of the course.
-
If the fund source is configured to associate a course with payments, displays the name of the course selected when the payment was made. If a term is also displayed in the Term column, then the course is for that term.
-
The code of the course at another institution being transferred to your institution.
-
The code for the course.
-
The code of the course associated with the class.
-
The course code associated with the course name.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the course enrolled by the student.
-
The code identifying the course the student is enrolled in.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the course item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
The code of the course that the course was copied from.
-
The standard course time period in hours.
-
Select the Course Delivery Methods. Course delivery methods are listed as Active=True, or Inactive=False.
-
The name of the course that you will fulfill.
-
A short description of the course.
-
Indicates that you will include any course extensions when processing the charges.
-
The tuition amount calculated or posted in the Ledger Card based on the rate or course fee schedule.
-
Indicates the Effective Date for Course Fee Schedules used for evaluating Course Fee Schedules and Course Fees that are not set up on a rate schedule: - Student Enrollment Date: Anthology Student only bills students based on fees that are configured with an effective date before the student's enrollment date. - Payment Period Start Date: Anthology Student only bills students based on the fees configured with an effective date before the student's class start date.
-
Specifies the order that you want Anthology Student to use to fulfill courses in the degree progress audit (DPA). When a course appears in more than one place, Anthology Student uses the course fulfillment order to determine where the course is fulfilled first. The orders can be configured by your institution. If no order is specified, then the system Default course fulfillment order is used. For the field to be displayed, your institution must have selected Yes for Enable Feature Flag for Course Fulfillment Order when it configured advanced features in the system settings for Anthology Student.
-
Specifies the grade for the course if the Subminimum Score is not met.
-
Classifies the courses at your institution into groups. They are configured by your institution.
-
A unique identifier of the course.
-
This course will be assigned to the student who fails to reach the minimum score specified for the test. If the student falls below the minimum value, the selected course will be added to the student's course schedule if the course is not already included.
-
The course information: - If the billing method for the tuition discount policy is By Course, the name of the course in which the student is currently enrolled is displayed. - If the billing method for the tuition discount policy is By Term, the Course column has a View button. You can then view the courses taken by the student in the selected term that qualifies for the tuition discount policy.
-
Exam Lesson associated with a Course.
-
The course levels associated with the student's degree. Course levels are configured by your institution.
-
Select the course level from the defined course levels for the institution. When billing by course level, the rate schedule is used to define the amount billed for a specific course level. This creates a dependency on the course configuration and the Course Level that is set up for every course offered. When setting up a rate schedule using Range = Course Level Load, the "All" level will include all courses set as "All" level as well as any other courses not defined in the rate schedule.
-
The name and code of the course level that will be assigned to the course for billing purposes.
-
Course levels enable you to group the courses and apply the attributes to the group as a whole instead of individually.
-
The GPA calculated and displayed for each course level.
-
The course levels associated with the student's degree. Course levels are configured by your institution.
-
The Course List establishes a list of core and elective courses required for a program version.
-
Select one or up to 10 values from the list of configured Course Load Types.
-
The name of the course at another institution being transferred to your institution.
-
The name of the course.
-
The name of the course.
-
The name of the course enrolled by the student.
-
The name identifying the course the student is enrolled in.
-
The course name.
-
The name of the course configured by your institution.
-
The name of the course.
-
The Course Offering list enables you to filter courses based on Courses offered at the campus, Courses shared with other campuses, or Courses shared from other campuses.
-
The name and code of the course prefixes that will be assigned to the course.
-
Specify the text you want displayed as the caption for the N value for course progression. For additional information on Course Progression, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Specify the text you want displayed as the caption for the R value for course progression. For additional information on Course Progression, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Specify the text you want displayed as the caption for the Y value for course progression. For additional information on Course Progression, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Specifies the description you want displayed as the column label for course progression values in the Degree Progress Audit (enabled by the system administrators).
-
Select the option to configure the course reason that will be applied upon automatic unregistration if either of the automatic unregistration check boxes is selected.
-
The name of the Course Refund Policy used to calculate the selected refund adjustment.
-
Specifies whether fees are calculated per course or for all courses.
-
Select the campuses where the distance education courses were registered. Make sure the campus or campuses you select have nothing but distance education students. If you are not sure, or if the campus does not qualify, use one of the other selection criteria.
-
System configured date to register for the course.
-
Information denoting the relevance of the current internship to the student's degree.
-
Indicates that the course schedule should be included or omitted based on your selection. If you select Course Schedule, the Term check box is enabled to enable you to select the associated term.
-
The class or course section name.
-
Indicates the course section that can be associated with the payment. Select the course section from the drop-down. Each course section record contains the following columns: course code, course description, term code associated with the course, payment period associated with the course, and current course status. The Course Section drop-down is populated with courses from Student Courses that are not in Future status.
-
The prefix used to automatically generate Section IDs for all class sections in this term. Example, if you add “S1" here and 10000 in the Starting Number field, Section ID will start from S110000 and onwards for other class sections.
-
Displays a list of all available course sections based on the selected course or terms, if a term is selected. Course sections shared from other campuses are included in the list.
-
Indicates the time frame for which the course is scheduled.
-
Enables students from other campuses to take the course offered at this campus. Select the campuses that are allowed to share and cross-reference the course.
-
The status of the course. For example, Future, Future (Waitlisted), Future (Reserved), Scheduled, Current, Complete and Dropped.
-
Select an option for course status for which you want to generate the report.
-
The Course Status of the course that you want to unregister from.
-
Without override permission, a staff member can register and unregister courses that have prerequisites with these statuses. The status options are Complete, Complete/Current, and Complete/Current/Scheduled. If configured, Anthology Student also evaluates equivalent courses and the minimum GPA for completed prerequisites. For example, if you select Complete/Current/Scheduled and you do not require a minimum GPA, the prerequisite course for the student can be completed with any grade, the student can be currently taking the course, or the course can be scheduled for a staff member to register or unregister the course. If you select Complete and you configured a minimum GPA for the prerequisite, the student must have completed the course with the minimum GPA specified for the staff member to register or unregister the course.
-
The status of the course whose name has been changed.
-
The statuses of the conditional or prerequisite courses. You can filter based on the following statuses: - Current - Dropped - Future - Grade Posted - LOA - Scheduled
-
The code and name of the course being fulfilled.
-
The various types of courses available at the institution, for example, lecture, laboratory, internship, and so on.
-
The name and codes for specific types of courses, for example, lecture, laboratory, internship, and so on. A course type is associated with each course that you offer in your program of study.
-
Select the course types for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specifies the group of courses to add to the elective or substitution pool.
-
The code and name identifying the courses the student is enrolled in.
-
The Course that will be associated with the instructor.
-
The courses that will be used for workload management.
-
Courses that are available for students to enroll in. The list of courses is filtered based on the campus selection.
-
The courses that were applied to the requirement rule.
-
Select the courses for which you want to generate the report.
-
Courses that are available for students to enroll in. The list of courses is filtered based on the campus group selection.
-
The member/group the Cash Payment Plan calculation record is currently assigned to (Staff Member, Staff Group, or FA Advisor).
-
The Central Processing System (CPS) Transaction Number is a required field on the Common Record for Pell Grants, Federal Work-Study, and Direct loans (DL Subsidized, DL Unsubsidized) processing by the U.S. Department of Education. The CPS Transaction Number field in the Common Record shows the transaction number from an eligible SAR/ISIR used to calculate a financial aid award.
-
Identifies transactions that were sent automatically to the institution. Blank indicates that the transaction was not automatically sent. Y indicates that the transaction was automatically sent.
-
Specify the from and to number of the credits towards degree for which you want to generate the report.
-
If your institution has configured any task schedules that automatically schedules a task and the result of the change that you make to the task here results in other tasks being scheduled, select Yes to continue to schedule the tasks.
-
Select this check box to create the selected employer record as a new employer.
-
Select this check box if you want Anthology Student to package the award in approved status when predefined conditions are met and the award is automatically packaged, packaged in batch, or estimated. These awards do not require student acceptance from the Portal.
-
The date that is automatically added by the system when the task is created.
-
To be selected if the agency branch is associated with a group of students and batch disbursements needed.
-
The number of days that an inquiry can remain unchanged before it becomes a new inquiry. When processing duplicates, Anthology Student checks the number of days since the Last Task Date or Prospect Date, creates a new inquiry record, and sets it to be a current inquiry records, or does not create an additional record. If a zero value (0) is entered, student inquiries may be captured and stored on the same day, a 1 indicates the next day, and so on.
-
When selected, a letter task is automatically created for the student using the format you select in the Letter Task list.
-
Select this check box to have the system automatically create Origination Changes when Academic Year and Loan Period dates are updated due to Academic related activities. After you select this option, choose 'Always create' or 'Create when award is fully paid'.
-
Select Yes if you want the system to automatically create origination change records when any of the following dates are updated for a Direct Loan (DIRSUB, DIRUNSUB, and DIRPLUS) by Academic related activities and the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool adjusting the loan dates due to changes on the student’s schedule: Academic Year (AY) start/end dates, Loan Period (LP) start/end dates or Disbursement dates. For additional information on Create origination changes when loan dates are updated, see Background for Direct loans.
-
The date and time the batch was created.
-
The date and time the process (Copy Configuration or AY Build) was created.
-
The last and first name of the staff member or process that added or created the item.
-
The date when the item was created.
-
The start and end date of the group created.
-
The date the Direct loan was created. The field is enabled until the origination Status change to A (Accepted) or B (Batched). The export process validates the origination against the values in the FaCOD table. A message is displayed if the value does not pass the validation.
-
The date and time when the integration log record was created.
-
Specifies that the group was created in the specified date range. You can specify the value in the format MM/DD/YYYY or select the calendar button to select the date. The default is today.
-
The credential level of the program.
-
The amount of the credit to the account. A disbursement is an example of a transaction that would cause a credit to the account.
-
The total of the credits for the account.
-
The account credited for the amount. Your institution configures the accounts.
-
Indicates the general ledger credit account number for the selected transaction codes.
-
The number of the account that is credited for the disbursement, refund, or stipend.
-
The number of the account that is credited for bursary disbursements.
-
The bank account number for all credit activities of a bursary.
-
Specifies the credit account number associated with the subsidiary to ensure payments or refunds for the subsidiary are applied to the correct G/L account.
-
Action borrower plans to take once the borrower has failed the credit check. The values are Appeal Decision (A), Pursue Endorser (P), Not Pursue PLUS loan, Process Additional Unsubsidized Loan if Eligible (N), and Undecided (U).
-
Adjustments made to the credits for the transaction type.
-
One of the transaction types available when searching for transactions. Select this transaction type to search for credit adjustments which are charges that are posted as negative adjustments.
-
The total amount credited to the general ledger account.
-
The current status of the credit appeal. The values are Appeal Accepted (A), Appeal Denied (D), Appeal Pending (P), and Appeal Closed Without Final Decisions (R).
-
The type of credit balance calculation used to create the stipends. This field is populated only for auto stipends.
-
Specify the credit balance evaluation scheduling option. The options are "Configured Days on Registered Term" and "Day of Posting". Credit Balance Evaluation Scheduling applies to all evaluation types. The Evaluation Schedule tab is editable only when you select Configured Days on Registered Term. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Specify the credit balance evaluation scheduling option. The options are "Configured Days on Financial Aid Term", "Configured Days on Registered Term", and "Day of Posting". Credit Balance Evaluation Scheduling applies to all evaluation types. The Evaluation Schedule tab is editable only when you select either "Configured Days on Financial Aid Term" or "Configured Days on Registered Term". • Select "Day of Posting" if you would like credit balance evaluation to occur on the same day when the payments are posted for the students and the Auto Stipend background process is executed. • Select "Configured Days on Registered Term" to use the term that the students registered for courses (child term in a parent and child term structure) that is closest to the payment’s transaction date to determine when credit balance should occur for the students. The term’s start date and Add/Drop date work in conjunction with the configuration in the Evaluation Schedule tab to determine the date when credit balance evaluation will occur. • Select "Configured Days on Financial Aid Term" to use the term that financial aid awards are packaged for the students (parent term in a parent and child term structure) to determine when credit balance should occur for the students. The term’s start date and Add/Drop date work in conjunction with the configuration in the Evaluation Schedule tab to determine the date when credit balance evaluation will occur. Note: For a term structure that is not parent and child, selecting "Configured Days on Registered Term" or "Configured Days on Financial Aid Term" will produce the same result since the term is used for both registration and financial aid packaging For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Specify the credit balance evaluation time frame. The options are "Payment Period or Term" and "Loan Period or Academic Year". This field is displayed when "Credit Balance Evaluation Type" is set to "Time Period Evaluation". For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the type of credit balance evaluation. The options are 'Enrollment Level Evaluation', 'FSA Title IV (only) Evaluation', 'Student Level Evaluation', and 'FSA Title IV (only) Evaluation'. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Specifies whether the balance is directed to the student or the borrower.
-
Indicates when the stipend will be created on the basis of the Start or Add/Drop date of the student’s registered term or financial aid term, set Credit Balance Evaluation Scheduling to Configured Days on Registered Term or Configured Days on Financial Aid Term.
-
The Credit Card type used for the payment, for example, Visa, Master Card, and so on.
-
The Credit Card type used for the payment, for example, Visa, Master Card, and so on. The plus icon beside the column is clicked, it opens a new dialog box, in which you have the fill the details, like - Card Type, Last Four Digits of Credit Card, Expiration Month, Expiration Yea, First Name,Last Name, Street Address, City, State and ZIP Code/Postal Code.
-
The Credit Card type used for the payment, for example, Visa, Master Card, and so on. This option is enabled if the selected Return Method is credit card.
-
Select the credit card. The refund amount will be returned to the selected credit card. This field is populated only when you set Credit Card as the return method.
-
The first date when the method can be used for payment. It must be between the value for First Payment Date and the last calculated payment date.
-
The first date when the method can be used for payment method. It must be between the value for First Payment Date and the last calculated payment date.
-
The Credit Card number if the deposit is made by a credit card.
-
Indicates the specified name of the credit card processor.
-
Indicates the specified name of the credit card processor. The options are: • ACI- You are redirected to the ACI payment page • Paypal- You are redirected to the PayPal page • TouchNet- You are redirected to the uPay page
-
Indicates whether a credit card selection is required.
-
The credit card type.
-
The credit card type. This field is available only if the Payment Method selected is Credit Card.
-
This field contains a list of student’s credit card payments that can be refunded. This field is visible when the Return Method selected is Credit Card and • The student’s campus is configured with a payment gateway provider to process credit card payment plans and refunds or • There are credit card payments on student’s ledger card that are associated with VRN (Vendor Reference Number) values. This field becomes required when there are only Credit Card payments with VRN exist. If there are both types of Credit Card payments found (with VRN as well as without VRN), this field is not a required field.
-
Select one or multiple options from the drop-down list. The options are: (A) - Credit approved; (N) - Credit denied; need endorser; (C) - Credit overridden; new credit information provided; (E) - Credit overridden; endorser OK; (D) - Credit denied; endorser not OK; (F) - Credit denied; credit decision received from the COD system Web site; (X) - Credit pending; Include All;
-
The date of the credit decision. This field is only displayed for loans configured to be DIRPLUS loans.
-
Indicates the date on which a potential borrower’s credit decision will expire, necessitating the need for another credit check before originating a PLUS loan.
-
The date when the credit decision will expire and require another credit check before originating a PLUS loan.
-
The credit decision. This field is only displayed for loans configured to be Direct PLUS loans. When Financial Aid Automation is being used, for the disbursements to be exported, the value must be A, C, or E.
-
Indicates the total credit registered for the student. This field helps to audit the billing for each student based on the credit information.
-
If the Program Version is set up as a credit hour program, values are displayed as credits instead of hours.
-
Indicate the number of hours in the Clock Hour program that the student must achieve in the beginning of the academic year.
-
The credits that the student achieved in the course.
-
If you selected, Attempted Credit Hours or Earned Credit Hours in the Evaluation Criteria list, specify the number of hours at which you want Anthology Student to evaluate the criteria. Anthology Student stores the cumulative total for the credits attempted and the credits earned between each parent/standard term.
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours, the number that the student is expected to complete in this sequence.
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours, the number of credits or hours in this sequence or payment period. It represents the number that the student should attend for the sequence that you selected. The total of all sequences must equal the credit or hours for a full academic year or loan period. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
Indicates non-traditional academic calendar. This option corresponds to calendar option required by the Department of Education.
-
Specify the from and to number of the credits range for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates whether the borrower has met the credit requirements. The values are Yes and No.
-
Indicates fund sources or credits or waivers for credits associated with transaction codes. This is a non editable field.
-
Indicates the credit sources from the list of both active and inactive fund sources, credit or waivers or transaction codes for the selected campus. You can select multiple credit sources.
-
For PLUS loans, displays the credit status code from COD.
-
The type of credit.
-
Specifies how you want Anthology Student to evaluate the credits for the tier. The values are Attempted or Earned.
-
The credits that the student achieved in the course.
-
The minimum number of credits required to satisfy the rule.
-
Specifies that students must have less than or the number of required credits or hours specified remaining in their program to meet the prerequisite. For example, if you want to deny registration for a course until a student in is their last semester, specify the number of credits in the last semester.
-
The number of credits in the academic year sequence.
-
The Credits required for the course.
-
The default credits for the course.
-
This field is displayed only if your institution has enabled Allow Override in the Courses Code Setup. Select the Credits field to enable the course to be scheduled with a variable number of credits. The value displayed in the field is from the value specified in the Credits field under Courses Code Setup. Edit this value if you want to have different class sections with each class section having its own credit value.
-
The credits for the course. Read-only, unless the course is a variable credits course.
-
The number of credits required for the course. A course with 0 hours is included in the calculations as 1 credit hour.
-
The number of credits for the program version in the payment period.
-
If the program is configured with an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours without terms, the number of credits in the sequence or period. The total of all sequences or periods must equal the credits for a full academic year or loan period. For non-term program versions, the credits in a final loan period can change from the definition configured on the program version based on student need. For example, a student transfers 10 credits. The credit transfer reduces the number of credits needed to complete the program version requirements. The final LP credits are reduced by 10. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
Minimum credits that the student needs to meet in the prerequisite course to be considered for registration.
-
Credits associated from the course definition and for variable credits from the student's enrollment in the class section.
-
The transfer credits that were approved.
-
The total credits the student attempted on the transcript from the previous institution.
-
The number of credits attempted by the student to date.
-
The number of credits attempted by the student to date.
-
The total credits the student attempted during the payment period or term.
-
The total credits or hours attempted by the student in the class section.
-
The number of credits or hours for audited courses in the term.
-
The total credits or hours for courses in a current or scheduled status within the Degree Progress Audit's required course lists. Credits or Hours will be displayed when the configured curriculum is set to either Clock Hours or Credit Hours.
-
The number of credits earned by the student to date.
-
The number of credits earned by the student during the payment period or term.
-
Select the condition for the Credits Earned output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (10 ; 12) in the respective value field, the report displays the Credits Earned values between 10 and 12 only.
-
Credit earned by the student upon completion of the course.
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses credit hours without terms, the number of credits the student is expected to complete in this academic year.
-
If the program is configured with an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours without terms, the number of credits in the sequence or period. The total of all sequences or periods must equal the credits for a full academic year or loan period. For non-term program versions, the credits in a final loan period can change from the definition configured on the program version based on student need. For example, a student transfers 10 credits. The credit transfer reduces the number of credits needed to complete the program version requirements. The final LP credits are reduced by 10. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
The date when the student will satisfy the credits required for the payment period.
-
Enter the number of credits that correspond to the number of hours in the respective fields to be populated to ensure that the Cumulative GPA is calculated correctly for students enrolled in a Credit Hour program version and a Clock Hour program version. It is configurable on a campus-by-campus basis for situations where outside agencies dictate different credit-to-hour ratios.
-
The number of credits registered for the specified term and enrollment.
-
The number of credits already planned in the template.
-
The number of credits that still must be completed for the student to graduate from the program version.
-
Select the condition for the Credits Remaining output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (10 ; 12) in the respective value field, the report displays the Credits Remaining values between 10 and 12 only.
-
The number of credits or hours required for the course or enrollment.
-
The total number of credits required to complete this program version.
-
The total number of credits for courses in the current term with a status of Scheduled, Current, Grade Posted, or LOA.
-
The number of credits scheduled during the payment period or term.
-
Number of credits to transfer for the course.
-
Indicates the academic credit earned toward their degree. You can specify low and high values.
-
The number of credits not planned in the template.
-
The number of credits or hours required for the course.
-
If the enrolled hours (sum of the credits scheduled in the term) minus the learning support hours is greater than 12, Anthology Student displays 12. If the enrolled hours minus the learning support hours is less than 12, it displays the number.
-
The student holds a criminal record.
-
Select the criteria that Anthology Student uses to determine which maximum to use to automatically add a new class section. The options are Current Section and Waitlist.
-
Name of the Distance Education Criteria configuration (max. 255 characters).
-
Number of days after Post Withdrawal Disbursement notification to send a critical message to the user.
-
For tasks integrated with CRM, specifies the date when the integration is effective. Tasks before the date are not integrated.
-
If your institution has configured CRM integration, this option filters the report on the integration. If you select Yes, only task types that have been configured to be integrated with CRM are displayed in the report. If you select No, the report displays tasks that have not been configured to be integrated with CRM.
-
Specifies that this activity status is not displayed for the task in a CRM system.
-
Indicates that the course is offered at multiple campuses.
-
When Yes is selected, students that are listed in a course that is cross listed with the course in the report are also included in the report.
-
When selected, copies any cross listed courses.
-
The courses that will be allowed to cross reference this course.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the cross referenced courses.
-
If you select this check box, the Pell/SEOG/TEACH fund source that will be awarded within the payment period that crosses over both the Award Year 1 and Award Year 2 time frame will be awarded with the Award Year 2 value. If this configuration is selected but no Award Year 2 value is present on the student’s academic year form, an exception is displayed.
-
If you select this check box, the Pell fund source that will be awarded within the payment period that crosses over both Award Year 1 and Award Year 2 will be awarded in the award year with the highest disbursement value. If both award years have the same disbursement value, the Crossover Payment Period by Award Year 2 configuration will be awarded. If the Crossover Payment Period Most Beneficial Year Round Pell check box is not selected, the Crossover Payment Period by Award Year 2 configuration will be awarded.
-
Indicate the CSS font class if you want to add a customized CSS font class. You can use any Anthology Student icons or Font Awesome icons. If you want to add icons, follow the steps mentioned to add icons to custom tile.
-
Select the check box if the program is an approved comprehensive transition and postsecondary (CTP) program.
-
Specify the from and to number of the cumulative attendance percentage for which you want to generate the report.
-
The cumulative credits for the benchmark or tier.
-
Specify the from and to number of the cumulative credits for which you want to generate the report.
-
The total credits the student attempted during the program version.
-
The total credits earned by the student for the program version.
-
The cumulative grade point average (GPA) for the benchmark. The cumulated GPA for an enrollment is calculated from the time the student entered the institution under that enrollment. The Cumulative GPA column includes all courses taken that are selected to be included in the GPA calculation. In the case of a cumulative GPA displayed on a term, it consists of all the courses taken up to and within the terms that are also selected to be included in the GPA calculation. The current GPA is made up of only the courses that occurred in that term.
-
The cumulative grade point average (GPA) calculated for the payment period.
-
The total hours the student attempted during the program version.
-
The total credits the student earned for the program version.
-
The cumulative numeric average calculated for the payment period. If your institution does not use numeric grading, this value will be zero.
-
Specify the from and to number of the cumulative GPA for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select this check box to select the Cumulative option. When you select this option, multiple enrollments are considered in the calculation.
-
Specifies the percentage of the number of days a student has attended school.
-
The number of completed credits + the scheduled or current credits.
-
The cumulative grade point average (GPA) for the benchmark. The cumulated GPA for an enrollment is calculated from the time the student entered the institution under that enrollment. The Cumulative GPA column includes all courses taken that are selected to be included in the GPA calculation. In the case of a cumulative GPA displayed on a term, it consists of all the courses taken up to and within the terms that are also selected to be included in the GPA calculation. The current GPA is made up of only the courses that occurred in that term.
-
Indicates whether the GPA values are included in the Cumulative GPA calculation.
-
The cumulated GPA points for the student at the enrollment level, calculated from the time the student entered the institution.
-
The number of cumulative hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the warning flag is set on the class section rosters.
-
The number of cumulative hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the student will be considered as dropped.
-
Specifies the minimum number of cumulative hours per month required to justify a month of earned tuition. 0 specifies no minimum number hours are required.
-
The average grade obtained by the student for the courses taken.
-
The current grade point average (GPA) for the payment period.
-
The current numeric average for the payment period. If your institution does not use numeric grading, this value will be zero.
-
The total credits or hours in a current or scheduled status for courses within the Degree Progress Audit's required course lists.
-
Specifies the currency type used for the bursary budget. The currency type selected for the campus is auto-populated in this field.
-
The type of currency associated with a country. For example, if the selected currency is USD (US Dollar), the specified amount will apply in USD.
-
Specify the symbol to represent the currency your school accepts.
-
Select the position of the currency symbol to indicate whether you want the symbol to appear before or after the amount. The options are Leading and Trailing.
-
Specifies that the inquiry is the most current inquiry for the student. You can only have one current inquiry. To make an inquiry current, select the check box. Anthology Student automatically removes the check for the box last inquiry that was marked as current. The current inquiry is also displayed on the Student Profile.
-
The disbursement amount accepted by COD.
-
The admission representative assigned to the student by the institution.
-
The first and last name of the advisor that is currently assigned to the student.
-
Indicates a unique identifier associated with a particular batch of transactions sent to the Automated Clearing House (ACH).
-
Select the current bursary status for the student that you want to change.
-
The policy being used for the refund calculation - IR Refunds only.
-
The current campus that the student is associated with.
-
The current catalog that is currently assigned to the students.
-
The descriptive name of the item.
-
Total number of credits in current status at time of registration.
-
The date the fee or charge is active.
-
The name of the current employer.
-
Select the current exit interview status from the drop-down list.
-
The grade level for the student. Grade levels are configured by your institution and do not have to correspond to the option on the FAFSA or Stafford loan forms. For a student to qualify for a Graduate PLUS loan, the grade level must be configured with the Department of Education ID 7 (Graduate/Professional or beyond). This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the specified curriculum.
-
The program group that the student is interested in. Program groups classify program versions that have some common characteristic and are configured by your institution. The interest determines that program related documents and required tests that are added to the student profile.
-
Does the student currently have an Internship or Externship?
-
Displays the updated value each time when attendance is posted. In Anthology Student, a student's last date of attendance (LDA) is stored on the enrollment record. Schools need the ability to see the most current LDA without having to search though the enrollments.
-
The student's current numeric average.
-
Indicates the number of current occupant.
-
The current fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's Off Campus residency.
-
The current fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's On Campus residency.
-
Indicates the current Pell amount if a student has a Pell award.
-
The current placement status of the student. The values you can select are - Placed, Ineligible, Not Yet Placed, Waiver, etc.
-
The current placement status of the student. This field is auto generated based on the selection criteria.
-
The current program version that the student is associated with.
-
Displays the monetary value of the current room. This field is read-only.
-
Indicates the scheduled Pell amount for the award year (FaStudentPell.Scheduled).
-
The school status that can be used as a filter to group together applications with similar statuses.
-
Indicates the present enrollment status of a student.
-
The school status currently assigend to the application.
-
The selection status that can be used as a filter to group together applications with similar statuses.
-
The selection status currently assigned to the application.
-
The end date of the current program.
-
Indicates the end date of the current session.
-
Indicates the start date of the current session.
-
The Current SSN field on the ISIR Verification form contains the Social Security Number of the Student record in Anthology Student.
-
The current status of a student.
-
The current academic student status for the students.
-
Current job status of the employee.
-
The student's status before it was updated.
-
The current placement status of the student.
-
Field value before making changes.
-
The current fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's residency with their parents.
-
All current year Eligible 1098-T charges where the “Include 1098-T” flag is true. (Prior Year eligible 1098-T charges are not included in Current Year Charges). Current Year Charges are reduced by adjustments to charges that occurred in the current year.
-
The remaining eligible percentage of a student's original Pell-eligible percentage for the current award year.
-
All current year payments, except Scholarship or Grant payments which are only included as a payment if the fund source is defined by the Fund Source 1098-T attribute — "Include Fund Source in 1098-T Calculations" being checked. Current Year Payments are reduced by Current Year Refunds.
-
Total amount of scholarships or grants processed by the institution during the calendar year for the payment of the student’s costs of attendance. The amount is reported in Box 5 of the 1098-T form.
-
The total credits or hours in a current or scheduled status for courses within the Degree Progress Audit's required course lists.
-
The total credits or hours in a current or scheduled status for courses within the Degree Progress Audit's required course lists.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the specified curriculum.
-
Mention the rules and procedures students should follow while registering for courses during the Curriculum Based Registration.
-
Specify the terms and conditions that students must acknowledge and agree to during the Curriculum Based Registration.
-
Indicates whether the curriculum is based on credits or clock hours.
-
The name of the custom folder used to store documents for the campus in Perceptive Content.
-
The name of the custom folder used to store documents for the campus in Perceptive Content or Hyland OnBase, or SchoolDocs.
-
Specify the path to the folder your institution uses to store custom reports designed for or by your institution. When a user selects a report, Anthology Student checks this folder for a report file with the appropriate name (for example, a customized transcript). If the program does not find such a report in your custom reports folder, it checks the system reports folder.
-
If you want to specify custom names for refund and stipend transactions, select the check box and specify the custom names in the Refund Name and Stipend Name fields. The name should contain the fund source in the description. Anthology Student adds the financial aid award year to the descriptions entered in the fields for up to 100 characters. These descriptions are displayed to the student in Portal.
-
Number of job cycles that have been run with this exception present.
-
Disbursement Approval Criteria that are used to assess the eligibility of funds at different points in the payment period.
-
When it is selected, it indicates that the student wants to block the release or their name and/or attendance dates at Clearinghouse from distribution to other servicers. When selected, it also indicates that the student has chosen to block the release of their directory information under the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA). The type of information that can be shared is determined by your institution and you can specify the type of information on their FERPA page. When it is not selected, the student has chosen to share their directory information.
-
Select the data item that you want to view the changes about.
-
Specifies the type of data for the answer. If you selected Yes/No, True/False, or List of Values, the value is set to Text. If you selected Plain Text, you can specify a format of Text, Date, or Numeric. If you select Date or Numeric, the field only accepts values in those formats.
-
Specify the database. This field is available for both SQL and Windows Server Authentication.
-
The date when the attendance was recorded.
-
Month/Day/Year or Year-Month-Day
-
The date from which you want to generate the report.
-
The date when the transaction or deposit is posted.
-
The date when the class meets.
-
The date when the attendance was recorded.
-
The expected date of the disbursement. When you change the sequence, the date on the scheduled disbursements are automatically updated. The academic year defaults to the academic year based on the start date of the loan payment period. For non-term program versions, the dates for disbursements can be changed to a date outside both the loan period and academic year dates.
-
Date that the disbursement is scheduled to be paid.
-
If you selected Date, Term Begin Date, or Term End Date in the list, specify the date that the criteria will be evaluated.
-
The date when the ISIR verification/corrections were submitted.
-
The date that the payment was made.
-
The date when the transaction or deposit is posted.
-
The disbursement date.
-
The transaction date.
-
The date and time when the job was processed
-
The date of the revenue earning. When adding an earning detail, the default is the current date.
-
The date when you want the exception to be removed from snooze mode.
-
The date when the student payment is due.
-
The date when the payment was made.
-
The date when the institution accepted the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
The date when the item or person was added or the status change was entered.
-
The date when the academic student status change was entered.
-
Indicates the date when the Application key was entered.
-
The date when the template was added.
-
The date when the file attachment was added to the document. Located under the Attachments heading.
-
The date when the employer contact was added.
-
The date when the job detail was added.
-
The date when the batch was manually created or imported. When the file was imported, the Date Added will be the same as the Date Imported.
-
The date when the task was added.
-
Select the date when the transaction adjustment was entered.
-
The date when status for the student was added.
-
The date till when status for the student will remain added.
-
The date when the test date was added for the test.
-
The date when the student has audit advisement.
-
The date when the amount in the Applied field was applied to the selected transaction.
-
The date when the institution accepted the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student. If you are adding or assigning the document and you select a status of Approved, the date approved is automatically set to the current date.
-
The date when the template approver staff or group approved the contract template.
-
The date when the area of study was assigned to the student.
-
Enter the date that the student is available to begin work.
-
The date when the degree or honor was awarded to the student.
-
The date when the student was billed using the billing method configured for the program version.
-
The date when the refund was calculated.
-
Indicate the date till when the refund will be calculated.
-
The date the loan was certified.
-
The date when the student was cleared to graduate.
-
The date when the item was completed.
-
For a student status with a code of GRAD, COMPLETE, NDS-COMP, displays the date that the student completed the program version.
-
The date when the item was completed.
-
The date the SAP evaluation was done.
-
The Date Completed is defaulted to the end date of the course and is not populated under final grades.
-
The date when the item was completed. This is only displayed for a Status of closed.
-
The date that is automatically added by the system when the task is created.
-
The date and time the batch was created.
-
The date when the batch was created.
-
The date when the disbursement batch was created.
-
The date the placement or internship was deleted.
-
The date when a receipt was deposited in the bank.
-
The date when the disclosure was printed (read-only field).
-
The date when the area of study was dropped from the student's schedule.
-
The date when the stipend is due.
-
The refund's due date.
-
The date when the revenue was earned.
-
The expected start date for the student at your institution.
-
The date of expiry of the certification.
-
The date when the file was exported.
-
The date when the file is created by the system and placed into the EDE path.
-
If you want to locate a batch that was imported, the date rate you want to search.
-
The date when the file was exported.
-
The date the refund calculation form was last completed.
-
The format of the test date.
-
Select a format from the drop-down list, for example DD/MM/YYYY. This date format is used in the Release to GL export file and in the Description field when using a Lawson file type. If you do not select a date format, dates are displayed based on your current Microsoft Windows regional settings.
-
Select the date format, (MM/DD/YYYY).
-
Specify the transaction date range. All transactions in the selected date range that have not been released to the General Ledger will be gathered in the batch to be released.
-
Transactions date range for the batch.
-
The system date when the grade letter was recorded.
-
The date when the instructor returns the graded lesson
-
The date that the staff member was hired.
-
The date when the admissions representative was hired.
-
The date when the transmission file was received.
-
The date and time when the batch job succeeded.
-
The date when the file was imported.
-
If you want to locate a batch that was imported, the date rate you want to search.
-
The date on which the record of this student was imported in Anthology Student.
-
The date when the review request was inspected.
-
The date when the item was last modified.
-
The date when the template was last modified.
-
The date when the item was changed. On some pages, it also includes the timestamp for the time.
-
Indicates the date when the Application key was changed.
-
Indicates the date when the item was changed.
-
The date that the item was over-written with a later version by the student.
-
The date of any change made to an item listed within the grid or made to that specific fund source (within either the Awarding Eligibility Rules tab, the Disbursement Eligibility Rules tab, or the Award Limit tab).
-
The date when the transaction was changed.
-
Indicates the date on which the change is modified.
-
The date when the subsidiary transaction was updated.
-
The date of birth (DOB) in the format MM/DD/YYYY.
-
The month of the student's birthday.
-
Specify the date of birth of the oldest parent (MM/DD/YYYY).
-
The actual class dates.
-
For a student status with a code of DROP or NDS-DROP, displays the date that your institution determined that the student withdrew. It is the drop date on file for the student.
-
The date a student's enrollment status first becomes effective.
-
For a student status with a code of DROP or NDS-DROP, displays the date when your institution determined that the student withdrew. It is the drop date on file for the student. This value is used calculate Refund Due Date. For non- permanent out status students, this field is editable and by default set to last day attended. If the information on the last day attended is missing, it displays the current system date.
-
The date of the incident that occurred to cause the student to withdraw or drop the course.
-
The date on which the employer record gets removed from the grid.
-
The date when the staff member opened the Cash Drawer session.
-
Indicate the date when the cash drawer session was opened.
-
The date when the stipend was paid.
-
The date the student is being placed.
-
The date when the placement record was posted.
-
The date when the transaction was posted.
-
Select the condition for the date posted in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the date posted records between 1 and 5 only.
-
The date when the batch was posted.
-
The date when the statement history was printed.
-
The date the seletced check was printed.
-
The date when the promissory note was printed (read-only).
-
The date when the promissory note acknowledgment was received (read-only).
-
The date when the borrower signed the promissory note.
-
The date and time when the batch job was queued
-
The date when the item was reassigned.
-
The date when the receipt was printed.
-
The date when the institution received the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
The date when the ISIR was imported into Anthology Student.
-
The date when the lesson is returned to the institution by the student
-
The date when the payment was received.
-
The date when the deposit was received.
-
The date when the COD response containing the subsidized usage information was imported into Anthology Student and the record displayed in the UI was created.
-
The date when the institution received the documents and information submitted by the employer.
-
Date when Anthology Student received the Error Acknowledgement record from NSLDS.
-
The date when the disbursement was received, the refund was sent, or the stipend was paid.
-
The date when the student was removed from the group.
-
The date when the incident was reported. The incident list is sorted by the date when the incident was reported, with the most recently reported incident displayed first.
-
The date when an institution, person, or a student requested documents or information to be submitted for evaluation.
-
The date when the student requested the lesson.
-
The date when an employer requested information to be changed in the application.
-
The date when the requirements were met for externship or online courses.
-
Date the Certification was scheduled.
-
The date when the scheduled stipend will be paid to the student.
-
The date when the stipend was scheduled.
-
The date when the expected cash flow is scheduled.
-
The date when the requested information, document, or item is sent.
-
The date when the transaction was sent to COD.
-
The date when the refund was sent.
-
The date when the stipend will be sent.
-
Select the date range when the refund was sent.
-
The date when the item was sent.
-
The date when the student signed for the disbursement received.
-
Date when the signed promissory note was received.
-
If your institution has a range of dates that a transfer course is valid, the start date of the range.
-
If attendance is required for the institution, is defaulted to the Last Date Attended (LDA) and it cannot be edited. If attendance is not required, the default is the NSLDS Withdrawal date for an actual calculation. The default is the LDA for a hypothetical calculation. If attendance is not required, it can be edited. It is only displayed when you edit a calculation. It is not displayed when you add it. If there is no LDA or NSLDS Withdrawal date, the date is the drop date on file for the student. For more information, see Worksheet Step 1: Student Title IV Aid Information in the background.
-
The date when the item was submitted for approval.
-
The date when the test or exam was taken by the student.
-
Date the Certification was completed.
-
The date when the student was transferred to another campus or program.
-
The date when the test or exam was taken by the student.
-
The results of the test for the student reported in date format.
-
The date of the payment of the housing deposit.
-
Specifies the date on which the student completed the course at the prior institution.
-
The date when the latest revenue recognition batch was posted.
-
Enter the date posted value in mm/dd/yyyy format.
-
The day of the class meeting.
-
The day of the week when the conflict occurred.
-
Specifies the day of the week on which the exam is scheduled. If the exam date falls on Wednesday, the column will indicate 'Wednesday'.
-
The meeting days and time of the class.
-
The days of the week.
-
The days of the week. This field is visible when the Frequency is set to the Daily option.
-
Value of 0-999.
-
Select the number of days.
-
Specify the number of days associated with the rule. The value must range from 1 to 999.
-
Indicates the days of the week. This field is visible when the Frequency is set to the Daily option.
-
The payment frequency in days. If you select Monthly, the Days field is automatically populated. If you select Days, you can specify the number of days between stipends.
-
Days for which the class is scheduled.
-
Indicates the number of days from any of the selected due date basis. the value can be negative, positive or zero to indicate before, after, or same as the basis date.
-
The number of complete days that the student was absent from the campus or institution.
-
Indicates that the refund can be paid x days after the refund is calculated, that is either x days after Last Date of Attendance (LDA), student's Drop Date, or calculation date.
-
With Enable System Auto-Locking enabled, you must specify the number of days for which you want to lock the start date of the academic year after the beginning date of the academic year.
-
Specify the number of days after the determination date. This field is editable when you select 'Determination Date Basis' in the 'Expected Refund Processing Basis' field.
-
Specify the days after the disbursement date to refund due date. This field is editable only when the Check Paid Disbursements vs Approval Criteria check box is selected.
-
Specify the number of days after the Last Date of Attendance (LDA). This field is editable when you select 'LDA Basis' in the 'Expected Refund Processing Basis' field.
-
With Enable System Auto-Locking enabled, you must specify the number of days you want to lock the start date of the loan period after the beginning date of the loan period.
-
Specify the number of days after month end to post revenue.
-
Specifies the maximum number of days that can be between the disbursement date and the last date of attendance (LDA) for the student for the disbursement to meet the criterion. If the LDA for the student is empty or NULL, the criterion is not met.
-
If your institution uses the automated SAP calculation process, set this value to override the campus-level default value. Based on the specified value, the automated SAP calculation process days are adjusted. If you do not specify a value, the campus-level default value is used to determine when SAP processing will occur.
-
Indicates the number of days after the term start date when the payment recalculation notification is sent. The payment recalculation notification is sent when a student schedule changes and the global weekly extract process is started.
-
Indicates the time period after the Term Start Date when the Add-Drop extract process is started.
-
Enter the days that the student is available for work. This is an unformatted text box. Type text as required.
-
Specify the number of days before the start of the task.
-
Indicates the period before the Term Start Date when the Pre-Pull extract process is started.
-
The minimum days between lessons.
-
Number of days the borrower is delinquent as of the Submittal Timestamp.
-
The number of days elapsed from the student's last status change that have had to elapse before this status transition is allowed. For additional information about the days elapsed from the last status change, see background for status change.
-
Specifies the number of days added to the course section end date to calculate the expiration deadline date.
-
The days after the course end date to calculate the expiration deadline.
-
The days from when the status was last changed.
-
The number of days from the student's last status change in which this status transition is allowed. For additional information about the days from last status change, see background for status change.
-
The days from when the status was last changed.
-
Specify the number of days from the start of the pay period for the COA proration.
-
Enter the minimum number of days between Leave of Absences. 0 = unlimited.
-
Specifies the number days. If a student drops and their date of determination is n number of days before the end date of the revenue earning period, Anthology Studentt suspends the revenue for the student. For example, if you specified March 31st as the end date of the revenue earnings period for March and 15 in the field, Anthology Student will subtract 15 days from the 31st (March 16th). It then suspends revenue for students who drop with a date of determination from March 17th until March 31st. Zero specifies that the date of determination and the revenue earnings period end date are the same.
-
The day of the week is displayed automatically. This is a read-only field. You cannot modify or edit the day of the week.
-
How many days have elapsed since the student's Day of Determination (DOD).
-
Specifies the minimum and maximum number of days since last payment.
-
(Optional) Configure the number of days before a new award year for assigning the subsequent award year instead of using the default logic that uses the AY start date to assign the award year (A new award year starts on 7/1 of each calendar year). This option allows the system to assign the second award year when the academic year crosses over 2 award years. The start date must be within xx days of a new award year. A value of 0 means the feature is not configured.
-
Specify the number of days that are allowed to elapse before the funds must be returned.
-
The date when the data block indicator was last modified.
-
Name of the person who has been assigned the role of Dean by your institution.
-
The amount of the debit to the account. An example of a debit is an amount being transferred into the account.
-
The total of the debits for the account.
-
The account debited for the amount. Your institution configures the accounts.
-
Indicates the general ledger debit account number for the selected transaction codes.
-
The number of the account that is debited for the disbursement, refund, or stipend.
-
The number of the account that is debited for bursary disbursements.
-
Specifies the debit account number associated with the subsidiary to ensure payments or refunds for the subsidiary are applied to the correct G/L account.
-
Adjustments made to the debits for the transaction type.
-
The total amount debited to the general ledger account.
-
The total amount debited to the account in the general ledger.
-
Indicates the option to specify the order in which debit transactions are applied by credit transactions based on either the debit transaction’s due date or the start date of the course section associated with the debit transaction. This option is available only when the Allow Credit Source Order feature is enabled for the campus. Select an option from the drop-down menu. The options are: • Class Start Date - Earlier Start Date First • Class Start Date - Later Start Date First • Transaction Due Date - Earlier Due Date First • Transaction Due Date - Later Due Date First You can configure a mixture of debit sort of Class Start Date and Transaction Due Date within a Credit Apply Order for a credit source. For example, a credit source such as PELL can be configured to apply Pell payments to Tuition charges for classes that started earlier first (Class Start Date – Earlier Start Date First), then apply any remaining Pell payments to any other debit transactions that have earlier transaction due dates first (Transaction Due Date – Earlier Due Date First). While applying credits to debit transactions based on the configured debit sort order, if multiple debit transactions exist with the same class Start Date or Transaction Due Date, debit transactions are applied based on the first-in-first-out order (debit transactions with lower transaction number will be applied first).
-
Select the check box to indicate that the transaction code is a debt write-off transaction code. When you select the check box, Gainful Employment Reporting will exclude these transactions from the calculation of Institutional Debt.
-
Specifies whether or not Anthology Student rounds or truncates the number of decimal places it displays in the GPA.
-
Select whether you want the decimal display for the GPAs to be truncated or rounded.
-
This field is enabled when the field type is Numeric only. Only if the decimal is Included, the file will have the decimal point in the number. The options are Decimal Included and Implied Decimal. If you choose Implied Decimal, the Decimal Implied column becomes enabled.
-
Specify the number of places from right to left that are required to get the actual value. Decimal implied must be greater than zero.
-
The number of decimal places you want included in the calculation. The default is 2.
-
The number of decimal places you want to use for posting final grades, midterm grades, lesson grades and the Max. Numeric score value for lessons in Anthology Student. By default, this option is set to 3, which is the maximum number of decimal places supported for grades. When you post grades, they are automatically rounded up to the number of decimal places you specify in this field. Example, if you limit the decimal places to 1, when you specify a grade as 25.58, it is automatically rounded up as 25.6.
-
Specifies the number of decimal places. The range is from 0 to 5. The default is 2.
-
Specifies the decimal value. Decimals must be less than or equal to 4.
-
Specify the number of decimals. This field is enabled only when you have selected Numeric option in the Type field. The maximum is 4 and is included in the maximum you specified for Length. For example, if you want the maximum to 999.99, specify 5 for Length and 2 for Decimal.
-
If you selected Numeric, specify the number of decimals. The maximum is 4 and is included in the maximum you specified for Length. For example if you want the maximum to 999.99, specify 5 for Length and 2 for Decimal.
-
Code for the credit decision, e.g., Credit Denied (code F), Credit Denied after Pending (Code N), Credit Denied; Endorser Denial (code D), Credit Accepted (code A), Credit Overridden; Endorser Approval (code E), Credit Overridden; New Info Provided (code C), Endorsed for less Amount (code L), Pending (code P).
-
Indicates the deposit is declined.
-
The associated record is set as default. For example, the default address, the default enrollment.
-
If the task template is an Event Type that begins with Email and no advisor type was configured for the task template, the email address you want Anthology Student to use as the from email when it is sent. For example, you can configure a task template to be from their assigned Admissions Advisor. If no advisor is configured in the task template, Anthology Student will use this email address.
-
If the task template is an Event Type that begins with Email and no advisor type was configured for the task template, the name you want Anthology Student to use as the from name when it is sent. For example, you can configure a task template to be from their assigned Admissions Advisor. If no advisor is configured in the task template, Anthology Student will use this name.
-
Default Bank Account is the account in which deposits are normally made for this campus. If a deposit must go into a different account, users can change it at the time the deposit is prepared.
-
Assigns the associated books automatically to new class sections. When scheduling new class sections, Anthology Student only assigns books from book lists if the following conditions are true: - The book list is configured as Default - The class section start date falls between Effective or Obsolete Dates associated with the book list or book - The book list delivery method is unspecified or matches the delivery method on the class section When you change the 'Default' setting, scheduled future class sections are affected. You can apply the changes to future class sections through the message dialog box.
-
Select the check box to indicate that the account is to be used as a default bank account for a single payment type.
-
Indicates the selected Fee Schedule is set as the default. The default is the first Fee Schedule selected when registering courses.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether the Credit Account and Debit Account combination is the default GL account combination. Only one row in the GL Code Association grid can be marked as Default.
-
The value to be used as default load when the load type is selected.
-
Yes indicates that you want to Anthology Student to assign this password profile as the default for new staff members added to Anthology Student and when a password profile has been removed for a staff member and a new password profile is not selected.
-
The associated record is set as the default credit card. This credit card will be selected by default when posting credit card transactions for the student.
-
Indicates the associated record of vendor or sub-vendor is set as default.
-
Select the check box if you want the first value you select or specify in the field for the first prospect to be the default value for all the subsequent prospects you add during the session using the Add & New button. This enables you to store the details of the prospect more quickly.
-
Indicates the default A/R account configured for the selected campus. All debits and credits to Student Ledger Cards are associated with this Default A/R account. This field is automatically generated when Great Plains is configured for the selected campus and the system is connected to the configured database.
-
Indicates the default A/R account configured for the selected campus. All debits and credits to Student Ledger Cards are associated with this Default A/R account.
-
Select one of the following: Credit hours - non-standard terms, Credit hours - standard terms of quarters, Credit hours - standard terms of semesters, Credit hours - standard terms of trimesters, Clock hours or Credit hours without terms.
-
Select the default active status for degree-seeking students. This is the status to which students are automatically moved to an Active/Attending status.
-
The associated addressrecord set as default.
-
The code of the default billing term that will be associated with the term group.
-
The name of the default billing term that will be associated with the term group.
-
The default budget associated with the program version or academic year sequence. Budgets are configured by your institution. The list only contains Active budgets. The budget is displayed on the Academic Years tab for the student for the academic year and program version (Students > select the student name > Financial Aid > Awarding > Academic Years tab.) Anthology Student will first use any configured enrollment status value (e.g., Full Time) and then use the default budget if no specific enrollment status value is found.
-
Displays the default campuses for the policy form. This option is enabled only when you save a new course refund policy and when you edit an existing policy.
-
The selected COA configured by an administrator. The system uses this COA only and ignores all other when calculating and allocating a budget.
-
Select a previously configured Course Refund Policy that will be assigned as the default when refunds are given for courses at the selected campus.
-
Specify the default number of credits or clock hours in your school's academic year.
-
Select the default disbursement release code. H indicates hold disbursement until release notification is given. R indicates release the disbursement as scheduled. It can also be blank. When you add a loan, the value defaults to the default hold or release indicator code specified for the CommonLine recipient (lender or servicer) of this loan. This can be located in the record in the CL Recipient table that matches the lender or guarantor criteria specified for the loan.
-
The status of the document. The list contains the predefined statuses of Approved, No Longer Needed, Not able to obtain, Not Requested, Not Sent, On File, Out for Approval, Portal Required, Received but Rejected, Requested - Not Required, Requested - Required, Sent, Sent for Approval. Any additional items in the lists were defined by your organization.
-
Designates the selected grade to be the default used for dropped courses during daily processes.
-
Specify the initial default view of a student's ledger card when the Ledger Card is loaded. The options are All Enrollments and Current Enrollment.
-
Indicates the default credit hierarchy for the campus. This field displays all credit sources.
-
If you selected Lender in the Type list, specify the Guarantor Code for the default Guarantor that this lender uses.
-
The value in this field is used to automatically update the Housing field value if it is currently null for the award year(s) academic year form being awarded. Values available are: 'On Campus', 'Off Campus', or 'With Parent'. This Default Housing value within the Budget Packaging and Options form can be copied from one program version to one or more program versions.
-
Specifies the assigned status as In School Not Yet Placed.
-
Specifies the default merge field that Anthology Student uses to address a student in an email template. The options are First Name, Preferred Name, and Nick Name. If you select Preferred Name or Nick Name and Anthology Student does not find a Preferred or Nickname in the Student Profile, it will use their First Name.
-
The number of months in the academic year. If you specify a value, Anthology Student uses the value you specify. If you do not specify a value or type 0, Anthology Student calculates the number of months in an academic year using the formula Default Weeks in AY / 4.33.
-
Select the default active status for NDS students. This is the status to which students are automatically moved to an NDS Active/NDS Attending status.
-
Enter the number of days from the student's last status change that have had to elapse before this status transition is allowed. If the number of days elapsed from the last status change is less than this setting, this status transition will not be allowed. A zero in this field indicates that this criteria is not used on this transition.
-
Enter the number of days your institution allows students who receive an Incomplete to finish the coursework required to complete a course after the course's end date.
-
Enter the number of days from the student's last status change in which this status transition is allowed. Once the number of days elapsed from the last status change has exceeded this setting, this status transition is no longer allowed. A zero in this field indicates that this criteria is not used on this transition.
-
Specifies the default number of days to retain employer groups.
-
Specifies the default number of days to retain student groups.
-
Indicates the default/overaward information. This tag is required for a PLUS borrower but is optional for the student on a Parent PLUS award. The Default Overpay Code nested under the student tag indicates the status of the student. The Default Overpay Code nested under the Borrower tag indicates the status of the parent. Value definitions: Y = Yes; N = No; Z = Overridden by School; E = Not Returned from NSLDS (PLUS Application only)
-
The system-defined values that are applicable to the course level: - Non-Pass/Fail – Indicates that the course is graded on a letter grade basis. - Pass/Fail (Required) – Indicates that all students taking the course will receive a pass or fail grade. - Student's Choice – Indicates that students can choose to receive a pass/fail grade.
-
The payment date set as the default.
-
Select one of the following: 1 Credit hour with standard terms in which Fall through Spring terms equal or exceed 30 weeks or equal or exceed academic year with waiver (AC: 2,3,4), 2 Credit hour with standard terms in which Fall through Spring terms are less than 30 weeks without waiver (AC: 2,3,4), 3 Credit hour with standard or non-standard terms (AC: 1-4), 4 Clock hour or Credit Hour without terms (AC: 5,6), 5 Nonresidential portion of programs offered by correspondence without terms (AC: 1-4,6). The options you will see in this field vary according to your choice of Academic Calendar.
-
Payment periods configured in the Default COA.
-
Select the default permissions for new task templates. If you want new task templates added to all policies with assign, read, edit, and close permission, select Full Access for New Tasks. If you want the new task templates added to all policies with no permissions, select No Access for New Tasks. If you want new task templates added to the policy selected for the staff member who created it with assign, read, edit, and close permission and added to all other policies with no permissions, select Use Author Permission for New Tasks.
-
The status assigned to each new placement record at the time it is created/at the time of each enrollment). The options are: - Not Yet Placed: This is the default for new students. - Part Time Placed: Use this option when the student has been placed in part time position
-
The placement status to be used as default.
-
Select the default process type that will be performed by the recipient when receiving applications. The options are School certification request, Guarantee loan only, Guarantee loan (prior to receipt of a promissory note) and print application/promissory note, Print application/promissory note and guarantee loan (after receipt of a promissory note) and Print application only. If a loan is being added, this field reverts to the default processing code specified for the recipient of this loan record.
-
Indicates the preferred method of delivering the promissory note to the borrower. The values are Email, Paper, and Web.
-
Identifies how the loan is counted in the institution's cohort default rate calculation, e.g., N=Not Used, B=Both.
-
Institutional refund policy that is designated as the default policy.
-
Select the default retake method for the courses that have been retaken by which Anthology Student calculates grades in the GPA. The options are Average Retakes, Include All, Use Highest, and Use Most Recent.
-
The return method for the refund. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, and Net.
-
Select the option for the default section number. The options are Numeric or Alpha. If the existing class section is a numeric or alphabetical character, Anthology Student uses the existing. For example, if you select Alpha, and the section is A, Anthology Student uses B for the next class section it adds. If the section is 1, Anthology Student uses 2.
-
If you selected Lender in the Type list, specify the Servicer Code for the default Servicer that this lender uses.
-
Specifies the assigned status as In School Placed.
-
The status assigned when the student has been placed. The options are: - Currently Attending: Student is still in school and placed - Placed: Student is out of school and placed - Previously Placed: Student is in school and has been previously placed
-
The course sub-component that is selected as the default sub-component for the course. The options available when adding new sub-components is “Yes” and “No”. A course can only have one default sub-component and newly added sub-components will be marked as “No” if an existing sub-component has already been marked as the default record.
-
Select the default supplementary method for the courses that have been taken as supplementary by which CampusNexus Student international counts the grades in the GPA. The options are Use Highest or Use Most Recent.
-
The number of terms in the academic year.
-
This option has not been implemented yet.
-
The value to be used as the default load amount when the load type is selected.
-
The value to be used as default load amount when the load type is selected.
-
Specify the default number of weeks in your school's academic year.
-
Specifies the procedures for deferring earnings to this type of transaction. This field is enabled when the transaction type is Student.
-
Select this option if the procedures for deferring earnings apply to this type of transaction. The Defer Earnings field is enabled when the transaction type is Student or Both. If earnings are deferred, an Earning Method needs to be configured in Configuration > Student Accounts > Earning Methods and associated with all program versions in Configuration > Student Accounts > Program Versions. For more information, see Background for Revenue Recognition.
-
Repayment deferment option based on the student's enrollment status.
-
Specifies whether there is a deferment request code. The options are Y, N, and null. This field is enabled only if the fund source type is LOANNB, LOANNNB, PERKINS, or PLUS.
-
Indicates whether there is a deferment request code. This field is enabled only if the fund source type configured for the loan is LOANNB, LOANNNB, PERKINS, or PLUS.
-
The deferred revenue balance allocated for the term or child term.
-
The deferred revenue balance allocated for the revenue source (earnings summary record).
-
Some Graduate level programs need the ability to specify the number of terms and credits weeks per academic year. For example, first-year students attend 2 terms; second-year students attend 3 terms; third-year students attend 2 terms. You can customize your configuration of Graduate-level program versions by determining terms, months, credits, and weeks for an academic year. If this field is set to Yes, the Months in Academic Year field is disabled and the Academic Year Term Validation grid is enabled within the Term Association tab. In this grid, you can configure specific numbers of months, credits, weeks, and terms per an academic year sequence to be utilized during term association. The default setting is No.
-
The “Define Varying Number of Terms per AY” feature flag is used to enable or disable the “No. of Terms in Academic Year” field in Configuration > Financial Aid > Program Versions. The “No. of Terms in Academic Year” field is available only if the feature flag is enabled and: • There are no students in the program version with a start date before the Date Modified on the feature flag. (Otherwise, academic years would need to be rebuilt.) • The Degree assigned to the Program version in Academic Records has a degree level for a Graduate program version When the above criteria are met for the program version, the Start Date field will only show start dates that are greater than the Date Modified of the feature flag. We recommend not changing this flag on a current enrollment because every current start date would have to be reconfigured.
-
The academic degree.
-
The degree or certificate that will be awarded when the student completes this program version.
-
The format you want to use for the numbers for degree certificates.
-
Specifies the path where the degree certificates that are generated will be stored.
-
Specifies the serial number for the next degree certificate that is generated.
-
Select the template you want populated with the degree certificate. They are configured by your institution.
-
The college degree level.
-
The Degree Period is the time period for which degree population is being reported (e.g., Spring 2021, Summer 2021, etc.). This is for informational purposes only. Individual degree award dates are indicated in each detail record.
-
Select the required option to display Degree Progress Audit. The options are: -No -Yes, with course level GPA's -Yes, without course level GPA's
-
Select the check box to specify that you want the GPA to be displayed in the list of GPAs in the degree progress audit for students. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Degree Progress Audit tile.)
-
The degree taken by the student at the institution.
-
The academic degree taken by the admissions representative.
-
The course degree.
-
Select the degrees that will be using the template.
-
Select the academic degree for which you want to generate the report.
-
The administrator/staff member who performed the delegation of the group.
-
The name of the specific staff member the group is delegated to.
-
Specify the name of the staff group that contains the staff members that you want to create and manage delegation relationships using the Delegate Staff Group Management feature for Financial Aid Automation (FAA). Staff members in the group can create delegation relationships for all staff members and will not be restricted to delegating within their own staff group. Staff members authorized to view the Delegate Staff Group Management page, but who are not System Administrators or a member of the group can only edit existing delegation relationships.
-
When selected, gives the staff member permission to delete the type of document from the Documents list for a student when it is no longer needed.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be deleted. You can also delete all the options under employer contact type by selecting the check box next to the Delete button.
-
Indicates deleting open revenue adjustments. This action is enabled only if the revenue record selected is an adjustment record and is in an open status.
-
Indicates delete document URL.
-
Indicates whether the student is flagged to be removed from Transfer Student Monitoring.
-
Select this option to delete the student from the Transfer Monitoring list. Use this option only if the student will not be attending your institution, or if the student was added to your institution's list in error. Do not delete a student simply to stop monitoring him or her. Once the deletion has been confirmed, the student's information will be removed from the Monitoring and, if applicable, Alert lists. It does not delete the student from the NSLDS database.
-
A Boolean field (Yes or No) that indicates whether the record was deleted.
-
Indicates what was deleted.
-
Indicates whether the student was deleted from Transfer Student Monitoring.
-
The delivery method of the course. For example, online, on ground. They are configured by your institution. To automatically add a class section, your institution must have configured the delivery with Auto Add Class Section set to Yes.
-
Select the delivery method to indicate that the billing rate applies to courses associated with the selected delivery method only. This field displays a list of all active delivery methods for the campus. If the rate schedule is for a specific campus, this field displays a list of all active delivery methods for a campus. If the rate schedule is for multiple campuses, this field displays a list of all active delivery methods that are common for all those campuses. The default value is set to All Methods. The All Methods option allows you to configure a generic rate to bill all courses associated with delivery methods that are not configured with a specific rate on the rate schedule.
-
The delivery method for the course. The available options are Classroom and Online. When you change the Delivery Method, scheduled future class sections are affected. You can apply the changes to future class sections through the message dialog box.
-
Select a delivery option for the report card. The options are: - User Student Master Address - Use Grade Delivery Address
-
The department that the staff member is a member of.
-
The department to which the item belongs to. Only active departments will be listed here.
-
The department to which the admissions representative is assigned.
-
Select the department for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the department associated with this assignment.
-
Indicates the department selected for the class section.
-
Indicates the department associated with the course.
-
Indicates the department associated with the non-teaching activity.
-
Indicates the department associated with the non-teaching type.
-
Specifies the name of the department applied for the assignment.
-
Select the available departments.
-
Lists all active departments. If the page has filters and Department is a filter, you can select up to 10 Departments at a time. The Departments filter in Class Schedule and the Departments property in Copy Class Schedule under Properties to Copy is visible only when you enable Faculty Workload Management. If the Department property is not selected during the Copy Class Schedule, Anthology Student displays a blank value in Department for the new Class Section.
-
Indicates whether the applicant is a dependent student or an independent student. The parent information and other dependent information fields are disabled when Dependency = Independent.
-
Indicates whether a student is dependent, independent, or undetermined. The field displays the status from the student's FAFSA or ISIR. If you add a Federal Direct Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students (PLUS) loan or Federal Family Education Loan (FFEL) as a fund source and the status is undetermined, Anthology Student displays a message asking you if you want to change the student to a dependent.
-
For a prospective student, inquiry, applicant, or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the dependency status from their FAFSA or ISIR is specified or changed to the value you select in the Value list.
-
Specifies the dependency status that a student must have to be eligible for this packaging method. For example, if you select Dependent, then the dependency status for the student must be dependent. If you select N/A, then this packaging method can be used for a student with any dependency status.
-
Indicates the course is a dependent course. In this case, the Credits, Hours, Enroll Status Credits, Enroll Status Hours fields are disabled. You can select one or more Parent courses using the Parent Courses & Equivalents tile.
-
For academic years with award years 2009-10 and later, select this check box if the student is the dependent of a veteran that perished in Iraq or Afghanistan after September 11, 2001. Anthology Student automatically selects this check box if the ISIR for award year 2011-2012 or later is imported and the ISIR indicated that the student is a dependent of a deceased veteran (DOD Match flag). Eligible students receive the maximum Pell award as well as all Title IV aid based on a zero estimated family contribution (EFC) and may also qualify for an Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant (IASG).
-
When the Dependent On field is defined, the corresponding Dependent Operator and Dependent Value must be defined. The value must be defined as a Field Name. The maximum length is 200 characters.
-
Specifies the dependent conditions. The values are =(Equal To), <(Less Than), <=(Less Than or Equal To), <>(Not Equal To), >(Greater Than), and >=(Greater Than or Equal To). Dependent Operator value can be specified, only when Dependent On is specified.
-
Dependent Value can be specified only when Dependent On is selected. The maximum length is 100 characters.
-
Indicates the amount a student needs to provide as deposit fee with the application.
-
Total amount of the funds being deposited.
-
The deposit amount.
-
The date of the deposit.
-
Indicates the deposit receipt number which is stored as part of the transaction information for the payment taken when it is posted on the student’s account. All the transactions within that cash drawer session (and ultimately that deposit) are assigned to a single deposit receipt number. This field is only visible when a deposit receipt number is entered when the cash drawer session was opened.
-
Indicates the deposit receipt number or DRN • when using cashiering, the DRN is stored as part of the transaction information for the payment taken when it is posted on the student’s account. All the transactions within that cash drawer session are assigned to a single deposit receipt number. • when not using cashiering to post payments, the DRN is assigned at the time payments are being posted. The DRN is editable in Edit Transaction. ACH, EFT, Non-Cash, and Credit Card payments do not have DRN associated.
-
Dollar amount of the received deposit.
-
Select an option for deposit received for which you want to generate the report.
-
If the deposit has been reconciled.
-
Indicates whether the student is required to pay the deposit fee with the application or not.
-
The status of the deposit.
-
Select the deposit subsidiary code. This field is populated when process type is set to Move Out.
-
The type of deposit being performed (Deposit or Return of Funds).
-
The type of deposit. The options are: - Housing Deposit - Application Fee Payment
-
Date the amount was deposited.
-
The amounts of the deposits to the accounts.
-
You can use the Deposits Pending Account when payments are entered in Anthology Student.
-
Text that describes the item.
-
Indicates the name of the Automated Clearing House (ACH) with some identifying information.
-
Displays the name of the benchmark or tier for the evaluation. They are configured by your institution.
-
This includes the room code and/or building in the description if several rooms may have the same description.
-
Text field that institutions can use to add custom descriptions to identify certain course fees.
-
This field can be any text and it does not have to be unique.
-
The description of the authorization for a fund source.
-
The description of the entry. For example, if a batch job makes a disbursement, it lists the type and name of the batch.
-
Indicates the description of the option selected in locale field. This field is automatically populated once you select the locale. You can change the description based on your requirement.
-
Student Aid Report (SAR) field number and description.
-
Displays the description of the configured Jobs.
-
The description of the payment.
-
The adjustment description.
-
Textual description of the TSM Error or Warning code.
-
Specify Yes if you want to enable and designate access to staff groups by fund source. Select No to delete or disable previously configured fund source security. Select Delete to remove all settings. Select Disable to retain the settings for future use.
-
The Designated School Official (DSO) or Responsible Officer (RO) from staff members defined as DSO/ROs.
-
The building in which the student requires housing.
-
The building category in which the student requires housing.
-
Select the desired building category for the housing application.
-
Select the desired building for the housing application.
-
Type of room that the student requires. The values are - Freemont 2 room apartment, Single, Double, Apartment, Studio, Hawthrone, Triple.
-
Select the desired room category for the housing application.
-
Select this hyperlink to review the exact details why the student was calculated as 'Not Required'.
-
The detailed reason for the conflict that resulted in unregistration.
-
Specifies detailed message about the warning or conflict.
-
Relevant details specific to the type of job selected.
-
Displays further details on the selected student record.
-
The date when the student dropped the enrollment.
-
The date when the determination was posted.
-
The variance between the value in the ISIR field and the value in the Verification field.
-
Indicates the difference in the fees, but may be altered before switching rooms.
-
Indicates the student authorizes withdrawals to be made from the bank account or receives refunds and stipends through ACH.
-
Select Yes to specify that this is the lender record for Direct loans. If you select Yes, the lender is the Department of Education (ED). The fees and interest rates are regulated by the Department of Education, current in Anthology Student, and cannot be configured.
-
Specify the Direct Loan Attending Entity ID for each campus participating as a full participant.
-
The specific award year for the direct loan.
-
This field holds the cost of attendance for the loan period dates of the Direct loan which is retrieved from the Budget COA. Non-originated awards will have the value automatically updated when changes occur to the total budget amount. The value is editable at any time and is available for Subsidized, Unsubsidized, PLUS, Grad PLUS, and Parent PLUS loans for award year 2022-23 and later.
-
Select Pell COA, AY COA, or None. The system automatically updates the Direct Loan Cost of Attendance field value during Auto Awarding when you select Pell COA or AY COA. Note: When the Advanced Feature for Enable Advanced Auto Packaging is disabled, this field appears in the Automated Campus Settings form. When the Advanced Feature for Enable Advanced Auto Packaging is enabled, this field appears in the Automated Budget and Packaging form.
-
The specific export type for the Direct Loan (Direct Loan Originations, Direct Loan Disbursements, Direct Loan Changes, Identifier Changes).
-
The ID used by this campus for processing Direct loans with Common Origination and Disbursement (COD). This field contains six characters and begins with a G or E.
-
Select the value to which the settings on this option apply. If your institution is a multi-campus institution, you may have more than one Direct Loan ID. If you have more than one Direct Loan ID, be sure to complete this form for each ID.
-
Specify the search criteria for the Direct Loan ID Value using one of the following options: - Equal to; - Not Equal to; - Greater than; - Less than; - Between; - Like; - Include All (default).
-
Specify the Direct Loan reporting entity ID for each campus participating as a full participant.
-
Select an option from the list of Direct Loan Reporting Types. The options are: Advance Pay, Pushed Cash, Cash Monitoring 1, and Cash Monitoring 2.
-
Select the number of days the system waits after the system date to include the noted disbursements for direct loans.
-
When you select the required Direct Match check box for a question, the answer for the question has to match directly for two students to be considered as roommates.
-
Loan funds provided to the student by the U.S. Department of Education, through the school. Undergraduate students with financial need can qualify for a subsidized loan. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Federal Direct Subsidized Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Loan funds provided to the student by the U.S. Department of Education, through the school. Undergraduate students and graduate students regardless of their need, qualify for an unsubsidized loan. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Federal Direct Unsubsidized Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Export means messages are sent from Mailbox Manager to SAIG/COD/CPS. Import means messages are transferred into Mailbox Manager from SAIG/COD/CPS.
-
Information in the academic records of a student that would not generally be considered harmful or an invasion of privacy if disclosed.
-
Displays the information in the directory that your institution selected to be shared for the student.
-
Disability type, for example, hearing impaired.
-
Specifies the disability statuses for which you want to generate the report.
-
You can use this setting to determine whether to enable Academic Records Gradebook.
-
Disability status of the student. When you are adding the Student Profile, Unspecified is the default.
-
Select this check box if you do not want to view the fund sources while awarding.
-
The Scholarships for Disadvantaged Students program provides funds to schools. In turn, the schools make scholarships to full-time, financially needy students from disadvantaged backgrounds, enrolled in health professions and nursing programs. Specify the estimated scholarship amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Disadvantaged Scholarship - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the scholarship option does not apply to the student.
-
Select this check box to indicate that schools can progress the Academic Year (AY) and associated Payment Periods using the same logic as the Loan Period (LP) and associated Loan Payment Periods. For additional information on Disallow Rolling Credits/Hours, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
The sequence number for the disbursement. For Pell grants, if there are disbursements from other enrollments, the numbering scheme picks up where the previous disbursements left off.
-
The repackage action currently associated with the disbursement (Scheduled, Refund, etc.).
-
Number assigned to the disbursement batch.
-
Enter a numeric disbursement batch value for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the condition for the disbursement batch in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the disbursement batch records between 1 and 5 only.
-
Indicates the maximum number of allowed disbursements based on the type of financial aid. If Standard Academic Year is enabled, the Rules count is enabled. The system increments the count with 1 and displays the value as Disbursement Number.
-
The status of the disbursement.
-
The sequence number for the disbursement. For Pell grants, if there are disbursements from other enrollments, the numbering scheme picks up where the previous disbursements left off.
-
The actual net disbursement amount in dollars.
-
The date when the disbursement was booked.
-
The disbursement net adjusted amount in dollars.
-
Indicates whether disbursements have been scheduled for the fund source. You can quickly determine if an expected disbursement schedule exists for each fund source packaged in the academic year.
-
Select the specific hold group the student belongs to that you are overriding the DISBBTCH0022 exception for.
-
Select the check box if you want to process stipends that have not had funds posted to the student ledger. For the unposted stipend to be processed, your institution must have also configured the campus so that it does not prevent disbursing of stipends if funds are not posted. If your institution prevents it, it will not be processed even if you select the check box here. A stipend can always be processed if it has been posted to the student ledger.
-
The amount that has been disbursed from this Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
If you selected Grant (Other than Pell) or Scholarship in the Type list and the Institutional check box, you can select the check to box to indicate that the fund source is an institutional scholarship or grant that meets the defined conditions. For example, the scholarships or grants are disbursed from an established restricted account and funded by outside sources or income earned on such funds. Anthology Student then uses the awards for this fund source in the revenue calculation for the 90/10 report.
-
The disbursement amount for the refund.
-
The disbursement numbers which the refund is scheduled against.
-
Amount of the disbursement in dollars.
-
The total dollar amount of the disbursement the receipt is for.
-
This feature is specific to notifications for adjustments made by Student Pace Evaluation (SPE). You can set up notifications for Title IV grant disbursements or Direct Loans. You can configure the system to notify a staff member when a Direct Loan is canceled or cannot be canceled by SPE, or when Title IV grant disbursements are canceled by SPE. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
If you imported a Disbursement Roster file and there are approved disbursements, you can click this link to take you to the Approve Disbursements to Pay page so that you can approve the disbursements.
-
The date when the disbursement batch was created.
-
The date the disbursement was paid.
-
The date that the disbursement was approved.
-
The date the disbursement is scheduled to be paid.
-
This informs the user if that specific fund source has at least one rule configured.
-
Indicates the date when the disbursement was funded.
-
The number of disbursements scheduled.
-
The sequence number for the disbursement. For Pell grants, if there are disbursements from other enrollments, the numbering scheme picks up where the previous disbursements left off.
-
The disbursement number.
-
The disbursement number against which the refund is processed. The disbursement number contains an amount that may or may not be equal to the amount being refunded. If the amount being refunded is more than the amount scheduled for the disbursement, the remaining amount will be drawn from other disbursements associated with the payment source and enrollment. This applies to DIRSUB, DIRUNSUB, DIRPLUS and Pell only.
-
The disbursement numbers of the award which the refund is scheduled against. If the refund is associated with a single disbursement number, save the changes before editing. If the refund is associated with multiple disbursement numbers, you cannot edit, and you have to cancel the refund and reschedule with appropriate refund amount. You cannot edit the disbursement number if the pending amount is not posted to the Ledger Card. You have to either post or cancel the pending adjustment amount and retry.
-
The sequence number for the disbursement for which the refund is scheduled against.
-
Select a disbursement option. The options are Advanced Funding and Just in Time.
-
All scholarships, grants, institutional aid, state aid, and COD fund sources are paid automatically with this feature.
-
A 2-digit number that Anthology Student can assign to a disbursement in the FA Pell Disbursements table.
-
The name of the schedule that defines disbursement dates for campuses and fund sources. Disbursement schedules are defined by your institution. Your institution can configure the fund source for an award to require a disbursement schedule. A disbursement schedule can be selected when awarding financial aid only if the academic year start date for the student falls within the academic year start date of the disbursement schedule. On the New Award form, the Disbursement Schedule drop-down is enabled only when you select awards of type Grant, Loan, or Work-Study.
-
Select the configured disbursement schedule for the disbursement you are packaging.
-
If more than one adjustment for a disbursement number, the sequence number for the adjustment.
-
This column enables you to see which specific disbursement term the exception is for without having to navigate to the student on the Award form.
-
The number of disbursements in the batch.
-
Number of accepted disbursements.
-
Number of corrected disbursements.
-
Number of rejected disbursements.
-
Specifies the amount of tuition charge to be discounted for each course as a percentage in the Value as Percentage (%) field or as a flat rate in the Value as Flat Rate field. The Value as Percentage (%) field allows two decimal places.
-
Display field that applies to 90/10 Report calculations. It is displayed after you save the award and only if the fund source for the award was configured to use individual institution loan calculations.
-
The difference between the amounts in the Calculated Discount and Previous Discount. Discount To Post will be zero when the course charge is completely used for tuition discounts. You can edit this column.
-
The bill code for the tuition discount policy. Different tuition discount policies should not share the same tuition discounts bill code. The TUIT transaction code does not appear in the list because the tuition discount should not be posted against the same bill code to which it was charged.
-
Specifies that the group will be available to select in Portal.
-
This field is used to control whether certain web parts are displayed to students on the Student Portal home page based on their membership in student groups. This functionality is only available when the Portal is configured to use web parts. It is not applicable when the Portal uses the tile-based home page.
-
The "Display Award in Student Portal" option is selected by default, and the award using that fund source will be displayed in the Student Portal. When this option is selected, the "Student Portal acceptance changes award to approved" option is enabled. If "Display Award in Student Portal" is cleared, "Student Portal acceptance changes award to approved" is cleared and disabled and the award using that fund source will not be displayed in the Student Portal.
-
Select this check box if you want Anthology Student to display a warning message when the elective/substitution pool criteria has exceeded during registration.
-
Sets a visual indicator (color) that allows the range of 0 to 10 days, which it then uses to divide by 3 to assess color definitions on urgency. The color is displayed on the Exception Management form for Refund Calculation.
-
Enter 1 to show or 0 to hide the Merchant Processing Code field when viewing Payment Transaction Detail through the student’s ledger card. Merchant Processing Code is a unique reference code assigned to a payment by a vendor which can only be updated through the database.
-
Specifies the display name of the campus on the website.
-
Indicates that this name is displayed on the features where this entity is displayed.
-
Display Name Format settings allows Institutions to define names format based on their preference. This setting supports multiple formats like “Last Name, First Name” or “First Name, Last Name”. Indicate the format of your choice, for example, LMF which stands for Last Name Middle Name First Name. All student and staff member names across Student and Portal can be displayed in the configured format.
-
Allows you to choose a format to display Local Langauge Names. This setting supports multiple formats like “Last Name, First Name” or “First Name, Last Name”. Indicate the format of your choice, for example, LMF which stands for Last Name Middle Name First Name. All student and staff member local language names across Student and Portal will also be displayed in the selected format.
-
The options to view.
-
Indicates the order in which the advanced features are displayed.
-
Select this check box to display the overall cumulative GPA when the Degree Progress Audit is performed.
-
Select the option whether or not you want to include payee information in the report.
-
Specify if you want the Remaining Balance to Schedule (RBS) portion of the grid to be displayed.
-
Select this check box to display student GPAs of all enrollments on transcripts. By default, this check box is selected. If you clear this check box, the report does not print the student's GPA as part of the student information on transcripts.
-
By default, the home page does not display the Summary tiles (e.g., Total Prospects, Total Active Students). If desired, you can change this setting from No to Yes.
-
Charged - lists all students who have received a charge. Not Charged - lists only students who have not received a charge. Charged/No payments - lists only the students who have not paid a charge. The field is only displayed if you select the Charge check box and a value in the Transaction Code list.
-
Select this check box to include the transfer credits that were not approved in the hypothetical Degree Progress Audit. If selected, the advisors can select the types of transfer credits that were not in the approved state and which they want to include.
-
Selection criteria related to distance education. The selection criteria are configured on the Distance Education Criteria tab of the Population Analysis / IPEDS Enrollment Survey form.
-
Select the base unit used in calculating distances. The options are Mile and Kilometer.
-
Specifies how funds can be distributed. The list is filtered by the options allowed for the type of fund you selected in the Type list. The possible options are C - By Campus, D - By Direct Loan ID, P - By Campus Pell ID, and S - By Serial Number.
-
The division to which the application belongs to. Only active divisions will be listed here.
-
Specify the division business ID. This field is displayed when the Payment Gateway Provider is ACI.
-
Indicates the date when the Direct Loan Entrance Counseling Acknowledgement was received.
-
It is read only and set to Hyland's OnBase as the software your institution is using for document integration.
-
Indicates if a Do Not Call (DNC) Override is on file for the student. An override document stores any exceptions to the DNC list. Students with addresses listed on the DNC list, but who permit communications from the institution, require an override to comply with FTC rules. You cannot update or modify the DNC Override option. The value is based on the student document configuration and the document status code. For example, if the student has a document that is configured as National Do Not Call Override Document for the default campus, and the document status Code is set to OK or REC, then DNC Override will be set for all Contact Method sources. This value is then reflected in Contact Preferences under DNC Override.
-
Indicates if a Do Not Call (DNC) Override is on file for the student. An override document stores any exceptions to the DNC list. Students with addresses listed on the DNC list, but who permit communications from the institution, require an override to comply with FTC rules. You cannot update or modify the DNC Override option. The value is based on the student document configuration and the document status code. For example, if the student has a document that is configured as National Do Not Call Override Document for the default campus, and the document status Code is set to OK or REC, then DNC Override will be set for all Contact Method sources. This value is then reflected in Contact Preferences under DNC Override.
-
Specifies if the record should not be used to contact the student.
-
Select this option to prevent a student's last lease from expiring on the ending date.
-
Anthology Student displays the check box if the value for Conflict Type is Prerequisites and Corequisites. If you want to unregister the course and its prerequisites and corequisites, select the check box. If you want to unregister only the course, do not select the check box.
-
Select the check box if your institution uses drawdown requests for Direct Loans.
-
Select this check box to configure the reception details for the post-graduation ceremony event.
-
The date of birth (DOB) in the format MM/DD/YYYY.
-
The documents submitted by a student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
If a student is missing documents, displays a list of missing documents.
-
Student-determined file name for the document.
-
Select the document that you want to be required to meet the criteria.
-
Assigned name of the document.
-
The student document indicated as required for enrollment in the program version.
-
Select the document you wish to attach with the refund.
-
The Code assigned to the document.
-
If you want to evaluate the documents in the list for the student, specifies the method Anthology Student uses to determine if they meet the criteria. If you select, Document Completion Date, Anthology Student checks if the financial aid documents in the document list have a completion date. It is populated when all the financial aid documents for the award year have been approved. The Document Completion Date will be evaluated against the Scheduled Disbursement Date. If you select Missing Documents, Anthology Student displays the Missing Documents list so that you can specify the financial aid documents that must be in the document list for the student for the award year and campus with a status of Approved. A document is considered missing and the criterion is not met if it was configured for the Financial Aid module and has a status of Requested or Requested – Required and has not been received or has a status other than Approved. If the document was configured as Approved, it is considered approved.
-
The document ID of the transcript document.
-
Select the condition for the document ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the document ID records between 1 and 5 only.
-
The generated document ID that is sent to COD.
-
ID of the document that caused the file import to fail when the Import process creates the CODIMPRT0151 exception.
-
The Document ID is specific for some message types, e.g., Common Record COD message types. For other message types, the field will be empty.
-
Enter the document ID value.
-
The name of the document list. Document lists are configured by your institution.
-
The document management provider.
-
Indicates the document management provider. The options are Hyland-Perceptive, Hyland-OnBase, and SchoolDocs. Only a single document management provider is enabled per campus.
-
The name of the document that was submitted by a student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
The name of the document policy that controls access to the types of documents and the statuses that can be selected for those documents. Policies are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the document provider. The options are Hyland-Perceptive and Hyland-OnBase. Only a single document provider is enabled per campus.
-
If you select Prospective Student, the criteria gets evaluated when the student or inquiry is added or updated before the student applies or enrolls. If you select Applicant/Enrollment, the criteria gets evaluated when an applicant or enrolled student is added or updated. If the student meets the criteria, the document gets added. If you select Document, the document gets added when the status of a document gets changed to the status you specify in the selection criteria. If you are editing an existing document schedule and you change the value, Anthology Student removes the existing schedule criteria so that you can select from the criteria appropriate for the value.
-
The category of document. Student (Financial Aid-related), Enrollment (Academic Records-related), etc...
-
The status of the document. The list contains the system defined statuses of Requested - Required, Requested - Not Required, Approved, No Further Action, On File, Not Requested, Required, Received but Rejected, Sent, and Not Sent. Any additional items in the lists were defined by your organization.
-
Indicates the status of the selected document ("Received", "Ready to Send", etc...).
-
When the status of a document changes to the status you select, the document or documents in the schedule are added to the documents folder for the student.
-
This column indicates COD Document Accepted/Rejected edit codes. - When the <DocumentStatusCode> is "A", the field displays "Accepted". - When the file is rejected, the <DocumentStatusCode> will be "R". COD will also provide any one of these document level reject edits: 001, 003, 004, 006, 007, 210, 218. The system displays the reject codes returned in the file.
-
Select the system status for the document attached to the refund.
-
Specifies the statuses that staff members can select for the type of document when they have assign or edit permission for the type of document.
-
The active statuses that can be selected for student documents at your institution.
-
Select your institution's official document containing the parental authorization to retain Title IV Credit Balances. This authorization is required in case PLUS funds are part of the Title IV Credit Balance. If PLUS funds are part of the financial aid package and the Parent Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with an Approved status, the logic will allow the institution to carry the credit balance until the end of the year.
-
Select your institution's official credit balance waiver document containing the student approval to retain a Title IV Credit Balance during the year for Title IV credit balance evaluation. If the Student Waiver selected in the configuration is on file with a document status of Approved, the system allows the institution to carry the credit balance until the end of the year.
-
To display your document tracking list, select the Document Tracking tile on the Home page.
-
The status of the Post Withdrawal Disbursement Notification document. The statuses used are: Pending, Approved, Rejected, Expired, Processed, Sent, Resent, and Document Received.
-
The type of document submitted to the institution.
-
The type of document to be sent to the student or parent (Financial Aid Waiver, Promissory Note, Intent to Retuirn, etc...)
-
Configure the Document Type for the Promissory Note Document by selecting a document from the Document Type list that will represent the Promissory Note Document.
-
The type of document submitted to the institution. The options are - Receive/Incoming: Select this option if your institution wants the student to submit a document, such as a copy of SSN, driver's license, and so on. - Send Out: Select this option if your institution sends out the document and the student does not have to return it, such as policies, handbooks, and so on. - Send and Return: Select this option if your institution sends out the document and the student needs to complete and return the document to your institution such as an application, a waiver a student should sign, and so on. - FERPA: Select this option if your institution wants to manage the attachments of the Family Educational Rights and Privacy document.
-
If you selected Document in the Document Scheduled For list, specifies the type of document. Documents are configured by your institution.
-
The type of document submitted to the institution. If you are configuring a document and you want to manage the attachments using Perceptive Content, you must select Receive/Incoming.
-
Lists the document names. If you are selecting the documents, you can use the search icon to display a list that you can use to select multiple documents.
-
Select one or more documents that will be required for the class section.
-
The documents associated with a program.
-
The documents required from the students for the program.
-
Select the field to display a list of documents that are automatically added to the task when the task template is selected. Anthology Student does not gather and print these documents when the letter is printed. If you need to print other material along with the letter, select them in the Linked Letters list (such as labels, brochures, and forms). The list contains the documents that your institution has configured.
-
The documents that are attached to the email. The documents that are attached are specified for the type of task by your institution.
-
Number of days after Date of Determination to send a cautionary message to the user.
-
Number of days after Date of Determination to send a critical message to the user.
-
Specifies the corresponding Department of Education grade level code. 0 is 1st year, never attended college. 1 is 1st year, attended college before. 2 is 2nd year/sophomore. 3 is 3rd year/junior. 4 is 4th year/senior. 5 is 5th year/other undergraduate. 6 is 1st year graduate/professional. 7 is continuing graduate/professional.
-
Dollar amount the import file net disbursement can vary from the scheduled disbursement (Commonline)Specify the amount in dollars to which the import file net disbursement can vary from the scheduled disbursement. Please note that the Appsend file does not allow for cents within the disbursement amount. The export process automatically rounds disbursements to whole dollars when creating the file. The system uses this tolerance to help in matching the disbursement.
-
Select the fund source dollar amount you wish to be awarded for the credit hour range you configured in the row.
-
Specifies the domain name for the campus website.
-
If your institution is using Active Directory as its authentication mode, displays the domain used in the user ID.
-
The domain name for the SMS Service Provider. For example, SMSService.Provider.com.
-
Specifies if the student has opted for a double room.
-
Select whether the down payment is a Fixed Amount or a Percentage of Balance Owed by Student.
-
Indicates the Percentage of the Balance Owed by Student.
-
If you are not using the Anthology Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Anthology Cloud, specify <drive>:\<foldername>\. In most cases, the drive is Q. If you do not know your drive or folder, contact Client Services.
-
Select the option to show the course progression legend on the DPA/Portal.
-
The minimum grade point required for fulfillment consideration in the Degree Progress Audit (DPA) and/or the course to apply to progress the student in the Student Pace Evaluation process (SPE).
-
Indicates the code that applies to the drawdown.
-
The name of the cash drawer.
-
The driving license state.
-
Select the condition for the Driving License output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Contains' and enter the characters (Al) in the respective value field, the report displays all the Driving License State value containing the entered characters.
-
Information about the driver's license number is required in the General Public search form.
-
Select the condition for driver's license state for which you want to generate the report. The values are Contains, Is Equal To, Is Not Equal To, and Include All Driver License States.
-
Specify the value for driver's license state for the student or person was issued.
-
The driver's license number for the student or person.
-
The state where the driver's license for the student or person was issued.
-
The directions a driver would follow to get to the institution.
-
Indicates the dropped courses are included when evaluating the minimum and maximum limit.
-
The date the student was dropped from the course.
-
Specifies the drop date for a course with a Course Status of dropped.
-
The drop down list for the student to choose services under Service Defined Fields.
-
The date and time before which the class must be dropped from the student's schedule. The specified date value must be between the Registration Start Date and the Term End Date.
-
Specifies the date and time until which a student can be dropped/withdrawn from the courses registered in a given term. The value you specify for the drop end date should be greater than the value specified for unregister but less than the term end value.
-
The time before which the class must be dropped from the student's schedule.
-
Used for assigning a final grade to a dropped course.
-
Indicates whether the selected letter grade is configured as a drop grade.
-
The staff member who dropped the area of study from the student's list.
-
Date by which action must be completed.
-
The date when the item is due (such as task, document, or message). For a new task, the default is today. If you are specifying the value, specify the value in the format MM/DD/YYYY or select the calendar button to select the date.
-
The date when the item is due.
-
The date when the item is due.
-
The date when the refund is due. Select the due date range to gather scheduled refunds.
-
The due date of the activity.
-
The date when the item is due.
-
Refunds/Stipends due date.
-
The date when the refund is due.
-
The date when the refund is due. This value is displayed only if you select Schedule Refund as the Refund Option.
-
Specify the exact due date to update for all selected transactions.
-
Indicate the due date to be used to update as due date for all selected transactions. This option is selected by default. The default value is the current date. You can specify a different due date or blank out the due date to remove due date for all selected transactions.
-
Specify the date by which approval/rejection has to be done. Due Date column will only be enabled if the Reference Start is 'By Date'.
-
Indicates the due date basis. The due date can be configured with X days from any of the due date basis. X can be negative, positive or 0 days to indicate before, after, or same as the basis date (Class, Term, Payment Period or Transaction date) respectively. The options are: - Days from Class Start Date - Days from Term Start Date - Days from Payment Period Start Date - Days from Transaction Date - Days from System Date (current date/run date) - Days from Post Date (system date or the actual date the charge posted to the ledger)
-
The date when the item is due (such as task, document, or message). For a new task, the default is today. If you are specifying the value, specify the value in the format MM/DD/YYYY or select the calendar button to select the date.
-
The date that the refunds or stipends are scheduled to be processed. This due date option is available only if the Record Selection option is set to Use Selected Criteria.
-
Indicates the due date options. The Due date rule depends on when a transaction is posted compared to the selected Due Date Option. The options are: - Class Start Date: This option works only for transactions associated with class sections. - Term Start Date: This option indicates the term start date. - Payment Period Start Date: This option indicates the payment period start date. - Transaction Date: This option indicates the transaction date. - Blank: If this option is selected, the post date range (low and high columns) remains disabled, and you cannot add multiple rules.
-
Specify the number of days within which the approval/rejection has to be done.
-
The amount from Box O in the Return of Title IV calculation. The column displays N/A for the institutional refund calculation.
-
The amount from Box Q in the Return of Title IV calculation. The column displays N/A for the institutional refund calculation.
-
The number of days in which the activity is due.
-
The number of days the approval must be made.
-
Dunning process indicator. Select to indicate that the dunning process is not taking place.
-
Specify your institution's 9-digit Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number. This number is developed by the Dunn and Bradstreet Corporation and is used to identify businesses in automated files.
-
Select the Duplicate check box to allow configured documents to appear multiple times within the student's Document Tracking. If this option is not selected and a document sent in the SD file that exists in the student's folder is in an On file status, the record is ignored and will not appear multiple times for the student.
-
Indicate whether the record is a duplicate of another record.
-
Specifies the number of existing duplicate employer records for the employer.
-
The criteria to be used when searching the Student Profile table to identify possible duplicates when new prospects are entered. You can select fields and combinations of fields that will constitute a duplicate if a new prospect record is matched to an existing student record using these fields.
-
If you select Yes, Anthology Student checks for duplicate entry of prospects immediately after you enter a prospect name and phone number. If you select No, Anthology Student waits until you save the prospect entry to check for duplicates.
-
There are multiple Award Year records (FaStudentPell) for the student/enrollment. The student may not appear at all, or may not appear accurately, on the FISAP report.
-
Select the required duplicate student task to be trigerred and assigned to the admissions representative associated with the student record that is processed as a duplicate for the selected campus.
-
The amount of time it took to process the job or batch.
-
The duration of the background job (hours minutes seconds).
-
Time duration between exam start and end time.
-
The length of time appropriate for the unit selected in the Units list. For example, if you select Days, it is the number of days.
-
How long the Copy Configuration or Build AY process took.
-
The estimated length of time it takes to complete the task.
-
When dynamic groups are in use (see Allow Dynamic Groups setting on this page), you can specify the default update frequency for dynamic groups. The frequency values are Bi-Weekly, Daily, Hourly, Monthly, and Weekly. The default setting is Hourly.
-
Indicates the secondary E code. It must be 6 characters.
-
The earliest expiration date on all banked loads per Load Type. The expiration dates on banked loads are calculated as the end of the month in which the term the assignment was created, plus the months until expiration. For example, a banked load from Spring 2020 (which ended May 27, 2020) would have an expiration of 5/31/2025 when the expiration in months was set to 60 months.
-
Select the check box to indicate that the institution keeps 100% of the tuition payment if a student completes one course during the period for which the student has paid. This option is not applicable for students whose billing frequency is by payment period. This option is editable when you enable Use Title IV Refund Calculation.
-
Specifies the day of the month. If the student completes on or after the day, the institution earns a full month of revenue. For example, you can specify that a full month is earned if they complete on or after the 15th day of the month.
-
Specifies the day of the month. If the student starts on or before the day, the institution earns a full month of revenue. For example, if your institution always wants to earn a full month for a student who start, specify the 31st.
-
Specifies the day of the month. If the student completes on or after the day, the institution earns a half month of revenue.
-
Specifies the day of the month. If the student starts on or after the day, the institution earns a half month of revenue.
-
If you select this option, then the 'Amortize over all units in the revenue period' option under the Late Charges section is disabled.
-
You can calculate negative deferred revenue using the In Month Posted method, where Anthology Student applies the entire amount in the month during which the transaction is posted. You can also use the Amortize over Earning Period method in whichAnthology Student amortizes the transaction over the entire earning period (Program, Academic Year, Term, and so on).
-
This field is editable only if Defer Earnings is selected. You can calculate negative deferred revenue using the In Month Posted method, where Anthology Student earns the entire amount in the month during which the transaction is posted. You can also use the Amortize over Earning Period method in which Anthology Student amortizes the amount over the entire earning period (Program, Academic Year, Term, and so on).
-
If you selected Calendar Days for Revenue Basis (Earning Unit), select the check box to have Anthology Student bill by parent term in the billing method. but earn by child term. To use this option, your institution must have configured term relationships when your institution configured Academic Records.
-
Specifies that revenue will be earned for students who attended a portion of the revenue period but have a school status of LOA as of the end of the revenue period.
-
The number of credits or hours earned for the course or enrollment.
-
Displays the hours shown on the transcript. For example, if the student completed the course with a passing grade, the column contains the credits or hours displayed on the transcript.
-
Indicates the revenue amount earned to date for the earnings summary record. This column also displays the non-defer transaction with the transaction amount.
-
The revenue amount earned to date for the earnings summary record.
-
The charges earned by the student. Anthology Student calculates the value by multiplying (100 minus the percentage entered in the Refund Percent field) by the amount in the Period Base to determine the Earned Charges. The value cannot be greater than the value you specified or is displayed for Period Base.
-
The date when the student earned the payment.
-
The earning codes uniquely identify the type of earnings that your instructors receive. They are configured by your institution. For example, you could have an earning codes for salaries and bonuses. You can associate an earning code with load types when the load type is configured with Yes for Track Pay. If Allow Override for the load type is set to Yes, the earning code is editable.
-
The earning codes uniquely identify the type of earnings that your instructors receive. They are configured by your institution. For example, you could have an earning code for salaries and bonuses. You can associate an earning code with load types when the load type is configured with Yes for Track Pay.
-
The earning codes uniquely identify the type of earnings that your instructors receive. They are configured by your institution. For example, you could have earning codes for salaries and bonuses. You can associate an earning code with a load type when the load type is configured with Yes for Track Pay.
-
The action performed on the earning line which resulted in the integration log record creation, for example, create and so on.
-
A unique identifier of the earning line. When integrated this identifier is used by the external payroll system as reference id.
-
Select an earning method for the program version. The list displays all earning methods that your institution configured to earn revenue for tuition and other deferred earnings under Configuration > Student Accounts > Earning Methods.
-
The earning method for the program version.
-
Specifies the earning methods your institution uses for tuition and other deferred earnings.
-
Specifies the amount of pay at that level. It can be a rate for the unit of measure or a single lump sum for the activity.
-
The source of the revenue.
-
Revenue earning type. Values are either deferred or earned.
-
Specifies the earning code type from the external payroll system. This field is displayed only when Faculty Workload Management is integrated with an external payroll system.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the earning code item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
If you selected Calendar Days for Revenue Basis (Earning Unit), select the check box to have Anthology Student bill by parent term in the billing method,. but earn by child term. To use this option, your institution must have configured parent/child term relationships.
-
The configured install path for EdConnect used during the COD process.
-
Specify the path for imported ISIR files. If you are not using the Anthology Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Anthology Cloud, specify <drive>:\<foldername>\. In most cases, the drive is Q. If you do not know your drive or folder name, contact Client Services. The path you specify here must be different from the one you specified for Enter EDE Path in the general settings for the system. (Select the Settings tile > locate System > select General.)
-
Specifies how often files stored in the EDE path that you specified should be archived into subdirectories. Options are Never, Daily, Weekly (default), and Monthly (every 30 days).
-
When selected, specifies that the staff member can specify or change the information for the type of document.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be configured as Edit. You can also select all the options under employer contact type by checking the box beside Edit button.
-
When selected, the staff member can edit tasks created for other staff members in the staff group if they also have Edit permission for the task template in the Task Templates grid. Once a task is assigned to a staff member, they can edit and close the task even if the Edit and Close options are not selected in the Activity Policy grid. While a staff member can edit and close any task assigned to them, including tasks they add for themselves, it is recommended you select Edit and Close in the grid to track their available permissions.
-
When selected staff members can edit their tasks and edit the tasks for any staff members in staff groups with Edit permission selected in the Staff Groups grid. Once a task is assigned to a staff member, they can edit and close the task even if the Edit and Close options are not selected in the Activity Policy grid. While a staff member can edit and close any task assigned to them, including tasks they add for themselves, it is recommended you select Edit and Close in the grid to track their available permissions.
-
Edit dependent information.
-
This is selected to modify the details for the selected incident.
-
If you selected Yes for Enable LDA Attendance Permissions by Staff Group, select the check box for the staff groups that contain the staff members that you want to be able to change the last date of attendance (LDA). You can also use the check box in the column heading to select all or none of the staff groups in the list.
-
This check box is selected if you chose to name the file. You can select this check box for the Literal field.
-
Indicates whether or not the payee for the fund source can be edited. Yes indicates that the payee can be edited.
-
The book edition.
-
Specify the maximum amount of VA Education Benefits available to undergraduate students at your institution.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the highest level of education for the student.
-
The highest level of previous education for the student. If selected in a report, the report contains the name of the institution, and the status (such as graduated). If the student graduated, it also shows the graduation date and year.
-
The previous education level of the student.
-
The education level of the student. They are configured by your institution. The value you select will depend on the policies and procedures at your institution.
-
The dollar amount in the Expected Family Contribution (EFC) field is based on a formula to determine the financial strength of a student's family and the student's need for Title IV assistance. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The Estimated Family Contribution (EFC) /Student Aid Index (SAI) replacement used when a student with an EFC/SAI has Direct Subsidized loans or campus-based aid as part of the student’s package. The field will display amounts from fund source types that can replace EFC /SAI balues that are greater than the Initial Unmet need. This will allow the top-down math for the award year to not present the student as over-packaged once the total package amount exceeds the Initial Unmet Need.
-
Expected family contribution (EFC) for the number of months in the academic year. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Specifies a new expected family contribution (EFC) value that is applicable to institutional funds (non-Title IV). For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The effect of the transaction on the account balance.
-
The starting date the term can be eligible for repackaging.
-
The date the status change is effective.
-
The date when the academic student status change becomes effective.
-
Select the effective date. The Effective Date entered here is compared against the Effective Date Type to determine the appropriate rate to bill the students.
-
The date when the book list is available for selection when scheduling class sections. If the start date does not fall between the book list's Effective and Obsolete dates, the book list and its associated books will not be available for selection, and in the case of default book lists, will not be automatically assigned to the class section. When you change the Obsolete Date, scheduled future class sections are affected. You can apply the changes to future class sections through the message dialog box.
-
The dates when the book should be made available for assignment in future class sections.
-
The date from when the item is effective or can be used.
-
Start date of the salary.
-
This date is used in conjunction with the Student Accounts Billing Method when the method is Bill by Course. The latest effective date for the fee is used when billing the student. The effective date is compared to the Enrollment Date or the Term Start Date, depending on which date was selected for the billing method.
-
The date the delegation of the group becomes active.
-
Specifies the date when the Area of Study (AOS) is added or removed. It defaults to the current date and is editable. The Effective Date entered on the Enrollments page is included in the AOS Audit.
-
The first day and last date the item is effective or can be used.
-
The date when the item is effective and can be used.
-
The first date the program costs can be used. If needed, you can have more than one effective date, but the effective dates must be unique. For example, if you add records with effective dates of 01/01/2018 and 02/01/2018, the costs in the record for 01/01/2018 are only used until 02/01/2018.
-
Indicate the effective date.
-
The valid from and to dates for the staff position assignment where the start date falls within the specified range.
-
Indicates the date on which the change is effective.
-
The effective date of the secondary interest rate.
-
The effective date after determination that neither Return of Title IV (R2T4) nor Institutional Refund (IR) funds is required. Specify the number of days, weeks or month in this field. Select Days (default), Weeks, or Month in the next field.
-
The date after the refund calculation is approved and goes into effect. Specify the number of days, weeks or month in this field. Select Days (default), Weeks, or Month in the next field.
-
The date when the refund calculation period is effective and can be used. It only be edited if a hypothetical calculation is being done. If an actual calculation is being done, the effective date for the calculation will be the student's enrollment status change date.
-
The date the refund calculation is scheduled to go into effect. (Title IV Refunds only)
-
Indicates the date from which the status change for the student will be effective.
-
Indicates the date till when the status change for the student will remain effective.
-
Choose either Academic Year Start date, Enrollment date, or System date.
-
Select the effective date type. The options are Enrollment Date, Effective Start Date, and Term Start Date. The system evaluates the Effective Date Type/Rate Schedule configuration to determine which rate schedule to use when billing the student. Only one Effective Date Type can be defined per transaction code.
-
This field automatically defaults to Academic Year Start.
-
Select the type of date the Term Allocation goes into effect: you can choose the Academic Year Start Date, the Enrollment Date, or the actual System Date.
-
Configure the number of days before the End Date for auto packaging to occur.
-
Configure the number of days from the Start Date for auto packaging to occur.
-
The last date the item is effective or can be used.
-
End date of fee calculation.
-
The final date the term can be eligible for repackaging.
-
Indicates the effective date from which the level is valid.
-
The first day the job is effective.
-
The first day that the item is effective or can be used.
-
Start date of fee calculation.
-
Indicates the effective date from which the level is invalid.
-
The time the status change is effective.
-
The last date the job is effective.
-
Indicates Electronic Fund Transfer.
-
Specifies whether or not electronic funds transfer (EFT) has been set as default stipend return method.
-
Specifies whether electronic funds transfer (EFT) has been authorized. This field is enabled only if the fund source type configured for the loan is LOANNB, LOANNNB, PERKINS, or PLUS.
-
Specifies whether electronic funds transfer (EFT) has been authorized. The values are Yes, No, and blank. This field is enabled only if the fund source type configured for the loan is LOANNB, LOANNNB, PERKINS, or PLUS.
-
Indicates how the elective and substitution pools for the catalog were built. Uses Pools configuration indicates that your institution enabled the advanced feature for pool based elective pools during configuration and the elective and substitution pools were built using the configured pools (Configuration > Academic Records > Pools). Uses manual configuration indicates that the elective and substitution pools were built manually by adding courses and course groups. They were either built before the advanced feature was available in version 21.1 or the advanced feature was not enabled by your institution. The column for Default - None is blank because the value does not apply.
-
Specify the pool name from the course list.
-
Specify the elective pool name from the course list.
-
The credits that the student achieved in the elective course.
-
The hours that the student achieved in the elective course.
-
The name of the elective pool.
-
The name of the elective pool.
-
The elective or substitution pool that you want to apply the requirement rule to.
-
Indicates whether the Agreement to Serve (ATS) is available (true/false).
-
Indicates whether the MPN is an electronic MPN (rather than a paper MPN).
-
Determines the student's eligibility to a Program. Options are Yes or No.
-
Determines the student's eligibility to receive a stipend or disbursement. Options are Yes or No.
-
Specify the number of years for which students are eligible to participate according to the Athletic Association.
-
A set of conditions defined by your institution which a student must meet before taking up the examination.
-
One of the six stages that disbursements can be classified into.
-
The eligibility status for the HOPE grant or scholarship and Zell Miller scholarship. During the evaluation process, the job evaluates the minimum GPA from the fund source configuration as the minimum and compares it to the GPA value for the benchmark. If the GPA for the benchmark is greater than or equal to the minimum GPA value for each configured fund source, the student passes. If the GPA for the benchmark is less than the minimum GPA for the fund source, the student fails that benchmark.
-
Specify the eligibility status for which report has to be generated. Available options are Eligible, Not Eligible.
-
Specifies whether or not student is eligible.
-
The amount that can be disbursed to an eligible applicant.
-
The amount approved for disbursement.
-
This field enables two levels of additional awarding available to eligible graduate/professional students enrolled in Health Profession programs. The options are "Not Eligible or Declined", "Eligible for up to $16,667 in additional Stafford Loan", and "Eligible for up to $26,667 in additional Stafford Loan". Only graduate/professional grade level students are eligible for the higher amounts. The selection for this field on the Academic Year form determines the value displayed on the Award form. For additional information, see the background for financial aid.
-
The category under which a payout can be made to eligible applicants.
-
The category under which the amount can be disbursed.
-
The payout level. They are configured by your institution.
-
The remaining eligible percentage of the student's original Pell eligible percentage.
-
The specific program at the high school that the student completed. The programs are installed with Anthology Student and vary by state.
-
Specifies whether or not the student is tagged for malpractice.
-
The email address.
-
Select the Email option if you want the system to send an email to the student with the Withdrawal documentation attached.
-
Indicates a general e-mail address for the employer. You can enter e-mail addresses for individual employer contacts under the Contacts tab.
-
The email address of the student or person.
-
Specific configured email template for the award notification.
-
The email address.
-
The payee's email address.
-
Select this check box if you want Email Address to be the absolute matching criteria for a test file.
-
The effective date of the email address.
-
Select the format for emails. Plain text does not support HTML formatting. If you select HTML, you can insert HTML formatting codes. You can also use an external HTML editor to create a message that you can then cut and paste into your email message.
-
Indicates whether the email address is valid (Yes/No).
-
Area that you can use to create a template for the message. For example, you can specify and format the text. You can also use the Show Drag Panel icon in the toolbar (green arrow) to display a list of fields in the Anthology Student database that can be merged into the letter when it is generated. For example, you can drag <campusaddress> to any location in the text and the address of the campus will be inserted into the letter when it is generated. Fields that are school-defined in the list are listed last and have the suffix _SDF. For example, <schoolfield_SDF>. Merge fields are not available for an Event Type of Waitlist Email to Student. If you have permission, you can also click the Source button to edit the HTML source for the email or copy -formatted text from Microsoft Word. If you are copying text from Notepad, you do not need to click the Source button. The fields that you can select depend on the value you selected for Event Type and From Advisor (if available).
-
Indicates if the student received the PWD notification via email (student's or parent's).
-
If the email for replies is different from the email address in the Email Address field, the email address.
-
The person the email was replied to.
-
The text that appears in the subject line of the email. It contains the subject configured by your organization for the type of task and can be edited.
-
Select the default email template for a prospect.
-
Select the type of email. The options are CompuServe or Internet.
-
The 1098-T utility processes 2021 CARES and HEERF II transactions in accordance with IRS requirements. It is not necessary to modify the CARES or HEERF II Fund Source settings or change CARES or HEERF II payments using the Cleanup Tool except for transactions made after the installation of the 2021 1098-T utility. The Cleanup Tool shows all 2021 CARES and HEERF II funds as: "Include in 1098-T Calculation" = FALSE and “Emergency Grant Box 1” = TRUE. If the transaction year is 2020, the existing logic forthe treatment of the CARES grants applies. HEERF II grants were not available in 2020, so no changes are needed for tax year 2020. The “Emergency Grant Box 1” field is only enabled for transactions where the transaction date is greater than 12/31/2020 and the transaction is tied to a fund source configured as: Other Outside Resource, Non-Need Based, Non-Title IV, or Scholarship or Grant.
-
The alphanumeric ID assigned to a staff member by your institution. In most cases, IDs must be unique.
-
If your institution assigns ID to employees, the ID for the staff member.
-
If your institution assigns numbers to employees, the number for the staff member.
-
The number your institution uses to identify the staff employee. How the number is assigned, is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number or your institution can use some other method for assigning the ID.
-
The name of the employer. If you are selecting the employer from a list, it contains the names of all the employers configured for your institution.
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select an employer when they add or edit the task. Employers are configured by your institution. If you selected E-Mail Employer in the Event Type list, it is set to Required and cannot be changed.
-
Indicates the format used by Anthology Student to generate employer codes. You must set Employer Code Option to Employer Code Format to enable this feature. Valid Employer Codes consist of at least 6 characters and no more than 16 characters.
-
Select the employer code option. The options are: - Manual Entry – Requires a user-entered code to be used - Use Employer Code Format – A system-generated code can be applied to each employer
-
The name of the contact within the organization. If you are selecting a contact in a list, it contains the contacts configured for your institution. If your institution uses the Contact Type/Activities Security to limit access to contacts (Setup > Career Services), the list only contains the contacts you are authorized to select.
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select an employer contact when adding or editing a task.
-
Select the check box to associate the contact types based on staff group permissions.
-
The name of the employer group.
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to include only employers from the staff members authorized campuses in employer groups. To include the employers from all campuses, select No.
-
The name of the employer group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups where you have been given access.
-
The Id of the employer.
-
The job title with the employer. The list also displays the status of the job. The statuses are Available, Canceled, Closed, Pending, and Unable to Fill. No value in the status column indicates there is no status available for the job.
-
Name of the Employer. This is a mandatory field
-
Tuition paid by the student's employer. Specify the estimated amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Employer Paid Tuition - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the option does not apply to the student.
-
Indicates the employer type. The options are employer only, intern/extern only, or both.
-
Indicate the amount generated through employment.
-
The date when the student completed their internship (either CPT or OPT) with the sponsoring employer.
-
The funds generated by the student by working in the institution.
-
The reason for the student's application for training related to the course of study.
-
The date when the student started their internship (either CPT or OPT) with the sponsoring employer.
-
The employment status for the student.
-
The type of employment.
-
Refers to the Employment Type. The default types are-Employment, Internship/Externship and In School. You must be authorized to enter Job Type descriptions, codes, and active.
-
Indicate the employment type. The options are Economic hardship, International Organization, and Special Student Relief.
-
Nature of Employment. For example: Internship/Externship or Employment.
-
Select this check box to enable additional academic year loan packaging.
-
Indicates whether you want to enable the Deposit Receipt Number (DRN). The feature applies to ledger, subsidiary, and posting miscellaneous receipts. When this feature is enabled in the Student Web App, the following are disabled in the legacy interface: Posting ledger payments, Posting subsidiary payments, Posting payments using Processes, Posting miscellaneous receipts, Processes > Cash Drawer Sessions, and Printing bank deposit slip.
-
Select Yes to enable an additional payment gateway provider (other than PayPal or ACI) for credit card processing. When you enable this option, it permanently disables configuration forms and processes that are related to credit card and ACH processing in the legacy interface. Configuration forms and features that are disabled in the legacy interface include: • Post Payments – through Ledger Card and through Daily menu. You can no longer post payments in the legacy interface • Post FA Disbursements - Daily > Student Accounts • Post/Schedule Refunds - through Ledger Card or through Daily > Student Accounts > Post Individual Refunds • Payment Information for students - View menu > Student Accounts > Payment Info • Payment Information for Agencies - Daily > Contact Manager > Agency/Third Party > Edit an agency and agency branch > Payment Info • Process Electronic Drafts - Daily > Student Accounts • Admissions Deposits - View menu > Admissions > Deposit • Housing Deposits - View menu > Housing > Deposit • Process Online Applicants - Daily > Admissions • Credit card processor configuration for single credit card payments - Setup > Campus Locations > Edit campus > Electronic Processing tab • Credit card processor for batch payments/refunds and ACH processors - Setup > Student Accounts > Additional tab
-
Select Yes to enable an additional payment gateway provider (other than PayPal or ACI) for credit card processing. When you select this option, it permanently disables the following configuration and processes related to credit card and ACH processing in the legacy interface: • Admissions & Housing Deposits • Process Online Applicants under Admissions • Credit Card Processor configuration for single credit card payments on the Electronic Processing tab under Campus Locations • Payment Information for students – Credit Card related areas • Payment Information for Agency • Post FA disbursements (where you can post batch an agency payment using the credit card payment method) • Post Payments – through Ledger Card and Daily menu • Process Electronic Drafts • Refunds – through Ledger Card and Daily menu
-
Indicates that you want to allow posting or scheduling of ACH and Credit Card refunds/stipends regardless of whether ACH or Credit Card processor is configured for the student’s campus. When this feature is enabled, SA Process Refunds/Stipends under Daily in the Legacy product is disabled.
-
Enable Advanced Auto Packaging if you want to allow configurations related to Auto Repackaging only in the standard interface of Anthology Student. Advanced Auto Packaging allows the Auto Repackaging column to be displayed under Automate by Campus on the Automated Process Activation form. When Advanced Auto Packaging is enabled, the Population form can be configured only in the Student Web App, and the Population form is deprecated in the legacy interface.
-
Select this check box to enable anticipated grade level evaluation for additional academic year loan packaging. This enables the Task Template option. When Anthology Student inserts additional eligibility loan records onto the student's package and an activity trigger has been set up, Anthology Student notifies the appropriate staff member to review the additional eligibility loans. We recommend that you select EITHER 'Enable Automatic Grade Level Promotion' (with or without 'Enable Additional Academic Year Loan Packaging') OR 'Enable Anticipate Grade Level Evaluation and Additional Academic Year Loan Packaging' but not both.
-
Enables students to register for a course as an audit course. Audit courses are taken by students to sit in on a course without getting credits for it.
-
Select the check box when your campus uses Automated SAP Reporting and wants to allow viewing of the results of SAP Calculation Processing.
-
Select this check box to enable automatic grade level promotion. We recommend that you select EITHER 'Enable Automatic Grade Level Promotion' (with or without 'Enable Additional Academic Year Loan Packaging') OR 'Enable Anticipate Grade Level Evaluation and Additional Academic Year Loan Packaging' but not both.
-
You can use this setting to allow Barcode based Exam Attendance capture in Portal.
-
Select "Yes" if you want Anthology Student to enable campus-level security for batches based on the logged-in user’s permissions for the session default campus. The user will only be able to see batches created for campuses they can access. If a batch has been created for multiple campuses and the user cannot access at least one of the campuses, the batch will NOT be visible to the user. If you select "No," the logged-in user can view batches from multiple campuses, even if they do not have permission to access the batch details for some students. This setting is enabled by default. A script ensures that batches on the History tab that were created before the implementation of the campus-level security are also filtered based on the new campus-level security.
-
Select the check box if you want the campus integrated with Portal. When integrated, you can configure online registration. (Select the Processes tile > expand Academic Records > select Online Registration Configuration.) You can then configure active student groups with Display as Portal Content. (Select the Groups tile.) You can also create groups for Portal content when saving a group from a report (Reports tile). When a group is configured for Portal, the group is available to the Portal Administrator for customization and filtering (such as web content, including granting Portal access to custom home pages, content channels, and custom web parts).
-
Enables catalogs for the campus. Your institution must select the check box to enable catalogs for all campuses.
-
Specify whether you want to enable the check number field on adjustments for refunds.
-
Enable this setting to start sharing class schedule at a program group level, and access the Course Sharing Option tile under Class Scheduling.
-
Select this option to enable Clearinghouse processing that automates reporting and reduces the amount of time and money spent on SSCR records. If you enable this option, you can configure the reporting method.
-
Whether there is a connected trigger configured to initiate an enrollment change.
-
Select Yes if you want to enable the Faculty Contract Acknowledgement process using third-party eSignature with workflow automation.
-
When Faculty Workload Management (FWM) is enabled in the Student Web App, staff members can select the Advanced Feature “Enable Course Budgeting”. This feature allows staff members to associate General Ledger (GL) codes with Faculty Workload Activity Types. The GL code mapping is implemented in the data tables related to Departments, Course Load Type Details, Class Load Type Details, Non-Teaching Type Details, and Non-Teaching Activities. Once the feature is enabled, it remains permanently enabled.
-
Select this check box to enable Anthology Student for integration with a CRM product. The check box is not selected by default. When CRM Integration is selected, the Target CRM Web Service URL and Source CampusLink Web Services URL fields become enabled.
-
Select the check box if you want the campus integrated with a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product. If selected, Anthology Student launches the triggers associated with the campus level CRM integration functionality. The outgoing transaction queue database tables are populated with outgoing transaction messages such as campus student records and enrollment records. If cleared, Anthology Student does not launch the triggers associated with the campus level CRM integration functionality. The outgoing transaction queue database tables are not populated with outgoing transaction messages.
-
Select Yes to enable Curriculum Based Registration for the students. The flag cannot be changed once enabled.
-
When this feature is enabled, the "Custom Financial Aid Offer" option is available in the "Financial Aid Offer" drop-down on the Print Financial Aid Offer pop-up under Student Profile > Financial Aid> Awarding> Academic Year > Print Financial Aid Offer (button). This feature should only be enabled if a custom document has been created. By default, the feature is disabled.
-
Enables decentralized access to Program Groups and Departments. Once this flag is enabled, to regulate access, Departments will mandatorily have to be linked to Staff and Courses. This flag cannot be disabled once it is enabled.
-
Enable this setting to display the students and staffs names on their profiles in their local language alongside the system default language. The options here are Yes and No.
-
Select an Enable Duplicate Employer Check option. The options are: - No – (default) to disable the checking; - Global – check for duplicates across all campuses; - Campus Based – check for duplicates within the selected campuses;
-
Select whether or not you want to assign security levels for contacts based on staff group permissions.
-
Enable Examinations Feature if you want to allow the use of configurations and processes related to Examinations only in the standard interface of Anthology Student. This setting cannot be enabled if Enable Sub-component Scheduling and Registration Flag is enabled. Additionally, the flag cannot be changed once enabled.
-
This flag displays the following columns in the Enrollment Based Term Summary section of the student's enrollment: FA Enrollment Status, FA Credits Per Term, and FA Credits (EI). This feature is activated on a version of Student 24.2.0 or higher and Regulatory US 24.4.0 or higher.
-
Select this option to enable the use of Automated Multiple Fulfillment in the Web Client only. This enables the ability to configure the number of categories that a course could satisfy a requirement in DPA.
-
Select Yes if you want to use the Course Fulfillments Order option from the Configuration tile to modify the order that the system uses to fulfill courses in the degree progress audit (DPA). The course fulfillment orders you configure can then be selected when you configure program versions. If you select Yes, the Degree Progress Audit dialog in the legacy interface is disabled. You must use the Degree Progress Audit tile in the standard interface to work with the DPA for a student. If you select No, the system uses Default for all program versions.
-
Select Yes to "Enable Feature Flag For Validate Max Timeframe In Calender Years" if you want to evaluate and identify the students who have exceeded the maximum time frame (MTF) of required calendar time, credit hours, or clock hours.
-
Select the check box to enable Global Exception Security.
-
Select the check box to enable the fields in the Placement Internship form (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Career Services > Select the Placements & Internships tile.)
-
Indicates whether or not the integration is enabled.
-
Select this option to enable the system to recognize intersession registration periods. This allows the system to combine a non-standard term with a standard term for purposes of reporting dates to COD, Clearinghouse, and Enrollment Reporting. When intersession terms are enabled, the Intersession check box becomes available on the Term configuration page (Configuration > Academic Records > Terms).
-
Select this check box to restrict the staff members who can change the last date of attendance (LDA) to staff members in the groups you select in the list. Select Yes to require permission. If you select No, any staff member authorized to use the feature where the LDA can be changed can change the date.
-
The Advanced Feature flag "Enable Load Banking" can be set to Yes to allow an institution to bank loads for full-time faculty members for later applications. Load banking is not used for adjunct (part-time) faculty members. The load banking feature includes the FTE Bank Load Limit configuration functionality and any related database tables. Once the feature flag is enabled, it remains enabled permanently.
-
Select the check box to enable the multi-year master promissory note (MPN) feature.
-
Select this feature flag to enable your institution to use the new standard DPA logic. This setting centralizes the experience between students, advisors, and administrative staff creating a common experience and language within the DPA and its presentation. When you enable this flag, it disables the old DPA in the legacy interface, Student and Staff Portals, and enables the common DPA experience.
-
When the registry key “Enable Payment Period Update” is enabled, the system displays the actual payment period start and end dates for canceled disbursements where the amount is zero, as long as these dates fall within the updated loan period. For adjustments and refunds, the system uses the actual payment period start and end dates from the award, rather than the most recent accepted disbursement sequence. This behavior only applies when the registry key is enabled, ensuring that the system functions normally if it is disabled.
-
Select Yes to configure course pools. Once you have configured your pools, you can use the pools when you create a course list in the program version or area of study for elective and substitution pools. If a program version or area of study has existing catalogs, those can still be maintained manually by adding and removing course groups and individual courses. Select No to continue to manually create the elective and substitution pools by adding courses and course groups for each program version and area of study.
-
Select this check box to allow the printing of checks and enable the fields in this section.
-
Indicates that a seat in the class section can be reserved using Portal Online Registration. For example, a student may start the registration procees by selecting a reservation for a class seat and come back later to finish the registration. Seats can be reserved when: - Term is configured for online registration and is enabled for reservation - Class Section is not full or waitlisted - Credits on the Class Sections are less than the maximum credits allowed for reservation
-
Select Yes to enable the Advanced – Rule Based option in the Type list for requirement rules. When selected, you can specify more complex requirements using operators with any or all of the characters you specify in the codes for course characteristics. Select No to use the existing options of Standard and Advanced - Course Levels and Course Attributes. Yes is also required to specify requirements rules for program versions, the program version category level of a catalog for an elective or substitution pool, and the area of study category level of a catalog for an elective or substitution pool.
-
Select Yes if you want to exchange student data with the Student and Exchange Visitor Information System (SEVIS). For example, you can import files and transmit export files to SEVIS. Otherwise, select No.
-
Select this check box to enable the student attestation option on placement. The check box is enabled only if the In Field of Study option is enabled in the configuration setup for Placements & Internships.
-
Enable this setting to allow sub-component scheduling and registration for different methods of delivery configured under Course Sub-components(Eg. Labs, Lectures, and Tutorials). Enabling these sub-components also gives you access to Workload Credits, Grading Requirements, Scheduling Hours, Class Size etc. under Class Scheduling.
-
Specify whether you want to enable subsidiaries. Subsidiary ledgers are used to bill services not reflected in the student ledger card, for example, housing, meal plans, parking fees, and so on. By default, the value is set to Yes.
-
Select this check box to enable the System Auto-Locking Logic. It creates an automated process that locks past and current payment periods of students with a Last Date of Attendance (LDA) greater than 180 days. For additional information on Enable System Auto Locking Logic, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to customize their toolbar.
-
Enables students to be placed on a waitlist.
-
Select this check box if you want to display the fund sources while awarding. This is the default option.
-
Indicates that the selected prerequisite is enabled. The Optional and Required check boxes are enabled for the newly selected Enabled check box.
-
Indicates whether the system status change is enabled or disabled. If Yes is set, the Student Status grid is enabled.
-
Paid disbursements are evaluated against eligibility criteria at the end of the term date.
-
Specifies that the class ends after the number of occurrences you specify. For example, if the class meets twice a week and you want it to end in 8 weeks, specify 16.
-
The last date the item is effective or can be used.
-
The end date of the scheduled job.
-
The end date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to a date calculated from the enrollment date for the student plus the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. The end date of the second and subsequent academic years are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If your institution configured calendars, holidays are added to the calculation of the end date of the sequence. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods in most cases, the date should not be after the graduation date. For loan periods, the end date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The date when the student would like the address to no longer be in effect.
-
The last day to record the attendance. Attendance for a class section can be recorded for dates that are on or between the start and end dates.
-
The end date of the range. It will include any batches that completed processing before this date.
-
The date when an item ends or the last day it can be used.
-
Specify the date the job ends or select it from the calendar tool.
-
The end date of the student at the selected institution.
-
The date when an item ends or the last day it can be used.
-
If your institution has a range of dates that a transfer course is valid, the end date of the range.
-
The date when an item ends or the last day it can be used.
-
The date by which formal examinations are expected to conclude.
-
The date by which formal examinations are expected to conclude. For Program Versions associated with the Slot, the exam schedule must conclude on or before the date you specify in this field.
-
The end date of the class section.
-
The date you wish the automated job schedule to cease running.
-
The end date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to a date calculated from the enrollment date for the student plus the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. The end date of the second and subsequent academic years are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If your institution configured calendars, holidays are added to the calculation of the end date of the sequence. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods in most cases, the date should not be after the graduation date. For loan periods, the end date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The end date of the loan.
-
The last date that the item is effective or can be used.
-
The end date of the payment period. The default is the end date for the sequence. For an academic year, the end date of the last payment period sequence must be the same as the end date of the academic year. In most cases, for loan periods, the end date of the last payment period sequence should be the same as the end date for the loan period. The end date for one sequence must be before the start date of the subsequent sequence.
-
The date when an item ends or the last day it can be used.
-
If you selected Payment Period in the Period Type list, the end date of the payment period, term, or academic year. If you selected Period of Enrollment, the end date of the period. If the billing method selected for the program version is bill by program, the default is the graduation date for the program version. Otherwise, the default is the end date for the payment period, term, or academic year.
-
The end date of the term or payment. The default is the date configured for the term or payment period. If it is a term and you selected PERP, there is no default and you must select the date.
-
The date when an item ends or the last day it can be used.
-
The date when the conflict ended.
-
The date by which formal examinations are expected to conclude. For Program Versions associated with the Slot, exam schedule must conclude on or before the date you specify in this field.
-
The end date of the payment period.
-
The date the schedule or AY build you are configuring should end.
-
The end date of the term.
-
The date when the billing term can be no longer be used as default for the Term Group.
-
The end date of the registration period. This can be for Internal and Online Registration periods based on the configuration. The start and end dates for the registration periods must occur on or before the term start date.
-
Upper limit of date range for Loan Period’s end date specified for the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
The date when a transaction ends or the last day it can be used.
-
Specifies the range of dates the automated or manual calculation would have been performed. For example, if you want to display all the automated SAP calculations during a month, then specify the first day of the month in the Start Date field and the last day of the month in the End Date field.
-
The last date that the item is effective or can be used. This field is enabled only when you have selected Renewal Type as Academic Year.
-
The end date of the range for the revenue you want to recognize. It defaults to the end of the month for the start date following the Last Earn Date updated by Anthology Student in the configuration for the campus for Student Accounts after the last revenue recognition process was done.
-
Lower limit of date range for Loan Period’s end date specified for the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
The end position. The maximum length is 6 digits. The value cannot be empty and must be greater than 0. Also, the value cannot be less than the corresponding Start Position value. This field is only displayed if you have selected Fixed Length option in File Delimiter Option field.
-
The end position. The maximum length is 6 digits. The value cannot be empty and must be greater than 0. Also, the value cannot be less than the corresponding Start Position value.
-
Indicate the reason for ending the program. The options are: Death of Exchange Visitor, Withdrawal from program, Adjusted program end date, Cultural shock and/or homesickness, Inadequate financial support, Medical emergency and/or health of exchange visitor, Medical emergency and/or health of exchange visitors family, Other, and Program objectives completed early.
-
Indicate the reason for ending the status.
-
The end time of the item.
-
The time that the period is configured to end.
-
The time when the conflict ended.
-
Indicates the cash balance in an account at the end of a reporting period.
-
Total amount of loan for which the endorser has agreed to co-sign.
-
Indicates whether the borrower has been approved. The values are Yes and No.
-
Select this check box to restrict the unregister of Current/LOA courses if the Add/Drop Date of the course sections has passed. This setting only applies when processing a student status change to any new student status that belongs to a system status of Drop.
-
Select this check box to restrict the unregister of scheduled courses if the Add/Drop Date of the class section has passed. This setting only applies when processing a student status change to any new student status that belongs to a system status of Drop. When determining if the student status change occurs before or after a scheduled status course’s Add/Drop Date, Anthology Student uses the NSLDS Withdrawal Date.
-
Select the check box if you want to create sub batches of disbursements. For example, select the check box if you want to post approved disbursements to Student Accounts as a separate batch, but need to keep track of the original parent disbursement batch. When batch integrity is enforced, Anthology Student maintains a record of the initial contents of disbursement batches created from importing a Global payment (C2PA) file. This functionality is also available for manually created disbursement batches. The record of the initial contents of disbursement batches is separate from the record of the posting batch number assigned to the disbursements posted to student ledger cards. If you select the check box, you should also lock the batch job.
-
Select Yes if you want to allow financial aid officers to move successful disbursement approvals to Student Accounts without sacrificing batch integrity and force reports to display the parent batch ID number when separate batches are created from a parent batch. The default is No.
-
Select this check box to enforce Last Day to Withdraw Dates. If you select this check box, a last day to withdraw date is calculated for each course section offered at this campus. For additional information about enforcing Last Day to Withdraw Dates, see Background for Academic Records for Campuses.
-
Indicates if the student has submitted proof of meeting the English proficiency requirement.
-
The reason the English language proficiency is not a requirement for the program version. This is a SEVIS requirement.
-
Indicates that an international student is required to submit test scores as proof of English proficiency.
-
The actual date when the student enrolled in the program version.
-
The enrollment status date for the student.
-
The Enroll Intensity column is displayed only for Pell awards. Enrollment Intensity will be used when calculating Pell disbursements for term-based programs in 2024-25 and later. The field will be displayed for any award year but only used in the amount calculations for 2024-25 and beyond. For new Pell awards, the default value is 100%. The field is editable. When you specify a percentage value and select Save or Recalculate Pell Eligibility, the Enrollment Intensity value you specified is saved and stored in the database. The database stores the percentage values as decimal values (e.g., 80% is saved as 0.80).
-
The student's enrollment status.
-
The credits or hours used to calculate enrollment status for financial aid purposes. The value cannot be edited for audit courses.
-
The number of credits that can be used to calculate a student's enrollment status. This option is used for zero credit courses that cannot be taken for academic credit but is used mainly for financial aid purposes. For example, graduate-level internships. The value entered in Enroll Status Credits is used in enrollment status calculations and automated disbursement approval for credit hour programs. If you do not specify a value, Anthology Student updates the field with the value in Credits. If the course is a dependent course, the Enroll Status Credits field is disabled.
-
Indicates the program version configuration from which the FA Credits and FA Enrollment Status are retrieved.
-
The credits or hours used to calculate enrollment status for financial aid purposes. The value cannot be edited for audit courses.
-
The number of hours that can be used to calculate a student's enrollment status. This option is used for zero credit courses that cannot be taken for academic credit but is used mainly for financial aid purposes. For example, remedial courses that are part of the academic program but do not earn academic clock hours towards graduation and do not contribute towards academic progress calculation. The value entered in Enroll Status Hours is used in enrollment status calculations and automated disbursement approval for clock hour programs. If you do not specify a value, Anthology Student updates the field with the value in Hours. If the course is a dependent course, Enroll Status Hours is disabled.
-
The total attempted hours for the selected term. The Learning Support Hours represent the courses that the student is taking after Fall 2011 that are remedial and are to be excluded for payment. These courses are identified by being configured as Remedial at the course level. The extract process validates if the student has registered for any of these courses for the selected term and, if so, then the credits for the courses are included in the Learning Support Hours field and they are excluded from the Paid Hours field for the selected term. The Learning Support Hours credit hours are then included in this field.
-
The code and name of the enrollment.
-
The campuses at which distance education students are enrolled. Make sure the campus or campuses you select have nothing but distance education students. If you are not sure, or if the campus does not qualify, use one of the other selection criteria.
-
You can use this option to enable the auto course registration assignment feature on Portal Self Service Registration. By default, the value is set to No.
-
The overall GPA for the student's current enrollment.
-
The actual date when the student enrolled in the program version.
-
The actual date when the student enrolled in the program version. This property only supports Equals as operator option.
-
The enrollment date for the Pell award is populated with the start date of the first eligible payment period for the award year.
-
The enrollment date for the student. If the enrollment date for the student is after July 1 of the award year, the date from the enrollment record is displayed in this field. If the enrollment date for the student is before July 1 of the award year, this field displays the July 1 date of that year. The enroll date must occur within the award year.
-
Specifies the date range that the student enrolled at the institution. Only students whose enrollment date is within the specified date range will be included.
-
The last date the student was enrolled at the institution.
-
The number assigned during enrollment based on the parameters specified by the institution.
-
The number assigned during the enrollment based on the parameters specified by the institution. This field is displayed only if you select Type as Student.
-
Indicates that enrollment information should be included or omitted based on your selection.
-
Select the check box if you want enrollment information to be printed.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to show enrollment information on the statement.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the enrollment information of the student on the bills.
-
Indicates that enrollment information should be included or omitted on the statement based on your selection.
-
Enrollment intensity is the percentage of full-time enrollment at which a student is enrolled, rounded to the nearest whole percent. For example, if full-time enrollment is 12 credit hours and the student is enrolled in 12 credit hours, the enrollment intensity would be 100%. If the student is enrolled in 7 credit hours, the enrollment intensity would be 7 ÷ 12 × 100% = 58%. Pell Grants are prorated according to the student’s enrollment intensity rounded to the nearest whole percent. The Enrollment Intensity field will be presented for every financial aid term, however, for FA terms falling in an award year prior to 2024-25, the field may not have a value. A value could be populated for prior terms if enrollments are unregistered or dropped.
-
The number assigned during enrollment based on the parameters specified by the institution.
-
The number assigned during the enrollment.
-
The number assigned during the enrollment based on the parameters specified by the institution. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
Enter the enrollment number as per the format. The format string for enrollment number is: YY=Year, MM=Month, DD=Day, ####=Next Number, L=Last Name, F=First Name. For additional information about the enrollment number format, see the background for academic records general settings.
-
The number assigned during the enrollment based on the parameters specified by your institution. The next student to enroll will be assigned an enrollment number that is one greater than the number entered here. Anthology Student automatically increments the enrollment number as numbers are assigned to students.
-
You can use this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when a student payment is made following enrollment.
-
You can use this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when a student payment is made following enrollment. Only Student Payment or Enrollment Payment may be selected (selecting one will unselect the other).
-
The enrollment status included in the student's Enrollment record. For example, Full Time.
-
Select the enrollment status to which the academic year applies. The values are Less than half time, Half Time, 3/4 Time, Full Time, and Default. If you select Default, Anthology Student uses the values for any enrollment status that you do not configure. For example, if you specify Full-Time and Default. The values for Default are used for Half Tim, Less than half time, and 3/4 Time.
-
This field displays the academic year enrollment status (using the FaStudentCredits.Enrollment status value) for the FA Terms based on FA Credits when the Advanced Feature flag "Enable FA Credits for Enrollment Status and Enrollment Intensity" is set to "Yes".
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the value for Enrollment Status under Date and Status on their Enrollments page is specified or changed to the value you select in the Values list.
-
The Enrollment Status specifies the credits the student is registered for in the most recently registered term. For example, if the student is Full Time Minimum in the current term but they have already registered for the next term and it is Half Time Minimum, the field displays Half Time Minimum. The Enrollment Status is calculated using the Enrollment Status Credits and/or Enrollment Status Hours configured on the course(s) when a student registers, unregisters, or drops a course in a term. Anthology Student calculates the enrollment status based on the Full Time Minimum, Half Time Minimum, 3/4 Time Minimum, and Less Than Half Time Minimum configured on the program version the student is enrolled in. For more information, see Add or Edit a Program Version topic.
-
The enrollment status for the student after the add and drop period. It is the status that determines whether a student is eligible to receive the federal aid that was packaged for the academic year. If a student has registered for a course but never attends that course, institutions can still charge the student for the course but might need to reduce federal aid. For an award, the default is the status on the enrollment record. If there is no status on the enrollment record, the default is Full Time. For a disbursement, the default is the value specified for the award.
-
Specifies the enrollment status to which the evaluation criteria apply (such as Full-time and 3/4 time). If the enrollment status for the student matches this selection, the student's progress is compared to this detail when calculating SAP. If you do not select an enrollment status and it is left blank, the criteria in the detail line apply to all student enrollment statuses.
-
The enrollment status included in the student's Enrollment record. For example, Full Time or Half Time. If a student is a lead or an applicant, it is blank.
-
The Enrollment Status specifies the credits the student is registered for a term. The Enrollment Status is calculated using the Enrollment Status Credits and/or Enrollment Status Hours configured on the course(s) when a student registers, unregisters, or drops a course in a term. Anthology Student calculates the enrollment status based on the Full Time Minimum, Half Time Minimum, 3/4 Time Minimum, and Less Than Half Time Minimum configured on the program version the student is enrolled in. For more information, see Add or Edit a Program Version topic.
-
The credits or hours used to calculate enrollment status for financial aid purposes. The value cannot be edited for audit courses.
-
By default, this field is populated with the number of enrollment status credits that were saved when configuring the course. You can also enter the number of credits that will then be used to calculate the student's enrollment status for the course.
-
Select "Term Enrollment status <> Packaged to Status" if you want to analyze only records with discrepancies regarding term enrollment status and packaged status. This option will include students where the "Packaged to" status on the academic year is blank, which is different than the Enrollment Status value. Select "No - All records" if you want to retrieve any records with disbursements for the selected terms. This option will include all packaged students and those where the "Packaged to" status on the academic year is blank.
-
The credits or hours used to calculate enrollment status for financial aid purposes. The value cannot be edited for audit courses.
-
By default, this field is populated with the number of enrollment status hours that were saved when configuring the course. You can also enter the number of hours that will then be used to calculate the student's enrollment status for the course.
-
When selected, specifies that the current student status must match their packaged to status for the disbursement to meet the criteria. If the two statuses are not equal, the criterion is not met. Anthology Student compares the current student status to the value specified for Packaged To Status on their Academic Years tab (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile > Academic Years tab.)
-
Specify the status of enrollment. The options are Dropped or Attending.
-
Specifies the maximum number of enrollment transfer credits approved.
-
Select the student's enrollment for housing application. For the non degree seeking students, if you selected the enrollment, the Academic Year for which housing is required is disabled. Anthology Student automatically assigns the start date and end date based on the enrollment’s expected start date and expected graduation date. For the degree seeking student, the Academic Years pertaining to the selected enrollment is displayed. Select the corresponding Academic Year(s) that the Housing Application pertains to.
-
Select the color code required for enrollment category.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the enrollment information of the student.
-
If you are using Regulatory or Financial Aid Automation, specify the path for files. If you are not using the Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Cloud, specify <drive>:\<foldername>\. In most cases, the drive is Q. If you are using the Q drive and did not create the folder in Q, Anthology Student creates it for you. If you do not know your drive or folder, contact Client Services. The path you specify here must be different from the EDE Path you specified for ISIR import for the campuses (Settings > System > Campuses > select the name of a campus or click the New button, specify the required information, and save the campus > select the Financial Aid tile > ISIR tab.)
-
Specify the marks for moderation.
-
Specifies the format the score must be entered (such as numeric).
-
Indicates the name by which the system identifies this entity. It cannot be changed.
-
Specifies the entity that must be used to order the results. The options are Student Number, First Name, and Last Name.
-
The characteristic of the course you want to use with the operator and value to determine the results. For example, if you selected Course Prefix Code for Entity and Start With for Operator and specify ART, Anthology Student all the courses with a prefix of ART.
-
If you select Enrollment, Anthology Student uses the both the program version and the area of study information. Select Program Version or Area of Study if you only want to use to the program version or area of study.
-
Indicates the Groups or Role or Tasks associated with the audit.
-
The Reporting Entity ID is the Routing ID of the institution that reports the Pell and/or Direct Loan data in the COD Common Record format for the campuses or students it serves. The Reporting School Entity ID must be a school and cannot be a third-party servicer.
-
Indicates the name of the Groups or Roles or Tasks associated with the audit.
-
Select an entity for which you want to add and manage the extended property.
-
Read-only field that is selected by the system once the Entrance Counseling Acknowledgement (CRECMYOP) file is imported from COD. This way the user is aware that the file has been imported and entrance counseling is complete.
-
When selected, specifies that the student must have had an entrance or counseling interview to meet the criteria. The date of the entrance or counseling interview is associated with an enrollment rather than with the student. However, once a student has had the interview, the association is made with all enrollments.
-
Select the Entrance Interview document. When the document has been added to the student's document folder and the document status code is OK, REC, RECVD, RECEIVED, REC'VD, or A and is associated with an Approved/On file status, the entrance interview date in the Academic Year form is set to the date the document was received.
-
Select the required environment type from the drop-down list. The options are Blank, UAT and Test. The out of the box setting for an environment will be Blank, which will also be the case when it is for a production environment. Once selected, you must log out and log in back to see the environment type updated in Anthology Student based on your selection.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the equivalent courses specified for the course using the Parent Courses & Equivalents tile to the new course.
-
If there is an equivalent SAT score, Anthology Student displays it in the field. Otherwise, the field is not displayed.
-
Select of the terms you have configured at your institution, the term at your institution that maps to the State of Texas term type for the award year you selected in the Award Year list.
-
The error indicator. This field is populated only when there are discrepancies in amounts between the revenue earnings summary record and the associated earnings detail records.
-
Numerical TSM Error or Warning Code.
-
Error code(s) associated with the Error Acknowledgement record. Click the link to view the error description(s).
-
A numeric code that indicates an invalid entry in the Enrollment Reporting file.
-
If a message transfer has a status of failed, the Error Details link is displayed. The link will open a popup with error information.
-
If there was a problem processing the student, the message contains information about the error.
-
Description of the error.
-
The status of an exception that was escalated to a secondary reviewer.
-
Select the check box to indicate whether the aid status to be included is Estimated.
-
Specifies whether you want Estimated aid status to be included when evaluating student’s funding for the bills.
-
The amount of the estimated awards that will come from this Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
The Estimated Award Year COA field is displayed on the Awards tab for award years 2024-25 and later. When a student’s Academic Year (AY) budget is updated or saved, a background service populates the Estimated Award Year COA field with an Award Year 1 or Award Year 2 value that matches the student’s Pell award year. Estimated Award Year COA is an editable field with a maximum value of $999,999.00. The field can be locked to prevent the value from being changed. The Financial Aid Audit tracks all changes to the Estimated Award Year COA value and indicates the User IDs associated with the changes. For more details, see "Background for Pell Grants".
-
The estimated cost of attendance for the program version that you selected.
-
Expected Family Contribution (EFC) estimated by your institution for the student when financial aid was estimated for the student on the FA Estimates page. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Enrollment estimated by your institution for the student when financial aid was estimated for the student on the FA Estimates page.
-
Indicates the estimated funding.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the estimated aid status.
-
The ethnic group that best describes the lead or student.
-
The ethnicities of the student. The values are configured by your institution.
-
The Matriculation information for the J-1 student.
-
Indicates whether the student is a re-entry. Anthology Student evaluates the re-entry date to determine whether the student is a re-entry. If they have a re-entry date, it displays the date and ***Reenroll in the ReEnroll Info column in the report.
-
Specifies the number of the answer scripts evaluated by the Evaluator.
-
Select how you want Anthology Student to evaluate the criteria. The values are Attempted Credit Hours, Date, Earned Credit Hours, Selected Terms, Term Begin Date, and Term End Date. The value you select determines the field that is displayed for entering the specific value.
-
Select the system-defined SAP criterion.
-
Indicates the date to use when evaluating time completed for a given course. Select Last Date of Attendance (LDA) or Date of Determination (DOD). The LDA option is the last date of positive attendance. The DOD is the date when the student began the official withdrawal process or the date of the student’s notification of the intent to withdraw, whichever is later. If a student did not begin the official withdrawal process or provide notification of the intent to withdraw, the DOD would be the date when the institution becomes aware that the student ceased attendance.
-
Specifies how the criteria are evaluated. Select Current Enrollment to evaluate the criteria using the information for the current enrollment. Select Disbursement Term to evaluate the criteria using the information for the term.
-
Evaluation period. If you select entire enrollment as the evaluation period option, then all term related criteria i.e. student must have TUIT charges for the term, is removed. You still have the ability associate the fees being posted to a specific term. The Term field is conditionally required based on the transaction code selected to be associated with the fee when posting. The student must have be enrolled (must have an actual enrollment record) to be included in STRF assessment batch.
-
Select the evaluation period to assess STRF fee. You can either assess STRF fee based on Term or entire period of enrollment. The student must have be enrolled to be included in STRF assessment batch. When you select Term, the total institutional charges amount considers all transactions for the specified term that are considered institutional charges.
-
The evaluation period that you have selected for California STRF processing.
-
Select the evaluation period to assess the STRF fee. You can either assess the STRF fee based on the term or the entire period of enrollment. The student must be enrolled to be included in the STRF assessment batch. When you select Term, the STRF fee is calculated based on total institutional charges for the specified term. When you select Enrollment Period, the STRF fee is calculated based on the Program Costs configured for the student’s program version.
-
Indicates when the stipend will be created on the basis of the Start or Add/Drop date of the student’s registered term or financial aid term, set Credit Balance Evaluation Scheduling to Configured Days on Registered Term or Configured Days on Financial Aid Term.
-
Indicates the type of evaluation for the bursary. The options are Automated, Workflow, and Hybrid. Automated indicates you want the process automated. Workflow indicates you want to use a workflow. Hybrid indicates you want a combination. For hybrid, the evaluation is automated. If the evaluation is successful, Anthology Student International uses the hierarchy specified for Workflow Hierarchy to start the workflow that manages the approval. If the evaluation fails, then the status on the Bursary Application is set to Rejected.
-
Name of the evaluator.
-
Specifies the event that must occur in addition to the event specified under Trigger. If you want it to be the event under trigger, select Event Occurred. The other options are events that you want Anthology Student to combine with the trigger to calculate when the task is scheduled. The values in the list depend on the other values you have selected. For example, LOA Return Date and Last Date Attended is only an option if you select School Status for When and a status in Changes To that is configured to be a leave of absence LOA).
-
The status of the graduation ceremony event. The available statuses are Scheduled, Hold, Cancelled, and Completed.
-
The type of event associated with the task. Events are defined by the system and are selected for task templates when they are configured by your institution.
-
Specify the characteristic used to filter the task types. For example, to display the task types that result in a meeting, select Schedule Meeting.
-
Indicates the day of the month when you want to run a scheduled export student attachment batch. This field is available when the Frequency is set to Monthly.
-
Indicates the day of the month when you want to run a scheduled student batch export. This field is visible when the Frequency is set to Monthly.
-
Specific title for the job position.
-
Specifies the exact title for the job.
-
Boards that represent entities who recognize and certify minimum qualifications to be eligible to apply for programs at Institutions.
-
Name of the Exam Center configured by your institution.
-
Date on which an exam for a particular lesson expected to be conducted.
-
Date on which exam for a lesson expected to be conducted.
-
The date on which exams for associated Program Version courses must conclude on schedule. You must specify an end date which falls within the Slot period.
-
End time of the exam.
-
Additional time allotted to students with disabilities for exams.
-
The fee charged by your institution to take the test. If the test is administered by an organization outside of your institution, the value is blank.
-
Select this option to designate a transaction code for exam fees. You can then select such transaction codes while defining exam fees, specifically in Examinations Fee Schedules. This option is displayed only if your institution is using the Examinations module.
-
If the test is administered by your institution, specifies whether the student has paid your institution the fee for the test.
-
You can use the Exam Lessons tab to post exam lesson scores of students and calculate final grades. You can also restrict Instructors to enter marks to exam lessons of class schedule to which they are primary or secondary instructor.
-
Specifies the lesson associated with a course.
-
Specifies the code associated with an exam lesson.
-
Specifies the code associated with an exam lesson.
-
Last date for entering grades.
-
Specifies the name associated with an exam lesson.
-
You can use the Exam Lessons tab to post exam lesson scores of students and calculate final grades. You can also restrict Instructors to enter marks to exam lessons of class schedule to which they are primary or secondary instructor.
-
If your institution administers the test, the location of the test at the campus for the student. The locations are specified by your institution.
-
Location of Exam building. Exam locations are configured by your institution
-
Place where the exam will be held. Exam locations are configured by your institution.
-
Student exam location preference for the particular course can be selected. Exam locations are configured by your institution.
-
Name of the Exam Schedule configured by your institution.
-
The date on which exams for the associated Program Version courses can commence on schedule. You must specify a start date that falls within the Slot period.
-
Start time of the exam.
-
Specifies whether exams are regular (R), supplementary (S), or interim (I). Interim (I) is only availavle in version 7.0 and higher.
-
Represent entities that recognize and certify minimum qualifications to be eligible to apply for programs at institutions.
-
The exception code and description for the revenue earning exception.
-
Reserved for future use by COD.
-
The title of the specific exception.
-
Indicates the error that caused the exception. For example, Expired Card, CC Hold, ACH Hold, Refunds Hold, or Stipends Hold. This field displays multiple exceptions whenever applicable. If a student belongs to a student group that is associated with the Refunds Hold or Stipends Hold action, credit card refunds and ACH refunds batch displays Refunds Hold exception and ACH stipends display Stipends Hold exception.
-
Indicates that there were errors during process. You can select the Print GL Detail button to review the exceptions in a report. For example, an exception is displayed if there are transactions that were gathered to be released that do not have accounts numbers.
-
Use these two fields to input a value for the number of days an exception has been in existence and a specific date to start the search.
-
Specific system assigned code for the exception.
-
Description of the exception code.
-
Select for basic details about the exception.
-
Text that describes the error that caused the exception.
-
If an external identifier could not be assigned, the reason why.
-
If a course could not be copied, the reason why. For example, if the source course has a code that contains the maximumn number of characters and the -n cannot be appended, a message is displayed saying that the course could not be copied. If the message refers you to the log for details, you will need to work with your System Administrator to resolve the problem. Your System Administrator can refer to the logs to troubleshoot the exception.
-
If a student was not imported, the reason why. For example, Anthology Student could not find the unique identifier in the database.
-
Describes the reason that caused the exception.
-
The current system status of the exception.
-
6-digit code of the exception that occurred when importing a COD file.
-
Indicates if an exception is being made for the student upon not meeting all eligibility criteria.
-
The specific exception (listed by code and name) you are searching for.
-
Indicates the Exchange Visitor program number. The values is required for J1 visa types.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to exclude payment plans that are configured for auto-draft.
-
Only Available when the SAP policy is configured for Maximum Time Frame (MTF). Select Include or Exclude on each academic year for SAP to use in the calculation for MTF.
-
The Exclude Box 4 column indicates whether a student transaction should be excluded from Box 4 in the 1098-T calculations. This column can be modified only by institutions that used Box 1 reporting in the previous year or earlier.
-
Indicates that dropped courses are not counted towards the maximum number of attempts allowed.
-
Specifies the default setting to use when a course is added to a required course list. Anthology Student uses this setting to determine whether to count dropped courses towards the maximum number of attempts allowed when a student is registered for a course that is not required.
-
Indicates the default setting to use when a course is added to the required course list. This value is used when adding a student to a course that is not required. In this scenario, the value is used to determine whether to count dropped courses towards the maximum number of attempts allowed.
-
Select this check box if the fund source is to be excluded from 90/10 calculations. By default, fund sources are NOT excluded from 90/10 calculations. When you select this option, other 90/10 related settings (existing or new) for the fund source will be disabled/hidden.
-
Available for Grants (Other than Pell), Scholarships, Other Outside Resources, Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant in the Type list, you can select this check box to specify that awards using one of these fund source types will not be included in that Package to Cost of Attendance grid for the student’s financial aid package. If you selected Other Outside Resources and the Print Promissory Note check box, the check box is disabled.
-
Specifies whether or not students or groups with this status are excluded when you manually or automatically recalculate their satisfactory academic progress (SAP). For example, you would specify No if you had a status for a SAP appeal and you want the appeal to remain on their record after SAP is recalculated for the same time period.
-
Specifies whether or not students or groups with this status are excluded when you manually or automatically recalculate their satisfactory academic progress (SAP). For example, you would specify No if you had a status for a SAP appeal and you want the appeal to remain on their record after SAP is recalculated for the same time period.
-
Select check box to exclude holidays when calculating actual disbursement date.
-
Select the check box to automatically exclude holidays when determining disbursement dates.
-
Select whether or not you want to display all jobs except those designated as part time in school in the report.
-
Select Yes for this option if you want to prevent the NDS program information from being included for the students when the system calculates the enrollment status, term begin and end dates, etc. for the Clearinghouse extract file. This setting is required when you select the "Exclude NDS Students" check box in Processes > Financial Aid > Clearinghouse Enrollment Reporting.
-
When selected, excludes CommonLine disbursements that have been released.
-
Select one or more statuses and save the status selection for the campus. Auto stipends can be configured to exclude student statuses across all evaluation types, so that students can be limited from having an auto stipend processed. For additional information on Exclude Student Statuses from Auto-Stipend, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
When selected, excludes the summer term from financial aid packaging. By default, students are included in summer term packaging if the program version is configured to package for the summer. Students can then choose to be excluded from summer packaging.
-
If the Validate to Maximum Timeframe Of check box is selected, this option becomes enabled. Select this option to exclude transfer credits or clock hours from required credits or clock hours as part of the validation rule.
-
Select check box to exclude weekends when calculating actual disbursement date.
-
Select the check box to automatically exclude weekends when determining disbursement dates.
-
Indicates if the student has an excused absence for the scheduled time of the class.
-
The excused absence time for the payment period. The field is only displayed if the program version is configured to use clock hours.
-
Specifies the type of file for the exceptions. F indicates an exception for a R2T4 refunds file. T indicates an exception for a tuition adjustments file. B indicates an exception for a budget file. C indicates an exception for a change file. A indicates an exception for a scheduled awards file D indicates an exception for a scheduled disbursements file. P indicates an exception for a paid disbursements file. R indicates an exception for a refund file. S indicates an exception for a document tracking file.
-
Indicates the student is exempt from any registration group-related date restrictions.
-
If selected, indicates that the student met the criteria in the "Include IRS Exempt Student into the Batch" options on the Selection Criteria for the 1098-T batch.
-
The number of tax exemptions the student or person. Specify a number between 0 and 50.
-
Financial Awareness Counseling date.
-
Enter the date that the placement exit interview occurred.
-
Select a Status from the drop-down list.
-
The expected amount to be disbursed. If it is calculated by Anthology Student, Anthology Student divides the total award amount by the number of payment periods in the academic year. When disbursement amounts cannot be divided evenly, the first payment is the highest. For example, for a $2,000 award, the first two disbursements are $667 and the last disbursement is $666. For a $1000 award, the first disbursement is $334 and the last two disbursements are $333. The auto package features use the same method.
-
The date on which the disbursement is to be paid. For grants and Perkins loans, it must be before the end of the award year and academic year. For Direct loans, the date can be changed to a date outside both the loan period and academic year dates for non-term program versions.
-
The number of hours per week that the student is expected to complete in the training or externship. The number of hours specified must be less than the Total Hours for Externship.
-
The date the student is expected to start enrollment at your institution.
-
The expected credits per term for a program version.
-
Select the condition for the Expected Credits per Term output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (10 ; 12) in the respective value field, the report displays the Expected Credits per Term values between 5 and 10 only.
-
The expected hours of externship or training per week that the student is expected to take.
-
Select the condition for the Expected Hours of Externship per Week output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Between' and enter the range (8 ; 12) in the respective value field, the report displays the Expected Hours of Externship per Week Values between 8 and 12 only.
-
Select this check box to leave disbursements in a scheduled status if the scheduled disbursement date is within 30 days of the student's last day of attendance (LDA) and the student status is changed to Drop. The default for this check box is cleared.
-
The date the student is expected to start and complete the class.
-
The term in the degree pathway that the student is expected to complete the program version and area of study (if applicable).
-
The total number of credits that the student is expected to complete per term.
-
The date on which the disbursement is to be paid. For grants and Perkins loans, it must be before the end of the award year and academic year. For Direct loans, the date can be changed to a date outside both the loan period and academic year dates for non-term program versions.
-
The date the student completes the class. This value is filled in by default, based on the Class Section End Date.
-
Amount expected to be received from the selected fund source for the academic year.
-
Select a print option for expected funding details. The options are "Do Not Print Expected Funding", "Print All Expected Funding", and "Print Expected Funding Through Specified Term".
-
Select the print option for expected funding. The options are "Do Not Print Expected Funding", "Print All Expected Funding" (recommended option), and "Print Expected Funding Through Specified Term". If you select "Do Not Print Expected Funding", the Aid Statuses options are not visible.
-
The expected graduation date for the student at your institution.
-
The expected graduation date for the student at your institution.
-
The expected graduation date for students who enter the program version on the start date.
-
The number of hours per week that the student is expected to complete in the training or externship. The number of hours specified must be less than the Total Hours for Externship.
-
The date of expected payment receipt.
-
Indicates the basis for the refund deadline.
-
Select the basis for the refund deadline. The options are 'LDA Basis', 'Determination Date Basis', and 'Earlier of Both'. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
The date by which the refund should be processed. It is the value for Date of Determination (DOD) plus the number of days your institution configured for the campus for the number of days to add to the DOD to calculate the due date.
-
The date the student is expected to start enrollment at your institution.
-
The date the student is expected to start enrollment at your institution.
-
The date the student is expected to start the enrollment at your institution. This date will automatically be updated when a change is made to the student’s enrollment Expected Start Date or a new enrollment record is added to the student’s record. If the student has multiple enrollments, it is the date the student is expected to start the most current enrollment with the status in the highest status category in the hierarchy.
-
Specifies the expected start date range for the student at your institution for the enrollment.
-
Select a term from the list of available terms.
-
Available terms with start and end dates for each term. This field is disabled if you have specified Version Start Date in Pending Enrollment Information section.
-
The date the student is expected to start at your institution, which is found in the Student Profile.
-
Select the print option for expected funding. The options are - Do Not Print Expected Funding, Print All Expected Funding and Print Expected Funding through specified Term.
-
Select the term. This field is enabled only if you select print expected funding through specified term option in Expected Funding.
-
The expenses incurred by the student or the student's dependent.
-
The date when the item is no longer valid. If you are specifying the value, specify the value in the format MM/DD/YYYY or select the calendar button to select the date. For student groups, the default is configured for the campus by your institution.
-
Indicates the date when the API Key is no longer valid. This date is posted when the integrations with given API key do not work. If you are specifying the value, specify the value in the format MM/DD/YYYY or click the calendar button to select the date. This field cannot be set to more than 2 years from the current date.
-
The date the delegation of the group is scheduled to end.
-
Indicates the credit card’s expiration year and month in the following format MM / YY.
-
The date when the item no longer valid. This value is populated by default based on the value specified in the Default Number of Days to Retain Student Groups check box. If you have selected multiple student groups, the maximum value will be used.
-
The date when the credit card is no longer valid.
-
Number of days for the post withdrawal disbursement notification to expire.
-
The month when the credit card is no longer valid.
-
The year when the credit card is no longer valid.
-
This status is used to update the document when the Post Withdrawal has expired and is no longer being offered.
-
When selected, displays only groups that have not exceeded their expiration date.
-
The date from which the group will no longer be valid.
-
Describe the reason.
-
A unique export batch ID is associated with each export batch and used for tracking purposes.
-
The date that the file was actually exported and transmitted to SEVIS.
-
The date the file was exported.
-
Select the Export File Definition. The options are: Lawson Export File Definition, Budget Sense Export File Definition, People Soft and Space Def. When you select Other general ledger system, this option becomes enabled.
-
The path configured by your institution for the export file. If your institution did not configure a path, you can specify one.
-
Specify the path to the location where you want Anthology Student to save the report.
-
Indicates the name of the generated file.
-
The name of the exported file.
-
The path configured by your institution for the export file. If your institution did not configure a path, you can specify one.
-
Indicates the path where the export file will be placed once it is generated.
-
Select whether or not you want to export payroll earning lines to Azure Service Bus (ASB). If Yes, it will be sent to ASB. For No, it will be exported as a file.
-
Indicates whether or not the record for the student is included in the file. Passed indicates a student was included. Failed indicates they are not included. For example, if the student is missing a Social Security Number (SSN) or phone number, the record failed one or more validations and will be rejected by CommonLine
-
Select whether you want to export a default location.
-
Enter the Timeout Value in seconds (0-900) for SSRS Export to Excel.
-
Enter the Timeout Value in seconds (0-900) for all the SSRS Export to Excel. The timeout duration for PDF export has been extended from 15 minutes. The timeout duration for SSRS Report Timeout has been extended from 20 minutes.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the courses with this delivery method selected can be exported to an external Learning Management System (LMS).
-
Specifies the type of file you want to export. Pre-Pull Extract extracts all students currently enrolled in school with a schedule for the selected upcoming terms. Add/Drop Extract extracts all the students previously extracted in the Pre-Pull file to submit an update of their enrollment status.
-
Specify the exported batch name.
-
Indicates the email address of the staff member or process that exported the item.
-
The last and then first name of the staff member who exported the file.
-
Indicates the date when the item was exported.
-
The date and time the file was sent to SEVIS.
-
The name of the exported file.
-
Extension for the phone number.
-
This configuration allows you to extend a final AY/LP date by the length of specified course type when schools require students to show competency in their degrees.
-
The custom properties that your institution chooses to include in various entities.
-
If needed, the extension for the work phone number.
-
The employer's telephone extension number.
-
The start date of the student's externship.
-
The date if the program version is configured to require an external start date.
-
Specify all the batches which are already exported to Talisma Fundraising. You can select only one batch at a time.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution for external use. In most cases, codes must be unique.
-
External identifier is the document type reference received from the integrated environment (third party). For Hyland's OnBase, it associates the OnBase document type that was created for the Anthology Student document.
-
Indicates bursary can be used for external payouts.
-
A unique earning code identifier from the Payroll system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the Payroll system.
-
Specify the reference identifier from the external payroll system (for example, Anthology Payroll or any third-party payroll application).
-
Specify the reference identifier from the external Payroll system (for example, Anthology Payroll or any third party payroll application). This column is only visible if your institution selected the Manual Configuration option in the Update Payroll Configuration settings under Settings > Faculty Workload > General.
-
A unique pay cycle identifier from the Payroll system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the Payroll system.
-
Select the check box if you want SPE to make changes to the externship dates when you queue the evaluation.
-
Select the check box if you want student pace evaluation to change the externship dates when you queue the evaluation.
-
Date the externship hours are being posted for.
-
The start date of the training or externship.
-
The start date of the training or externship.
-
Select this option to specify the Internship/Externship job type. The options are: - Open Externship Type: The school can place a student in the position at any time. - Closed Externship Type: The employer has placed limits on which students or when students can be placed in the position. - Hire Externship Type: The externship position can lead to future permanent employment.
-
The number of additional answer sheets procured by the student.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to extract the necessary data for transmission to SEVIS. If you select No, the extract process becomes unavailable for this campus.
-
The date used to determine the students to export. The default is the current date.
-
Enables you to filter records based on the extracted data range.
-
Select this option to process only Global refunds. This option is available only if the Record Selection option is set to Use Selected Criteria.
-
The extract status of the record. The available values are: - Ready - Transmitted - Processed - Rejected
-
Enables you to filter on Ready, Transmitted, Processed and Rejected extract statuses.
-
When this option is selected, Anthology Student extracts the data of all students that attended, withdrew, or graduated during the selected Summer term(s). For the summer term, Anthology Student reports the student’s: - Spring enrollment status if the student was enrolled at least half-time in spring and is not enrolled in summer or is attending summer with a less than half-time enrollment status - Summer enrollment status if the student is enrolled at least half-time in summer. This is applicable if there is no reason for the institution to believe that the student will not enroll on an at least half-time basis for the fall term.
-
The student's extracurricular activities.
-
The extracurricular activities that interest the student (such as intramural sports and clubs). The label for this field and the values that it contains are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates that the student receives financial aid for the specified term.
-
Select the check box to enable the system to assign a review activity to the Financial Aid Administrator for each packaging change.
-
Indicates Enrollment Intensity associated with the FA Credits. For example, for an enrollment with 12 FA Credits, the EI value is 100%. The EI value is stored in the database as a decimal value and displayed on the form as a percent value. This item is displayed only if the Advanced Feature "Enable FA Credits for Enrollment Status and Enrollment Intensity" is enabled.
-
The FA Enrollment Status is based on the FA Credits Per Term and the Full Time Minimum, Half Time Minimum, 3/4 Time Minimum, and Less Than Half Time Minimum configured on the program version. This item is displayed only if the Advanced Feature "Enable FA Credits for Enrollment Status and Enrollment Intensity" is enabled.
-
The date of the financial aid/loan entrance interview counseling. If the field contains a value, the source of this date depends on your institution. The date can be the date from the Direct Loan Entrance Counseling (CRECMYOP) or Direct Loan Plus Application Acknowledgment (CRSPyyOP) files imported from COD. If your institution has configured an entrance interview document, the date from the document can be used when the document has an approved and on file status. You can also specify the date. Anthology Student will use the date for all the student's enrollments.
-
Select the financial advisor grade level for which you want to generate the report.
-
Date when the Financial Awareness Counseling Acknowledgement was received.
-
If the program version is configured with an academic calendar of credit hours without terms, you selected Use Clock to Credit, and the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) feature has been configured to allow courses to be exempt from progression, specify the number of financial aid (FA) credits. The SPE feature uses the value to measure progression and adjust academic year and loan period sequences if the total FA credits for a program version are different from the academic credits.
-
For non-Title IV disbursements for payment periods and program versions that have been configured to have a value for one of the FA Clock to Credit Conversion Rate fields, select Attempted or Earned in the FA Credits / Clock Hours list to specify that the number of FA credits or clock hours attempted or earned must be greater than or equal to the minimum value calculated by Anthology Student to meet the criteria. If you want to check that the prior payment period is completed for non-term programs before automatically approving a non-Title IV disbursement, select Earned. If you do not select Earned, Anthology Student does not check if a prior payment period is completed. For Title IV disbursements from fund sources with disbursement approval criteria configured, Anthology Student always checks to make sure prior payment periods have been completed. For additional information about how the value is calculated, see the background for this topic.
-
The FA Credits Per Term are based on the registered courses that are on the student's program version course list, including elective pools. These are the eligible FA Credits per term for the student. This item is displayed only if the Advanced Feature "Enable FA Credits for Enrollment Status and Enrollment Intensity" is enabled.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when one or more of the fund sources that you select in the Values list has been awarded and is on their Awarding page.
-
The name of the financial aid general ledger fund. Funds are configured by your institution.
-
If Yes was selected for Override FA Hold Group, specifies the name of one or more hold groups.
-
If your user ID has been configured so that it allows you to override a Financial Aid hold group and approve disbursements and Yes is displayed, you can approve disbursements for students in the specified groups. Anthology Student overrides the hold, but still evaluates the disbursement against the other disbursement approval criteria.
-
For Direct loans, the lender is the Department of Education.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the value for Award Year 1 Packaging Status on the Awarding page for the student is one of the values you selected in the Values list.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the value for Award Year 2 Packaging Status on the Awarding page for the student is one of the values you selected in the Values list.
-
Select this setting to determine withdrawal based on July 2021 R2T4 guidelines. When this setting is disabled, all students within a group that is associated with a Refund Calculation Job are included for the refund calculation. For more details, see the “Automated Refund Calculation Review” topic.
-
Select this setting or the "Show Financial Aid Exception icon for the Student" setting to display the Financial Aid Exception icon in the header of the Student Profile when exceptions are on file.
-
Financial aid administrator’s (FAA) name.
-
This setting determines the number of days to wait for clearing the repackage queue. The allowed range is 1 to 999.
-
The setting ensures that schools package only the required Direct Loan amount to students who meet their Cost of Attendance for that loan period. Any amount that exceeds the loan Cost of Attendance will generate an exception so that users will be notified about the overawarding.
-
Specify the User Name to be able to connect to the FAA API Web Services. The FAA API User Name and Password are used by the Portal Admin Console in the API User Configuration section.
-
Specify the Password to be able to connect to the FAA API Web Services. The FAA API User Name and Password are used by the Portal Admin Console in the API User Configuration section.
-
When this setting is selected, FAA invokes a direct loan validation to create an exception (Disbursement Eligibility and COD Export) when the Direct Loan Cost of Attendance is less than the loan amount. For more details, see "COD Export Direct Loan Cost of Attendance CODEXPRT0228 Exception" in the "Automated Exception Management" topic.
-
Specify the number of minutes to change the FAA Automated STAR status to "Ready to Send" or "Ready to Receive". The allowed range is 1 to 2000. The default is 1440 (24 hrs).
-
The Facebook ID of the student. You can enter a maximum of 150 characters in the field, including special characters.
-
Select the check box to specify that a FAFSA estimated family contribution (EFC) / Student Aid Index (SAI) must be calculated for a financial aid package to meet the requirement.
-
The date when the FAFSA was entered in Anthology Student.
-
Sequence number in the satisfactory academic policy (SAP) policy where the student is failing SAP. The reason the student did not meet SAP or was not evaluated is displayed in the Fail SAP Reason column.
-
The reason that describes details around satisfactory academic progress (SAP) for a student. If you place your cursor over the column, Anthology Student lists all the reasons. These details encompass both reasons students fail to meet SAP and reasons students are improving their performance to meet SAP when they have previously failed. Anthology Student is installed with default SAP reasons that are associated with the criteria. Your institution can configure other reasons.
-
The sequence in the SAP policy where the student did not make satisfactory academic progress (SAP).
-
Indicates whether the background job failed.
-
The sequence number in the SAP Policy where the student did not meet SAP. The SAP failure reasons appear in the Additional Information field for each listing where the student did not meet SAP.
-
When the value for Eligibility Status is Fail and the student has a HOPE Scholarship or Zell Miller Scholarship on file, the failure date. Anthology Student uses the term end date as the date the student failed the benchmark.
-
The number of failed records.
-
The fax information of the person who deals with building-related issues.
-
The fax information of the person who deals with venues-related issues.
-
The number where a facsimile (fax) can be received.
-
The employer's fax telephone number.
-
Name of the localization feature.
-
Indicates the name of the advanced features.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether the student or parent received federal benefits (Medicaid, SNAP, Housing Assistance, etc.).
-
Specify the interest rate for a Federal Direct Parent PLUS Loan.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Federal Direct Subsidized Loan.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Federal Direct Unsubsidized Loan.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Federal Direct Parent PLUS Loan for graduate students.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Federal Direct Unsubsidized Loan for graduate students.
-
A Perkins loan is a low-interest federal student loans for undergraduate and graduate students with exceptional financial need. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Specify the amount of earnings from Federal Work-Study.
-
The fee charged by the lender for the individual disbursement. Anthology Student calculated the value for the disbursement and the field is read-only.
-
You can select Yes or No based on whether your school charges the employer a fee for placing students with the employer. When you set the Fee field to Yes, the field to the right of the Fee field allows you enter a description or an amount .
-
The fee name
-
Select this option whether or not your institution charges a fee for placing a student in this job.
-
Indicates whether or not any fee was charged for posting the placement record.
-
The administration fee that will be charged for the transaction.
-
The amount of the fee being charged to the student.
-
The fee amount your school charges the employer for placing students with the employer.
-
The frequency the fee is charged. It is charged per: Academic Year, Credit, Enrollment/Program, Month, or Payment Period.
-
The code assigned to the fee.
-
Indicates bursary can be used for fee disbursements.
-
The fee identification number.
-
Select an option for fee received for which you want to generate the report.
-
The fee schedule name.
-
The fee payment schedule associated with the class section.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the fee schedules.
-
The STRF fee amount that is calculated.
-
The STRF fee to charge the student based on the calculated STFR Fee and Previous Fee Charges. If the students have already been charged a STRF fee for the selected time frame, Anthology Student factors that amount into the calculation and displays an appropriate charge or credit adjustment in this column.
-
The type of fee charged to the student (Room, books tuition, etc...).
-
The fees that are associated with the selected enrollment, Academic Year, and Transaction Code. The Fees ID list is displayed only if Incremental Billing and Earning setting is enabled for the program version associated with the enrollment.
-
The FERPA group name and code that is associated with the student's campus.
-
When selected, the address type can be selected for the address that you specify for a person that the student is adding to the list of people who they want to have access to their academic record information on their FERPA page.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to display the Documents page for a student when the Data Block Indicator is changed on their Student Profile so that the staff member is prompted to add any required FERPA documents.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to display the Documents page for a student when the FERPA Indicator is changed on their Student Profile so that the staff member is prompted to add any required FERPA documents.
-
When it is selected, indicates that the student has chosen to block the release of their directory information under the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA). If your institution configured the campus as Partial, the student can select to not share specific information on their FERPA page. If the student does not select the FERPA Indicator, all of the information configured by your institution for the FERPA group for that campus can be shared.
-
The date when the FERPA Indicator was last modified.
-
Federal Family Education Loan program ID number (Commonline only)
-
Indicates the Federal Family Education Loan (FFEL) ID.
-
Branch for the Federal Family Education Loan program ID number (Commonline only)
-
Indicates the branch associated with the Federal Family Education Loan (FFEL) ID.
-
Enter a numeric FFEL value for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the condition you want for the FFEL ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the FFEL IDs between 1 and 5 only.
-
The 6 digit numeric code that identifies your institution to the State of Texas. More than one campuses can have the same FICE code.
-
The 6-digit, numeric code that identifies your institution to the State of Texas. More than one campus can have the same FICE code.
-
The field in the Anthology Student database that was changed.
-
Name of the field that was adjusted.
-
The field of the subsidiary transaction that was updated.
-
Select the type of field delimiter. The options are: Space Tab Other
-
Specify the other field delimiter. This field is enabled when the field delimiter type is set to other.
-
The Field Name cannot be empty or duplicated. The maximum length is 200 characters. For example, Student First Name, Student Last Name, City and so on.
-
Indicates the format in which data is entered and displayed on features.
-
The name in the field.
-
The name of the field.
-
Student Aid Report (SAR) field number.
-
Indicates the field type. For example, Numeric, Blank or Text.
-
The field type. The options are: Student Profile and School Fields.
-
The value specified in the extended property for the entity.
-
The value specified in the field for the course or student.
-
Name of the field.
-
The field name or title of the job.
-
The field name.
-
The field name or the student name that gets recorded whenever you change any of the field or delete any student record, respectively.
-
The name of the imported or exported file.
-
Select the file category for which you want to generate the report.
-
The state institution code.
-
Date and time the file was created in the system.
-
Indicates the file delimiter option. The options are fixed length or variable length. The default value is Fixed Length.
-
Specify the number of days with respect to the file disbursement date after which the scheduled disbursement date is to be considered as a match.
-
Specify the number of days with respect to the file disbursement date before which the scheduled disbursement date is to be considered as a match.
-
Select whetheryour school submits IRS 1098 -T information electronically to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) using the export file process.
-
Specify a valid file extension.
-
Specify the file extension identifier provided by your servicer. Maximum of 8 characters are allowed.
-
The format of the file you want to import. The file can be a comma separated value (CSV) file or an Excel file.
-
Select Complete File to import the entire list of phone numbers. Select Change File to import only phone numbers that have been added or deleted since the last update by the FTC.
-
Select the layout for the file.
-
The name of the file. In some cases, it is the name you want to use, or previously specified, for the file. In some cases, it is the name specified by Anthology Student.
-
Indicates the name of the file that is sent to the Automated Clearing House (ACH) for batch processing.
-
Specify the default file name. File name must have a valid extension. It must not contain a special character.
-
File name of attachment linked to a Document. Located under the Attachments heading.
-
Name of the FA File.
-
The path to the file and the name Anthology Student gave to the file when it was created.
-
Displays the name of the file. If you selected Ethnicity of Financial Aid Report in the Report Type list, the name has the format TX_EFAR_mmddyyynnnnn. If you selected Other Financial Aid to TEG Recipients Report in the Report Type list, the name has the format TX_OFAR_mmddyyynnnnn.
-
The name of the file you want to import.
-
Lists the exact name of the file as it is stored in Mailbox Manager.
-
Name of the ACH file generated. This column is populated for ACH batches only.
-
The name of the SQL script file. If multiple scripts are available, the file names will indicate the order in which the scripts are to be run.
-
The name and location of the file.
-
The name of the file contains the individual student’s transcript. If you select the filename, it opens the file in your PDF viewer.
-
Specifies the action you want Anthology Student to take. Select Create Batch to create a new batch. Select Regenerate Batch to regenerate and updated file to replace an existing file. If you select Regenerate Batch, you must also select the ID of the existing batch that you want to replace.
-
The file path.
-
Specify the Export File path. When you select Other general ledger system, this option becomes enabled.
-
File path for the generated file.
-
Lists the file path for internal and external transfers for both Azure Cloud and FTP.
-
File path for the generated ACH file. This column is populated for ACH batches only.
-
Specify the location in which export files will be stored.
-
The file path where PDF files for activity statements are stored.
-
File path for the generated statement file.
-
File path for the generated statement file.
-
The downloadable file path to the transcript file. If the batch failed or is in progress, the message, "File not created." will be displayed. If the batch succeeded and the file is created, the download link to the file will be displayed. You can directly download the files using the following format in Windows Explorer: file://<folder>/<folder>. Example: file://myfolder12/BatchTranscript
-
The file path where PDF file of the account balance statements are stored.
-
The specific financial aid processes you can select: · 1098-T · Application Data · Clearinghouse · COD · Campus-Based COD · CommonLine V4 · Enrollment Reporting · Hope Scholarships · NSLDS Reports · Servicer Extract · Transfer Student Monitoring · V4/V5 Verification Results Export
-
Size of the file in MB.
-
Size of the FA file.
-
Select the test file from the drive location.
-
Specifies the type of file imported. Select either Response File or Disbursement Roster. Response files contain lender responses to new applications submitted by exporting and sending the Application Send files to lenders. Disbursement Roster files list disbursements that have been made by the lender to students. The information is then used to update the records for the students at your institution.
-
Indicates the imported NSLDS file type: Delinquent Borrower or Cohort Default Rate.
-
CommonLine export file types: Application Send files contain loan records that have a status of Ready to Send that your institution is certifying to the lender. Hold/Release Change Transaction files contain disbursements that are ready to be paid. Refund Transactions Send files contain information about amounts refunded to lenders.
-
Select the type of file you want to import. The values are Eligible and Ineligible.
-
Indicates the imported file type (ISIR or Error Report File).
-
Select the file types. The options are Delimited where fields are separated with user-defined characters or sets of characters, and Fixed Length where each field is determined by a configurable number of characters.
-
The file type associated with the process.
-
The type of servicer file that was imported or exported.
-
If you want to create a new import file that contains all the new or changed students up to today, select Create. If you previously created a file, but did not export it and want to update it, select Regenerate.
-
The format you want for the output in the report. The options are FLAT for a flat file and Excel for a Microsoft Excel file.
-
Indicates the Transfer Student Monitoring file type, i.e., TSM/FAH Error/Acknowledgment File, FAH File, or TSM Alert File.
-
File name of the generated file.
-
The file path where PDF files for activity statements are stored.
-
Indicates whether you want to filter by Instructor or Student Group.
-
The type of SEVIS transmission for batches that create or regenerate student data that needs to be transmitted to SEVIS (such as school code or campus).
-
The final grade calculated based on exam lesson score and internal assessment.
-
Enables the secondary instructor to post final grades.
-
The final letter grade posted for the enrollment. Each letter grade code needs to be unique.
-
The final numerical grade posted.
-
The type of offer being offered is final for the Applicant. Final offers may be sent out once conditional offer were processed to finalize the Applicant, or the Applicant meets one or more criterias to be eligible for Programs in the Institution.
-
The Selection Status that is set on the Application if the Applicant receives a Final Offer. Only statuses with Status Type as Approved will be listed here.
-
The Selection Status that is set on the Application if the Applicant is rejected and does not receive an offer. Only statuses with Status Type as Rejected will be listed here.
-
Indicates the term is used for scheduling financial aid.
-
Select the staff member with more than Display Only Permissions in Contact Manager and Financial Aid.
-
Specify the Financial Aid Administrator's e-mail address.
-
Specify the fax telephone number for the Financial Aid Administrator's office.
-
Specify the name of your Financial Aid Administrator. This name is used on correspondence with the Department of Education.
-
Specify the Financial Aid Administrator's telephone number and extension.
-
The last and then first name of the Financial Aid Advisor. Your institution can configure Anthology Student so that a Financial Aid Advisor is selected during enrollment. To edit this field, you must be in a staff group that is allowed to edit advisors for Contact Manager.
-
The last and first name of the Financial Aid Advisor. Your institution can configure Anthology Student so that a Financial Aid Advisor is selected during enrollment. To edit this field, you must be in a staff group that is allowed to edit advisors for Contact Manager. The column for Financial Aid Advisor cannot be blank if Financial Aid Automation is switched on for the campus.
-
The date entered is utilized to determine the starting point for validating data and building the automated awarding plan for applicable fund sources. Note: This field only appears when the Advanced Feature for Enable Advanced Auto Packaging is enabled.
-
The Financial Award ID matches the Loan ID on the Direct Loan Detail form.
-
The date when financial aid was first requested for the student.
-
The date of the financial aid/loan entrance interview counseling. If the field contains a value, the source of this date depends on your institution. The date can be the date from the Direct Loan Entrance Counseling (CRECMYOP) or Direct Loan Plus Application Acknowledgment (CRSPyyOP) files imported from COD. If your institution has configured an entrance interview document, the date from the document can be used when the document has an approved and on file status. You can also specify the date. Anthology Student will use the date for all the student's enrollments.
-
The date when the Financial Aid Exit Interview was conducted with the student.
-
The financial aid offer prepared by your institution. Select Summary Report or Detailed Report. The Detailed Report includes the Disbursement Schedule information, while the Summary Report does not. If "Enable Custom Financial Aid Offer Reports" feature is set to "Yes" under Settings > System > Advanced Features and a custom document has been created, the Financial Aid Offer drop-down includes the Custom Report option.
-
Select whether you want to print a Summary Report or Detailed Report of the student's financial aid offer.
-
The advisor name and the group of the financial aid advisor.
-
The advisor name or the financial aid advisor group assigned when the student is enrolled.
-
The Financial Aid task for the staff who need to be aware of transfers to correct or adjust the financial aid packing, billing, and outstanding balances.
-
The last and then first name of the advisors for the student award letters you want to print. The list contains only advisors for the selected campus.
-
If Anthology Student is integrated with Anthology Finance & HCM, select this check box to have Anthology Student combine all transactions associated with this campus group into the same journal entry.
-
Select a financial control code. The options are Public; Private, non-profit; and Proprietary.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature and you selected Grant (Other than Pell), Scholarship, or Other Outside Resources in the Type field, specifies whether the aid is need based on non-need based. For all other types of fund sources, it defaults to the appropriate value and cannot be changed. Anthology Student uses the values to calculate amounts for manual packaging, automatic packaging, financial aid batch packaging, and in the Alternate and Standard grids on the Awards tab. For Need based or if no value is specified, Anthology Student performs the calculation for need based aid and displays the value in the Gross Need Based Aid Pkgd field in the grid on the Awards tab. For Non-Need Based, Anthology Student performs the calculation for non-need based aid and displays the value in the Non-Need Based Aid Pkgd field in the grid on the Awards tab.
-
You can select this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated only once, during the student's first enrollment. You can also use this for enrollment and application fees that are not charged again if a student enrolls in another program.
-
Specify the percentage of the total tuition charge to be earned in the first month of revenue earning.
-
Specifies the percentage of the total tuition charge to be earned in the first month of revenue earning. This field is enabled only if the following conditions are true: • The setting Enable First Month Percentage Earning must be set to yes. • Billing method assigned to the Program Version is set to use a billing frequency of Program • Revenue Earning Period is set to Use Billing Period • Earning method assigned to the program version has revenue basis of Calendar Days. • Earning method Late Charge earning option is set to Amortize over the remaining units in revenue period.
-
Specify whether you want to earn a percentage of the total tuition charges in the first month of earning. By default, the value for this field is set to No.
-
The first name of the student or person.
-
The first name of the student or person. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The first name of the student or person associated with the billing address.
-
The first name of the employer.
-
The payee's first name.
-
The first name of the staff member.
-
Specify the first pay level for the course group.
-
The date when the first payment is due. The default is 30 days after the start date of the academic year.
-
The date that your institution will make the first payment for the first pay period.
-
The date when the first payment is due.
-
The date you want for the first pay period. If you are adding payment periods to an existing list of pay periods, the date defaults to the first day after the last pay period in the list.
-
User that first printed the Promissory Note.
-
First date the promissory note was printed.
-
The date when the first stipend is scheduled to be paid to the student. You can backdate a stipend schedule if necessary.
-
The First Time Borrower flag is automatically selected when a student is enrolled and the Grade Level set during enrollment is "1st year, never attended college". Otherwise, the flag is not automatically selected. When selected, specifies that the student is a first time borrower and that you want to delay the first loan disbursement by xx number of days from the start date of the academic year that your institution has configured for financial aid packaging.
-
For Subsidized Stafford, Unsubsidized Stafford, Direct, and Direct Unsubsidized loans, select the check box to specify that the disbursement date must be greater than 30 days from the start date of the term for the disbursement to meet the criteria. For all other fund sources, Anthology Student approves the criteria.
-
Specify the number of days to add to the first loan disbursement date for First Time Borrowers.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for first name. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
The percentage of discount as defined in the tuition discount policy. In case the discount amount for the tuition discount policy has to be calculated on a flat rate basis, this column will be blank. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
The tuition discount type that is either Flat or Percentage: Percentage - Displayed if the tuition discount policy is configured with Value set to Percentage Flat - Displayed if the tuition discount policy is configured with Value set to Flat Rate
-
The flat fee charged by the institution for the billable service.
-
Specifies the flat fee amount in dollars.
-
Select this option whether or not you want flat rate for the service billing.
-
Specify the amount to be added to the value of Rate multiplied by units.
-
The flat rate amount in dollars.
-
The percentage or flat amount of the discount as defined in the tuition discount policy. It is not recommended to change discount percentages or flat rates on a Tuition Discount Policy after discounts have been posted for a given policy.
-
Select the option to integrate Faculty Workload Management for Anthology Finance & HCM. This option is enabled only when Anthology Student is integrated with Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
The name of the folder in the Views Explorer list where you want to save the view.
-
Indicates the file folder for the Automated Clearing House (ACH) information to be transmitted to the processor. You must specify the path of the folder that has already been created by a system administrator. You cannot create a new folder, unless you have system administration privileges.
-
Indicates that the task is configured to require a follow-up task when it is closed.
-
Indicate the color of the font.
-
Specifies the criteria for the course attributes to qualify for the tuition discount.
-
Specifies the criteria for the course level to qualify for the tuition discount.
-
Specifies zone is based on another country.
-
Select the check box to indicate the campus is a foreign school. The option is used for Common Origination and Disbursement (COD) to support the current Common Record XML schema requirements. Enabling this flag restricts the population of the Program of Study tag to foreign schools. The Program of Study tags for foreign schools are linked with CIP codes based on the following program grouping logic using program study codes: 01=Medical, 02=Nursing, 03=Veterinary, and 04=Other.
-
The 11 character SEVIS ID Number printed on each DS-2019 form. The Form Number field is required when the Visa Type is J-1, Transmission Status is either D or R, and Action is Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
The action associated with a visa type for an international student. The actions depend on the value for Transmission Status. If the status is R or D, the list displays actions for a new student. If the Transmission Status displays A (Accepted), you can select actions for making changes and communicating other changes with SEVIS. Action is enabled only if you select either F-1, M-1, or J-1 visa type. For F-1/M-1 Visa type, you can perform the following actions: Authorization Drop Below Full Course, Complete Program, Extend Program, Defer Attendance, Disciplinary Action, Terminate Student, Student Registration, Edit Personal Data, Edit Program Info, Edit Student Financial, Edit Dependent, Add Dependent, Off Campus Employment, New CPT Employment, New OPT Employment. For J-1 Visa type, you can perform the following actions: Add Dependent, Amend Program, Validate Program Participation, Edit Biographical Information, Add Site of Activity, Delete Site of Activity, Update Subject, Financial Update, EV Matriculation,Correct Infraction, Terminate EV, Shorten Program, Edit Dependent, and EV Extension. For information, see Make Updates and Take Actions for Students Accepted By SEVIS.
-
Indicate the form purpose. The options are: Begin new program and Permit exchange visitors.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature and you selected Grant, Other Outside Resources, or Scholarships in the Type list, select the check box to indicate that the fund source is associated with an alumni or scholarship foundation at your institution.
-
The Fractional Routing Number identifies the paying bank and consists of a number in the following format: 12-345/6789. Typically, this number is displayed in the upper right corner of a check.
-
Indicates the fractional routing number that identifies the paying bank and consists of a number in the following format: XX-YYY/ZZZZ. XX indicates the city or State where a financial institution is located, YYY indicates the specific identifier for the financial institution and ZZZZ indicates the Federal Reserve district in which the financial institution is located. Typically, this number is displayed in the upper right corner of a check.
-
The Freeze Date used by the system to calculate the total days related to the refund calculation.
-
This displays the date that the Freeze Date Period, Recurrence, and/or Days is added or updated.
-
The date the Freeze Date was last modified.
-
This displays the user who has added or updated the Freeze Date Period, Recurrence, and/or Days.
-
The user who last modified the Freeze Date.
-
This indicates what Period is chosen to be applied.
-
Child Term/Module, Term/Payment Period, or None.
-
This indicates the recurrence based on the Freeze Date selected.
-
Number of Days or Add/Drop Date.
-
This shows the number of days that is selected for the Freeze Date Recurrence. This field will not be displayed when Freeze Date Recurrence is chosen as Add/Drop Date, as that is defined on the individual term configurations.
-
You can choose the frequency by which you bill your students. The Academic Year frequency requires a rate schedule. The rate schedule allows schools to define transaction codes to be billed and an effective date and effective date type. The Course frequency gathers the charges from the fees set up in the Course Fees list. If you select Automated Registration Charges and Adjustments, the charges are posted to the ledger card as soon as the student registers for the course. The Payment Period frequency requires defining a rate schedule and selecting Automated Registration Charges and Adjustments. The Program frequency (without a rate schedule), posts charges for the entire program on the student's ledger card once the student enrolls. Term/Quarter frequency can use a rate schedule. The charges will appear at the time of enrollment. Each fee will be gathered to bill depending on the settings for the specific term, academic year, or by term sequence. The charges will be posted using the Registration Billing process. If a rate schedule is not used, the charges will be taken from the student's enrollment fee schedule.
-
For the pattern you selected in the Pattern Type list, specifies how often it occurs. For example, if you selected Weekly and specify 2, it occurs every other week. If you selected Monthly and specify 1, it occurs once a month.
-
Select Days, Weeks, or Months to configure the payment schedule.
-
Indicates the frequency of the class meeting. For example, recur every week or recur on the 4th Monday of every month.
-
Indicates the frequency of the student batch export process. The options are: • Daily- Execute the job on a daily basis. This is the default. • Manually enter cron value- Manually add a custom cron expression to automatically execute a job at a specified time or date. • Monthly- Execute the job on a monthly basis • Specific Date- Execute the job on a specified date
-
The frequency of the scheduled export student attachments job to execute. The options are: • Daily- Execute the job on a daily basis. This is the default. • Manually enter cron value- Manually add a custom cron expression to automatically execute a job at a specified time or date • Monthly- Execute the job on a monthly basis • Specific Date- Execute the job on a specified date.
-
Indicates how often the student pays the suite fee.
-
Indicates how often the student pays the room fee.
-
The frequency you would like the automated job to occur (Daily, Once, Weekly, or Monthly).
-
The frequency at which payment is made to the instructor. For example, it can be weekly, bi-monthly, semi-monthly, or monthly.
-
Indicates the frequency of the automated Release to General Ledger. The options are: • Daily- Execute the job on a daily basis. This is the default. • Specific Date- Execute the job on a specified date • Monthly- Execute the job on a monthly basis
-
Indicates the frequency with which the schedule is run. Selecting from Daily, Specific Date, or Monthly will update the frequency details to be defined.
-
How often you wish the scheduled build of AYs to occur.
-
The frequency of the disbursement. The values are: Daily, Monthly, Quarterly, Weekly, and Yearly.
-
The billing Frequency value for the housing lease can be Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Flat Rate, or Term. The Frequency values are specified in Configuration > Student Services > Housing Buildings > Rooms. Term Frequency requires registration, and the Housing Application must exist before the registration. Schools that have early registration but won’t have housing application until later, won’t have a housing charge pending unless some type of registration/change happens after the Housing Application was done. Automated Rent Billing will not be effective for leases generated for rooms with Term Frequency. Flat Rate, Monthly, Weekly, Daily Rate Frequencies do not require registration. The system gathers billing data based on the lease dates using the Housing Post Rent Charges process if manual review of rent charges was configured. Lease charges are displayed as pending on the student's ledger card. Staff members can select and choose Bill Outstanding Charges on the Housing Leases page. Configure automatic or manual rent billing Settings > Student Services > General.
-
Enter the start numeric value.
-
The sequential number from where you wanted to move the field.
-
The account you are transferring funds from.
-
The account the funds are originating from.
-
If the task sends correspondence from an advisor, select the types of advisors. When you select the type of advisor Anthology Student displays additional fields specific to the type of advisor that you can select when you are inserting fields from the Anthology Student database into correspondence. For example, if you select Academic Records, you can select fields like <studentadvisorlastname>, <studentadvisorfirstname>, and <studentadvisoremail>. The list displays areas that you are authorized to access. The fields is displayed only if you selected a value in the Event Type list where the correspondence is an email, letter, or SMS text message.
-
If the task sends correspondence from an advisor, select the types of advisors. The modules you can view in this field are based on the NSA permissions set by your institution. When you select the type of advisor, Anthology Student displays additional fields specific to the type of advisor that you can select when you are inserting fields from the Anthology Student database into correspondence. For example, if you select Academic Records, you can select fields like <studentadvisorlastname>, <studentadvisorfirstname>, and <studentadvisoremail>. The list displays areas that you are authorized to access. The fields are displayed only if you select a value in the Event Type list where the correspondence is an email, letter, or SMS text message.
-
The desired date range to search.
-
The start and end time of the task.
-
The campus within which you are performing the copy class schedule operation.
-
Choose the campus you would like to copy the existing configuration from.
-
The Campus from which the Eligbility Rules must be duplicated for a different Campus.
-
Begin date of the Clearinghouse Degree Verify record set.
-
Specify the date from when the log records need to be displayed.
-
The date when the course started.
-
The start date of the incident.
-
Indicates the enrollment or campus that the student is transferred from.
-
Was the job acquired from the interview set up by the school with the employer? The options are Yes and No.
-
The original term in the Copy Class Schedule operation.
-
The descriptive name from whom the message was sent.
-
The range of time on the due date when the task must be completed. You can specify any time between 12:15 am and 11:45 pm. If you specify a task for the current date, but the From and To times occurred in the past, Anthology Student displays a message. Values must be specified for From and To for the task to show up in Anthology Student on the Contact Manager Calendar.
-
Assigned and required by EDconnect (max. length is 50 characters).
-
Assigned and required by EDconnect (max length is 8 characters).
-
Specifies the Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) Factor value applied to the Assigned Load.
-
Specifies the Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) Factor you want to apply. This factor is applied to the total hours per course. The format of the FTE factor is N.NNNN. For example, 0.0028.
-
The sum of FTE balances for the faculty member.
-
When the Advanced Feature flag "Enable Load Banking" is set to Yes, you can specify and save an FTE Bank Load Limit value. The maximum value is 5.00000. The minimum value is 0.00001. The system enforces the configured FTE Bank Load Limit by checking faculty balances against the configured limits. If the FTE Bank Load Limit is not in use, you can clear the field and save the null value. Staff members will receive a message that the limit is in use and editing may result in banked load totals exceeding the limit. Adding loads will be forbidden for faculty members over the limit until the balance is reduced to less than the load limit. The FTE Bank Load Limits will be applied to faculty member positions and will be reflected in the Bank Statement per Faculty.
-
This is a calculated field from the Amount to Bank.
-
The banked FTE value for the faculty member.
-
The maximum FTE limit for a faculty member.
-
This read-view-only column indicates the Federal Tax Information (FTI) associated with the student's record.
-
Comment or note included at the time of fulfilling a course.
-
Comment or note included at the time of fulfilling a course.
-
Shows any notes added to the Fulfillment Note field by the staff member when an action for the course was taken on the DPA. For example, if a staff member specifies a substitution for a course, they can add their own notes. The column shows the notes.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be configured as Full. You can also select all the options under employer contact type by checking the box beside Full button.
-
The number of credits in a full academic year. If you selected Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar list, the Department of Education (ED) defines the minimum as 24 credits (semester) and 36 credits (quarterly).
-
The number of hours in a full academic year. If you selected Clock hours in the Academic Calendar list, the Department of Education (ED) defines the minimum as 900 clock hours.
-
The last name and the first name of the staff member.
-
Specifies the level of access for the group you select in the Staff Groups list. Full specifies that the members of the group can edit the view. View only specified that the members of the group can only display the view.
-
Select an option for type of job for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - Full Time - Part Time - Both
-
The entire path to the Temp folder for EdConnect.
-
The path of the room/suite in the building.
-
Denotes the employment or training is more than 20 hours per week.
-
The minimum number of credits required for a student to be considered as full time.
-
You can select this option for full or part time as it applies to the available job.
-
The student’s responsibility or role at the agency.
-
The location in Anthology Student of the transaction (such as a ledger card or subsidiary page).
-
Select Yes/True if you want the report to contain only students who received funds for Perkins loans, SEOG grants, and/or work-study. Select No/False if you want the report to contain all students.
-
Whether the fund can be used to pay a stipend (Yes or No).
-
The source of this fund. If your institution is using fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source.
-
The source of the fund. They are configured by your institution. Anthology Student displays the fund sources configured for the group you selected in the Campus Group list. If you change the group and the selected fund source is not configured for the group, you must select a new fund source for the campus.
-
The source of the fund. They are configured by your institution. Anthology Student automatically selects all of the fund sources with disbursements for the type you selected in the Fund Type list. If there is only one fund source for the type, it is selected by default. If there is more than one fund source for a type, the default is to approve all fund sources of that type. A fund source must be active. For fund sources configured with the type of Other Outside Resources, the list only contains the fund sources that were also configured to reduce the remaining balance to schedule.
-
If the award for the student cannot be approved, displays a list of the reasons why the student cannot be approved (such as when a verified ISIR is required and there is no verified ISIR).
-
The fund source associated with financial awards that was selected for stipends evaluation.
-
Fund source associated with student’s payment plan based on which interest was calculated. This column is populated with valid fund sources only if Payment Plans Principal Balance is selected as Interest Charge Basis. This column is populated with N/A if Student Account Balance is selected as Interest Charge Basis.
-
The type of scholarship. The values are HOPE Scholarship and Zell Miller Scholarship.
-
The fund source that the system calculated to have stipend scheduled.
-
Select the fund source to configure payment apply order for that fund source. Select the Default for Campus value to configure the default payment apply order for the campus. Payments that are not associated with any fund sources will be applied using the campus’ default apply payment order.
-
The fund source of the disbursement batch.
-
The source of this fund. If your institution is using fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source. This field is enabled if the selected payment type is unscheduled payment.
-
The fund source associated with the credit card or bank transaction.
-
The fund source associated with the credit card or bank transaction.
-
Name of the fund source associated with the credit transaction. This field is populated only if the credit transaction is associated with a Financial Aid award.
-
The fund source associated with the refund/stipend record.
-
The fund source associated with the award which the refund is scheduled against. If your institution is using fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source.
-
The fund source associated with the stipend. The Fund Source list displays only those fund sources that are packaged for the student and have a net amount (either received or scheduled to be received) greater than zero. Anthology Student calculates this amount using the formula: (Amount scheduled to be received + Amount received) - (Amount of refunds made + Stipends made + Amount of scheduled refunds + Amount of scheduled stipends). The fund source for a stipend can be edited only if the status of the stipend is Scheduled. If your institution is using fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source.
-
Specifies the fund source associated with the transaction. If populated, only transactions associated with the selected fund source will be listed in the Results grid.
-
The source of this fund. If your institution uses fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source. The fund sources are presented in a multiselect list.
-
The fund source associated with the stipend. If your institution is using fund source security, you must have permission to work with the fund source.
-
Select the fund source associated with financial awards that will be evaluated for stipends.
-
The name of the fund source for the State of Texas.
-
The fund source that the system calculated to have stipend scheduled against to resolve Title IV credit balance for the student.
-
Indicates the code of transaction code or fund source. This is a read-only field.
-
The code assigned to a particular fund source.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the fund source.
-
Indicates whether or not to exclude interest charges based on a fund source.
-
Indicates which fund sources will be excluded when reducing student account balance by expected funding. There are two available options; Do not exclude any fund source or Select fund sources to exclude. This field is enabled only when Interest Charge Basis is set to Student Account Balance and Reduce By Expected Funding option is selected.
-
Abbreviation/code for the Fund Source.
-
Indicates the name or description of the fund source or transaction code. You must select the fund source name to apply the credit to a transaction code or to debit transactions with outstanding balance and the scope or basis for which the credits can be applied. The available basis include: Enrollment, Payment Period, Previous Payment Periods, Student. Configure credits apply order for credits that come from credits/waivers that are associated with transaction codes. apply the credit to a transaction code or to apply the credit to debit transactions with outstanding balance (Balance Forward).
-
Indicates the order in which fund source is awarded.
-
Select the check box to specify that you want the GPA to be available to select when staff members configure fund source rules.
-
Specific classification for the fund source.
-
Specify the type of fund sources.
-
Indicates the fund source types for fund sources. For transaction codes, it displays N/A for transaction codes.
-
For Campus-Based COD Exports, the Fund Source Type column on the History tab indicates FWS (Federal Work-Study).
-
Select the direct loan type. The options are: Direct Subsidized Loans Direct Unsubsidized Loans Direct PLUS Loans
-
The code assigned to a particular fund source type.
-
The type of fund source.
-
Select a type of fund source that must be in the package for it to meet the criteria. For example, if you select 3 types in the list, the package will meet the criteria and can be promoted if the package contains an award for any one of the 3 types. If the student's package contains an Award type not listed in the criteria, Packaging Status Promotion will not meet the criteria for this status. When you select one or more values in the list, Anthology Student selects and then disables the check box for Require Fund Source Types.
-
Indicates the type of fund source that will help limit the number of fund sources you can select.
-
Select the fund sources to include for recent payments in the statements. Select 'Select All' to capture all fund sources.
-
Specifies the fund source code and the amount to be paid.
-
The Fund Source or Transaction Code associated with the transaction.
-
The specific fund source(s) you wish to work with.
-
Indicates the different types of Financial Aid available in the system.
-
Select the fund sources. The list of fund sources includes only Direct Loan type fund sources based on your selection in the Fund Source Type field (Direct Subsidized Loan, Direct Unsubsidized Loans, or Direct PLUS Loans).
-
Select the fund source associated with the refunds and stipends.
-
Indicate the source of this fund to notify students associated with a specific fund source as opposed to all students associated with any fund sources. This field is only visible when the Schedule Task For field is set to Applicant/Enrollment, When field under Trigger is set to Payment Posted and Transaction Type is set to Financial Aid Disbursement. By default, All fund sources are selected.
-
Select the fund sources to include for expected payments in the statements. Select 'Select All' to capture all fund sources.
-
Select the fund sources to include for past due payments in the statements. Select 'Select All' to capture all fund sources.
-
The type selected for the fund source when it was configured. When you select a value, Anthology Student automatically selects all of the fund sources of that type in the Fund Source list.
-
The fund source type for the receipt (grant, loan, work-study, etc...). Leave blank to select all available fund sources.
-
Specific classification code for the fund source.
-
The type of funding for the fund source. The values are Funded, Unfunded (tuition source), Unfunded (room and board source).
-
The range based on which the fund source will be excluded.
-
The range based on which the expected funding will be excluded when reducing student account balance. The available options are - None, By Date Range, or By Term.
-
Indicates the link to the ACI funding page. The ACI funding page is used to add a student bank account.
-
Any SEVIS remarks included in the 1-20 related to the funding information submitted by the student.
-
The funding type options are Institutional Charges and Cost of Attendance.
-
Indicates whether fund source is a HOPE (H) scholarship or Zell Miller (Z) scholarship.
-
Select the fund source that currently has the payment apply order that you would like to copy from.
-
Select the fund source that currently has the payment apply order that you would like to delete.
-
The source of this fund.
-
Chosen date in the future that the fee or charge is active.
-
The future fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's Off Campus residency.
-
The future fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's On Campus residency.
-
The future fee, charge or credit amount based on the student's residency with their parents.
-
Select Yes if you want the system to use Standard Financial Value Transparency (FVT) and Gainful Employment (GE) reporting. If you select No, the system will use Transitional reporting. The Standard option can be used for the award years 2017 – 2018 through 2023 – 2024. The Transitional option can be used for the award years 2022-2023 through 2023-2024. The reporting choice cannot be changed once it has been selected.
-
Enter the number of days for integration log cleanup frequency for Faculty Workload Management. By default, the value is 300 days.
-
Specify the Federal Work-Study Attending Entity ID for each campus participating as a full participant.
-
Specify the Federal Work-Study Reporting Entity ID for each campus participating as a full participant.
-
Confirmation number for the Department of Education's Grants Management system. (G5)
-
Control number assigned by the Department of Education's Grant Administration and Payment System (GAPS).
-
Indicates the name of the ACH payment gateway provider.
-
Indicates the name of the credit card payment gateway provider. The options are: • ACI • PayPal • TouchNet
-
Gainful Employment (GE) regulations require institutions that participate in student financial assistance programs to report information about students enrolled in Title IV eligible educational programs that lead to gainful employment in a recognized occupation (GE Programs).
-
Select the GE check box to mark the program as a GE Program. A program version can be configured for GE, but cannot have the "CTP Program", "Prison Program", "Teacher Certification, or "2 - Years Credits Fully Acceptable toward Bachelor's degree" column selected at the same time. If you want to select any other option, clear the option previously selected for the other fields to become enabled again. The "Qualifying Graduate" column is not mutually exclusive from GE.
-
Indicates whether this is a default Gainful Employment (GE) related Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) code for the program or program version.
-
The date when the General Educational Development (GED) was awarded to the student.
-
The gender of the student or person. The values that can be selected are configured by your institution.
-
Gender of the students to be accommodated in the building. The options are Co-ed, Either, Female, or Male.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the information specified on the General tile to the new course.
-
The first and then last name of a contact that is not a student or staff member.
-
If you are using the general ledger, select the general ledger fund for the selected fund source so that transactions for this fund source are posted to the associated accounts. The general ledger funds in the list are configured by your institution.
-
If you want Anthology Student to automatically transfer amounts from the Gap fund, select the name of the Gap fund in the list. If the balance amount in the fund you are configuring is less than the amount of the payment being posted, Anthology Student transfers the difference amount from the Gap fund to the fund. Only the amount required to complete the payment is transferred. If the Gap fund does not have the amount needed to complete the payment, the amount is transferred anyway, and the Gap fund will have a negative balance. To automatically transfer from a Gap fund, Anthology Student must be configured to use all Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) functions.
-
Select the general ledger system. It indicates an external accounting applications for which the system can provide importable transaction files with the proper record layout. The options are None, Other, Great Plains, and Anthology Finance. Note: Anthology Student and Great Plains integration requires a hybrid connection. A request must be submitted to Anthology’s Cloud Services for necessary components to be installed.
-
Select the general ledger system. It indicates an external accounting applications for which the system can provide importable transaction files with the proper record layout. The options are None, Other, and Great Plains.
-
Select the level of general ledger (G/L) integration for your system. You can opt to use all financial aid general ledger functions or to use financial aid general ledger for authorization levels only.
-
Generates the report data in Microsoft Excel.
-
Enables a checkbox for selecting or deselecting for Hall Ticket generating.
-
The report selection criteria selected on the Process tab.
-
Select New Hall Ticket to generate new hall tickets that have not been generated before. Select Regenerate Hall Ticket to regenerate hall tickets that have been generated before, but might have changes.
-
Indicates a textual and editable PO file.
-
The maximum amount of gift aid that can be awarded when using this packaging method. For example, the total amount of the awards for Pell Grants, other grants, and scholarships cannot exceed this amount. If you are doing automatic packaging, Anthology Student checks this amount to determine when to stop allocating grants and begin packaging loans.
-
Specify the format of your general ledger (G/L) account numbers. Use # to represent digits and insert hyphens as required to separate segments of the number. The maximum length for the G/L account number is 30 characters including digits and punctuation.
-
Select an accounting system to integrate with Anthology Student. The options are Great Plains, Other, and Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
Specify the General Ledger batch number to view transactions that are associated with that batch number only.
-
Indicates the General Ledger batch number.
-
Specify the number to be incremented for each new general ledger (G/L) batch.
-
Specify the number (up to 8 characters) by which this campus is identified as a company in your accounting system. Multiple campuses can have the same company number.
-
The GL Credit account number if the transaction code is configured for entering GL numbers. This value is required if you set GL System to Great Plains.
-
The GL Credit account number if the transaction code is configured to allow G/L account numbers to be edited.
-
Credit side of the journal entry on Student Ledger payments received for this bank, that are not connected to a fund source, or the fund Source Disbursements G/L account for the corresponding fund source and campus has not been filled in.
-
The GL Debit account number if the transaction code is configured for entering GL numbers. This value is required if you set GL System to Great Plains.
-
The GL Debit account number if the transaction code is configured to allow G/L account numbers to be edited.
-
The G/L account for the cash account associated with this bank account.
-
Specify the type of transaction that is to be delivered to the accounting package. The options are Detail and Summary. Student Number is used as the unique identifier when the type is set to Detail. The student number is released as unique identifier only if the GL Account System integrated with Great Plains. The unique identifier can be seen in Great Plains through the Trial Balance report under Reports for Financial Trial Balance. The unique identifier (Student Number) can be seen in the Distribution Reference column of the report.
-
Specify the type of transaction that is to be delivered to the accounting package. The options are Detail and Summary.
-
The number by which this campus is identified as a company in your accounting system. Multiple campuses can have the same company number.
-
Specifies a limit to the number of search results returned using the the search in the command bar and the Global search. Specifying a limit can further improve performance. If the number of search results exceed the limit, Anthology Student displays a message alerting staff members that the limit has been exceeded and recommends that they refine their search.
-
Used to configure the scheduled disbursement dates for all aid that has been awarded on a global scale for the campus you selected. You can select the following options: Scheduled Disbursement Days From Start of Payment Period or Scheduled Disbursement Using Configured Disbursement Scheduled.
-
Your selection here configures all automated awarding for the selected campus (up to the cost of either the Cost of Attendance or Institutional Charges) on a global scale.
-
Indicates a list of global documents.
-
Indicates that your institution is configured to send data to a third party servicer, such as Global.
-
Select the policy used for the Global refund calculation.
-
Specifies the number assigned to the campus group by Global. The maximum is 4 characters.
-
Indicates whether the address is valid.
-
For batches that release general ledger transactions to Great Plains, the number assigned to the batch prefixed with code for the campus.
-
The number assigned to the batch once the transactions have been successfully released to Great Plains.
-
For batches that release general ledger transactions to Great Plains, the number for the journal entry.
-
For batches that release general ledger transactions to Great Plains, displays the result for the job. For example, it displays a message when the batch was posted successfully.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the student.
-
Select the check box to specify that the point value of this grade is included in the GPA calculations for students. For example, select the box if a passing grade for a pass or fail grade scale is assigned a specific letter grade, such as a C+, and counts toward the GPA calculation.
-
The name of the GPA calculation. GPA calculations are system-defined and configured by your institution.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the student. The options are Enrollment GPA, Overall Cum GPA and Area of Study GPA
-
The credit type used by your institution for calculating course quality points, which affects student GPA. The options are: Attempted, Earned. The 'Attempted' option is selected by default, and Anthology Student continues to calculate course quality points using the 'Credits Attempted' value for each course. Set this option to 'Earned' if you want to calculate quality points using the 'Credits Earned' value for courses. For additional information, see Background for Academic Records for Campuses.
-
The GPA credits for the student.
-
Select a method to evaluate grade point averages (GPAs) for the student. The options are: -Overall GPA: This evaluates students' rankings based on the GPA for the selected course programs taken by the student. -Area of Study GPA: This evaluates students' rankings based on the GPA for the selected area of study.
-
GPA types include Course Level, Course category, Additional, and Program level. If the record is not of any specific GPA Type, N/A is displayed.
-
Indicates whether the grade point average (GPA) is system-defined by Anthology Student or configured by your institution (school-defined).
-
Select Weighted to use quality points divided by credit attempted. For example, if a student takes four credit class and earns a letter grade of A, which is equal to 4 points, the student has 16 quality points. The quality points are divided by the total number of credits attempted to determine the GPA. To calculate a cumulative GPA, the sum of all quality points the student earns is divided by the sum of all of credits attempted that affect the GPA (referred to as Quality Units). Select Unweighted to use the sum of the grade points divided by the count of taken courses. For example, if a student takes two classes for a total of 8 credits and earns a letter grade of A (4 points) in one course and a letter grade of C (2 points) in the other course, the GPA is calculated as 6 points divided by 2 courses (3.0 GPA).
-
Specifies the number of days after the student graduates or drops out of school before they must begin repaying the loan. Anthology Student uses the value to calculate the first repayment date for each loan in the Exit Interview form.
-
The date when the student graduated or is scheduled to graduate from the program version.
-
The date the student is scheduled to graduate.
-
Loan offered by the college or university to help graduate students and their families pay for college expenses. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Graduate Institutional Loan.
-
Graduate Institutional Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Specify the origination fee for a graduate institutional loan.
-
The date of the counseling for the Graduate PLUS loan. If the field contains a value, the source of this date depends on your institution. The date can be the date from Direct Loan Entrance Counseling Results (DECFENOP) file imported from COD. You can also manually specify the date.
-
The Graduate PLUS Loan is a federal student loan available to students attending graduate school and professional school. It offers a fixed interest rate and flexible loan limits. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Graduate PLUS Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
The Grad Private Loan is a private student loan available to students attending graduate school and professional school. It offers a variable interest rate and flexible loan limits. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Graduate Private Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Select Graduate Level Program to specify that the student must be in a graduate program to meet the criteria. The program version must be configured with a degree level that is considered a graduate degree. Select CANNOT be in Grad Program to specify that the student must not be in a graduate-level program to meet the criteria.
-
The student ISIR states that they are a Graduate student but the Award Year header record (FaStudentPell) indicates that they are a Dependent student. This is inconsistent. This student will be excluded from the FISAP Summary Report but will appear on the FISAP Detail Report. This will cause a difference in the SEOG totals between those reports.
-
The year of the student's graduation.
-
The date when the student graduated or withdrew from the program.
-
The grade posted for the enrollment.
-
Select this check box if you want to display the grade in the invoice. If this check box is cleared, the system will display the grade field as blank.
-
The grade to transfer for the course.
-
You can use this field to allow faculty users to post the grade depending on the option selected. The options are - Before Last Day Of Class, On Last Day Of Class, After Term Ends, Anytime Till Term Ends.
-
Select whether final grades will be required for your institution before allowing a student to drop a course. The default value is No, when you add a campus.
-
The grade level for the student. Grade levels are configured by your institution and do not have to correspond to the option on the FAFSA or Stafford loan forms. The grade level is assigned to a student under Academic Records > Enrollment > Progress section. For a student to qualify for federal financial aid, a college grade level (1st year, 2nd year, etc.) must be assigned. For a Graduate PLUS loan, the grade level must be configured with the Department of Education ID 7 (Graduate/Professional or beyond).
-
Select the condition for the grade level in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the grade levels between 1 and 5 only.
-
Specify the grade level that indicates the grade level at which the student typically takes this course. The Grade Level list is a preconfigured list item which contains the codes that are used by the Department of Education to determine eligibility for financial aid. The institution can add additional grade levels as needed.
-
Select the grade level for which you want to generate report.
-
The grade level for the student for the loan period. The default is the grade level for the academic year for the loan period. Grade levels are configured by your institution and do not have to correspond to the option on the FAFSA or Stafford loan forms. For a student to qualify for a Graduate PLUS loan, the grade level must be configured with the Department of Education ID 7 (Graduate/Professional or beyond).
-
The grade level of the student when they received the loan.
-
Grade level required to complete the prerequisite.
-
The grade level for the student. Grade levels are configured by your institution and used to determine the complexity of the program.
-
The grade level required to meet the prerequisite. It is the grade level under Progress on the Enrollments page for that enrollment.
-
The grade level promotion that will be associated with this program version. For students to be automatically promoted based on the criteria defined in the requirement rules associated with a program version, automatic grade level promotion must be enabled on the campus where the student is enrolled.
-
Select Financial Aid or Academic Records to associate grade levels to be evaluated for course prerequisites.
-
Enter a numeric value for grade level for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the grade levels for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specify the comment if you want to add/update grades for students who did not meet exam eligibility criteria configured by your institution.
-
Points assigned to each letter grade.
-
The grade points assigned to the letter grade. For example, you can specify that and A- equates to 4 grade points in the GPA (when a standard scale may equate an A- to a 3.75).
-
Grade the student received for the course.
-
The date when the grade was posted. This value is automatically populated based on the date when the instructor posted the grade.
-
Specifies till which day the grade posting is allowed.
-
The grade that the student received for the course.
-
The grading parameters used by your institution to evaluate the academic achievements of the students.
-
The grade scale that will be used for this program version. If you change a grade scale on this page, a message will be displayed where you can update the grade scale for students currently enrolled in the program version with Active, Enrolled, or Temporary Out categories.
-
The name of the grade scale that the selected letter grade is associated with.
-
The grade type, for example, non-pass/fail.
-
This option is not available.
-
The date and time when the grades will be made available to the student online. Specify a date on or after the term end date.
-
Specify the maximum amount of VA Education Benefits available to graduate students at your institution.
-
Maximum income share amount for graduate students.
-
Number of months the income share agreement applies for graduate students.
-
Percent of income shared for graduate students
-
Indicates whether or not the student is in a graduate program.
-
If you selected PLUS Loan or Direct PLUS Parent Loan in the Type list, select the check box to specify that the borrower is a graduate student. Anthology Student uses this to determine whether to use the student or the parent on the master promissory note. If you select the check box, the student is on the promissory note. If you do not, the parent is on the promissory note.
-
Specify whether to apply the disbursement policy to graduate students. The options are Blank, No, and Yes. If you leave the field blank, the policy will apply to all degree levels.
-
Specify the dollar amount for work-study available to graduate students.
-
Specify the work-study hours per week available to graduate students.
-
Specifies that the student graduated from the institution. If you are adding or editing a college, it is automatically selected when you specify a value for Graduation Date.
-
Select the check box if you want SPE to make the changes to the graduation date when you queue the evaluation.
-
Select the check box if you want student pace evaluation to change the graduation date when you queue the evaluation.
-
The graduation ceremony that the student is part of. Graduation ceremonies are configured under Configuration > Student Services > Graduation Ceremony.
-
The date when the student graduated or is scheduled to graduate from the program version.
-
Indicates the student's graduation date.
-
The date that student graduated or is scheduled to graduate from the program version. Only students whose graduation date is within the specified date range will be gathered.
-
Specifies graduation date’s date range to filter the population of students for the process.
-
The session in which the student graduated (such as spring or fall).
-
The year that the student graduated.
-
The specific award year for the grant.
-
The specific export type for the Grant (Pell Originations, Pell Disbursements, TEACH Grant Originations, TEACH Grant Disbursements).
-
The names of the financial aid grants.
-
Select the number of days the system waits after the system date to include the noted disbursements for grants.
-
Anthology Student saves all records for all campuses that use Great Plains, that contain both a valid Debit and Credit Account or both the Debit and Credit accounts are blank. An error message is displayed if any campus that uses Great Plains is using an incorrect Debit and/or Credit account.
-
This field is visible only when Anthology Student is integrated with Great Plains. This URL indicates the location of the Great Plains APIs. This URL is not editable and is automatically populated when the necessary components for the integration are installed by Anthology’s Cloud Services.
-
The gross amount the student is eligible to receive for the fund source before any fees. For Direct loans, this field is read-only of the origination status of the loan is Accepted, Batched to Send, or Pending Approval.
-
The gross amount of the disbursement before any fees.
-
The net amount of the loan plus any fees.
-
The gross amount disbursed before any fees.
-
This is the Gross amount of the disbursements in the academic year adjusted for refunds. This enables staff members to reconcile the award disbursements with the amounts in the Need Analysis grid. Note: When a refund is posted for a Direct Loan, any fee adjustments for the loan are factored into the gross amount calculations made in this field. This ensures that the gross amount for the Direct Loan displayed in the Need Analysis grid is accurate.
-
The amount paid to the student for work-study during the pay period.
-
The amount of the award, including bank fees.
-
The gross amount the student is eligible to receive for the fund source before any fees.
-
If bank fees are greater than 0, the gross amount of aid based on the Department of Education definition of need-based aid.
-
Specifies whether a course contains a ground component. None specifies that the course has no ground component. Asynchronous specifies that the class meets at asynchronous times and that the students attend or log into the class resources at their convenience. Synchronous specifies that class meets at synchronous times and all students attend or log in at the specific times. You must select Asynchronous if you select the Auto Add New Course Section box.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups to which you have been given access.
-
Indicate the name of the student group. You can also view the owner of the group and the date when the group was added. Any inactive or expired groups do not appear in the list of group. when trying to add. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured the system to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups where you have been given access.
-
Select a student group to generate interest. Only students associated with the select student group will be included in the interest calculation. This field is enabled only when the Interest Charges Basis selected is Student Account Balance.
-
The name of the student group selected to generate the statements.
-
The members of the Registration Group to whom the notification will be sent.
-
The name of the student group selected to generate the statements.
-
The name of the student group you would like to generate registration bills for. This field is visible only if the Type selected is Batch.
-
The student group that the transcript batch is associated. This field is displayed only if you select Group as the Type.
-
The identifier for the Group as specified by EDconnect. (maximum length of 50 characters)
-
The group ID assigned by your institution.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups to which you have been given access.
-
The name of the staff group. Advisor groups have been configured by your institution to have an advisor code.
-
Indicates the name of the group.
-
Name of the group.
-
The type of group. M indicates manual. D indicates dynamic. S indicates static. F indicates frozen.
-
Indicates whether the type of group is manual or dynamic.
-
The type of group. M indicates manual and S indicates static. This value is populated by default based on the value configured in System Settings.
-
The type of group. The types are Manual and Static.
-
Specifies whether a group is public or private. A public group can be accessed and used by all staff members who have view authorization. A private group can only be accessed and used by the owner and the staff members with view authorization that the owner specifies. If you are filtering, select the option "Is true" to display only the public groups and the option "Is false" to display only the private groups.
-
Specifies who is authorized to view groups. The options are: - Public: Specifies that any staff member who is authorized to view groups can use the group. - Private: Specifies that only the owner of the group and the staff members that the owner grants access can use the group. The staff members must also be authorized to view groups.
-
The name of the student group that you selected to generate the statements.
-
The name of the student group that you would like to have balance statements generated.
-
The group that the lock is associated with.
-
Select the student group to be associated with the hold action. The group is added to the list
-
The student group that will be assigned the honors and badges. This option will be displayed if you select Groups as the Type.
-
The name of the student groups. Only students who are in the selected student groups will be gathered.
-
Select the group to which the student belongs.
-
Specifies the student groups for the process if needed.
-
Guarantor that is guaranteeing the loan. Guarantors are specified when fund sources are configured by your institution. If a guarantor was configured for the lender, the guarantor configured for the lender is displayed by default.
-
The institution guaranteeing the loan. For Direct loans, it is the Department of Education (DOE).
-
If you selected Guarantor in the Type list, specify the unique 3-character identifier for the guarantor.
-
The minimum number of credits required for a student to be considered as half time.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate if the student has a car available for traveling to and from work.
-
Specifies the assignment's assignment type is configured for generating earning lines. For Yes, the assignment type can be selected in compensation plans and is included in payroll.
-
Specifies whether or not you want Anthology Student to also generate earning lines for an assignment. For Yes, the assignment type can be selected in compensation plans and is included in payroll.
-
Specifies whether the assignment's overload assignment type is configured for generating earning lines. This value depends on the Overload Assignment Type Applied column.
-
The name of the staff member designated as the head of the department for a program group.
-
Enabled only if you select Summer as the Term Type. You can specify a Standard Term as a Summer Header or Trailer. By configuring a Summer term as a Header or Trailer for a scheduled academic year, student financial aid packaging can be done for all terms at once. This option enables students to plan their schedules for the year based on the availability of funding for each semester.
-
Iindicates a summer header, trailer, or N/A (not applicable).
-
End date for the student's health insurance coverage.
-
Name of the student's health insurance provider.
-
Specify any additional information you want displayed for the field when staff members mouse over the field on the page where the field is displayed or editable.
-
Area you can use to specify any comments to be displayed in the description field when the field is selected.
-
Specify any additional information that you want to be display for the extended property when you move mouse over the extended property where it is displayed.
-
Prevents the faculty names for this class from appearing in online forms in Portal.
-
Copies the option selected for Hide Faculty. The option specifies whether or not faculty names for this class from appear on the online forms in Portal.
-
Prevents the location information for this class from appearing in online forms in Portal.
-
Copies the option selected for Hide Location. The option specifies whether or not the location information for the class appears on the online forms in Portal.
-
Specify the high end of the range of units.
-
Indicates the higher value of the range for post date.
-
The high end of the credit hour range you wish to select for your term allocation.
-
Specifies the high number of credit hours in the range for the tier. For example, if the range for the tier is 0-29.999, then the value is 29.999.
-
The number of credits required to be automatically promoted to the next grade level.
-
The end date of a date range.
-
The High School to which the transcript request was sent.
-
Name of the high school a Student previously attended.
-
Specifies the name, code, state, city and ZIP code/postal code of the high school configured by your institution.
-
The advisor at your institution. The list contains staff members at your institution who are in a staff group with an advisor type code of ORGLSN (Organization Liaison).
-
The high school advisor for the student at your institution.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the student at high school.
-
The high school graduation date in the file imported from the State of Georgia.
-
The high school graduation year of the student.
-
The years must be shown in ascending order by name within the High School Graduation Year field.
-
The graduation year you want compared to the operator in the HS Grad Year Operator field.
-
Specifies the name and code of the high school configured by your institution.
-
The last date of attendance (LDA) that should be archived. For example, to archive attendance data prior to January 1, 2018, select 12/31/2017. Student attendance records with an LDA that occurs after 12/31/2017 will not be archived.
-
Indicates whether a student is of Spanish or Latin American descent.
-
Indicates whether a student is of Spanish or Latin American descent. The options are Yes or No.
-
Selecting the hyperlink enables you to review the history details for that specific exception.
-
The financial aid disbursement hold group used for Transfer Student Monitoring (TSM). This is the default TSM hold group for the selected Campus Name.
-
Specifies whether a Hold Code has been associated with the group. Being in a hold group prevents actions for students (such as preventing a student from registering). Hold Codes are associated with groups on the Hold Codes tab. You can set hold codes using the Settings tile for Financial Aid, Academic Records, Career Services, and so on.
-
Select a financial aid disbursement hold group. The selected group will be the default group for transfer student monitoring (TSM). This group is specific to the campus.
-
If a student belongs to a Hold Group, it is listed here (Refund Hold, Stipend Hold, Subsidiary Refund Hold). If the student is a member of multiple Hold Groups, all groups are displayed, separated by a comma. The Print option in the toolbar is disabled for any student in a Hold Group. Users can, however, still utilize Delete, Print Ledger, Edit Payee for these students.
-
Indicates the city of your home address.
-
Indicates the name of the state.
-
The residence phone number of the student or person.
-
Indicates the home phone number.
-
The honors and badges awarded to the student during the selected term. For example, Dean's list.
-
The honors and badges awarded to the student during the selected term. For example, Dean's list.
-
The honors and badges awarded to the student during the selected term. For example, Dean's list.
-
The honors and badges awarded to the student during the selected term. For example, Dean's list. This property is populated based on the campus selection. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
Honors and badges assigned to the student or student group. This field is required if you do not specify a value in Note.
-
The honors and badges awarded to the student during the selected term. If you select a Term that is not associated with the specified Program Version, the value, "Error! Term not associated' is displayed instead.
-
Indicates student eligibility for the HOPE grant and scholarship. The values are Yes and No. The value must be Yes for a student to be eligible for the fund source. If the field is blank, no value was imported from the State of Georgia. If a value is displayed, you can override the value.
-
Select the term at your institution that maps to the HOPE term type for the award year you selected in the Award Year list. The terms available are parent or standard terms.
-
For Commonline only.
-
Indicates the link to PayPal hosted checkout page. This link redirects you to the hosted checkout page for PayPal to add a credit card or make a payment.
-
The name of the campus hosting housing.
-
Indicates the hour when you want the student batch schedule to run. This field is visible when the Recurrence is set to Occurs every option.
-
The number of hours.
-
The hours required for the course.
-
The number of hours the student attended or was absent from the class section.
-
The default hours for the course.
-
The hours for the course. Read-only, unless the course is a variable credits course.
-
The number of hours required for the course.
-
Indicates the hour when you want the export student attachment batch schedule to run. This field is available when Recurrence is set to 'Occurs every...'.
-
Enter the number of hours.
-
The number of makeup hours needed by the student.
-
The number of expected hours for the program version in the payment period.
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours, the number of credits or hours in this sequence or payment period. It represents the number that the student should attend for the sequence that you selected. The total of all sequences must equal the credit or hours for a full academic year or loan period. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
The number of hours worked by the student during the pay period.
-
Minimum hours required to complete the prerequisite.
-
The number of hours in the academic year sequence.
-
Hours earned by the student including transfer credits and credits from course association.
-
The transfer hours that were approved.
-
The hours worked by the student.
-
The hours worked by the student.
-
The number of hours assigned to the instructor. If you are using Faculty Workload, the hours assigned using that module are used by Faculty Workload instead.
-
The total number of hours that the student attempted on the transcript from the previous institution.
-
The number of hours attempted by the student to date.
-
The total number of hours that the student attempted during the payment period.
-
The total credits or hours attempted by the student in the class section.
-
The hours attempted by the student during the term.
-
The number of hours attended by the student during the evaluation period.
-
Enter the hours that the student is available for work. This is an unformatted text box. Type text as required.
-
The total credits or hours for courses in a current or scheduled status within the Degree Progress Audit's required course lists. Credits or Hours will be displayed when the configured curriculum is set to either Clock Hours or Credit Hours.
-
The total hours earned by the student for the course.
-
The total hours earned by the student during the payment period.
-
The hours earned by the student during the term.
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours, the number that the student is expected to complete in this sequence.
-
Specifies that students are evaluated using the criteria only if their credits attempted or hours scheduled are less than or equal to the value you specify. The units depend on the value you selected in the Based On list (credit or clock hours). If you selected Credit Hours or Clock Hours By Course in the Based On list, Anthology Student evaluates the credits or hours attempted based on the course credits or hours attempted as seen in the final grades folder for the student. If you selected Clock Hour by Attendance and then selected Attendance Totals in the Attended Hours Basis field, it calculates the hours scheduled range from the detailed attendance records for the student by adding up all present and absent attendance. If you selected Clock Hours by Attendance and then Scheduled Hours in the Attended Hours Basis field, it calculates the hours scheduled from the scheduled period hours for the classes that the student attempted (The field is disabled if the combination is selected.)
-
If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock or credit hours, the number of credits or hours in this sequence or payment period. It represents the number that the student should attend for the sequence that you selected. The total of all sequences must equal the credit or hours for a full academic year or loan period. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
Specifies that students are evaluated using the criteria only if their credits attempted or hours scheduled are above or equal to the value you specify. The units depend on the value you selected in the Based On list (credit or clock hours). If you selected Credit Hours or Clock Hours By Course in the Based On list, Anthology Student evaluates the credits or hours attempted based on the course credits or hours attempted as seen in the final grades folder for the student. If you selected Clock Hour by Attendance and then selected Attendance Totals in the Attended Hours Basis field, it calculates the hours scheduled range from the detailed attendance records for the student by adding up all present and absent attendance. If you selected Clock Hours by Attendance and then Scheduled Hours in the Attended Hours Basis field, it calculates the hours scheduled from the scheduled period hours for the classes that the student attempted (The field is disabled if the combination is selected.)
-
The date when the student will satisfy the hours required for the payment period.
-
The number of credits or hours required for the course or enrollment.
-
The total number of hours required to complete this program version.
-
The total number of credits for courses in the current term with a status of Scheduled, Current, Grade Posted, or LOA.
-
The total number of credits or hours that are in a scheduled or current for the payment period. Hours must be posted or these fields are blank. The column is only displayed if the program version was configured in Academic Records to use scheduled hours.
-
Number of hours to transfer for the course.
-
The total number of hours for courses in the current term with a status of Scheduled, Current, Grade Posted, or LOA.
-
The housing for the student. If a student has an ISIR that matches the award year 1 value, the housing status will be set to the housing status of the ISIR when the system automatically adds an academic year or a staff member adds an academic year. The choices are On Campus, Off Campus, and With Parent. Your institution can configure budgets associated with the housing for a student so that the value for Room and Board is added when you select a value in the Budget list. If you change the value after calculating the budget, Anthology Student displays a message asking you if you want to recalculate the budget using the new housing status.
-
Select the check box if you want SPE to make the date changes to the housing lease when you queue the evaluation.
-
Select the check box if you want student pace evaluation to update Housing Lease date for academic calendars.
-
Name of the student's housing advisor.
-
The housing amenities available in the suite category.
-
The housing amenities available in the room category.
-
The housing amenities available in the building.
-
The housing amenities available in the building category.
-
The housing amenities available in the room category.
-
The housing amenities available in the suite category.
-
The estimated housing and food costs for the student for the academic year. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value.
-
Select this check box if costs for on campus housing and food are not applicable.
-
The name of the housing application.
-
The date range of housing lease for which you want to generate the report.
-
The date range of housing for a student.
-
The date range for housing. This field is enabled only when you have selected Renewal Type as Housing Dates.
-
The date range for housing. This field is enabled only when you have selected Housing Dates options in the Housing Type field.
-
The date range for housing. This field is enabled only when you have selected Housing Dates options in the Housing Required For field.
-
Indicates the amount a student needs to provide as the housing fee with the application.
-
Indicates the housing fee a student needs to provide with the application.
-
Select the subsidiary from the list of subsidiaries with which the selected transaction code is associated. This field is populated when the transaction code selected for Housing Fee is associated with subsidiary.
-
Indicates the Academic Year, Housing Dates, or Term. When a housing period is selected, the From and To dates are populated with the correct information.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the option in Anthology Student that indicates that the student requires housing is selected. You must select Yes in the Values list.
-
Select whether housing is required for Academic Year, Housing Dates, or Term.
-
The Housing Type options are Academic Year (A), Housing Dates (H), and Term (T). Depending on your selection, corresponding dates willl be populated in the Academic Year, Housing Dates, or Term field.
-
Indicate the background hover color.
-
Indicate the font color when the mouse hovers over the font.
-
Specifies how many years the borrower has been employed by the employer.
-
The method of placement. The values are configured by your institution.
-
Select the method in which credits to debit balances on the student's ledger card will be applied. The options are "Auto Apply Using Hierarchy" and "Manual/User Applied". For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the method in which credits to debit balances on the student's ledger card will be applied. The options are Auto Apply Using Hierarchy and Manual/User Applied. For additional information on How Should Payments be Applied, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Indicates the HR reference identifier. It is referred to as HRSystemID, which is a unique identifier from the HR System. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR System.
-
A unique earning code identifier from the HR system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR system.
-
A unique pay cycle identifier from the HR system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR system.
-
A unique position identifier from the HR system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR system.
-
A unique staff position assignment identifier from the HR system. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR system.
-
Specify the interest rate for an HRSA loan.
-
Specify the origination fee for an HRSA loan.
-
The Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA) of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) offers financial assistance to help finance education and training for health care workers, including doctors, dentists, optometrists, pharmacists, podiatrists, veterinarians, and nurses. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA) Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
The comparison operator for high school graduation year.
-
The date that the student graduate from high school.
-
Select the HTTP verb. The values are Post, Put, Get, and Delete. This option is displayed when you select Webhook in Job Type.
-
The I-94 form denoting the arrival or departure record of international students used by the US customs and border protection (CBP).
-
The indicator of the duration that the international student is allowed to stay in the US and is recorded upon entry in the I94 and I-20 documents.
-
The date the I-94 validity expires.
-
The 11-digit admission number on the I-94 record.
-
The airport where the student first lands in the United States of America.
-
The date when the student enters the United States of America.
-
Indicates whether the Informed Borrower acknowledgement has been received or not.
-
The COD system returns <IASGEligible> in the response file ifor Pell awards with schema version 5.0b. This tag will only be returned from COD if there is an IAS Grant = Yes or No on the Pell award. Anthology Student stores this tag as YES or NO when imported under Import Response (COMREC, CRPG, CRAA, CRWB, CRND). The flag on the Award form is updated if the value is YES.
-
Yes/No Flag indicating whether this is an Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant (IASG).
-
IBAN stands for International Bank Account Number which can be used when making or receiving international payments. IBAN does not replace the sort code and account number, but is an additional number to help overseas banks identify accounts for payment.
-
The ID assigned to the item or institution by Anthology Student when it was added to the system.
-
The ID assigned to the item or institution by Anthology Student when it was added to the system.
-
The ID assigned to the hangfire job.
-
Student ID to print.
-
Student identification number that you want to be included in the subsidiary statement. The options are Student number, Enrollment number or None.
-
This field is read-only and indicates an Identifier Change on the student's record for the calendar year.
-
Select the value from the following options: - No: Select this option to disable listing a student record as Placed; if this option is chosen the student is considered Not Placed - All Campuses: Select this option to enable listing a student record as Placed; if this option is chosen the student is considered Placed for all Campuses - Campus-Based: Select this option to enable listing a student record as Placed; if this option is chosen the student is considered Placed for the selected Campuses only
-
Indicates the 10-character routing number of the Automated Clearing House (ACH).
-
Indicates the name of the Automated Clearing House (ACH).
-
Indicates the 9-character routing number of the Sender or your institution.
-
Indicates the name used to define your institution (up to 10 alphanumeric characters).
-
Paid disbursements are evaluated against eligibility criteria immediately after they have been posted to the student ledger.
-
Indicates whether the adjustments are posted to the ledger card immediately instead of when the next SQL job is run. This option is set to No and disabled by default when you select the Payment Period billing frequency. "Immediate Posting Adjustments" is enabled only when you select "Automate Registration Charges". We recommended enabling this option if you are using automated posting without a review to ensure accurate course amount information.
-
The number assigned to the batch by the servicer and recorded by Anthology Student when the batch was imported.
-
The number assigned to the batch by the servicer and recorded by Anthology Student when the batch was imported.
-
The date and time the file was imported.
-
Name of the import file.
-
The status from SEVIS for the file.
-
The status of the import for the record. The values are Processed, Rejected, and Not Supported. For example, if the record type is incorrect, it displays Not Supported. If the status is Rejected, the reason it was rejected is displayed in the Reason column.
-
If the batch was created by a staff member, the column displays Other. If the file was imported, it will display the source (such as COD, CommonLine, or Direct loan).
-
Select the import/export method from the drop-down list.
-
The last and then first name of the staff member who imported or exported the file.
-
If the import was successful, click the link in the column to display the I-20 forms for students.
-
The in-school placement status of the student.
-
If the course selected in the Campus Course list is in the required course list for the program version, Anthology Student selects the check box and displays it in the Degree Progress Audit for the student (Select the Students tile > name of the student in the list > expand Academic Records > select the Degree Progress Audit tile.)
-
Specify the In District for the student.
-
Was this job in the student's field of study? Select Yes, No, Related.
-
Select a status from the list.
-
Select whether or not you want to display only jobs designated as part time in school in the report.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student to meet the criteria, specifies that the selected placement status must be the in school placement status for the student on their placement page for the enrollment. The Value list contains the school statuses with a status category of Inschool – Placement (G) for the selected campuses.
-
Specifies the in school placement status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution.
-
Job status of the student
-
Indicates whether the record is in use.
-
This column informs the user that a batch is in use and may only be viewed but may not be edited or reported on. The column displays the name of the user who currently has edit access to 1098-T items.
-
Indicates if the document is coming in from another school. C for College, H for High School.
-
Please reference the FSA handbook for the restrictions involving incarcerated students.
-
Refers to the date when the incident was reported. The incident list is sorted by the date when the incident was reported, with the most recently reported incident displayed first.
-
The details about the incident are mentioned in this field.
-
The codes for student conduct violations that occur on a campus. For example, theft or argument. They are configured by your institution.
-
It lists all reported incidents for the selected campus. By default, the incident list is sorted by the date when the incident was reported, with the most recently reported incident displayed first.
-
Indicates whether or not the attempted credits are included for the grades.
-
Indicates whether or not the earned credits are included for the grades.
-
Indicates whether the letter grade will be used in GPA calculation.
-
Select the check box for fund sources to include in the stipend return order.
-
Select the check box to mark the records to be included in the GE report you will submit to the Department of Education. When the grid is loaded after the school code selection, the system selects the Include check box for all records that have a valid CIP code.
-
The Include 1098T column identifies transactions to be included in the 1098-T based on the fund source code setup in Anthology Student. You can update these selections to comply with the 1098-T reporting guidelines for the current tax year.
-
Select whether or not you want to include active salary only for the report.
-
Indicates that you want to include tasks that do not have any associated campus or student.
-
Select the check box if you want the add/drop date to be printed.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include the add or drop date of the terms.
-
Choose whether or not you want to generate statements regardless if the student’s subsidiary balance is positive value or negative value or zero balance.
-
If your institution is using a servicer, specifies whether or not awards that are managed by servicers are included in the list of awards you can update. Yes specifies that they are included. No specifies that they are excluded.
-
Select whether you want to include applied unscheduled payments. The default iis Yes. If you select No, the report displays revenue data by campus and provides an overall total.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include extracts created for Academic Records. Yes specifies you want them included. No specifies that you do not want them excluded.
-
Select this option to include income from eligible school activities in the 90/10 calculation. This feature is available only if the Bill Type is Misc Receipts or Both. This option is disabled for Bill Type Student.
-
Select this option to include income from eligible school activities in the 90/10 calculation. This feature is available only if the Bill Type is Misc Receipts or Both. This option is disabled for Bill Type Student. Note: In calculating revenues generated by school activities, an institution may include only revenue generated by the institution from activities it conducts, that are necessary for its students' education or training. The activities must be conducted on campus or at a facility under the control of the institution; performed under the supervision of a member of the institution's faculty; and required to be performed by all students in a specific educational program at the institution. Examples include beauty/barbering schools providing haircuts; culinary institutes operating restaurants, and trade schools providing equipment repairs. For more information on eligible activities, refer to http://ifap.ed.gov.
-
If you selected Disbursement Term in the Evaluation Mode list, select the check box to have Anthology Student include the attendance for all the courses in the term.
-
Specifies whether or not awards that were estimated awards are displayed in the list.
-
Select this option if the code represents an activity that is an eligible 1098-T expense (e.g., tuition and books).
-
Specify whether to include campus name and details on the checks.
-
Indicate whether you want to include the canceled disbursements. By default, the option is set to Yes.
-
Specifies that change files imported for the servicer are included.
-
Indicate whether you want to include the check details in the report.
-
Indicates whether to include closed tasks or not.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include column names. The default value is Yes.
-
Include any comments specified in the Note field for the document.
-
Select this check box to include the cost with the available price information on the Student Schedule Report and online.
-
Indicates that course detail information needs to be included.
-
Select whether or not you want include credits from audit courses in the report.
-
Select the check box to include debit balance from prior enrollments. This field is displayed only when "Allow up to $200 of FSA funds for prior period charges" is enabled.
-
Indicate whether you want to include the deposits. By default the option is set to Yes.
-
Select the option whether or not you want to include detail records in the report.
-
Indicates that you want to include tasks that do not have any associated campus or student.
-
Select the check box to allow your institution to report scheduled disbursements up to 7 days out from the reporting date.
-
Select whether to include a disbursement number match. By default, the option is set to No.
-
Indicates the dropped courses are included when evaluating the minimum and maximum limit.
-
Indicates whether the credits earned from course retakes is included in the total credits earned for the course. If you select "Yes", every time a student retakes a course, Anthology Student automatically adds the credits earned from the retake with the total credits earned for the course. By default, the option is set to 'Use Earned Credit on Campus Setup' and applies the campus level settings for the same option.
-
Select whether the credits earned from course retakes must be included in the total credits earned for a course. By default, the option is set to 'Yes", and every time a student retakes a course, Anthology Student automatically adds up the credits earned from the retake with the total credits earned for the course. Select "No" if your institution requires that credits earned from course retakes does not affect the total credits earned for a course. For additional information, see Background for Academic Records for Campuses.
-
Select the type of earning lines you want to include in the process based on which the pay cycle and pay period start/end date earning lines are included. The options are: Exported includes the exported earning lines, Not Exported includes the generated earning lines or Future includes both the exported and not exported. The default value is Not Exported.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include empty prospect dates.
-
Select whether you want include exceptions in the report.
-
Include the sum of hours the student was absent.
-
Specifies whether or not to include expected payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to to chose to include expected payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include expected payments in the statement.
-
Select whether you want to include Books and School Supplies and/or Other charges in the total institutional charges calculation.
-
The fees such as Books and School Supplies and/or Other charges that you have selected to include in the total institutional charges calculation.
-
Select whether you want to include Books and School Supplies and/or Other charges in the Program Costs in the total institutional charges calculation. This option is available only if the Evaluation Period is Enrollment Period.
-
Specifies the earnings in the first month of the period of allocation.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include future prospect dates.
-
When combined with the date in the Extract Date field, specifies the date range for the export. If the expected start date for a student is in the range, the student is included in the export. The Include Futures Up to date must be after the date for Extract Date. The field is only displayed if you selected Weekly Extract in the Export Type list.
-
Select whether the name of each field is to be displayed at the top of the file. This option is available for Delimited files only.
-
If you selected Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant, Scholarship, Other Outside Resources, Pell Grant, TEACH Grant, or Grant (Other than Pell), select the check box to specify that the fund source is included in the 1098-T calculations for scholarships and grants.
-
This check box is only displayed when you edit the subsidiary charge and the charge is included in 1098-T. You can edit this check box.
-
Indicate whether you want to include subsidiary transactions in the student's 1098-T report. If you select this check box, it also appears when you want to void the subsidiary transaction.
-
This check box is not editable. It indicates whether you want to include subsidiary transactions in the student's 1098-T report. This check box is only visible when the 1098-T check box is selected at the time the payment was made. If the check box is not selected when the payment was made, this check box is not displayed.
-
Select this checkbox for Subjects that need to be included when calculating the Application Score. Based on the Grades earned in each subject, appropriate Points will be allocated to each Subject. These Points will be used to calculate the total Application Score which determines the eligibility of a Student during admissions. The calculation depends on the Score Type configured in the system. The checkbox is unchecked by default.
-
If you are using Financial Aid Automation (FAA), select the check box if you want the field included in the automated awarding rules engine and logic for FAA.
-
Indicates whether the GPA values are included in the Cumulative GPA calculation.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the transfer status and information is included on the Degree Progress Audit and Hypothetical Degree Progress Audit (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Academic Records > select the Degree Progress Audit tile.).
-
Indicates the grade will affect the student's GPA.
-
Select the box to have Anthology Student include the courses with the selected transfer types and transfer statuses in the GPA calculation.
-
A dropdown menu that contains two options - Yes or No. Users must choose the appropriate option based on their requirement.
-
Indicates whether you want to allow the institution to include the transaction in the R2T4 calculation as an institutional charge. This configuration option is applicable to Term-Based programs only. This configuration option does not change, affect, or apply to Non-Term Program transactions or charges that can are pulled into the R2T4 calculation via the COA/budget config.
-
If the salary information should be included in reports
-
You can select this option to include a transaction code in Revenue Recognition.
-
Select Yes if charges for the transaction code should be recognized as revenue. These charges will show up in the Revenue Detail report as earned revenue.
-
Indicates whether the GPA values are included in the Term GPA.
-
Select this option if the charge is to be included in the Title IV refund institutional charges calculation. This option must be selected if this transaction code represents a charge to be evaluated.
-
Select the box to have Anthology Student include the courses with the selected transfer types and transfer statuses in the total of units attempted.
-
Indicates whether the GPA is included in the Units calculation.
-
Select the box to have Anthology Student include the courses with the selected transfer types and transfer statuses in the total of units earned.
-
When selected, includes courses that are inactive courses in the Campus Course list.
-
When selected, includes inactive terms in the Term list.
-
Indicates that you want to deposit contents of items that are not in cash drawers.
-
Indicates that you want to deposit items that are not in cash drawers. This option is available only for campuses that are configured to use Cashiering to accept payments.
-
Specifies the earnings in the last month of the period of allocation.
-
Specifies whether or not to include ledger transactions in the statement. The transaction date, description, and amount are displayed for each payment presented.
-
Indicates the leave of absence (LOA) courses are included when evaluating the minimum and maximum limit.
-
Select whether you want to “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” for which you want to generate the report. This filter functions on an OR basis, not an AND basism with the “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” and “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” filters. For example, if you select Yes in the “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” and “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” filters and No in the “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” filter, Faculty Workload fetches all the load types that have pay tracking and reporting set to Yes.
-
Select whether you want to “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” for which you want to generate the report. This filter functions on an OR basis, not an AND basis, with the “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” and “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” filters. For example, if you select No in the “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” and “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” filters and Yes in the “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” filter, Faculty Workload fetches all load types that have reporting type.
-
Select whether you want to “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” for which you want to generate the report. This filter functions on an OR basis, not an AND basis, with the “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” and “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” filters. For example, if you select Yes in the “Include Load Types with Load Tracking” and “Include Load Types with Reporting Only” filters and No in the “Include Load Types with Pay Tracking” filter, Faculty Workload fetches all load types that have Load Tracking set to Yes OR load types where Load Tracking and Pay Tracking is set to No (Reporting type).
-
Select whether or not you want to include makeup hours in the report.
-
Indicate whether you want to include the miscellaneous receipts. By default, the option is set to Yes.
-
Choose whether or not you want to generate statements for students whose subsidiary balance is a negative value.
-
Indicates the balance option you want included, that is include negative balances.
-
Specifies whether or not to include the negative balances in the student account.
-
Select this check box to add all attending enrollments that are not already included in the SSCR roster file regardless of whether they are receiving Title IV aid. A student who does not have a Title IV loan at your institution might have received Title IV elsewhere, therefore, current enrollment status information is used to assess that student’s potential deferment privileges.
-
Select this option to retrieve only items that have not been deposited yet. Otherwise, leave this field blank. The check box is only displayed if you also select the Payments check box.
-
When the Advanced Feature for Auto Packaging is enabled, the Packaging Options tab on the Automated Budget and Packaging Options form provides a "Include Non-Instructional days" field with Yes/No options. The system sets the default to No. If the "Include Non-Instructional Days" field is set to Yes and the institution has configured a calendar of holidays and other non-attendance days under Configuration > Academic Records > Calendars, all awarding configurations within Auto Awarding (Packaging and Repackaging) will use the calendar configuration to determine if a disbursement is awarded on the start date of a payment period or extended to include any days of the calendar break. If the institution configured the actual disbursement dates using Disbursement Schedules (Configuration > Financial Aid > Disbursement Schedules), Auto Awarding does not alter the disbursement dates.
-
Select whether you want to include non defer bill codes in the report.
-
Select the check box if you want the information staff members specify in the Note field to appear on the Portal.
-
Select the check box to specify that the text in the Note field is to be included in student facing reports and online in Portal.
-
Select the check box if you want Anthology Student to place an asterisk (*) in the ESTES (Estimated Enrollment Status) field of the file. See the background servicer export for additional information the conditions required for the field to be populated.
-
Specifies whether the promissory note is going to be included on the manifest of notes being sent to COD. The values are Yes and No.
-
Specifies whether or not to include only student payments in the statement.
-
When selected, specifies that only disbursements for grants or loans that have been originated with statuses you select will be approved. The check box is displayed only for Pell Grants and Direct Loans.
-
Specifies whether or not to include past due payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include past due payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include past due payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include past due payments in the statement.
-
Select the check box if you want the payment due date to be printed. When you select this check box, the Payment Due Date field becomes editable.
-
Specifies whether you want to include a photo for each student.
-
Choose whether or not you want to generate statements for students whose subsidiary balance is a positive value.
-
Indicates the balance option you want included, that is include positive balances.
-
Specifies whether or not to include the positive balances in the student account.
-
Indicates whether to include the previous term balance in the refund calculation.
-
Indicates whether to include the previous term balance in the refund calculation. This field is visible when Time Period is set to Academic Year.
-
Allows you to include process level exceptions, which are assigned against a function, rather than a specific student.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include processed records. If Yes the newly added attachment will be transferred and in case of No the newly added attachment will not be transferred.
-
Specifies whether the report contains the program versions. If you select Yes, the details for the program versions are displayed for each program. If you select No, only details for the programs are listed in the report.
-
Select the check box if this option is applicable to your institution.
-
Specifies whether or not to include recent payments received (including refunds, stipends, and voids for the period) in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not chose to include recent payments received in the statement.
-
Select the check box to include reserved credits in the report. Depending on the institutions use of the term, reserved credits can be credits accepted from another institution but not yet applied, credits reserved for specific courses , programs, advanced standing, or testing.
-
When you selected Envelope in the Print Options list, specifies whether to include the return address information for your institution. For example, select Yes for a blank envelope and No for a preprinted envelope.
-
Select the check box to include scheduled disbursements in the disbursement export file. If you select to export scheduled disbursements, the system selects disbursements that are scheduled up to seven (7) days before the disbursement or thirty (30) days after the date of the export.
-
Select whether you want to include the student address in the report.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include only student payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include only student payments in the statement.
-
Select the students to include in the report. The options are: Include only students with ISIR on file, Include only students without ISIR on file, and Include all students.
-
If you select Yes, Anthology Student breaks down the GPA calculations by term similar to the way the term summary works for system GPAs. Each term displays the term's GPA and the cumulative GPA as of the end of the term.
-
Select whether you want to include the detailed calculation for each student. By default it is set to No. It applies only to unscheduled payments not tied to a fund source. These payments are treated as Cash (Other Receipts) payments for 90/10 processing.
-
Select whether you want to include the detailed calculation for each student. By default it is set to No.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether you want to include Title IV evaluation. This field is displayed when the 'Credit Balance Evaluation Type' is not set to FSA Title IV (only) Evaluation. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the check box to include Title IV fund if students receive government funding. This option is editable when you enable Use Title IV Refund Calculation.
-
Filters students who received funds associated with Title IV fund sources for the program version. This includes students who may have received Title IV at any time during their enrollment in the GE program version and not just during the specified award year.
-
Select the required option that you want to include for transactions in the report.
-
If you have permission to override the transcript hold, you can generate transcripts for one or multiple students with holds on their transcripts. If you have permission and you select Yes, the last page of the report contains a list of students with a status of transcript hold. If you do not have permission to override the transcript hold, then the students with a hold on their transcripts are not included in the report.
-
If you have specialized permission to print transcripts on hold, select Yes to include the students with transcripts on hold. Select No to exclude them. When the Release Only Federally Funded Terms field is set to Yes, the Include Transcripts On Hold field automatically changes to Yes since the school staff member no longer needs override permission in order to use it.
-
If you have specialized permission to print transcripts on hold, select Yes to include the students with transcripts on hold. Select No to exclude them.
-
Indicates whether the student record without an admissions representative will be included.
-
Select the check box to include unearned PLUS payments in the refunds that are scheduled from the institution within the Return of Title IV Funds Calculation. This option is editable when you enable "Include unearned Title IV aid due from student".
-
Select the check box to include unearned Stafford payments in the refunds that are scheduled from the institution within the Return of Title IV Funds Calculation. This option is editable when you enable "Include unearned Title IV aid due from student".
-
Select the check box to include unearned Title IV Aid in the refunds that are scheduled from the institution within the Return of Title IV Funds Calculation.
-
Indicate whether you want to include any unscheduled payments. By default, the option is set to Yes.
-
Select the check box to include credits for students who are on the waitlist.
-
Specifies the revenue that will be included during the first unit of earnings that are recognized.
-
Choose whether or not you want to generate statements for students whose subsidiary balance is zero.
-
Indicates the balance option you want included, that is include zero balances.
-
Specifies whether or not to include the zero balances in the student account.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include the add or drop date of the student from the course.
-
Indicate whether you want to include applied payments. If you set Yes, the system populates a sub report. The sub report lists the charges that have been applied to the payment. For example, a payment of DIR SUB $1000 has been applied where $200 has been applied against Tuition, $400 against BOOK, and the remaining $400 against Technology fees.
-
Yes is displayed if the corresponding field for the transaction in the 1098-T Processing Utility is set to I. No is displayed if the corresponding field for the transaction in the 1098-T Processing Utility is set to N or any value other than I.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include expected payments in the statement.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include the due date of the payment.
-
Indicates whether the import file includes identifier changes for a student (changes in first or last name, SSN, date of birth).
-
Indicates whether the sub test is included in the test.
-
Specifies whether or not you chose to include only student payments in the statement.
-
The annual income for the student or person.
-
A form of agreement where students agree to pay a certain percentage of their future income over a set period of time in exchange for funding of their educational program expenses.
-
The estimated income tax for the student or person. You can specify the value or have Anthology Student estimate the income tax when you select the Save button.
-
If the letter grade is an I for incomplete, displays the date that the student must have completed the class section and the new numeric grade must be entered. If the new numeric grade is not entered by the date, Anthology Student automatically changes the I to the letter grade that corresponds to the numeric grade configured in the grade scale. The number of days used to calculate the date is configured for Academic Records by your institution and is added to the end date of the class section.
-
It designates a grade as an incomplete grade.
-
Select the grade that automatically replaces the incomplete grade after the expiration deadline date has passed. If the replacement grade is not configured, the incomplete grade is not automatically replaced past the expiration deadline date. A grade designated as an incomplete and the replacement of an incomplete grade cannot be configured to be an audit, transfer, default drop grade, after LDW grade, or drop grade.
-
Indicates whether or not the grade is incomplete.
-
Specify whether Marks Moderation is to be done for increasing or decreasing the marks.
-
Select yes to indicate that the program version is subject to increment billing and earning. This field is enabled only when you select a billing method with billing frequency of Academic Year in the billing method, and the selected earning method has revenue basis of calendar days and use billing period in revenue earning period.
-
Select yes to increment billing and earning. This field is enabled only when you select the academic year in billing method, calendar days in earning method, and use billing period in revenue earning period.
-
Indicates whether the charges will be filtered based on date range or term.
-
Specifies how you would like to identify charges that will be used to reduce the student’s account balance when calculating interest. The available options are By Date Range or By Term. This field is available only when Interest Charges Basis selected is Student Account Balance and Reduce By Incurred Charges option is selected.
-
Specifies whether or not a student is making satisfactory academic progress (SAP). No indicates that a student cannot receive financial aid. Yes indicates a student can receive financial aid. Select No if you want to associate the SAP status with a student group. Once a group is tied to the status, the field is disabled and cannot be changed to Yes. You can remove the group if you change the value to Yes.
-
Displays information about the verification process. For verified records, the indicator can be Accurate, Tolerance, or Recalculated. For corrected records, the indicator is Corrections.
-
Select the required indicator for the student.
-
Select the Industry preferred by the student
-
The type of industry.
-
Indicates only those records which are active.
-
Select the industry from the list.
-
Indicates the industry the employer belongs to.
-
Indicates the industry. Industry codes mentioned under career services in configuration.
-
This status is used to update the document when the Post Withdrawal status is ineligible.
-
When you select this check box, the system gathers disbursements for Direct Loan awards (Direct Sub, Direct Unsub, Direct PLUS, Direct Grad PLUS) where the student has Informed Borrower data saved in the system for award year 2021-2022 or higher. If this check box is cleared, Informed Borrower details for Direct Loans are not referenced when the system determines which disbursements to include in the batch.
-
After borrowers acknowledge that they have reviewed their outstanding loan balance at StudentAid.gov, COD returns 18-digit Informed Borrower ID tags at Award Level for each Direct Loan in the response file.
-
The type of infraction associated with the J-1 visa. For example, minor infractions such as failure to extend a participant's program before the specified end date on the DS-2019 form.
-
Indicate the Infraction Type. Infraction Type refers to non-compliance with the regulations of the U.S. immigration by an international student or exchange visitor. The options are Failure to receive RO/ARO approval and/or amended DS-2019 before accepting an honorarium or other type of payment and Other.
-
Difference between the original ISIR value and the value after the verification process.
-
The name of the program and date when the student made the inquiry. The list is only displayed if the student has a Anthology Student Status Category of Lead (such as New Lead, Interview Schedule, or Interviewed). For the list to be available, the Track Multiple Lead Inquiries box must also be selected in Anthology Student on the Lead Sources Code Setup form (List > Admissions > Lead Sources > Add/Edit Lead Source > Lead Sources Code Setup).
-
The date when the student made the inquiry.
-
The date when the request was inspected.
-
Specifies the method that Anthology Student uses to calculate institutional charges. For additional information, see the table "How Institutional Charges are Calculated for the Academic Year".
-
The Instagram ID of the student. You can enter a maximum of 150 characters in the field, including special characters.
-
The type of the institution. The options are college or high school.
-
The name of the institution. If you are specifying the value, it displays a dialog so that you can search for the institution. The list contains all of the colleges or high schools configured by your organization.
-
The name of the institution course. If you are specifying the value, it displays a dialog so that you can search for the institution course. The list contains all of the colleges or high schools courses configured by your organization.
-
If your Institution does not offer Distance Education courses as outlined in the federal standard, select "Institution does not offer Distance Education Courses". The selections on this form are dimmed (grayed out), except for the Criteria Name field. Assign a Criteria Name so that this configuration can be used as a selection in the Process tab of the Population Analysis form.
-
Select College/Other or High School to indicate the institution and course list to be used when entering transfer credits for a student.
-
Select the institution type code. The options are"'Less than one year", "1 year, less than two years", "2 years, less than three years", "3 years, less than four years", "4 years" (baccalaureate degree only), and "5 years or more".
-
Amounts paid directly to the institution. They appear on the student ledger card and are counted as revenue for your institution. For example, tuition is an institutional charge. In most cases, travel is not an institutional charge. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the values from the budget. If you select the check box, Anthology Student automatically updates the values for Total Budget and Total Institutional to include the amounts. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
If you selected Grant (Other than Pell), Student Payments, or Scholarship in the Type list, select this check box to specify that the fund source is an institutional grant (other than Pell) or scholarship that is disbursed from an established restricted account and funded by outside sources or income earned on such funds. When the check box is selected, the 90/10 report includes this aid in the calculation. The check box is disabled if you selected the Title IV check box.
-
Select the check box if the fee/charge is an institutional charge.
-
Amounts paid directly to the institution. They appear on the student ledger card and are counted as revenue for your institution. For example, tuition is an institutional charge. In most cases, travel is not an institutional charge. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the values from the budget. If you select the check box, Anthology Student automatically updates the values for Total Budget and Total Institutional to include the amounts. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The calculated institutional charges based on the selected Evaluation Period. If the Evaluation Period is set to Term, institutional charges are all charges posted to the student’s ledger card for the specified term. The transaction codes associated with the charges must be configured with the “Include in Title IV Institutional Charges” attribute selected. If the Evaluation Period is set to Enrollment Periods, institutional charges are obtained from the student’s Program Costs configured for the student’s program version (under Configuration > Financial Aid > Program Versions > Program Costs tab).
-
The calculated institutional charges based on the selected Evaluation Period. If the Evaluation Period is set to Term, institutional charges are all charges posted to the student’s ledger card for the specified term. The transaction codes associated with the charges must be configured with the “Include in Title IV Institutional Charges” attribute selected. If the Evaluation Period is set Enrollment Periods, then institutional charges are obtained from the student’s Program Costs configured for the student’s program version (under Configuration > Financial Aid > Program Versions > Program Costs tab).
-
Total amount of institutional charges for the selected academic year.
-
For students living with their parents, indicates whether or not the amount is institutional. Yes indicates it is paid directly to the institution. They appear on the student ledger card and are counted as revenue for your institution. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The rule reviews the courses in the applicable areas and applies those noted courses to fulfill the rule until the entire rule is satisfied (fulfilled). These courses are displayed in the applied courses section for the requirement rule on the DPA Requirement Rule Audit tab. The requirement rule type Advanced - Rule based/Institutional Credits in Percentage is added to Programs, Program Versions, Area of Study, and Student Profile.
-
Grant provided by the institution. Specify the estimated grant amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Institutional Grant - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the grant option does not apply to the student.
-
Loan offered by the college or university to help students and their families pay for college expenses. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Specify the interest rate for an institutional loan.
-
Institutional Loan - Note Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Specify the origination fee for an institutional loan.
-
Total amount paid to the institution. It includes tuition, books and supplies, and other charges that have been configured as institutional. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The number of instructional months (IM) that occur within the date range of the sequence. Anthology Student divides the value by 4.333. If the result contains a decimal of .5 or higher, the months are rounded up. Otherwise, it is rounded down. The field is displayed if the program version is configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms and the program is configured to auto recalculate budgets and the academic year is configured to use monthly amounts and the calculation method uses the amounts entered here. If you change the value for Instructional Weeks in LP, the value is automatically recalculated, but you must select the Recalculate Budget to recalculate the budget using the new value.
-
Specify the number of instructional weeks for non-standard terms. Use whole numbers only (max 100). This number is used only in the Enrollment Intensity calculations for non-standard term programs. Full-time Credit Formula = Instructional Weeks defined on the Term * Credits on a Full Academic Year from Program Version / Weeks on a full Academic Year from Program Version Enrollment Intensity Formula = Full-time credits calculated for the term / Financial Aid credits in the term (could be multiple courses)
-
Select the check box if a student has dropped or failed courses and the courses are not included in the Instructional Weeks (IW) calculation.
-
The number of instructional weeks (IW) that occur within the date range of the sequence. Anthology Student uses the value to calculate the value in the Instructional Months field. The field is displayed if the program version is configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms and the program is configured to auto recalculate budgets and the academic year is configured to use monthly amounts. The calculation method uses the amounts you specify here. It can be different from the calendar weeks for the sequence. It should never be less than Weeks in Academic Year field. For some patterns of course registration, it can be greater than the Weeks in Academic Year field, but it cannot be greater if the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool is used projection is used for Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP).
-
The number of instructional weeks (IW) that occur within the date range of the sequence. Anthology Student uses the value to calculate the value in the Instructional Months field. The field is displayed if the program version is configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms and the program is configured to auto recalculate budgets and the academic year is configured to use monthly amounts and the calculation method uses the amounts entered here. It can be different from the calendar weeks for the sequence. It should never be less than Weeks in Academic Year field. For some patterns of course registration, it can be greater than the Weeks in Academic Year field, but it cannot be greater if the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool is used projection is used for Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP).
-
The date when the student will satisfy the instructional weeks required for the payment period.
-
The instructor or instructors assigned to the course or class section.
-
The primary instructor for the course. If your institution associated instructors with courses and you do not have permission to override the associated instructors, the list contains the instructors associated with the course. If your institution did not associate instructors or it did and you have permission to override the associated instructors, you can select the Show All Instructors check box and the list will contain all the instructors.
-
The instructor assigned to the course or class section.
-
The instructor who will teach the course. You can assign additional instructors or secondary instructors for courses that are taught by one or more instructors or have assistant instructors for lab sessions. For courses with multiple instructors, you must designate a primary instructor. Courses may or may not have secondary instructors.
-
Select the instructor assigned to the course or class section. You can select one instructor at a time.
-
The primary instructor assigned to the course or class section.
-
If you selected Default Instructor in the Instructor Type list, select the default instructor for the class sections that are added.
-
The instructor associated with the course that you want to unregister from.
-
Additional attributes associated to the instructor for this class section.
-
Additional attributes associated to the instructor for this class section.
-
Indicates whether or not the staff group was configured with a Parent Group of Instructor Group. If the column displays Yes, the staff group is an Instructor Group and was configured as a template. Templates can be configured to specify specialized permissions.
-
Select the type of instructor. If you want to select a default instructor, select Default Instructor. Select Course Instructor to use for the class section. If you select Course Instructor in Instructor Type field, Anthology Student copies the instructor attributes from the original section to the newly created class section.
-
The instructors that will be associated with the course.
-
The instructor or instructors assigned to the class section session.
-
Select one or more instructors for the class section. You can select the magnifying glass icon and select one or more instructors from the list. The instructors are added to the list in the order (rank) you select them. If your institution did not associate instructors to the course or it did and you have permission to override instructor course association and you selected the Show All Instructors check box on the General page, the list displays all the active instructors. If your institution did associate instructors and you do not have permission or you remove the check for Show All Instructors, the list contains only instructors associated with the course. The instructors you specify here can be selected when you use the Schedule page to add period recurrences and the calendars to add periods and class days. You can select a maximum of 50 instructors.
-
The instructors for the period. You can select the magnifying glass icon to display a dialog and then select one or more instructors from the list. The list contains the instructors you specified on the Instructors and Portal Options page and any additional instructors you added using the + Add Instructors button on the Schedule page. You can specify a maximum of 50 instructors.
-
Select one or more instructors. You can select the magnifying glass icon and select one or more instructors from the list. The instructors are added to the list in the order (rank) you select them. If your institution did not associated instructors to the course, or it did associate instructors and you have permission to override instructor course association and you selected the Show All Instructors check box on the General page, the list displays all the active instructors. If you do not have permission or you remove the check for Show All Instructors, the list contains only instructors associated with the course. You can select a maximum of 50 instructors.
-
The instructors for the periods. The Instructors field is required, but defaults to the primary instructor specified from the General tile. You can select the magnifying glass icon and select one or more instructors from the list. The list contains the instructors you specified on the Instructors and Portal Options page and any instructors you added using the + Add Instructors button on the Schedule page. If you need to add an instructor not in the list, you can also add additional instructors using the + Add Instructors button under Period Details. You can specify a maximum of 50 instructors.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want to integrate Anthology Student with external content management software (such as Hyland®'s Perceptive Content). Otherwise, select No.
-
Specify whether you want the system to share data with Great Plains (GP). The system validates GP account numbers, passes transactions to GP, and retrieves data from GP for the system reports. Select N/A if Great Plains is not installed.
-
Specify whether you want to integrate the system checks and deposits with the Great Plains (GP) process for bank reconciliation. Select Yes to include GP Checkbook and GP Check number columns in the Process Refunds/Stipends Checks. Select N/A if Great Plains is not installed.
-
Area that displays the comments or additional information.
-
The integration reference id. It is referred to as HRSystemID, which is a unique identifier from the HR or Payroll System. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR or payroll System.
-
The integration reference ID. It is referred to as HRSystemID, which is a unique identifier from the HR System. It is used to associate a record in FWM with the corresponding record in the HR System.
-
The status of the integration log.
-
Indicates whether or not Anthology Finance & HCM is integrated with Faculty Workload Management.
-
The program group that the student is interested in. Program groups classify program versions that have some common characteristic and are configured by your institution. The interest determines that program related documents and required tests that are added to the student profile.
-
The amount of the payment that was interest.
-
The amount of the payment that was interest.
-
The amount of interest incurred on the charge.
-
The calculated amount of interest based on the criteria specified.
-
Balance of interest that remains to be paid.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to show payment plans’ interest balance on the statement.
-
Indicates whether the interest is charged based on: - Student Account Balance - Payment Plans Principal Balance
-
Indicates whether the interest was calculated based on: Payment Plans Principal Balance or Student Account Balance.
-
Indicates the basis of the interest charges. The options are: Payment Plans Principal Balance and Student Account Balance.
-
Indicates whether the interest is charged from: - Principal balance of payment plans - Account Balance Additional fields may be displayed based on the type of method you select.
-
If you selected Cash or Other Outside Resources in the Type list, select the method you want Anthology Student to use to recalculate the interest at the time that the payment is made. If you are using the Generate Interest Charges feature in Student Accounts to calculate and post interest charges to the student ledgers, select Use Processes Menu Generate Interest Charges. Otherwise, select Post Interest Charges for Payments.
-
Enter a date until which the student will make interest payments only. It must be after the value for First Payment Date. If you want to change the date and payments have already been received, it must be after the date of the last payment. If you want to change the date and payments have already been received, it must be after the date of the last payment.
-
The interest rate. For example, for an interest rate of 3%, specify 3.00. The value must be less than 100.
-
The interest rate specified for the batch.
-
If there is an interest rebate, the amount.
-
Displays the interest rebate percentage. If there are disbursements for the loan, Anthology Student uses the first disbursement date to determine the percentage. If disbursements are not associated, then it uses the start date for academic year to determine the percentage to use. The Interest Rebate % field is used to calculate net disbursement amounts and the interest rebate amount for each disbursement. Examples of how the net disbursement amounts and the interest rebate amount are documented in the Direct Loan Technical Reference.
-
The interest applicable on the transaction.
-
Indicates whether the transaction code is designated as an interest transaction code. Interest transaction codes are used by processes that generate interests to post to the student’s ledger card.
-
The program group that the student is interested in.
-
Registration process completed by staff members of the institution.
-
Indicates the date and time of the completion of the registration process within the organization (in-house), without going through any external procedures.
-
Indicates the date and time of the initiation of the registration process within the organization (in-house), without going through any external procedures.
-
The advisor assigned to the international student. This value is enabled only if the student is enrolled in a program version.
-
The advisor assigned to the international student. This value is enabled only if the student is enrolled in a program version. The international advisor dropdown list is visible only if logged in staff campus is enabled for international students.
-
Select the Intersession check box for terms categorized as child terms and linked to a parent term with the Financial Aid Usage box selected. The child term can start or end outside the parent term dates. When the Intersession option is selected, the "Intersession Start Date" and "Intersession End Date" fields are updated in the database.
-
The status of the interview for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the option for interview status for which you want to generate the report.
-
Field content that does not match the requirements for the record field
-
Invalid Dependency Model: Invalid value for Dependency Model found on Award Year header record (FaStudentPell). This will cause the student to be excluded from the FISAP report.
-
Reports students who met all criteria to be reported for Gainful Employment but do not have a valid SSN.
-
When selected, specifies that there is an error in the phone number for the student.
-
When selected, specifies that there is one more error in the address for the student (such as the address is incomplete or mail has been returned).
-
This column will be blank for all students who have an SSN on file AND have the 'Solicited TIN' flag selected in the Student Review Batch form. A ‘Yes’ in this column indicates that the student does not have an SSN on file AND does not have the 'Solicited TIN' flag selected. If you select and lock a batch that has records with ‘Yes’ in this column, a warning message is displayed (see TIN Warning) to remind you that the IRS requires a valid TIN for each student who is reported. To avoid including student records with “Invalid TIN/No TIN Solicited” in the batch and to avoid the IRS fine, use the “Select All TIN Solicited” option in the grid toolbar while managing batches.
-
Multiple record irregularities were found. For details, check the tooltip.
-
Invalid Transaction ID: This will cause the student to be excluded from the FISAP reports. One or more of the following is the case: - The Award Year header record does not reference an ISIR transaction ID. - The ISIR that is does reference is invalid (no valid EFC). - No ISIR exists for the Transaction ID. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Name of the person designated as Invigilator by your institution.
-
If there was an invoice, the date of the invoice.
-
If there was an invoice, the number on the invoice.
-
The invoice number consists of the following components: If the agency branch’s Invoice Type = “Individual”, then Agency Invoice number is consist of: Agency branch’s Last Invoice Number + “-“ + 1 + SyStudentID (database value, not visible in the application). If the agency branch’s Invoice Type = “Masterl”, then Agency Invoice number is consist of: Agency branch’s Last Invoice Number + “-“ + 1 + AmAgencyBranchID (database value, not visible in the application).
-
Indicates whether you want to create a new invoice or print an existing invoice.
-
Indicates whether the invoice will one of the following types: Individual, Master, or both.
-
The values are Individual or Master. Select Individual if you want an invoice for each student with their amount. Select Master if you want all students on the same invoice for the agency branch with the total amount for all students (similar to printing a master check).
-
The state included in the permanent address submitted by the student at the time of application.
-
Current system status of the selected Institutional Refund. These are: Approved, Exception, No Longer Needed, Not Required, Rejected, Review.
-
The member/group the Institutional Refund calculation record is currently assigned to (Staff Member, Staff Group, or FA Advisor).
-
Specifies whether or not the job is active and still being run.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the course sections with this delivery method selected can be automatically added when the course reaches its capacity. Your institution must have configured that course sections are automatically added when you set up Academic Records for the campuses.
-
Indicates that the course is offered at multiple campuses.
-
Indicates the account is the default bank account for the vendor. If you selected the option for another bank account in the list, the default will be changed to the account where the option was currently selected.
-
Specifies if the transaction is deposited.
-
When selected, indicates deposits should be direct deposits.
-
When selected, specifies that this course status change reason can be selected when the student drops a course.
-
When selected, specifies that this course status change reason can be selected when a course is deleted for a student.
-
When selected, specifies that this course status change reason can be selected when a student is unregistered for a course.
-
Indicates whether or not you have approved to post.
-
Indicates whether you want the assignment type designated as an overload. By default, the field value is No and the Linked Overload Assignment Type field is enabled. If the field is set to Yes, it disables the Linked Overload Assignment Type field. In edit mode, the Is Overload field is disabled if it is linked to any Onload Assignment.
-
Indicates whether this is a replacement file for a previously submitted 1098-T batch.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the refund policy for courses with this delivery method are determined by the state where the student is a resident rather than the state where the course is offered. When No is selected, it specifies that the refund policy for courses with this delivery method are determined by the state where the course is offered.
-
Indicates whether or not the GPA is system-defined. Yes indicates it is defined by Anthology Student. No indicates it was configured by your institution.
-
Indicates whether this is a test file for an unlocked batch. When a test file is created, the following message is displayed: "The following file was created: <filename>. Please note: this file has been designated as a test file. If it is uploaded to the IRS FIRE system, it will be treated as a test file and will not qualify as the final submission."
-
Specifies if the transaction is voided.
-
Select the check box if your institution is ineligible for COD grants. If an institution is ineligible, the only additional piece of information the school must report is the payment period begin date.
-
The book identifier number.
-
EFC from the current ISIR. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Select an admissions representative to be assigned to prospects entered from imported ISIRs. If ISIR - Create Prospect from ISIR is set to Yes, this admissions representative is entered in the new Student Profile.
-
If you select Yes, Anthology Student creates a new prospect/student profile for any ISIR imported by Anthology Student that does not match an existing student record.
-
Select a prospect campus to be assigned to prospects entered from imported ISIRs. If ISIR - Create Prospect from ISIR is set to Yes, this prospect campus is entered in the new Student Profile.
-
Select a prospect source to be assigned to prospects entered from imported ISIRs. If ISIR - Create Prospect from ISIR is set to Yes, this prospect source is entered in the new Student Profile.
-
Value entered by the student on the FAFSA.
-
The ISIR ID consists of the student’s Social Security Number, the student's initials, and a 2-digit transaction ID. The transaction ID is incremented every time an ISIR correction is made.
-
Specify the school code for which ISIR was matched to a student record in the system.
-
If a student has more than one ISIR on file for the designated award year, select the ISIR ID that the Pell grant will be paid on. This field is read-only if either the Pell origination status for the student is equal to Accepted or Batched to Send or a Pell grant is packaged for the designated award year and at least one disbursement record in the schedule is paid or ready to be paid. Anthology Student displays the transaction ID for each record in the ISIR table for the student. The default value in the ISIR ID being paid field is the contents of the student Pell transaction ID. If you select a different ISIR ID to pay, several columns in the student Pell table are updated.
-
Select the criterion to specify that documents are scheduled when one or more of the comment codes are on the ISIR imported for the student for the award year.
-
For a prospective student, inquiry, applicant, or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when one or more of the comment codes on the ISIR imported for their award year is one of the values you select in the Value list.
-
If a student has more than one ISIR on file for the designated award year, select the ISIR ID. The first time you access the page for a student with more than one ISIR, the default is the ISIR with the lowest transaction ID. If you select a more recent ISIR with a higher transaction ID and save your changes, the information for that ISIR is displayed the next time you access the page.
-
Indicates that the packaging status applies to students who only have student payment plans and other cash awards and an ISIR is not required for those awards.
-
Select the check box to specify that a valid ISIR must be on file for the student for a disbursement to meet the criteria. Anthology Student checks the ISIR received date to determine if a valid ISIR was received. The date is displayed on the Awards tab (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile > Awards tab.) The ISIR must also not have Reject Codes on it to be considered valid. Reject codes are displayed on the ISIRs Received page (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the ISIRs Received tile > select an Award Year > select an ISIR ID > select Corrections.)
-
The Date ISIR Received field indicates the date the ISIR was imported into the school’s EDExpress software.
-
Select the check box to specify that a valid ISIR must be on file for the student for a financial aid package to meet the requirements. Anthology Student checks the ISIR received date to determine if a valid ISIR was received. The date is displayed on the Awards tab (Students Profile > Financial Aid > Awarding > Awards tab.) The award year for a Pell Grant must also match the award year for the package. The ISIR must also not have Reject Codes on it to be considered valid. Reject codes are displayed on the ISIRs Received page (Student Profile > Financial Aid > ISIRs Received > select an Award Year > select an ISIR ID > select Corrections.)
-
The Student Aid Index (SAI) value retrieved from the ISIR. This is a numeric field value than can be negative or positive to handle all characters of the ISIR Tech Ref. Automated Awarding Fund Source Rules update the Automated Zero EFC/SAI, Institutional EFC/SAI, Packaged EFC/SAI, Pell Paid EFC/SAI, and Primary EFC/SAI fields to ISIR SAI (Student Aid Index).
-
For a prospective student, inquiry, applicant, or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the ISIR Verification Group on the ISIR imported for their award year is one of the values you select in the Value list. The Verification Groups are populated on ISIRs with an award year of 2013-14 and greater. The Value list contains names and codes appropriate for the award year you selected in the Award Year list.
-
Indicate the Iss Date. This allows students to defer their admission to a later date, rather than starting their program at the originally scheduled time.
-
The type of issue for the degree certificate. The options are First Time (FT), Reissue (RI), and Reprint (RP). For Reissue and Reprint, Anthology Student checks to make sure the degree certificate was generated before it add the student to the list.
-
The date the certificate was issued.
-
Name of the organization that issued the certificate.
-
The nine-character identifier issued to the student by the IRS.
-
The title of the job. If you are selecting a job in a list, it contains the job titles configured for the employer that you selected.
-
The title of the job. If you are selecting a job in a list, it contains the job titles configured for the employer that you selected. If the job dates have been modified, Anthology Student displays an indicator to process it again.
-
The name of the job. The list displays all the currently active and future active jobs, your institution configured. A job is a collection of tasks and responsibilities that a faculty member is supposed to perform. For example, Professor and Associate Professor. A position is an individual instance of a job. A job can have multiple positions. Employees are assigned to positions. A position can hold only one employee in a given time period, but an employee can be assigned to multiple jobs.
-
The name of the job. They are configured by your institution. The list displays all the jobs your institution configured that are still effective for the current date. A job is a collection of tasks and responsibilities that a faculty member is supposed to perform. For example, Professor and Associate Professor. A position is an individual instance of a job. A job can have multiple positions. Employees are assigned to positions. A position can hold only one employee in a given period of time, but an employee can be assigned to multiple jobs.
-
The title of the job. The drop-down list displays only active jobs. If you are selecting a job in a list, it contains the job titles configured for the employer that you selected.
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select a job when adding or editing the task.
-
Specify any comments related to job benefits in this area.
-
Indicates the category to which the job belongs.
-
The category of job.
-
Select a job category. They are configured by your institution.
-
The date and time when the job was added to the background job queue.
-
The date when the job was created.
-
The Date and Time that the job was created.
-
The date the batch was created.
-
The Date and Time that the job was added to the background job queue.
-
The date the batch was created.
-
The job description is a written narrative that describes the general tasks or other related duties and responsibilities of a position. Example: The Human Resources Manager will lead and direct the routine functions of the Human Resources (HE) department including hiring and interviewing staff, administering pay, benefits, and leave, and enforcing company policies and practices.
-
Select a brief description of the available job.
-
Specifies how often the SQL query that generates the group is executed. The field applies only to dynamic groups. Unless you are authorized to view all job frequencies, it only displays the values that have been configured for Contact Manager for the CampusNexus Web staff group.
-
Job functions describe high-level functional categories and relate to high-level duties. The job functions are configured by your institution.
-
The number that Anthology Student automatically generates for the job.
-
Specifies a unique number assigned to this job.
-
GUID of the Regulatory batch job. This column is hidden by default. To view it, select it in the Column drop-down. (You may have to hide other columns if the grid has too many columns.)
-
Select the drop-down list to associate the location to each individual job.
-
The name or description of the batch.
-
The name or description of the batch.
-
Specify the number of openings or positions available.
-
Indicates the processing result for job. If it was successfully processed, it displays Passed or Succeeded. Otherwise, it displays the reason why it was not processed.
-
The job schedule. Select Full Time or Part Time.
-
Specifies when you want the job to run. You can select a predefined schedule or "Manually enter the cron value" to specify your schedule.
-
The name of the created sequence of job(s),
-
Select this check box if the skill is used as a job requirement for employers.
-
Indicate the job skills associated with this job title. These job skills get auto populated when configuring a job from the Job tile under Employers in Career Services.
-
Indicates only active skills for the selected campus. You can select as many skills that apply.
-
Select options to associate job skills with the employer contact.
-
Indicates only active skills for the selected campus. You can select as many skills that apply.
-
How was the student placed in the job. The job sources are configured by your institution.
-
Select the origin for the job lead.
-
The date and time when the job was pulled from the queue and started executing. The Started time for a job will be the same time or later than the started time for the batch.
-
The date that the system started to process the batch.
-
The date that the system started to process the batch.
-
The status of the job whether it was successful or displayed an error.
-
The status of the job. Enqueued indicates the job is in the queue waiting to be executed. Scheduled indicates the job is scheduled to run at a future time. Processing indicates the job is running. Succeeded indicates the job was completed with no errors. Deleted indicates the job was completed with errors.
-
Displays the status for the student, item, or job. Enqueued indicates that processing has not started. Processing indicates it is still processing. Succeeded indicates processing completed successfully. Any other value indicates processing did not complete or completed with errors.
-
Indicates the status of the job. Succeeded indicates that the batch was successfully created, but has not been processed yet. The batch to archive attendance is a scheduled job. To find out when it will be processed or request that it be processed, contact your System Administrator.
-
The status of the job. Enqueued indicates the job is in the queue waiting to be executed. Scheduled indicates the job is scheduled to run at a future time. Processing indicates the job is running. Succeeded indicates the job completed with no errors. Deleted indicates the job completed with errors.
-
The status of the job. Enqueued indicates the job is in the queue waiting to be executed. Scheduled indicates the job is scheduled to run at a future time. Processing indicates the job is running. Failed indicates an error occurred while processing job. Succeeded indicates the job completed with no errors. Deleted indicates the job completed with errors.
-
Displays the status for the student, item, or job. Enqueued indicates that processing has not started. Processing indicates it is still processing. Succeeded indicates processing completed successfully. Any other value indicates processing did not complete or completed with errors.
-
Indicates the status of the available job. The options are- Available, Pending, Filled, Cancelled, Unable to Fill, and Closed.
-
The status of the job. The options are Employed or Terminated.
-
Displays the status for the job.
-
Displays the status for the student, item, or job. Enqueued indicates that processing has not started. Processing indicates it is still processing. Succeeded indicates processing completed successfully. Any other value indicates processing did not complete or completed with errors.
-
The job title.
-
Specific title for the job.
-
The title of job. They are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the exact time and date when the job was started.
-
The Date and Time when the job was pulled from the queue and started executing. The Started time for a job will be the same time or later than the started time for the batch.
-
The type of job. Job types are configured by your institution and used to categorize jobs into categories.
-
The supported job types are Batch Process, Service, Webhook, and Workflow. For information about using these options, contact your Professional Services Representative.
-
Select the job type. Job types are configured by your institution. Job types group similar jobs into categories. You can then use them for reporting and filtering. Job types can be full-time, part-time, hourly, and salary.
-
The type of the job.
-
Indicates the job type for the policy. They are configured by your institution. Job types group similar jobs into categories. You can then use them for reporting and filtering. Job types can be full-time, part-time, hourly, and salary.
-
The type of job. They are configured by your institution.
-
The name of the job.
-
Specifies the Job Category to which the Job Title is related. You cannot select a Job Category associated with a campus if you do not have permissions for that campus.
-
Select this field each time a student is placed in one of the openings. This field is Read-only.
-
The name you will use to identify the type of transaction when you add and review journal entries.
-
Not Set: Modifies the LDA based on the "Retain LDA on Unregistered Courses" campus-level setting. This setting is applicable until overridden by a similar setting contained within a specific course reason code. No: Clears the student's attendance records for the unregistered courses. In addition, this setting resets the LDA to the last date the student was in attendance in courses other than the unregistered course. Yes: Retains the LDA for the specified course even when the attendance records are removed.
-
Select the check box if you want tiles for the recently accessed Student Profiles to be displayed in the Recent list for staff member on the Home page.
-
The key of the room/suite.
-
Specify the configuration fields to be passed to Hyland via the integration. The options are AdEnrollID, AwardYear, Campus, CampusCode, CmcDocument, CmDocStatusID, CmDocTypeID, DoctypeCode, DocumentStatus, DocumentStatusCode, Module, ProgramVersion, ProgramVersionCode, StudentFullName, SyModuleID, SyStudentID
-
The path of the label file.
-
The file path where PDF files for the labels are stored.
-
The path of the PDF files for the labels are stored.
-
The file path where PDF files for the labels are stored.
-
The last active term for the student.
-
Available last active terms with start and end dates for each term.
-
The last active date for the student.
-
The last available term for the student.
-
Select the last certified term in which the student was eligible for the veteran benefit. The term must be associated with the student via the student's scheduled classes and it must be active. The Last Certified Term could also be a current term as these certifications usually have to be done before the beginning of the term itself.
-
Specifies the last certified terms for which you want to generate the report.
-
The last date the student was evaluated at the tier before the student progressed to the next tier.
-
The last date of the adjustment. When adding an adjustment, the default is today's date. You cannot specify an earlier transaction date to be entered.
-
The date when the last day of attendance was posted. If the From and To fields consist of default value of MM/DD/YYYY, all records, including those that do not have an actual date value, will be included in the report.
-
The date the student last attended the institution.
-
The last date the SQL query that generates the list was executed.
-
The last day of attendance. In Anthology Student, audit courses are courses that do not require coursework or participation. While you can take attendance for audit courses, they do not update the last day of attendance (LDA) per the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Education. If you want a course to update the LDA for students, a course must take attendance and not be an audit course (such as a course taken, retaken, or repeated). The value is stored in the LDA column of the AdEnroll table. The system automatically populates the LDA added when staff members post final grades or when a students drops a course.
-
The date when the last day of attendance was posted.
-
The last day of attendance for the student. For hypothetical refunds, you can specify any value as the Last day Attended, including a future date. For actual refunds, this will be the student's actual last date of attendance and it cannot be changed. If you select Hypothetical for Calculation Type, you can change it to any date, including a future date. If you change it from Hypothetical to Actual, Anthology Student checks if it is equal to the drop date for the student on file. If it is not equal, Anthology Student changes it to the drop date on file.
-
Select the day to be used as the last day of the week when calculating the LDW date.
-
The last revenue earning date for the student. If you cancel the revenue, the Last Earn Date is reset. In the revenue calculation procedure, even if $0 is calculated, a revenue detail record is written. This ensures that the revenue report prints all students with deferred balances.
-
Select the last earn date.
-
The date when the revenue recognition process was run.
-
The last revenue earning date for the campus.
-
The last earned date of the adjustment.
-
The last earned date of the earnings summary record.
-
The last earned date of the revenue source.
-
The last four digits of the credit card number.
-
The last four digits of a credit card number. The card number is required only if your institution has configured online payment and enabled verification of credit cards.
-
The last four digits of the Social Security Number (SSN). You must be authorized to work with SSNs.
-
When the release to G/L process was last run to release the transactions to your general ledger.
-
Specify the last date when the general ledger was released. This field is not displayed when None is selected in the General Ledger System field.
-
The date of the last interest charge. The difference between Last Interest Date and Transaction Date must be less than or equal to 9999 days.
-
The last interest date for the student.
-
The number of the last invoice that was associated with the student.
-
Date the item was last modified.
-
Indicates the date the item was last modified.
-
The name of the staff member that last modified the item.
-
The last name of the person.
-
The last name of the student or person.
-
The last name of the student or person. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The last name of the student or person associated with the billing address.
-
The last name of the employer.
-
The payee's last name.
-
The last name of the staff member.
-
Specify single alphabetical characters to use as a search filter. Examples: To search for last names starting with "A" and "B", specify a in the From field and b in the To field. To search for last names starting with "C", specify c in the From field and c in the To field.
-
The last amount paid by the student.
-
The date when the last payment was made.
-
Date when a payment from the payment plan was last posted.
-
If your institution restricts student payments based on their graduation date, displays the last day a payment can be made.
-
If your institution restricts the last payment date to on or around their graduation date, the last date a payment can be scheduled.
-
The country that the student or person was a citizen of or held a permanent residence status before their current United States (US) visa. For J-1 visas, the Last Permanent Resident Country field is required when Transmission Status is D or R and Action is Begin New Program or Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
The last print date of the lease.
-
If the award letter was previously printed, the date it was last printed.
-
For dynamic and static groups, indicates the last date that the list of employers was refreshed using the view.
-
The date when the last Actual refund was calculated for the student. If no refund has been calculated, the field is left blank.
-
The date of the last paid refund for the student when the student has received all the refunds. For example, if a student has three scheduled refunds, and all three are paid, the latest date is used; however, if no refunds exist or if refunds are still scheduled, the field is left blank.
-
Shows the date and time when the Deleted jobs within the batch were last resubmitted for processing. Blank if a retry has never been requested.
-
Indicates the details of the last attempt made to retry batch processing.
-
Indicates when the last attempt to process the job was made.
-
Indicates the date and time when the scheduled student batch export process was last run.
-
Indicates the date and time when the schedule was last run.
-
The date the job was last run.
-
Indicates the last time when the job was executed by the background processing system.
-
Read-only field that displays the amount included in the last statement.
-
Specifies the start date of the last statement.
-
Specifies the closing date of the last statement.
-
Read-only field that displays the date of the last statement.
-
Specifies the date of the last statement.
-
The last date of a closed Task that is associated with the specific inquiry.
-
The date the inquiry record last changed.
-
The date the last transaction was recorded.
-
The date and time a try was done to process the batch job.
-
The most current batch released to the General Ledger.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for last name. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
The date and time a retry was done to process the batch job.
-
The layout of the document submitted
-
Specifies the type of test file to import.
-
The layout type for the campus.
-
The layout type of the imported file.
-
The student's last date of attendance.
-
The LDA posted by Faculty. When the faculty adds or edits the LDA when posting final grades through the Gradebook on the Faculty Portal, the system will save the LDA on the student's Course Status Change Audit for that course. Specifies the LDA audit posted by faculty in Faculty Portal. If the faculty changes the LDA posted when posting final grades through the Gradebook on the Faculty Portal, the system will update the LDA on the student's Course Status Change Audit for that course. The system will not add a new row for the updated LDA; it will update the original audit record.
-
The student's last date of attendance. The LDA column is hidden by default and gets populated based on the LDA for that course.
-
Specifies the length of time from the last date of attendance (LDA) to the time that earnings are frozen for the student and the student is placed on the exception report. Zero (0) indicates that the LDA is not to be checked. NULL also indicates that the LDA is not to be checked. One (1) indicates that the LDA must be greater than or equal to the as of date of the revenue calculation. The number of days is inclusive of the day that the revenue is run. If revenue is run on April 30, 2018, and this setting is set to 7 days, then the student would have to have an LDA of April 24, 2018 or after.
-
Specifies the number of days from the earning revenue period end date that the student must have attended (LDA) to earn revenue for the student. Zero (0) indicates that the LDA is not to be checked. NULL also indicates that the LDA is not to be checked. One (1) indicates that the LDA must be greater than or equal to the end date of the earning revenue period.
-
Enter the numeric percentage of course time allotted for withdrawals. For example, when you enter 80, an LDW date is calculated that falls after 80% of the course, in weeks, has passed and after course withdrawals are no longer allowed.
-
The last date to withdraw from the course.
-
The last date to withdraw from the course grade.
-
Indicates whether the selected letter grade is configured to be used after the LDW.
-
Indicates the date when the lead was created.
-
Select the color code required for lead category.
-
Represents the courses that the student is taking after Fall 2011 that are remedial and are to be excluded for payment. These courses are identified by being configured as Remedial at the course level. The extract process validates if the student has registered for any of these courses for the selected term and, if so, then the credits for the courses are included in the Learning Support Hours field and they are excluded from the Paid Hours field for the selected term. The Learning Support Hours credit hours are then included in the Enrolled Hours field, that contains the total attempted hours for the selected term.
-
The amount in dollars for housing lease.
-
The date range of the lease.
-
The date when the housing lease was completed for the student.
-
The last lease date that the item is effective or can be used.
-
Select an option for lease signed for which you want to generate the report.
-
The start date of the student’s lease for which you want to generate the report.
-
The date the lease of that the item is effective or can be used.
-
The date when the housing lease started for the student.
-
The status of the housing lease can be Current, Expired, Lease Broken, or Pending.
-
Select a customized lease to associate with your campus. Only one customized lease can be associated with a campus at a time. By default this option is blank.
-
The balance in the student ledger.
-
Select the check box if you want ledger card activity to be printed. When you select this check box, the Subsidiary Ledger field becomes editable.
-
The range of dates where the payment occurred.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include ledger card activity.
-
The state where the student or person resides.
-
The name of the lender. Lenders are configured by your institution.
-
The lender of the financial aid awards in the batch.
-
Select the name of the lender. Lenders are configured by your institution.
-
The fee charged by the lender for the individual disbursement. Anthology Student calculated the value for the disbursement and the field is read-only.
-
The lender name for the fund source or investment.
-
Unique number that identifies the servicer or lender.
-
Indicates all active Lender/Servicer/Guarantor records.
-
The duration of the class meeting. This value is displayed automatically and is a read-only field.
-
The duration of the class meeting.
-
Specifies the length of the field you can customize.
-
Specify the maximum length of the value in the extended property. The data length of the string data type is limited to 256 characters. This field is enabled only when you have selected String or Numeric option in the Type field. It includes the number of decimal places you specify for Decimal. For example, if you want the maximum to 999.99, specify 5 for Length and 2 for Decimal.
-
Indicates the position of the field. This column is visible only when the File Type is set to Fixed Length in the General Export File Definition. This is required field. Length must be greater than zero.
-
If you selected Character or Numeric, specify the maximum length of the value in the field. For Character, the maximum is 4,000. For numeric, the maximum is 8. It includes the number of decimal places you specify for Decimal. For example if you want the maximum to 999.99, specify 5 for Length and 2 for Decimal.
-
The minimum number of credits required for a student to be considered as less than half time.
-
The lesson name.
-
Date of publishing lesson grade.
-
Last date for entering internal assessment grades.
-
The number you want assigned to the group.
-
The sequence number for the lesson.
-
The number you want to assign the lesson.
-
The lesson number.
-
Indicates the method of retaking a lesson and the method by which Anthology Student will calculate final grades for a course. The options are Average Retakes, Include All, Use Highest, Use Most Recent.
-
The lesson type configured for the lesson. Each lesson is configured with one lesson type. The lesson types are- Book Report, Lesson and Exam.
-
Specifies the type of lesson. Lesson types are configured by your institution.
-
Link that you can select to display and print the letters in Microsoft Word. If the column contains a message, review the Job Result column to find out why the letter was not created.
-
The letter grade posted for the enrollment. Each letter grade code needs to be unique.
-
The letter to assign the grade points to. For example, you can specify that and A- equates to 4 grade points in the GPA (when a standard scale may equate an A- to a 3.75).
-
The letter grade. They are configured by your institution. If your institution has also configured a grade scale for a campus and program versions that contains limits for the numeric grades, Anthology Student can convert number grades into a letter grade.
-
The new letter grade posted for the enrollment using Marks Moderation. Each letter grade code needs to be unique.
-
Text that describes the Letter Grade
-
The letter grades and their corresponding grade points applicable for the enrollment. For supplementary courses, this field lists the supplementary letter grades configured by your institution in the enrollment's grade scale.
-
Specify the path you want to use to save and retrieve letters. If you are not using the Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Cloud, specify <drive>:\<foldername>\. In most cases, the drive is Q. If you do not know your drive or folder name, contact Client Services. In those locations, Anthology Student also creates any sub folders it needs to organize the letters.
-
Select the task templates for the letters you want to print. The list contains all of the task templates configured with an Event Type of Letter that is also configured for the value you selected in the Type list. For example, if you selected Student/Organization, it contains task templates configured with Required selected for Student or Organization.
-
Specifies the order in which you want the packaging statuses promoted. A level can be 0 or greater. For example, 0 is promoted to 1 and 1 is promoted to 2. If you specify the same level for more than one status, the first packaging status where the package meets the requirement is the status that Anthology Student sets even if there is the same level with different requirements.
-
Specifies the level in an Examination Board to be eligible to apply for Programs.
-
Specify the number of approval level. For example, Level 1 indicates 1st level of approval.
-
Specifies the amount of pay at that level. It can be a rate for the unit of measure or a single lump sum for the activity.
-
The institution is required to indicate that a program is a Liberal Arts Bachelor’s Degree Program at a Proprietary Institution. Select Yes, No, or N/A. If you select Yes, the system will validate that the Credential Level is 03: Bachelor’s degree.
-
Percentage of the eligibility that the student has used. This field is read-only and is updated when the COD record for the Pell grant is imported from COD. Beginning in the 2010-2011 award year, COD returns the Lifetime Eligibility Used % in the Common Record Response and the Negative Disbursement System-Generated response for Pell awards for first-time Pell recipients for the 2010-2011 award year and forward. This field is sent in multiple Pell reports from COD (Multiple Reporting Records, Reconciliation Report, and Year-to-Date file). Only the Year-to- Date file updates this field within the database. In the other files, it is just used for display. This field is saved to the database and displayed on the form.
-
The maximum or minimum limit.
-
The award limit amount. The field is editable only when ‘Award All Transaction Codes’ is set to Yes.
-
This field displays the campuses that are added to the field Campuses. You can add or remove the campus(s) for which the course is available for Class Scheduling. If the field is left blank, the system considers all the campuses added under the Campuses field to be available for Class Scheduling. If you remove the campus for any course which is already scheduled for that campus, the system will display a confirmation message to reconfirm the action.
-
Select the check box to prevent institutions from over-awarding. The system prevents the creation of a student payment plan when the COA is zero. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
The award limit percentage. The field is editable only when ‘Award All Transaction Codes’ is set to Yes.
-
Select this option if you want to assign approval permissions to a staff group. If you select this option, you must specify a staff group.
-
Select the check box if you want to provide review permission to the corresponding staff group. If you enable this option, you have to configure a Staff group.
-
Indicates the hyperlink to access your preferred workspace.
-
Displays a list of all of the scheduled disbursements for the student not associated with payments in the student ledger that also have an amount that is not more than $5.00 greater than the amount of the payment.
-
Select the list of materials that are to be gathered and sent with the letter when it is printed. When you print the letter, Anthology Student also prints the linked materials (such as other letter activities, letters, labels, and documents). If you want a document added to the task when it is selected but not printed with the letter, use the Documents list to specify those materials.
-
Indicates the linked overload assignment type. This drop-down displays only the active assignment types where the Is Overload field set to Yes for the selected campus. This field does not display the assignment types that are already linked to other assignment types.
-
The program version description of the linked SAP enrollment.
-
Previous permanent out enrollment records from the Linked SAP Enroll list that will be linked with the current enrollment.
-
The name of the program version for a linked satisfactory academic progress (SAP) enrollment. You can only link to a program version in a permanent out status.
-
The Linkedin ID of the student. You can enter a maximum of 150 characters in the field, including special characters.
-
Specifies the type of file. The options are Complete National List, State List, and Area Code List.
-
Live options indicate that you are sending real data. In Live mode adding a credit card or making a direct credit card payment will redirect you to a live hosted page to add a credit card or to make a direct credit card payment. The appropriate live URL will be used to post the payments to the provider’s server for processing when making a single credit card payment.
-
The expenses included for room and board.
-
The LMS Extract Status for the course, that is, Ready, Transmitted, Processed, and Rejected.
-
Select the LMS provider from the drop-down list.
-
Specify the LMS URL for this version.
-
Specifies the name of the Learning Management System (LMS) vendor.
-
The date when the student started the leave of absence.
-
Indicates the leave of absence (LOA) courses are included when evaluating the minimum and maximum limit.
-
The date when the student returned from the leave of absence.
-
The date when the student returns from the leave of absence.
-
The start date of the student's leave of absence.
-
The Load factor value can have two decimal places. The maximum value is 99.99.
-
Indicates the load factor applied. Based on the range defined in load factor configuration by registered student count ranges. Anthology Student displays N/A if load factor is not used in the assignment.
-
Load groups are configured by your institution. They organize load types into logical groups for reporting purposes. For example, you could have load groups that categorize the load types you are using for groups of teaching and non-teaching activities.
-
Indicates the type of load method for the course. The options are Static Load or Registered Student Count By Range. For example, if you select Registered Student Count By Range, this course will use registered student count ranges for load factors in load calculations.
-
Select the saved criteria you want to load in the selection criteria fields.
-
Indicates whether you have opted for the load tracking when you configured load type. This field is not editable.
-
Select whether or not you want the load type to be available when you configure load validation policies. If you select No, the load type is not included in load validation.
-
Load types store the load information that you can then associate with work. For example, a load type specifies a unit of measure and whether you want the work included in load and pay tracking. Your institution configures load types. Note: Faculty Workload Management displays a blank value when the policy line belongs to the Parent (FTE).
-
The type of load. Load types store the load information that you can then associate with work. For example, it specifies a unit of measure and whether or not you want the work included in load and pay tracking. Load types are configured by your institution.
-
Displays the number of load types associated with the course, class, non-teaching type, or non-teaching activity.
-
The status of load validation. Not Validated indicates it has not been validated yet. Passed indicates it meets the requirements of the policy. Failed indicates it did not meet the requirements of the policy. If Failed is displayed, you can select the link to display a dialog that lists failed policy lines along with the reason why they failed.
-
Indicates the load validation statuses. The options are Not Validated, Failed, and Passed.
-
Indicates the load validation statuses. The options are Not Validated, Failed.
-
The approved amount of the loan.
-
Date when an FDLP loan was originally disbursed or Date when an FFELP loan was originally guaranteed.
-
The date when the loan was completed for the student.
-
The ID assigned to the loan by COD.
-
The payment period sequence for the loan period.
-
Select the check box if you want SPE to change the Direct loan payment periods, borrower-based academic year (BBAY), and Direct loan disbursements when you queue the evaluation.
-
The number of days in the loan period.
-
The end date of the loan. The default is the end date of the academic year. For other loans, the date must be before the graduation date. For Direct loans, it must be before the end date of the academic year.
-
Enter the loan period end date. All loan periods falls within the specified start and end date range will be evaluated for Title IV credit balance.
-
The end date of the loan. The default is the end date of the academic year. For other loans, the date must be before the graduation date. For Direct loans, it must be before the end date of the academic year. Anthology Student gathers students who have posted Title IV charges and Direct loan disbursements for the specified loan period. Fund Source types for FFEL or Direct Loans are SUB, UNSUB, PLUS, DIRSUB, DIRUNSUB, and DIRPLUS.
-
The start date of the loan. The default is the start date of the academic year. For Direct loans, it must be after the start date for the academic year.
-
Enter the loan period start date. All loan periods that fall within the loan period start and date range will be evaluated for Title IV credit balance.
-
The start date of the loan. The default is the start date of the academic year. For Direct loans, it must be after the start date of the academic year. Anthology Student gathers students who have posted Title IV charges and Direct loan disbursements for the specified loan period. Fund Source types for FFEL or Direct loans are SUB, UNSUB, PLUS, DIRSUB, DIRUNSUB, and DIRPLUS.
-
The date when the loan started for the student.
-
The status of the borrower’s loan.
-
The type of loan. PL and GB indicates a Plus loan. SF indicates a subsidized loan. SU indicates an unsubsidized loan. CS indicates a combination of subsidized and unsubsidized loan.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the item by your institution in the user's local language. In most cases, codes must be unique.
-
The first name of the student or staff in the user's local language.
-
The full name of the student or staff in the user's local language.
-
The last name of the student or staff in the user's local language.
-
The middle name of the student or staff in the user's local langauge.
-
The descriptive name of the item in the user's local language.
-
Indicates the language that you want to set as the default language. The en-US locale is defined and active by default. It may not be deactivated but additional locales may be defined and set as the default. The default locale is loaded in the absence of a user-specific language preference.
-
The building and room that will be used for the meeting. Select the building and then select the rooms within the building.
-
The location of the agency.
-
The location of the agency.
-
The location at your campus for the building. They are configured by your institution.
-
The location of the room, building, or place where the incident took place. The options are Non-Campus Property (such as a private property), Public Property, and On Campus. If the Task Type was configured without a location, the field displays Location and it cannot be changed. If you select On Campus, Anthology Student also displays the On Campus list so that you can select the location. If the Task Type was configured to require the location, you must select a value in the On Campus list. Otherwise, it optional.
-
Specify the location path where General Ledger files that are successfully transmitted will be saved.
-
The location of the employer.
-
Select Required to specify that a location is required when a staff member adds an incident and selects this task template.
-
Indicates the location.
-
The building and room that will be used for the meeting. Select the building and then select the rooms within the building. Anthology Student displays the location selected for the building when it was configured. The building and room specified here will be included, by default, in all subsequent meeting days. If you change the location on the meeting days, the building and room fields will be displayed without any values in the Recurrence page. The specified values are retained only when the building and room is the same for all meeting days.
-
Specify the location type. The options are Local/mapped Drive or Network Location.
-
The location of the building.
-
The location of the incident happened.
-
The location of the building.
-
The location of the room, building, or place where the incident took place. If the location specified when the incident was added was public property, it displays Public Property. If Non-Campus Property (such as a private property) or On Campus was specified, then the value is the specific location or building.
-
Specify preferred job Location for the student
-
Specifies one or more locations associated with the employer.
-
Specifies the location for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select this check box to lock the order of the row. When selected, the order of the course is not changed when you select the Reset button.
-
Selecting ensures the financial aid will not be evaluated for re-awarding after the initial auto package process and will be considered locked.
-
Prior to Regulatory 14.3, the system updated the ISIR being paid on when a new ISIR was imported even if the student had been awarded aid using an ISIR previously received. In Regulatory 14.3 and later, you can choose whether the system updates the ISIR being paid on when a new ISIR is imported by selecting one of the following options: • Never (preserves existing functionality) • Once Aid is Awarded • Once Aid is Exported to COD (Batched)
-
Select Yes or No to prevent or allow the award to be altered as a result of packaging or repackaging.
-
Select Schedule Lock to prevent course registration, unregistration, drop, and so on. Unit Type, Limit, Include Drop Courses, and Include LOA Courses are disabled for Schedule Lock. Select Maximum Limit Lock or Minimum Limit Lock to specify a maximum or minimum required to register. This is used with the unit you specify and the limit. For example, you can specify a minimum lock of 6 credit hours.
-
If you have permission to lock/unlock 1098-T batches, select or clear the check box in the Locked column. In a locked batch, you can review the transaction details, but cannot save any changes. In an unlocked batch, you can update the transactions that were previously selected using the Cleanup Tool.
-
Specifies the last and then first name of the staff member that locked the task.
-
If you selected Staff in the Select Task By list, specifies the names of the staff members who locked the task.
-
The first and last name of the staff member who is working with the refund. There are several places to access refunds and stipends in Anthology Student. Multiple staff members might try to change one record at the same time. To prevent conflicts, Anthology Student locks the record being updated and displays a message to other staff members who try to access it. The lock is released when the other staff member closes their form. In some cases, you might need to contact a system administrator to clear a locked refund or stipend record.
-
A graphic mark, emblem, or symbol used to aid and promote public recognition of an institution.
-
Select Yes if you want the staff member to be prompted to log off and log back in after they change their password. Otherwise, select No.
-
Specify the low end of the range of units (credits, hours, or courses).
-
Indicates the lower value of the range for post date.
-
The low end of the credit hour range you wish to select for your term allocation.
-
Specifies the low number of credit hours in the range for the tier. For example, if the range for the tier is 0-29.999, then the value is 0.
-
The minimum number of credits required for the level.
-
The begin date of a date range.
-
The lowest value in a Grade range.
-
The lower limit of the grade scale.
-
The amount of the award for the loan period, including bank fees.
-
The amount of the award for the loan period without bank fees.
-
The Less Than Half Time Pell Cost of Attendance (LTHT Pell COA) field is displayed on the Awards tab when editing Pell Grants for all award years. This field is editable and can be locked and unlocked. The value saved in this field is tracked and displayed on the FA General tab of the FA Audit. LTHT Pell COA value is dependent on the program version where the student is enrolled. See Configuration > Financial Aid > Program Version > Pell COA tab > LTHT residencies. The system retrieves the LTHT Pell COA based on the student’s enrolled program versions from the Configuration > Financial Aid> Program Version page on the Pell COA tab and places it in the LTHT Pell COA field on the Pell Grant when the fund source is added based on the student's residency notated on the Academic Year form along with the Effective Date that goes with the Academic Year start date. If the program version is not configured with an LTHT Pell COA for that residency and effective date, the system updates the LTHT Pell COA value to match the student's academic year institutional charges.
-
If any, the maiden name of the student or person.
-
If any, the maiden name of the student or person. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
If any, the maiden name of the student or person. The character limit is 19 to 50.
-
The specific type of job the mailbox is created for.
-
The minimum balance that must be maintained in the subsidiary. The maintained balance was designed to be a credit balance, so the system automatically converts the balance entered into a negative value. For example, if the student must maintain a credit balance of $500.00 for the subsidiary then the value to be entered for the maintained balance is 500.00. The system will correctly display a credit balance (-500.00) as the maintained balance for the subsidiary.
-
You can choose to include the maintained balance on the statement. This is the minimum balance that must be maintained in the subsidiary.
-
The major for the student.
-
When Yes is selected, the group will be available to select in Portal.
-
Specifies whether a group is public or private. A public group can be accessed and used by all staff members who have view authorization. A private group can only be accessed and used by the owner and the staff members with view authorization that the owner specifies. Select Yes to make the group public and No to make the group private.
-
Specifies whether a group is public or private. A public group can be accessed and used by all staff members who have view authorization. A private group can only be accessed and used by the owner and the staff members with view authorization that the owner specifies. Select Yes to make the group public and No to make the group private.
-
The makeup hours for the student.
-
The specific manager in your organization/institution.
-
Specifies whether or not the item is mandatory.
-
Displays the number of the manifest batch in which the promissory note was sent to the COD.
-
The date when the manifest of promissory notes was sent to the COD.
-
Select the check box to specify that staff members can select this packaging status when they award financial aid for an academic year. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the Awarding tile > Academic Years tab.) Anthology Student does not evaluate or verify the criteria you specify here when you manually select a packaging status. You must manually verify that the package has met the requirements. When it is not selected, if Anthology Student automatically promotes a package to this status, it is displayed in the list on the Academic Years tab, but it cannot be selected.
-
Specify a note that describes any manual action that needs to be taken when a student is not making SAP following the evaluation.
-
Institutions can manually enter and store refund calculations for students refund calculations, so that these values can be displayed in Refund Reports, enabling institutions to report on the timeliness of refund calculations for their entire portfolio of institutions; even if these calculations were not made in Anthology Student. Select this option to manually enter refund calculations: - If there is no record in the Calculation Based On Length and Calculation Based On Percent grids, you can save the policy when editing a refund policy. - If there is a record in one or both grids, both grids are disabled. When you try to save the policy after editing it, data in both grids will be removed. If you cancel, the records in both grids continue to be displayed, and the Manual Calculation list displays as Yes. If you close the form and reopen it, the Manual Calculation list displays as No, and both grids are enabled.
-
Indicates whether the values were manually overridden.
-
Enables you to edit the Add/Drop Date even after it has been automatically calculated. If this check box is cleared, the Add/Drop Date field is disabled. This check box is displayed only if the Add/Drop Flag for the course section’s campus is set to S (Course Section Enforced).
-
Enables you to edit the Last Day to Withdraw Date. If this check box is cleared, the Last Day to Withdraw Date is not editable. By default, this check box is disabled.
-
Enables you to override the pre-populated dates. This check box is displayed only if the Add/Drop Flag for the course section's campus is set to Course Section Enforced.
-
You can edit ISIR data for the Manually Reported Data fields. Use the Verification columng to edit manually reported values.
-
If you select the check box, the pending rent charges are set for a manual review at a later date. The charges will not post directly to the student's ledger when they are billed from Housing Lease page or Post Rent Charges. If you clear the check box, the rent charges are directly posted to the student ledger.
-
The Manually Added column displays a check mark if the student record was manually added to (or undeleted from) the 1098-T batch on the Student Review tab of the Manage Batches page.
-
If selected, indicates that the student record was manually added to the 1098-T batch. If a student who was originally gathered in the batch process is removed and then re-added, the student will not be considered as "Manually Added".
-
Date when the student record was added to the 1098-T batch.
-
Specifies whether a person was manually added or removed.
-
The Manually Deleted column displays a check mark if the student record was manually deleted from the 1098-T batch on the Student Review tab of the Manage Batches page.
-
Indicates whether or not you can manually update dates of housing lease.
-
Indicates whether or not assignment was validated from Assignment Manager (Select the Processes tile > locate Faculty Workload > select Assignment Manager.)
-
The marital status of the student. The values are configured by your institution.
-
Select the marital status.
-
The Master Override list is enabled for users with the override SPE Progression configured: - Blank: System attributes are used to determine the student's progression. - Always include in progression: The student's progression is always based on the credits or hours and weeks. - Always exclude from progression: The student's progression is not based on the credits or hours and weeks.
-
Displays the type of promissory note for the selected loan from the imported acknowledgment file. The values are Electronic, Paper, or Web.
-
Select the match detail. The options are: - New Match: If you are creating a new match, enter a Name for the new match. - Existing Match: If you have previously run a match and saved it before completing the eight steps in the process, it is listed. To complete such a match, select the Existing Match option, and then choose an existing match from the list. The Campus and Application fields are automatically updated in this case. The list of saved roommate matches is displayed based on the campus selected.
-
Indicates the Enroll Status Credits field will contain the same value as the Credits field. Match Override Credits is enabled only if Allow Override is enabled. For example, if a student taking a variable credit course specifies 10 as the value in Credits, the Enroll Status Credits will be updated to reflect 10 if Max Override Credits is enabled. If you do not select Allow Override, Enroll Status Credits will display the value configured in Course Code.
-
Select the match type for the roommate. The options are Automatic or Manual. This field is enabled only when you have selected the New Match option in the Match Detail field.
-
Indicates whether the ISIR was matched to a student record in Anthology Student.
-
Indicates if the imported record matches an existing student and the associated Reporting Entity ID in the system. The system identifies students based on a combination of Social Security Number (SSN), Date of Birth, and Last Name. The Matched field displays "Yes" when the system finds a matching student record. The Matched field displays "No" when the system can't find the student, the reporting entity ID from the file doesn't match any in the system after the student is identified, or multiple student records were found with the same identifiers. Click on the "No" hyperlink for further details on why the record wasn't matched.
-
For records that were imported in a Rebuild file but could not find a match in the system, the Matched? column indicates “No”. Select the "No" link to review the reason why the record was not matched. To view details for all unmatched records, select the "View Unmatched Records" option in the grid toolbar. Records from the file that found a match are marked with “Yes”.
-
The Matching Threshold Value is required when the Matching Type is Automatic. The threshold value determines the minimum match score needed for the question to be considered a match. Specify a value between 1 and 99.
-
Indicate your matriculation degree. The options are Associate, Bachelors, Masters, and Doctorate.
-
Maximum award amount of the selected fund.
-
Maximum income share amount for prospective and enrolled undergraduate students.
-
Indicates the maximum Pell amount for the award year.
-
Choose either Award Year or Lifetime.
-
Specifies the maximum number of credits approved for the selected transfer type for the area of study. The value you specify here must be less than or equal to value specified in Area of Study Transfer Credits Max field.
-
Specifies the maximum number of credits/hours approved for the selected transfer type for the program version. The value you specify here must be less than or equal to value specified in Program Version Transfer Credits/Hours Max field.
-
Select either Cost of Attendance or Institutional Charges.
-
The maximum amount of banked load.
-
The maximum allowed amount of credit hours.
-
For the program version, specifies the percentage of the total amount of credits that is the maximum (limit) for curriculum registration. This option is only available if the Advanced Feature Flag for Curriculum Based Registration is enabled and you selected the Configure Credit load for Curriculum Registration check box.
-
Maximum Credits that a student can register in a Term.
-
For Subsidized Stafford, Unsubsidized Stafford, Direct, Direct Unsubsidized, Direct PLUS, Other need based, Other non-need based, and Perkins loans, specifies that the number of days between the end date of the loan period and the disbursement date must be less than the value you specify to meet the criteria. For other types of fund sources, Anthology Student approves the criteria. If there is no end date for the loan period, Anthology Student approves the criteria.
-
Specifies that the number of days between the start date for the term and the disbursement date must be less than the value you specify to meet the criteria. If you specify 0, the start date of the term and the disbursement date must be the same to meet the criteria. If there is no term associated with the disbursement, the criteria are met.
-
Specifies that the expected amount of the disbursement does not differ from the actual amount of the disbursement by more than an amount defined in the criteria. If the amount of zero is set on the criteria, the received disbursement amount must be exactly equal to the amount expected for the criteria to pass.
-
The maximum amount that can be earned at the level of policy units completed.
-
The maximum percentage of the enrollment completed by the student.
-
The maximum graduation date for students who enter the program version on the start date.
-
Configure the number of days from the Date of Determination that you want the refund Calculation created. The range of days is 15 to 180.
-
The maximum number of characters that the provider allows in a text message.
-
Specify the class maximum number of credits per terms that must be fulfilled before being considered for a waitlist. This number is derived by taking the maximum number of seats multiplied by the maximum number of credits for a class. For example, if you offer 3 credit classes, you would take 5 (maximum number of seats) and multiply by 3 credits to get 15 maximum number of credits per terms.
-
Specify the maximum number of seats on the waitlist or the maximum percentage of class section seats to allow for the waitlist. The system will treat the specified value as a number or as a percentage depending on your selection in the "Waitlist Max Number of Seats Type" field.
-
The highest possible score for a lesson. For lessons that follow a numeric grading format, this is the highest possible numeric score you allocate for each lesson. For lessons that follow a 'Percentage' grading format, student scores are recorded as a value over 100 percent, therefore the value in this field is set to 100 and cannot be modified. The numeric score you specify in this field is automatically rounded up to the number of decimal places limited for grades by your institution in Anthology Student. You cannot modify the score in this field if you have already posted grades for any lessons in the course.
-
The highest possible score for a test.
-
The maximum amount of paid credits.
-
If the number of hours that the student misses during the payment period exceeds the maximum value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
This field indicates whether the student is eligible for the maximum Pell Grant amount. The field is populated when an ISIR for 2024-25 and later award years is imported into the FaStudentPell table. • When the ISIR being paid on has the MaxPellFlag as Blank or Null, the Max Pell Indicator is N/A. • When the ISIR being paid on has the MaxPellFlag equal to 1, 2, or 3, the Max Pell Indicator is Yes.
-
The student's maximum subsidized loan eligibility period (in years).
-
If the number of hours that the student misses during the term exceeds the maximum value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
Specifies that the maximum amount can be awarded for the fund source when Anthology Student automatically packages the award.
-
Specify the maximum amount for each fund source. The maximum limits are defined in the packaging method setup. If this feature is selected, it supersedes the maximum limit defined in the packaging method setup.
-
Select a value for the Maximum Amount Type, for example, Lifetime or Award Year.
-
Enter a numeric value for maximum AR variance for which you want to generate the report. The default value is 999999999999.
-
The maximum attempts allowed for this course. The default number is displayed based on the course configuration.
-
A number between '0' and '999' representing the number of automatic course sections that can be created.
-
You can use this setting to define the maximum number of Answer Booklets allowed in a Bundle.
-
Maximum number of Answer Booklets allowed in a Bundle.
-
The value for maximum occupant capacity.
-
The numeric value of the maximum capacity of the room/suite.
-
The last class section date that can be included when processing charges.
-
Displays the number of automatic class sections that can be created for the class. This allows values between 0 and 999 to be entered. The value must also be less than the Waitlist Maximum Seats value.
-
The maximum number of course extensions that a student can take.
-
Specify the maximum credit hours. This field is not editable if Max Amount Type is selected as Award Year.
-
This field is displayed only if you select Allow Override During Registration. If you specify a value in the field, students cannot enter a value higher than the maximum specified value. If you do not specify a value, the maximum credit value specified in the Courses Code Setup dialog box is used.
-
For variable credit courses, specify the maximum number of credits that a student can select to receive when taking the course. If you do not specify a value, staff and students can enter any credit value during registration.
-
The maximum number of credits that can be audited per term.
-
Indicates the students can be waitlisted only until the specified maximum credits.
-
The maximum credits students are allowed to register for in a term. You can set Minimum/Maximum Credits on the child terms only, or on the parent term only, or on all of the child terms and the parent term that are published. The Minimum/Maximum Credits settings for a parent term that is published cover all terms under that parent term.
-
The maximum credits for the program version.
-
The maximum date when the item was added.
-
For distance learning, the maximum number of days the student can take to complete the course.
-
The maximum expected family contribution (EFC) amount that the student and his or her family can have to receive funds from this fund source when Anthology Student automatically packages awards. If the amount of the EFC is higher than this amount, the student is not eligible for this fund source. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The maximum number of employers that can be reassigned. Anthology Student reassigns the employers to the Career Service Advisor until the value you specify here is reached.
-
Maximum number of days for the Post Withdrawal Disbursement Date to expire.
-
Enter the maximum number of days allowed for each Leave of Absence. 0 = unlimited.
-
Indicates whether the borrower wants to borrow the maximum loan amount determined by the institution. True indicates that the borrower has requested the maximum loan amount. False indicates that the borrower has not requested the maximum loan amount.
-
The maximum number of makeup hours permitted. The Makeup Hours fields are enabled only if you enable Allow Makeup Hours for the campus.
-
Enter the number of days past the incomplete expiration deadline date that you allow your instructors or staff to override the default date.
-
Specify the maximum number of payments.
-
Specify the maximum paid credit limit. This field is not editable if Max Amount Type is selected as Award Year.
-
The most recent date that the prospective student contacted the institution.
-
Enter a numeric value for maximum RBS for which you want to generate the report. The default value is 999999999999.
-
The maximum attempts that will be allowed for a student to retake a course. This value will be enforced during registration. The value in Charge Retake Fee on Attempts must be lesser than Maximum Retake Attempts.
-
The maximum number of enrollment or starts for this program version on this start date. This number indicates the capacity of your institution to accommodate students in this program who wanted to start on this date.
-
Total or maximum seats available for the class.
-
The maximum number of students that can be assigned to the advisor. The total of the maximums on the column must be equal to the number of students shown in the header of the grid.
-
The maximum number of students and prospects that can be reassigned. Anthology Student reassigns the students and prospects to the Admissions Representative until the value you specify here is reached. For example, if you are reassigning 55 students and you selected 5 Admissions Representatives with up to 50 students each, Anthology Student assigns the first 50 to the first Admissions Representative and the last 5 to the second Admissions Representative.
-
The maximum number of tasks that can be reassigned to the staff member. The sum of the maximums for the individual staff members cannot be less than the number displayed in Tasks to Reassign.
-
Specify a maximum transaction amount.
-
Specify a maximum transaction fee for each transaction.
-
Specify the maximum Full Time Equivalency (FTE) factor value for Load Validation. This field is enabled only when you select the Use FTE in Load Validation check box.
-
Specify the maximum allowed load amount as per the policy.
-
The maximum number of retake attempts permitted.
-
Designates that the GE Program has a medical or dental internship or residency.
-
The maximum number of minutes (per meeting) allowed as a default time for this class. This value is automatically populated if you select a meeting start and end time. Specify a numeric value between 1 and 999. This number represents a 'P' (present) value when posting attendance. For example, a class meets for 50 minutes and there is a ten minute break between classes, set the meeting length to 60 minutes to give the students credit for one hour of class time.
-
Specifies the day and time the class is scheduled for.
-
Select this check box to enable the fields - Athletic Association Code and Eligibility in Years on the form.
-
Role assigned to an Examination Committee Member. Assigned role can be Evaluator, Invigilator, or Squad.
-
Role assigned to an Examination Committee Member.
-
Role assigned to a member of the examination committee. Assigned role can be Chief Invigilator, Evaluator, Primary Invigilator, Secondary Invigilator, or Squad.
-
Role assigned to an Examination Committee Member. Assigned role can be Chief Invigilator, Evaluator, Invigilator, or Squad.
-
Optional code assigned to the institution by the credit card companies.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature and you selected Non-Need Based in the Financial Eligibility field, specifies whether or not the awards for the fund source are based on merit. The default is No.
-
Notes whether the student's non-need based aid is merit based aid or not.
-
The body of the message. It includes any predefined text or fields configured by your organization for the type of task and can be edited.
-
The message that will be sent to the selected advisor after the reentry is processed.
-
If the status is Failed (F), details for the status.
-
Area that you can use to specify the body of the message or alert. You can also use the Show Drag Panel icon in the toolbar (green arrow) to display a list of fields in the Anthology Student database that can be merged into the message or alert when it is generated. For example, you can drag <campusphone> to any location in the text and the phone number for the campus will be inserted into the message or alert when it is generated. The fields that you can select depend on the value you selected for Event Type and From Advisor (if available). Merge fields are not available for the Event Types of Job Notification Alert and Waitlist Web Alert to Student. If you are specifying an SMS text message, the length of the text message depends on the SMS provider. Anthology Student displays a message if the message exceeds the maximum length for the SMS provider. Note: In release 24.3.2, as with previous versions, the Anthology Student system supports only one-way communication. This means that if a student opts out of SMS notifications by sending 'STOP', the institution is responsible for establishing its own business process to manage and facilitate the opt-in/opt-out functionality (Subscribe to SMS) for SMS. It should be noted that this SMS functionality is not intended for emergency communications. For more information on Enable SMS via Anthology Cloud feature, see the Online Help at https://help.anthology.com/CNS/24.3/WebClient/Content/SU/System/AdvancedSYS/p_ConfigureAdvancedSYS.htm?tocpath=Work%20Across%20Modules%7CSpecify%20System%20Level%20Settings%7C_____2
-
Message Classes are used for sending and receiving data to and from the COD System. The COD System returns document responses in the OP message class. The IN message class is used to submit documents to the COD System.
-
Lists the message that was processed. The message class name will be specific to the process type.
-
Select a TSM message class: Transfer Student Monitoring Error/Acknowledgment, Financial Aid History, or Transfer Student Monitoring Alert.
-
Select an option from the list of Message Class Types. The options are: Non-Program Specific, Non-Award Year Specific; Non-Program Specific, Award Year Specific; Program Specific, Non-Award Year Specific; and Program Specific, Award Year Specific.
-
Specifies if any error occurred while importing this record or any other information.
-
Indicate the title or the label of the Messages tile. By default, it is set to Messages.
-
The first letter of their middle name.
-
The estimated midpoint date for students who enter the program version. The date value is based on the start date for the program version.
-
Paid disbursements are evaluated against eligibility criteria at the mid-term date.
-
The first letter of their middle name.
-
The middle name of the student or person.
-
The middle name of the student.
-
The middle name of the student or person. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The estimated midpoint date for the program version for the listed start date.
-
When Yes is selected, specifies that the fund source is a military benefit.
-
Select 'Military TA' for Military Tuition Assistance or 'Military VA' for Military Veterans Assistance.
-
The specific branch of the military.
-
Designate a specific student group that you have identified for students in military deployment. These groups are allowed additional time to have their PWD notifications extended for responding.
-
Number of days for the military deployment notification to expire.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature, indicates whether or not the fund source is military tuition assistance (TA) provided by a third party agency.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature, indicates whether or not the fund source is a type of veterans benefit.
-
Indicates the minimum Pell amount for the award year (usually 10% of the Max Amount).
-
Minimum attendance required by the student to get eligibility to write the exam.
-
Minimum number of characters required for a password.
-
The minimum credit load allowed.
-
Minimum Credits that a student must register in a Term.
-
This criterion applies to program versions configured to use academic calendars that use credit hours that also do not have a value specified for Conversion Rate for Program Version Use Clock to Credit. It specifies the minimum number of credits completed must be greater than or equal to this value to meet the criteria. Anthology Student evaluates this criterion based on enrollment status credits. For a disbursement to pass this criterion, the sum of the enrollment status credits for all the courses that the student has must be greater than or equal to the number specified for this criterion. Credits are considered completed if the student received a letter grade that was configured to include in credits earned.
-
This criterion applies to program versions configured to use academic calendars that use credit hours that also do not have a value specified for Conversion Rate for Program Version Use Clock to Credit. It specifies that the minimum number of credits scheduled plus the number of credits attempted for the student must be greater than or equal to this value to meet the criterion. Anthology Student evaluates the criterion based on enrollment status credits. The sum of the enrollment status credits for all courses that the student has attempted, plus the enrollment status credits for courses the student is currently scheduled for, must be greater than or equal to the number specified for this criterion. Credits are considered attempted if the student receives a letter grade that was configured to be included in credits attempted.
-
The minimum cumulative grade point average (GPA) for the student must be greater than or equal to this value to meet the criteria.
-
Specifies the minimum cumulative grade point average needed for the Area of Study. The Min. Cum. GPA and Required Credits values are used to create a relationship between the degree, core courses, and grades required to attain the degree. Anthology Student checks continually to ensure that students meet their degree requirements.
-
Specifies the minimum cumulative grade point average needed for the program version. The Min. Cum. GPA and Required Credits values are used to create a relationship between the degree, core courses, and grades required to attain the degree. Anthology Student checks continually to ensure that students meet their degree requirements.
-
If the student receives a GPA for the payment period that falls below the value in this field, the student is not making satisfactory academic progress (SAP).
-
The minimum percentage of the enrollment completed by the student.
-
The minimum enrollment status a student must have to meet the criteria. The values are Less than half time, Half Time, 3/4 Time, and Full Time.
-
The minimum grade point required for the degree progress audit or student pace evaluation process.
-
The minimum grade points required for the course.
-
The minimum number of days that can be considered holiday time.
-
Indicates the minimum number of days that can be considered holiday time. This field is visible when Adjust for Holidays is set to Yes.
-
Specifies the minimum number of hours that a student must attend to meet the criteria. In most cases, you will specify either Min Hours Attended or Min Pct Attended. If you specify both, the disbursement must meet both criteria.
-
This criterion applies to program versions configured to use academic calendars that use clock hours that also do not have a value specified for Conversion Rate for Program Version Use Clock to Credit. It specifies that the minimum number of hours completed must be greater than or equal to this value to meet the criteria. Anthology Student evaluates this criterion based on enrollment status clock hours. For a disbursement to pass this criterion, the sum of the enrollment status hours for all the courses that the student has completed must be greater than or equal to the number specified for this criterion. Hours are considered completed if the student received a letter grade that was configured to be included in credits earned.
-
This criterion applies to program versions configured to use academic calendars that use hours that also do not have a value specified for Conversion Rate for Program Version Use Clock to Credit. It specifies that the minimum number of hours scheduled plus the number of hours attempted for the student must be greater than or equal to this value to meet the criterion. Anthology Student evaluates the criteria based on enrollment status hours. For a disbursement to pass this criterion, the sum of the enrollment status hours for all the courses the student has attempted, plus the enrollment status hours for courses the student is currently scheduled for, must be greater than or equal to the number specified for this criterion. Hours are considered attempted if the student receives a letter grade that was configured to be included in credits attempted.
-
Minimum lesson score required for the student to get eligibility to write the exam.
-
The minimum number of numbers required for a password.
-
The minimum numeric average for the student. It should be greater than or equal to the minimum value defined in the criteria.
-
Specifies the minimum number of hours that the student must attend in the payment period to meet the criteria.
-
The percentage of attendance achieved by the student. It should be greater than or equal to the minimum value defined in the criteria. When specified as criteria for disbursement approval, in most cases, you will specify either Min Hours Attended or Min Pct Attended. If you specify both, the disbursement must meet both criteria.
-
This field indicates whether the student is eligible for the minimum Pell Grant amount. This field is populated when an ISIR for 2024-25 and later award years is imported into the FaStudentPell table. • When the ISIR being paid on has the MinPellFlag as Blank or Null, the Min Pell Indicator is N/A. • When the ISIR being paid on has the MinPellFlag equal to 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, the Min Pell Indicator is Yes.
-
The minimum number of minutes to keep a reservation.
-
Specifies the minimum amount that can be awarded for the fund source when Anthology Student automatically packages the award.
-
Enter a numeric value for minimum AR variance for which you want to generate the report. The default value is -999999999999.
-
The earliest class section date that can be included.
-
Specify the minimum credit hours. This field is not editable if Max Amount Type is selected as Award Year.
-
This field is displayed only if you select Allow Override During Registration. If you specify a value in the field, students cannot enter a value lower than the minimum specified value. If you do not specify a value, the minimum credit value specified in the Courses Code Setup dialog box is used.
-
For variable credit courses, specify the minimum number of credits that a student can select to receive when taking the course. If you do not specify a value, staff and students can enter any credit value during registration.
-
The minimum credits students are required to register for in a term. You can set Minimum/Maximum Credits on the child terms only, or on the parent term only, or on all of the child terms and the parent term that are published. The Minimum/Maximum Credits settings for a parent term that is published cover all terms under that parent term.
-
The minimum credits for the program version.
-
The minimum credits required for the course. If you specify a decimal number, Anthology Student rounds and saves the number as a whole number. For example, if you specify 3.5, Anthology Student rounds and saves the number as 3. If you specify 3.75, Anthology Student rounds and saves the number as 4.
-
The minimum credits needed for reservation.
-
The minimum credits needed to be eligible to receive stipend in the term where the payout is scheduled.
-
The minimum date when the item was added.
-
For distance learning, the minimum number of days the student must spend in the course.
-
The minimum expected family contribution (EFC) amount that the student and his or her family must have to receive funds from this fund source when Anthology Student automatically packages awards. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The minimum grade point average (GPA) required to meet the requirement or prerequisite.
-
The minimum grade required to meet the prerequisite as configured in the grade scale.
-
Value Anthology Student uses to calculate the eligibility status for each fund source in the benchmark evaluation that is displayed on the State Report Evaluation page. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Financial Aid > select the State Report Evaluation tile.)
-
The minimum GPA required to receive an award for the fund source.
-
The minimum grade required for the course to transfer to your institution.
-
The grade point achieved after the final grade has been posted for the course.
-
The minimum grade point configured for the course on the Program Version course list.
-
The minimum grade points required for the course.
-
The minimum grade required for the course to transfer to your institution.
-
The minimum number of days that can be considered holiday time.
-
If the units for the SAP policy are clock hours, a student is not making satisfactory academic progress when the hours attended value falls below the value specified.
-
Specify the minimum number of disbursements per loan.
-
If the student has a numeric average below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
Specify the minimum payment amount.
-
If a student satisfies the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a numeric average for the payment below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
If a student satisfies the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a GPA for the payment period that falls below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
If the units for the SAP policy are Credit Hours, a student is not making satisfactory academic progress when the percentage of credits completed to credits attempted falls below the value specified. If the units for the SAP policy are Clock Hours, a student is not making satisfactory academic progress when the percentage of hours attended to hours scheduled falls below the value specified.
-
The cumulative GPA needed in the previous term to receive the stipend.
-
Enter a numeric value for minimum RBS for which you want to generate the report. The default value is -999999999999.
-
Checks if an Applicant meets the minimum requirements for admission to a Program. Options are Yes or No.
-
Set the minimum score for the required test.
-
The acceptable minimum value for the test score. The Minimum Score field is disabled if the Test is associated with a test type other than Score.
-
The minimum number of enrollments or starts required for this program version on this start date. If you do not make the specified number of enrollments, you can select a cancel date and cancel the start of the program version on this date.
-
If a student satisfies the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a numeric average for the term that is below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
If a student satisfies the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a GPA for the term below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP. Leave this value at 0 if it is not applicable. This field is disabled if Scheduled hours is selected for the Attended Hours Basis when the SAP policy is based on clock hours by attendance.
-
If the student receives a GPA for the term below the value in this field, the student is not making SAP.
-
Specify a minimum transaction amount.
-
The minimum date for a transaction to be accepted. This date is normally updated after you run the Release to General Ledger procedure. Anthology Student will accept a ledger card transaction only if the transaction date is on or after the specified minimum transaction date.
-
Specify the date before which ledger transactions will not be accepted. The system rejects transactions with dates earlier than this date. This effectively prevents the system from releasing any records to the General Ledger prior to that date.
-
Specify a minimum transaction fee for each transaction.
-
Specify the minimum Full-Time Equivalency (FTE) factor value for Load Validation. This field is enabled only when you select the Use FTE in Load Validation check box.
-
Specify the minimum allowed load amount. This field is disabled for Assignment Type with Is Overload field value as Yes. By default the minimum value is set to 0.
-
Specify the minimum allowed load amount. For example, if you are creating a policy line for overload, you can specify a minimum to make sure the activity qualifies as overload.
-
Specify the minimum allowed load amount.
-
The minor included in the student's degree.
-
Enter the number of minutes.
-
The number of minutes the student attended or was absent from the class section.
-
The number of makeup minutes needed by the student.
-
Optional fields that your institution can use to collect additional information for the program version.
-
Shows the number of required documents that are missing.
-
The ISIR should state that the student is a Dependent Undergraduate without a baccalaureate or first professional degree. A Y in this column indicates that the student will not appear in Part II Section F, Column A of the FISAP Summary report but will appear on the FISAP Detail report. Selecting the Resolve button will not resolve this issue. Read the Instructions section for details on how to correct this issue.
-
The ISIR should state that the student is an Independent Undergraduate without a baccalaureate or first professional degree. A Y in this column indicates that the student will not appear in Part II Section F, Column C of the FISAP Summary report but will appear on the FISAP Detail report. Selecting the Resolve button will not resolve this issue. Read the Instructions section for details on how to correct this issue.
-
The ISIR should state that the student is an Independent Undergraduate with a baccalaureate or first professional degree. A Y in this column indicates that the student will not appear in Part II Section F, Column D of the FISAP Summary report but will appear on the FISAP Detail report. Selecting the Resolve button will not resolve this issue. Read the Instructions section for details on how to correct this issue.
-
The mobile phone number.
-
The mobile phone number.
-
Select the mode. The options are testing and live. This field is displayed when the payment gateway provider is set to ACI.
-
Select one of the following Mode options: "Pell eligible but no Pell awarded" – Select this option to analyze students who are Pell eligible and have not been awarded Pell. "FT Pell COA limited Pell awards" – Select this option to analyze Pell awards that were limited based on the Cost of Attendance (COA). "LTHT Pell COA limited Pell Disbursements" - Select this option to retrieve any Pell Grant LTHT disbursement amount that was reduced from the Max Pell disbursement amount.
-
Select one of the following Mode options: "Pell eligible but no Pell awarded" – Select this option to analyze students who are Pell eligible and have not been awarded Pell. With this option, the Range and Amount fields are disabled. "COA limited Pell awards" – Select this option to analyze Pell awards that were limited based on the Cost of Attendance (COA). With this option, the Range and Amount fields are disabled. For a COA analysis per award year, use one of the following options: "Award Year COA close to Amount" - Select this option to analyze records where the Pell amount is close to the COA. With this option, the Range and Amount fields are enabled. "Award Year COA close to Max Pell" - Select this option to analyze records where the Max Pell value is close to the COA. With this option, the Range field is enabled. "Award Year COA close to calculated Annual Scheduled Amount" - Select this option to analyze records where the calculated Annual Scheduled Amount is close to the COA value. With this option, the Range field is enabled.
-
Indicates whether the SAP evaluation was done manually or automatically.
-
Indicates whether a student is dependent, independent, or undetermined. The field displays the status from the student's FAFSA or ISIR. If you add a Federal Direct Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students (PLUS) loan or Federal Family Education Loan (FFEL) as a fund source and the status is undetermined, Anthology Student displays a message asking you if you want to change the student to a dependent.
-
Indicates the student's Dependency Model determined by the CPS/FPS based on the ISIR data provided. Valid values are: D = Dependent; I = Independent; Z = Provisional Independent; X = Rejected Dependent; Y = Rejected Independent
-
Reason for the change in the exam lesson score. Available options are Gracing, Totaling Issue, and Others.
-
The name of the person who changed the item.
-
Indicates the User ID from which the Application API Key was modified.
-
Name of the person who modified the data.
-
The name of the staff member who adjusted the transaction.
-
The name of the user who manually created the batch or imported the records. This value will change when the batch is modified.
-
Indicates the user who entered the change.
-
The name of the person who updated the subsidiary transaction.
-
The date when the item was last changed.
-
Indicates that the fees for the new enrollment can be updated.
-
Select the option that you want for modifying fees to the new enrollment. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
The various categories that pertain to functional areas within an institution. For example, Academic Records, Financial Aid, and so on. If the list contains All, it includes all areas.
-
The name of the module. The only option is currently Bursary Central.
-
Select the Anthology Student Module that uses the document. The Modules available for selection can include: Academic Records, Admissions, Alumni, Automated Process, Book Store, Career Services, Contact Manager, Financial Aid, Housing, International, Organization Liaison, Other, Student Accounts, Student Services, and System. The Module value is used in Document Tracking (tile), Settings > Contact Manager > Document Policies, Student Profile > Contact Manager > Documents, and Processes > Contact Manager Document Assignments.
-
Indicates the various categories that pertain to functional areas such as Academic Records, Financial Aid, within an institution. If the list contains Common, it includes fields names common to different functional areas.
-
The various categories that pertain to functional areas within an institution. For example, Academic Records, Financial Aid, and so on.
-
Indicates the area for which the hold codes are configured.
-
Select the area that you want to be the default module used for filtering in the selection criteria on the Document Tracking page.
-
Indicates the area for which the workflow is configured.
-
(a.k.a Child Term Code) – Child Term code used to determine which module a student is placed or which module Freeze Date is captured during Title IV calculation.
-
Indicates the name of the module to which the advanced feature belongs.
-
The date on which NSLDS began monitoring the student.
-
The number of days for the transfer student monitoring (TSM) duration. The default is 90 days. The maximum value is 999. We recommend setting the same value as in the TSM Profile.
-
Select a Monitoring Status from the list. The options are: Alerted, Deleted, Error, FAH Only, Monitoring, Ready To Send, and Expired.
-
Specifies the month when the prospect budget data was entered.
-
Select the month for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the number for the month, e.g., 7 for July.
-
The schedule is run every month.
-
The revenue earned for the month.
-
Number of months from completion of graduation.
-
The number of months in the academic year. The default value is the value that your institution specified when they configured the value for the definition you select in the Academic Year Definition list. Anthology Student calculates the value using 4.33 weeks per month instead of 4. For example, an academic year defined with 36 weeks is 8 months instead of 9. You can change the value. If you calculated the budget and you change the value, Anthology Student will ask you if you also want to recalculate the budget.
-
For Academic Calendars (AC) 2, 3, and 4, Anthology Student provides a configuration option for Months in Academic Year (AY) on the program version. AC 1 and 6 use different configurations to define the number of terms per AY. For AC 2, 3, and 4, the Months in Academic Year field displays a link labeled “No Months in AY Configured” when the Academic Calendar to determine terms has not been configured. When you select the link, you can specify the number of months in the Summer, Fall, Winter, and Spring (quarters) or Fall, Spring, Summer (semesters/trimesters) terms.
-
The default value is the value that your institution specified when they configured the value for the definition you select in the Academic Year Definition list or if using term association, the total value of the seasonal months configured on the program version used to build the AY. When not using Term Association, Anthology Student calculates the value using 4.33 weeks per month instead of 4. For example, an academic year defined with 36 weeks is 8 months instead of 9. You can change the value. If you calculated the budget and you change the value, Anthology Student asking you if you want to also recalculate the budget.
-
The number of months in the loan period.
-
Indicates the course or document must be moved with the transfer.
-
The date when the student will move out from housing.
-
The reason for the student to move out from housing. The options are Lease Ended, Evicted, Changing Rooms, Medical Reasons and Personal Reasons.
-
Select the option that you want for moving budgets on campus transfers or enrollment transfers. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
Indicates that budget information must be moved.
-
Indicates the courses must be moved.
-
Select the option for moving current/scheduled courses to the new enrollment.
-
Indicates the Date Billed value must be moved with the transfer.
-
Select the option that you want for moving date billed to the new enrollment. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
Indicates the Expected Start Date, Graduation Date and Version Start Date will be copied in the transfer.
-
Select the option that you want for moving financial aid for campus transfers. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User. If you have selected Always or Prompt User, Pell grants are moved to the new enrollment, if the attending Pell ID of the campus to which the enrollment is being transferred is the same as the attending Pell ID of the campus from which the enrollment is being transferred. Direct loans are moved to the new enrollment, if the Direct Loan ID of the campus to which the enrollment is being transferred is the same as the Direct Loan ID of the campus from which the enrollment is being transferred. All other aids are moved to the new enrollment, if the School code of the campus to which the enrollment is being transferred is the same as the school code of the campus from which enrollment is being transferred.
-
Indicates financial aid award information will be copied in the transfer.
-
Indicates the last date of attendance must be moved with the transfer.
-
Select the option for moving the LDA to the new enrollment. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
Select this option to transfer a lease to the new enrollment when a student transfers to a new enrollment.
-
Select the option for moving the start date to the new enrollment. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
Select a value from the list of Master Promissory Note (MPN) print codes. This indicates where the promissory note is printed. The options are COD Prints and Sends to Borrower, COD Prints and Sends to School, COD Reprints and Sends to Borrower, COD Reprints and Sends to School, and School Prints On-site.
-
Select a Master Promissory Note (MPN) print option. The options are: Print prom notes at school site; COD Prints and Sends to Borrower; COD Prints and Sends to School; COD Reprints and Sends to Borrower; COD Reprints and Sends to School.
-
Displays the type of promissory note for the selected loan from the imported acknowledgment file. The values are Electronic, Paper, or Web.
-
Displays the value from the import file. A new <MPNExpirationDate> tag is included in the response block of the COD Common Record received from COD.
-
If you are adding a loan, this field is blank. If you are editing a loan and a value for FaLoan.MPNIndicator has been imported, the unique identifier for the master promissory note.
-
The identifier for the Master Promissory Note (MPN).
-
Displays the value from the loan origination acknowledgment file that was imported. The values are Y and N. When Financial Aid Automation is being used, for a disbursement to be exported for a Stafford loan (DL SUB/DL UNSUB), it must have a value of Y or N. When Financial Aid Automation is being used, for a disbursement to be exported for a Direct PLUS loan, it must have a value of Y.
-
Status of the Master Promissory Note (MPN).
-
Select the check box if you want to give the staff member permission to use the Release to General Ledger process for campus groups that consist of more than one campus. (Select the Processes tile > expand Student Accounts > select Release to General Ledger.)
-
Indicates that a student is enrolled in multiple program versions.
-
Indicates that the student has multiple enrollments. For students with multiple enrollments, you can select the enrollment to which the charge or adjustment will be posted.
-
Specify automated multiple fulfillment at the Program Version level. This field is not selected by default.
-
The Multiple Payments column identifies Title IV refund transactions made in the current tax reporting year that are associated with multiple payments, where at least one of the payments was made in a previous year.
-
The descriptive name of the item.
-
The name of the academic year.
-
The account status name.
-
The descriptive name of the item. This column displays the: • Campus name if Configure By is set to Transaction Code. • Transaction Code name if Configure By is set to Campus. • Program Version name if Configure By is set to Campus and Override Campus Amount By Program Version is selected.
-
Displays the name/code of configured Jobs
-
The name of the job.
-
The descriptive name of the batch.
-
The name or description of the batch.
-
The campus that you will associate the credit card with.
-
The cash drawer name.
-
The cash payment name.
-
Name of the fee type. Note: You can manually edit and update the name field associated to the specific fee type (up to 40 characters maximum). This applies to Current and Future budgets and all fee types except for 'Other'. This editing functionality is only available when the Advanced Feature for 'Allow Extended Budget is enabled, as well as the 'Enable Advanced Feature for Auto Packaging'.
-
Name of the fee type. Note: Eneter the name assocaited to the specific fee type (up to 40 characters maximum). This is only available when the Advanced Feature for 'Enable Advanced Feature for Auto Packaging'.
-
Name of the Committee Member.
-
The course name.
-
Indicates the name or description of the fund source or transaction code. You must select the credit source’s name to configure the apply order for that credit source. The apply order for a credit source dictates the order in which the credit of that credit source will be applied to debit transactions and the scope or basis for which the credits can be applied. The available basis include: Enrollment, Payment Period, Previous Payment Periods, Student.
-
The name for the credit card type.
-
The name of the warning or conflict.
-
The descriptive name of the document. If you are configuring a document and you want to manage the attachments using Perceptive Content, the name in Anthology Student must match the document type in Perceptive content.
-
The name of the drawdown or return source.
-
The name of the employer.
-
The name or description associated with Employment Funds.
-
Indicates the name of the fund source order.
-
The batch name specified for the job.
-
Name of the building.
-
Name of the student or person.
-
Select the name of the integrated document management (DMS) service configured under Contact Manager. This field populates names of integrated document management services for which Enable Integration is set to Yes, Uses Interface is set to No, and DMS Campuses is either the document campuses or the logged-in user campuses.
-
The description associated with the other expenses.
-
The description associated with Other Funds
-
The descriptive name of the job.
-
The descriptive name of the job or batch.
-
The Program Version name.
-
The name of the program associated with the program version.
-
The descriptive name of the job.
-
The refund policy name.
-
The name of the item in the Applies To column. For example, if the column contains Program, the name of the program.
-
The name or description of the hangfire job.
-
Name of the conditional auto awarding rule template.
-
The name or description of the schedule.
-
The name of the course or the last and then first name of the student.
-
The name or description for the proof of funds submitted by the sponsoring institution.
-
The descriptive name of the hangfire batch.
-
Name of the student.
-
The name associated with the Copy Configuration or the AY Build process.
-
The term name.
-
The term group name.
-
The descriptive name of the job or batch.
-
The descriptive name of the item. In this case it’s the description of the transaction code.
-
Specify name for the workflow.
-
First two characters of the student's Last Name
-
This is a read-only field that displays components such as date and GL company number.
-
The specific Action(s) configured for the selected Trigger.
-
If the student wants any roommate, then the name of the roommate. The values you can specify here are - Yes and No.
-
Indicate the name of the desired roommate.
-
The descriptive name of the deposit. Based on the selected deposit type, Anthology Student displays the name in this field.
-
The name of the job.
-
Enter a name for the new match. This field is enabled only when you have selected the New Match option in the Match Detail field.
-
Indicates the Net Accepted & Posted Disbursements, that is, the sum of all net disbursements and adjustments that were funded and applied within the period.
-
Indicates if a Do Not Call (DNC) Override is on file for the student. An override document stores any exceptions to the DNC list. You cannot update or modify the DNC Override option. The value is based on the student document configuration and the document status code.
-
If your institution enrolls international students, the nationality of the student. The values can be configured by your institution.
-
Number of days for the natural disaster notification to expire.
-
Designate a specific student group that you have identified for students in declared recognized natural disaster areas. These groups are allowed additional time to have their PWD notifications extended for responding.
-
The cost of attendance (COA) minus the expected family contribution (EFC). For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The remaining need minus the total aid packaged.
-
Select the analysis grid. The Standard option allows you to process Financial Aid packages using the standard Financial Aid Packaging form. The Alternate option allows you to use a user-specific Financial Aid Packaging form.
-
When the Award has an "Over Paid" status and the school has sent a downward Disbursement Amount adjustment for an amount less that the Negative Pending Disbursement Amount, the COD Import report includes the negative pending disbursement amount imported in Document Type RS for Pell and TEACH at the award level.
-
Select this check box to include negative balance when filtering summary and detail reports.
-
If the total accepted and posted Disbursement Amounts exceed the Award Amount, the COD System generates a Response that includes a Negative Pending Amount for the student and indicates the Disbursement Number.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include negative balance in balance options.
-
Net amount of the adjustment.
-
The net amount before fees are added.
-
The net amount of the disbursement. Anthology Student calculates the amount using the gross amount, bank fees, and the number of payments specified for the loan.
-
The net amount of the disbursement after any fees.
-
The net amount of the charge. Anthology Student calculates the value by subtracting the value for Adjustments from the value for Charges.
-
The amount that is displayed after deducting the tuition discount.
-
The net amount disbursed before fees are added.
-
This is the Net amount of disbursements in the academic year, not adjusted for refunds. This enables users to reconcile award disbursements with the Net funding scheduled in the RBS grid.
-
The amount of the award less bank fees.
-
The total of the Net Amounts in the Charges & Adjustments grid. The column displays N/A for the Return of Title IV calculation.
-
The net financial aid amount that is packaged for the academic year associated with the enrollment.
-
The net financial aid amount that is packaged for the academic year associated with the student’s program version.
-
The total of the need-based aid that was packaged plus cash and other amounts packaged.
-
The Net Funding Scheduled is Net Need Based Aid Packaged plus Cash/Other Packaged. This amount will not include interest from cash plans.
-
The value in the Total Paid column minus the value in the Send Back/Stipend column.
-
Indicates the difference between Cash Receipts (drawdowns) and total Refunds of Cash returned within the period.
-
Select the color code required for never attended category.
-
Field value if different than the value received on the roster.
-
Specifies the new academic status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution.
-
The task assigned to the new Admissions Representative for the student.
-
Indicates the new amount applied to or new amount applied by other transaction.
-
Indicates the updated billing method.
-
Select the bursary status you want the status changed to.
-
The new career service advisor for the student.
-
The catalog that will be assigned to the selected students.
-
The new catalog that the student was assigned to.
-
The new code after it was changed.
-
The course name that you set.
-
The new course status set by the user.
-
The default program version placement status. This field is auto generated based on the selection criteria.
-
The revised disbursement amount.
-
Indicates updated transaction due date.
-
New EFC value when the EFC is recalculated due to changes made during the verification process. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The new end date of the class extension.
-
You can use this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when student enrollment is completed.
-
You can use this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when student enrollment is completed. New Enrollment can be selected in conjunction with Student Payment or Enrollment Payment.
-
Select the new exit interview status from the drop-down list.
-
The new grade posted for the enrollment using Marks Moderation.
-
New student identifier (SSN or Student Number).
-
Select the In School status to be applied to each placement record.
-
Specifies the new incident.
-
The new parent term the child term is associated with.
-
Indicates the new Pell amount determined by the recalculation process.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the placement status specified for the student on a new placement record for the enrollment is one of the values you select in the Values list. The Value list contains the school statuses with a status category of Graduate – Placement (G) for the selected campuses.
-
The new placement status to undo a status change. For additional information about new placement status, see background for status change.
-
The new placement status of the student. The values mentioned depend on either the program or current student status.
-
Indicates the enrollment must be transferred or reentered into a new program version. A new enrollment record will be created after the transfer or reentry is completed.
-
The new program version to be associated with the document.
-
The new program version placement status.
-
Displays the monetary value of the new room. This field is read-only.
-
The SAP status saved to the Term Summary.
-
If the status was changed for a SAP evaluation, the new SAP status.
-
Indicates the new scheduled Pell amount determined by the recalculation process.
-
The school status that must be applied to all filtered applications.
-
The class section that you are copying the class schedule to.
-
The selection status that must be applied to all filtered applications.
-
The updated status after the status change.
-
The updated academic student status after the academic student status change.
-
Indicates the status to which the student was changed.
-
The student's status after it is updated.
-
Specifies the new status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution.
-
If the position was changed, then the new term position.
-
The new units based on the revenue basis configured for the earning method for the revenue source.
-
Field value after making changes.
-
The start date of the new program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in.
-
The newer date for which the DNC records are updated. It is set to 90 days prior during processing to comply with Federal Trade Commission (FTC) rules. For example, if the Newest Date is 04/01/2018, that date is transformed into 01/01/2018. This date value is used to gather potential students who need to have their phone numbers updated. The newest date cannot be after the current date.
-
Due date of the next scheduled payment.
-
For Financial Aid G/L funds, select this option to always post funds to the student's ledger on the next payment due date.
-
The date of the earliest unpaid installment.
-
Indicates the date and time when the scheduled student batch export is expected to run.
-
Indicates the date and time when the schedule is expected to run again.
-
Indicates the time when the job will be executed next (based on the schedule).
-
The start date of the next program.
-
Indicates when the next session will start.
-
Text field for instructions about the next steps in the application process.
-
Text field for instructions about the next steps for enrolled students.
-
If the student has a substitute for their proper name, the name. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
If the student has a substitute for their proper name, the name.
-
If the student has a substitute for their proper name, the name. The character limit is 14-50.
-
The enrollment has no classes that qualify for the FISAP report. The enrollment must have a class ended or dropped after July 1st of the selected award year.
-
When selected, specifies that the class will end at the end of the term.
-
No ISIR could be found for the student’s SSN but the student received Title IV aid and should have an ISIR.
-
When you have completed the verification process and an ISIR is designated as Accurate, Anthology Student recognizes any subsequent ISIR with the same Verification Group as also being Accurate if all the verifiable data elements are exactly the same as the ISIR that has already been successfully verified. You do not need to verify the ISIR again when it has the same data that’s been verified already, and the student is not added to the ISIR Verification Hold Group again. The default for this setting is Yes/True (SyRegistry Regkey='NoVGroupReappliedHold').
-
Select this check box to use secondary criteria as the matching criteria for a test file. If selected, all the fields of Secondary Weighted Criteria are enabled.
-
The number of disbursements needed in the stipend schedule. This will be used to calculate the days between disbursements using the Period Start Date, Period End Date, and Frequency Type.
-
When a C-Code has already been resolved (i.e., the student was removed from the C-Code Hold Group), Anthology Student recognizes that the new ISIR contains an already resolved C-Code and will not add the student to the C-Code Hold Group again. Set this option to Yes/True if you want to suppress same SAR C-Codes from being reapplied to a Hold Group. The default for this setting is No/False. Create a C-Code Hold Group and apply it to the campus under System > Campuses > select the campus > Financial Aid (tile) > ISIR (tab) and select the hold group in the “C” Code Group field.
-
Indicates the time period after the Term Start Date when the Add-Drop extract process is started.
-
Indicates the period before the Term Start Date when the Pre-Pull extract process is started.
-
The number of lessons in the group. You should add the same number of lessons you specify here.
-
The number of terms in the academic year.
-
This field is available only if the “Define Varying Number of Terms per AY” Advanced Feature flag is enabled and: • There are no students in the program version with a start date before the Date Modified on the feature flag. (Otherwise, academic years would need to be rebuilt.) • The Degree assigned to the Program version in Academic Records has a degree level for a Graduate program version When the above criteria are met for the program version, the Start Date field will only show start dates that are greater than the Date Modified of the feature flag. We recommend not changing this flag on a current enrollment because every current start date would have to be reconfigured.
-
Select Yes or No to enable/disable Noel Levitz configuration on the trigger. Primary configurations for Noel Levitz are done outside this form in a separate menu.
-
The configured name for the Noel Levitz record.
-
The name of the school defined field that contains the institutional rating for Noel Levitz integration.
-
Select Include if you want to include academic years that the student does not attend in the evaluation for the maximum timeframe. Select Exclude if you want to exclude them. You must then manually specify the academic years you want to be excluded by selecting the Exclude AY from the MTF check for the academic year on their Academic Years tab (Students tile > select the student name > Financial Aid > Awarding > Academic Years tab).
-
If you selected Lender in the Type list, specify the unique 4-character identifier assigned to the lender's branch office. It must be assigned by an entity other than the Department of Education (ED).
-
When selected, displays only groups that have not exceeded their expiration date.
-
For a commingled fund source, specify what % of the fund is the non-Federal portion for that fund source. The default value is 0.00
-
Specifies whether a student is an international (non-immigrant) student. This field is disabled if your institution does not enroll international students. This field is required for Student and Exchange Visitor Information System (SEVIS) processing for the Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS).
-
Specifies whether or not a student is an international (non-immigrant) student.
-
Deposit amount that has not been reconciled.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature and you selected Grant, Other Outside Resources, or Scholarships in the Type list, selecting the check box or a Yes displayed in the column indicates that a fund source is categorized as a non-taxable fund. Funds designated as non-taxable properties shall not pay for any sales taxes upon posting against fees, books, or any other item normally taxed.
-
Select one or up to 10 values from the list of configured Non-Teaching Types.
-
Select this check box if the fund source is a non-Title IV Federal education assistance fund for 90/10 calculation purposes. You can select this option if all of the following conditions are met: 1. The fund source is not configured to be excluded from 90/10 calculations 2. The fund source Type is either Grant (other than Pell), Other Outside resources, Scholarship, Other Need Based Loans, or Other Non-Need Based Loans. 3. The “Title IV?” attribute is not selected. 4. The “Other Non Federal Resource” attribute is not selected. 5. The “Institutional” attribute is not selected.
-
If you selected No for Title IV Eligible, Anthology Student enables this list so that you can specify whether or not the non-Title IV program version still qualifies to have its revenue included in 90/10 reporting. Select Yes if the program version qualifies and you want its revenue included. Otherwise, select No.
-
Indicates non cash expense which does not involve an actual cash transaction. For example, depreciation, amortization, and depletion.
-
Funds carried by the student to enter the United States (US).
-
The amount of the packaged aid that is not need based. It includes sources such as unsubsidized loans where financial need is not a criterion for the award. It does not include fund sources configured with a code of OTHER that were also configured to be excluded from estimated financial assistance.
-
Indicates that programs configured as non-standard terms apply payment periods for Title IV loans where the academic terms are not at least 9 weeks or not substantially equal (having a difference in length of greater than 14 days). Non-standard terms in the Academic Calendar list are calculated on the number of academic year sequences using the following formula: Value Displayed for Total Credits / Value for Full Academic Year Credits.
-
If you are using the Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) feature and you selected Grant, Other Outside Resources, or Scholarships in the Type list, selecting the check box or a Yes displayed in the column indicates that a fund source is categorized as a non-taxable fund. Funds designated as non-taxable properties shall not pay for any sales taxes upon posting against fees, books, or any other item normally taxed.
-
Select the non-teaching activity type.
-
Select the non-teaching group used to define compensation plans. The groups are configured by your institution. Non-teaching groups categorize the non-teaching types.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the non-teaching type item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
A unique identifier of the non-teaching type.
-
The non-teaching type configured by your institution. Non-teaching types group your non-teaching activities and specify the default activity type along with the load type and other load attributes. Non-teaching types are the equivalent of courses.
-
You can use this field to configure Non-Standard Term enrollment ranges based on credit hours with an assigned percentage or dollar range to adjust paid or scheduled disbursements during Auto Repackaging.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be configured as None. You can also select all the options under employer contact type by checking the box beside None button.
-
The value for normal occupant capacity.
-
Select Yes/No to indicate whether to include only students who completed their programs in normal time.
-
Select this check box if the is the grade to be given to students who are not eligible for the exam. Only one grade om a grade scale can have the check boxes selected.
-
The disbursement amount that has not been reconciled.
-
If you selected Non-standard terms in the Academic Calendar list, select the check box if the program version is not SE9W. Refer to the FSA handbook for additional information about this academic calendar. If the check box is selected, Pell Grants use the terms as the payment period and Direct Loans will use the payment period or loan periods and not terms. If the check box is not selected, Pell Grants will use terms as the payment period and Direct lLoans will also use terms as the payment period.
-
Area that displays, or that you can use, to specify comments or additional information.
-
Note associated with the CIP code.
-
Area for comments or additional information. Anthology Student displays any notes you specify here on the Degree Progress Audit (DPA) above the grid listing the courses for the category.
-
If a note was added when an elective or substitution was added, displays the note.
-
Area for comments or additional information. On the Degree Progress Audit (DPA) page, Anthology Student displays the note above the grid of courses when you expand the elective pool in the Course Requirements grid. On the Degree Pathway page, Anthology Student displays the note in box at the top of the dialog it displays when you click the highlighted elective pool name in their plan.
-
The values included in Note are based on what you select in Term: - Note is set to Yes if you select a Term that matches the specified Program Version and include a value in Note - Note is set to No if you select a Term that matches the specified Program Version but do not include a value in Note - Note is set to N/A if you do not select a Term or if you select a Term that does not match the program version
-
Area you can use to specify comments or additional information. For international students, notes or comments is a required field if you select either F-1 or M-1 with Trans Status set to R or D and Action is "Other". The phone number. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether phone numbers use parentheses and hyphens).
-
Note associated with the honors and badges. This field is required if you do not specify a value in Honors and Badges.
-
Note for the refund calculation.
-
The reason why the student is an exception and the transaction was not release to the general ledger in Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
The note associated with the honors and badges. If you did not specify a note, the value N/A is displayed.
-
Note associated with the SOC code.
-
Area for comments or additional information. On the Degree Progress Audit (DPA) page, Anthology Student displays the notes in the Fulfillments Note column in the Course Requirements grid. On the Degree Pathway page, Anthology Student displays the note in the Fulfillment Note field on the dialog it displays when you click the highlighted course name in their plan.
-
Note or comment specified for the transaction adjustment.
-
Displays every change made to the exception record.
-
Indicates the note that has been added while posting the final grade and will be available on the transcript reports.
-
Enter any notes to be included on all student schedules printed for the selected campus.
-
You can use the Notes field to specify comments or additional information related to the class section. Any details specified in the Notes field will appear on the student schedule in the Portal under Class Comments. This field could be used to designate a placeholder or a special requirement outside of normal class meetings such as a weekend seminar.
-
Comments or notes entered by the staff member when updating the subsidiary transaction.
-
To print, choose Print. To review items already printed, choose Print History.
-
Select the type of notification.
-
Specify the number of hours for the waitlist notification to expire. This field is enabled only when you have selected the Automatic option on the Waitlist Notification field.
-
How the PWD notification was sent.
-
If your institution selected Yes for Allow Cancel Class Section when it configured the general settings for Academic Records and you want to automatically send a notification to instructors when a class section is cancelled, select the task template you want Anthology Student to use for the notification. The list contains tasks templates configured with an Event Type of Email to Staff.
-
If your institution selected Yes for Allow Cancel Class Section when it configured the general settings for Academic Records and you want to automatically send a notification to students when a class section is cancelled, select the task template you want Anthology Student to use for the notification. The list contains tasks templates configured with an Event Type of Email to Student or Student Alert.
-
The type of notification you wish to configure: Inadvertent Overpayment PWD, PWD, or Refund.
-
This field is required in error and is not in use. Until it is resolved, you can specify any value (such TEST or NONE).
-
Indicates the advisor who will be notified of the student's reentry.
-
Optionally, select staff members to be notified when the schedule is executed.
-
Select the staff member to be notified when Title IV grant disbursements are canceled by SPE. This field is editable when Cancel Grant Disbursements is set to Yes.
-
Indicates the staff members who are notified when the student batch export schedule is executed.
-
Whether the necessary staff member should be notified when the schedule is run.
-
You can use the NSF Pending Account when a check is returned and recorded in Anthology Student. An entry must be done in Anthology Finance & HCM to offset the NSF Pending Account to the appropriate Cash account.
-
The National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) status associated with the System Status. The status is assigned by the National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) to be used for SSCR Processing.
-
The date when the National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) Withdrawal (WDRWL) was posted.
-
The effective date, stored in SSCR and Clearinghouse records, when a student withdrew from the institution.
-
This field is read-only and is populated only when the refund is calculated for a withdrawn student. This value is used in calculating the time completed based on the NSLDS Withdrawal Date.
-
The date when the overpayment was recorded at the NSLDS.
-
When selected for a criteria field, specifies that all items, even those that have no value in the database, will be included in the report. The default is selected. You must remove the check to edit or specify a value in the corresponding field.
-
The number of scheduled disbursement days from the start of the payment period that you are packaging.
-
The days from when the status was last changed.
-
The total number of disbursements in the batch.
-
Number of exceptions in the batch.
-
The number of payment periods in the academic year. The default is the number of payment periods you specified on the Academic Years tab. The maximum is 15.
-
The ID assigned to the student by the institution.
-
Indicates the order number in the application.
-
For the option you selected in the Scheduling Options list, the number. For example, if you selected Payment Amount, specify the amount of each payment.
-
The field number.
-
The number of the students who were dropped from the class.
-
This field is updated when a placement record is associated with the job.
-
The number of students in the family that are in college.
-
Number of people in the family.
-
Specify the Number of Categories to which a Course can be applied. Once Multiple Fulfillment in Categories is selected, the Number of Categories to which a Course can be Applied becomes editable. The default value is 2. The allowed values are between 2-99.
-
The number of changes made to the job sequence.
-
The number of contacts imported or updated from the National Do Not Call Registry phone list.
-
The number of courses required as part of the program.
-
If you selected Daily in the Payment Frequency list, specify the number of days between payments. The maximum is 365.
-
Specify the number of days for the selected Program Versions. This field is editable.
-
Enter a positive value to indicate the number of days after the Start Date or Add/Drop Date of the term. Enter a negative value to indicate the number of days before the Start Date or Add/Drop Date of the term.
-
Indicates the number of days after the term start date when the payment recalculation notification is sent. The payment recalculation notification is sent when a student schedule changes and the global weekly extract process is started.
-
The configured number of days that will elapse after the term finishes before disbursements are canceled.
-
Enter the number of days during which a status may be undone. A zero in this field indicates that the undo functionality is available indefinitely. This field is enabled only when you have selected Allow Undo Status Change check box.
-
Specifies the number of days before the class ends. This field is enabled when you select the option Before Last Day Of Class in the field for Grading Begins.
-
Specify the number of days following graduation. This is a school-defined rule for the last day on which users may schedule a payment.
-
The number of calendar days or class meeting days from the course section's start date that is allowed for add/drop.
-
Enter the number of days allowed to go back when setting the effective date for any status change.
-
Configure the number of days from the student status change that you want to execute a refund calculation. The reason for the range is to allow time to complete all tasks prior to executing a calculation. This may include verification when the student has completed all calculations and other prerequisite items. Valid range is 0-30 days.
-
Specify the number of days past the course start date that a student can register in the course to determine when the waiver of the retake fees will occur. The number of days must not exceed 999 days. This field is editable when Waive if Registered after Course Start is enabled.
-
Select the unit for number of days (Add/Drop). This field is enabled only when you select Course Section Enforced option in the Add/Drop Flag field. The options are Calendar Days or Class Meeting Days.
-
Number of days past system date to include scheduled and ready to pay disbursements (Number of days)Specify the number of days out from the current date (up to 10) for which scheduled and ready-to-pay disbursements are to be reported.
-
Number of days past the academic year start date to stop awarding. Valid values are 0 - 365.
-
Specify the number of days before the start date that the disbursements are scheduled to be gathered. If any funding amounts were posted before the student's enrollment, this option allows you to include those amounts for refunds. This option is editable when you enable "Allow edit of return amounts to Title IV calculation".
-
Number of days prior to the academic year start date to begin awarding. Valid values are 0 - 365.
-
Specifies the number of days since the letter for the transcript request was requested. For example, if you want all the letters for the last week, specify 7. Anthology Student uses the Requested Date for the document in the document folders for the students to determine the documents to include.
-
Specify the number of days to be added to the student's withdrawal Date of Determination (DOD) to calculate the Title IV Funds Return due date. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Enter a value to correspond with the campuses institutional attendance withdrawal policy. This option is enabled only when you select the LDA option in the Status Date for Withdrawals field.
-
Enter the number of days after the scheduled date for posting the payment. (Only available if the 'Include Disbursement Not in Batches' check box is selected.)
-
Number of disbursements for the award.
-
Number of document with proposed updates in the batch. You have to select the batch to verify that all the documents were updated for the student.
-
You can use this setting to define the number of minutes after exam end time to close the Exam Attendance on Portal.
-
You can use this setting to define the number of minutes after exam end time to run the process to mark absent for unposted attendance.
-
The maximum length of time a task can be locked after the page used to edit the task is closed before it is automatically unlocked by Anthology Student.
-
You can use this setting to define the number of minutes before exam start time to open Barcode based Exam Attendance on Portal.
-
The maximum length of time a task can be locked by a staff member for editing before it is automatically unlocked by Anthology Student.
-
The number of monthly payments required to repay a loan offered by this lender.
-
Number of months the income share agreement applies for prospective and enrolled undergraduate students
-
Specify the number of the Master Promissory Note (MPN) to print.
-
The number of occupants in the room.
-
The number of payment periods in the academic year for non-Title IV awards and all Title IV awards besides loans. It also indicates the number of payment periods for Pell, SEOG, ACG, and SMART grants.
-
The number of pay periods that you want Anthology Student to calculate.
-
Number of prospects that you add to the list of prospect category code. You are not allowed to type a decimal number, negative number or alphanumeric value in the Number of Prospects field.
-
The number of student records that were changed. You can compare the number to the number of students you selected in the Results grid on the Process tab.
-
The number of transactions in the batch.
-
The number of records in the file.
-
Number of job records in the batch.
-
The count of refunds associated with the master check.
-
The number of requested letters for the institution that will be in the file.
-
The number of letters that will be in the file.
-
The number of required courses or credits for the rule.
-
Specifies the number of rooms as class rooms, labs, and so on.
-
Enter a number based on how many sets you want to add to the Subject Set.
-
The number of stipends to be scheduled. The total amount is divided by the number of stipends to arrive at the amount of each scheduled stipend.
-
The number of students in the batch.
-
Of the number of students selected, the number of students that were assigned documents when processing for the batch was complete.
-
Indicates the number of students in the exported batch.
-
The number of students processed in the batch. You must review the results of the batch to verify that the GPA was calculated or recalculated for the student.
-
The number of students at the campus identified with problems in the batch.
-
The total number of students in the Stipend Scheduler evaluation.
-
The number of students gathered for the STRF batch.
-
The total number of students in the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
The number of students in the batch.
-
Indicate the number of students you want to display on the tile.
-
The total number of students whose placement status/advisor is to be updated.
-
The number of tasks successfully changed by the batch (such as the number of tasks updated, deleted, or unlocked).
-
The number of terms the student plans to be enrolled.
-
The number of terms in the academic year. The default is the number configured for the program version.
-
Indicate the number of tiles that you want to have across the workspace.
-
Enter the maximum number of times a student can take a Leave of Absence (LOA) from the school in each enrollment. 0 = unlimited.
-
Display field that applies to 90/10 Report calculations. It is displayed after you save the award and only if the fund source for the award was configured to use individual institution loan calculations.
-
The total number of ZIP codes that were imported into the Anthology Student database and available to select in the lists that contain ZIP codes.
-
The number of students already on waitlist for the class section.
-
The number of students who registered for the course.
-
The results of the test taken by the student reported as a numeric value. The values must be a whole number.
-
The numeric average. It should be greater than or equal to the minimum value defined in the criteria.
-
The current numeric average of class sections graded for the specified student. If the institution does not use numeric grading, this value will be zero.
-
The numeric grade posted for the enrollment.
-
The numeric grade. If your institution has configured a grade scale for a campus and program versions that contains limits for the numeric grades, Anthology Student can convert the number grade into a letter grade.
-
The numeric grade for the enrollment. For supplementary courses, this field is displayed as "Supplementary Numeric Grade".
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to change the operating system password to match the Anthology Student password when the Anthology Student password is changed. If set to No, only the Anthology Student password will be changed. The O/S password will be case sensitive, but the Anthology Student password will remain case insensitive. For example, if you enter AbCd as a password, the O/S password will be AbCd. The Anthology Student password will be accepted with upper or lowercase as long as the characters are in the correct sequence. All case combinations of those characters are accepted as valid passwords (such as ABcD, ABCD, AbCD, aBCD).
-
The dates when the book should not be made available for assignment in future class sections.
-
The Obsolete Date after which the book list is no longer available for selection when scheduling class sections. If the start date does not fall between the book list's Effective and Obsolete dates, the book list and its associated books will not be available for selection, and in the case of default book lists, will not be automatically assigned to the class section. When you change the Obsolete Date, scheduled future class sections are affected. You can apply the changes to future class sections through the message dialog box.
-
The number of occupants.
-
Specifies the total number of students ranked.
-
The following Academic Calendar Types are available when you select Standard Term: - Quarter - Semester - Trimester
-
The Full Time Pell COA amount if the student lives off campus.
-
Cost for off campus housing and food per award year
-
For students not living on campus, indicates whether or not the amount is institutional. Yes indicates it is paid directly to the institution. They appear on the student ledger card and are counted as revenue for your institution. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The Less Than Half Time Pell COA amount if the student lives off campus.
-
For students not living on campus, the description of any other charges that are considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
For students not living on campus, the amount of the other charge that is considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
For students not living on campus, the estimated room and board expense for the student for the academic year.
-
For students not living on campus, the estimated travel expense for the student.
-
Indicates whether the institution offers distance education courses (Yes/No).
-
The date when the financial aid offer notice was printed.
-
The date when the financial aid offer was signed by the student.
-
The program that an applicant is eligible to receive a conditional offer for.
-
The phone number to the office of the staff member.
-
The official notification date when the status change to Drop is completed.
-
The official cohort default rate released by the Department of Education once per year.
-
Official School Name that Anthology Student can use on formal documents (such as transcripts). A merge field for the official school name is available for use with letter task templates.
-
Enter the offset value between 0 to 210. This column is displayed only when you select the academic year in billing method, use billing period in revenue earning period, and set incremental billing and earning to yes.
-
Enter the offset value. This column is displayed only, when you set academic year in billing method, use billing period in revenue earning period and set incremental billing and earning to yes.
-
Indicates an incremental amount or an average changing amount associated with a transaction code. Offset range is 0 to 210.
-
The amount that must be recovered when stipend disbursement is processed. If a value is entered here, an Offset Bill Code must also be added.
-
The transaction code to bill any offset amount that must be recovered when stipend disbursement is processed. This field includes all codes for which Transaction Type is configured as “Student” or “Both” in Student Finance. If a value is entered here, an Offset Amount must also be added.
-
Specify the number of days before or after the start of the term that the institution uses to perform initial registration billing. For example, specify -2 to indicate two days before the start of the term, and 2 to indicate two days after the start of the term. Specify 0 in this field to perform initial registration billing on the Term Start Date. If you do not specify any value, the initial registration billing occurs on the Add/Drop Date defined at the term level. If there is no Add/Drop Date defined at the term level, registration billing occurs at the end of the term.
-
This option is available only when the billing Frequency is Term or Course, and the billing method is configured to be automated without pending charges review. Specify the number of days before or after the start of the term that the automated background billing process uses to perform initial registration billing. For example, specify -2 to indicate two days before the start of the term, and 2 to indicate two days after the start of the term. Specify 0 in this field if you want the initial registration billing to occur on the term's start date. If you do not specify any value, the initial registration billing occurs immediately when the automated background billing process is executed.
-
Indicates whether or not the batch contains all approved disbursements and can be posted to student accounts.
-
The Ok to Post options are Yes, No, and All (default). Select whether you want to generate the report for all batches, only batches that are ready to be posted, or batches that are not ready to be posted.
-
The code in the field before it was changed.
-
The status of the course before the user changed it.
-
Old student identifier (SSN or Student Number)
-
The old parent term to which the child term was associated.
-
The status of the placement before it was changed by the user.
-
The status before it was changed.
-
Old Status displays the previous application status. New Status displays the current application status.
-
The value in the field before it was changed.
-
The oldest date for which the DNC records are updated. It must be before the date you specify for Newest Date.
-
If you selected On Campus in the Location list, select the location on campus of the incident. The list displays all the locations configured by Student Services, buildings configured by Housing, and buildings configured by Academic Records. IF the Task Type is an incident and it is configured to require a location, you must select a value in the list. Otherwise, it is optional.
-
The Full Time Pell COA amount if the student lives on campus.
-
When you select the check box to denote the campus is on campus, the location is displayed within the Report Incident form as 'On Campus'. If you clear the check box, the location is displayed within the Report Incident Non-Campus Property list.
-
Check box to indicate whether the Graduation Ceremony Venue is inside or outside the campus. Selecting the check box indicates that the venue is inside the campus.
-
For students living on campus, indicates whether or not the amount is institutional. Yes indicates it is paid directly to the institution. They appear on the student ledger card and are counted as revenue for your institution. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The Less Than Half Time Pell COA amount if the student lives on campus.
-
For students living on campus, the description of any other charges that are considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
For students living on campus, the amount of the other charge that is considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
For students living on campus, the estimated room and board expense for the student for the academic year.
-
For students living on campus, the estimated travel expense for the student.
-
Indicates the document is stored on file.
-
Indicates whether the lesson is on hold. This value is set to Y when you select the Hold button. This value is set to N when you select the Release button.
-
Indicates whether the student's records (refund, subsidiary refund, stipend) are on hold. If the student is on hold: - For the refund or subsidiary process, if the return method is Check, Master Checks, EFT, or Net, the records in the results grid are disabled, and you cannot post a refund. If the return method is ACH or Credit Card, you can edit the records and post a refund. - For the stipend process, if the return method is Check, EFT, or Net, the records in the results grid are disabled, and you cannot post a stipend. If the return method is ACH, you can edit the records and post a stipend.
-
When Yes is selected, there is a limit of one award per year. If No is selected, there is no limit.
-
Select Yes or No to enable or disable the One Award Per Year option associated with the fund sources. If you indicate that only one award for a fund source for the Award Year is allowed, the system prevents users from adding additional awards for the fund source. Validation occurs at the student level rather than the enrollment level.
-
If you select this option, the charge is applied only one time when a student is enrolled in the program version.
-
If you select this option, the charge is billed only one time when the student is billed.
-
Indicates the fees is a one-time payment.
-
Select yes to specify the prospect source to appear as an option in How did you hear of us? drop-down list in Step 1 of the applicant process in Portal.
-
Specifies whether a course contains an online component. None specifies that the course has no online component. Asynchronous specifies that the class meets at asynchronous times and that the students attend or log into the class resources at their convenience. Synchronous specifies that class meets at synchronous times and all students attend or log in at the specific times. You must select Asynchronous if you select the Auto Add New Course Section box.
-
Specify the date of expiration for online application to the job.
-
Registration process completed by students using the Student Portal.
-
Indicates the date and time of the completion of registration that is done digitally, with the help of the internet.
-
Indicates the date and time of the initiation of registration that is done digitally, with the help of the internet.
-
Select the check box to only allow the author to edit comments in the Academic Year form. Any user will be able to read the complete note when clicking it, but only the author can edit it.
-
Select this check box to configure Anthology Student to only auto-match courses that are associated. Associated courses are associated with a Program Version and Area of Study. If you select this check box, it automatically disables the check box "Prevent Auto-Matching of Courses Taken not Applied on the Degree Progress Audit".
-
Select Yes in this field to only list discrepancies between the disbursed amount and the COD accepted disbursement amount. If you select No, the report displays all records.
-
Select Yes in this field to only list discrepancies between the packaged COD award amount and the origination amount. If you select No, the report displays all records.
-
In the "Only Enrollment Status Discrepancies" field, select Yes to retrieve only students where the enrollment status on the term is different than the "Packaged to" status on the corresponding academic year. Select No to retrieve all students for the terms selected where the enrollment status for the term matches the "Packaged to" status on the corresponding academic year.
-
Select this option if you want Anthology Student to expire a lease only if a subsequent lease is billed (or it is the last lease).
-
Select to display only the tasks reassigned to you. There is no time limit on the tasks displayed. It will display a reassigned task until the tasks is closed.
-
Select this check box to select students who match all required skills, job title and job location preferences only.
-
Select this check box to select students with matching preferred job title only.
-
Select this check box to select students with matching preferred location only.
-
Select to display only the active program versions.
-
Select to display only the active programs.
-
Filters the values in the Terms list so that only terms that are configured as active are displayed in the list.
-
Filters the term list so that it only contains terms where the start date is less than or equal to the date today and the end date is greater than or equal to the date today.
-
Office of Postsecondary Education Identification (OPE ID) assigned to the institution. If the 8-digit OPEID for your institution is different from the 6-digit school code appended with the 2-digit branch code, your institution can specify the OPEID when financial aid is configured for a campus. It only needs to be configured if different. For Regulatory, the OPEID is used instead of the school code and branch code in Enrollment Reporting, COD export, Clearinghouse export files, and FISAP.
-
Indicates whether there is a batch already open for the campus. If there is an open batch, it must be posted or canceled before you can create another batch.
-
Indicate whether you want to launch the URL with a new tab when you select the Tile within the workspace. If this option is not selected, when you select the Tile within the workspace, it launches the URL within the same window.
-
Specifies the time when the building will remain open.
-
The staff member who opened the cash drawer session.
-
Indicate the names of the staff members. By default, the option is set to Include All. Select staff member(s) to view data of cash drawer sessions opened by the selected staff member(s) only.
-
The opening balance of this cash drawer. The value must be below the restricted amount configured in Configuration > Student Accounts > Cash Drawers. The opening balance is not counted toward the transaction limits.
-
Indicates whether you want to close or reopen the term.
-
The Operation Name to display in notification messages. Notifications from scheduled jobs will route to the correct UI element based on the Operation Name.
-
The operator used to evaluate the answer. You can use = with any value for Data Type. For example, you can specify an action and schedule tasks if the answer is new and a different action if the answer is existing. You can specify <> if the value you selected for Data Type is Text, Numeric, or Date. You can specify <,<=, >, and >= if the value for Data Type is Numeric or Date.
-
Indicates the operator. This field changes according to the property.
-
The operator that Anthology Student uses with the entity and value. For example, you can specify that the completed at your institution must be greater than or equal to 18. The operators will depend on the value you selected for Property.
-
The operator to be combined with the value to determine the results. If you specify Starts With, Anthology Student includes the courses with codes for the entity that start with the value you specify. If you specify Contains, Anthology Student includes the course with codes for the entity where the value you specify appears anywhere in the code. For example, if you selected Course Prefix Code for Entity and Start With for Operator and specify ART, Anthology Student all the courses with a prefix of ART.
-
Indicates that the selected prerequisite is optional for the course. This check box is selected if you clear the Required check box.
-
The minimum number of optional prerequisites required for a course. The number that you specify in the field must be less than the number of Optional items selected. For example, if you have selected two courses as Optional, specify 1 as the value in the Optional Prerequisites to be Met. This check box is enabled only if you select at least two optional prerequisites.
-
Specify whether to create a new batch or create a batch from an existing batch. If you opt to create a new batch, the Groups field appears on the selection criteria. If you opt to create from an existing batch, the External Batches field appears.
-
The course category order.
-
Indicates the order of the response in the application.
-
Indicates the order or priority of each approved transfer credit.
-
The order in which the service defined fields are listed.
-
The order that the courses are displayed during advising.
-
Indicates the order for course fulfillment for the selected program version.
-
The order in which the pools are listed during advising.
-
Indicates the order or priority of each credit source. This field is editable except for the Default for Campus credit source. The Default for Campus credit source will always have the lowest priority of 99999. Credit sources can have the same order number. Credit source Order column is only visible when Allow Credit Source Order option for the campus under settings is set to Yes for the campus.
-
In Curriculum Based Registration, Term Order field will be used to match with the Order of Course Category in Program Version for displaying the applicable Course sections. Value of this field should be unique for each Term.
-
Specifies if the results must be sorted in ascending or descending order.
-
Indicates the order of the responses in the Housing Application Question Setup form. You can use the Up, Down, Top, and Bottom buttons to change the order.
-
Indicates the order in which the school defined fields will be posted.
-
Indicates the order of the elective pool.
-
Specifies the position of the course in the pool list. If more than one course has the number, they are listed alphabetically for that number.
-
Indicates the order in which the fee will be posted to the student’s ledger card.
-
The default order in which the requirement rule is applied.
-
Indicates the order of each layout type. This field is only displayed if you have selected Layout Type and Variable Length option in File Delimiter Option field.
-
The CIP code order.
-
Indicates the placement of the courses within the selected pool.
-
Indicates the order which the transactions will be posted to the student’s ledger card.
-
Indicates the sequence order for the program fees.
-
Specifies the organization for the student that is contacted for the task (such as High School).
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select an organization when adding or editing a task.
-
The name of the contact within the institution. If you are selecting a contact in a list, it contains the contacts configured for your institution.
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select a contact when they add or edit the task.
-
Name of the student's organization liaison advisor.
-
The type of the organization. The values are defined by Anthology Student.
-
The only option is High School. If you select High School, Anthology Student only displays the task template as an option when you add tasks on the High School Tasks page. (Select the Processes tile > expand Admissions in the list > select High School Tasks.) You cannot select the task template in any other location in the product.
-
This is the original expected start date of the enrollment. The date is captured when enrolling a student or upon the completion of the application process. If the student has multiple enrollments, then this date will reflect the original expected start date for each enrollment. If the enrollment is transferred, then the value for Original Student Expected Start Date and this date will be the same.
-
This is the original student expected start date at the time of enrollment. The date is determined at the time of the student's first enrollment. This date is frozen.
-
The date when the student was originally expected to start the course.
-
The date when the origination acknowledgment was received from COD.
-
The last and then first name of the admissions representative initially assigned to the student.
-
The Estimated Family Contribution (EFC) based on the original ISIR. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The original expected graduation date at the time of enrollment. This date cannot be edited.
-
This is the original expected start date of the enrollment. The date is captured when enrolling a student or upon the completion of the application process. If the student has multiple enrollments, then this date will reflect the original expected start date for each enrollment. If the enrollment is transferred then the value for Original Student Expected Start Date and this date will be the same.
-
The total disbursement amount that was previously calculated for the selected bursary.
-
The Original SSN field on the ISIR Verification form contains the Social Security Number submitted with the FAFSA form.
-
This is the original student start date at the time of enrollment. The date is determined at the time of the student's first enrollment.
-
This is the original student expected start date at the time of enrollment. The date is determined at the time of the student's first enrollment. This date is frozen.
-
Select the check box to enable the Award Status of an award to be ignored when determining if the award's Origination Status or Application Processing Status can be updated to 'R' (Ready to Send). For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Indicates the Originating Depository Financial Institution (DFI) used to identify a site as the DFI originating the entries. This field allows up to 8 numeric digits. If it is left blank, the system uses the Immediate Origin ID.
-
The amount being sent to COD for the grant. The field is editable for cases where there is more than one grant for the same award year. If the origination status of the award is Accepted, this is the amount at COD. If you change the amount and your institution has configured Anthology Student to automatically update the origination status, the origination status is changed to Ready to Send. If your institution is not automatically updating the origination status, Anthology Student gives you the option to change the status.
-
Select the condition you want for the origination batch ID records in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the origination batch ID records between 1 and 5 only.
-
Enter the origination batch ID value.
-
When you save the grant, Anthology Student checks for an ISIR on file before writing the Origination ID. If an ISIR is on file, the ID is populated from the ISIR record.
-
When selected, specifies that the criterion for a loan is not met if the student temporarily or permanently withdraws before the loan is originated or certified.
-
Initial credit decisions for the borrower. The values are Accepted (A), Pending (P), or Denied (D).
-
The date the loan or grant was originated.
-
Specify the date range when the loan was originated. The default in the Origination Date From field is 01/01/1900. The default in the Origination Date To field is 12/31/2100.
-
The date when the origination was sent to COD.
-
The origination fee is a percentage of the loan amount charged by the lender for the processing of the loan. Federal student loans have an origination fee. The origination fee calculation occurs on the disbursement level.
-
Unique identifier created at the time of loan or grant origination.
-
This field is displayed when the Create origination changes when loan dates are updated check box is enabled. Select the origination state type. The options are Always create and Create when award is fully paid. For additional information on Origination State Type, see Background for Direct loans.
-
Origination status of the award. The values are Accepted (A), Batched to Send (B), Error/Rejected (E), Not Ready to Send or Not Ready to Send, No ISIR (N), Ready to Send (R), and Blank (not on file). This field cannot always be edited.
-
Select the origination status for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - Accepted - Batched - Error/Rejected - Not Ready - Ready to Send - Include All (default)
-
Origination status of the award.
-
Number of accepted originations.
-
Number of corrected originations.
-
Number of rejected originations.
-
The total of the amounts paid directly to the institution (such as fees and on-campus room and board).
-
The total of other educational costs that have an indirect link that are not direct costs (such as computers. books and supplies, and off-campus room and board).
-
The total of any other institutional charges for the program version.
-
Financial aid offered to specific student groups by various organizations and agencies (beyond federal, state, and institutional aid). Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Other Aid - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Select the campus from where student will also have access to the building.
-
Description of any other charges that are considered cost of attendance (COA). If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value.
-
For students living with their parents, the description of any other charges that are considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
For students living with their parents, the amount of the other charge that is considered cost of attendance (COA).
-
If the student specified another college they attended when they filled out their application using the Portal, displays the name of the college.
-
A secondary contact for the institution.
-
Other educational costs for a program per award year.
-
If the student has more than one email address, the secondary email address. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
If the student has more than one email address, the secondary email address.
-
Select this check box if you want Other Email Address to be the absolute matching criteria for test file.
-
Indicate any other expense.
-
Any other expenses that are not included in the cost of attendance.
-
Enter a value of 0 to 8. The Other Fee Priority order on the budget definition correlates to the individual student’s academic year budget line items. So, if the automated budget has fees as priority 1, 3, 5 and 7 then any student using that automated budget to calculate the cost of attendance will see the same Other Charges on lines 1, 3, 5, and 7.
-
Describe the other funds.
-
Any other proof of funds submitted by the student to the institution.
-
Other grant (not provided by the state or institution). Specify the estimated grant amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Other Grant - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the grant option does not apply to the student.
-
If the check box is selected or the column contains Yes, the fund source is applied towards institutional costs before Title IV and other cash payments in the 90/10 calculation. When the check box is selected, the 90/10 calculation does not exclude stipends from Title IV funds (Revenue). The check box is disabled if the Title IV check box is selected.
-
If the student has a phone number where they can be contacted in addition to their mobile or work phone, the phone number. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether it uses parentheses and hyphens).
-
If the student has a phone number where they can be contacted in addition to their mobile or work phone, the phone number. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether it uses parentheses and hyphens).
-
The discount amount that has already been posted for the student according to a policy other than the tuition discount policy.
-
Other Scholarship (not provided by the state or institution). Specify the estimated scholarship amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Other Scholarship - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the scholarship option does not apply to the student.
-
If you select Other Outside Resources in the Type list, you can select the check box to specify that the fund source is a scholarship or grant. Do not select the check box if want the fund source to be cash or student payment plan. When selected, the fund source is treated as a scholarship by the 1098-T Processing Utility. If you do not select the check box, the fund source is not treated as a scholarship by the 1098-T Processing Utility. If the scholarships are greater than the charges, the 1098-T Processing Utility does not allow the printing of the 1098-T statement.
-
Optionally select up to 4 states in the institution’s metropolitan statistical area (MSA) in which the program does not meet licensure requirements or prepares students to sit for a licensure examination in a particular occupation. The Edit Other States link opens a pop-up window in which you can add, select, and remove states. Specify with Yes, No, or Not Applicable whether the program prepares for licensure in the selected states.
-
For private groups, specifies the staff members who can use the group. They can also add or remove employers. The list contains the staff members for the campus. The staff member that you select must be authorized.
-
The discount amount that has already been posted for the student from other tuition discount policies other than the tuition discount policy being processed.
-
Specifies the date range of when the students were out of school. Specify the date range if you want to evaluate only students who have dropped.
-
Specify the abbreviations you will use for Credit. For example: CR
-
Specify the abbreviations you will use for Debit. For example, DB.
-
The number of hours invested in outside coursework.
-
The value of out-of-class hours. Specify the value in five-minute increments as expressed in hour decimals, for example, 10 minutes is 0.17 hours.
-
Shows the outstanding amount for the record. Displayed by default.
-
Specify the value to be used when billing by credits or hours as the units. For example, the institution charges a flat rate of $1000.00 plus $150.00 for each credit over 12 credits.
-
The overall cumulative GPA earned by the student.
-
Indicates the overall status of the assignment. The values are Draft and Finalized. For example, if your institution requires the load validated and earning lines to be exported, Finalized indicates the assignment is final.
-
The status of the student. It determines the grade that is displayed in the Final Letter Grade column. For example, if the status is Exam Absent or Not Eligible, the Final Letter Grade column will display the grade in the grade scale configured for for thos statuses.
-
Select the check box if you want the overall student balance to be printed.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include overall student balance.
-
Indicates whether there are overlapping loan periods (Yes/No)
-
The number of credits for the overlapping loan period. The field is editable if overlapping loans are configured for the campus and the student has an overlapping loan period.
-
The number of weeks for the overlapping loan period. The field is editable if overlapping loans are configured for the campus and the student has an overlapping loan period.
-
The overload amount assigned. Overload measures anything over a faculty member’s regular hours.
-
Specifies the name of the overload assignment type applied for the assignment. If it is blank, it is not applied.
-
The earning codes that uniquely identify the type of earnings that your instructors receive for overload. They are configured by your institution. For example, you could have earning codes for salaries and bonuses. You can associate an earning code with a load type when the load type is configured with Yes for Track Pay. If Allow Override for the load type is set to Yes, the earning code is editable.
-
Specifies the Overload FTE (Full-Time Equivalency) value for each existing assignment, representing any FTE allocation beyond the standard capacity, indicating overload. This value is accurately calculated based on the assignment details and policy limits.
-
Specifies the amount of pay for overload. It can be a rate for the unit of measure or a single lump sum for the activity.
-
Specifies the overload value applied. Overload measures anything over a faculty member’s regular hours.
-
If you selected Cash, Other Outside Resources, Iraq and Afghanistan Services Grant, Pell Grant, or TEACH grant in the Type list, select the method used to apply overpayments received. Apply to First applies the overpayment amount to the next scheduled payment. Apply to Last applies the overpayment amount to the last scheduled payment. If the list is enabled, it is required if you selected Other Outside Resources, Iraq and Afghanistan Services Grant, Pell Grant, or TEACH Grant in the Type list.
-
Indicates the name of the staff member who overrode the assignment. This column is hidden by default.
-
Indicates the date when the assignment was overridden. This column is hidden by default.
-
When you select this option, the flat fee can be overridden and alternate amount can be applied at the time of association with the billable service.
-
If the validation has failed, select the check box to override the failure and specify that it has passed. The check box is disabled if the policy line has passed or has a Hard validation. You can only override soft validation. Note: Faculty Workload Management does not allow you to override any Full Time Equivalency (FTE) Factor based assignments.
-
If the validation has failed, select the check box to override the failure and specify that it has passed. The check box is disabled if the policy line has passed or has a Hard validation. You can only override soft validation.
-
Authorized users can override the revenue calculation on a student-by-student basis. When you select the "Override Amounts/Dates", you can enter new values in the Monthly Earn Amount, Start Date, and End Date fields.
-
Select the option allow the ovverride of a budget check.
-
Select this check box if you want the program version amount to override the campus amount of the transaction.
-
Select this check box if you want the program version amount to override the campus amount of the transaction. This option is available only if the "Configure By" option is set to Campus.
-
If the scheduled disbursement date was overridden during the COD export process, the date specified during export. For example, if a disbursement date is a holiday, it can be changed during the export. This is only displayed if Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) is enabled and configured to exclude weekends and holidays and your institution has configured multiple disbursement rules.
-
If the scheduled disbursement date was overridden during the COD export process, the date specified during export. For example, if a disbursement date is a holiday, it can be changed during the export. This is only displayed if Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA) is enabled and configured to exclude weekends and holidays and your institution has configured multiple disbursement rules.
-
Select the check box if you want staff members to be able to makes changes to the executive summary reports.
-
If your user ID has been configured so that it allows you to override a Financial Aid hold group and approve disbursements, the list is displayed. If you select the names of the groups in the FA Hold Group list, you can approve disbursements for students in those groups. Anthology Student overrides the hold, but still evaluates the disbursement against the other disbursement approval criteria. FA Holds apply to Title IV and non-Title IV funds.
-
This field enables you to override a DISBBTCH0022 exception for Non-Title IV fund sources when a student is in a disbursement FA hold group.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to override the placed status that a student is in.
-
Select the option whether or not you want to override the placed status that a student is in.
-
Select the check box to change the maintained balance amount for any student in the student group who previously had a maintained balance. If you do not select this check box, students who already have a maintained balance in the selected subsidiary will not be affected by any changes to maintained balances.
-
Select this option to allow a transaction to be posted without a term code. This could include Registration fees and other transactions not tied to a term.
-
Indicates whether a duplicate record was overridden. The Override field is enabled only when an information icon for duplicates is displayed.
-
Iyou selected Complete File for File Formats and State List or Area Code List for List Formats, specifies whether the data is replaced or appended. If you select Yes, data is appended. If you select No or it is selected and cannot be changed, all of the data is replaced.
-
Indicate whether you want to overwrite due date for selected transactions that already have due dates populated.
-
The staff member or staff group the exception is routed to.
-
Indicates the name of the user who has created the group. Ownership can be transferred from one owner to another. Once ownership of a private group is transferred, the previous owner no longer has the right to see the group.
-
The staff member or staff group the exception is routed to.
-
The staff member who adds and owns the group.
-
Staff member designated as the course owner.
-
Indicates the pass/ fail grade.
-
Indicates whether auto packaging applies to a Single academic year or Multiple academic years.
-
Indicates whether auto packaging applies to the Current award year or Multiple award years.
-
Select the check box to allow the term or payment period that is crossing over to be packaged in the second award year using that second ISIR value. This occurs only when the student has exhausted their Pell award for award year 1 and has not been packaged for any additional funding for that term or payment period. If the check box is not selected, the standard awarding of the disbursement by the term or payment period falling within the award year that is being packaged is followed.
-
The date when the financial aid package was prepared.
-
The date when the package record was posted.
-
If you selected Scheduled Academic Year in the Academic Year list and Header or Trailer in the Uses Summer list, select Yes or No to specify whether or not financial aid is packaged for the summer term.
-
Select this check box if the initial financial aid package for this academic year has been revised.
-
The amount that has been awarded from the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
Date a student's award was packaged.
-
The expected family contribution (EFC) used for packaging. If the cost of attendance (COA) budget is not based on 9 months, this figure will be the EFC value for the number of months in the budget. If the number of months in the academic year is nine, the value is the Pell paid EFC. If the number of months in the academic year is not nine and is not zero, Anthology Student calculates the value using the number of months in the academic year. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The Packaged Enrollment Intensity defaults to 100% during initial packaging since institutions often package Pell Grants before students are registered into courses. When registration/un-registration events occur, the system recalculates the Actual Enrollment Intensity and displays it in the Term Summary. To enable this calculation, the field "Pell Enrollment Intensity - Packaged = Actual" must be selected in the Disbursement Approval Criteria policy under Configuration > Financial Aid > Disbursement Approval Criteria and the Disbursement Approval Criteria policy must be associated with the Pell fund source.
-
Select this checkbox if you only want students who have been packaged.
-
Assists institutions with the evaluation of aid that needs to be adjusted. The options are 3/4 Time, Full Time, Half Time, and Less Than Half Time. Anthology Student evaluates the term by comparing the packaged enrollment status with the current enrollment status and identifies discrepancies.
-
Date range for the packaging of the award.
-
The packaging methods used for your financial aid programs. They contain the guidelines for your programs (such as the grade levels to which they apply and the minimum and maximum amounts that can be awarded for the fund sources). The list contains the packaging methods configured for the campus, grade level, award year, and dependency model for the student. Students that are configured with the Unsupported Dependent check box enabled are packaged with Unsubsidized Stafford loans only, despite the value displayed in the Packaging Method field.
-
The packaging status. The statuses are configured by your institution.
-
The packaging status that you want assigned to the financial aid package when it is promoted to the level you specify. Once you have selected a packaging status, you cannot select it again in the same promotion process.
-
The current packaging status of the award.
-
Select the first packaging statuses for which you want to generate the report.
-
The status of the packaging for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the second packaging statuses for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the padding between fields. This column is visible only when the File Type is set to Fixed Length in General Export File Definition. You can change the padding to space when the field type is numeric.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It’s typically an external organization for master checks.
-
The person who made the payment. The list contains a list of the address types specified for the student in their Related Addresses list (Select Student tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select Related Addresses).
-
The deposit amount that has been paid.
-
Indicates the amount that has been paid as Refund.
-
Indicates the amount that has been paid as a refund or stipend.
-
Indicates the amount that has been paid as Stipend.
-
Assignment for this task: either Staff Group or a Staff Member.
-
The state where the student's parents currently live.
-
Indicates the Last Name, First Name, and Middle Name of the student's parent (if applicable).
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the parents specified for the course using the Parent Courses & Equivalents tile to the new course.
-
Select the parent activity type from the list of activity types.
-
If it is a child batch, the ID Anthology Student assigned to the parent.
-
If your institution has configured the campus to include the parental contribution on independent students and you are automatically awarding and using Student Financial Aid Awarding (SFAA), displays the calculated parental contribution.
-
When you select Yes, Anthology Student includes students in the report who have a document configured to be a document to hold an FSA credit balance (parent) in their Documents list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Documents tile.)
-
Select Yes or No in the Parent Filed Joint Return with Current Spouse field.
-
Select Yes or No in the Parent Filed non-U.S. tax return field.
-
For groups of Instructors and Admissions Representatives, select the type if you want to set up a template so that you can specify the permissions for the group. Any staff member you add to the staff group inherits the specialized permissions selected for that group.
-
Specify the interest rate for a Parent Plus Federal Loan.
-
Direct PLUS Loans for Parents are unsubsidized loans made to parents of dependent undergraduate students. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Parent PLUS Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
If this is a child position, select the parent position that you already defined on this page.
-
Indicates the Last Name, First Name, and Middle Name of the parent's spouse (if applicable).
-
Select Yes or No in the Parent Spouse Filed non-U.S. tax return field.
-
This view option is visible only if the student earns revenue on child terms. If the Parent Term view is selected, then the Earnings Summary grid will display earnings summary records for the parent terms only. The Earnings Detail grid will display earnings detail records for the selected parent term earnings summary record. It will also display all child term earnings detail records associated with the selected parent term earnings summary record.
-
Available parent term with start and end date for the selected term.
-
The parent term which is newly added.
-
The parent term which was removed.
-
When you select Yes, Anthology Student includes students in the report who have a document configured for all the Title IV institutional charges (parent) in their Documents list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Documents tile.)
-
When selected, indicates that the parent was unable to obtain a PLUS loan.
-
Specify the partner. This field is displayed when the payment gateway provider is set to PayPal.
-
Indicates the Partner value assigned by the payment gateway provider.
-
Indicate whether the course will receive a pass or fail grade. Yes - Consider only the Pass/Fail courses for validation No - Consider only Non-Pass/Fail Both - Consider both Pass/Fail and Non-Pass/Fail
-
Indicates the system-defined values that are applicable to the course's grade scale: Non-Pass/Fail (default) – Indicates that the course is graded on a letter grade basis Pass/Fail (Required) – Indicates that all students taking the course receive a pass/fail grade Student's Choice – Indicates that students may elect to receive a pass/fail grade
-
Indicates whether the course will be graded on a pass or fail basis only.
-
If the letter grade is applicable to pass or fail courses, select the check box. You must configure Pass/Fail grades for any campuses where you want to schedule courses with Pass/Fail (Required) or Student's Choice for Pass/Fail Course when the class is scheduled using the Class Scheduling tile.
-
The date the student's passport expires.
-
The country where the passport was issued.
-
The passport number included in the student's passport.
-
Password for specific sections and is used in online registration.
-
Enter the password that must conform to the restrictions already set for the user's password profile. If you do not enter a password for a staff member, that person will not have access to the system.
-
Specify the password assigned to this account by the payment gateway provider.
-
Specify the password for SQL Server Authentication.
-
Enter the word or characters to be used as password for future access.
-
Select Yes, if you want staff members to be able to specify their user ID as their password. Otherwise, select No.
-
If your institution is using the Anthology Student database as its authentication mode, the date the password will expire. The default is 01/01/9999.
-
If your institution is using the Anthology Student database as its Authentication Mode, the date the password will expire. Anthology Student calculates the value using the date that the staff member was added or last changed their password and the value for Password Expiry Days in the password profile. The default is 01/01/9999.
-
Specify the number of days a password is valid before it expires. If you specify 0, the passwords never expire. Anthology Student displays 01/01/9999 for Expiration Date. This field is updated whenever a user changes a password. Anthology Student sets the Expiration Date to the system date when you add a staff member and associate them with a password. The staff member must then change their passwords the first tie they sign into Anthology Student. When a staff member gets an expiration notification, they have the option to change their password or cancel.
-
If your institution is using the Anthology Student database as its authentication mode, the name of the password profile that provides basic password functionality (such as password expiration, password reset, and password rules). Password profiles are defined by your institution.
-
Indicates the type of password profiles.
-
The activity or task template used to send notifications to students about their passwords.
-
The date of past due payment.
-
The payment due date. Payments with scheduled date on or earlier than the specified date are considered past due.
-
The payment due date. Payments with scheduled date on or earlier than the specified date are considered past due.
-
The payment due date. Payments with scheduled date on or earlier than the specified date are considered past due.
-
The path to the location where the file is saved.
-
Select Weekly to specify that the class meets weekly. Select Monthly to specify the class meets monthly.
-
Pattern of when the class meets. For example, weekly or monthly. - Weekly: select the days of the week and the number of weeks the weekly class meeting will recur. - Monthly: select the date and the day on which the monthly class meeting will recur.
-
The frequency in which payment is made to the staff. They are configured by your institution. This field is not editable. The values depends on the Position field. A pay cycle is an interval used to pay the instructor. A pay period is an instance of a pay cycle. For example, your institution can configure pay cycles for weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, and monthly payroll.
-
The frequency in which payment is made to the staff. Pay cycles are configured by your institution. A pay cycle is an interval used to pay the instructor. A pay period is an instance of a pay cycle. For example, your institution can configure pay cycles for weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, and monthly payroll.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the pay cycle item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
Select the required pay cycles for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the status of the earning lines. Not Generated indicates earning lines have not been generated. Generated indicates that they have been. Confirmed indicates that the earning lines have been confirmed and are ready, if payroll is integrated to export. File Exported indicates that they have been exported.
-
If Anthology Student could not generate the earning lines, the reason why not. For example, no pay cycles were found.
-
Select the pay generation status for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the status for the assignment pay generation based on all the earning lines. If your institution has not configured integration with an external payroll system, the Not-Generated status indicates the earning lines have not been generated; Generated status indicates the earning lines have been generated; Failed status indicates the earning lines were not generated due to incorrect configuration; Confirmed status indicates the earning lines have been confirmed and are ready to be exported; File Exported status indicates the earning lines have been generated and exported as Excel. If your institution has configured integration with an external payroll system, the Not-Generated status indicates the earning lines have not been generated; Generated status indicates the earning lines have been generated; Failed status indicates the earning lines were not generated due to incorrect configuration; Confirmed status indicates the earning lines have been confirmed and are ready to be exported; Exported status indicates the earning lines have been generated and exported; Exported Partially status indicates the earning lines have been generated and exported partially.
-
Specifies the pay level based on the compensation plan. Pay levels are configured by your institution. Pay levels categorize payment based on seniority of the instructor. All courses have pay levels for the compensation plan and there is an assigned payment total for each level.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the pay level item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
The number assigned to the payment period. The start date of the payment period must be before the end of the academic year and award year.
-
The payment period end date.
-
The pay period end date. The default is the current date.
-
The pay period end date.
-
The payment period start date.
-
The pay period start date
-
The associated pay period status.
-
Indicates the pay rate for the faculty member.
-
Enter the high end of the salary range that the student has agreed to accept from an employer.
-
If the job has a salary range, enter the low value in Pay Rate Low and the high value in Salary High.
-
Enter the low end of the salary range that the student has agreed to accept from an employer.
-
Select the condition for the pay rate low in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;100000) in the respective value field, the report displays the pay rate low between 1 and 100000 only.
-
Enter the pay rate low value.
-
You can enter the hourly wage in Pay Rate Low if the job is hourly and leave the Salary High field blank.
-
Indicates whether the instructor was paid for grading the lesson.
-
Indicates if the instructor should be paid.
-
Indicates whether you have opted for the pay tracking when you configured the load type. This field is not editable.
-
Select whether or not you want pay generation and tracking for the selected load type.
-
Specifies the type of pay. It can be a rate for the unit of measure or a single lump sum for the activity.
-
Select the payment type from the drop-down list. The options are: - Rates: Indicate the amount in dollars for one load unit of the load type - Lump sum: Indicates the lump sum amount to be paid for the course/ non-teaching
-
Indicates whether you want to pay with a new or existing credit card. This option is visible when the Payment Method is set to Credit Card. The options are: • Credit Card on File - You can make a credit card payment using a previously saved credit card. The credit card must have been previously added through a payment gateway provider (PayPal, ACI, or Touchnet) hosted page. • New Credit Card - You are redirected to the payment gateway provider’s hosted page where you can add a new credit card and the payment will be processed automatically once the card is saved.
-
The payment period for the disbursement. The column is only displayed if the program version for the student has an academic calendar that uses non-standard terms or clock hours or credit hours without terms that have been configured to use payment periods.
-
The payee of the refund/stipend.
-
Select the pay cycles you want to process. Anthology Student only displays active pay cycles.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It can be either the student or to the person or persons specified in the student profile related address field.
-
The payee information that will be used when processing the stipend check.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It can be either the student or an outside organization depends on the fund source configuration.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It can be either the student or to the person or an outside organization depends on payee setup for the fund source. Your ability to edit a payee for a refund is dependent on the fund source associated with the refund. The payee changes are audited only for the fund sources that allow the payee to be changed.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It can be either the student or to the person or persons specified in the student profile related address field. If the field is blank, the student is the default payee.
-
Indicates the one who will be paid. It’s typically an external organization for master checks.
-
The name of the payee.
-
Calculated amount of each payment.
-
Indicates whether live ACH transactions are processed by the ACH processor in Anthology Student.
-
The payment account that you use to authorize the new credit card.
-
Indicates whether or not a Payment Coupon is available when printing a master invoice. If configured, the Remittance Address will be used on the return coupon when the Payment Coupon check box is selected.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to show a Payment Coupon on the statement.
-
Indicates whether or not to include a Payment Coupon on the statement.
-
If different from the number you specified for Payment Phone Number, the phone number for the Customer Service office.
-
The date when the payment was received.
-
Indicates the date when the payment will be made.
-
The payment date set as default.
-
Select the payment due date. This field is editable when the "Include Payment Due Date" check box is selected.
-
Specify the cashier time-out value for the Post Payment. • If this field is not populated, users must authenticate each time they post a payment. • The value populated in this field represents the minutes of inactivity before users must enter their credentials again. • The maximum value is 999 minutes.
-
Specifies how often stipends will be paid to the student. If you select monthly, it will be every 30 days. If you select Days, you must also specify a value in the Number of Days field.
-
Select Monthly or Weekly to specify the payment frequency for the cash payment plan.
-
Indicates the payment gateway provider. The available ACH payment gateway providers are ACI and TouchNet.
-
Indicates a payment gateway provider. Anthology Student supports PayPal, ACI, and TouchNet.
-
Indicates a payment gateway provider. Anthology Student supports ACI, CUSTOM, PayPal, and TouchNet. To use the CUSTOM gateway provider, your institution must have selected Yes for "Enable Additional Payment Gateway Provider for electronic processing?" under Settings > System > Advanced Features. When you select CUSTOM, all fees-related fields are hidden, "Allow Credit Card Payments on Student Portal" is disabled, and the "Optional Parameter" field replaces the Vendor ID (PayPal), Division Business ID (ACI), Site ID (TouchNet). The custom payment gateway processor does not support Portal payments and is not available for selection when configuring credit card processors for batch payments/refunds.
-
Specify a payment gateway provider.
-
The interest rate the lender charges for loan repayment. The value in this field and the value in the Number of Monthly Payments field are used to calculate the estimated monthly payments in the Exit Interview report.
-
Method used to make the payment, for example, cash, credit card, and so on.
-
Indicates the method used to make the payment. The options are: • Cash • EFT • Check • ACH • Non-Cash • Credit Card
-
Select the Payment Methodology that applies to this grant. The default is the payment methodology selected for the program version.
-
The Payment Methodology that applies to the program version (ex. Credit Hrs Standard Term, Clock Hr/Credit Hr without terms, etc...).
-
Select the payment methodology. The list displays only the payment methodologies appropriate for the value you selected in the Academic Calendar list. A default payment methodology was configured for COD grants when financial aid was configured. For Non-standard terms, you can select codes 3 and 5. For Standard terms of quarters, semesters, or trimesters, you can select codes, 1-3 and 5. For Credit hours without terms, you can select codes 4-5. For Clock Hours, you can select code 4.
-
The name of the payment as included in the cash payment records.
-
The name and description for the payments.
-
A secondary phone number for the institution.
-
The payment period associated with the enrollment. Payment periods only apply to program versions configured with an academic year.
-
The Payment Period on the Earnings Summary record that is associated with the earning detail record.
-
Specify the payment period associated with the enrollment. This field supports only numeric values. You can add up to 20 disbursements across all payment periods. Payment periods only apply to program versions configured with an academic year.
-
Payment period sequence of an Academic Year. If a payment period sequence is specified, the payment period sequence is used in conjunction with the Academic Year to gather only students who has the specified Academic Year and Payment Period sequence.
-
The payment period associated with the disbursement.
-
The payment period associated with the stipend.
-
The payment period associated with the transaction. Payment periods only apply to program versions configured with a non-term academic calendar.
-
If the student is enrolled in a program version that is configured with an academic calendar of non- standard terms or a non-term program version that is billed by payment periods, select the payment period. Anthology Student uses the drop date to determine the default value. The drop date must fall between the start and end dates of the default payment period. When a payment period is selected, Anthology Student uses the start and end dates as the start and end of the Return of Title IV calculation period.
-
Specifies the first payment period you want to evaluate for the student. The list contains payment periods with an end date before or equal to the current date. Anthology Student prompts you to verify that the dates are accurate.
-
The payment period associated with the stipend.
-
The payment period associated with the enrollment. Specify the payment period sequence to search for transactions that are associated with that payment period sequence. This Payment Period field works in conjunction with the Academic Year field.
-
The payment period associated with the stipend. This column is available for program versions that can use payment periods (program versions with academic calendars 1, 5, and 6).
-
The payment period associated with the enrollment. Enter the student’s payment period sequence that you would like to generate registration bill for.
-
The payment period associated with the transaction.
-
If a student does not satisfy the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a numeric average for the payment period that meets or exceeds the value in this field, the student is making SAP.
-
The count of applicable payment periods. For SAP, specifies whether this SAP detail is evaluated for the student based on their payment period. For example, academic year 1 and payment period 1 has a count of 1. Academic year 1 and payment period 2 has a count of 2. Academic year 2 and payment period 1 has a count of 3.
-
Select the date you want Anthology Student to use to evaluate whether the student has attended a payment period when the student is moved to the status category of Permanent Out. The values are the last day of attendance (LDA), Date of Determination, NSLDS Withdrawal Date. If your institution configured financial aid for Direct loans to auto-create loan period origination changes when a student withdraws or a refund is posted, Anthology Student uses the date you specify here to evaluate whether the student has attended a payment period after the initial payment period on the Direct loan. If the student does not show any attendance, an origination change is created to adjust the end date for the loan period to exclude that payment period from the loan period.
-
The end date of the payment period.
-
If a student does not satisfy the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a GPA for the payment period that meets or exceeds the value in this field, the student is making SAP.
-
The number assigned to the payment period. The start date of the payment period must be before the end of the academic year and award year.
-
If you selected Non-standard terms in the Academic Calendar list and the SAP mode was configured to be payment period and term and/or cumulative, specifies whether or not the optional payment period will be included when satisfactory academic progress (SAP) is evaluated.
-
Enter a value for the payment period sequence. Valid entries are numeric values from 1-3 (no special characters).
-
The number assigned to the payment period. The start date of the payment period must be before the end of the academic year and award year.
-
The payment period sequence. This field works in conjunction with the Academic Year field. This field is available only if the Tuition Discount Type selected is Payment Period.
-
The payment period start date range.
-
The payment period start date range. These fields are enabled only if an Academic Year and a Payment Period sequence are specified. Only students whose specified Payment Period’s start date falls within the specified date range will be gathered.
-
The start date of the payment period. It must be before the end of the academic year and award year.
-
Specify the date range for the start date of the payment period to search for transactions that are associated with payment periods that start within the specified date range.
-
If you select Title IV, the funds will be packaged and disbursed at the same time as Title IV funds following Department of Education regulations. Disbursement approval criteria are automatically checked for Title IV funds and Title IV payment periods. If you select non-Title, the funds will be packaged and disbursed according to your defined payment periods. The student does not need to progress academically to receive these funds, but Anthology Student will check the remaining disbursement approval criteria. If you select Do Not Use, it does not link the disbursements to a specific payment period, but Anthology Student will check the remaining disbursement approval criteria.
-
If you selected Clock Hours or Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar list, select No if you do not want Anthology Student to automatically create the 2 payment periods for the academic year.
-
If different from the number you specified for Payment Phone Number, the phone number for the Post-Claims office.
-
If different from the number you specified for Payment Phone Number, the phone number for the Pre-Claims office.
-
The source of the payment. The values are student or agency. If you select Student, the Address list is displayed. If you select Agency, Agency and Agency Branch fields are displayed.
-
Specifies how the payment was made. The values are Cash and Check.
-
Specifies the type of payment. The values are Cash, Check, and Credit Card.
-
Specifies the methods the payment was made. By default, it includes all types of payment.
-
Specifies how the payment was made. By default, it includes all types of payment.
-
Specifies the type of payment. The values are ACH, Cash, Check, and Credit Card.
-
The type of payment, such as Cash Payment, Scheduled FA Disbursements/Student Cash Payments, and Unscheduled Payment: Cash Payment: This is typically a one-time cash payment from the student. It is not linked to any scheduled financial aid awards or payment plans. This is the same as posting a one-time payment in Anthology Student without checking the Scheduled FA/Disbursement check box or selecting any fund source. Scheduled FA Disbursements/Student Cash Payments: This requires that you select a scheduled financial aid disbursement scheduled payment from a payment plan to post payments. This is the same as posting a payment in Anthology Student where you select the Scheduled FA/Disbursement check box and select a scheduled disbursement or payment to post. Unscheduled Payment: Posting a payment using this option will post the payment to the ledger. In addition, a payment plan or award is created based on the amount received. The payment is linked to the award as a disbursement or payment. This is the same as posting a payment in Anthology Student where you do not select the Scheduled FA/Disbursement check box but have to select a fund source from the Fund Source list.
-
Specifies how the payment was made. The values are - cash payment, nonscheduled payment and student cash payments/scheduled FA disbursements.
-
The type of the transaction.
-
The type of payment, such as ACH payment, Credit Card payment.
-
Specifies how the payment was made.
-
The due date of payment. This field is enabled if you select include payments due date check box.
-
Specifies the payment period’s start date range to further filter list of students who you would like to process tuition discounts against.
-
The payments, refund, or stipend amount.
-
Indicates whether ACH payments through the payment gateway provider are allowed in the system.
-
Payment, refund, or stipend amount for the transaction.
-
Check the Payments check box to include the transactions of Payments type in the search.
-
The stipend amount scheduled for disbursement after deducting the offset amount.
-
The amount that can be disbursement from the selected bursary.
-
The amount due to be paid in this recurrence of the stipend schedule.
-
The method used to determine the payout amount. They are configured by your institution.
-
Select the type of bursary payout. The options are External Payout, Stipend, or Both (both external payouts and stipends).
-
Type of criteria on which Payout will be calculated. Available options are Hours, Session.
-
Indicate the number of seconds to wait for the credit card batch to process.
-
Indicates whether you want to enable the PayPath Service Fee. This option is available only when the Payment Gateway Provider is TouchNet. PayPath is TouchNet’s service fee model, where the client opts to levy a fee on their customers calculated in real-time equal to the credit card fees incurred by the underlying transaction. For the client’s convenience, this is processed automatically by TouchNet as a separate transaction, with funds routed into separate merchant accounts, and is reported separately in TouchNet's reporting environment. When the credit card processor is configured with PathPath Service enabled, all credit card transactions in Anthology Student that use this processor do not assess/calculate transaction fees; therefore, all transaction fee related fields in this form will be hidden. Anthology Student does not send any transaction fees to TouchNet for processing since the transaction fees are calculated and charged to the cardholder’s credit card by TouchNet.
-
The end date of the period. The default is the current date. Anthology Payroll cannot process pay period end dates that are in the future.
-
The amount Anthology Student calculated by dividing the assigned value for the load type by the number of pay periods. For example, if the assigned value for the load type is 15 and there are 10 pay periods, the amount is 1.5. By default, the value is displayed as 1 for the lumpsum pay periods.
-
Specifies the amount of pay at that level. It can be a rate for the unit of measure or a single lump sum for the activity. In case of a lump sum, the value is the lump sum divided by the pay period.
-
Designated School Official or Responsible Officer for the campus group. The value is required if you select Yes for Required PDSO Review for Transmission.
-
The type of formula used to calculate the primary expected family contribution (PEFC). For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Select this check box if you want the Disbursement Approval Criteria policy to compare the Enrollment Intensity (EI) used to calculate the disbursement amount against the actual EI calculated for the term. Since the Anthology Student defaults to 100% during initial packaging, the actual EI could be different by the time disbursement posting occurs. This evaluation is specific to Pell Grants for term-based program versions and is used by the Approve Disbursements to Pay and Eligibility Review processes.
-
Dollar amount of the Pell award.
-
Specify the Pell attending ID for each campus participating as a full participant. For additional information on Pell Attending ID, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
The total amount that can be awarded from the Pell chart based on the student ISIR. If the student does not have an ISIR on file, '0' is displayed.
-
Calculated Pell cost of attendance (COA) based on a 9-month academic year. If your academic year is longer or shorter, this value may differ from the value displayed in the Cost of Attendance field.
-
Calculated Pell cost of attendance (COA) based on a 9-month academic year. If your academic year is longer or shorter, this value may differ from the value displayed in the Cost of Attendance field.
-
Indicates whether the student is eligible to receive a Pell Grant (Y/N).
-
The Federal Pell Grant Program provides need-based grants to low-income undergraduate and certain postbaccalaureate students. Grant amounts are dependent on: the student's expected family contribution (EFC) or Student Aid Index (SAI - 2024-25 and later); the cost of attendance (as determined by the institution); the student's enrollment status (full-time or part-time); and whether the student attends a full academic year or less. Specify the estimated grant amount for which the student is eligible.
-
Pell Grant - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the grant option does not apply to the student.
-
The ID that is used when processing Pell Grants for students who are attending a campus. The ID is also used on ISIRs. A campus can also be part of a larger organization that uses a Report Pell ID. The ID cannot be changed without updating all students who had the original ID in Anthology Student.
-
The percentage of the lifetime maximum Pell amount that has been used.
-
This is the primary or secondary expected family contribution (EFC) calculated from the FAFSA data based on a nine-month academic year. This field is labeled Recalc. EFC instead of Pell Paid EFC if financial aid advisors have chosen to award students with a recalculated EFC before the official ISIR has been received. For Recalc. EFC, awards must be in an estimated status. If the award is in an approved status, financial aid advisors must manually change the approved status to an estimated status before using this function. No changes can be made to estimated financial aid awards after any financial aid disbursements have been paid. The campus must also be configured to allow awards for students without ISIRs and to award students with recalculated EFCs. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Specify the Pell reporting ID for each campus participating as a full participant.
-
Select an option from the list of Pell Reporting Types. The options are: Advance Pay, Pushed Cash, Cash Monitoring 1, and Cash Monitoring 2.
-
The pending column specifies the pending charges calculated for each student for the specified terms.
-
Select the check box to indicate whether the aid status to be included is Pending.
-
Specifies whether you want Pending aid status to be included when evaluating student’s funding for the bills.
-
The amount for awards that are still pending approval, that if approved, will come from this Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
Indicates that pending charges need to be included.
-
The tentative number assigned to the enrollment based on the parameters specified by the institution.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the pending aid status.
-
Select the unit by which the Rate is multiplied to calculate the amount to be charged. The unit options are Credit, Course, and Hour.
-
Indicates the percent complete. Anthology Student calculates the value by dividing the value for Time Complete by the value for Time In Period.
-
The percentage of credits completed for the credits attempted during the evaluation period.
-
Specifies the weight of the grade as a percentage of the final grade for the class section. For example, 33.33 is 33.33% of the final grade. The value is stored in the database with 4 decimal places. For example, if you specify 33.33, it is stored as .3333.
-
The percentage of the final for the item (such as lesson or test).
-
Percent of income shared for prospective and enrolled undergraduate students.
-
Percentage of the imported prospects that will be assigned to the Admissions Representative. The values are calculated based on the number of representatives you specify. You can change the values. The percentages you specify must total 100%.
-
The percentage of the award in the disbursement. For example, 34% indicates 34% percent of the award will be in the disbursement. The percentages for the disbursements must total 100%. If you specify 3 or more disbursements, you can specify 2 decimal places. Otherwise, it must be a whole number.
-
The percentage of clock hours that a student can be absent and still be eligible to receive the associated degree or certificate, or be eligible to receive the next scheduled financial aid disbursement. The maximum value you can specify is the maximum percentage in the current regulations.
-
Specify the percentage of the payment period associated with the selected rule. The value must range from 1 to 100.
-
The percentage of hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the warning flag is set on the class section rosters. This is a value from 000.00 to 100.00. If the value is zero, there is no warning level based on percentage and rosters.
-
The percentage of hours that the student can be absent from the class after which the student will be considered as dropped. This is a value from 000.00 to 100.00. If the value is zero, there is no warning level based on percentage.
-
Specify the percentage of payment period associated with the selected backup rule. The value must range from 1 to 100.
-
The date and time the percentage was modified.
-
The user who modified the percentage date.
-
Choose the percentage of the fund source award you wish to be awarded for the credit hour range you have configured in that row of the grid.
-
The percentage of lesson grade which will be used for course grade calculation once the grade is posted for all the lessons.
-
Indicates whether a document review must be performed. This action ensures that the student is compliant with whatever standards or requirements for the institution or the specific program.
-
Select the option for performing document review. The options are Always, Never or Prompt User.
-
Select the check box to calculate SAP for any student who has dropped.
-
When you select this check box, you can add placement verification data through the placement wizard.
-
Indicates the document can be submitted for a performance review.
-
If the refund policy calculation period is Calendar Year, then Period Base amount is calculated based on the full program cost and the percentage of program completed. For other calculation periods, the Period Base amount is the actual amount charged on the ledger card for the calculation period.
-
The end date of the period. The default is the current date.
-
The end date of the period. The default is the current date.
-
For institutional refunds, the end date of the academic year, payment period, or term. For Return of Title IV, the end date specified for the payment period or period of enrollment.
-
Start point of Period End Date.
-
End point of Period End Date
-
The number of credits that the student must complete in the optional payment period to meet the disbursements approval criteria.
-
The number of hours that the student must complete in the optional payment period to meet the disbursements approval criteria.
-
The number of weeks that becomes the timeframe for evaluating disbursement approval criteria.
-
If you selected Payment Period in either of the Return Title IV Period Type lists, specify whether the start and end dates that you want Anthology Student to use in the calculation are based on the program or academic year. Anthology Student validates the dates. The period's end date must be greater than the period begin date. The period's begin date must be greater than or equal to the start date for the student. The period end date must be less than or equal to the expected graduation date for the student.
-
The start date of the period. The default is the current date.
-
The period start date.
-
For institutional refunds, the end date of the academic year, payment period, or term. For Return of Title IV, the end date specified for the payment period or period of enrollment.
-
Select Payment Period to specify that the time frame for the calculation is the Title IV payment period. Select Period of Enrollment to specify that the time frame for the calculation is the period of enrollment for the student. For additional information about the period types, see the background for Return of Title IV, fields, and processing.
-
Select the time frame for the Title IV credit balance calculation. The available options are Award Year and Loan Period. Select Award Year to gather records of students who received only grants in the reporting period. Select Loan Period to gather records of students with loans only, or students who received both loans and grants in the reporting period.
-
Federal Perkins Loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
If the delegation of the staff group is permanent or not. This is used if a staff member goes on leave or vacation and that staff member's responsibilities need to be covered by different staff member. (Selecting No causes the Expiration Date field in the grid to enable for input.)
-
Select the color code required for permanent out category.
-
The full name of the person.
-
The amount of personal expenses.
-
The proof submitted by the student to denote the cost of education and living expenses.
-
The phone number of the student, person, or agency.
-
The phone number of the student. The phone number requires to be in the same format as specified earlier.
-
Contact information of the person who deals with building-related issues on a daily basis.
-
The employer's telephone number.
-
Specifies the format of the phone numbers for that country. When you specify the mask, the format is displayed as a background in the field and required by Anthology Student when the number is specified for the student on the Student Profile. If you want your staff to be able to copy and paste phone numbers, do not include special characters in the mask. For example, specify ###-###-####.
-
Specifies the format of the phone numbers for that country. When you specify the mask, the format is displayed as a background in the field and required by Anthology Student when the number is specified for the student on the Student Profile.
-
The phone number. The format depends on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether phone numbers use parentheses and hyphens).
-
The phone number of the student, person, or agency. The phone number requires to be in the same format as specified earlier. For example, if you have specified the number in this format(XXX)XXX-XXXX, you need to provide the phone number in this specific format to search for it. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
Telephone number of the building.
-
The payee's phone number.
-
A secondary phone number. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether or not it uses parenthesis and hyphens).
-
The alternate phone number of the employer.
-
The type of the alternate phone number.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for phone number. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
Indicates whether the preferred method for contact is via phone.
-
The type of phone (for example, mobile).
-
The 4-digit personal identification number (PIN) selected by the student. The portal requires the student to enter his or her Student ID and PIN to log in. If you do not specify the PIN or change the social security number, the program defaults the PIN to the last four numbers of the social security number. If the last four characters begin with a zero, the PIN defaults to a 1 followed by the last 3 characters of the number. For example, if the last 4 digits of the social security number are 0398, the PIN is 1398.
-
The personal identification assigned to the employer.
-
The job placements for the specified student.
-
The date of the placement for which you want to generate the report.
-
If there is a related placement fee or not
-
The employer's placement record.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the skills specified for the student on their placement record for the enrollment is one of the values you select in the Values list.
-
Check box is displayed if the Module selected is Career Services. Selecting this check box allows multiple documents with this code to be added to a student's document list for each enrollment record.
-
The placement status of the student.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the placement status for the student on their exit interview in their placement record for the enrollment is one of the values you select in the Values list. The Value list contains the school statuses with a status category of Graduate – Placement (G) for the selected campuses.
-
Specifies that the selected placement status must be the placement status for the student on their exit interview in their placement record for the enrollment for the student to meet the criteria. The Value list contains the school statuses with a status category of Graduate – Placement (G) for the selected campuses.
-
Select a Placement Status from the drop-down menu to enable the following: - A placement status to automatically change when an enrollment record is changed to the school status. - The student enrollment record's placement status to automatically change to the specified placement status. This field is enabled only when you have selected Allow Placement Status Change check box.
-
The placement status of the student.
-
The Placement Verification form is optional and is displayed if your campus has enabled that feature by checking the ‘Perform Verification at time of Placement’ check box.
-
Select a sound file to be played when the student's master record is displayed in Anthology Student, to alert users audibly when they are working with students in financial aid hold groups. Sound files must be stored in the Anthology Student shared folder in the sounds subfolder.
-
The date when the borrower completed PLUS counseling.
-
The date when the PLUS counseling expires.
-
If applicable, select the credit decision status for Parent Loan for Undergraduate Students (PLUS) loans for which the parents have applied. The field is only displayed if the value for Dependency Status is Dependent or Undetermined. If the loan is denied, a dependent student can replace the amount of a denied PLUS loan by borrowing additional unsubsidized loan amounts. If a credit decision has been set and the award is packaged, the value is read-only and cannot be changed. Blank indicates that a credit decision status has not been set. A indicates: credit accepted. N indicates: credit decision changed from Pending to Denied or Accepted. C indicates: credit was overridden and new info was provided. E indicates: credit was overridden and endorser okay. D indicates: credit denied and endorser not okay. P indicates pending. For a PLUS loan disbursement to be exported to COD, the value selected for this field must be A, C, or E. The MPN Link Indicator must also be Y.
-
The start date of the payment. It must be before the end of the academic year. If you also select a payment period, the date must also be in the award year.
-
Indicates a Portable Object file which is an industry standard file that includes the message key (msgid) and value (msgstr) specific to a given language.
-
Score associated to a Grade.
-
Points assigned to a Grade.
-
The load validation policy associated with the selected staff position. The policies are configured by your institution. The drop-down list displays only active policies. Load validation policy is used to control, track, and limit classes or non-teaching activities assigned to the staff members. Policies contain basic information that includes term or year, assignment type, policy purpose, and policy lines. For example, your institution can create a policy that ensures adjunct faculty teaching assignments that do not exceed 800 hours per year. If you select All Positions or do not select a position in the Staff Position list, Anthology Student uses the policy for all the staff member positions. If you are selecting the policy from the list, it is filtered to policies for the campus.
-
The name of the tuition discount policy that will be used to apply a discount to the tuition charges for eligible students.
-
Specifies the refund policies you want included in the refund calculation. If there is no billing method selected for the student on their enrollment, Anthology Student selects all the active policies for the campus that have been configured to be pre-enrollment. If the student has a billing method, it selects all the active policies for the campus that have been configured as post-enrollment by default.
-
Select a Package Status Promotion Policy from the list.
-
The name of the policy. If a Return of Title IV calculation was done, it is displayed at the top. The remaining policies in the list will be the refund policies selected in the calculation.
-
The name of the load validation policy for the assignment.
-
The load validation policy associated with the selected staff position. The policies are configured by your institution. Load validation policy is used to control, track, and limit classes or non-teaching activities assigned to the staff members. Policies contain basic information that includes term or year, assignment type, policy purpose, and policy lines. For example, your institution can create a policy that ensures adjunct faculty teaching assignments that do not exceed 800 hours per year. If you select All Positions or do not select a position in the Staff Position list, Anthology Student uses the policy for all the staff member positions. If you are selecting the policy from the list, it is filtered to policies for the campus.
-
The last date the job policy association is applicable or will be in use. The value depends on the job's effective to date.
-
The descriptive name of the policy line.
-
The descriptive name of the policy line. Faculty Workload Management displays Parent value for the policy line that belongs to FTE.
-
Indicates whether the refund policy applies after the student has enrolled (Post Enrollment) or before the student has enrolled (Pre Enrollment). For Post Enrollment policies, the system calculates the amounts to refund based on the maximum time completed. For Pre Enrollment policies, the system calculates the amount to refund based on the days before start date.
-
Indicates the time related to the refund. The values are Weekly (default) and Daily. If the Policy Units is Weeks, it enables the field - Weeks Calculation Type.
-
Indicates whether the units of calculation are Weeks, Scheduled Hours, Hours Attended, or Days. When you set the policy unit to Days or Weeks, you can adjust the refund policy for holidays. When you set the policy unit to Weeks, you can define a week based on your institution. If you set the policy unit to Hours Attended or Hours Scheduled and set Time Period to Calendar Year, the Program Version Credits/Hours Per Year tab is enabled. If the unit value is not found on the grid, the system will set the default refund percentage to 0.
-
Indicates whether the units of calculation are Weeks, Scheduled Hours, Hours Attended, or Days.
-
Indicates that it is part of a pool.
-
Select the pool name from the drop-down list.
-
The pool code.
-
Indicates the code of the elective pool.
-
The name of the pool.
-
The pool name associated with the course.
-
The type of pool.
-
The pool type.
-
Represents whether it is a substitution/elective pool associated with a program version or areas of study or both.
-
A flag that indicates whether a Potential Overpayment (POP) occurs when more than one attended institution reports disbursements for a student.
-
The specific student population (from those configured at the institution).
-
Indicates whether the class section will be previewed on the student portal.
-
Specify the Portal Return URL for this version.
-
The position of the J-1 participant. The Position field is required when Transmission Status is D or R and Action is Begin New Program or Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
The position of the admissions representative.
-
Specifies the position number in the Position textbox.
-
The position for the staff member. Positions are configured by your institution. The position must have a single staff assignment for any given duration.
-
Specifies the name of the position applied for the assignment.
-
Indicates the position of the field. This column is visible only when the File Type is set to Fixed Length in General Export File Definition.
-
The name of the job position. Select Unlisted if the job is not displayed in the list.
-
The position at your institution for the staff member.
-
The position for the staff member. Positions are configured by your institution. The position must have a single staff member assignment for any given duration. If you are associating staff members with load validation policies and you leave the field blank, Anthology Student applies the policy to all positions.
-
The alphanumeric code assigned to the position item by your institution. Codes are unique.
-
The last date that the selected staff position assignment is effective or can be used.
-
The first day that the selected staff position assignment is effective or can be used.
-
The title of the position configured by your institution. Position title is different from position name. For example, while the position name could be Principal Accountant, the position title could be Accounting Manager.
-
Select the type of position. Position types are configured by your institution. Position types categorize the types of positions that will be used for jobs. For example, your institution can create different position types for temporary, permanent, and part-time staff members (such as Tenure, On Tenure Track, and Adjuncts).
-
Specifies the list of active positions. They are configured by your institution.
-
Indicates the type of position. They are configured by your institution. Position types categorize the types of the positions that will be used for jobs. For example, your institution can create different position types for temporary, permanent, and part-time staff members (such as Tenure, On Tenure Track, and Adjuncts).
-
Select this check box to include positive balance when filtering summary and detail reports.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include positive balance in balance options.
-
The maximum number of instructors that can be assigned per class. If you do not want to specify a maximum, leave the field blank or specify 0.
-
Indicates the URL to the post ACH transactions to the ACI server.
-
Indicates the URL to post credit card transactions to the PayPal server.
-
Post 9/11 Deceased Veteran Dependent Indicator
-
Enables the secondary instructor to post attendance.
-
The date when the revenue record was posted.
-
Indicates the date on which the transaction is posted. This date is system generated so it cannot be modified. You can re-order subsidiary ledger entries by date sequence.
-
Select the option to allow postings that affect this fund source directly to the student ledger card. Such postings could be rather than, or in addition to, automated procedures such as posting FA disbursements. It is disabled if you select Work-Study in the Type list.
-
Indicate the number of seconds to wait for the post FA disbursements to process.
-
Select this check box to post midterm grades that are independent of final grades.
-
Enables the secondary instructor to post lessons.
-
Select whether you want your institution to post a non-sufficient funds (NSF) to the student's Ledger Card when a payment was rejected.
-
Specify whether you want to associate payments with the student's enrollment campus irrespective of where payment has been made.
-
Indicate the number of seconds to wait for the post pending charges process.
-
The status of the billable service cost posted to the student's ledger card. For example, pending.
-
Indicates the POST student URL. This field is enabled only if you have selected Yes in the Prerequisite Student Creation field.
-
If you selected the check box for Post Directly to Ledger Card and you select the check box, specifies that the amount is posted to the next payment due date. The check box is selected by default.
-
If there is a tuition adjustment of 0, select the check box to have the adjustment posted. For the check box to be enabled, the refund policy must be configured for manual calculation and to allow zero adjustment.
-
Mailing code (letters/digits) for country other than the United States.
-
First three digits of the postal code.
-
The postal code for the address.
-
Specify the value for zip code or postal code for the address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
Select the condition for the Postal Code output in the report. For example, if you select condition 'Is not equal to' and enter code (83456) in the value field, the report displays all the Postal Code values except the entered code.
-
Specifies a 4-digit PIN number that the employer can use when visiting your school's website to enter available jobs.
-
The discount amount that is already posted for the course in the Ledger Card for the discount policy.
-
The last and then first name of the staff member in Student Accounts that posted the payment.
-
Specify the campus to which you want to post admissions deposits. The options are To Any Campus or To Current (Signed-in) Campus.
-
Specify the campus to which you want to post student ledger card transactions. The options are: To Any Campus To Current (Signed-in) Campus
-
Indicates whether the automated posting of charges and adjustments is of type: - Aggregate A pending charge record is created per bill code for a payment period in the student Ledger Card. - Detail A pending charge is created for every transaction code configured in the rate schedule. Each ledger entry contains a field for course, section, and payment period.
-
Indicates how billing charges or adjustments are posted. There are two posting types: - Aggregate: Charges for all courses are summed up under one transaction per transaction code. Detail charges for each course can be seen by reviewing the charge’s detail under the Breakdown by Course section. The benefit of this type of posting is a cleaner ledger card with less billing transactions. Select this posting type if you do not need to see individual charges for each course on the student’s ledger card. - Detail: Charges are posted individually per transaction code for each course. The benefit of this type of posting is better visibility into charges for individual courses.
-
The number of applicable payment periods.
-
Date the practicum time is being posted for.
-
This check box is enabled if the employer is a practicum site.
-
Disbursements are evaluated against eligibility criteria before being submitted for payment to COD recipients.
-
Select this check box to exclude any disbursement that are in an Estimated status for the automated job.
-
The name of the prerequisite/corequisite course that was overridden during registration. By default, this column is hidden.
-
Defines the priority given to subject levels while checking applicant's eligibility.
-
The preferred address to be used to contact the student.
-
The preferred name of the student, prospect, or alumnus. The preferred name is stored in the SyStudent table in the database. The Advanced Search tool provides the option to search by preferred name if the staff member has the specialized permission “Allow User to Customize Search Form". The header of the student, prospect, or alumnus profiles can be customized to display the Preferred Name. The Preferred Name option can also be selected in the Student Name field of the Class Roster by Course and Class Roster by Instructor reports under Academic Records.
-
Preferred name of the student.
-
The preferred name of the student. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The preferred name to be used to address the staff and student.
-
The preferred phone number to contact the student. The options are Telephone Number, Mobile Phone, Work Phone and Other Phone. The default value is Telephone Number.
-
The course prefix.
-
The course prefix name.
-
When selected, specifies that the loan is for Preparatory coursework (to enroll in a graduate or professional program) or Teacher Certification. If the option is selected, a <PreprofessionalCourseworkIndicator> tag is included in the COD Common Records as defined in the COD Technical Reference. The Grade Level for the loan is 5, the maximum Subsidized Stafford loan limit is $5,500, and the combined maximum loan limit of $12,500 is applied. This flag is only accepted by COD when a loan is submitted that has a first disbursement date on or after July 1, 2007.
-
The start date and time for the preregistration period. The pre-registration date must be before the registration start date. This field is enabled only if you select the Allow Preregistration check box.
-
Displays the course that is the prerequisite.
-
Specifies the status of the prerequisite course. The valid values are Current, Dropped, Future, Grade Posted, LOA, and Scheduled.
-
The name of the prerequisite course that was overridden during registration. By default, this column is hidden.
-
Indicates whether or not document type creation is required for the document management provider. If you select system-defined SchoolDocs, the value is set to Yes. Otherwise, it is set to No.
-
Indicates whether or not the student creation is required for the document management provider. This field is enabled with Yes only for system-defined SchoolDocs. If NO is selected, the POST Student URL and Student Creation fields are disabled.
-
Specifies whether or not student creation is required based on the option selected in the Document provider field.
-
The prerequisite terms used to identify the prerequisite courses.
-
The number of hours the student was present in the class section.
-
Record number for the previous transaction associated with the disbursement provided by COD.
-
Select the check box to prevent users from awarding aid to a student for an academic year with a Cost of Attendance (COA) of zero (0).
-
Select this check box to prevent auto-matching of Courses Not Applied on the Degree Progress Audit. If you select this check box, it automatically disables the check box "Only Associated Courses will Fulfill Degree Progress Audit Requirements". The check box is cleared by default. When configured to prevent auto-matching of taken courses, Anthology Student does not auto-match required courses on the actual DPA form. In the case of multiple enrollments across different campuses, the student's enrollment campus configuration is taken into consideration.
-
Select this check box to prevent auto-matching of taken courses in other enrollments. If you select this check box, it disables the Only Associated Courses will Fulfill Degree Progress Audit Requirements check box.
-
Select Yes if you want to prevent users from awarding funds from Title IV sources when the institution's authorized amount has been expended. If you enable this option, you can configure Award Statuses.
-
Select the check box to prevent changing the processing status to Ready to Send when validation fails for CommonLine packaging.
-
Specify whether the stipends are to be posted and issued to the student before the funding is received on the ledger card. The options are No, 'Yes - Use System Setting', and Yes. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the check box if you want to prevent staff members from saving changes or billing selected charges using the Bill Selected Charges button. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Student Services > select the Housing Lease tile > application in the list > More button > View/Edit Charge Schedule.)
-
Select this check box to prevent registration for overlapping terms. This applies to manual registration only.
-
Specify whether the stipends are to be manually scheduled if the institutional charges exceed the amount packaged. The options are No, 'No - Use System Setting', and Yes.
-
Specify whether your institution wants to manually schedule stipends without adhering to the business rules that require the net amount of stipends scheduled to be less than or equal to the amount packaged or the amount received for a fund source. The options are No, 'Yes - Use System Setting', and Yes.
-
Select the check box to prevent users from modifying Title IV aid.
-
Indicates the course is a preview course.
-
Specifies the previous academic status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution.
-
Number of weeks in the academic year at the previous institution.
-
A staff member is removed from an Admissions Representative group after having been assigned to a student, and retains the name of the former representative on the student record.
-
The alpha-numeric code assigned to the previous admission representative for the student.
-
The last and then first name of the advisor who was assigned to the advisor before the advisor was changed.
-
Indicates the previous amount applied to or previous amount applied by other transaction.
-
Identifier for the previous application (if any).
-
Indicates the old billing method.
-
The last or previous career service advisor for the student.
-
The catalog that was assigned to the students.
-
The discount amount that has already been posted for the student according to a policy other than the tuition discount policy.
-
The discount amount already posted for the student according to the tuition discount policy.
-
Indicates old transaction due date.
-
The education level of the student. They are configured by your institution. The value you select will depend on the policies and procedures at your institution.
-
Indicates whether the GPA includes previous education coursework.
-
Previous education of the student. Previous education is used to qualify the test and the score that the student is required to clear.
-
A drop-down that lists all Grade Levels that have been configured in Previous Education Grade Levels. The list should contains all Grades that could be earned by Students in their previous Institutions.
-
Indicates the exam previously conducted.
-
Indicates the previous exit interview status.
-
The previous STRF fee charged to the student.
-
The previous STRF fee charged to the student for the selected term.
-
The previous STRF fee charged to the student for the selected term or for the enrollment period.
-
The previous owner of the task.
-
The previous placement status of the student.
-
The Previous SAP Status column is blank if SAP is not yet calculated for the student. If SAP was calculated for the student, the Previous SAP Status column contains the status from the last SAP calculation.
-
The optional Previous SAP Status field indicates that the SAP sequence is conditional on the student’s previous term SAP status being equal to the SAP status defined here. If a student’s previous term record does not equal the status defined here, the condition is not met. The drop-down list includes all active SAP statuses.
-
The previous School Status applied to the application.
-
The previous Selection Status applied to the application.
-
The original status before the status change.
-
The original academic student status before the academic student status change.
-
Indicates the status from which the student was changed.
-
The status of the student before it was updated.
-
Specifies the previous status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution.
-
The term that the student was registered to previously.
-
The start date of the previous program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in.
-
The Previous Year column identifies Title IV refund transactions made in the current tax reporting year that are associated with a single payment made in a previous year.
-
Indicate whether you want to associate a non-Title IV Refund with the Payment for which the refund is being made. If you select this field, you can view the payments and select the single or multiple payments for which the refund is being made.
-
Indicates the refund transactions made in the current tax reporting year that are associated with a single payment made in a previous year. This check box is editable except when: a. Fund Source configuration is a Scholarship or Grant and the 1098-T option in Fund Source configuration is not selected. b. Fund Source of Other is specified as Grant and the 1098-T option in Fund Source configuration is not selected.
-
Indicates the refund transactions made in the current tax reporting year that are associated with a single payment made in a previous year.
-
The difference between the Final Grade and the New Grade Moderated.
-
Select whether you want to view Previously Matched ISIRs and unmatched ISIRs. If you select No (default), the grid will display only unmatched ISIR records (i.e., the Matches column = 0). If you select Yes, the grid will display all unmatched and previously matched records.
-
The amount of funds that have been previously requested for this fund source.
-
The initial list of records in the grid includes saved College Finance Plans that have not been viewed. The records marked "No" in the "Previously Viewed" column.
-
Sales price of the item in dollars.
-
Price of the used item.
-
The book price that was used.
-
Yes indicates that the instructor is primary. No indicates that the instructor is secondary.
-
If your institution wants to track primary positions for its records, select whether or not you want to make the staff position primary. The first position you assign to a staff member must be primary. If not primary, you can add them after you add the primary.
-
If the student has more than one agency affiliation, the associated agency affiliation record can be specified as the Primary Billing Affiliate. When the Primary Billing Affiliate check box is selected, the billing method associated with this agency will be the default in the Enrollment Wizard.
-
The name of the contact for the high school.
-
Indicates if the individual is the primary contact for the employer.
-
The name of contact for the employer.
-
The primary contact at the institution.
-
Enter a numeric value for primary EFC or SAI (2024-25 and later) for which you want to generate the report. For example, if you enter 0 in the Primary EFC From field and 25 in the Primary EFC/SAI To field, the report is generated for the specified value. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The email address. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
Primary Estimated Family Contribution (PEFC) is the EFC calculated by taking the income information provided by the student, based on his/her dependency model and whether he or she meets Simplified Needs, and applying it to the formula written by Congress. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Description of the primary fee charged by the institution for the loan.
-
For primary fees, specifies the amount. If you selected Percentage in the Primary Fee Type list, specify a percentage. If you selected Flat Amount in the Primary Fee Type list, specify an amount in the Primary Fee Amount field.
-
For primary fees, specifies the type. Select Percentage to enter a fee based on a percentage of the gross loan amount and specify a percentage in Primary Fee Amount. Select Flat Amount if the value you entered is in dollars and applies to all loans equally and specify an amount in the Primary Fee Amount field.
-
Name of the staff member who will be designated as the primary invigilator.
-
You can choose the primary location for the employer from the drop-down list. The options available for selection are those locations that are selected in the Locations field and are marked 'Active'.
-
The primary major included in the student's degree.
-
The primary section code for the class. It can include alphabetic and numeric characters. Like other fields in Anthology Student, you can rename the field to meet the needs of your institution using Settings > System > Internationalizations. You cannot save more than one record with the same primary section code, term, or course.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned, is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number or your institution can use some other method for assigning the ID.
-
The last and first name of the student. In some lists, the name of the student is highlighted. If it is highlighted, you can click the link and it will take to their Student Profile or a page available from their profile (such as their Documents list in Contact Manager). To display the Student Profile, you must have Common - Student - View authorization. If it takes you a page available from their profile, you must have authorization for that page. For example, if it displays their Documents list, you must have Contact Manager - Student Document - View authorization.
-
The amount of the payment applied to the principal.
-
Balance of the principal that remains to be paid.
-
Student’s current payment plan’s principal balance. This column is visible only if the interest batch was generated based on Payment Plans Principal Balance.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to show payment plans’ principal balance on the statement.
-
Select the Print option if you want the system to automatically print the information to be sent by mail to the student.
-
Select this check box to enable the Add/Drop Date field.
-
If an email is generated showing the specific type of award letter configured to the setting/trigger.
-
Whether the setting/trigger is configured to cause an award letter to print.
-
Whether the setting/trigger is configured to cause an award Web Alert to print.
-
Specify whether to print check numbers on the checks.
-
Select this check box to ensure that check numbers are printed for the stipend.
-
Indicate whether you want to print checks. Specify No if you want to post the refunds or stipends in Anthology Student and print the checks in some other system such as an Accounts Payable program. This option becomes available if you select Checks or Master Checks as a return method. All checks must pass validation before they are printed. An exception message is displayed for each check that is not validated.
-
Displays the method for printing the disclosure statement.
-
Select the check box if you want your disclosure statements to be printed at COD.
-
Select this check box to print the I-20 form for the selected student record.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate whether you want to include the Graduation Date. By default, the Graduation Date is included.
-
Indicates whether or not the batch prints labels option was selected to be printed after the statements are generated.
-
Select this check box to print labels after the account balances are printed.
-
Select this check box if you want to print labels after the balance statements are generated.
-
Indicates whether or not the batch prints labels after the statements are generated.
-
Indicates whether or not the batch you chose to print labels after the statements are generated.
-
Select whether leases should be printed through Anthology Student.
-
Specifies the items you want to print or the items that have been printed. If you are selecting the options, you must select Transcript. Label and Envelope are optional.
-
Indicates the information that needs to be printed. You can select one or more options.
-
If you selected Student Payments in the Type list, select the check box to specify that the promissory notes are printed using Anthology Student.
-
Print the receipt for the transaction. This flag is selected only if the Print Receipt Flag value is set to Yes in the Student Accounts Settings.
-
Select the check box to print the receipt for the payment when you select the Save & Close button. You must have Admissions - Deposit - Reprint to print receipts.
-
Select the check box to print the receipt for the payment when you select the Save & Close button.
-
Specify whether you want the system to print a receipt for payments received. By default, the value is set to Yes. You can override the default at the time of the payment transaction.
-
Prints the receipt for the payment when you select the Save & Close button.
-
Select the option whether or not you want to print refund calculation information.
-
Specifies whether the address and phone number for the student are included under the student name in the report.
-
Select Yes to print the student's phone number.
-
Choose between Print or Print History (which prints the history of printed checks).
-
Enabled if the student has connected enrollments.
-
The user who printed the statement.
-
The last date the certificate was printed.
-
The activity assigned to the contact manager.
-
Indicates whether or not the prints labels option was selected to be printed after the statements are generated.
-
Indicates the percent of their eligible amount that has been disbursed by the prior institution.
-
Box 4 amounts reflect negative payments for the previous year which will not be printed on the 1098-T form. The values are shown in the grid in case further verification or adjustments are needed by the end user.
-
Adjustments made to scholarships or grants reported on a prior year 1098-T in Box 5. The amount reported in Box 6 represents a reduction in scholarships or grants reported for a prior calendar year.
-
The priority of the task. The options are Low, Normal, and High. The default is Normal.
-
The priority of the task. The options are Low, Normal, and High. The default is Normal.
-
The numerical value priority of the selected transaction.
-
The priority of the policy line.
-
A numerical value that indicates the awarding priority. The field is editable only when ‘Award All Transaction Codes’ is set to Yes.
-
Specifies the priority for generating payroll. For example, if you have a faculty member with an onload assignment and an overload assignment, you would want to process the onload assignment so that the faculty member meets the requirements for overload. Note: Faculty Workload Management displays a blank value when the policy line belongs to the Parent (FTE).
-
Specifies the priority for generating payroll. For example, if you have faculty member with an onload assignment and an overload assignment, you would want to process the onload assignment so that the faculty member met the requirements for overload.
-
Numerical rating for the transaction's priority.
-
Indicates the student is assigned a priority status during registration.
-
You can specify the priority order to be evaluated when auto-resolving the waitlist with reservations. Select one of the following options: "1st Come, 1st Serve", "Cumulative Credits", or GPA.
-
Select the check box if the program is an approved prison program.
-
Specifies that only the owner of the group and the staff members that the owner grants access can use the group. The staff members must also be authorized to view groups.
-
A student or parent loan from a commercial, state-affiliated, or institutional lender used to pay for up to the annual Cost of Attendance, less any financial aid received. Specify the estimated loan amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Specify the interest rate for a private loan.
-
Private student loan - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the loan option does not apply to the student.
-
Process the transfer now or later.
-
The specific process you wish to create the STAR mailbox for (COD, Commonline, or Application Processing).
-
The specific type of job process (COD Import, Disbursement Eligibility, SFAA Initial, etc...).
-
The type of check you wish to print - Refund, Subsidiary Refund, or Stipend.
-
This status is used to update the document when it is being reviewed.
-
COD or Other.
-
Indicates the type of process. The types are Refunds, Stipends, and Subsidiary.
-
Select the check box to allow ACH payments to be processed through a payment gateway provider in the system.
-
Total process (refund/stipend/subsidiary) balance due to the student.
-
Select the check box to process change records for canceled disbursements.
-
Select the check box to process COD grants for the listed award years. Clear the check box to disable COD transmissions for an award year. If the servicer link is turned on by selecting a servicer (Setup / Campus Locations / Financial Aid), Pell and Direct Loan must be turned off for the Direct Loan ID and Reporting Pell ID in the Financial Aid Settings.
-
The system code for the Process.
-
Select the check box to have the payment gateway provider validate credit card transactions before they are posted to the student's ledger card. You can enable this check box, only when the Process Credit Card Payments Using Anthology Student check box is enabled.
-
Select the check box to have the payment gateway provider validate credit card transactions before they are posted to the student's ledger card. You can select this check box only when Process Credit Card Payments Using Anthology Student%] is enabled. If you select this check box, the campus is set for live credit card processing.
-
The date when the transfer will be processed. The process date must not be in the future.
-
The date the information was processed at COD.
-
Select the check box to process a Direct Loan for the listed award years. Clear the check box to disable Direct Loan transmissions for an award year. If the servicer link is enabled by selecting a servicer, Pell and Direct Loan must be disabled for the Direct Loan ID and Reporting Pell ID in the Campus Financial Aid Settings.
-
If the process failed or not (Yes or No).
-
The name of the Regulatory process, e.g., Application Data Import / Export or COD Export / Import.
-
Staff member or staff group and a Contact Manager (CM) selected for process level notifications.
-
The type of process related to exceptions: COD, Refunds & Stipends, Disbursement Batches, etc.
-
Indicates the message class group associated with the export or import. Valid values are COD, Application Processing, NSLDS, Other, and Multiple. Multiple indicates the process picks up files from more than one process, e.g., COD files and ISIRs.
-
Select the type of process that will be performed. The default value is Export
-
Type of process. For example: Refunds or Stipends.
-
The type of process related to housing. The options are: - Move Out - Renewal
-
The login name of the user who initiated the process.
-
Indicates that the assignment was processed from a batch. This column is hidden by default.
-
Which specific COD process (COD Import, COD Export, etc.)
-
The internal ID assigned to the batch that gathers the transactions by Anthology Student.
-
Indicates the processing mode. The options are Live and Testing. Testing indicates that you are sending dummy data using a test account. When you add a credit card or make a direct credit card payment in Test mode, you will be redirected to a hosted test page. When you make a single credit card payment in Test mode, the appropriate test URL will be used to post the test payment to the provider’s server for processing. Live indicates that you are sending real data. When you add a credit card or make a direct credit card payment in Live mode, you will be redirected to a hosted live page. When you make a single credit card payment in Live mode, the appropriate live URL will be used to post the payment to the provider’s server for processing.
-
Indicates the processing mode. The options are Live and Testing. Live indicates that you are sending real data. Testing indicates that you are sending dummy data using a test account.
-
Automated Clearing House (ACH) processor or credit card processor configured in Anthology Student.
-
Auto Draft Processor or credit card processor used to process the transaction batch.
-
The descriptive name of the product.
-
Specify the from and to number of the percentage program hours missed for which you want to generate the report.
-
The name of the program. Programs are configured by your institution.
-
The type of enrollment in the program (1/2 time, 3/4 time, etc.).
-
The programs that the student is interested in. This property is populated based on the campus selection. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
Select the program to configure an auto-charge amount for the program version of that program. This field is enabled only if "Override Campus Amount By Program Version" is selected.
-
The name of the program. Programs are configured by your institution. Select program(s) from the list to see transactions for students who are associated with the selected programs only.
-
Programs offered by selected campuses. The programs selected for stipend evaluation.
-
The name of the program associated with the program version.
-
Program from which classes will be added to the Class Sections grid.
-
The program that the requirement rule will be applied to.
-
The programs that the student is interested in. If you are selecting the values, you can select more than one program.
-
The program associated with the transcript batch.
-
The course of study, which must be the same for all students in this group.
-
The student's program attendance status for the award year.
-
The code assigned to the program when it was configured.
-
Select the effective date based on which the system assesses the STRF fee. If you select the effective date, the program cost schedule which has an effective date that is on or later than (and closest to) the specified effective date is used. If you do not select the effective date, the program cost schedule which has an effective date that is on or later than (and closest to) the date of the following hierarchy of dates is used: Enrollment Date, Enrollment Expected Start Date, Original Expected Start Date, Current date. This field is available only if the Evaluation Period is Enrollment Period.
-
Name of the person who has been assigned the role of Program Director by your institution.
-
The effective date for the program enrollment status being reported.
-
Indicate the program end date.
-
The end date of the program version.
-
Classifies the programs at your institution into groups. They are configured by your institution. Multiple program groups can be associated with a program. Since the multiple program group association occurs on the program level, program versions associated with the program are automatically associated with a program group as well.
-
Indicates the program groups that this program version will be associated with. If the program is already associated with some program groups, the program version is automatically assigned to the same program groups. Program Groups are displayed under the label, "Interest" on the Student Profile page. Program Groups are only displayed if they are active and configured using Configuration > Academic Records > Program Groups.
-
You can associate multiple program groups with a program. Since the multiple program group association occurs on the program level, program versions associated with the program are automatically associated with a program group, as well.
-
Classifies the programs at your institution into groups. They are configured by your institution. Multiple program groups can be associated with a program. Since the multiple program group association occurs on the program level, program versions associated with the program are automatically associated with a program group as well.
-
The programs to which the course group applies.
-
Indicates whether a student is enrolled in at least one program.
-
The duration of the program.
-
The unit of measurement for the program length, e.g., weeks, years (W, Y).
-
Name of the person who has been assigned the role of Program Manager by your institution.
-
Indicates whether the program meets licensure requirements (Yes/No).
-
Indicates whether the program meets licensure requirements. The values are Yes, No, and N/A (not applicable).
-
The program name associated with the career field.
-
The program name associated with the skills field.
-
An academic or career plan developed by an institution to help students move ahead in the institution and in their job.
-
Indicate whether the program prepares students for licensure in the state of the main campus. Select Yes, No, or N/A (default).
-
Indicates the number of the requirement rules attached to the program and the status of their progress. The value displays the number of rules that are currently fulfilled. The ruler icon appears in grey when the rules are fulfilled. It appears in red when the rules are not yet fulfilled partially fulfilled. The ruler icon does not appear if there are no requirement rules attached to the program.
-
Code and name of applicable programs. This information is available only if you select Report Type as Attendance Summary by Program Report for Clock Hour.
-
The sponsor designated by a state department as authorized to issue the certificate of eligibility to the student or exchange visitor.
-
The start date of the program version.
-
The type of programs available at the campus - that is either degree or non-degree. If the campus provides non-degree programs (NDS), Non-Degree is displayed. If the campus does not allow NDS enrollments, Degree is displayed, by default.
-
Indicates the program type available at the campus, that is either degree or non-degree. Degree is displayed by default for new program versions. Program Type is disabled when students are enrolled in a program version.
-
The program version associated with the student or item.
-
The program version associated with the student.
-
The program version associated with the student or item. This property is populated based on the campus selection. Program version is dependent on the program selected. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options. In the search results, a student's record is displayed per program versions if there are multiple enrollments. For example, if a student is enrolled in two different program versions, then in the search result, the student's record appears twice depending on the program versions.
-
The program version associated with the student.
-
The Program Version associated with the honors and badges.
-
The student's program version.
-
The program version associated with the catalog.
-
The program version associated with the charge.
-
The normal system default for this field is 'All Program Versions'. Configuring this field enables you to select a specific program version and set it against an enrollment allocation so you can auto package or auto repackage a single fund in multiple ways.
-
Specifies the program version for the student.
-
Name of the program version associated with a slot.
-
Name of the program version associated with an exam schedule.
-
Program version associated with the graduation ceremony.
-
The Program Version associated with the honors and badges. This field is displayed only if you select Student as the Type.
-
Indicates the student's Program Version. It is a read-only field.
-
The student's program version.
-
The Program Version that is associated with the student stipend.
-
Program version that is assigned to the student.
-
The specified program version that will be associated with the assigned honors and badges. If the specified term does not match the program version, N/A is displayed instead of the actual program version.
-
The name of the Program Version associated with the Slot.
-
The student's program version.
-
Select the program versions you want to use to filter. You must have selected one or more programs in the Program list to display the list of program versions.
-
The student's program version.
-
The name of the student’s program version associated with the subsidiary.
-
The program version associated with the subsidiary.
-
The enrollment and program to which the task applies. The list is only displayed if the student has the Anthology Student Status Category of Active or Enrolled (such as Attending for Active or Future Start for Enrolled).
-
The program version the term association configuration was copied from.
-
The program version associated with the transcript batch.
-
The program version code.
-
Code configured in the system for that program version.
-
The Code for the Program Version associated with the Slot.
-
The Code for the Program Version associated with the Slot.
-
The code assigned to the program version when it was configured.
-
Code associated with the program version.
-
Comments that will be included with the student's program version. This field will be displayed only if there are any comments specified for the selected program version.
-
Indicates the total number of hours required or the total number of credits for each program version. It also enables the authorized user to set a number of hours or a number of credits for each year of the program. This grid is only displayed when the policy unit is set to Hours Attended or Hours Scheduled and the time Period is set to Calendar.
-
A user-defined group of program versions based on OPEID, Campuses, Program Version combinations, and Clearinghouse Assigned Branch Code (if provided). The Program Version Group is created on the Program Version Groups tab of the Clearinghouse Export form.
-
The name of the program version.
-
The name of the program version associated with the career field.
-
Indicates the number of the requirement rules attached to the program version and the status of their progress. The value displays the number of rules that are currently fulfilled. The ruler icon appears in grey when the rules are fulfilled. It appears in red when the rules are not yet fulfilled or partially fulfilled. The ruler icon does not appear if there are no requirement rules attached to the program version.
-
Specify whether or not you want program version requires housing for the student.
-
The date when the student started the program version.
-
Indicates the date the system determined as the start date for the program version. If re-entry, it uses the re-entry date. Otherwise it searches in this order: version start date, expected start date, and enrollment date.
-
Specifies the maximum number of credits approved for program version transfer.
-
Select Yes to that the program version uses a clock to credit conversion rate. If you select Yes, you must also specify a value in the Conversion Rate – Prior 07/01/2011.
-
The student's program version.
-
The program version in which the student is enrolled.
-
The program version associated with the student or item. This field allows multiple selection. This field is populated when the type is set to Term.
-
Select a program version. Only program versions associated with the selected campus. The default value is set to Include All.
-
Select a specific program version to narrow your search.
-
Select the program versions which are California residency programs.
-
Program versions offered by selected campuses. The program versions that were selected for stipend evaluation.
-
Select the program version. Anthology Student assigns the degree, honor, or badge to the students enrolled in the program version. You can select only up to 20 program versions at a time.
-
Student program versions. Only students who are enrolled in the selected program versions will be gathered.
-
Student program versions. Only students with enrollment in the selected program versions will be gathered.
-
Program versions offered by selected campuses. Select program versions to evaluate stipends only for students who are enrolled in the selected program versions.
-
The program version associated with the student.
-
Choose program versions to filter student population by program version. Only students who enrolled in the selected program versions will have statements generated.
-
Select program versions which only students who are enrolled in those program versions will have registration bills generated.
-
Select program versions. Only students who are enrolled in the selected program versions will have statements generated.
-
Student's program version.
-
Select program versions that will be evaluated for Title IV credit balance. All students who are enrolled into the selected program versions will be evaluated.
-
Indicates the program version associated with the student or item. This field displays when the program version is set for incremental billing and earning.
-
The program version associated with the person or student.
-
Indicates whether the program is accredited. The values are Yes, No, and N/A (default). If you select Yes, you must specify the name of the Accrediting Agency.
-
The programs that the student is interested in. If you are selecting the values, you can select more than one program.
-
Select a specific program to narrow your search.
-
The name of the program associated with the course group.
-
Programs for which the document is required.
-
Specify programs to search only for transactions that belong to students who enrolled in the specified programs only.
-
Programs offered by selected campuses. Select programs to evaluate stipends only for students who are enrolled in the selected programs.
-
The programs that the student is interested in. If you are selecting the values, you can select more than one program.
-
The name of the program version associated with the skills field.
-
The current category associated with the course used for progression.
-
Select whether users can void a refund or stipend check if the check status is cleared. The options are "Check Cleared Date is not blank", "Check Cleared Date is not blank AND Check Status is Cleared", and "Check Status is Cleared". For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
The date range when the promissory note acknowledgment was received from COD.
-
The date range when the promissory note was printed.
-
The date when the promissory note was printed (if it was printed).
-
Indicates whether the borrower has signed the promissory note. The values are Yes and No. If you change the value to Yes, Anthology Student automatically changes the value of Promissory Note Status to Signed and the value of Include on Manifest? to Yes.
-
The status of the promissory note for the loan. The values are Not ready to print (default for a new loan), Ready to print, Signed, Printed (automatic), Pending (automatic), Accepted by COD (automatic), Rejected by COD (automatic), Inactive, Inactive Endorser Linked or inactive due to the linking of a PLUS loan with an endorser, and Closed. The field is editable if the loan is new or the status of the promissory note is Not ready to print, Ready to print, or blank. If you are adding a loan and print the promissory note while adding the loan, and the Prom Note Status is changed to Printed once it was printed successfully, the field is disabled even though the loan is still being added. For a loan disbursement export to COD, the MPN status must be Accepted.
-
Select the status of the promissory note for the direct loan. The values are: - Closed, - Ready to print, - Signed, - Accepted by COD, - Inactive, - Rejected, - Include All (default).
-
Preferred method of delivering the promissory note to the borrower. The values are Email, Paper, and Web. A value is required if the value for Recipient Processing Code is GP, PG, or CR. The value is Paper if the code is PO. The field is blank if the code is GO.
-
Indicates where the promissory note is printed. The values are COD prints and sends to borrower, COD prints and sends to institution, COD reprints and sends to borrower, COD reprints and sends to institution, school prints on-site, and electronic (only sent in the rebuild file).
-
Select the template of the Promissory Notice report.
-
The status of the promissory note for the loan. The values are Not ready to print (default for a new loan), Ready to print, Signed, Printed (automatic), Pending (automatic), Accepted by COD (automatic), Rejected by COD (automatic), Inactive, Inactive Endorser Linked or inactive due to the linking of a PLUS loan with an endorser, and Closed. The field is editable if the loan is new or the status of the promissory note is Not ready to print, Ready to print, or blank. If you are adding a loan and print the promissory note while adding the loan, and the Prom Note Status is changed to Printed once it was printed successfully, the field is disabled even though the loan is still being added. For a loan disbursement export to COD, the MPN status must be Accepted.
-
Select Yes to specify that the staff member is prompted to add a follow-up task when this task is closed. Select No to specify no follow-up task is needed.
-
Specify the number of days to prior to password expiration that you want Anthology Studentto begin displaying reminder messages to the staff member that the password will expire unless it is changed.
-
The pronouns to be used to address the staff and student.
-
The preferred pronoun of the student. The values that can be selected are configured by your institution.
-
The pronouns associated with the student.
-
Indicates if the student submitted proof of adequate health insurance to the institution. This information is required only for a student with a J-1 visa.
-
Select the properties that will be copied over to the new section or new term.
-
The property being evaluated in the entry for the type of requirement rule. For example, a GPA, credits, or hours.
-
The workflow property.
-
If the student only needs for the test to be in their Test Scores list under the Admissions tile on their Student Profile, select On Record. If the condition requires for the test to be in their Test Scores list under the Admissions tile on their Student Profile and that they have a minimum score on the test, select Score.
-
If the student only needs for the Course to be in their Student Courses List list under the Academic Records tile on their Student Profile, select On Record. If the prerequisite requires for the Course to be in their Student Courses list and that they have a minimum GPA, specify the minimum GPA value. If the student only needs for the test to be in their Test Scores list under the Admissions tile on their Student Profile, select On Record. If the prerequisite requires for the test to be in their Test Scores list and that they have a minimum score on the test, select Score.
-
Indicates the property on the rate schedule that has been modified, such as Rate, Course Level, Residency Status, Delivery Method, and so on.
-
The proposed pay level as per the compensation plan.
-
A Fee Type that will evaluate against the last academic year that may be shorter than a full-time full academic year to adjust to meet federal regulations. The calculation looks at the number of Credits in the Academic Year and Credits Exp. to Complete divided as a percentage along with the Weeks Enrolled in AY and Weeks Non-Enroll divided as a percentage. Regulation requires using the lowest percentage to prorate.
-
If you selected Calculate Total Program Costs for Inst Charges Calc Method when you configured the budget selected for this program version, specifies whether you want Anthology Student to use the weeks, credits, or clock hours in the calculation. If you selected Non-standard terms, Standard terms or quarters, Standard terms of semesters, Standard terms of trimesters, or Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar list, you can select Weeks or Credits. If you selected Clock Hours in the Academic Calendar list, you can select Weeks or Clock Hours in the list.
-
Category that classifies prospect sources into groups for the analysis of marketing effectiveness.
-
The date when the prospective student contacted the institution.
-
The range of prospect dates that you want included in the report. The prospect date is when the Student Profile was created for the prospective student or student.
-
If the configuration at your institution allows multiple inquiries, specifies the number of inquiries. First specifies the first inquiry even if it not the current inquiry. Current specifies the inquiry that has been specified as current. All Inquiries specifies all inquiries.
-
The source of the prospect specified on the Student Profile or inquiry. The values are configured by your institution and they indicate how a student heard about your institution. If you are specifying the value, the program displays a dialog that you can use to select more than one prospect source, vendor, or sub vendors.
-
The source of the prospect specified on the Student Profile or inquiry. The values are configured by your institution and they indicate how a student heard about your institution. If you are specifying the value, the program displays a dialog that you can use to select more than one prospect source, vendor, or sub vendors. This property is populated based on the campus selection. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The source of the prospect specified on the Student Profile or inquiry. The values are configured by your institution and they indicate how a student heard about your institution. If you are specifying the value, the program displays a dialog that you can use to select more than one prospect source, vendor, or sub vendors.
-
Select the default task template for a prospect.
-
Template that contains the information you want for a prospect. The list contains the prospect templates configured by your institution in the legacy interface.
-
The time of day the Student Profile record was first created for the new prospect or student.
-
The type of prospect. The values are configured by your institution. They are categories that classify your prospects according to any grouping your institution might find useful. For example, you can classify prospect sources into groups to analyze market effectiveness and determine the category of prospect sources that generates most prospects.
-
The type of prospect. The values are configured by your institution. They are categories that classify your prospects according to any grouping your institution might find useful. For example, you can classify prospect sources into groups to analyze market effectiveness and determine the category of prospect sources that generates most prospects. This field only appears when you have selected Applicant/Enrollment, Document Lists, Documents, Prospective Student, or Task in the Schedule Task For list.
-
The vendor for the prospect specified on the Student Profile or inquiry.
-
Specify the dollar amount for other campus jobs available to prospective and enrolled students.
-
Work-study hours per week available to prospective and enrolled students
-
Descriptive text added at the bottom of the institution's Shopping Sheet for prospective students.
-
Specify the dollar amount for work-study available to prospective and enrolled students.
-
Students can indicate on the FAFSA form that they have unusual circumstances that prevent them from providing parental data. If parental data is not provided, the students receive a provisional status as an independent student and a provisional SAI calculation. The record will be rejected, pending further action from the student’s FAA. You will have to review the student’s situation.
-
Specifies that any staff member who is authorized to view groups can use the group.
-
The date and time the schedule will no longer be visible to faculty and students via the Faculty and Student Portals. For example, you could specify the 1st day of the next term.
-
Date for publishing the exam timetable.
-
Date for publishing grades.
-
Date for publishing hall-ticket for exam.
-
Select this check box to launch the Publish Online form that allows you to configure how the data is displayed online.
-
Date for publishing re-assessment grades.
-
The date and time the schedule will be visible to faculty and students via the Faculty and Student Portals. For example, you could specify a date 14 days before to the term start date.
-
In most cases, it is the published code used in reports and documents for the course.
-
The alphanumeric published code assigned to the overridden courses by your institution.
-
The program length (in years) published in the institution's catalog.
-
The length of the instructional program in years, months, or weeks as published by the school. The published program length includes calendar breaks.
-
The numeric units associated with the published program length.
-
The unit of measure for the length of the instructional program as published by the school. Values are W (Weeks), M (Months), and Y (Years).
-
Name of the book publisher.
-
The policy purpose. If you select Validation, the policy will be used for load validation. If you select Reporting, the policy will only be used for reporting so that you can perform what analyses.
-
The date Anthology Student determined as the start date for the program version. If re-entry, it uses the re-entry date. Otherwise it searches in this order: version start date, expected start date, and then enrollment date.
-
Number of days after Post Withdrawal Disbursement notification to send a cautionary message to the user.
-
Number of days after Post Withdrawal Disbursement notification to send a critical message to the user.
-
The expiration date of the PWD notification.
-
The specific amount for the Post Withdrawal Disbursement.
-
Number of days for the Post Withdrawal Disbursement Date to expire.
-
The date the PWD notification was created.
-
The institution must indicate whether the program is a “qualifying graduate program,” as defined in 34 CFR 668.2, whose students are required to complete additional post-graduate training such as a medical residency. This item determines whether an extended residency cohort is used. Values are Y=Yes and N=No.
-
The quality points used in calculating the student's GPA.
-
The sum of quality points divided by the sum of credits attempted that affect the GPA.
-
The number of resource units.
-
The amount Anthology Student calculated by dividing the assigned value for the load type by the number of pay periods. For example, if the assigned value for the load type is 15 and there are 10 pay periods, the amount is 1.5. By default, the value is displayed as 1 for the lumpsum pay periods.
-
Indicate the interval or the number seconds the component will wait before it calls the API to get an updated count again. For example, every 60 seconds.
-
Indicate the API URL. For your example, if you have a query that returns the number of leads in the system then the count or total number from this query is displayed on the tile in the workspace. When you select the tile, the URL configured takes you to a report or view to see the details behind the count.
-
Specify the text of the question you want the staff member to ask.
-
Specify the text of the question you have in the housing application form.
-
The Question that you want it to appear to the user when the reason is chosen.
-
If your institution assigns a numeric or character code, specify the code. Anthology Student appends the code to the value for Question Number. For example, if the Question Number is 1 and you specify 2, the question number will be 12.
-
Indicates the question number in the application.
-
Indicates the selected question in the status.
-
Specify the text of the question you want to have in the admission application form.
-
Indicates the question type for the selected question. The options are Multiple Answer Multiple Select, Numeric only, Multiple Answer Single Select, Text, True/False, and Yes/No.
-
Specifies how the question is answered. If you want to select from a specific list, select List of Values. If you want a Yes or No answer, select Yes/No. If the answer is true or false, select True/False. If you want to specify freeform text, select Plain Text.
-
Indicates the question type for the selected question.
-
Lists of questions in the housing application. You can select the questions for roommate matching. The list of questions depends on the Match Type (manual or Automatic).
-
Configuration to queue awards for students and review the awards within the Auto Award Review Summary screen. You can Always Queue Awards, Never Queue Awards, or Queue Awards Based on Packaging Status Change.
-
The status of the selected queue (Ready to Transmit, Transmitted, Failed, No Files, etc...)
-
Select the check box if you want to run a trial to verify the students and certificate without serial numbers before generating them. The generated certificates with queue trial enabled will only be saved in the History tab of the process screen and will not be associated to the student record on Degrees Honors and Badges. By selecting queue trial, the degree certificate can be regenerated again for the First Time, Reissue, or Reprint since this is a trial file and is not recorded for a Student Profile. If the certificate is generated without selecting the Queue Trial checkbox for the first time, only then the certificates will be printed with serial numbers and the system will allow the user to print the same certificates again for the first time.
-
The member/group the R2T4 calculation record is currently assigned to (Staff Member, Staff Group, or FA Advisor).
-
When the Return to Title IV is calculated.
-
The status of the calculation once the Return to Title IV is generated.
-
Selecting the hyperlink displays the specific status as well as the Exempted reasons or Not Required reasons for that student's R2T4. For any student with a Refund Calculation in Review status or presented in Exceptions, no hyperlink is displayed. Note: This functionality is only applicable to Standard Term programs.
-
Freeze Date that is used for the Return to Title IV calculation.
-
If you select Standard terms in the Academic Calendar list, the field value defaults to the payment period. However, if you select Non-standard terms, Credit Hours without terms, or Clock Hours in the Academic Calendar list, you must specify the defined time frame for Return of Title IV Funds calculations for reenrollments and transfers. Select Payment Period to specify the time frame as the Title IV payment period. Select Period of Enrollment to specify that the time frame is the period of enrollment that the student was attending when the student withdrew from school.
-
Specifies Return of Title IV refunds imported for the servicer.
-
If you select Standard terms in the Academic Calendar list, the field value defaults to the payment period. However, if you select Non-standard terms, Credit Hours without terms, or Clock Hours in the Academic Calendar list, you must specify the defined time frame for the Return of Title IV Funds calculations. Select Payment Period to specify the time frame as the Title IV payment period. Select Period of Enrollment to specify that the time frame is the period of enrollment that the student was attending when the student withdrew from school.
-
Last date to raise an appeal on grades.
-
Indicates whether the range is credits or hours.
-
For the Academic Year billing frequency, the Range options are Academic Year, Credits, and Hours.
-
Select the billing range options. If the Posting Type is set to Detail, the Range options are Course Level Load, Credits, and Hours. If the Posting Type is Aggregate, the options are Course Level Load, Credits, Hours, Term, and Total Course Load.
-
For the Payment Period billing frequency, the Range options are Course Level Load, Credits, Hours, Payment Period Sequence, and Total Course Load.
-
Specific a dollar range above/below the Cost of attandance (COA) value, for example, +/- 1000. The Range field is disabled when you select the following Mode values: "Pell eligible but no Pell awarded" or "COA limited Pell awards".
-
The range start and end is the distance measured in miles between the campus and the student’s zip code. Campuses are not allowed to have active zones where the range start and end overlap.
-
The minimum allowed amount of credit hours.
-
The graduating rank of the student as the rank of the number of students.
-
Specifies a value in addition to the numeric and letter grade. For example, if a time competed needs to be recorded in the gradebook, you can specify it here.
-
Specify the dollar amount to be multiplied by the number of units (e.g., credits registered).
-
The interest rate specified for the interest calculation.
-
Indicates the basis on which the rate amount is configured. The options are - credit based, hour based, enrollment based, grade level and programs level.
-
The date when the cohort default rate was calculated by the Department of Education.
-
Specify whether or not you want the rate schedule form to configure amounts applicable to each grade or program.
-
The rate schedule amount applicable to each grade or program.
-
Select this option to configure amounts applicable to each grade or program: Credit Based – Specify the dollar amount per credit. Hour Based – Specify the dollar amount per hour Enrollment Based – Specify the dollar amount per enrollment
-
If you selected Cash or Other Outside Resources in the Type list, did not select the Apply Over Payments to Interest Before Principle and Recalculate Interest at time Payment is made check boxes, selected Post Interest Charges for Payments in the Interest Charges list, and selected Apply to Last in the Overpayments list, select the check box to specify that the plan is re-amortized when there is an overpayment on the plan.
-
Select a value from the drop-down list, for example, Do No Re-Award, Re-Award at Previous Award Level, or Re-Award Same Amount.
-
Conditions for re-awarding the fund (Award Level, Do Not Re-Award, Re-Award at Previous Year, or Re-Award Same Amount).
-
When selected, the student re-entered the program version after being out for more than 180 days from the NSLDS withdrawal date. When selected, Anthology Student sets the start date for the first sequence without estimated or approved financial aid to the re-entry date on the program version. If the student is enrolled in a program version that is configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms, the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool will also then monitor the progress of the student through the remaining time in the program.
-
When selected, the student re-entered the program version after being out for more than 180 days from the NSLDS withdrawal date. When selected, Anthology Student sets the start date for the first sequence without estimated or approved financial aid to the re-entry date on the program version. If the student is enrolled in a program version that is configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms, the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool will also then monitor the progress of the student through the remaining time in the program.
-
Date for publishing re-evaluated grades.
-
Triggers that will cause the auto-awarding process to award or recalculate a student financial aid award.
-
Select the disbursement template to re-expect. This field is editable only when Cancel Direct Loan is set to Yes.
-
Select the check box if you want to re-originate Pell when anticipated disbursement dates are updated (if the disbursement has not been released to COD). For non-term institutions (Academic Calendars 5 and 6), the system automatically sets the Origination Status of an originated Pell award from Accepted or Batched to Send to Ready to Send when the anticipated disbursement date is updated by the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE) tool.
-
When selected, the staff member can read tasks created for other staff members in the staff group if they also have Read selected for the task template in the Task Templates grid. For a staff member to be assigned a task, they must have a minimum of read permission for the task template in their policy.
-
When selected staff members can read their tasks and the tasks for any staff members in staff groups with Read permission selected in the Staff Groups grid. For a staff member to be assigned a task, they must have a minimum of read permission for the task template in their policy.
-
The start date for the collections. When the Ready for Collection Date is populated and the student’s Account Balance is greater than zero, then the system will automatically create a payment plan for the student with the payment plan’s amount equal to the student’s Account Balance. In addition, a red alert icon will be visible in the Collections tile to indicate that the student is in collection status. The payment plan will be created using the fund source that is marked with “Use for Outside Collections” for the campus. If such a fund source is not found, then a message is displayed.
-
When applying Credits to a Ledger Card, some institutions prefer to configure the system to remove previously Applied Credits from lower value transactions and apply them to higher valued ones. Alternatively, users can choose a sequence for processing charges, which will determine the order in which transactions are processed. Select Enable to remove previously Applied Credits when posting charges to Ledger Card.
-
Reason for the change in a record or a value in the record.
-
If the student or item could not be processed, the reason why it failed. If the the Job Status is Succeeded, it will be blank.
-
Indicates reason for non eligibility.
-
If the record failed one or more validations, select the View link to display a dialog that lists the reasons why a record failed validations. For example, a record can fail validations if the borrower has no phone number.
-
The comments specified in the Reason field when the person was added or last edited. It is optional.
-
Indicates the reason for changing the final grades for the student.
-
If the processing was not successful for the student, the reason.
-
If the processing for the student was not successful, the reason why. IF the column displays No Matches Found, the student was not found in Anthology Student.
-
If the record was not processed, the reason why. For example, if the disbursement was the fifth disbursement, it was not paid because the maximum number of disbursements allowed by CommonLine is 4.
-
Select a reason for changing the student's Placement Status.
-
Indicates the reason for the pay cycle mismatch.
-
This column is not used.
-
The eligibility/payment reason for the ACG award.
-
If the changes failed to be made for the student, the reason why it failed. For example, it displays a message when a graduation date could not be calculated. If the academic calendar was not configured to update a graduation date, it is not adjusted and displays the message. It is also displayed when the student could not be processed. In most cases, you can fix the error if you click the Retry Batch button on the toolbar.
-
Indicates reason for the change.
-
Select this option to see system-generated reasons related to the status change.
-
Reason for the change in a record or a value in the record. This value is required only if configured in Configuration > Academic Records > Student Status Change Reasons.
-
This field is enabled only when the new placement status has reason records. The values mentioned depend on either the program or the current student status.
-
The reason the validation failed.
-
The reason the English language proficiency is not a requirement for the program version. This is a SEVIS requirement.
-
Indicates that the selected student has been enrolled for financial aid disbursement.
-
The reason for the job result.
-
Select the reasons for which you want to generate the report.
-
When you select the link in the column, displays a list of the reasons why the disbursement was not approved.
-
The reason for the Leave of Absence (LOA).
-
Reassign a PDW Notification to a Staff Member, Staff Group, or Advisor.
-
The new fund source that the paid stipend will be reassigned to.
-
If you reassign tasks, specifies that any tasks that are still open for the student are reassigned to the new advisor.
-
Select this check box if any pending activities from the original Career Services Advisor are to be reassigned to the new advisor(s).
-
Select Yes if you want to reassign tasks to other staff members. The default is No.
-
The date when the item was reassigned.
-
The date when the application was reassigned to a new staff member.
-
The staff member that the application must be re-assigned to.
-
The rebate amount Anthology Student calculated for the disbursement. The rebate for each disbursement is calculated using the formulas documented in the Direct Loan Technical Reference. When a loan is added or the disbursements are edited, the system adds or updates the rebate amounts for each disbursement to the FaSched.InterestRebateAmt tabe.
-
The rebate amount Anthology Student calculated for the disbursement. The rebate for each disbursement is calculated using the formulas documented in the Direct Loan Technical Reference. When a loan is added or the disbursements are edited, the program adds or updates the rebate amounts for each disbursement to FaSched.InterestRebateAmt. When a user manually adds a refund adjustment to a loan that was accepted at COD, the system does not populate the Rebate field.
-
The rebate amount calculated by Anthology Student. Anthology Student uses the formula Rebate Amt = Gross Loan Amount * (Orig Fee % - Interest Rebate %) / 100.00).
-
The Recalculated Estimated Family Contribution (EFC) is displayed if the financial aid administrator initiated the ISIR correction process which caused the EFC to change. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
If you select Yes or a Y is displayed, it specifies that you want Anthology Student to automatically recalculate budget amounts based on the instructional weeks (IW) that occur between the academic year and loan period dates. All of these conditions must also be met for Anthology Student to recalculate. You must have selected Clock Hours or Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar list. Yes must have been selected for Use Monthly Amounts and Use Amounts Entered Here must have been selected for Institutional Charges Method when your institution configured the budget (Configuration > Financial Aid > Budgets). The amounts on the budget are multiplied by the value contained in the Instructional Months field to populate values in the budget section for the student academic year. Locked academic years and loan periods are not recalculated. On this page, you can filter the list using the Recalculate Budgets column to display only the program versions configured to recalculate the budget amounts.
-
If you selected Cash or Other Outside Resources in the Type list and Post Interest Charges for Payments in the Interest Charges list and you did not select Apply Overpayments to Interest before Principal, you can select the check box to have Anthology Student recalculate the interest at the time the payment is made.
-
The amount determined after recalculating the payout for the selected bursary.
-
The receipt for the deposit.
-
The path/location/address for the receipt mailbox.
-
Specify any comments or notes that you want to be printed on the notification of receipt.
-
The number on the receipt for the payment.
-
The receipt number for added transactions.
-
This status is used to update the document when it is recieved.
-
Amount received to date from the selected fund source.
-
The amount actually received by the student from the disbursement.
-
The date the institution received the item submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
The date the institution received the document submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student. It displays the date that the document was manually added from Anthology Student or Portal. If the document was manually added using Anthology Student, you cannot upload it again from Portal. If needed, you can add the document again so that it can be uploaded from Portal.
-
The date the institution received the item submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
The Receiver's TG Number obtained from the SAIG Portal. The TG Number (also referred to as the mailbox, SAIG mailbox, and Destination Point mailbox) is the number assigned to your institution when your institution enrolls in the Student Aid Internet Gateway (SAIG).
-
Indicate the title or the label of the recent student tile. By default, it is set to Recent Student.
-
End date of the reception event.
-
Number of addiotional guests student requested to bring with them in their post-graduation reception event.
-
Start date of the reception event.
-
Indicates the lender or servicer that receives the CommonLine data.
-
EDConnect, Global, etc.
-
Specifies the default process type that will be performed by the recipient of the CommonLine data (lender or servicer) when receiving applications. CR - indicates a school certification request. GO - indicates a guaranteed loan only. GP - indicates a guaranteed loan (before receipt of a promissory note) and print application/promissory note. PG - indicates a print application/promissory note and guaranteed loan (after receipt of a promissory note). PO - indicates a print application only. You can edit the field if the CommonLine Application Status is blank, R, N, or D. If a loan is being added, the default is the processing code specified for the recipient of this loan record. This can be located in the record in the CL Recipient table that matches the lender or guarantor criteria specified for the loan.
-
The recipient of the transcript request.
-
Any note or description included in the off campus employment recommendation.
-
Denotes if the student is recommended for off campus employment.
-
Indicates that the course is recommended. When selected, Anthology Student always displays the course at the top of the list. If you also specify a position using Order, the recommended courses are listed at the top in that order.
-
Select the option for which you want to reconcile records in the report.
-
If the batch has been reconciled yet (Y or N.).
-
Indicates whether the borrower is eligible for loan reconsideration. The values are Yes and No.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to include the Response Phone, Response Time, and Response Date fields on inquiries for students. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Admissions > select the Inquiries tile). When the prospect source is selected, the fields are displayed so that staff members can specify additional information related to advertising.
-
The number of records in the batch.
-
A unique identifier of the integrated entity record.
-
System-generated unique identifier for each record.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to view results for all the records or for specific records depending on due date and lender information.
-
Specifies whether or not the award letter printed. Failed indicates the letter did not print. Success indicates it did print.
-
Indicates the COD record type, i.e., Origination or Disbursement
-
Schools must report two record types, based on the student’s enrollment status and the selected reporting type, to NSLDS for student-specific data in the FVT/GE Submittal File: • Annual Amount (AA) Detail Record – The AA Detail Record is used to report all students who are enrolled through the end of the most recently completed award year and have, at any time, received Title IV funds for the program being reported. • Total Amount (TA) Detail Record – The TA Record Type is used to report students who have received Title IV funds for enrollment in the program being reported and have graduated or withdrawn during the most recently completed award year and prior award years. Prior award years are based on the selection of the Standard or Transitional Reporting Type.
-
Enrollment reporting record types are: 000 – Header Record; 001 – Campus-Level Enrollment Information; 002 – Program-Level Enrollment Information; 003 – Email Address (Optional); 004 - Program identifier Change Record; 999 – Trailer Record
-
Specifies the type of detail record in the Application Send file. A - specifies a new application submitted for processing. C - specifies a correction application submitted for processing (before guarantee). R - specifies a reprint of application. T - specifies a terminate request (Withdrawal of loan before guarantee. Once guaranteed, cancellation of a loan must occur using the Change Transaction send file.). When a new loan is added, the default value is A. This field can be edited only if the CommonLine Application Status is blank, R, N, D, or P.
-
The number of records in the batch.
-
If records in the batch have to be accepted by Anthology Student, the number of records that did not have exceptions and were accepted by Anthology Student.
-
Number of records exported.
-
Number of records imported.
-
The type of recruitment associated with the student.
-
Specifies the recruitment types for which the report is generated.
-
Select the condition you want for the records posted in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the Recs Posted between 1 and 5 only.
-
Specify the numeric value you want for records posted in the report.
-
Select the condition you want for the records unposted in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the Recs Unposted between 1 and 5 only.
-
Specify the numeric value you want for records unposted in the report.
-
The recurrence pattern for the class section.
-
Specify when the job occurs. Your choices are based on the selection in the Frequency field. If it is Daily, choose either 'Every Weekday' or 'Rotation of Days'. If it is Monthly, choose 'Days from start of the month' or 'Days from end of the month'. If it is Weekly, choose the specific day(s) in the Select Days pop-up form that appears.
-
Indicates the recurrence pattern of the schedule. The options are: • Occurs every • Occurs once
-
Select the recurrence pattern of the schedule, either "Occurs every" (Hour) or "Occurs once at" (H:MM:TT).
-
How often you wish the schedule to occur within the specified Frequency.
-
How often the scheduled job occurs (either 'At this time' or 'Every hour').
-
Indicates the manner in which the recurrence range will be applied to the class schedule. The available options are: - Start x Weeks after start of class - The number of weeks after the start of the class when the recurrence range will be applied to generate the class schedule. - No End Date - The recurrence range is applied to the entire term. - End After x occurrences - The number of recurrences after which the recurrence range for the class schedule will end.
-
Indicates that the interest charges will be reduced based on the selected fund source and fund range (if specified).
-
Indicates that the interest charges will be reduced based on the selected fund source and funding exclusion range (if specified). This option is available only if the Interest Charges Basis selected is Student Account Balance.
-
Indicates that the interest charges will be reduced by an incurred charge filtered either by date range or by term.
-
Indicates that the interest charges will be reduced by an incurred charges filtered either by date range or by term. This option is available only if the Interest Charges Basis selected is Student Account Balance.
-
If you selected Other Outside Resources in the Type list, you can select the check box to specify that your institution reduces the remaining balance to schedule when this fund source is awarded so that students are not over awarded. Do not select it if you do not want it to reduce the remaining balance for funds paid directly to the student (such as Veterans Administration benefits).
-
Indicates whether (Yes/No) the system reduces the total award amount of the Title IV fund and exports an Origination Change file to COD when a refund has been posted, exported, and imported as accepted so that the total award of the fund matches the amount paid and refunded as well as any scheduled disbursements.
-
Validate the account number by reentering the value.
-
Validate the password by re-entering the value.
-
Select an active student status for students upon reentry after attendance is first taken by selecting Set Status to Campus Active or Revert to Last Status.
-
The date when the student reentered the program version.
-
The start date when the student reenters the program version.
-
Select the check box to specify that Anthology Student can reevaluate the package and change the packaging status from a higher level to a lower level if it no longer meets the requirements for the level it is at. When the check box is not selected, Anthology Student will not change the packaging status from a higher level to a lower level. Once a package reaches a level where the Reevaluate check box is not selected, it never falls below that promotion level and packaging status automatically. See the help for the Auto Promote field for information about how these options work together.
-
Select this check box to allow Anthology Student to include lower and higher statuses from the policy to be re-evaluated. When this check box is not selected, only higher levels will be evaluated.
-
Select the between condition for the ref in the report.
-
Specify the Ref values to include only revenue transactions that are associated with those Ref values. Multiple values must be separated by a semi-colon (;).
-
Enter the ref values. For example, enter the range (1 ; 5) in the respective value field, the report displays the Ref between 1 and 5 only.
-
Enter the ref values. For example, enter the range (1 ; 5) in the respective value field, the report displays the Ref between 1 and 5 only. If you do not specify the Ref value specified, then the report will include all revenue records regardless of the reference associated with each individual revenue record.
-
A reference value.
-
A reference value for the charges.
-
Text matching operator for the reference value.
-
A reference value for the charge. This field supports up to 75 characters.
-
A reference value for the transactions for tracking or reporting purposes.
-
A reference value associated with the transaction.
-
A reference value for the STRF fee.
-
Indicates the transaction reference. This option is only available when the Refund option is set to Post Directly to Ledger Card (No Check Required).
-
A reference value for the charge.
-
The transaction reference.
-
Select the required reference field by clicking the right side of the field in the grid. The values are Addr1, AmSexID, City, DOB, Email, FirstName, HsGradDate, HsGradYear, LastName, MI, Phone, SSN, State, SyCountryID, Vet, and ZIP. The values defined are used by the Match Test Scores process for creating a new lead. For example, the field value is College Code. The College Codes can be mapped to campuses. - If the College Code was previously mapped to a campus, that campus is used as the student’s campus when creating a lead while importing tests. - If the College Code was not mapped to a campus, the default campus is used as the student’s campus. Configuration for Lead defaults is based on the setup of Create Lead for Test in Admissions to Yes.
-
The reference name for the deposit.
-
The number you can use to refer to the item (such as the reference number for a transaction or batch).
-
The reference number for the interest charge.
-
The reference number for the interest charge batch. The reference number will be associated with each interest charge to be posted to the students’ accounts.
-
A reference value for the transaction.
-
If there is an open batch for the campus, the revenue ref # configured by your campus. Anthology Student increments the number by 1 each time you recognize revenue and associates it with the transactions on the student revenue ledger.
-
Reference or batch number for the revenue recognition batch.
-
The reference number for the transaction.
-
The reference number for the transaction. Only transactions associated with the specified reference number will be displayed in the Results grid.
-
Reference value associated with the master check.
-
Select to display the Reference details on the check.
-
Select to display the Reference details on the check stub.
-
Select the start point from which the due days or due date for approval is calculated. Available options are Term Start Date, Term End Date, SLA, and By Date.
-
The Term to which the stipend applies.
-
For dynamic groups, indicates the frequency that Anthology Student uses to refresh the list of employers using the view for the group.
-
Enter the percentage of funds received to be refunded or retained.
-
The percentage needed to refund or retain the refund policy record.
-
The Refund value determines the processing order for refunds when repackaging fund eligibility adjustments. The options are: 1 — process first, 2 — process second, N/A — do not process.
-
The amount that will be refunded to the student.
-
The amount refunded.
-
The total refund from the Total Refund column in the Payments & Refunds grid.
-
The amount that is being refunded for the fund source. If the fund source was configured to round all disbursements to whole dollars, the amount must be in whole dollars.
-
The amount of the individual refund records associated with the master check.
-
Specify the refund amount of the housing deposit. This field is enabled only when you have selected Yes in the Refund Housing Deposit field.
-
The status of refund calculation.
-
The type of refund calculation.
-
Indicate the refund calculation. This field is set to COVID-19 as a default option.
-
Specify the date you want to be used as the effective date when calculating refunds. The options are 'Drop Date' and 'Last Date Attended'.
-
Indicates the status of the refund calculation. The options are New, Calculated or Posted.
-
The original date the refund calculation was displayed on the grid.
-
The date any calculation was modified via an automated job or updated manually by a user.
-
Indicates that the refund can be paid x days after the refund is calculated, that is either x days after Last Date of Attendance (LDA), student's Drop Date, or calculation date.
-
The date that the refund is due. Anthology Student calculates the date using the number of days that your institution configured after the disbursement date that the refund is due.
-
Specifies refunds imported for the servicer.
-
Select whether or not you want to refund the housing deposit.
-
Number of days before the refund is auto processed.
-
The method by which the refund will be made.
-
The name of the refund.
-
Indicates whether to schedule the refund or post the refund directly to the ledger.
-
Select the refund option. The options are Scheduled Refund or Post Directly to Ledger Card (No Check Required).
-
If you selected ACG Grant, Grant (Other than Pell), Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant, Pell Grant, SMART Grant, or Scholarship in the Type list, you can use the field to specify the first line displayed on the check and check ledger. If your institution also configures the fund source so that it allows editing of payee for refunds, a different payee can be selected when scheduled refunds are edited in Student Accounts.
-
The percentage to be refunded. If the refund policy was configured to be a manual calculation, you can change the value. The default is the percentage configured in the refund policy. If you change the value, Anthology Student updates the values for Earned Charges and Adjustments in the Charges & Adjustments list. The calculation is done only for transaction code configured in the refund policy with a Calculation Type of Calculate. For all other types, the value for Earned Charges and Adjustments do not change.
-
The date when the refund was processed.
-
Current system status of the selected Automated Refund Calculation's only, this status is not applicable for manually created refund calculations through Student Accounts. The status values for Return to Title IV and Institutional Refunds include Approved, Exception, Exempted, No Longer Needed, Not Required, Rejected, and Review.
-
The date of the currently listed refund status.
-
Indicate the refund status for the Scheduled Subsidiary Refunds report. The options are Non-Processed, Processed, Void and All. The default option is All.
-
Select the type of refund. The options are Stipends and Refunds or Stipends or Refunds.
-
Amount refunded to the selected fund source or stipends paid to the student to date from this fund source.
-
The amount that will be refunded or transferred.
-
The amount that will be refunded or transferred. It must be greater than 0. If existing scheduled refunds are applicable for a student, then this amount can not be greater than the difference between the student balance and scheduled refunds.
-
Any amount that has already been refunded for the fund source.
-
The amount refunded to the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
Select the Refunds option to include the Refunds transaction type in the search. This transaction type is available only if the Subsidiary transaction source is selected.
-
Indicates the amount of cash refunds.
-
The date the refund is due to be sent to COD or the date the stipend is scheduled to be paid to the student.
-
Indicates whether the class section has Registration Relationships.
-
Indicates if the class section has active Registration Relationships.
-
Regenerate the password configured for the registration group.
-
The admissions region. Region corresponds to Timezone in Anthology Student. The field is only displayed if your institution has configured zone assignments.
-
The status of registration. Available options are Yes and No.
-
Indicates the course must be registered as an audit course.
-
The registered student count high value. The count value must be greater than 0 and Anthology Student does not allow decimal value. The maximum value allowed is 9999.
-
The registered student count low value. The count value must be greater than 0 and Anthology Student does not allow decimal value. The maximum value allowed is 9999.
-
The number of students that have registered.
-
Of the number allocated, the number of students who have registered.
-
Name of the person who has been assigned the role of Registrar by your institution.
-
Select the registration bill type. The options are Summary, Detail, and Both. Select Summary to generate the standard (summary) student registration bill report. Select Detail to generate a detailed student registration bill report. You can also select Both (recommended option).
-
Specifies the Registration Cohort of the student. Whether a student can register during an Academic Session is determined by their Registration Cohort.
-
The date when the registration period end (usually the first day of class). If the Term is a parent term, Registration Start and End dates are not required. If the Term is a child term, Registration Start and End dates are required.
-
The date when the registration period is no longer valid.
-
The date when the registration period is no longer valid.
-
Last date for exam registration.
-
The Registration end date.
-
The time when the registration period is no longer valid.
-
The new registration group that the student will be associated with. Staff members can override the registration groups only if they are configured to do so.
-
Enables you to filter the students in the Students to Register by Registration Group.
-
The registration group that the student will be associated with. Staff members can override the registration groups only if they are configured to do so.
-
Indicates that registration holds for the students will be evaluated during the registration process.
-
Indicates that registration holds for the students will be evaluated during the registration process. Select Yes to override the registration hold and register students in the track or select No. Students who have No in the Registration Hold Override column will not be registered even if they are included in the batch.
-
Area you can use to display or specify comments or additional information for registration.
-
Specify a comment that you want to be printed with the registration information.
-
Specifies the document is to be configured as a course or course section prerequisite. Within the Permit Details tab, you can specify the course, for which the document should allow registration. This check box is enabled only when you select Academic Records option in the Module field.
-
Specifies the document is to be configured as a course or course section prerequisite. When you add a document using the Documents tile on the Student Profile, you will find the Permit Details accordion. Under Permit Details, you can specify the course, for which the document should allow registration. This check box is enabled only when you select the Academic Records option in the Module field.
-
Ensures that the students are registered to the correct class sections.
-
The start date of the registration period. If the Term is not a parent term, then Registration Start and End dates are required.
-
The start date of the registration period.
-
The start date of the registration period.
-
Start date for exam registration.
-
The Registration start date.
-
The start time of the registration period.
-
Specifies the status of registration. The available statuses are Open and Closed. Open indicates registration cut-off dates are not crossed and can be registered from portal. Closes indicates registration cut-off dates are crossed and cannot be registered from portal.
-
Indicates that the batch submitted is for registration or unregistration.
-
Indicates the term is used for registration and attendance.
-
Identifier of the Regulatory batch job. This column is hidden by default. To view it, select it in the Column drop-down. (You may have to hide other columns if the grid has too many columns.)
-
Reject reason codes indicate inconsistencies or missing data on the student’s FAFSA. Reject reason codes can be alpha or numeric codes. Alpha codes indicate reject reasons that are verifiable — that is, the student can verify the questionable data by re-entering the same value, or can correct it to a different value. Numeric codes are not verifiable; the questioned data must be changed or provided. In all reject situations, the questioned information is highlighted on the SAR and an EFC is not calculated. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
This status is used to update the document when it is rejected after a review.
-
Comma-separated reject codes received against this record in Response and System Generated Files
-
Reject Error Field included in the Response/Import File
-
Reject Codes can be alphabetic or numeric. Some reject reasons are verifiable—that is, the student can confirm the questionable data by reentering the same value or correcting it to a different value. Other reject reasons are not verifiable; the questioned data must be changed or provided. In all reject situations, the questioned information is highlighted on the SAR, and an EFC is not calculated.
-
Select this check box to exclude specific student records.
-
Specifies the type of FERPA address for the person. For a related address specified for a student to show up in this list, the Address Type selected for the related address must be configured by your institution as a possible FERPA address. If you need to add the related address, use the Related Addresses list for the student (Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Related Addresses tile). In edit mode, Related FERPA Address is disabled.
-
The relationship to the student (such as parent).
-
The dependent's relationship with the student.
-
Indicates whether the award has been released (Y/N)
-
If you have the transcript hold override permission, you can select Yes for "Release Only Federally Funded Terms". When Yes is selected, the transcript will include only courses from terms or payment periods that were paid with federal funds AND where institutional charges were paid, or arrangements were made for those charges. To include students on transcript hold, you must also select Yes for the “Include Transcripts on Hold” option. If you select No (Default) for "Release Only Federally Funded Terms", the transcript will include all completed terms.
-
Select whether you want to release to General Ledger as an automated month end process.
-
Specify the from and to number of the remaining credits to graduate for which you want to generate the report.
-
The balance amount remaining after the refund has been posted or scheduled.
-
The credits or hours remaining.
-
Indicates the amount remaining. If you use the load factor, the value is calculated based on the difference between adjusted load and consumed value and if not, it is calculated based on the difference between the default and consumed value.
-
The total remaining amount that is authorized for the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
The amount remaining in the student's ledger card.
-
The amount remaining to be paid for the payment plan
-
The value for Institutional Charges minus the value for Net Funding Scheduled. If this amount is greater than 0, additional funding may be necessary. If this amount is 0, institutional charges have been covered by the package. If this amount is less than 0, a stipend may be scheduled to return the over-packaged amount to the student to cover allowances (such as room, board, and travel). The estimated family contribution (EFC) used in the remaining balance to schedule formula is the alternate EFC that corresponds to the number of months in the academic year. If the number of months is 9, the EFC will be the Pell-paid EFC. If the number of months is not 9, the applicable alternate EFC will be used. Loan amounts used in calculating the Remaining Balance to Schedule are principal-only.
-
The remaining banked amount after subtracting the consumed bank amount for the faculty member.
-
The remaining credits or hours required to complete the program version. Anthology Student calculates the value by subtracting the hours or credits earned in the enrollment record from the required credits or hours.
-
Number of credits required for the student to receive a degree.
-
Number of years of remaining eligibility for the student.
-
The remaining FTE bank value after subtracting the consumed FTE bank value for the faculty member.
-
The remaining eligibility based on the Pell LEU from the student's ISIR.
-
The value for Unmet Need minus the value for Net Need Based Aid Packaged.
-
Specifies that students must have less than or the number of required credits or hours specified remaining in their program to meet the prerequisite and register for the course. For example, if you only want a student to register for a course in their last semester, specify the number of credits in the last semester.
-
Select this check to automatically add cleass sections.
-
The calculated remaining subsidized loan eligibility (in years).
-
The total remaining amount that can be committed for the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund.
-
Area for specifying additional information.
-
Any remarks included in the student's I-20.
-
Remarks included in the international student's DS-2019 or the earlier form IAP-66.
-
Indicates that the course is a remedial course. Remedial courses can be assigned to a student who is failing test grades.
-
Indicates that any attendance records submitted after the last day of attendance will be removed.
-
Select the check box if you want to configure the system to truncate campus-based aid awards during crossover periods.
-
Indicates that manually added courses are removed from the Course Category on the Degree Progress Audit. When the check box is cleared, manually added courses are not removed from the Course Category on the Degree Progress Audit.
-
If the student was removed from the group, the last and first name of the staff member who removed the student from the group.
-
Indicates whether the course is removed because of a retake.
-
The type of renewal for housing. The options are Academic Year, Housing Dates and Term.
-
Choose which action you wish to occur upon the execution of Auto Repackaging for the fund source.
-
Select the disbursement status of Paid, Scheduled, or Paid and Scheduled to only allow the increase or reduction of that specific status. A fund's Fund Source Priority configuration for Repackage Fund Level Award Increase/Decrease is verified during Auto Repackaging. The system will only increase/decrease by the Award Level Distribution of Past, Current, or Future configured terms and relevant against the system date,and against the Disbursement Status of Paid or Scheduled. This ensures that only those terms with that disbursement status will be increased/decreased evenly (not prorated) by the full award level increase/decrease. This does not apply to Pell awards because Pell cannot exceed the Pell chart value for individual disbursements.
-
Choose the repackaging method: Allocate, Default, Billing, or Simulation.
-
Choose the repackaging method: Default or Simulation.
-
Indicates that courses taken within this category will be added to the student schedule in a future status if the course has a Repeat Grade as configured in Configuration > Academic Records > Course Levels.
-
Indicates that courses taken within this category will be added to the student schedule in a future status if the course has a Repeat Grade as configured in Configuration > Academic Records > Course Levels.
-
Specifies one or more grades that require the student to repeat the course. If the grade is reported for the course and the program version is configured to allow Repeat (Configuration > Academic Records > Programs > Program Version > Course List > Category), Anthology Student automatically adds the courses with this course level back to schedule for the student.
-
Specifies whether the students in the report are added or replaced in the student group. Select No to add the students. Select Yes to replace the students.
-
Specifies the grade that automatically replaces the incomplete grade after the expiration deadline date has passed.
-
When selected, specifies that the staff member can view the document on the Document Tracking page and in the Documents list for the student.
-
The data translation report is an Excel file that includes the success/failure result of all the data translation entries along with the reason for failure.
-
Configuration to report awards for students by either Award Year or Academic Year. Note: Whatever setting is configured in Settings > FA > Package will be displayed within this field.
-
Indicate whether you want to see the student account balance (across all enrollments) for each distinct selected term that are found on the student’s ledger card. By default, this field is set to No. When this field is set to No and the Terms field is: • Set to Include All, then the report calculates the student’s account balance as an overall balance (across all enrollments) for each student based on the provided report criteria • Specified with term(s) then the report calculates the student’s account balance as an overall balance (across all enrollments) for each student based on transactions associated directly with the selected term(s) only. When this field is set to Yes, then you can select one or multiple terms to calculate the student's account balance. The report calculates and displays the balance for each of selected terms that are found on the student's ledger card from all enrollments.
-
The date of the record set.
-
Select this option to report expected disbursements to COD that have been canceled. This option is available only when the automated COD Export process has been switched 'On' in Automated Processes for that particular reporting entity ID. Additionally, the campus that is using this reporting entity ID has Automated R2T4 turned 'On' and will not cancel the scheduled disbursements.
-
You can use this field to specify the courses to be printed in a catalog friendly format for review, to post online, etc.
-
This is selected to report a new incident.
-
The name of the report.
-
The Report Name column is hidden by default. If displayed, it will indicate the name of the COD Export report, i.e., Extract Report.
-
Enter the report Pell ID value for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the reporting Pell grant ID for this campus. This ID is used by several campuses if they are organized under one corporate identity.
-
The Start Date and End Date of the report. The start date must be a date before the end date.
-
The type of report, that is, summary or detail report.
-
The type of report, that is Attendance Summary or Attendance Summary by Program for Clock Hour.
-
Indicates whether the Gainful Employment report is a Student or Program type file.
-
Specifies the type of report. The options are Ethnicity of Financial Aid Report and Other Financial Aid to TEG Recipients Report.
-
Select the type of report output you want to generate. The values are PDF and Excel (Micrsoft Excel).
-
Select the report type option: PDF (default) or Excel.
-
If you want information about the institutional refunds, including the transaction codes and the academic year and payment period (if any), select Detail. If you want the totals from the Return of Title IV calculation, select Return of Title IV Calculation.
-
The type of report that you want to generate for the State of Texas. The options are Financial Aid Database Report and Texas Grant Report.
-
Name of the staff member who reported the malpractice.
-
Reported Value included in the Response/Import File. This field only displays the data from the most recent import response.
-
Indicates the term is used for reporting only.
-
Identifier assigned to the school that sends and receives data for the campuses it serves.
-
Select the value from the list of Reporting Entity IDs for the campuses that you have access to. The default selected Report Entity ID is the Report Entity ID associated with the default campus for the logged in user. Depending on the configuration of your campus location, Pell grants and Direct loans can have the same or different Report Entity IDs.
-
The Campus Reporting Entity ID (Pell or Direct Loan) is captured based on the configuration in the COD Export Job.
-
The school that reports the Pell and/or Direct Loan data in the COD Common Record format for the campuses or students it serves.
-
Select a Reporting Method. The options are R - Report Date and T - Term.
-
Select the reporting method. The system supports only Amount Billed as the method of reporting.
-
The reporting method for 1098-Ts is based on Payments Received up to the total amount of Qualified Tuition Related Expenses (QTRE). This field cannot be changed.
-
This option is no longer applicable.
-
Name of the person the staff member should report to.
-
Date the item was requested.
-
Select the document to request for the condition specified by the operator and answer in the row.
-
Indicates whether the transcript request letter is being sent to a college or high school.
-
The ID assigned by the system to the request for your approval.
-
The outstanding transcript request indicator.
-
Specify the number of times a transcript request has been made to a particular institution for a specific student for which you want to generate the report. For example, if you have selected the Greater than option in the Request Indicator field and specified 1 in the Request Indicator Value field, Anthology Student displays only those Transcript Requests with a Request Indicator of 2 or greater. The Request Indicator Value allows the requesting institution to determine how many times a request has been made to another institution so that they can pursue further efforts (such as phone calls, emails) to obtain the missing documents.
-
Select the condition for Request Indicator output in the report. For example, if you select condition ‘Between’ and enter the range (1 ; 5) in the respective value field, the report displays the Request Indicator values between 1 and 5 only.
-
The number associated with the transcript request.
-
The type of the transcript request and is included for inbound transcript requests. The source of the document is either College or High School.
-
The type of request made.
-
The Request Type options are Transfer Student Monitoring, Financial Aid History, and Both.
-
The name of the person who submitted the request.
-
The date when the institution requested the documents submitted by the student, or by persons and organizations connected with the student.
-
Total loan amount requested by the borrower when the PLUS application was completed.
-
You can select the link to view the details of the request and response JSON.
-
Enforce that the child term’s end date must fall within the end date of the parent term.
-
When you select a list of documents in Document List, Anthology Student selects and then disables the check box.
-
Select the check box to specify exam scheduling is required for the lesson.
-
Select Yes to require staff members to select a reason when they edit a final grade for a student on the Student Courses. If you select Yes, your institution must also have configured the reasons for final grade changes using the Configuration tile.
-
When you select one or more fund sources in the Fund Source Type list, Anthology Student selects and then disables this check box.
-
You can use this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated for a housing deposit when housing is required for a student.
-
Specifies whether or not you want Anthology Student to also generate earning lines for an assignment. For Yes, the assignment type can be selected in compensation plans and is included in payroll.
-
Indicates whether you want to review the process pending charges/adjustments before the records are posted to the Student Ledger card.
-
Select whether you want to enable the process of Pending Charges/Adjustments before the records are posted to the student ledger. If you enable this field, the system disables the Immediate Posting Adjustments field resulting in automatically re-evaluating the charges for the term and immediately posting the adjustments to the ledger.
-
Select Yes if your institution requires rooms to be assigned when class sections are added using the Class Scheduling tile.
-
Select the check box to specify that staff members must select one of the configured disbursement schedules when they add the award. This option is not available when Fund Source Types of Other Outside Resources and Student Payments are selected.
-
Select the check box if you want disbursements for the fund source to be scheduled before they can be posted by Student Accounts. Do not select the check box if you want to post disbursements in Student Accounts without requiring that they have a scheduled disbursement first. This is a quicker method of posting disbursements to a student ledger. When you post the payment in Student Accounts, you are prompted for a minimal amount of information concerning the financial aid and Anthology Student will create the disbursement in Financial Aid. If you selected Other Outside Resources or Work-Study in the Type field, the check box is disabled because it does not apply. For all other fund sources in the Type list, it is selected by default. The check mark cannot be removed if you selected Direct Plus Loan, Direct Subsidized Loan, Direct Unsubsidized Loan, Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant, Pell Grant, Perkins Loan, or TEACH Grant.
-
Select the check box if a credit card selection is required. When you enable this check box, the Process Credit Card Payments Using Anthology Student check box is enabled.
-
Select the option you want Anthology Student to use for Start Date validation. The options are Not Required, Required and Modifiable, and Required and Not Modifiable. If you select an option for required, start dates must be configured and tied to the appropriate program versions, and Anthology Student will list the start dates available for the program version selected during the enrollment process. Best practice is to configure the Start Date field as Required and Modifiable or Required and Not Modifiable. This allows institutions to make sure the start dates tied to students enrollments are accurate based on the start dates configured and tied to the program versions, as well as, leverage term association for building out the student’s academic years for financial aid.
-
This is a mandatory field to choose(Yes/No) if you want to configure Examination Levels with Subject Level requirements. Choosing Yes here will enable an additional column in the Grades pop-up, and you can choose one of the following options - Lower Grade, Higher Grade, or Standard Grade.
-
Select Yes if your institution requires class schedules to be associated with a specific term.
-
Specify whether you want to enter require terms when posting charges and adjustments. This option applies system-wide to all charges/adjustments. When posting certain transactions, a term code may not be relevant. The Required Term Code Override allows an override on each transaction code.
-
The number of credits or hours required for the course or enrollment.
-
Indicates the book is required for the course.
-
This indicates that the resource is required in this room.
-
Indicates the resource is required for the course.
-
Indicates that the data against this check box is required by your institution and is validated before saving. If this check box is selected, you must enter the information for this entity wherever it is displayed in Anthology Student. The rows with a green background indicate that the check box value can be modified and the rows without a green background indicate that the check box value cannot be modified. If you hover over the rows, it displays Not Allowed icon.
-
Indicates that the data against this check box is required by your institution and is validated whether the field has a value before saving. If this check box is selected, users must enter information in this entity wherever it is displayed in the system.
-
Indicates if the Course is a required course or not.
-
Indicates if you want the user response to be a required field in the housing application.
-
Select the check boxes under the Required button to make the selected fields mandatory through the form.
-
Indicates that the selected prerequisite is required for the course. This check box is selected by default. If you clear the Required check box, the Optional check box is selected instead to indicate that the prerequisite is optional
-
Select whether or not you want to indicate if the data entry person is required to type information in the designated field.
-
Yes specifies that the scheduled task is required. No specifies that the task is not required.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include this test score to check the academic skill levels of students.
-
Courses that have Required set to Yes.
-
The required number of courses for the category.
-
The courses that are required for this category.
-
Specifies the number of credits required for this area of study. The Min. Cum. GPA and Required Credits values are used to create a relationship between the degree, core courses, and grades required to attain the degree. Anthology Student checks continually to ensure that students meet their degree requirements.
-
The required number of credits for the category.
-
The credits required for the category.
-
The start date of the externship, if the program version is configured to require an external start date.
-
The required number of hours for the category.
-
The hours required for the course category.
-
Select the skills required for the job.
-
Select Yes to specify that the DSO must review the data before it is sent to SEVIS. If you select Yes, the DSO is also the only person who can set a batch transmission Status to Ready to Send. The value is required, but contains a default of No.
-
Select the check box to require term codes on disbursement imports.
-
Indicates if you want the user response to be a required field in the admission application.
-
Select the required check box for each step that you want to designate as a step in the student enrollment process. The optional step is Advisor Selection.
-
Select the required check box for each field that you want to designate as a required field at the time of enrollment.
-
Select the required check box for each field that you want to designate as a required field on the Student Profile.
-
Course that fulfills the requirements of the current enrollment.
-
The name and code of the requirement rule.
-
The code for the requirement rule.
-
The code of the requirement rule.
-
The name of the requirement rule.
-
Indicates the status of the requirement rule. The values are Fulfilled or Unfulfilled.
-
The requirement rules that are associated with the program.
-
Indicates the requirements rule type. The options are- Advanced - Rule Based, Advanced - Course Levels and Course Attributes, Test, Document and Standard.
-
Indicates whether the student requires audit advisement. It is specific to the student registering for the class.
-
Select Requires Advisement to place an advisement hold on any student in this registration group. When you select Requires Advisement, you must choose an option in the Advisement Type field: a) The student can obtain a Password and provide this to the Advisor to release the hold and continue enrollment. b) The student is automatically placed in a Student Group. The hold is lifted when the advisor has confirmed that the student has satisfied the requirements and the student is removed from the group.
-
Select to specify that all bursary transactions require an application.
-
Select this check box if attendance is mandated by an outside entity for students receiving the fund source. If selected, the last day of attendance (LDA) is used as the NSLDS Withdrawal Date.
-
Indicates whether the student requires audit advisement. It is specific to the student registering for the class.
-
Indicates whether or not the extended property requires authorization. If you select Yes, the Property Security grid is enabled.
-
Select an option for requires housing for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates that the term should be included in the automated pre-pull and add-drop processes.
-
Indicates that the selected campus requires credit card validation for payments. When you select the specified campus for a payment, Anthology Student validates the credit card payment.
-
The requisite name configured for the class section.
-
The options are Prerequisite or Corequisite. Prerequisites allow registraion when they are met. Corequisites are courses that must be taken along with another course. Once you select the type of requisite and click one of the Save buttons, the field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of requisite.
-
The options are Prerequisite or Corequisite. Select Prerequisites for prerequisites and anti-requisites. Prerequisites allow registration when they are met. Anti-requisites deny registration when they are met. Corequisites are courses that must be taken along with another course. Once you select the type of requisite and select one of the Save buttons, the field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of requisite.
-
The options are Prerequisite, Corequisite, and Prerequisite/Corequisite. Select Prerequisites for prerequisites and anti-requisites. Prerequisites allow registration when they are met. Anti-requisites deny registration when they are met. Corequisites are courses that must be taken along with another course. If you want to give the student the option to take the course as a prerequisite or corequisite, select Prerequisite/Corequisite. Once you select the type of requisite and select one of the Save buttons, the field becomes read-only because the conditions depend on the type of requisite.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the prerequistes and corequisites specified for the course using the Requisites tile to the new course.
-
Reschedule the transaction adjustment for a later date.
-
Select Reschedule to include the transaction the next time the Refunds/Stipends process is run. If you need to repost a voided transaction that was accidentally voided, the best practice is to select the Reschedule check box whenever you void a refund transaction. This ensures that the voided refund reschedules for another refund with the same amount. If the Reschedule option is not selected while voiding, you need to post a manual payment for the student or post another refund.
-
Select the type of research. The types are configured by your institution.
-
This status is used to update the document when the Post Withdrawal has been resent in an email by a user.
-
Resend the PWD notification to the student.
-
Specify the number of hours for the seat reservation to expire. This field is enabled only when you have selected the Automatic option on the Waitlist Notification field.
-
The "future reserved" course status that is assigned to a student when the student registers for a class using the portal.
-
Clears the Ready for Collections Date and cancels all collection-related scheduled payments.
-
If you want Anthology Student to verify the state of residency and number of years, select the state. If you select a value, you must also specify a value in the Residency State Years field. Anthology Student checks the dependency status for the student and then uses the state from the ISIR or FAFSA.
-
Specifies the number of years prior to the award year that the person must have been a resident of the state selected in the Residency State field to meet the criteria. For example, if you specify a value of 5 and Anthology Student is evaluating the 2016-2017 award year, the person needs to have been a resident of the state since January 2011.
-
Select the residency status. They are configured by your institution and can be used for billing and reporting. If the rate schedule is for a specific campus, this field displays (for selection) a list of all active Residency statuses that are associated with the Residency Types configured for billing for the campus. If the rate schedule is for all campuses, this field displays (for selection) a list of all active Residency statuses that are associated with the Residency Types configured for billing across all campuses. The default value is set to All Statuses. For additional information on Residency Status, see General Background for Rate and Course Schedules.
-
Select the Residency Status to indicate that the billing rate applies to students associated with the selected residency status only. If the rate schedule is for a specific campus, this field displays a list of all active residency statuses associated with the Residency Type configured for the billing campus. If the rate schedule is for multiple campuses, this field displays a list of all active residency statuses associated with the Residency Types that are configured for billing across all selected campuses. The default value is All Statuses. The All Statuses option enables you to configure a generic rate to bill all students whose residency statuses cannot be determined or students whose residency statuses are not configured with a specific rate on the rate schedule.
-
Select the residency type. Residency types group your residency statuses so that the residency statuses that they contain can be used by different areas of your institution (such as Student Accounts, Academic Records, and Financial Aid).
-
Select an active Residency Type to be used for billing purposes. Residency statuses associated with the selected residency type will be available for selection when configuring rate schedules for Term billing methods for the campus. For additional information, see Configure Residency Types.
-
The date when the student or person became a resident of the state.
-
Select the option to resolve multiple students. The options are College Choice on ISIR and Importing Campus. ISIR Matching matches the ISIR to the campus if any of the multiple First College Choice codes (defined in Setup) exist in Colleges 1-10 on the ISIR.
-
The resource name.
-
Specifies the list of resources provided in the room.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the resources specified for the course using the Attributes, Skills & Resources tile to the new course.
-
Response to the electronic draft processing job, e.g., Approved.
-
Response from credit card processor regarding the status of the credit card transactions, e.g. Approved or Error Code.
-
Indicates the reasons for non-payment by the ACH Processor. Typical reasons are insufficient funds in the student's account (NSF), incorrect routing number, and account closed.
-
Response codes must belong to a named group, which you add by selecting Response Code Groups on the right and selecting Add Group. Edit the name of the new group by selecting the name field and editing the text. Move Response Codes to a named group by highlighting the code and then dragging and dropping it into the desired group. The Unassigned group is a placeholder and cannot be configured.
-
If your institution has configured one or more of the sources you selected for Prospect Source to capture advertising information, the date when the student responded to the advertising campaign.
-
Code that explains COD processing results, including data corrections, duplicates, and record rejects, for specific processed records for all award years.
-
Displays the COD response error codes in a comma-separated list.
-
Displays the COD response error fields from all error fields provided on a record in a comma-separated list.
-
Response Error Message included in the Response/Import File
-
COD file import response message.
-
Displays the COD response messages from all error codes associated with the record in a comma-separated list.
-
If your institution has configured one or more of the sources you selected for Prospect Source to capture advertising information, the phone number that the student used to respond to the advertising campaign.
-
If your institution has configured one or more of the sources you selected for Prospect Source to capture advertising information, the time that the student responded to the advertising campaign.
-
Indicates the response for the particular question.
-
The allowable limit for transactions in this cash drawer for each session. After this limit is reached, Anthology Student will not process any transactions after this limit is reached.
-
Yes = The total award is limited to the award limit specified (and may result in multiple modifications to the award amount.) No = The total award is not restricted to the award limit specified.
-
If you selected Cash or Other Outside Resources in the Type list and you selected Post Interest Charges for Payments in the Interest Charges list and you also selected Re-Amortize Student Plan Overpayment, select the check box to specify that the minimum payment must be at least the amount of the accrued interest.
-
Select the check box to restrict users from scheduling payment plans that end more than a configured period of time past the graduation date. When you select the check box, Number of Days following the Graduation field becomes editable.
-
Select this check box to restrict student self-service registration to courses applicable to their program.
-
Indicates the processing result for job. If it was successfully processed, it displays Passed or Succeeded. Otherwise, it displays the reason why it was not processed.
-
The Result column lists the reasons why a student is not included in the 1098-T batch and indicates whether the student can be added to the batch for the selected tax year and TCC. The grid displays all reasons applicable to the student, that is, there is one row for each reason.
-
Indicates the result of the load validation. The types of results are: - Passed indicates that it passed for the policy line. - Passed by Overload indicates that it passed by overload for the policy line. - Passed By Parent indicates that it passed by a parent for the policy line. - Failed indicates that it failed for the policy line.
-
Indicates the result of the processing for the student. If the job fails, this field displays the reason of the failure.
-
The results of the batch processes.
-
Indicates the results of the processing. If the file was successfully created, it displays Exported. If the file was not exported, it displays the reason why.
-
Indicates the result of the load validation. Passed indicates that the assignment passed all the policy lines in the policy. Failed indicates that it failed for the policy line.
-
If your institution has a policy where a test result can expire and will not be used in the decision process after that date. The expiration date may be different based on the Date Taken.
-
The message that is returned after the transmission is submitted.
-
Indicates the result of the processing for the student or item in the job. If they were successfully processed, it displays Matched. Otherwise, it displays the reason why it was not processed.
-
Indicates the print status of the award letter for the student. If it was successfully processed and can be printed, it displays Passed.
-
If the job succeeded, the field is empty. If the job failed, the field has a "Details" link. Select the link to view the reason for the failure.
-
Indicates whether a refund/stipend record has been successfully processed and displays the status as Succeeded or Failed accordingly. - For all refunds/stipend records with return method that are not Credit Card or ACH as well as Credit Card and ACH refunds/stipends that are associated with campuses with no credit card or ACH processors configured, these records are posted to directly to the ledger card. - For Credit Card and ACH refunds/stipends that are associated with campuses that have credit card or ACH processors configured, a successful result indicates that the refunds/stipends are not approved and ready to be processed through the Process Electronic Drafts process.
-
Select this check box if a resume is required with the job application.
-
Select this check box to indicate that confirmation is to occur on Academic Year/Loan Period (AY/LP) sequence attributes (credit/hours and weeks). For additional information on Retain AY/LP Progression, see General Background for Student Pace Evaluation.
-
Not Set: Modifies the LDA based on the "Retain LDA on Unregistered Courses" campus-level setting. This setting is applicable until overridden by a similar setting contained within a specific course reason code. No: Clears the student's attendance records for the unregistered courses. In addition, this setting resets the LDA to the last date the student was in attendance in courses other than the unregistered course. Yes: Retains the LDA for the specified course even when the attendance records are removed.
-
Select this check box to keep the course LDA when unregistering a course, even though attendance is being removed. For additional information on retaining LDA on registered courses, see background information for academic records for campuses.
-
Specifies the action taken for the last day of attendance (LDA) for the unregistered course. Yes specifies that LDA is kept for the course even though the attendance is removed. No specifies that the LDA is removed from the attendance records for the student for the unregistered course and reset to the last date the student was in attendance in courses other than the unregistered course. If you do not select Yes or No, the LDA is determined by the Retain LDA on Unregistered Courses configuration option unless it is overridden over ridden by the Retain LDA on Unregistered Courses setting for a specific course reason code or term.
-
The check box is only displayed for dynamic and static groups. When the check box is selected, the students you added manually are included in the group and the students you excluded manually are excluded from the group when it is refreshed.
-
The status of the retake course, for example, Current Retake.
-
Indicates the retake status of the course if a retake exists. A retake for a better grade usually does not progress a student, but a retake for a passing grade does progress a student.
-
If you select Yes, you are indicating that this course is a retake course and the retake methodology will apply to the course for the calculation of all GPAs for all instances of the course that the student attempts. This course generally should be considered a course whose credits can apply only once to the program. Retake methodology does not currently apply to the DPA or Pathway and courses that are taken and fulfilled more than once but are retake=Yes can have their extra instances moved to Courses Not Applied. If you select No, you are indicating that this course is NOT a retake course but rather a Repeat course where students can take the course multiple times and have each instance apply to their GPA and to their DPA categories. Repeat courses are not subject to retake methodology and all instances of the course will count within the GPA calculations.
-
Select this option to mark a transaction code as a retake fee. The Bill Type for Retake Fee can be set to Students only, Miscellaneous receipts only, or Both.
-
Indicates that the course requires a retake fee. Retake Fee is enabled only when Retake Course is enabled. The default is No.
-
You can select this option to mark a transaction code as a retake fee. Note that the Bill Type for Retake Fee can be set to Students only.
-
Includes that any retake fees will be included when processing the charges.
-
Indicates the method of retaking of the course if a retake exists. The options are Average Retakes, Include All, Use Highest, and Use Most Recent. If you are configuring grade scales, there is also an option to use the retake methodology configured for the campus.
-
Any time a course earns the credits or hours, receives the minimum grade point, and then the course is retaken, it will not be used to progress the student in the Student Pace Evaluation (SPE). If you set the Retake Override to Yes, this course would no longer be considered a Retake and would be included in the progression. The Retake Override setting of Yes overrides the original course configuration, course category, or minimum grade point requirements. If you set the Retake Override to No, the configured Retake Methodology applies.
-
The status of the retake course, for example, Retake Completed.
-
Indicates the retake status of the lesson if a retake exists.
-
If the charge or fee is a retroactive one, enter the date here.
-
Specifies if the record is a Return or a Refund.
-
Select the check box to indicate that the student or lending institution will be refunded 100% of the payment to the institution if the student drops the program within 30 days or is a first-time borrower.
-
The amount returned.
-
You can select this option to configure an automatic charge if a check for a student payment is returned by the bank for non-sufficient funds (NSF).
-
The Return Course list is displayed based on the student's registered course list, where the start date of the course is greater than the date specified in Start Date of Break and less than 45 days.
-
The date the student returned to the course.
-
The date the student returned to the program version or enrollment.
-
The date the student returned from the leave of absence.
-
The scheduled return date of the student from LOA.
-
Select to reduce the full award to $0 for paid and scheduled disbursements. If this option is not selected, all reductions will be per the Award Level Distribution as well as against the Repackage by Disbursement Status. If an award is in Approved status, Auto Repackaging cancels the fund source but if the award is in Estimated status, Auto Repackaging deletes the fund source.
-
The return method for the refund. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH. If the Schedule Refund option is selected, the return method will default to ACH if the campus is configured for an ACH processor for refunds, and the student has at least one checking or savings account configured for direct deposit. ACH is allowed only if the fund source is CASH. If Post Directly to Ledger is selected, the Return Method will always display Check.
-
The return method for the stipend. This value is editable.
-
The return method for the stipend. The refund methods are ACH, Check, EFT, or Net.
-
The return method for the stipend. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH.
-
The return method for the refund. The return methods are Bank Account, Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH. If the Schedule Refund option is selected, the return method will default to ACH if the campus is configured for an ACH processor for refunds, and the student has at least one checking or savings account configured for direct deposit. ACH is allowed only if the fund source is CASH. If Post Directly to Ledger is selected, the Return Method will always display Check.
-
The return method for the refund. The refund methods are Checks or Master Checks.
-
The return method for the refund. If there is a return method configured for the fund source, Anthology Student defaults to the return method. If no return method is configured for the fund source, the default is Check. If the refund is for a student, the return method is also Check.
-
Indicates the return method for the refund. The options are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, Credit Card, and ACH. If the Schedule Refund option is selected as a Refund Option: - Check – Always available - EFT, Master Check, Net – Available for all fund sources except for Student fund source. Master Check is available only if CNS is not integrated with CNF - ACH - Available only if the student’s campus is associated with a live ACH processor or a file-based ACH processor. If the campus is configured with a file-based processor, the student must have a bank account with direct deposit enabled. - Credit Card – Available only if a credit card processor is configured for the campus for Credit Card Processors for Payment Schedules under Student Accounts Configuration If Post Directly to Ledger option is selected as a Refund Option: - Check – Always available - EFT, Master Check, Net – Available for all fund sources except for Student fund source. Note that Master Check will be available only if CNS is not integrated with CNF - ACH – Available only if ACH processor is configured for the student’s campus for Electronic Processors ACH Processors tab under Student Accounts Configuration - Credit Card – Not available
-
Specify the Return Method to gather refunds/stipends that are scheduled with that return method. The available return methods are Checks, Master Checks, EFT, Net, ACH and Credit Card.
-
The return method for the refund.
-
The payment method for the stipend. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH. If the return method should be set to ACH, the fund source must be CASH and the institution must be configured for ACH processing.
-
You can specify a return method to assign to all the stipends that are to be created. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH. Note that ACH processing may not be configured for the selected campuses and not also it is possible that not all students are configured for ACH processing. Therefore, the ACH return method will be available in the drop-down for select only if the Advanced Features flag Enable Additional Usage of ACH and Credit Card Return Methods for Refunds and Stipends? is enabled. If a return method is not specified, the process will assign the return method to the stipends based on the fund source’s default return method for stipends. If the student’s campus is configured to process ACH transactions and the student has a bank account with direct deposit enabled, then the stipend will be created with ACH return method by default.
-
The payment method for the stipend.
-
The return method for the refund. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and Credit Card.
-
The return method for the refund. The refund methods are ACH, Check, Master Check, EFT, Credit Card, or Net. (For more details, see bulleted list below)
-
The return method for the refund. The refund methods are ACH, Check, Master Check, EFT, Credit Card, or Net.
-
The Return Method to be associated with the Subsidiary as the default when a refund is processed through Schedule Refunds/Transfer Balances.
-
The return method for the refund. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH.
-
Indicates the return method for the refund. The options are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net. Credit Card and ACH return methods are available only if the Advance Features flag Enable Additional Usage of ACH and Credit Card Return methods for Refunds and Stipends? is enabled.
-
Indicates the return method for the refund. The return methods are Check, Master Check, EFT, Net, and ACH. If you change the return method of a credit card or ACH refund to any other return method, you cannot set the return method back to Credit Card or ACH. This is because scheduling of credit card or ACH refunds involves associating the refunds to specific credit card or ACH payments. Therefore, the rescheduling of credit card or ACH refunds should be performed through the student’s ledger card instead.
-
Activate Return of Ineligible Funds only if you want to automatically return funds that were received to be paid and are being held up due to eligibility issues. As per regulation, the requirement is to pay accepted approved COD funds no later than 3 days. This ensures that you do not hold on to funds longer than the 3-day requirement.
-
Select the option for the return of the funds (COD or Commonline)
-
Indicates the code applies to the return of funds.
-
The units earned as a result of the adjustment.
-
The remaining units left to earn as a result of the adjustment.
-
Specify whether you want to restrict the posting/editing of attendance to prior to or equal to the Last Earned Date. This system-level configuration allows posting/editing to be turned on and off for "Earn by Attended Hours Program Versions".
-
Specify the revenue account. If the transaction code is flagged as a deferred revenue account, you need to specify the revenue account. Transaction codes such as Tuition are usually set up as deferred revenue transactions. This means that when they are posted to a student's ledger card, an A/R account is debited and a deferred revenue account is credited. When you perform the monthly Revenue Recognition procedures, the deferred revenue account is debited and the revenue account is credited.
-
Indicates the revenue account number associated with the revenue account.
-
You can configure the number of units to earn throughout each academic year when a program version is set to earn by academic year. Anthology Student performs the revenue recognition process ignoring the usual calculation of units and using the override to earn as configured. This only works if you select the Revenue Basis as Earn by Months, Weeks or Calendar.
-
Select the revenue earning period. The options are Program, Use Billing Period, By Transaction Code, and Term. These options depend on the selection of the billing method. For example, if you select, By Transaction Code, Anthology Student enables the Transaction Codes tab so you can select how each transaction code is to be earned.
-
The end of the revenue period is the date when the externship begins. This date is used to correctly calculate earnings for programs. If you select Graduation Date, the end of the revenue period is the graduation date for the student. If you select Extern Begin Date, the end of the revenue period is the date when the externship begins. The Extern Begin Date is the revenue period end date only when an enrolled student is in a program version where the billing method is based on program or based on term. If an enrolled student is in a program version that earns by program or by term and the program version uses the earning method defined to use Extern Begin Date, Anthology Student uses the Extern Begin Date as the revenue period end date. If the student program or term meets the above criteria and has a blank or null in the Extern Begin Date field, the record for the student will appear as an exception on the Revenue Exception Report. You can also select Not Applicable.
-
Tthe revenue period options are Program, Payment Period, and Course Section.
-
Select whether you want to enable revenue recognition as an automated month end process.
-
Specify the number to be used as a reference with revenue recognition transactions. Once a month someone will run a revenue recognition calculation that creates general ledger transactions. This number will be incremented each month and assigned to the transactions.
-
Specify the Revenue report type you want to have printed when the revenue calculation is performed. The options are Revenue Detail Report and Revenue Summary Report.
-
The description of the revenue source, for example, Tuition or Book. This column displays class section name if the student earns revenue over the length of the class section.
-
The type of revenue, for example, Deferred.
-
The revenue units that will override the term length calculation. This setting applies only to institutions that bill by term and earn by month.
-
Specifies the total revenue units for the program version to earn over the specified revenue earning period. When this value is greater than zero, Anthology Student will use this value as the total revenue units to earn instead of using the calculated revenue units based on the billing and earning method selected.
-
Indicates the number of hours attended by the student. Revenue units must be greater than 0.
-
Specifies the total number of hours in the program when the value is greater than zero and the earning method is by Scheduled or Attended Hours if your institution wants to earn revenue on a different number of hours than the total hours for the program. This field is enabled only when you select Program in the Billing Method.
-
This date is used to determine the end date of revenue earning period. This date is typically used for programs that are earned over the length of the program. If you select Graduation Date, the end of the revenue period is the graduation date for the student. If you select Extern Begin Date, the end of the revenue period is the date when the externship begins. The Extern Begin Date is the revenue period end date only when an enrolled student is in a program version where the billing method is based on program or based on term. If an enrolled student is in a program version that earns by program or by term and the program version uses the earning method defined to use Extern Begin Date, Anthology Student uses the Extern Begin Date as the revenue period end date. If the student program or term meets the above criteria and has a blank or null in the Extern Begin Date field, the record for the student will appear as an exception on the Revenue Exception Report. You can also select Not Applicable.
-
Specify the number of units to earn throughout each academic year. Anthology Student performs the revenue recognition process ignoring the usual calculation of units and uses the override to earn as configured.
-
Select the option to reverse the bursary if the student withdraws.
-
Indicates whether the record has been reviewed.
-
The desired percentage of the Automated Refund Approval.
-
If your institution has a review status for the batches, the review status of the batch. If your institution requires that batches of disbursements be reviewed before they are posted, the review status. The values are Not Reviewed, Ready for Review, and Reviewed.
-
Indicates whether or not you have reviewed the details of the batch.
-
Select the Reviewed check box to indicate that the record was reviewed.
-
If your institution has a review status for the batches, the review status of the batch. If your institution requires that batches of disbursements be reviewed before they are posted, the review status. The values are Not Reviewed, Ready for Review, and Reviewed.
-
Based on the locale you have selected, this option helps you to orient from the screen and data entry from Right to Left (RTL) for languages such as Arabic, Hebrew.
-
The accomplishment of rights and responsibilities. If you import the DECFyyOP file that contains entrance counseling results, the check box is selected or cleared based on the setting for the student in the file.
-
Roles are a way of organizing tasks. Roles contain the set of tasks needed for the role. For example, there are predefined roles that contain all the tasks for the features that are used by Academic Advisors and Financial Aid Advisors. Once you have organized the built-in tasks into custom roles, you can authorize individual staff members or all the staff members in a group for multiple tasks at once.
-
The code and name of the room where the class is taken. Rooms are defined by your institution.
-
The code or name of the room included in a Center. Rooms are defined by your institution.
-
The estimated room and board expense for the student for the academic year. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value.
-
For students living with their parents, the estimated room and board expense for the student for the academic year.
-
Indicates whether or not the room is assigned.
-
Select the room category.
-
The code of the room category.
-
The category of the room.
-
The code of the room included in a Center. Rooms are defined by your institution.
-
The room fee for the room, specified in numbers.
-
The frequency of the room such as weekly, daily, monthly.
-
Indicates the room capacity is full or not.
-
The room gender.
-
The name of the room included in a Center. Rooms are defined by your institution.
-
The room number.
-
The number for the Room. The values are configured by your institution.
-
Specify the room number.
-
The type of room.
-
Specifies the room types for which you want to generate the report.
-
The gender of the room/suite.
-
The number of the room/suite.
-
The number of Rooms available in the Building associated as a Center. An exam Center will include only Rooms which have a seating capacity greater than zero.
-
The number of Rooms available in the Building associated as a Center.
-
The code and name of the room where the class is taken. Rooms are defined by your institution. You can select multiple rooms at a time.
-
The file path location for the job file.
-
Specify the path you want to use for all the generated and other non-financial aid related imported and exported files. For example, the location you want to use for invoices, student statements, and National Do Not Call. If you are not using the Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Cloud, the field is not displayed. Anthology Student automatically uses your location in the cloud. In those locations, Anthology Student creates any sub folders needed by specific features.
-
If you selected Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant, Pell Grant, or TEACH Grant in the Type list, select the check box to specify that refund amounts are rounded for Return of Title IV Funds (R2T4). Anthology Student rounds Direct Loan funds per COD requirements and allows Pell amounts to be rounded as defined in the FSA Handbook. Anthology Student makes the adjustments when posting the financial aid refund calculation. When selected, rounding is activated within the refund calculations for refund amounts, and it is applied when the results from the refund calculation are posted to the student ledger. For example, the refund calculation results may show a particular fund with cents, but when the results from the refund calculation are posted to the student ledger, the rounding logic is applied to round to the nearest dollar. This is effective for refunds that are done from the time of implementation of Anthology Student version 15.0. There is no retroactive handling of rounding of any existing refunds that have not been posted.
-
If you select this check box, the FSEOG fund source disbursements will be rounded to a whole dollar amount when awarded. So, a $500 award would break down into three disbursements of $167, $167, and $166.
-
If you select this check box, the fund source disbursements will be rounded to a whole dollar amount when awarded. For example, a $500 award would break down into three disbursements of $167, $166, and $167. This option is available for all fund source types.
-
Indicates the number of decimal places to use in the results of calculations using Policy Units.
-
Indicates the number of decimal places to use in the results of calculations using Policy Units. This field is visible when Manual Calculation is set to Yes. The rounding occurs when the refund calculation (adjustment) is sent to the COD.
-
The nine-digit numeric code used to identify the bank in a transaction.
-
The fifteen-digit alphanumeric code used to identify the bank in a transaction. With Anthology Student International 5.3 or lower, this field accepts a mandatory nine-digit numeric code.
-
The number of rows in the seating arrangement of a Room.
-
The number of rows in the seating arrangement of a Room.
-
Enter a numeric value for report entity ID for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the condition for the report entity ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the report entity IDs between 1 and 5 only.
-
Date from which students will be able register their attendance for the ceremony.
-
Date from which registration for the ceremony is no longer valid.
-
Specify the rule for the payment period. The options are X Days After Payment Period Start Date, X Days After Y Course End Date, X % of Payment Period, X Days After Y Course Start Date, and X Days After Add/Drop Date.
-
If you want to start by including all courses, select Include All Courses. For example, if you want to include all courses and then choose to exclude courses. To specify rules that include and exclude courses, select Include/Exclude Courses. For example, if you want to only include courses with a prefix of ART and HIST. You can then combine it with exclude to exclude based on another entity. For example, from the courses with ART and HIST prefixes, you could exclude upper division (level) courses.
-
Select the type of requirement rule. For additional information about the type to select, see the Background for Requirement Rules.
-
Select Yes if you want to be able to select the activity when you configure policy lines in load validation policies. Otherwise, select No. For example, if you have parents and children, you might want to have the children selectable, but not the parent.
-
When you migrate to new requirement rules feature, most of your old data is moved to new UI automatically. However, some may not move and you have to manually migrate them. This button allows you to migrate your old data to new UI. This pop up only displays data which has not been automatically migrated to new UI. Select the Migrate all option on the pop up toolbar to migrate all the remaining old data. Once this action is complete, this migrate all option becomes inactive.
-
The course levels and course attributes associated with the requirement rule.
-
The type of rule associated with the course when you override during registration. By default, this column is hidden.
-
The Department of Education uses the FAFSA/ISIR to collect information and determine an applicant’s Student Aid Index (SAI) by conducting a "need analysis" based on the student's information. The SAI measures the financial strength of the student's family and is used to determine the student's eligibility for federal student aid (grants and loans). Other agencies, such as states and schools, may use this information to award other types of aid.
-
Salary amount for the placement.
-
Enter the low value in Pay Rate Low and the high value in Salary High, if the job has a salary range.
-
Select the condition for the salary high in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;1000000) in the respective value field, the report displays the salary high values between 1 and 1000000 only.
-
Enter the salary high value.
-
If the salary for the placement is estimated or an actual amount.
-
Specifies the way the salary is paid. They are configured by your institution.
-
Salary categories are system-defined. They include: - Hourly – payment of wages is based on the number of hours worked; - Yearly – payment of wages is based on an annual amount. - Volunteer – payment of wages is optional. - Flat Rate – payment is a discrete amount such as a bonus or a commission given to a student by his or her employer. This salary category is included when calculating the student's overall salary for the placement.
-
When selected, specifies that the transcript office has the same address as the institution. For colleges, this is the address printed on the mailing label or envelope when a transcript is requested.
-
Indicates the enrollment must be transferred or reentered into the same program version.
-
The student's academic progress. If it is a check box and it is selected, indicates that a student meets SAP. If the check box is not selected, it indicates that the student was not evaluated or that they do not meet SAP. If you have permission and you want to change the status, select the check box.
-
Select the check box to include the grade in the calculation of satisfactory academic progress (SAP). The SAP calculation requires that there are no duplicate letter grades.
-
Select this check box when adding or editing a term. The SAP Calculation page displays only terms that have this check box selected and meet other criteria to retrieve the terms, such as campus.
-
The date when the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) was executed.
-
The enrollment statuses assigned to the student during the satisfactory academic progress (SAP).
-
The date of the SAP report. The values in this column are displayed only for SAP reports based on payment period.
-
Indicates the options used for SAP calculation. The following modes are available: All, Term Only, Cumulative Only, Term and Cumulative, Payment Period Only, Payment Period and Term, Payment Period and Cumulative.
-
The status assigned to the student during the SAP evaluation process. The options are Show All, Show None, Show Pass SAP statuses only, Show Fail SAP statuses only and Show SAP category.
-
Indicates the SAP table that will be used in calculating satisfactory academic progress for this program version.
-
Specifies the satisfactory academic progress table for which you want to generate the report.
-
The date that satisfactory academic progress (SAP) was evaluated.
-
Indicates whether or not the student achieved the milestone during the payment period.
-
Displays the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) mode for the analysis. Term is displayed if the results are for Term SAP or Payment Period if the results are for Payment Period SAP.
-
Specifies the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy. It contains the measures used to evaluate students to determine whether or not they are making satisfactory academic progress in their educational program and can receive financial aid. They are defined by your institution and assigned to program versions.
-
The reason that describes details around satisfactory academic progress (SAP) for a student. These details encompass both reasons students fail to meet SAP and reasons students are improving their performance to meet SAP when they have previously failed. Anthology Student is installed with default SAP reasons that are associated with the criteria. Your institution can configure other reasons.
-
The status assigned to the student during the SAP evaluation process.
-
If a student exceeds the maximum time frame of required credit or clock hours, specifies the SAP status that is assigned to the student.
-
If the detail criteria are evaluated and the student is not making SAP, specifies the SAP status that is assigned to the student.
-
Indicates whether the selected letter grade will be included in the SAP calculation.
-
This field will be populated if the SAR C Flag is set or removed from the previous transaction. Blank indicates that the SAR C Flag has not changed; Y indicates that SAR C Flag has changed.
-
For a prospective student, inquiry, applicant, or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the SAR C Code on the ISIR imported for their award year is one of the values you select in the Value list. The values are Not Set and Yes.
-
The group of registered students group can be saved from the cancel class section window.
-
Indicate whether you want to save the new credit card information for later use. The new credit card information is saved only if the payment is successful. This option is visible when Pay With is set to New Credit Card.
-
Indicate whether you want to save the new credit card information for later use. The new credit card information is saved only if the payment is successful. This option is visible when Pay With is set to New Credit Card. The Save New Card after Processing option is not available if your Payment Gateway Provider is ACI. Anthology Student automatically saves credit cards for one-time use or for future payments based on what the user selected for the “Save this information for use with future payments” option when adding the cards through ACI’s Funding Portal.
-
Specifies the action taken for the group. Select Add Students to New Group to create a new student group that includes the students in the report. Select Add Students to Existing Group to add or replace the students in a student group with the students in the report. Select Delete Students from Existing Group to delete the students listed in the report from a student group.
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to save the changes the staff member made to the task before it unlocks it. Otherwise, select No.
-
Indicates any scheduled refunds and stipends to be paid from the selected fund source. Anthology Student calculates the value by summing all scheduled refunds and stipends from the FA Refund and Student Accounts Stipend Schedule tables.
-
The cron string that specifies when the job is run. This field is enabled only when you select Manually enter cron value in the Frequency field.
-
The Schedule value determines the processing order for scheduled payments when repackaging fund eligibility adjustments. The options are: 1 — process first, 2 — process second, N/A — do not process.
-
Select this check box to schedule subsidiary refunds for students with a credit balance.
-
Enables payment recalculation.
-
Indicate the custom cron string in the specified format. This field is active only when the Frequency is set to Manually enter cron value. For example, If you want to execute a command on: • 10:30 AM (1030 hours) every day then the corresponding cron time string is 0 30 10 ? * * • 11:45PM (2345 hours) on every Saturday then the corresponding cron time string is 45 23 * * 6
-
The date when the stipend batch is scheduled to be paid.
-
Specify the date when the stipends are scheduled to be disbursed to the students.
-
The date when the stipend batch is scheduled for.
-
Indicates the amount that is scheduled to be paid as refund.
-
Indicates the amount that is scheduled to be paid as a refund or stipend.
-
Indicates the amount that is scheduled to be paid as a stipend.
-
Select the task you want to be scheduled for the condition specified by the operator and answer in the row. For example, if the Data Type is Date and the operator >=, you can automatically schedule a task when the answer is a date greater than or equal to the answer from the person being questioned.
-
Specifies who or what the task or document is scheduled for. In most cases, this will be student because they are most often the cause of actions taken by staff members. In addition to students, a task can be triggered for a document, document list, a process for Student Accounts, or another task. For example, you can schedule a task when another task is closed with a specific result.
-
Select this check box if you want to copy Schedule with Load Types to new Class Section when Faculty Workload is enabled. If you edited existing meetings or added additional meetings, those meetings with their load types are also copied. Faculty Workload copies only the Load Types from courses and not from class section.
-
Indicates the time interval of the scheduling of the job.
-
The cron string that specifies when the job is run. If you selected: - "Manually enter cron value" in the Job Schedule list, you must specify the cron string - For any other value in the Job Schedule list, Anthology Student displays the cron string appropriate for the selected schedule.
-
The scheduled amount of the disbursement.
-
The total Pell amount that can be awarded based on the student's ISIR. If the student does not have an ISIR on file, it displays 0.
-
Specifies scheduled awards imported for the servicer.
-
Name of the person who scheduled the transaction, such as refund or stipend.
-
Total number of credits in Scheduled or Current status at time of Registration.
-
The date when the scheduled stipend will be paid to the student.
-
The date when the payment, refund, or stipend is scheduled.
-
The date when the stipend is scheduled to be paid to the student.
-
The date range used to filter the fund source.
-
Specifies scheduled disbursements imported for the servicer. This field is enabled if the selected payment type is Scheduled FA Disbursements/Student Cash Payments.
-
Specifies scheduled disbursements imported for the servicer.
-
The date when the student was scheduled to take the test.
-
Specifies who or what the task or document is scheduled for. In most cases, this will be student because they are most often the cause of actions taken by staff members. In addition to students, a task can be triggered for a document, document list, a process for Student Accounts, or another task. For example, you can schedule a task when another task is closed with a specific result.
-
The scheduled hours for the course.
-
Specify the from and to number of the percentage scheduled hours missed for which you want to generate the report.
-
The scheduled minutes for the class section.
-
If you selected Cash, Other Outside Resources, or Scholarship in the Type list and you selected the Associate Course to Payments and the Auto Create Payment Schedule check boxes, use the radio buttons and corresponding field for entering the number of days to specify when the payment is due. The date must not be more than one year after the date (365 days).
-
The rate scheduled for the billable service.
-
Indicates any existing refund amount that has already been scheduled for the subsidiary.
-
Refund amount that has already been scheduled.
-
Specifies how the payments are divided. If you select Number of Payment, Anthology Student calculates the payment amounts. If you select payment amount, Anthology Student calculates the number of payments.
-
Indicates a scholarship or a grant. This check box is only editable when the Include in 1098 T check box is enabled.
-
The 2-character code for the type of scholarship and total hours. An S indicates a HOPE scholarship. An X indicates a Zell Miller scholarship. 1 indicates total hours are between 0 and 29. 2 indicates total hours are between 30 and 59. S3 or X4 indicates total hours are between 60 and 89. S4 or X5 indicates 90 or more total hours.
-
The 6-digit school code is the Federal School Code listed on the school's ECAR (Eligibility and Certification Approval Report). It is also called the Pell ID.
-
School code for the campus. The value is required for F1 and M1 visa types.
-
Select the condition for the School Code. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like and Include All.
-
Specify an alphanumeric code of the school.
-
Unique codes assigned by the Department of Education for schools participating in the Title IV federal student aid programs. Students can enter these codes on the FAFSA to indicate which schools they want to receive their financial application results. The School Codes are configured in Anthology Student under Campus Setup > Locations. A Federal School Code is always six characters: 0 (zero), G, B, or E, and a 5-digit number. Anthology Student supports only numeric school codes. If the Federal School Code for your institution contains the letter G, B, or E, replace the letter with a zero (0).
-
Indicates whether any remaining balance should be applied to the institution. True indicates that the remaining balance should be applied to the institution. False indicates that the remaining balance should be applied to the borrower.
-
Select the entry fields for students that are unique to your institution.
-
Indicates a list of additional fields your institution wants for Students and Courses.
-
The name that your institution gave to the field when it defined it.
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the school fields specified for the course using the School Fields tile to the new course.
-
The proof of funds submitted by the sponsoring institution.
-
The field changes to the ID appropriate for the Financial Aid General Ledger (FA G/L) fund that you select. If you select a SEOG, Federal Work-Study (FWS), and Perkins fund, the name of the field changes to Serial Number. It is the 6-digit number assigned by the Department of Education (ED) to the authorization level. For Direct loans, the name changes to Direct Loan ID. It is the ID used by this campus for processing Direct loans with Common Origination and Disbursement (COD). For Pell Grants, the name changes to Reporting Pell ID. It is the 6-character ID that begins with a G or E. The ID is used when processing Pell Grants for students who are attending a campus. The ID is also used on ISIRs. A campus can also be part of a larger organization that uses a Report Pell ID. The ID cannot be changed without updating all students who had the original ID in Anthology Student.
-
Select the condition for the school ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (1;5) in the respective value field, the report displays the school ID records between 1 and 5 only.
-
Select the condition for the school ID in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select the condition Between and enter the range (10;50) in the respective value field, the report displays the school IDs between 10 and 50 only.
-
Enter the school ID value.
-
Specify the value for school id for which you want to generate the report.
-
The institution attended by the student provides the benefit of free tuition. Specify the estimated amount that the student is eligible for.
-
School Paid Tuition - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the option does not apply to the student.
-
Scholarship provided by the institution. Specify the estimated scholarship amount that the student is eligible for.
-
School Scholarship - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the scholarship option does not apply to the student.
-
Total number of students in the graduating class for the student.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change. If there are also tasks associated with the previous status, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to select the tasks to keep and the tasks to close with the result of canceled.
-
The code and name of the school statuses. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The school/student status as on the specified date.
-
The code and name of the school statuses. School statuses are also referred to as student statuses. These statuses are defined/configured by the institution.
-
The student has a school status not eligible for Campus-Based Aid.
-
Choose a School Status from the drop-down. When this status is applied to the School Status field in an Application, the selections process of calculating the APS Score, checking Minimum Requirements, and Eligibility Criteria is triggered.
-
Choose a School Status from the drop-down. This status will be applied to the School Status field in an Application once a Conditional Offer is released to the Applicant.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status will be applied to the School Status field in an Application once a Final Offer is released to the Applicant.
-
The results of the test taken by the student reported as a score.
-
The type of score that is assigned to an application that is a measure of a student's overall academic performance, typically calculated based on their grades in a given subject or across multiple subjects.
-
Select whether or not you want to search only the selected job location.
-
Select whether or not you want to search only the selected job skill.
-
Select whether or not you want to search only the selected job title.
-
Gives you the option to choose the type of transaction, whether it is ledger card or subsidiary.
-
Indicates that the address is seasonal/temporary address. For example, if a student would like to receive mail at an address for a certain length of time. If you are adding or editing an address and it is selected, you must specify the values for Start Date and End Date.
-
This is the total number of securable seats in the Room included in the Center.
-
Indicates the number of seats available when transferring the class section.
-
The seats available in the class section.
-
This is the total number of securable seats remaining in the Rooms included in the Center.
-
The number of seats taken by the registered students.
-
Specify the second pay level for the course group.
-
The secondary estimated family contribution from the student's FAFSA. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Description of the secondary fees charged by the institution for the loan (if any).
-
For secondary fees, specifies the amount. If you selected Percentage in the Secondary Fee Type list, specify a percentage. If you selected Flat Amount in the Secondary Fee Type list, specify an amount in the Primary Fee Amount field. If you specify a percentage or amount in this field, the borrower charged both fees.
-
For secondary fees, specifies the type. Select Percentage to enter a fee based on a percentage of the gross loan amount and specify a percentage in Secondary Fee Amount. Select Flat Amount if the value you entered is in dollars and applies to all loans equally and specify an amount in the Secondary Fee Amount field.
-
Name of the staff member who will be designated as the secondary invigilator.
-
If the student is pursuing a secondary major, select the secondary major.
-
For a two-tiered payment plan, specify the secondary interest rate. For example, to specify 3%, specify 3.00. The secondary interest rate becomes effective on the date you specify in the Effective Date field. The value must be less than 100.
-
The secondary section code for the class gives your institution the flexibility to distinguish or categorize its classes. It supports alphabetic and numeric characters and can be any word or phrase meaningful at your institution. For example, you can specify a department code for the department hosting the class section. Or it could be a code that tells students and staff members the class section is for a pre-planned schedule. In the example using a second section code of BSNUR23FF, the code tells Bachelor of Science Nursing students that 5 classes with the code should be taken in the fall of 2023 for an ideal freshman schedule. It is optional for your institution and can be left blank.
-
The code and name for the class section.
-
The class section.
-
The code for the class section.
-
The code of the class section.
-
The section code that includes alphabetic and numeric characters.
-
The section code that includes alphabetic and numeric characters.
-
The delivery method used for the selected class section. This option will be disabled if your institution does not have any delivery methods defined.
-
The class section's end date.
-
A unique reference number assigned to a class section. This number is generated based on the Section ID format defined when adding or editing a Term.
-
Specifies instructor attributes specific to the class section.
-
The course section name.
-
The name specified for the course when it was configured. It describes the course and can be changed for the class section if needed.
-
The class sections that will be copied from one term to another.
-
Enables you to filter the class sections that are associated with the selected terms.
-
The number of seats that can be secured in a room for exam seating arrangement. This number must be less than or equal to the seating capacity of the room.
-
Indicates the primary payment gateway provider linked to the selected campus. You can select only one account per campus. You can change the Payment Gateway Provider for this credit card processor by using the Select check box. All credit cards that were added through the current Payment Gateway Provider will be invalid if processed through the new Payment Gateway Provider.
-
The name of the bank account or credit card.
-
The name of the bank account or credit card. Only active bank accounts are available for selection.
-
To select all records on the page, place a check mark in the header row.
-
The fund source that will be used to filter the interest charges.
-
Select fund sources that will be excluded when Reduce by Expected Funding is selected.
-
Select this option whether or not you want to show the salary online.
-
Select this button to allow staff members to associate employers with campuses outside their assigned campus group.
-
Specifies how you want to select the task. Select Campus to specify that you want to select the tasks by one or more campuses. If you are updating or deleting tasks, select Student to select one or more students. If you are unlocking tasks and you want to select the tasks that were locked by one or more staff members at all campuses, select Staff. If you are unlocking tasks and you want to specify the tasks that were locked by one or more staff members at specific campuses, select Campus in the list and then use the Locked By Staff list at the bottom to select the staff members.
-
Indicates the fields that will be included in the file. Selected fields grid must not be empty.
-
The selected pay level as per the compensation plan.
-
The discount amount already posted for the student according to the tuition discount policy.
-
The list of student properties that you have selected to display.
-
A check mark indicates that the record matches the selection criteria (if specified). You can also select or clear selections using the Select All Across Pages/Clear All Across Pages toggle button.
-
Indicates the selected the tuition discount policies.
-
The associated record selected for this version.
-
The discount amount already posted for the student from the tuition discount policy being processed.
-
Categories used to reserve a set number of seats based on a quotas defined by your Institution.
-
The record selection criteria chosen on the Process tab.
-
Tha status assigned to the application. They are configured by your institution.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status field in an Application after the selections process is triggered.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status in an Application if an Applicant does not meet the minimum requirements any of their Choices.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status in an Application if an applicant does not meet the minimum requirements for that Examination Board.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status in an Application if an applicant clears the eligibility criterias for at least one of the Programs they have applied for.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status in an Application if an applicant clears the eligibility criterias for the respective Programs they have applied for.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status is applied to the Selection Status field in an Application if an applicant meets the minimum requirements for that Examination Board.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status will be applied to the Selection Status field in an Application once a Conditional Offer is released to the Applicant.
-
Choose a Selection Status from the drop-down. This status will be applied to the Selection Status field in an Application once a Final Offer is released to the Applicant.
-
Select how the application will be processed. Options available in the drop-down are Manual and Automated.
-
This column is not used and always displays a blank.
-
The maximum amount of self help that can be awarded when using this packaging method. For example, the total amount of the awards for subsidized and unsubsidized loans, other loans, work-study, and other self help cannot exceed this amount. If you are doing automatic packaging, Anthology Student checks this amount to determine when to stop allocating loans.
-
Select or clear the check box to indicate whether a new field value should be exported.
-
The amount already refunded or stipend to student for the fund source. If you did not configure the refund policy to be manual calculation, you can change the value.
-
Indicates that Course Section information will be sent to the LMS.
-
Indicates that initial course section information will be send to the LMS.
-
Indicates that initial instructor assignment information will be send to the LMS.
-
Indicates that information on initial student registration will be send to the LMS.
-
Indicates that instructor assignment information will be send to the LMS.
-
The number of days after which the notification will be sent.
-
If you use the Portal, it is recommended that you use a status of Requested-Required, so that the document is made available on the Portal to view, download, and upload.
-
If you selected Yes in the CommonLine Recipient list, select the check box if the refunds should be sent using change transaction records.
-
Indicates that Student Registration information will be sent to the LMS.
-
Select the recipient of the message. If you select Student, you must select the type of address in the Send to Address field. If you select Employer or Organization, Anthology Student addresses the letter to the address in the system for the employer or organization.
-
If you selected Student in the Send To list, you must select the type of address. Address types are configured by your organization and selected by staff members when they are added to the Related Addresses list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Related Addresses tile.)
-
For all incoming messages, the Sender value is "SAIG". For all outgoing messages, the Sender value is "System" (meaning Mailbox Manager).
-
Sender's TG Number obtained from the SAIG Portal. The TG Number (also referred to as the mailbox, SAIG mailbox, and Destination Point mailbox) is the number assigned to your institution when your institution enrolls in the Student Aid Internet Gateway (SAIG).
-
Indicates whether or not the change has been sent to Common Origination and Disbursement (COD).
-
Indicates whether the refund was sent back.
-
Location from which the file was exported or imported, i.e., Cloud or FTP.
-
If you selected Grant (Other than Pell), select the check box to specify that the fund source is a Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant (SEOG). When selected, Anthology Student identifies and includes SEOG records in the FISAP report.
-
The sequence number that determines the order in which the disbursement activity is processed at COD.
-
Item number in a numeric sequence.
-
Number assigned by the system to the academic year, loan period, or payment period record.
-
Choose the sequence the fee is charged. Only selectable when the Fee Amount Per is 'Academic Year'.
-
Number assigned by the system to the fee.
-
Specifies the order in which the records are evaluated.
-
The order in which the tuition discount policies are to be processed. Duplicate sequence numbers for a course are not allowed. This field is required only if multiple discounts are available for the course.
-
Indicates how the school intends to use the Master Promissory Note. This field is enabled only if the fund source type is SUB, UNSUB, or PLUS. N specifies new and use new MPN. S indicates serial and renew the existing MPN. Blank indicates not specified. If the loan start date occurs after 06/30/2004, the field must be N or S.
-
Indicates how the school intends to use the Master Promissory Note. This field is enabled only if the fund source type is SUB, UNSUB, or PLUS. The options are Use a New MPN or Renew Existing MPN.
-
The serial number ofr the certificate.
-
Indicates the serial number used in the Financial Aid General Ledger system. SEOG, FWS, and Perkins authorization levels are assigned to the Campus-Based Serial Number. This is a 6-digit number that is assigned by ED. For additional information on Serial Number, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
The serial number assigned to your institution. The branch number for standalone institutions and the main campus of multi-campus institutions is typically 00. The exception to this would be where institutions merge and a different numbering convention was used.
-
The 6-digit number assigned by the Department of Education (ED) to SEOG, Federal Work-Study (FWS), and Perkins authorization levels.
-
Specify the server. This field is visible for both SQL and Windows Server Authentication.
-
The service code and name.
-
The method used to bill services for the student. If you selected Disability Service Category For Service Category, Anthology Student hides this field because there are no fees associated with accommodation services.
-
The service category for the billable service. For example, disability, housing, insurance and meal plan. Your institution defines any other service categories in the list.
-
Yes indicates that there are school defined fields. School defined fields are fields configured by your institution that are unique to your institution.
-
The entity service interface used by the event handler for background process operations related to the SSRS reporting service.
-
The web service key.
-
The web service URL. This field is editable.
-
Specifies the servicer that is servicing the loan (such as the institution collecting payments). If a servicer was configured for the lender, the servicer from the configuration is displayed by default.
-
Specify the location of the academic extract files.
-
The ID for the servicer.
-
Select the Servicer link. The options are Global, Other, and None. If you select Global, the system updates the student's document list when an SD file is imported from Global. The student's Document Folder has a current record of the status of each document required by Global for Title IV. If you select Other or None, the servicer configuration and document tracking becomes inactive.
-
If you are using a Financial Aid servicer (such as Global), specify the 1 to 16-character number recognized by the servicer. The number identifies the program to the servicer. It can include the program code used by the servicer to identify this program, a Q or S determined by semester or quarter hours when the program is subject to the clock to credit conversion, or any other designator the servicer would like to have. This data is extracted in the extract files on each student's detail record. Contact your servicer for questions on these issues.
-
When the original award records are received from the servicer, the records have a Servicer Record ID. This ID is used to link any other record from the servicer (scheduled disbursements, paid disbursements, award/disbursement changes, etc.) for a student.
-
Specify the number assigned to your institution by the servicer. This number is used when exporting Financial Aid records to the servicer. Up to 10 characters are allowed.
-
Select the appropriate service from the list of services configured by your institution.
-
Select the service categories available to Housing area users that will allow them to post incidental charges.
-
The cash drawer session information.
-
The campus associated with the logged in user's session.
-
Indicates if a field was changed during the current session.
-
Indicate the status of the session. The options are Open, Closed or Include All. By default, this option is set to Include All.
-
Indicates the session.
-
The number assigned to the sets created within a Subject Set.
-
The default mode of contact.
-
Determines the due date when documents are automatically added to a student's Document list. After selecting Calculate, select Before or After under When, and then Lead Date or Start Date under What.
-
Select the option for the default process date.
-
Select how you want Anthology Student to set the LDW Date. The options are: - Calculated Day: Anthology Student sets the course section’s LDW date to the exact date calculated based on the Percentage of Course Length and Calculate Weeks Based on settings. - Last Day of Week: Anthology Student sets the course section’s LDW date to the last day of the week following the exact calculated LDW date. For additional information about set LDW, see background for academic records for campuses.
-
Select this option if you want Anthology Student to automatically expire leases when they reach their end date.
-
When the Advanced Feature flag Enable Load Banking is set to Yes, staff members can specify and save a Load Bank Expiration in Months value. The valid values for this setting are 1 to 480 months (40 years). When a load is added for a term, the system will set the expiration date to the day of the month when the calculated period expires. For example, if the expiration period is set to 60 months and a load is banked on January 12, 2020. the banked load will expire on January 12, 2025. At this time, the load will be paid out at the rate it was earned if it has not been used.
-
The name of the Set created within a Subject Set
-
Select this check box to set the start date for the enrollment to the Term Start date for the first class the student attends. For additional information about setting the start date to the term start date, see the background information for academic records for campuses.
-
If you selected Instructor Group or Admission Rep Group in the Parent Group list, Anthology Student sets the read-only value to Yes to indicate it is a template.
-
The name of the setting.
-
Indicates the name of the advanced feature setting.
-
A region-specific system defined setting based on the localization options selected for Selections Management.
-
Indicates the options related to student account transactions.
-
Indicates the name of the setting.
-
The descriptive name of the setting.
-
Specifies by whom the incident has been set up.
-
If you specified one or more groups that have templates, select the template that contains the settings and permissions you want to use. This field is only displayed when you add or edit a staff member from the Processes tile. It is not available if you are adding or editing the staff member from the Settings tile.
-
The setup template for the Admissions Representatives Maintenance form.
-
Select the specific certificate file from the drive location.
-
The valid alphanumeric value for the SEVIS certificate.
-
An eleven-character identifier assigned to the student or dependent by INS.
-
PDSO's INS identification number from SEVIS. The value is required.
-
The URL used to download files from the Student and Exchange Visitor Information System (SEVIS)
-
Select how the students are selected and included in the transmission. The options are Campus, Campus Group, Program Number or School Code.
-
For an applicant or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the transmission status for their SEVIS information on their International page is one of the values you select in the Values list.
-
The URL where the eligibility forms are uploaded.
-
Used by institutions to create financial aid awards for their students by either manually adding awards or by using the Auto-Packaging.
-
Displays the date range specified in the Share Information From and To fields in the record for the person with access.
-
The date range when the student's academic information will be shared.
-
The start date when the student's academic information can be shared.
-
The date range when the student's academic information will be shared.
-
The end date after which the student's academic information will not be shared.
-
The course is shared with other campuses.
-
The date and time the shared courses will no longer be visible to faculty and students via the Faculty and Student Portals. This field is mandatory if the Course Registration Sharing Groups (CRSG) feature is enabled, that is, course sections from the home campus are shared with other campuses. For example, you could specify the 1st day of the next term as the Shared Course End Date.
-
The date and time courses shared to other campuses will be visible to faculty and students via the Faculty and Student Portals. This field is mandatory if the Course Registration Sharing Groups (CRSG) feature is enabled, that is, course sections from the home campus are shared with other campuses. For example, if you specify a date 14 days before the term start date, shared courses would be shown earlier than home campus courses.
-
The student's academic information that will be shared.
-
The sharing level associated with the selected FERPA Group (such as All or Partial).
-
The shift during which the student will attend classes (such as days or evenings). Shifts are configured by your institution.
-
The shift that will be associated with the class schedule.
-
The shift associated with the student’s enrollment.
-
The shifts you want to evaluate. If you do not select a shift, all shifts are included in the evaluation.
-
The shift, such as day, night, weekend.
-
Enables you to filter the students in the Students to Register by Shift.
-
The shifts during which students attend classes (such as days or evenings). Shifts are configured by your institution. Only students whose enrollments are associated with the selected shifts will be gathered.
-
The shift that the student will attend classes (such as day or evenings). Only student who are associated with the selected shifts will have statements generated.
-
Select shifts associated with the students. Only students who are associated with the selected shifts will have statements generated.
-
The Short Name of the institution (usually the acronym) appears in several places on the Shopping Sheet.
-
The percentage of the students who will start on the program version start date. For example, if there are 35 students who signed up for the program version, if you think that all 35 students will be in the classroom on this date, specify 100 in Show %.
-
If your institution associated instructors with courses and you have permission to override the instructor course association, the check box is displayed and selected by default. Select the check box to display a list of all the active instructors on this page as well as when you use the Add button on the Instructors & Portal Options page and the +Add Instructors button on the Schedule page. If you only want to display the instructors associated with the course, clear the check box. If your institution did not associate instructors, the Instructors list displays all the instructors and the check box is not displayed. If your institution did associate instructors and you do not have override permission, the Instructors list displays only instructors associated with the course, and the check box is not displayed.
-
Specifies whether or not the report you want to display the average length of time it took to close the job listings. The average time is calculated differently based upon what the outcome of the job was. If the student was placed (job status = filled), the average time is based on the low availability date, to the date that the student was placed in the job. If the job was closed (status = closed or unable to fill) and no placements have been made, the average time is based on the low availability date to the high availability date.
-
Indicates the billing summary will be displayed for the term.
-
Select the check box to specify that the comments you specify in the Comments box are displayed in Portal.
-
Specifies whether students who have a reservation for cross listed courses are included in the report.
-
Only displays applications that have not been reviewed yet.
-
Select the check box if you want Anthology Student to display the Set Session Defaults dialog each time the staff member logs in. When displayed, staff members can change their campus and other session options (such as the term).
-
Indicates the expected funding for the term will be displayed.
-
This setting determines whether the exception icon is displayed in the header of the Student Profile when Financial Aid Automation is enabled for the campus. Select "Yes" or "No".
-
Indicates the invoices will be displayed.
-
Select this option whether or not you want to show the job comments online.
-
Specifies whether the report includes information about the books and book prices.
-
Select the required information option which you want to show on the report. The options are Do not display book Info, Schedule & Book Information or Schedule & Book Information with Price Info.
-
Select this check box to view only active fund sources.
-
Indicates only prerequisites that are not associated with any term will be displayed.
-
If you select this check box, Anthology Student displays only the parent terms that have valid assignments or whose child terms have valid assignments in the Terms field. Faculty Workload Management recommends you to have an assignment to the Child Terms only if you are using s Parent-Child Term relationship.
-
When Yes is selected, shows your items that were reassigned to another staff member. The default is to not display reassigned items.
-
Specifies whether students who have a reservation for the course are included in the report.
-
Specifies whether students who have a reservation for the course are included in the report.
-
Filters the list to show the tasks assigned to the staff members that you select in the list. If you have permission in the policy, the names of other staff members are displayed. The maximum number of staff members you can select is 50.
-
Indicate whether you want to view the tile displaying all the pending tasks assigned to you.
-
Select the check box if you want to change one or more of the defaults each time you log in to Anthology Student.
-
Filters the list to display tasks that have not been assigned.
-
Specifies whether students on the waitlist for a course are included in the report.
-
Specifies whether students on the waitlist for a course are included in the report.
-
Displays the Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) code appropriate for the name you selected in the SIC name list.
-
Select the Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) name.
-
The date and time when the waitlist was created.
-
SEVIS site name for the campus group. The value is required for J1 visa types.
-
Indicate the physical location where a student or exchange visitor is engaging in their primary academic, research, or exchange activity.
-
Select a skill area. Skill area with the same campus as the skill are only displayed.
-
Select the skill attribute tags. You can add as many tags as possible for the same.
-
Skill sub area associated with the skill area. You can add multiple skill sub area details for a single skill area.
-
Specifies whether the skill type is soft skill or a job skill.
-
The minimum credits required for the skills to be automatically added when the student completes the course.
-
The name of the skill
-
When selected, Anthology Student copies the skills specified for the course using the Attributes, Skills & Resources tile to the new course.
-
Indicates the active skills for the selected campus. You can select as many skills as needed.
-
Indicates skills.
-
Indicates the active skills for the selected campus. You can select as many skills as needed. Students will be awarded the skills assigned to lessons automatically when they receive a passing grade for the lesson.
-
The percentage of the subsidized loan eligibility used (SLEU).
-
The Subsidized Loan Eligibility Used field provides the total time in years during which the student has received Direct Subsidized Loans as of the date of the ISIR.
-
Specific dates reserved for conducting formal exams. Each Slot can be associated with one or more Program Versions. Once you create a Slot, you can create different Exam Schedules within each Slot.
-
Select the smoking preference for which you want to generate the report. The options are Non-Smoking, Smoking, and Undefined/No Preference.
-
Select Yes to specify that Anthology Student sends an email in place of an SMS message when certain conditions are met. For example, the student must have a valid email on their Student Profile.
-
Specifies the cell phone provider for the student. If you select the Subscribe to SMS check box, you must also specify a value for Mobile Phone Number and select a provider in the SMS Provider list for the student to receive the text messages.
-
Specify whether the PWD notification record is snoozed or not.
-
Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) code(s) associated with the record (codes are maintained by the Department of Labor’s Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)).
-
Descriptive names for the Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) codes maintained by the Department of Labor’s Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS).
-
The person's Social Security Number (SSN). You must be authorized to work with SSNs.
-
Select this check box if you want Social Security Number to be the absolute matching criteria for test file.
-
Select this check box if you want the skill is to be used as a job requirement for employers.
-
Select options from the form to associate soft skills to the employer contact.
-
The transaction source.
-
The source of the award. Fund sources are configured by your institution.
-
Where the skill was obtained from
-
The source of the skill. If the skill was added using Configure > Career Services > Skills, then it displays Career Services. If Anthology Student is being used with Occupation Insight (OI), the column displays Occupation Insight. The field will display both Career Services and Occupation Insight if the sources are both.
-
The source of the funds for the fund source. The values are Campus Based, Federal Government, Institutional, Other Outside, Private Scholarship, and State and Local Government.
-
The source of the fund.
-
Select a revenue source to gather only revenue transactions associated with the selected revenue source. The options are Adjustment, Revenue Recognition, and Include All. If you do not select the Source, the report will include all revenue transactions regardless of revenue transaction’s source.
-
The revenue source. Values are Revenue Recognition and Adjustment.
-
The transaction’s source such as Financial Aid, Student, Refund.
-
Indicates the job source for the skill type.
-
The source of the subsidiary.
-
Specify this field to provide the source locations for outgoing transactions.
-
This column is not used.
-
The name configured for the institution.
-
The source name of the inbound HR and Payroll integration entity.
-
The Federal Family Education Loan (FFEL) ID configured for the institution.
-
Select the source for which you want to generate the report.
-
Indicates the transfer credits that are accepted prior to the version start date.
-
The Program Version start date. If its blank then it is set by the Expected Program Version Start date.
-
Select the link in the column to display information about changes that the SPE tool made or any additional actions you need to take. These are the same messages that it displays when you select a student to review on the Process tab. For example, if some of the disbursements for a Direct loan with a status of Scheduled were canceled by SPE when you queued the evaluation and there were disbursements with a status of Paid that it could not cancel, it contains information about how you should review the paid disbursements to determine whether or not they need to be manually canceled.
-
Indicates that the Course is included in the student pace evaluation process. Values that will be displayed are Yes (Y) or No (N). This column is applicable only for non-term programs (Academic Calendars 5 and 6) and is displayed when Enabled is configured for the Allow courses to be exempt from progression setting.
-
Specifies whether or not the exam is marked as Special Exam.
-
If the student is enrolled in a special program, specifies the special program. The default is from the program version for the student. The values that are displayed depend on the value displayed in the Grade Level field. The field is displayed only for loans configured as DIRSUB in award year 2014-2015 and later.
-
Indicates that the student is enrolled in a special program. Valid values are: B - Bachelor's Degree Completion Program (This allows students with an associate’s degree, unfinished bachelor’s degree, or transferrable college credits to earn a bachelor’s degree.) T - Non Credential Teacher Certification Program (This is designed for those who have earned a bachelor’s degree or higher but have not yet completed a teacher preparation program.) N - Not Applicable P - Preparatory Coursework Graduate Professional Program (This refers to courses that a student is required to take to enroll in an eligible graduate program. The courses are preparatory to the degree, not a part of the degree requirements. It is sometimes referred to as foundation courses.) U - Preparatory Coursework Undergraduate Program (This refers to courses that a student is required to take ito enroll in an eligible undergraduate program. The courses are preparatory to the degree, not a part of the degree requirements. This is sometimes referred to as foundation courses) A - Selective Admission Associated Program (This is when an applicant must meet additional admissions criteria beyond general acceptance to the college for their program of choice.) Note: Special Program is displayed for the award year 2014-15 and later.
-
Indicates whether the program is designated as a special program.
-
Month/Day/Year or Year-Month-Day. This field is visible when the Frequency is set to the Specific Date option.
-
Indicates the specific date when you want to execute the scheduled student batch export. This field is visible when the Frequency is set to Specific Date.
-
The date you wish to use based on the entry in the Frequency field.
-
Include information on any custom numeric information, for example, typing speed, rating values, and so on.
-
Select how you want to split the earning lines. The options are Pay Period Dates and/or Pay Cycles. The default value is Pay Period Dates.
-
The date when the student is required to return to the course. If the student does not return by the approved date, it will be considered as a withdrawal.
-
The start date when the student will be out of the enrollment. The SPN period should be approved by the institution.
-
The sport type that the student participates in.
-
Specifies the sports for which the report is generated.
-
If you select SQL Statement job, the SQL statement is displayed. This field is read-only.
-
Committee Member assigned with the task other than evaluation and invigilation in an examination.
-
The person's Social Security Number (SSN). You must be authorized to work with SSNs.
-
The person's Social Security Number (SSN). You must be authorized to work with SSNs. The value against the SSN property requires to be in the same format as specified earlier. For example, if you have specified the SSN in this format XXX-XX-XXXX, you need to provide the SSN in this specific format to search for it. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The Social Security Number (SSN) associated with the student.
-
Specifies the format of the Social Security Numbers or equivalent for that country. When you specify the format, the format is required by Anthology Student when the number are specified for the student on the Student Profile. The student national ID entered is validated against the configuration.
-
Specifies the format of the Social Security Numbers or equivalent for that country. When you specify the format, the format is required by Anthology Student when the numbers are specified for the student on the Student Profile.
-
The name of the SSRS report for the degree certificate with the .rdl extension.
-
The last name and first name of the staff member.
-
Staff members who belong to the selected campuses or campus groups. Use this field to specify the staff members who will be able to post or edit attendance for dates that are on or before the last earn date. This field is available only if you select “Staff” in Staff Type.
-
Indicates the last name and first name of the staff member. You can either create a new staff member with appropriate permissions or use an existing staff member with the required permissions. Each system-generated application key is associated with a system-generated staff member (for example, StudentApiUser@anthology.local) . This staff member only exists as a Staff record in the application and does not have a password or be required to be added as an AD/AAD user. As a result, this staff member is never used to authenticate against. However, this staff member’s authorizations in Anthology Student are used to determine permissions for API calls that are made in the system context, using the key. The staff member’s Id is also used to update the database for the calls made by the client application. By default, this staff member will have admin access. You can adjust the user’s permission based on the needs of your application.
-
Select the staff member assigned to web transactions. You can only select staff members with an email address on file.
-
The last name and first name of the staff member who is to be assigned a position.
-
Indicates the staff person assigned to web transactions. You can only select staff members with an email address on file.
-
If Anthology Student is integrated with Anthology Finance & HCM, displays a Yes if the staff member was added using Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
Select a staff assignment. This option is enabled only when a task template is selected.
-
The staff member for notification. The value is required, but contains a default of No Notification. If you select PDSO, Anthology Student sends the notification to the staff member specified in the PDSO/RO field on the International page in the campus settings. (Select Settings > System > Campuses >campus in the list.) If you select Notify DSO, Anthology Student sends the notification to the staff member selected in the Designated School Officials/RO field on the International page for the student. (Select the student > expand Contact Manager > International tile.) If you select Notify International Advisor, Anthology Student sends the notification to the staff member displayed in the row for International Advisor (Staff Group column) on their Advisors page. (Select the student > expand Contact Manager > International tile.)
-
Group containing staff members in an institution. Typically, the groups are based on departments and job functions. Administrators can use staff groups to assign or revoke access privileges to all the members in the staff group.
-
Select this option to associate employers with campuses outside their assigned campus group.
-
The code assigned to the staff group based on the department or job function. For example, financial aid advisors may be assigned to the FAA advisor code based on the standards set by the institution.
-
Select a staff group. This option is enabled only when 'Limit Permission to Approve Batch Disbursement' is enabled.
-
Select the staff group that will be allowed to set automatic auto drafts.
-
Select the staff group. This option is enabled only when the Limit Permission to Set Disbursement Status to Reviewed field is enabled.
-
The staff groups that can make this status change. You can select more than one.
-
Select a specific Staff Group or Staff Member.
-
The staff groups that can access the view. You can select more than one.
-
The group you specified for staff members in an institution.
-
Staff groups that are associated with the selected campuses or campus groups. Use this field to specify the staff groups that can post or edit attendance for dates that are on or before the Last Earn Date. This field is displayed only if you select Staff Group as the Staff Type.
-
The staff group that will be used to filter available instructors.
-
The staff groups that the staff member is a member of. If the staff member is in an advisor group and you remove them, you also remove the staff member as an advisor for all of their assigned students.
-
Select the staff group that is permitted to create batches of automated credit card payments.
-
Staff groups with full access may view, edit, move or delete the view. You may select more than one staff group.
-
Staff groups with view only access can look at the view but cannot perform edit, move or delete operations on the view. You can select more than one staff group.
-
Specifies the staff group for which the report is generated.
-
A unique identifier of the staff. The ID was assigned by Anthology Student when it was added to the system.
-
The specific staff member.
-
Select this option to allow staff members to associate employers with campuses outside their assigned campus group.
-
Select the single or multiple staff members who are authorized to view the transaction adjustments report.
-
Select a staff member to notify. This field is enabled only when you select the Use Default FA/SA Staff member option in Staff Assignment.
-
Select the staff member to receive notification when it reaches maximum number of sections. This field is enabled only when you select the Allow Auto Add Class Section check box.
-
Select the staff member to receive notification when new class section is added. This field is enabled only when you select the Allow Auto Add Class Section check box.
-
The name the last user who worked with the subsidiary record.
-
The position for the staff member. They are configured by your institution. Position must have a single staff assignment for any given duration. If you are associating staff members with load validation policies and you leave the field blank, Anthology Student applies the policy to all positions.
-
The position assigned to the staff member.
-
A unique identifier of the staff position assignment.
-
The first day that the staff position is valid from or in use. Valid from date must be within the Position duration of the selected record. Duplicate records with the same date cannot be added.
-
The last date the staff position is valid or will be in use. Valid to date must be within the Position duration of the selected record. A duplicate record with the same date cannot be added.
-
Indicates whether staff members or staff groups should be displayed in the Staff list.
-
For private groups, specifies the staff members for the campus who can use the group. They can also add or remove students. The staff member that you select must be authorized.
-
Select the staff member/s from available campuses
-
Select the staff member for whom you want to generate the report.
-
Select Pre-payment, Post-payment, or Both.
-
The seat can be reserved only for the specified standard in minutes.
-
Specify whether you want to enable a standard academic year.
-
The standard advisor assigned to the student.
-
Indicates the program version is configured to use standards terms of quarters.
-
Indicates the program version is configured to use standards terms of semesters.
-
Indicates the program version is configured to use standards terms of trimesters.
-
The first day that the item is effective or can be used.
-
The start date of the scheduled job.
-
The start date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to the start date in the student's enrollment record. The start dates of the student's second and succeeding sequences are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods, in most cases, the date should not be before the start date of the program version. For loan periods, the start date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The date when the value or change is applicable.
-
The start date you want to specify for your alumni records. It is determined by your institution. For example, your institution could choose to use the date they graduated or the date the record was added.
-
The day to start recording the attendance. Attendance for a class section can be recorded for dates that are on or between the start and end dates.
-
Start date of the academic year or payment period.
-
The start date of the range. It will include any batches that completed processing after this date.
-
The date when an item starts or the first day it can be used.
-
Enter the date the student starts the job or select it from the calendar tool.
-
The date on which the class starts. The term start date is included by default.
-
If your institution has a range of dates that a transfer course is valid, the start date of the range.
-
The start date of the student for the program version.
-
The start date of the student. Title IV rules state that a school must wait 30 days after the start date before disbursing Federal Student Aid (FSA) loans to the student if the student borrower is a first-time, first-year undergraduate student. This limitation does not apply to PLUS loans.
-
This is student program version start date that was selected for stipends evaluation.
-
The date on which formal examinations are expected to start.
-
The date on which formal examinations are expected to start. For Program Versions associated with the Slot, exam schedule must start on or after the date you specify in this field.
-
The date range for your exceptions search.
-
Displays the program version start date.
-
If your institution has configured floating term scheduling for Academic Records, specify a range of start dates for the course.
-
The start date of the class section.
-
The expected start date of the student in the program version.
-
The specific date the automated job becomes active.
-
The start date of the sequence. For the first sequence, Anthology Student defaults to the start date in the student's enrollment record. The start dates of the student's second and succeeding sequences are estimated using the number of weeks in the academic year or loan period and the number of weeks not enrolled. If needed, you can change the estimated date on the Academic Years tab. For loan periods, in most cases, the date should not be before the start date of the program version. For loan periods, the start date must be between the start and end dates for the Borrower-Based Academic Year (BBAY).
-
The start date of the payment period. The default is the start date for the sequence. For an academic year, the start date of the first payment period sequence must be the same as the start date of the academic year. In most cases, for loan periods, the start date of the first payment period sequence should be the same as the loan period. Subsequent start dates must be after the previous payment period end date.
-
The date when the student employed or is scheduled to employment after placement.
-
The student’s program version start date.
-
The start date of the program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in.
-
The start date specified for program versions. Start dates are configured by your institution. The list is filtered so that it only displays the start dates common to the selected campuses.
-
If you selected Payment Period in the Period Type list, the start date of the payment period, term, or academic year. If you selected Period of Enrollment, the start date of the period. If the billing method selected for the program version is bill by program, the default is the start date for the program version. Otherwise, the default is the start date for the payment period, term, or academic year.
-
The start date of the term or payment. The default is the date configured for the term or payment period. If it is a term and you selected PERP, there is no default and you must select the date.
-
The date that an item starts or the first day it can be used. Not applicable if Specific Date is set as the Frequency.
-
The date that the student would like the address to start being in effect.
-
The start date of the student at the selected institution.
-
The start date of the range for the revenue you want to recognize. It defaults to the start date following the Last Earn Date updated by Anthology Student in the configuration for the campus for Student Accounts after the last revenue recognition process was done. If you need to specify an earlier date for a first time use or a data conversion, you can change the Last Earn Date in the configuration. You should not change the date for other reasons. It can cause the revenue to be earned more than once. If you need to make a change for other reasons, you should use the Reverse Revenue Recognition option from the Processes tile instead.
-
The day when the conflict started.
-
The date on which formal examinations are expected to start. For Program Versions associated with the Slot, exam schedule must start on or after the date you specify in this field.
-
The start date of the payment period.
-
The name assigned to the start date parameter.
-
The date when the change takes effect for the student.
-
This is student program version start date. Specify a date range to evaluate stipends only for students whose program version start date is within the specified date range.
-
The student's program version start date.
-
Student's program version start date.
-
The start date of the Student Agency Affiliations.
-
Student's Program Version Start Date.
-
Enter student’s program version start date range. Only students whose start date fall within the specified range will have statements generated.
-
The date the schedule or AY build you are configuring should begin.
-
The start date of the term.
-
The date when the billing term can be used as default for the Term Group.
-
The Start Date of the registration period. This can be for Internal and Online Registration periods based on the configuration. The start and end dates for the registration periods must occur on or before the term start date.
-
The start date of the term.
-
Lower limit of date range for Loan Period’s start date specified for the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
Upper limit of date range for Loan Period’s start date specified for the Title IV credit balance evaluation.
-
The date when the change takes effect to the date when the change ends.
-
Filters the report to show only programs configured with a start date and the start date is active.
-
Indicates the name of the program or area of study that the Start Date applies to.
-
The code for the start date of the program version. Start date codes are configured by your institution and associated with program versions.
-
The start date of the placement.
-
The start date of the module break.
-
The Start Date of return is automatically populated based on the selected course. You can manually change the date if the student’s return date does not coincide with the course start date.
-
Student’s program version start date.
-
The first day that the item is effective or can be used. This field is enabled only when you have selected Renewal Type as Academic Year.
-
Specify date range of student’s program version start date to filter the population of students for the process.
-
Specifies the number of weeks after the start of the class that Anthology Student applies the pattern to generate the class schedule. For example, to use the pattern as soon as the class starts, specify 0.
-
The start position. The maximum length is 6 digits. The value cannot be empty and must be greater than 0. This field is only displayed if you have selected Fixed Length option in File Delimiter Option field.
-
The start position. The maximum length is 6 digits. The value cannot be empty and must be greater than 0.
-
The Code, Name, and dates (start and end dates) for available terms.
-
If a Start Term is selected, the system will use the weeks configured on the program version to calculate the Mid-Point and Graduation Date for the enrollment.
-
The best practice is to select a Version Start Date when adding an enrollment to a student record and not selecting a Start Term. A Start Term should only be selected if a Version Start Date was not selected under Program Information.
-
The start time of the item.
-
The time at which formal examinations are expected to start.
-
The time that the period is configured to start.
-
The time when the conflict started.
-
The Start Type options are Expected Start Date and Term.
-
The date and time when the first job within the batch started executing.
-
The date and time when the job within the batch started executing.
-
The date and time when the attendance began to be archived.
-
The start time of the background job.
-
The date and time when the course name was changed.
-
The Date and Time when the document tracking started for the student.
-
The date and time the batch started processing.
-
The date and time the batch started processing.
-
The date and time the process (Copy Configuration or Build AY) was begun.
-
The date and time the batch started processing.
-
Specify the starting check number for the refund/stipend checks. The check number is incremented by 1 for each of the refund/stipend record processed. If Anthology Student is integrated with Great Plains and the bank account selected is set up to use Great Plains Checkbook, the starting check number is next available check number from the checkbook and the field is not editable.
-
The starting number from which the Section IDs will be generated for each class section in this term.
-
If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
If within the United States, the name of the state. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
The state in which the building is located. If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
The name of the state to which the student or person belongs to.
-
Select the condition for the state in the report. The values are Equal To, Not Equal To, Greater than, Less than, Between, Like, and Include All. For example, if you select condition Between and enter the range (a;g) in the respective value field, the report displays the states between a and g only.
-
The state in which the location is. If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
The payee's state.
-
Select the condition for state for which you want to generate the report. The values are Contains, Is Equal To, Is Not Equal To, and Include All States.
-
The state from the student or employer address.
-
The state of the venue. If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
Grant provided by the state. Specify the estimated grant amount that the student is eligible for.
-
State Grant - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the grant option does not apply to the student.
-
Specify the reported state of residence for the student or parent.
-
This is a required field. Select the state of your institution's main campus. The drop-down includes all states in Canada and the United States.
-
Scholarship provided by the state. Specify the estimated scholarship amount that the student is eligible for.
-
State Scholarship - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the scholarship option does not apply to the student.
-
Additional states where the program is available.
-
Enter the state value.
-
Specify the value for state. If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for state. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
The amount as specified in the student statement.
-
The amount due as specified in the student statement.
-
The closing date as specified in the statement.
-
Area to specify comments or notes that will appear on the student statement produced by an outside vendor or source.
-
Specify a comment that you want to be printed at the top of each statement.
-
If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
Specifies the states to which the course refund policy applies. If the course refund policy is to be based on the student’s state of legal residence, the state stored with the address in the student master record is compared against the states selected for each configured refund policy. The course refund policy used will be the one where one of the states selected for the policy matches the state stored with the address in the student master record. Any course refund policy that does not have states selected as a filter continues to be used as the default for campus, terms, or program versions.
-
The associated School Status on the student's enrollment.
-
Status value, e.g., accepted, rejected.
-
Status indicator.
-
Indicates the status of processing for the student or item in the job. If all of the awards were successfully processed and approved, it displays Succeeded. If one or more awards were not approved, it displays Completed.
-
Indicates the status of the processing for the award. If it was processed and the award was approved, it displays Succeeded. If the award was not approved, it displays Deleted. Deleted means that it was removed from the batch.
-
A status of Preparing indicates that the jobs in the batch are still being created or are waiting on the system resources required to create them. Started indicates that the batch has been started. (At least one job in the batch is Enqueued, Processing, Succeeded, or Deleted.) Succeeded indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and ALL job states are Succeeded. Completed indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and some jobs may be at Succeeded state, but at least one of the jobs are at a Deleted state. Awaiting indicates the batch is awaiting the completion of a dependent job or batch. Deleted indicates that the batch has been canceled.
-
A status of Preparing indicates that the jobs in the batch are still being created or are waiting on the system resources required to create them. Started indicates that the batch has been started. (At least one job in the batch is Enqueued, Processing, Succeeded, or Deleted.) Succeeded indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and ALL job states are Succeeded. Completed indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and some jobs may be in Succeeded state, but at least one of the jobs is in Deleted state. Awaiting indicates the batch is awaiting the completion of a dependent job or batch. Deleted indicates that the batch has been canceled.
-
A status of Preparing indicates that the jobs in the batch are still being created or are waiting on the system resources required to create them. Started indicates that the batch has been started. (At least one job in the batch is Enqueued, Processing, Succeeded, or Deleted.) Succeeded indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and ALL job states are Succeeded. Completed indicates all jobs in the batch have been executed and some jobs may be in the Succeeded state, but at least one of the jobs is in a Deleted state. Awaiting indicates the batch is awaiting the completion of a dependent job or batch. Deleted indicates that the batch has been canceled.
-
Indicates the status of processing for the student or item in the job. If all of the records were successfully processed, it displays Succeeded. If one or more records were not processed, it displays Completed.
-
Displays the status of the Campus-Based COD Export batch, e.g., Not Sent, Ready to Send.
-
The status of the cash drawer session.
-
The status of the activity.
-
The status of the degree pathway. For the student and template plans, it displays View and the plans are read-only. Draft indicates that the plan is still in draft. Approved indicates it is the approved plan.
-
The status of the deposit.
-
The status of the disbursement. For Direct loans, the statuses are Scheduled (S), Paid (P), or Canceled (C). For all other awards, the statuses are Scheduled (S), Ready to Pay (R), Paid (P), and Canceled (C).
-
The status of the disbursement at COD (such as Accepted by COD).
-
Status of the disbursement. Status options include Approved and Paid.
-
Indicates the status of courses. It displays whether the course have been: • Fulfilled or completed • Unfulfilled or dropped
-
Specifies whether or not the student has attended the exam.
-
The status of contracts. The statuses are: Accepted by faculty - contract has been accepted by faculty, Rejected by faculty - contract has been rejected by faculty.
-
The status of contracts. The statuses are: In Draft - contract can be edited and associated to faculty, Generated - contract has been generated for review, Pending approval - contract has been sent and waiting for approval, Approved - contract has been approved by approver, Draft in Review - contract has been sent back by approver with review modifications, Sent to faculty - contract has been sent to faculty for review, Accepted by faculty - contract has been accepted by faculty, Cancelled - contract has been cancelled, Rejected by faculty - contract has been rejected by faculty, Contract in review - rejected contract in review, Error During Generation - contract failed to generate or merge.
-
The status of contracts. The statuses are: In Draft - contract can be edited and associated with faculty, Generated - contract has been generated for review, Pending approval - contract has been sent and waiting for approval, Approved - contract has been approved by approver, Draft in Review - contract has been sent back by approver with review modifications, Sent to faculty - contract has been sent to faculty for review, Accepted by faculty - contract has been accepted by faculty, Rejected by faculty - contract has been rejected by faculty, Contract in review - rejected contract in review, Error During Generation - contract failed to generate or merge.
-
The status of contract templates. The statuses are: In Draft - template can be edited, Pending approval - template has been sent for review and waiting for approval, Draft in Review - template has been rejected and sent back by one of the approvers with review modifications, Approved - template has been approved by the approver.
-
Indicates the status of earning lines. The options are All, Exported, Error, Integrated, Generated, Sent, and Success.
-
The status of the award. The values are Estimated, Pending Approval, Approved, and Canceled. The Approved option is available only if: - You are in a staff group with permission to approve the fund source. - The student does not have pending ISIR corrections. - The institution does not use a servicer (such as Global Financial Services) to process financial aid.
-
Displays the status of the FWS record. The status is "Not Sent" if the record is pending for export. After it has been exported, the Status changes to "Sent". Once the COD response is received, the status will change to "Accepted" or "Rejected".
-
Indicates the status of processing for the student or item in the batch.
-
The status of the housing applications.
-
Indicates the status of the processing for the file. If it was processed and all of the records were imported successfully, it displays Succeeded. If the file was processed, but some of the records could not be processed at CommonLine, it displays Completed. When you select the batch job in the list, you can review the reasons why a record was not accepted or processed.
-
Indicates whether or not Faculty Workload Management has been configured to be integrated with your Human Resources (HR) system. Integrated indicates it has been integrated. Not Integrated indicates it has not.
-
The status of the integration log.
-
Indicates whether the ISIR is "accurate", "within tolerance", or "not within tolerance".
-
The ISIR verification/correction status.
-
Select the job status of employer for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - All Types - Available - Filled - Unable to Fill - Pending - Deleted - Closed
-
The current status of the job after being run (Successful or Failed).
-
The status of the loan. The values are Estimated, Pending Approval, Approved, and Canceled. If your institution is using a servicer to process financial aid, the option for Approved is not selectable (such as Global Financial Services). You must be in a staff group with permission to approve the fund source to select Approved for the award.
-
Status of the message transfer. Valid values are Sent (messages successfully transferred from Mailbox Manager, Received (messages successfully transferred into Mailbox Manager, and Error (failed message transfers).
-
The status of the origination change at COD. The statuses are Created, Updated, or Deleted.
-
The status of the outstanding transcript request.
-
Select the option for status for which you want to generate the report.
-
The associated pay period status.
-
The amount remaining to be paid for the payment plan.
-
The status of the payment. The values are Paid (P), Void (V), and Failed (F).
-
Status of the grant. The status options are Approved, Canceled, Estimated, and Pending Approval. If your institution is using a servicer to process financial aid, the option for Approved is not selectable (such as Global Financial Services). You must be in a staff group with permission to approve the fund source to select Approved for the award.
-
The placement status.
-
The status of the payment.
-
The school status of the payee.
-
Indicates the status of the processing for the batch of award letters. If it was processed and all of the award letters are ready to print, it displays Succeeded. If the file was processed, but some of the award letters could not be prepared for printing, it displays Completed.
-
Indicates the status of the award letter for the student. If it was successfully processed, it displays Succeeded.
-
The status assigned after checking the student’s eligibility to a stipend disbursement.
-
The status of the processing of the batch.
-
The status of the stipend. Available options are: P - Paid and V – Voided.
-
Indicates the values obtained from status codes of the Graduate - Placement category.
-
The status of the refund. The values are Calculated and Posted. Calculated indicates it has been calculated. Posted indicates it has been posted. You can select the refund calculation to view the values, but they cannot be changed and the refund cannot be recalculated unless you undo the posting.
-
The status of the refund. The values are Calculated and Posted. Calculated indicates it has been calculated. Posted indicates it has been posted. You can select the refund calculation to view the values, but they cannot be changed and the refund cannot be recalculated unless you undo the posting.
-
The status of the refund. The values are Calculated and Posted. Calculated indicates it has been calculated. Posted indicates it has been posted. Once a refund calculation is posted, you can select the refund calculation to view the values, but they cannot be changed and the refund cannot be recalculated unless you undo the posting.
-
The status of the refund. The values are Scheduled, Approved, Paid, or Canceled.
-
The earning status. Available values are Open and Posted.
-
The placement status of the student. The list values are obtained from status codes of the Graduate - Placement category.
-
The status of a script can be 'Ready To Execute' or 'Already Executed'. If the status is 'Reader To Execute', select the Execute Script button to run the script. If the status is 'Already Executed' and the script cannot be run again, the Execute Script button is disabled and the Allow To Run' field is set to false.
-
Indicates the status of the processing for the file. If it was processed and all of the records were extracted, it displays Succeeded. If the file was processed, but some of the records could not be extracted, it displays Completed. When you select the batch job in the list, you can review the reasons why the records that were not extracted in the Job Results list.
-
Displays the status for the student or item. If the record was processed, it displays Succeeded. Otherwise, it displays Deleted. (The record was not included.)
-
The status of the processing for the student. The values are Processing, Succeeded, or Failed. If it Failed, you can review the reason why in the Reason column.
-
The status of the disbursement. The statuses are Scheduled, Ready to Pay, Paid, or Cancelled.
-
The status of the stipend schedule. Available options are: Approved, Cancelled, Estimated, Hold, and Pending Approval.
-
Active indicates that the address type is an active address. An inactive status for an address indicates that the address is most likely an address that will not result in contacting the student. For example, Anthology Student displays Inactive for the system-defined SEVIS Foreign US Address and Future address types. Anthology also displays Inactive for the address types your institution defined if they are changed from active to inactive in configuration. It also displays Inactive if the address type was configured with effective dates and the current date is outside of that date range. It is read-only.
-
The status of the student payment. The status can be Scheduled (S), Ready to Pay (R), Paid (P), or Cancelled (C).
-
The status of the task. If you are selecting a value, the list contains the system statuses of Pending (default), Queued, Closed, Activity Reassigned, and Activity Failed. Any additional items in the lists were defined by your organization.
-
If the process Succeeded or Failed.
-
The status of the transaction: F - Paid in Full O - Open P - Partial Payment.
-
Indicates the status of earning lines. If your institution has not configured integration with an external payroll system, Generated indicates that the earning lines are generated; Exported indicates that the earning lines have been generated and exported. If your institution has configured integration with an external payroll system, Generated indicates that the earning lines are generated; Sent indicates that the earning lines are exported to the external payroll system; Success indicates that the earning lines are exported and success has been acknowledged by the external payroll system; Integrated indicates that the earning lines are exported and integration has been acknowledged by the external payroll system; Error indicates that the earning lines are exported and there is an error in the external payroll system due to which it cannot be processed. The error has been acknowledged by the external payroll system.
-
Select this option to specify the system status categories to be included in the duplicate search.
-
Select each status category where a matching duplicate student could exist when the duplicate search is performed. The selected status categories will be used to filter which status categories are shown in the Status Category grid. You must complete the status category grid and save.
-
The category for the status. It can include more than one student status. They are defined by the system and selected for the student statuses configured by your institution.
-
This must be completed for each status category where a matching duplicate student could exist when the duplicate search is performed. Specify which fields will be updated on the existing student profile when a new student record is processed as a duplicate and the existing student profile student status matches the selected status category. You can specify different fields to be updated for each status category if desired.”
-
The date when the status was last changed. Specifies the Date Added or Effective Date.
-
The date when the status was last changed.
-
The enrollment status date of the student.
-
If the student status has a code of FUT, BP, NOSHOW, CANCEL, APPREJ, NDS-FUT, NDS-BP, NDS-NO, NDS-CAN, NDS-REJ, displays the date that the status was last changed.
-
Select the option that you want for Status Date for Withdrawals. This option is enabled only when you do not select the Attendance Required by Outside Entity check box. The options are: - LDA (Last Date of Attendance) - Use Drop Type to Determine
-
The detailed description provided by your institution for the student status.
-
Lists the details of an error. It can be the detailed error log or any error details that will assist the user to identify the issue.
-
Reasons why students change from student status to another student status. The reasons are configured by your institution.
-
The reason associated to the status assigned to students after their eligibility to a stipend disbursement is checked.
-
At some institutions, students who are no longer attending classes are left in an Active/Attending status so that they can still log into the Student Portal. In this scenario, the “Status Represents a Title IV Withdrawal” check box can be selected to indicate that the status represents a withdrawal for Title IV purposes. If this attribute is selected, the Status Change process will treat a status change from an Active status to the new Active status with the Title IV withdrawal attribute as if the status change was from Active to Drop for purposes of determining the NSLDS Withdrawal Date, Date of Determination, and other downstream impacts to Financial Aid, Student Accounts, and other reporting (such as enrollment reporting and Clearinghouse). This check box is displayed only when Attending is selected for System Status and Withdrawn is selected for NSLDS Status.
-
The type of status that is applied to the Application.
-
The type of status. The values are Approve, Reject, Review, Terminate, Reassign, On-hold, and Abandon.
-
Select the required status for the financial aid summary.
-
The status of the housing deposit.
-
The status of the student.
-
The status of the job whether it was successful or displayed an error.
-
Select the status of the refund. The options are Posted, Not Posted and Void.
-
The associated Student Status on the student's enrollment.
-
The status of the charge schedule. There are three system-defined status: - Not Billed - Billed - Pending
-
The date when the status was last changed. Specifies the Date Added or Effective Date to be used to determine student’s status during the earning revenue period.
-
The status of change in course name.
-
The status of the deposit, that is, New, Rejected, or both.
-
The name of the step.
-
Stipend amount calculated by the system to resolve Title IV credit balance for the student.
-
Stipend amount scheduled for the fund source to resolve the student’s Title IV credit balance.
-
The stipend amount.
-
The Stipend amount is net amount received for the award which is the total amount received minus all refunds/stipends/voids. Validation exists to prevent the edited stipend amount from exceeding the net amount received. If amount entered is greater than net amount received, a warning message is displayed and the stipend amount will be reverted to its original calculated value.
-
Indicates bursary can be used for stipends.
-
The unique identifier for each stipend.
-
The unique identifier for each stipend.
-
The schedule created for awarding funds as stipend.
-
Indicate the types of stipend. The options are All Stipends, Manual Stipends, and Auto Stipend.
-
The stipend status. The options are Canceled, Paid, Scheduled and Voided.
-
Specify whether you want to prevent the stipend amount scheduled from exceeding the amount packaged for the specified fund source.
-
Specify whether you want to prevent the issuing of stipend disbursements when funding has not been received. You can allow stipends to be posted and issued to the student before the funding is received on the ledger card. By default, the value is set to Yes.
-
Specify whether you want to prevent scheduling of stipends when the institutional charges are greater than the amount packaged. You can allow stipends to be scheduled when the institutional charges exceed the amount packaged. By default, the value is set to Yes.
-
The stipend you wish to include for the job. Choose between All, Auto Stipends, or Manual Stipends.
-
The last date of attendance stored in the database.
-
The detailed address of the building.
-
The street address. For student addresses, if an address has more than 40 characters, the additional characters in the address line will not be extracted to be sent to COD but will be truncated.
-
The street address. For student addresses, if an address has more than 40 characters, the additional characters in the address line will not be extracted to be sent to COD, but will be truncated. For this property, the Operator list displays the Starts With option only.
-
The street address used for billing.
-
The detailed address of the building.
-
The street address for the corporate location.
-
The employer's street address.
-
Street address of the building.
-
The street address associated with the credit card.
-
The payee's street address.
-
The street address.
-
The detailed address of the venue.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for street address. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
The STRF fee of n% that has been posted to the students' ledger cards and can be identified by the specified Transaction Code.
-
The STRF fee that is calculated based on the specified rate amount per $1,000.00 of institutional charge and the institutional charges amount the student is billed for the evaluation period.
-
The STRF fee that is calculated based on tuition amount the student is billed for the term.
-
This is the short description for the Amount Per $1,000.00 of Institutional Charges.
-
The last and first name of the student. In some lists, the name of the student is highlighted. If it is highlighted, you can select the link and it will display the Student Profile or a page available from the profile (such as their Documents list in Contact Manager). To display the Student Profile, you must have Common - Student - View authorization. If the link takes you to a page available from the profile, you must have authorization for that page. For example, if it displays the Documents list, you must have Contact Manager - Student Document - View authorization.
-
The student's current subsidiary balance.
-
State where the student currently lives.
-
For a prospective student, inquiry, applicant, or enrolled student, the student meets the criteria when the value in the Student Status field on their Student Profile is one of the values you select in the Values list. The Values list contains all the student statuses for the campus with a status category of lead (L), Permanent Out (P), Never Attended (N), Enrollment (E), Active (A), or Temporary Out (T).
-
The last and first name of the student. In some lists, the name of the student is highlighted. If it is highlighted, you can click the link and it will display the Student Profile or a page available from the profile (such as their Documents list in Contact Manager). To display the Student Profile, you must have Common - Student - View authorization. If the link takes you a page available from the profile, you must have authorization for that page. For example, if it displays the Documents list, you must have Contact Manager - Student Document - View authorization.
-
Indicates the student in the term for whom you want to recalculate the pending charges. You can only select one student. This field is populated when the type is set to Term.
-
The student who will be assigned to the new catalog.
-
The last and then first name of the student.
-
Search for a student to generate Activity Statement when running the process in Student mode.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Search for a student to post payments against.
-
The Student to whom the stipend will be paid.
-
Search for a student to post charges against.
-
Search for a student to post refunds against.
-
Select the name of the student for whom you want to recalculate the pending charges in a term. This field is enabled only when the pending charges type is set to Term.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Select a specific to generate statement for that student only. This field visible only if the statement Type is Student.
-
Search for a student to generate Activity Statement when running the process in Student mode.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Select a specific to generate statement for that student only. This field visible only if the statement Type is Student.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Select the student to generate registration bill. This field is visible only if the bill Type selected is Student.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Select Required to specify that the staff member must select a student when they add or edit the task. If you selected E-Mail Student in the Event Type list, it is set to Required and cannot be changed.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
The first and last name of the student with whom the transcript will be associated. You can filter the Student search using Student ID as well.
-
Indicates the term is used for posting financial aid or billing.
-
Select the staff member with more than Display Only Permissions in Student Accounts Post.
-
The first and then last name of the Student Accounts Advisor for the student. The student must be enrolled in a program version to have a Student Accounts Advisor.
-
Name of the student's account advisor.
-
The advisor name and the group of the student account staff member.
-
The Student Accounts task for the staff who need to be aware of transfers to correct or adjust the billing and outstanding balances.
-
Select the check box if you want the student address to be printed.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the student address on the bills.
-
Select the condition you want for the age criteria for the tuition discount policy. For example, if you select 'Between', it changes the Age field to Age: From and To, so that you can specify a range.
-
Current balance for the student's subsidiary.
-
Indicates the student's bank account number. Only active bank accounts are available for selection.
-
Indicates the student's bank account associated with the transaction. This field is visible only if the Payment Method selected is ACH. It only displays active student bank accounts that are added through a payment gateway provider’s hosted page (TouchNet or ACI).
-
Indicates the student's bank account associated with the transaction. This field is available only if the student’s campus is configured to process ACH transactions through a payment gateway provider.
-
Indicates the student's bank account number. Only the last four digits of the number is visible.
-
Indicates the type of the Student Bank Account. For example, Savings or Checking
-
This field contains a list of student’s ACH payments that can be refunded. This field is visible when the Return Method selected is ACH and • The student’s campus is configured with TouchNet payment gateway provider to process ACH payment plans and refunds or • There are ACH payments on student’s ledger card that are associated with VRN (Vendor Reference Number) values. This field becomes required when there are only ACH payments with VRN exist. If there are both types of ACH payments found (with VRN as well as without VRN), then this field is not a required field.
-
Indicate the Vendor Reference Number (VRN) from the drop number. This field is visible when there is a VRN value associated with the ACH transaction. This field becomes required when there are only ACH payments with VRN exist. If there are both types of ACH payments found (with VRN as well as without VRN), then this field is not a required field.
-
Indicates the name of the bank where the student's account is present.
-
The name of the campus for the student.
-
Select the check box if you want the student class schedule to be printed.
-
Specifies the fields required for student when integrated document management service. This field is enabled only when you select SchoolDocs in Document Management Service field.
-
When you select Yes, Anthology Student includes students in the report who have a document configured to be a document to hold an FSA credit balance (Student) in their Documents list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Documents tile.)
-
If the student is not the borrower, specifies whether the student defaulted on loans. The values are Yes, No, and blank.
-
If the student is not the borrower, specifies whether the student is in default on loans. The options are Yes or No.
-
The academic degree taken by the student. You must have at least one Anthology Student Degree associated with a State Award Conferred.
-
Select the degrees configured at your institution that map to the types of degrees for the State of Texas.
-
Used by the system to calculate and allocate a Cost of Attendance budget for students.
-
What to use in regard to the student enrollment: select Default COA, Packaged To, or Prior Completed Term.
-
Status of the student whether they are attending the event or not. Available statuses are Attending, Absent, Approved, Not Attending, and Present.
-
You can select this option to designate whether fees should be charged once, based on the student's overall level of enrollment for the time frame. This option is ONLY applicable for billing connected enrollments with Automated Registration Billing set up with a Term frequency.
-
Dual (Connected) Enrollment Student Fee with Terms not shared. You can select this option to designate whether fees should be charged once, based on the student's overall level of enrollment for the time frame. This option is ONLY applicable for billing connected enrollments with Automated Registration Billing set up with a Term frequency.
-
The name of the student field which will be updated on the existing student record when a new student is processed as a duplicate and the existing student profile to which it is matched has a student status that maps to this status category. A different list of fields to update can be specified for each status category.
-
Select Yes or No in the Student Filed Joint Return with Current Spouse field.
-
The name of the fund source in Anthology Student that is used to award the aid. The list only contains fund sources configured for the campuses in the Campus Mapping list.
-
The name of the fund source in Anthology Student that is used to award the aid. The list only contains fund sources associated with campuses that your institution configured with a Texas (TX) address.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups to which you have been given access.
-
The name of the student group. When selecting a group and if your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campuses that you are assigned to.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups where you have been given access. Please note that selection of only frozen group is allowed here.
-
If the detail criteria are evaluated and the student is not making SAP, the student is assigned to this group. You can only select manual groups. You cannot select dynamic, static, or frozen groups.
-
If a student exceeds the maximum time frame of required credit or clock hours, the student is assigned to this group. You can only select manual groups. You cannot select dynamic, static, or frozen groups.
-
Enables you to filter the students in the Students to Register by Student Group.
-
The student group associated with the course that you want to unregister from.
-
The name of the student group.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups to which you have been given access.
-
Select the students in the specified student groups to be included in the evaluation. Students in these groups must be California residents or enrolled in a California residency program.
-
The student groups you are applying the selected COA to.
-
The student groups that were selected for stipends evaluation.
-
Select student groups to limit stipend evaluation for students belong to the selected student groups only.
-
The name of the student group. If you are selecting a group and your institution has configured Anthology Student to limit groups to campuses, you can only select groups for the campus that you are assigned to. If you are selecting a group, it can also be filtered to display groups where you are the owner, public groups, and private groups where you have been given access.
-
The student groups associated with the new tuition discount policy. Different tuition discount policies should not share the same student group.
-
Select Yes if you want Anthology Student to include only students from the staff members authorized campuses in student groups. To include the students from all campuses, select No.
-
The ID assigned to the student in the Anthology Student database. While your institution can assign student numbers in a format that they choose, this ID is associated with a student in the database. It is displayed at the end of the URL when you are working with a student in the Student Web App and can also be used to search and locate students.
-
The ID assigned to the student in the Anthology Student database. While your institution can assign student numbers in a format that they choose, this ID is associated with a student in the database. It is displayed at the end of the URL when you are working with a student in the Student Web App and can also be used to search and locate students. For this property, the Operator list displays the Equal option only.
-
Displays the number that will be used in the student ID for the next new student or prospect added to Anthology Student. The ID assigned to the student in the Anthology Student database. While your institution can assign student numbers in a format that they choose, this ID is associated with a student in the database. It is displayed at the end of the URL when you are working with a student in the Student Web App and can also be used to search and locate students.
-
Indicates whether you want to include the Student ID, Social Security Number, Enrollment Number, or None. Note: The ID is printed for each student selected for the report. Most reports have all three student IDs available to print on the report. The SSN is required on some reports. Reports about leads (prospects) do not have an Enrollment ID. The ID selection is not used for reports that do not list individual students.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number, SSN, and None.
-
Select a Student ID to Print. The options are Enrollment Number, Student ID and None.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number, SSN, Enrollment Number, and None.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number, Enrollment Number, SSN, and None.
-
Select an option for the student ID to be printed. The options are Enrollment Number, None, and Student Number (recommended option).
-
Indicates whether you want to include the Student ID, Social Security Number, Enrollment Number, or None.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number and None.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number, SSN, and None.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. You must be authorized to view social security numbers (SSNs) and to select SSNs in the list.
-
Specifies the ID that is printed. The values are Student Number, Enrollment Number, and None.
-
Choose an identifier to tie the student to the check. Select None, Enrollment Number, or Student Id.
-
Specifies the loan period sequence for the loan. If there is more than one loan period sequence, you must select the sequence. Once you select the sequence, the Loan Period Start Date, Loan Period End Date, Academic Year Start Date, and Academic Year End Date values default to the dates for that sequence. When you change the sequence, the dates on the scheduled disbursements are automatically updated. The academic year defaults to the academic year based on the start date of the loan payment period. For non-term program versions, the dates for disbursements can be changed to dates outside both the loan period and academic year dates. You can disassociate a loan from a loan period sequence if there are no disbursements with a status of Paid or Ready to Pay. Disassociating a loan from a Loan Period Sequence means the loan period dates and disbursement dates will not be changed when the loan periods and loan payment periods are updated by the SPE. These loans will be evaluated by the SPE based on the academic years and grant payment periods that are associated with these loans instead. You can associate a loan with a loan period sequence if there are no disbursements with a status of Paid or Ready to Pay. You can also change a sequence on the loan if there are no disbursements with a status of Ready to Pay or Paid or the origination status is Accepted by COD.
-
Indicates the number of matches found for a student in Anthology Student. The values are 0 (an unmatched record) or greater than 0 (matched record, for example 1, 2, and so on).
-
Specifies whether or not a student is making satisfactory academic progress (SAP). No indicates that a student cannot receive financial aid. Yes indicates a student can receive financial aid. Select No if you want to associate the SAP status with a student group. Once a group is tied to the status, the field is disabled and cannot be changed to Yes. You can remove the group if you change the value to Yes.
-
When selected, specifies that SAP must be met for a disbursement to meet the criterion. If you selected Current Enrollment in the Evaluation Mode list, Anthology Student checks the SAP status for the enrollment. If you selected Disbursement Term in the Evaluation Mode list, Anthology Student checks the SAP status for the payment period or term. If there is no SAP status for the payment period or term, Anthology Student checks the SAP status for the previous payment period or term. SAP is typically not run until after a payment period or term has been completed and often not run against every disbursement payment period or term. If SAP has never been run for an enrollment, then Anthology Student does not perform this check or hold disbursements for this criterion. A SAP status being reported as not calculated will not produce an exception or hold a disbursement. However, this criterion will evaluate against the Sap Status of a previous enrollment if there is a “Linked SAP Enroll” populated in the Progress accordion of the current enrollment. A linked SAP Enroll status will be utilized by Approve Disbursements to Pay for evaluation if a student meets SAP until SAP is run on the student's current enrollment.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
The name of the student as shown on the student's profile, the student's preferred name or the student's nickname.
-
The student ISIR states that they are a Graduate student but received SEOG. The student will be excluded from the FISAP Summary Report but will appear on the FISAP Detail Report. This will cause a difference in the SEOG totals between those reports.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number, or your institution can use another method to assign it.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number, or your institution can use another method to assign it.
-
Student number assigned to a student.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned, is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number or your institution can use some other method for assigning the ID. This property supports Equals and Starts With as operator options.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number or your institution can use some other method for assigning it. It works with the Contains, Equals, and Starts With operators.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned, is specified by your institution. For example, Anthology Student can be configured to assign the number or your institution can use some other method for assigning the ID.
-
Use a Social Security Number, Student Number, or Student ID to search for a student.
-
Unique number used to identify to each student.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student. How the number is assigned, is specified by your institution.
-
If you selected Use Student ID Format in the Student Number Generation list, enter the student number format. The formats available for the string are: YY=Year, MM=Month, DD=Day, ####=Next Number, L=Last Name, F=First Name.
-
Select the required option for your institution's student number generation. The options are: - Sequential Number: Anthology Student maintains a sequential number which is assigned to each new prospect when it is entered. This number is never duplicated and can be used as a unique ID for a student. You can then specify the starting number in the Student ID field. - Use Student ID Format: The format string for student ID is: YY=Year, MM=Month, DD=Day, ####=Next Number, L=Last Name, F=First Name. - Do not generate: Institution keeps track of student IDs manually. Anthology Student does not allow a duplicate ID to be assigned to a student.
-
If your institution assigns student numbers, the number your institution uses to identify the student.
-
Indicates whether or not the student is in a group that is configured in Academic Records to be a transcript printing hold group.
-
You can select this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when a student payment is made prior to enrollment.
-
You can select this option to configure an automatic charge to be generated when a student payment is made prior to enrollment. Only Student Payment or Enrollment Payment may be selected (selecting one will unselect the other).
-
If the student has a default address specified in their Related Addresses list, the phone number specified for the default address. If there is no default, it displays the phone number from their Student Profile.
-
The placement status of the student.
-
Select the applicable initial student awarding population(s) from the Select Student Populations pop-up form. Populations are displayed by their configured system Code and Name.
-
Select the check box to specify that the award will be automatically approved after the student accepts the award online on the Portal.
-
Indicates whether credit card payments are allowed on Student Portal for this campus.
-
Indicates whether student bank account payments are allowed in the Student Portal for this campus.
-
Link to the student's record.
-
A selectable link to directly access the student's profile.
-
Automatically processes approved scheduled refunds and posts them to the student's ledger.
-
The number of students registered in the course.
-
Select the option that determines where students can register. The options are Yes: Only courses offered at the student's campus are displayed. No: The listing of all courses offered within the defined campus group is used.. and Yes & Use CRSG (Course Registration Sharing Groups). For the last option, course sections are shared with other campuses giving students additional options to register for course sections that may be filled at their home campus. For additional information about the student registration, see the background for academic records general settings.
-
In the grid, select the properties that you want displayed as default properties in the student search results for the staff member. If the staff member customizes the properties, the first and last name cannot be removed. If you want to include all the properties as the defaults, select the Select check box in the column heading of the grid.
-
Indicates that you want to generate invoices for a single student or for multiple students. The fields displayed will change based on whether you select Single or Batch.
-
Name of the student's services advisor.
-
If the borrower is not the student, specifies whether there is a signature code for the student. The values are Yes and No.
-
This check box is enabled when you select the Unsched Days check box. You can then enter a numeric value between 1 and 999 in the Meeting Duration in Minutes field. This value will be used when you specify “P” in the student’s attendance for student-specific meeting schedules.
-
Indicates the Last Name, First Name, and Middle Name of the student's spouse (if applicable).
-
Specify the income earned from work for the student's spouse or parent spouse or partner.
-
Select the tax filing status of the student's spouse or parent spouse or partner.
-
The date the student starts the class section. This value is filled in by default based on the Class Section Start Date.
-
Select student’s program version start date range. Only students whose program version start date fall within the specified date range will have registration bill generated.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change. If there are also tasks associated with the previous status, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to select the tasks to keep and the tasks to close with the result of canceled.
-
Specifies the status of the alumni student at your institution. The values can be either complete or graduated.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change.
-
Student's school status.
-
The student status that you use to filter the students.
-
Displays the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you want to view the school status of the student, you can use this Student Status in the Customize Header Properties.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. The school statuses with status categories of L (Lead), N (Never Attended), and P (Permanent Out) are omitted from the list. Placement school statuses (status category of G) are also omitted from the list.
-
The school status for the student.
-
The enrollment status for the student.
-
The student's current enrollment status.
-
If a student exceeds the maximum time frame of required credit or clock hours, specifies the school-defined status assigned to the student.
-
If the detail criteria are evaluated and the student is not making SAP, specifies the school-defined status assigned to the student.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change. If there are also tasks associated with the previous status, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to select the tasks to keep and the tasks to close with the result of canceled.
-
The student’s school status.
-
Student's school status.
-
The status of the students associated with the transcript batch.
-
The date when the status was changed. This field is enabled only when you select New Student Status field value of category Never Attended or NDS-Never Attended.
-
Reason for the student status change in a record.
-
Specifies the status of the student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change. If there are also tasks associated with the previous status, Anthology Student displays a dialog that you can use to select the tasks to keep and tasks to close with the result of canceled.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. You can further filter students based on their statuses.
-
Select statuses to gather only transactions for students who are associated with the selected statuses.
-
The student statuses that were selected for stipends evaluation. Only students who are associated with the selected statuses will be evaluated.
-
Select student statuses to filter population of students to generate interest.
-
Specify student statuses as criteria to generate activity statements. Only students with the selected statuses will be included.
-
List of student statuses.
-
The student enrollment statuses. Only students whose enrollment status matches one of the selected statuses will be gathered.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution. If you change the status for a student, a dialog is displayed so that you can confirm the change.
-
Specifies that the student must have one of the student statuses before for a disbursement to meet the criteria.
-
Select student statuses to be included in the stipend evaluation process. Only students who are associated with the selected statuses will be evaluated.
-
Select student statuses as a criterion to filter student population for statements generation. Only students who are in the selected statuses will have statements generated.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution as a criterion to gather students for the report. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution.
-
Select student statuses to be included in the evaluation of Title IV credit balance. Only students who are associated with the selected statuses will be evaluated.
-
Specifies the status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution.
-
Specifies student statuses as criteria to generate activity statements. Only students with the selected statuses will be included.
-
Select student school statuses.
-
Select student school statuses. Only students whose school statuses are selected will have statements generated.
-
Student school statuses to be used to gather students to generate statements. Only students whose status match with statuses selected will have statements generated.
-
Specifies student statuses to further filter the student population for the process.
-
Automatically processes approved stipends and posts them to the student's ledger.
-
Automatically processes approved subsidiary refunds and posts them to the student's ledger.
-
When you select Yes, Anthology Student includes students in the report who have a document configured for all the Title IV institutional charges (Student) in their Documents list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Documents tile.)
-
The students who have not been charged interest since the specified date. It must be less than the Transaction Date.
-
Only students who have not been charged. The students who have not been charged interest since the specified date will be evaluated for interest.
-
Transfer Student Monitoring (TSM) uses two types of student groups: one group to gather students to place into TSM and another group associated with Financial Aid disbursement hold codes. TSM allows Anthology Student to automatically place students on disbursement hold and remove them at the appropriate time.
-
The student who will be assigned the task.
-
The last and first name of the student
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Select the student to generate registration bill. This field is visible only if the bill Type selected is Student.
-
Select an individual student to generate subsidiary for only that student. This field is available only if the statement Type selected is Student.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
The last and first name of the student.
-
Specify the income earned from work for the student or parent.
-
Select the tax filing status of the student or parent.
-
Specify the adjusted gross income (AGI) for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the value cash, savings, and checking accounts for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the amount of child support received by the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the amount of college grant and scholarship aid for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the deductible payments to an IRS, KEOGH, or Other retirement plan for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the number of education credits for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Indicate whether the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner filed schedule A, B, D, E, F, or H.
-
Specify the foreign income exclusion reported on the U.S. tax return for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the net worth of businesses or investment farms for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the net worth of investments, including real estate, for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the Schedule C amount for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the tax exempt interest income for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the U.S. income tax paid or foreign equivalent for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specify the untaxed portion of IRA distributions and pensions (excluding rollover) for the student/student's spouse or parent/parent spouse or partner.
-
Specifies whether you want to include the student address.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include student address.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include student class schedule details. This field is enabled only if, in the selection criteria you select terms in billing method and specify single term.
-
The specific student(s) you wish to work with.
-
The students who will be assigned the honors and badges. This option will be displayed if you select Students as the Type.
-
Select who Administrative Relief should be included for in the automated job (All Students, Individual Students, or Student Group. Note selecting Student Group opens a new Student Group field for you to select the student group).
-
The number of students currently registered in the course.
-
The number of students that were selected. It can include students who were selected, but not evaluated. For example, if you select a group that contains students who were evaluated past the number of days that SAP can be calculated at your institution, the student is selected but cannot be evaluated.
-
List of students who have submitted documents that will further be tracked. The values are - All Students, SSN and Student Number. By default, the value is 'All Students.'
-
The number of students unregistered while cancelling the class section.
-
The number of students that had their satisfactory academic (SAP) status updated as a result of the SAP evaluation.
-
Specifies whether or not you want students with credit balance.
-
Filters the search list for students by the last and first name of the student. In some lists, the name of the student is highlighted. If it is highlighted, you can select the link and it will display the Student Profile or a page available from the profile (such as their Documents list in Contact Manager). To display the Student Profile, you must have Common - Student - View authorization. If the link takes you to a page available from the profile, you must have authorization for that page. For example, if it displays the Documents list, you must have Contact Manager - Student Document - View authorization.
-
The credits earned upon completion of the Course Sub-Component.
-
The type of sub-components available for this course. This is configured in the Course Sub-Components configuration. Eg, laboratory sessions, tutorials, lectures, seminars etc.
-
Any secondary (subsidiary) process related to a main system process. There can be multiple sub processes to choose from. As an example, sub processes for COD would be COD Import, COD Export.
-
The sub vendor for the prospect student as decided by your institution.
-
The description of the task. If you are specifying the description, the default is the value that you selected for the Task. The value can be modified.
-
The subject of the activity.
-
Includes the program's subject code and description for the J-1 visa. The Subject field is required when Transmission Status is D or R and Action is Begin New Program or Continuing Exchange Visitor.
-
Indicates the name of the task that gets auto populated in the subject field. This is editable.
-
A branch of knowledge taught in an Institution.
-
Indicate the subject of study.
-
Indicate any remark related to the subject.
-
Group of Subjects from the same or related areas of learning.
-
Defines the academic level for Subjects added to an Examination Level. You can choose one of the following options - Lower Grade, Higher Grade, or Standard Grade.
-
Used to categorize Subjects from the same Subject groups into a Set that can be used to validate eligibility of Students during admission.
-
The minimum passing score.
-
String that describes the reason for the PLUS Application submission. The maximum is 30 characters.
-
The name of the staff member who submitted the batch for processing.
-
The name of the staff member who submitted the background job or batch for processing.
-
The name of the user who submitted the employer's details.
-
The user who instituted the process.
-
Specifies that the student wants to receive SMS text messages. If you select the check box, you must also specify a value for the Mobile Phone Number and select a provider in the SMS Provider list for the student to receive the text messages. The student can also use Portal.
-
If your institution has configured multiple disbursements, indicates a subsequent disbursement.
-
The name and code of the subsidiary that you will post the charge or payment to.
-
Select subsidiaries to be included in the report.
-
The subsidiary name.
-
The name of the subsidiary to which the deposit is applied. You must set up the subsidiaries previously with transaction codes linked to them.
-
Select appropriate subsidiary for the charges/adjustments. This field is populated when you select a transaction code associated with subsidiary.
-
Name of the subsidiary associated with the updated subsidiary transaction.
-
The name of the subsidiary. The names of the subsidiaries are populated based on the campuses selection.
-
Displays the Subsidiary Name, Code, Maintained Balance, and Balance.
-
Indicates the student’s subsidiary account balance.
-
The subsidiary code for the refund amount. This field is enabled only when you have selected Yes in the Refund Housing Deposit field.
-
Select the check box if you want the subsidiary ledger to be printed. This field is editable when Ledger Card Activity is set to Yes.
-
The name of the subsidiary.
-
The name of the subsidiary.
-
The name of the subsidiary. Select the subsidiary that you would like to generate the statements for. The names of the subsidiaries are populated based on the campus selection.
-
Displays the Subsidiary Name for the batch.
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include subsidiary information for the enrollment.
-
Amount of the subsidized Direct loan available to the student.
-
Aggregate Outstanding Principal Balance (OPB) for all subsidized loans held by the borrower that counts against the student's overall loan limits.
-
Indicates the course is a substitute course.
-
If there is a substitution pool, select the check box to specify that you want to select a subsidize course.
-
The check box is displayed for the courses configured as substitution pool in the list.
-
If you selected the Substitution check box, select the substitution course.
-
Select the substitution course from the courses configured as substitution pool in the course list.
-
The name of the substitution or elective pool assigned to the course. This value is displayed only in Edit mode.
-
Specify the substitution pool name from the course list.
-
Indicates whether the background job succeeded.
-
Select the suffix for student or person's name. Anthology Student displays the description of the suffix. For example, Anthology Student displays Third instead of III.
-
Select the suite category.
-
The code of the suite category.
-
The category of the suite.
-
The suite gender.
-
Specify the suite number.
-
The suite number.
-
The Subsidized Usage Limit Applies (SULA) flag indicates whether the student is subject to the 150% Direct Subsidized Loan limitation. If the flag is set to “Yes,” the student is a “new borrower” and is subject to the 150% Direct Subsidized Loan Usage Limit. To avoid losing the interest subsidy on a Direct Loan, the student must complete the chosen program within 150% of the published program length.
-
For award years 2014-15 and later, specifies whether the Subsidized Usage Limit Applies (SULA) that limits a first time borrower to 150% of the published program version length applies to the student. Y indicates that the COD has determined that the student is a first time borrower and the 150% subsidy limit applies. N indicates that the limit does not apply.
-
Indicates the summary of all the selection criteria for the statements.
-
Select the option for which you want to generate summary in the report. The options are: - Program - Program & Status
-
Indicates whether the summer terms are included for packaging (Yes/No)
-
The number of default credits to be awarded in a summer term as a header or trailer. If you specify a value, the total academic year credits will be the value you specified for Full Academic Year - Credits added to this value. If you do not specify a value, Anthology Student will determine the number of credits in the summer term. It divides the full credits in the academic year by the total number of terms in the academic year, including the summer term. Anthology Student uses the value you specify here or the result of the calculation to determine the correct enrollment status for the student during the summer term.
-
The Subsidized Usage Period range indicates if a student has a remaining subsidized loan eligibility for a specific award year.
-
The name of the supervisor for this position.
-
The supervisor's phone number.
-
Indicates whether students can repeat the course as a supplementary course in the same term based on the parameters defined by your institution. If you select Yes, under Lesson Setup (Processes > Gradebook), you can select the lessons that must be available to students in the supplementary course. Students who register for a supplementary course must repeat all the supplementary lessons.
-
Designates a grade as a supplementary grade used for assessing a student's performance in all supplementary courses in an enrollment.
-
Specify one or more grades that qualify a course for a supplementary attempt in the same term. If the grade is reported for a course, Anthology Student automatically makes the course eligible for a supplementary attempt.
-
Indicates the method of supplementary of the course if a supplementary exists. The options are Use Highest and Use Most Recent. If you are configuring grade scales, there is also an option to use the supplementary methodology configured for the campus.
-
The status of a supplementary course. The available statuses are Supplementary, Supplementary Scheduled, and Supplementary Completed.
-
Specifies how Anthology Student manages revenue for students who drop. Select Do Not Suspend Revenue if you do not want revenue for the students. Select Who do not have a posted refund calculation to suspend revenue for drop students who do not have a refund calculation posted for the appropriate enrollment period. Select Whose date of determination is within to suspend revenue for a student when their date of determination is n number of days before the end date of the revenue earning period. If you select Whose date of determination is within, you must also specify the number of days in the Days of Revenue Earnings Period End Date field.
-
The code used to identify banks and financial institutions globally.
-
Specifies whether the value is system-defined. Yes indicates that the item is defined by Anthology Student. No indicates that your institution added the item. You cannot delete or deactivate items that are system-defined. Some or all values might also not be editable.
-
Specifies whether or not the value is system-defined. Yes indicates that the item is defined by Anthology Student. No indicates that your institution added the item. You cannot delete items that are system-defined. Some or all values might also not be editable.
-
Name of the student's system advisor.
-
The UNC-compliant file path used for file transfers between Anthology Student and the COD system. The System EDE path is used for backup and archiving purposes.
-
Specifies whether or not the job is system-defined.
-
Indicates the field which is in database as system required field.
-
Specifies the system defined school status of the prospect or student at your institution. Statuses vary by institution. They are configured by your institution.
-
The status of the system. For additional information about system statuses, see the background information for status changes.
-
The system status to be changed from.
-
The system status to be changed to.
-
Specifies whether or not the value is system-defined. Yes indicates that the item is defined by Anthology Student. No indicates that your institution added the item. You cannot edit or delete the code value that is system-defined.
-
Specifies whether or not the value is system-defined. Yes indicates that the item is defined by Anthology Student. No indicates that your institution added the item. You cannot delete items that are system-defined. Some or all values might also not be editable.
-
Indicates System Student Identification.
-
The table name of the integrated entity.
-
Specify this field to provide the destination for outgoing transactions. The values are stored in the SyRegistry table.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution.
-
Tasks are collections of operations that accomplish a task. For example, there is one task that authorizes a staff member or group to view Admissions documents using the Document Tracking feature (includes only the get operation). There is another task that authorizes a staff member or group to edit Admissions document using the Document Tracking feature (includes both the get and save operation). There are two types of tasks. Built-in tasks installed with the product that authorize users or groups to take actions for features. Custom tasks that you create that organize the built-in tasks or other custom tasks that you have created.
-
Categories your institution can use to organize task types. They are configured by your institution and can be associated with task types.
-
The task category.
-
The name of the task policy that controls access to the tasks that staff members create using the task templates configured by your institution.
-
The outcome of the task. The list is only displayed for a Status of Closed. It contains results defined by your institution.
-
Shows the status of the item. The options are Delayed, Completed, and Assigned. Assigned is for items that are assigned to you that you need to review and decide. Delayed is for items that you have not decided that are now past the due date. Completed is for the items where you have made a decision and specified the status.
-
Status of the task that must be performed.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution.
-
The preconfigured template you wish to select for notification that is to be sent to the selected recipient (Staff Member or Staff Group). When selected, this template is updated with the specific details of the selected student.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution. Anthology Student only displays the task templates based on your configuration for Task Policies on the General page (Settings > Contact Manager > General), on the Staff page (Settings > System > Staff > select a staff member > Contact Manager tab), and on the Staff Policy Assignments page (Settings > Contact Manager > Staff Policy Assignments).
-
The Task Template that will be used to notify Approvers of the activities on the workflow. Only templates with Event Type as E-mail Staff will be listed here.
-
Select the task template to notify candidates with the jobs available.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when you add a new class section. When your institution creates a new section on demand, it triggers the selected task template to notify the staff. For example, e-mail staff and so on.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when it reaches the maximum number of sections. When your institution creates a new section on demand and it reaches the maximum level configured in Maximum Auto Course Sections to be Added field, it triggers the selected task template to notify the staff. For example, e-mail staff and so on.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when you add a student to the waitlist. When your institution adds a student to the waitlist, it triggers the selected task template to notify the student. For example, waitlist email to student and so on.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when you move a student from the waitlist to a registered course. When your institution moves a student from the waitlist to a registered course, it triggers the selected task template to notify the student. For example, waitlist email to student and so on.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when you move a student from the waitlist to a reserved course. When your institution moves the course status of a student to future(reserved), it triggers the selected task template to notify the waitlisted student. For example, waitlist email to student and so on.
-
Select the task template which you want to trigger when you remove a student from the waitlist. When your institution removes a student from the waitlist, it triggers the selected task template to notify the student. For example, waitlist email to student and so on.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the description given to the type of task when it was configured by your institution. The list only displays tasks that were configured to have Incident or Meeting selected in the Event Type list.
-
The task that must be performed. It is the name given to the task template when it was configured by your institution.
-
Select the tasks or activity that will be reassigned to the new advisor(s).
-
The tasks selected from the Tasks Template that will be used to notify the students.
-
The tax code created for services offered by your institution.
-
Indicates that tax is included for the service.
-
Specify the IRS taxpayer identification number for the institution that will file 1098-Ts.
-
Specify the Transmitter Control Code (TCC) Number assigned to your school by the IRS for filing 1098-Ts electronically. This must be five alphanumeric characters.
-
Transmitter Control Code (TCC) supplied by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS).
-
Select Yes to specify that the TEACH grant recipient has expert knowledge in the field, for example, someone who has retired from a specific field and is now pursuing a master's degree to become a teacher in the same field. You can select Yes only if the student is a graduate student.
-
The counseling date for TEACH grants. A value is displayed in this field if your institution has received a file (CRACyyOP) with the TEACH GRANT Initial and Subsequent Counseling Acknowledgment data type.
-
Select the check box if the program is an approved teacher certification program.
-
Select the type of activity. Select Teaching for class activities. Select Non-Teaching for the activities that your institution configured as not teaching, but contributions to the education process. Select All if you want to view both the teaching and non-teaching activities.
-
The telephone number. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether or not it uses parenthesis and hyphens).
-
Indicates that the template was saved.
-
Specifies the temporary amount assigned. If Allow Override for the load type is No, the value will be the default value configured for the load type and cannot be changed.
-
Specifies the temporary assigned FTE (Full-Time Equivalency) value. Anthology Student multiplies the FTE Factor and Assigned values and displays the temporary assigned FTE value for that Load.
-
Select the color code required for temporary out category.
-
Specifies the temporary overload assigned FTE (Full-Time Equivalency) value for each existing assignment, representing any FTE allocation beyond the standard capacity, indicating overload. This value is accurately calculated based on the assignment details and policy limits.
-
Specifies the temporary overload value applied.
-
Select a term from the list of available terms.
-
Indicates the term for which the assignment is assigned.
-
The available terms with start date and end date of each term. The start date must be before the end date of the award year.
-
Select a term to associate with the STRF fee. This field appears only when you have set Evaluation Period to Enrollment Period.
-
Select a term that has already been billed to process STRF against. This field only appears when you have set Evaluation Period to Term.
-
The Name, Code and status (Active or Inactive) of the term in which the class is offered.
-
Select the available term with start and end dates for each term. You can select up to ten terms at a time.
-
Select the terms to gather only transactions that are associated with those terms.
-
The term in which the disbursement is scheduled.
-
The Term on the Earnings Summary record that is associated with the earning detail record.
-
Specifies the term configured by your institution.
-
The term name associated with the failed prerequisite or conditional course.
-
Specifies a term to be associated with interest charges for the students.
-
The term used for the registration or unregistration process.
-
The term associated with the honors and badges.
-
Select the HOPE term you want to export. The values are SUMMER, FALL, WINTER, and SPRING.
-
If you select Selected Terms in the Evaluation Criteria list, select the HOPE term at which you want Anthology Student to evaluate the criteria.
-
The term for the disbursement. The Term code can be edited only on a disbursement that has a status of Scheduled.
-
The term that you have selected to process STRF against.
-
Select a term that has already been billed to process STRF against.
-
Available terms with start and end dates for each term. Select a term to be associated with the charges/adjustments.
-
The term associated with the disbursements.
-
The term associated with the disbursement.
-
Specifies the term which you would like to process tuition discounts for. This field is available only if the Tuition Discount Type selected is Term.
-
Select the terms for which you want to view students who failed/dropped all courses and have Title IV funds packaged. If your institution uses the parent and the child terms, you should use the parent term when running the report because even though courses are registered on the child terms, the credits attempted/earned are reflected on the parent term. Also, Financial Aid is packaged for parent terms.
-
The term associated with the transaction on the student ledger card.
-
If the student is enrolled in a program version that is configured to use an academic calendar for terms or non-terms that do not bill by payment period, select the term to which the refund calculation applies. Anthology Student filters the list and displays only the terms where the Last Day Attended is between the start and end dates of the term.
-
The term associated with the refund/stipend record.
-
The term specified in the student ledger card, is displayed if configured. If a term is not specified in the student ledger card, the term associated with the default campus is displayed, by default. If a term is not specified in either the student ledger card or the associated campus, the first term in the list is displayed.
-
The available terms.
-
The Term associated with the honors and badges. If you did not select a term, the value N/A is displayed.
-
The term associated with the earnings detail record. This column is displayed only if the student is earning revenue on child terms.
-
The term that will be associated with the revenue source.
-
The term associated with the earnings summary record. This column is displayed only if the term is associated with at least one earnings summary record in the list.
-
The first term you want to evaluate. The list includes the terms for your default campus with an end date before or equal to the current date. The term must also be configured to be a SAP term. If you are evaluating a student, Anthology Student lists the terms for your default campus for the student. If you are evaluating more than one student, Anthology Student lists all the terms for your default campus.
-
The term evaluated.
-
Select this check box to select the term. The selected term is the first term for which SAP is calculated. The SAP calculation then processes each subsequent term through the most recently completed term. You cannot run SAP by Term Sequence if you are evaluating Partial Terms.
-
Term associated with the refund.
-
The term associated with the transaction.
-
Available terms with start and end dates for each term. Specify a term to search for transactions associated with the selected term only.
-
Terms that you want included in the analysis for the export. It only displays terms that have been configured to be a Global extract term. If you selected the Only Show Active Terms or Only Show Current Terms, the list is also filtered by those options.
-
The term associated with the transaction.
-
The term that was evaluated.
-
The term associated with the stipend.
-
The term to be associated with the stipends.
-
The term for which the student registered.
-
If the fund source is configured to associate a course with payments, displays the term that was selected when the payment was made. If a course is also displayed in the Course Code, then the course is for that term.
-
The term to be associated with the charge or payment.
-
The Term check box is enabled only if you select Course Schedule to enable you to select the associated term.
-
The term assigned to the transaction.
-
Enables you to filter only transactions associated with the selected term.
-
The name of the term configured by your institution.
-
The term associated with the course that you want to unregister from.
-
The term for the disbursement.
-
Indicates the date when the student was added to or dropped from the term.
-
If a student does not satisfy the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a numeric average for the term that meets or exceeds the value in this field, the student is making SAP. This field is disabled if Scheduled hours is selected for the Attended Hours Basis when the SAP policy is based on clock hours by attendance.
-
Specify whether to apply the disbursement policy to term based program versions. The options are Blank, No, and Yes. If you leave the field blank, the policy will apply to all term based and non-term based program versions.
-
The start date of the term.
-
GPA calculations broken down by terms. Each term displays the term's GPA and the cumulative GPA as of the end of the term.
-
The code for the term.
-
The Return to Title IV term that is used for a student's Title IV calculation.
-
Specifies the term confirmation status for that student in a term. If your institution has configured to automatically unconfirm a term when a student unregisters for all of the courses in the term, Anthology Student changes the term to unconfirmed when all the courses are unregistered. Otherwise, a term remains confirmed when a student unregisters for all of the courses in the term unless it is manually unconfirmed.
-
Select the term confirmation option from the drop-down menu for which you want to generate the report. The options are: - Empty (default): No filters on term confirmation - Yes: Filters for students with confirmed terms - No: Filters for students without term confirmation
-
The term that starts and ends in the specified date range.
-
The end date of the term.
-
The date when the current term ends.
-
Indicate the term for which the student requires housing.
-
The grade point average (GPA) for the student for the term.
-
Indicates whether the GPA values are included in the Term GPA.
-
If a student does not satisfy the satisfactory academic progress (SAP) policy requirements, but receives a GPA for the term that meets or exceeds the value in this field, the student is making SAP. This field is disabled if Scheduled hours is selected for the Attended Hours Basis when the SAP policy is based on clock hours by attendance.
-
The group created to connect terms that are not shared.
-
The group created to connect terms that are not shared. This field is enabled only when you select Term Group in Billing Period.
-
Select the term group for which you want to generate the report.
-
The name for the term.
-
The number assigned to the term.
-
The start date of the term.
-
Indicates whether the terms are open (Yes) or closed (No).
-
You can use this field to configure Standard Term enrollment ranges based on credit hours with an assigned percentage or dollar range to adjust paid or scheduled disbursements during Auto Repackaging.
-
Indicates that the term should be included in the automated pre-pull and add-drop processes.
-
The term sequence number associated with the student's SAP evaluation.
-
The term sequence number associated with the student's SAP evaluation.
-
The term sequence number associated with the fee. This column is displayed only, if the billing method is set to term. Only student’s term corresponding the specified term sequence will be billed the fee. For example, if the term sequence associated with the fee is 2, then students who registered into the first term in the program version won’t be charged the fee.
-
The term sequence number associated with the student's fee schedule. This column is displayed only if the billing method is set to term.
-
The term start date.
-
The date when the current term starts.
-
The start date of the term for which you want to generate the report.
-
Select the type of term where you want the registration lock applied.
-
Available terms with start and end dates for each term. This field is enabled only when you have selected Renewal Type as Term.
-
Select the dependent that you want to terminate.
-
Indicate the reason for terminating the student. The options are: Absent from country for five months, Authorized early withdrawal, Change of status approved, Change of status denied, Change of status withdrawn, Death, Expulsion, Failure to enroll, No show - Manual Termination, Otherwise failing to maintain status, Suspension, Transfer student no show, Unauthorized drop below full course study, Unauthorized drop below full course time exceeded, Unauthorized employment, Unauthorized withdrawal, Violation of change of status requirements.
-
Select whether the new file definition requires a carriage return at the end of a record.
-
Date the Placement ended
-
Specify the termination fee that wil be charged when the lease is broken.
-
Select the termination fee. Termination Fee is posted in the subsidiary ledger if the transaction code selected is associated with the subsidiary. If it is not posted in the subsidiary ledger, pending charges are created or posted in the ledger card based on the billing method configuration.
-
Select the termination fee subsidiary code from the list of all subsidiaries associated with the selected transaction code. This field is populated only when the billing transaction code selected for termination fee is associated with single or multiple subsidiaries.
-
Select the termination fee subsidiary code from the list of subsidiary associated with the selected transaction code. This field is only populated when the transaction code selected for Termination Fee is associated with single or multiple subsidiaries.
-
The termination fee.
-
Indicate the reason for which you want to terminate the student. The options are Failure to pursue EV program activities, Failure to maintain health insurance, Conviction of a crime, Disciplinary action, Engaging in unauthorized employment, Violating sponsor rules governing the program, Violating exchange visitor program regulations, Failure to maintain a full course of study, Involuntary suspension, Failure to submit change of current address within 10 days, and Other.
-
Reason the Placement ended
-
This field is enabled only when you select Terms in Billing Period.
-
The number of terms in the academic year.
-
Displays all the terms from the selected rows which have valid assignments. If you remove: - Child Term, Anthology Student removes the term from the row with the parent term in the grid. - Parent Term, Anthology Student removes the row from the grid.
-
Available terms with start and end dates for each term.
-
This field is enabled only when you save a new course refund policy or edit an existing policy.
-
Indicates the terms for which the assignment is assigned. Anthology Student displays or allows you to multi-select only those terms that have valid Teaching and Non-Teaching assignments with the Load Validation status as passed.
-
Enables you to filter the terms that are associated with the selected campuses.
-
Select the terms you want Anthology Student to select from when it makes the term associations.
-
The terms that will be included in the registration track. Terms and Program are used to add scheduled classes to the Results grid. When you select Add To List, Anthology Student adds all the class sections required by the program in all the selected terms to the Results grid. If the same course is offered in multiple sections in multiple terms, you will see it listed several times on the grid.
-
Indicate one or multiple terms to calculate the student's account balance. The default value for this field is set to Include All. This field is populated with all available terms for the selected campus(es).
-
This field is enabled only when you select Terms in Billing Period. Select the terms to generate registration bills for students who registered in those terms.
-
The number of terms in the academic year. It must be less than or equal to the value you specified for No. of Terms in Academic Year.
-
Terms to exclude refers to transaction codes defined in a billing method that should be excluded. When charges are posted to ledger card or triggered as pending charge, certain charges should not be triggered for the transactions codes for the terms mentioned in 'Terms to Exclude' in billing method. These charges can be triggered by Student profile course registration, Curriculum registration, Term & track registration and Automated track registration.
-
Select the available terms with start and end dates for each term. You can select up to ten terms at a time.
-
The name of the test taken.
-
The test name.
-
This field checks whether or not the service key and the service URL provided are correct.
-
The method you want Anthology Student to use for the assessment. The values are Average of All, Best of Lessons, and Weighted Average.
-
Specifies the test date configured for the test. The value must be defined as a Field Name. The maximum length is 200 characters. If the Test Date Field Name is specified, the Reference Column value cannot be specified. Only Conversion Table, Conversion To Field, and Conversion From Field values can be specified.
-
Date of the test.
-
The staff member or staff group assigned to run the Auto Award engine in test mode. This staff member or staff group can see the processing of events and calculation of awards and results without committing an update.
-
If you have opted to choose Test mode results, you will be notified through the Task Template. On the result set grid, the Test Mode Task Template shows the Task Template assigned for that campus.
-
The number you want assigned to the test.
-
Testing options indicate that you are sending dummy data using a test account. In Test mode adding a credit card or making a direct credit card payment will redirect you to a test hosted page to add a credit card or to make a direct credit card payment. The appropriate test URL will be used to post the test payments to the provider’s server for processing when making a single credit card payment,
-
Select the admissions representative to create all new prospects from the test import. Tests - Admissions Representative should belong to the campus configured under Tests - Prospect Campus.
-
If you select Yes, the Import Test Scores process creates new prospects for unmatched records. If you select No (default), the unmatched records will be left unmatched.
-
Select the campus in which you want to create your new prospect test records. If a student test record does not have a school code defined, this setting uses the campus code defined here as the default campus to create a new prospect record.
-
Select the prospect source option you want to define for all new prospects being created from the test import.
-
Select the prospect type you want to define for all new prospects being created from the test import.
-
The results of the test for the student reported in text format.
-
Select the type of text qualifier or quotes to indicate a text field. the options are Single Quotes or Double Quotes.
-
SAIG mailbox (destination point) that identifies this campus to the Department of Education (TG followed by 5 alphanumeric characters).
-
Indicates the number that identifies this campus to the Department of Education (TG followed by 5 alphanumeric characters).
-
If you are using a servicer, specify the Third-Party Code (ID number) that represents your institution. This number is usually provided to your institution by the servicer and represents an identifier by which the institution is known to the servicer.
-
If Anthology Student is integrated with a third party document management system (such as Hyland's OnBase), indicates if the document and attachment are in the third party system. Yes indicates it is in the third party system. No, indicates it is not.
-
The invoice number for the third party.
-
The start time of the task specified in the From field for the task.
-
The start and end time for the registration period.
-
The schedule time of the class meeting. This field is used when your class schedule is configured to include Student Specific Meeting Schedule.
-
The time of the class meeting.
-
The end date and time of the registration period.
-
Indicates the time when the scheduled export student attachment batch is executed. This field is visible when the Recurrence is set to the Occurs once at option.
-
The time when the grades will be made available to the student online.
-
The time when the incident was reported.
-
The specific time you wish the automated job to be scheduled for.
-
The date and time when the preregistration period is starts.
-
The date and time when the schedule will no longer be available.
-
The date and time when the schedule will be available online.
-
The date and time when the registration period is no longer valid.
-
The date and time of the registration period start.
-
Indicates the time when the scheduled student batch export is executed. This field is visible when the Recurrence is set to the Occurs once at option.
-
The course sharing end time. This field is applicable when CRSG is enabled.
-
The course sharing start time. This field is applicable when CRSG is enabled.
-
The specific time you wish an exception to be removed from snooze mode.
-
The start time of the registration period.
-
The specific time you wish the process to occur based on your entry in the Recurrence field.
-
The number of hours that the student was absent from class.
-
The time when the task was assigned.
-
The time when the item or person was added or the status change was entered.
-
The number of hours attended by the student. Hours must be posted or these fields are blank.
-
If the SAP evaluation was done automatically, the time the SAP evaluation was done.
-
Total units of time the student has completed in the calculation period. If you change the value, the values for Percent Complete and Refund Percent are recalculated.
-
Select the time frame for the policy. The options are Term and Contract Duration.
-
Select the time frame for the policy. The options are All, Term, and Contract Duration.
-
Total units of time in the refund calculation period. The unit depends on the unit you selected when you configured the refund policy (such as days, weeks, hours attended or hours scheduled). If you change the value, the values for Percent Complete and Refund Percent are recalculated.
-
Indicates the basis of the refund. The options are: - Use Billing Method (on enrollment) - Program - Term - Academic Year - Calendar Year For additional information on Time Period, see Background for Refund Policies.
-
Indicates the basis of the refund. The options are: - Use Billing Method (on enrollment) - Program - Term - Academic Year - Calendar Year
-
Time stamp indicating the date and time when the messages were sent to SAIG/COD/CPS by Mailbox Manager. The time stamp is based on the local browser time of the logged in user.
-
A region that observes a uniform standard time for legal, commercial, and social purposes.
-
Indicates the time zone.
-
The time zone that Anthology Student calculated using the country code and zip code for the student.
-
Select the time zone that you want Anthology Student to use to determine when to run a scheduled job.
-
The admissions time zone. Time Zone corresponds to Region in Anthology Student. The field is only displayed if your institution has configured zone assignments.
-
The time the class is scheduled for.
-
The class section time.
-
Represents the 9-digit Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) selected by the user at the time the 1098-T Export was queued.
-
A check mark in the TIN Solicited field indicates that the institution has requested the Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) for the student.
-
The title for the person.
-
The title of the student at the agency.
-
The title for the employer.
-
The desired title is chosen from the title list.
-
The payee's title.
-
Indicate the title of the tile.
-
Indicates whether or not the award is configured to be a Title IV award or not. For fund sources that are typically Title IV, the check box is selected by default. If you select the Student Payments in the Type list or the Institutional check box, the Title IV check box is disabled.
-
Indicates whether the fund source is a Title IV fund source. For transaction codes, it displays N/A.
-
Indicates whether Title IV is enabled for the associated fund source order.
-
Select the check box if you want student pace evaluation to configure to update Title IV Loan Period date for academic calendars.
-
The first and last name of the staff member who performed the Return of Title IV calculation. If there was no Return of Title IV calculation, it is blank. For example, there is no Return of Title IV calculation if the student did not receive financial aid.
-
Select whether you want to set up Title IV eligibility notifications for a user. When you select Yes, the Title IV Eligibility Notification field becomes editable.
-
Select the staff member to be notified about changes to a student's Title IV eligibility. This field is editable only when Title IV Eligibility is set to Yes.
-
A "Yes" indicates that the program version is configured as Title IV eligible. "No" indicates that the program version is not Title IV eligible. The column is read-only. Users can filter the results by using "Title IV Eligible" as the filter criteria. Users can hide/unhide this column.
-
Specify whether to apply the disbursement policy to Title IV fund sources. The options are Blank, No, and Yes. If you leave the field blank, the policy will apply to Title IV and non-Title IV fund sources.
-
Indicates Title IV refund settings.
-
Current system status for the selected Title IV refund. These are: Approved, Exception, Exempted, No Longer Needed, Not Required, Rejected, and Review.
-
Select Yes to specify that the program version qualifies as a Title IV eligible program for 90/10 reporting. Select No if the program version does not qualify as Title IV. When you select No, Anthology Student enables the Non-TIV Program Revenue in the 90/10 Calc list so that you can specify whether or not the non-Title IV program version still qualifies to have its revenue included in 90/10 reporting. This field specifies the Title IV status of the program version for 90/10 reporting only. It does not change or affect the Title IV status for awarding. Additionally, this field is used for Servicer Extracts to include students enrolled in certificate programs.
-
If you selected Clock Hours or Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar and Clock Hr/Credit Hr wo/Terms in the Payment Methodology list, specify the number of payment periods for Title IV loans in the academic year. The number of payment periods for Title IV loans can differ from all other loan types.
-
The amount to be refunded for the fund source. Anthology Student calculated the value when the Title IV calculation was performed. If the refund policy was configured to be a manual calculation, you can change the value.
-
Specifies whether or not the fund source is Title VII funding.
-
Specifies whether or not the fund source is Title VII funding.
-
Specify Job Title for the student
-
Indicates the URL to post ACH transactions to the TouchNet server.
-
The last date of attendance for the student.
-
Specify the end date.
-
Enter the end numeric value.
-
Ending clock time for the job
-
The sequential number to which you want to move the field name.
-
The account you are sending funds to.
-
The Campus to which the Eligbility Rules must be duplicated to.
-
Choose the campus you would like to copy the existing configuration to. Note that you can add multiple campuses within this field.
-
The end date of the incident.
-
End date of the Clearinghouse Degree Verify record set.
-
Specify the date until which the log records need to be displayed.
-
The date when the course was completed.
-
Indicates the enrollment or campus that the student is transferred to.
-
The program versions you are applying the selected COA to.
-
The Start Date to which the Eligibility Criteria must be duplicated.
-
The class section that you are copying the class schedule to.
-
Highlights the schedule for the current day.
-
Specify a Tolerance Amount to be set for the packaging status promotion to handle any small differences - such as bank fees or disbursement schedule changes - that might occur in the student's award that would cause the student to fall out of the promoted packaging status.
-
Displays the topics established for integration between Anthology Student and the Azure Service Bus.
-
Displays the total for the column for all transactions.
-
The sum of the amounts of all the approved disbursements in the batch.
-
Displays the total for the column for all transactions.
-
Displays the sum of values in the record for Tuition, Books and School Supplies, and Other).
-
The disbursement amount accepted by COD.
-
The total number of records accepted/reject by COD.
-
The account balance.
-
The number of hours spent by an examination committee member on completing administrative tasks before and after an examination.
-
The total of need based aid plus non-need based aid.
-
The total amount of the stipends in the Stipend Schedule.
-
The total amount for the batch.
-
Sum of all amounts in the batch.
-
The total amount of charges.
-
The total interest amount.
-
The total amount calculated as payout.
-
The total amount in dollars.
-
The total discount amount.
-
The total amount of the scheduled stipend that is paid.
-
Total amount of the scheduled payment paid to date.
-
The total amount in dollars for post rent charges.
-
The total number of hours attended by the student.
-
Read-only field that displays the total number of sections that have been automatically added for this course.
-
The total number of awards that have been exported to COD in an XML file.
-
Displays the total of values you have specified in the budget and represents the cost of attendance (COA) for this academic year or loan period. It includes tuition, books and supplies, room and board, travel, and all other charges.
-
Displays the total number of class sections that have been automatically added for the class section. This field is read-only.
-
The total cost based on the sum of Total Dependent Expenses, Insurance Cost, and Cost of Attendance (COA). The information on Total Dependent Expenses is entered on the Dependent Data tab. The information on Insurance Cost is entered on the Student Info tab. The information on Cost of Attendance (COA) is entered on the Program tab.
-
The total of the Charges column in the Charges & Adjustments grid.
-
The total credits required for the enrollment.
-
The total credits the student attempted on the transcript from the previous institution.
-
The total credits for an externship.
-
Total number of borrowers delinquent.
-
Total number of disbursements
-
The total number of duplicate records at COD.
-
The percentage of the eligible amount of the grant for the award year that the student has used.
-
The total number of hours spent by an examination committee member in an examination.
-
The total fee charged by the institution for the billable service.
-
The total number of hours specified in the student financial aid. It is a read-only field that displays the total of the academic hours or enrollment statuses and outside coursework hours.
-
Select the option whether or not you want to display the total fund source type in the report.
-
The total amount of Federal Work-Study (FWS) earnings.
-
For an unweighted grade point average, the sum of the total quality points on the transcript for the student at the previous institution.
-
The total amount of grants and scholarships for the award year.
-
The total hours required for the enrollment.
-
The cumulative credits attempted by the student.
-
The rule reviews the courses in the applicable areas and applies those noted courses to fulfill the rule until the entire rule is satisfied (fulfilled). These courses are displayed in the applied courses section for the requirement rule on the DPA Requirement Rule Audit tab. The requirement rule type Advanced - Rule based/Total Hours is added to Programs, Program Versions, Area of Study, and Student Profile at the following levelsWhen value from configuration is selected, in the main page - Total Hours - Enrollment Hours equals to Value from Configuration. For example, for a program version, if you want to require the number of credits specified using the Required Credits field when the program versions were configured, select Value from Configuration.
-
The total number of hours that the student attempted on the transcript from the previous institution.
-
The total hours for an externship. The value must be greater than the 'Expected Hours per Week for Externship'.
-
Total amount paid to the institution. It includes tuition, books and supplies, and other charges that have been configured as institutional. For the definition of an institutional charge, see the FSA handbook.
-
The total amount of the student's institutional debt for the award year.
-
Total or maximum seats available in a Program Version.
-
The total number of lessons associated with a course.
-
The total number of lessons associated with this program version. This optional field is related to distance education programs and is used in revenue calculations.
-
Specify the total number of program graduates who took licensure exams in the most recently completed award year. Valid values are 1-999,999. This field is optional.
-
The number of makeup hours accumulated by the student.
-
The total number of makeup time in minutes needed by the student.
-
Total existing members in your institution.
-
Total members in the examination committee.
-
The total minutes absent based on the sum of the values specified in Hours and Minutes.
-
The total minutes attended based on the sum of the values specified in Hours and Minutes.
-
The total number of months required to complete this program version.
-
Indicates the total net amount of booked disbursements.
-
Indicates the total net amount of unbooked disbursements.
-
The total number of courses for the student on the transcript from the previous institution.
-
The institution is required to provide the total number of students enrolled in a program during the most recently completed award year. This includes both recipients and non-recipients of Federal student aid funds.
-
Total number of originations.
-
If you selected Yes for Program Version Use Clock to Credit, specify the number of out-of-class coursework hours. The value is used to calculate the academic years. For the maximum number of hours allowed, refer to the Department of Education (ED).
-
The total amount the student received from the fund source.
-
Specify the total number of program graduates who passed the licensure exam in the most recently completed award year. This value is not maintained in the system--you will need to configure it.
-
The total the student received for the payment period.
-
The sum of the "Amount" of all records (charges) in the grid that are being included in the 1098-T AND are previous year charges.
-
The total amount of the student's private education loans for the award year.
-
For a weighted grade point average, the sum of the total quality points on the transcript for the student at the previous institution.
-
The total refund. Anthology Student calculates the value by adding the values for Send Back/ Stipend, Title IV Refund, and Add. Inst. Refund for the fund source.
-
The total number of students registered for the exam.
-
The total amount of Federal Work-Study funds reported to COD.
-
The total number of hours scheduled to be attended by the student.
-
The seating capacity of the room.
-
The total stipend amount.
-
The number of individual students (unique combination of original Social Security Number and original name code) on this report. The ED uses this number to calculate the school's administrative cost allowance. For single campus institutions, this should agree with the total number of Pell recipients. If it does not, the school needs to resolve the discrepancy.
-
The revenue units to be earned.
-
The total number of weeks required to complete this program version. The Published Program Length should always match Total Weeks. When start dates are not associated with program versions, the system calculates graduation by the Total Weeks value listed on the program version, which only reflects instructional weeks, and does not factor in breaks, etc., when calculating graduation dates.
-
Displays the total of the numbers you specified for the secondary criteria. For example, if you specify 1 for First Name, Last Name, and Email Address, the total will be 3.
-
The totals for the columns.
-
Indicates that you can store TouchNet Unique Payment Plan ID.
-
The predefined track of classes used to register students.
-
Select this check box to enable tracking each time a prospective student inquires about enrollment.
-
The transaction amount.
-
The transaction balance after the amount is applied.
-
The transaction amount that has not been applied yet.
-
The transaction code.
-
The transaction code associated with the transaction.
-
The date on which the transaction occurred.
-
The number of the transaction.
-
The transaction number of the adjusted transaction.
-
The transaction number of the subsidiary transaction that was updated as it appears on the student's subsidiary account.
-
The transaction type.
-
Indicates the transaction type as defined by the Apply Credits feature.
-
Indicates whether the transaction is a charge, a payment, a credit adjustment or a refund/stipend.
-
The transaction number as it appears on the student's subsidiary account.
-
Indicates whether the transaction is a charge, a payment, a credit adjustment, or a refund/stipend.
-
Transaction types for direct loans are: A = Adjusted Disbursement Amount and D = Disbursement
-
Indicate the transaction type. The options are Include All, Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Invoice, and Payment.
-
The transaction name and code associated with the enrollment charges paid by the student.
-
The transaction name associated with the fee.
-
The transaction name associated with the room category.
-
The transaction name associated with the suite category.
-
Transaction Identifier of the ISIR record.
-
Select the transaction name from the drop-down list which is to be associated with the fee to charge the student. The list displays all transaction codes specified for the student iunder Configuration > Student Accounts > Transaction Codes.
-
The transaction name or description.
-
The transaction name.
-
The transaction name or description.
-
The transaction name or description.
-
Specify the range of transaction amounts. Only transactions with amounts within the specified amount range will be included in the search.
-
Indicates the original credit amount.
-
Indicates the original payment.
-
The specific type of transaction (Tuition, Fees, Books, Travel, Room, Board, or Other).
-
Select the transaction category from the drop-down list, for example, Books, Fees, Tuition, Room, Board, Travel, Other, and Personal.
-
The transaction code.
-
Select transaction code (for example, Tuition, Books, etc.) to include in the auto-apply payment hierarchy.
-
Select a transaction code for the auto charge.
-
Select the transaction code to be associated with the STRF fee to charge the students.
-
The transaction code. The following items are applicable when posting charges: - If transaction code permissions are used, only transactions that you can process are displayed - When posting to the main student ledger, only transaction codes that are not associated with a subsidiary are displayed
-
Specifies the type of transaction for the deposit. The list contains the transaction codes that have been configured by Student Accounts to be accepted as admissions related deposits.
-
Institutions can configure transaction codes as interest transactions and then select them from this wizard. The process uses the selected transaction code's interest when applying interest to student accounts.
-
Indicates the transaction code to which the housing fee is applied. This field is populated when the transaction code selected for Housing Fee is associated with subsidiary.
-
Indicates the transaction code to which the housing fee is applied.
-
The general ledger transaction code.
-
Indicates the transaction code for the charge. You can associate a transaction code with multiple subsidiaries.
-
The code assigned to the transaction when it was configured by your institution. It contains codes configured with a Transaction Type of Student or Both. It does not contain codes for Miscellaneous.
-
Select appropriate transaction code for the charges/adjustments. If you select a transaction code associated with subsidiary, a subsidiary drop-down field is populated. The transactions are only posted to the Subsidiary ledger for students at the specific campuses.
-
The transaction code used. This does not display transaction codes that have been linked to subsidiaries.
-
Select appropriate transaction code for the charges/adjustments.
-
Select a transaction code that is associated with the selected fund source.
-
Specifies the transaction code to search only for transactions that are associated with the selected transaction code.
-
Specifies the fees for specific services that comprise service categories.
-
The transaction code for the charge. You can associate a transaction code with only one subsidiary. A transaction code associated with a subsidiary will not be available for use in the Student Ledger, even though all transaction codes are in the same tab as those for Miscellaneous Receipts and Student Ledger transactions.
-
Indicates the unique code associated with a transaction that affects the student ledger and the posting of related entries in the General Ledger.
-
The transaction code.
-
Indicates the transaction code. - When the transaction source is set to Ledger card, the transaction code is applicable for posting charges to the student ledger. You can select multiple transaction codes. Only non-subsidiary transaction codes that are shared among all selected campuses and the transaction code type is set to “Student” or “Both” . - When the transaction source is set to Subsidiary, only subsidiary transaction codes that are shared among all selected campuses and the transaction code type is set to “Student” or “Both”. If the student changes the campuses selection, you can remove the Transaction Codes selection, refresh the available transaction codes, and re-select transaction codes.
-
The transaction code for the termination fee.
-
Select transaction code (for example, VENDING and MISC etc.).
-
Select the transaction codes of debit transactions that are applied by the selected credit sources. You can select one or multiple active or inactive transaction codes for the selected campus.
-
Select the transaction code status. The options are Include All, Active, and Inactive. By default, it is set to Include All. When specific transaction codes are selected, the Status selection is overridden and those transaction codes are displayed based on whether they are Active or Inactive. If the Transaction Codes Statuses is set to Active and Transaction Code is set to Include All, the report populates all records where the associated Transaction Codes status is active. If Transaction Codes Statuses is set to Inactive and Transaction Code is set to Include All, the report populates all the records where the associated Transaction Codes status is inactive. If Transaction Codes Statuses is set to Include All and Transaction Code to Include All, the report populates all records regardless of the Transaction Codes status.
-
The date when the transaction record was posted.
-
The date when the transaction was posted.
-
Date range that represents the transaction date. Specify a date range to view released transactions that have transaction date within the specified date range.
-
Specifies the date when the interest charge is posted.
-
Transaction Date for Incurred Charges Options – Select date range to filter incurred charges when Incurred Charges Options selected is By Date Range. The difference between Last Interest Date and Transaction Date must be less than or equal to 9999 days.
-
The minimum date for a transaction to be accepted. This date is normally updated after you run the Release to General Ledger procedure. Anthology Student will accept a ledger card transaction only if the transaction date is on or after the specified minimum transaction date.
-
Specify the actual date the transaction occurred. This could be different from the current date.
-
The date when the transaction record was posted. Specify a date range to search for transactions with a transaction date that falls within the specified range.
-
The date when the transaction record was posted. Enter transaction date range. Only transactions fall within the selected date range are included in the bills. This transaction date range is available only if the bill Type selected is Transaction Date.
-
The date when the transaction record was posted. This option is only available when the Refund option is set to Post Directly to Ledger Card (No Check Required).
-
The date when the transaction record was posted
-
The date when the tuition discount record was posted.
-
The date when the master check was posted.
-
This field is enabled only when you bill by Course or by Term and when you enable Automate Registration Charges. This field determines the date that is posted for registration billing on the student's ledger card. The options are “System Date” and “Term Start Date”. If “Transaction Date for Charges and Adjustments” is set to “System Date”, the transaction date for initial billing charges and adjustments will be the later date between the system’s current date and the “Minimum Transaction Date” for the campus. If it is set to "Term Start Date”, the transaction date for initial billing charges and adjustments will be the later date between the billing term’s start date and the “Minimum Transaction Date” for the campus (Processes > Student Accounts > Period End Dates).
-
This field is enabled only when you bill by Course or by Term and when you enable Automate Registration Charges. This field determines the date that is posted for registration billing on the student's ledger card. The options are: - System Date - Term Start Date
-
Specifies the date range for transaction date. Only ledger card transactions with transaction date on or within the specified date range will be included in the activity statement.
-
The date when the transaction was posted.
-
The due date for the transaction record to be posted.
-
Indicates the date when the payment is due. This field is only visible if the transaction is a debit transaction and the transaction due date option is enabled for the associated campus in Student Accounts > General system settings. You can manually specify the due date and the system will save the due date for the transaction. If you do not specify a due date, the system will calculate the due date on the basis of an active due date rule for the campus for the selected transaction code, if it exists.
-
Select a transaction fee to be a percentage of the payment or a flat amount.
-
Specify the transaction fee amount.
-
Select a transaction fee code for tracking purposes.
-
Specify the transaction fee percentage.
-
Select the fee source to come from the student or the institution. The options are Student Absorbs Fee or School Absorbs Fee.
-
Indicates the transaction identifier of the ISIR record.
-
The name or description for the transactions.
-
Indicates the name or description of the transaction code selected.
-
The name or description for the transactions. Populate this field to search for transactions that are associated with the specified description.
-
The name or description for the transaction.
-
Indicates the transaction name or description associated with the selected transaction code. If you select more than one transaction code, this is field disabled.
-
The transaction number as it appears on the student's ledger card.
-
The transaction number assigned by SEVIS.
-
Indicates the transaction payment control number.
-
The source of the transaction. The options are - Ledger Card and Subsidiary.
-
Indicates the course of the transaction. The options are Ledger Card and Subsidiary.
-
The start date when the transaction record was posted.
-
Select Yes or No.
-
Indicates whether you are posting a charge or an adjustment.
-
Select one or more types of transactions that this ACH processor transmits. The options are Payment (payments from the student) and Refund/Stipend (refunds to the student/stipends to the student).
-
The list contains the options for making adjustments. The options in the list will depend on the type of adjustments that can be made for the type of fund. If you want to add or subtract amounts, select Adjust Authorization. If you want to transfer amounts from one fund to another fund, select Transfer Authorization. If you want to transfer 10% of the authorization level to a different award year, select Carry Forward/Back.
-
The type of transaction. The types of transactions for general ledger funds are configured by your institution.
-
The code and name of the transaction type.
-
The code and name of the transaction type. These are transaction codes that are configured to allow miscellaneous posting.
-
Select the Transaction Type. The options are Adjustment, Charge, and Student Services Fees.
-
Indicates whether you are posting a charge or an adjustment. In a Charge transaction, the amount is always entered as a positive (debit) value. In an Adjustment transaction, the amount can be positive (debit adjustment) or negative (credit adjustment).
-
Indicates whether the batch is a batch of charges or adjustments.
-
Indicate the type of the transaction. The options are Financial Aid Disbursement or Student Payment or Student Refund.
-
The transaction type options are Student, Miscellaneous, and Both. Choose Miscellaneous if your institution records Miscellaneous Receipts and the transaction code is dedicated to Miscellaneous Receipts only. Choose Both if the transaction code is used for Student transactions as well as Miscellaneous Receipts.
-
The type of transaction, such as Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Invoice, or Payment.
-
The type of transaction, such as, Payments, Charge/Adjust only, and so on.
-
The types of transactions that you want released to the general ledger in Anthology Finance & HCM (CNF). You can select All Transaction Types to include all of the transactions displayed in the list.
-
The date range the receipt falls in.
-
Select the transaction name or code from the drop-down list that is to be associated with the fee schedule paid by the student. The list displays all transaction codes specified for the student in the student accounts (Configuration > Student Accounts > Transaction Codes.)
-
Specifies the date range for transaction date. Only ledger card transactions with transaction date on or within the specified date range will be included in the activity statement.
-
Specify transaction date to filter by students with payments (of the selected fund source and selected award year) posted within the specified date range only.
-
Input the percentage for the manual review of the Auto Refund.
-
Indicates the note that will be displayed on the transcript details.
-
The fee charged by the institution to process a transcript request.
-
Select the transcript format which you want to print.
-
The format of the transcript. The options are: - Enrollment and Student Based: To print an enrollment based or student based transcript for each student. - Student Based: To print the transcripts that list courses for all student enrollments grouped by term code in chronological order by term start date. - Enrollment Based: To print the transcripts that list courses for the selected enrollment.
-
Select the required campus transcript header for all transcript types. The options are Enrollment Campus, Last Enrollment Campus, and Corporate Campus.
-
Check marks indicate students who have a transcript hold. This column can be sorted so that you can filter all students who have a transcript hold. If you don't have permission to print transcripts for students on hold, students on hold will not be retrieved and only those students who are not on a transcript hold will be listed in the grid.
-
The program version name as it should be displayed on official or unofficial transcripts for internal or external use. If you do not specify a transcript name, the default program version name is displayed on the transcript.
-
Comments or additional information associated with the degree that will be displayed on the official and unofficial transcript.
-
The name of the city.
-
The name of the contact within the institution. If you are selecting a contact in a list, it contains the contacts configured for your institution.
-
The country of residence. If you are specifying a country, it defaults to the country for the campus. The country also determines the format of phone numbers. If you change the country, the phone numbers are automatically reformatted to the format for that country.
-
The number where a facsimile (fax) can be received.
-
The phone number. The format depends on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether phone numbers use parentheses and hyphens).
-
If within the United States, the name of the state.
-
The street address. For student addresses, if an address has more than 40 characters, the additional characters in the address line will not be extracted to be sent to COD but will be truncated.
-
The postal code for the address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
Specify the path you want to use to print transcripts. If you are not using the Anthology Cloud, specify a UNC-compliant path. For example, \\<computer name>\<shared directory>\. If you are using the Anthology Cloud, specify <drive>:\<foldername>\. In most cases, the drive is Q. If you do not know your drive or folder name, contact Client Services.
-
The type of transcript that is either High School or College.
-
The type of transcript for the student. The values are Unofficial, Partial, and Official/Final.
-
The type of transcript. Select Student Based to print a student transcript. Select Enrollment Based to print an official transcript to send to another institution.
-
Select the type of transcript you want to print. The options are Enrollment Based and Student Based.
-
Indicates whether the transcript should be based on student or enrollment: - Student - Organizes the transcript chronologically by term - Enrollment - Organizes the transcript by program version
-
Select the check box to specify that you want Anthology Student to include the GPA on student transcripts.
-
Select this check box to transfer the student’s current subsidiary balance to another enrollment for the student.
-
The status of the transfer credit. The statuses you can select for a transfer credit are defined by your institution on the Transfer Credit Statuses list (Select the Configuration tile > locate Academic Records > select Transfer Credit Status). If you select a value for Campus Course for a status other than APPROVED, the course is displayed on the Degree Progress Audit under Course Taken not Applied.
-
You can use this field to select the approved and active transfer credit statuses.
-
You can use this field to select the transfer credits that are not approved .
-
Select the transfer credit statuses for hypothetical degree progress audit. This field is enabled only when you have selected use unapproved transfer credits in hypothetical DPA check box.
-
The type of transfer credit. The types of transfer credits are configured by your institution.
-
The number of approved transfer credits applied to the program version.
-
The date when the student was transferred out of the program version.
-
The institution that the student is transferred from.
-
Specifies the credits that the institution transfers from other institutions.
-
Number of approved transfer hours applied to the program version.
-
This is a unique identifier for the message transfer. The Transfer Id column is hidden by default but can be selected if needed (e.g., when troubleshooting failed transfers).
-
Information included when transferring credits for a student.
-
The status of the transfer credit. The statuses you can select for a transfer credit are defined by your institution on the Transfer Credit Statuses page (Configuration > Academic Records > Transfer Credit Statuses). For this field, when you select system-defined status such as: - College Transfer has been Approved: Campus Course, Term, and Grade fields are mandatory - College Transfer has been Rejected: Notes is mandatory - College Transfer has been submitted: No fields are mandatory
-
The check box is selected only if the student has transfer credits with a transfer type set to "Include as Transfer Student (for IPEDS reporting).
-
Designates that the transfer type is not to affect a student's transfer status in IPEDS reporting.
-
Select the check box to indicate that this is a group used for students to be placed into Transfer Student Monitoring (TSM). Once you have created the group and added the students, the group can be used to create the Batch Inform File that gets exported to NSLDS which places the students in monitoring. While you can use student groups to add students to TSM, they are not required. If you do not want to use groups, you can use filters (such as date ranges and student status filters) to gather the students on the Transfer Student Monitoring Export page instead. The student groups you create for export should not be used for disbursement holds. For additional information, see the topic Background for Transfer Student Monitoring.
-
Name of the program version that the subsidiary balance is transferred to.
-
Select the program version to transfer the subsidiary balance to.
-
The campus that the student will be transferred to.
-
Specifies the name of the fund for the transfer.
-
The program version that the student will be transferred to.
-
Specifies the award year for the transfer.
-
Indicates the student transfer is one of the following types: - Enrollment - Indicates the student is transferred to another enrollment within the same campus. - Enrollment and Campus - Indicates the student is transferred to another enrollment in another campus. This type adds the new enrollment to the student's enrollment folder and changes the Campus field on the Student Profile to the new campus. - Campus - Indicates the student is transferred to another campus. This type changes the Campus field on the Student Profile to the new campus.
-
Select the type of transfer. The options are populated based on the institute type selected.
-
The type of transfer. The types of transfer are configured by your institution.
-
The type of transfer. The options displayed depend on the permission provided by your institution. The options are: - To Enrollment: Enables you to transfer the student to another enrollment within the same campus. - To Enrollment and Campus: Enables you to transfer the student to another enrollment in another campus. When you complete the transfer, the new enrollment is included in the student's enrollment and changes the Campus value on the Student Profile to the new campus. - To Campus: Enables you to transfer a student to another campus. The new campus value will be reflected in the Campus field on the Student Profile. If a student is enrolled in a non-degree seeking program version and the enrollment status is NDS Cancel, Anthology Student only displays the To Campus option in the transfer type field.
-
The total units that were transferred for the program version.
-
The total units that were transferred for the student.
-
Indicates whether the selected letter grade can be used as a transfer grade (for transfer credits).
-
The amount transferred.
-
Indicates whether the SEVIS information is either ready to be transmitted (R) or ready for DSO Review (D). Transmission Status is enabled only if you select either F-1, M1, or J-1 visa type. Transmission Status is disabled and empty if the student is not enrolled. Date of Birth in the Student Profile must be populated if Transmission Status is either R or D, and Visa Type is either F-1, M-1, or J-1. E indicates an error that you can investigate in the import file (Select the Processes tile > expand Contact Manager > select SEVIS Transmission > History tab.) S indicates that the file has been sent to SEVIS and is waiting on a response.
-
The type of transmission to be performed (Transmit or Retrieve).
-
Indicates whether the batch created or regenerated the file with the student data, exported the file with student data to SEVIS, or imported a file from SEVIS.
-
Name of the institution transmitting the 1098-T batch.
-
9-digit Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) is supplied by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS).
-
Cost of transportation for a program per award year.
-
The estimated travel expense for the student. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value.
-
Configurable defined events that queue the Auto Repackaging feature.
-
The specific trigger configured that initiates auto awarding for that specific campus (Manual Award, NSLDS Change, ISIR Import, etc...).
-
Select the option whether or not you want to trigger a hypothetical refund calculation record to be added to the student. This field is enabled only when you have selected No in the Use Student Status Grid field.
-
Select a trigger task associated with the Payment Response Code Groups.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to include the Truth-In-Lending statement in the payment statement. The statement associated with the Truth in Lending Act in Title I of the Consumer Credit Protection Act. This act requires clear disclosure of key terms of the lending arrangement and all costs. For institutions, these regulations do not apply to lenders of student loans. Disclosure must be made of the following credit terms: Finance Charge, Annual Percentage Rate, Amount Financed, and Total of Payments.
-
The cost of tuition. If a fee schedule is entered for the student's enrollment, the default tuition is the Tuition value in the fee schedule. If your institution configured a default budget for the program version or you select a budget in the Budget Definition list, Anthology Student displays the value from the budget. You can change the value.
-
The tuition amount that the student has been charged for the selected term.
-
The cost of tuition for the program version.
-
Specifies tuition adjustments imported for the servicer.
-
The tuition amount charged for the course or for the term.
-
Cost of tuition and fees for a program per award year.
-
Number of credits for the tuition assistance.
-
The credit type related to the tuition assistance: Semester Credit, Clock Hours Credit, Quarter Credit, or None.
-
Indicates whether the tuition charges be included in the institution charges based on the method selected by the institution. The options are: Ledger Card, Student Fees Folder or FA Program Set up. This field is visible when Time Period is set to Program. For additional information on Tuition Charges, see Background for Refund Policies.
-
The name and code of the tuition discount policy.
-
Indicate the tuition discount policy.
-
Indicates the way you want to process the selected tuition discount: - Term - Payment Period If you select Payment Period, related fields are displayed to enable you to specify criteria to process the tuition discounts.
-
A tuition waiver is a cancellation of tuition and fees associated with college education for qualifying students. Specify the estimated amount that the student is eligible for.
-
Tuition Waiver - Not Applicable. Select the N/A field if the option does not apply to the student.
-
The tuition amount the student was charged for the selected term or payment period.
-
The name and code of the tuition discount policy. Select the tuition discount policy to be processed.
-
Specifies whether you would like to process tuition discounts for students who have been billed for a specific term or student who have been billed for a specific payment period sequence.
-
The Twitter ID of the student. You can enter a maximum of 150 characters in the field, including special characters.
-
Area of study type.
-
Specifies the type of agency. Agency types are configured by your institution.
-
Specifies the type of agency. Agency types are configured by your institution.
-
The type of batch.
-
The available area of study Type options are Major, Minor, and Concentration. Students generally select the Major at the time of enrollment. The Major comprises a list of courses and grade/credit requirements the student must complete to graduate and earn a degree. The Degree Progress Audit (DPA) in Anthology Student checks continually to ensure that students meet their degree requirements. A Minor is an optional field of study that does not have to relate to the Major. A Concentration is an optional focus area within the Major. Not all degree programs offer concentrations, and concentrations can vary for the same degree, depending on the school.
-
The component type. For example, Major, Minor, and so on.
-
Indicate whether you want the association to be: By Course - Select by Course By Instructor- Select by Instructor By Owner - Select by Owner
-
The attendance type value is based on the course type, such as Attendance Recorded, Externship/Internship, Online, and Not Recorded.
-
The type of Admissions Representative. The values are Initial Assignment and Reassignment.
-
Specifies whether the item is a standard PWD or Inadvertent Overpayment PWD. PWD: funds the student is eligible to have awarded but student's permission is needed. Inadvertent Overpayment PWD: funds the student is eligible to have awarded and actually were awarded, but student's permission is needed to keep the funds on their account.
-
The type of transaction. D indicates a disbursement. R indicates a refund. S indicates a stipend. A indicates an adjustment.
-
Indicates Standard Academic Year (SAY) or Borrower Based academic Year (BBAY)
-
Indicates whether the honors and badges will be posted to a student or a student group. The associated field will change based on whether you select a student or student group.
-
Name space for the batch job.
-
Indicates the batch type, whether it is Post Charges, Recalculate Pending Charges, or Sequence Billing Charges.
-
Select the type of pending charges. The options are Term and Payment Period. If you select Term, the Student field is enabled.
-
The data type. The options are: - Character: Any alphanumeric characters, for example, numbers, letters, or symbols up to a maximum length of 99. - Numeric: Numbers only. Numeric fields can use range, value list, or no validation. You can specify two decimal places. - Date: Dates only.
-
Select the type of pending charges. The options are Term and Payment Period. If you seelect Term, the Term, Student, Program Versions, and Billing Methods fields are enabled. If you select Payment Period, the Billing Methods and Payment Period Start Date (From and To) fields are enabled.
-
The criteria type to check eligibility to bursaries. The options are Eligibility Criteria and Payout Criteria.
-
The kind of skill.
-
The batch type.
-
The conflict type.
-
Indicates the course status. Possible values are Added, Dropped, and Unregistered.
-
The type of requisite. The options are - Prerequisite, Co-requisite and Pre-Co Requisite.
-
Indicates the type of data stored in this entity. It cannot be changed.
-
Specifies whether you want to generate the degree certificates for a campus or a graduation ceremony. The fields displayed will depend ont he type you select.
-
Specifies whether the message is a warning or conflict message.
-
The method used to make the deposit. C indicates cash. H indicates check. R indicates credit card.
-
Disbursement type: scheduled (S) or paid (P)
-
Education Level Types are College, High School, GED, ATB, and None. The types College or None should be used for codes assigned to students who are not eligible for Title IV funding (and will not be part of COD processing) because they have a college degree but cannot prove they have a GED or have graduated from a high school.
-
Select the group type. The options are: dynamic, static, frozen, or manual. Type field is enabled only when a static or dynamic record is selected.
-
The type of process performed in the system.
-
The Type of record exported.
-
Indicates or describes the nature of the extended property. Based on the option selected, the fields like Length, Decimal and Type Validation are enabled. The options are: - String - Numeric - Date - Boolean.
-
The course prerequisite type.
-
Specify the type of fund source security. The options are Simple and Advanced.
-
The type of fund source. If you are using a servicer for awards that are sent to Common Originations and Disbursements (COD), you must select specific types. For TEACH grants with servicers, you must select Grant (other than Pell). For Pell Grants with servicers, you must select Pell Grant. For Direct Subsidized Loans with servicers, you must select Subsidized Stafford. For Direct Unsubsidized Loans with servicers, you must select Unsubsidized Stafford. For Direct PLUS Loans with servicers, you must select PLUS Loan. For a College Savings plan, you can use the fund source types of Student Payment or Other Outside Resources. These types would allow you to monitor usage using financial aid reports. Anthology Student uses the fund source type value in the Awards form, COD reporting, 1098-Ts, IPEDS, and 09/10 reporting. If Anthology Student is integrated with Anthology Finance & HCM, the Type field is disabled for fund sources that are managed in Anthology Finance & HCM.
-
Indicates whether the import file is a standard response file or a web response file. The Type is "Response" when the message class is CRCB. The Type is "Web Response" when the message class is CBWB.
-
Select the type of fund. The options are: Direct Loan - GAPS, Direct Loan - Program, Federal ACG Grant, Federal College Work Study, Federal Pell Grant, Federal Perkins Loan Federal SEOG, Federal SMART Grant, Federal TEACH Grant, FFEL, GAPS, Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant, and Other. For non-Title IV funds (e.g., scholarships and institutional grants), select Other. For more details about the types and their codes, see Background for the General Ledger and Fund Source Types.
-
Select whether you want to configure General Ledger Links for Course Load Types or Non-Teaching Types. You can then select specific values in the Course Load Types or Non-Teaching Types field.
-
Specifies the type of group. The options are Manual (M), Frozen (F), Static (S). or Dynamic (D). Dynamic is available if the Allow Dynamic Groups check box was selected when the system was configured. Once you have created or changed a group to manual, you cannot change it back to static, dynamic, or frozen. Once you change it to Manual, the field is disabled.
-
The contact type.
-
Specifies the type of placement. The values are College, Continuing Employment/Education, and Self Placed.
-
Indicates whether the transcript request letter is being sent to a college or high school.
-
Select all types that apply. The values are Guarantor, Lender, and Servicer. The default for new records is Lender. The selected Type value determines which fields on the form are enabled or disabled.
-
The type of letters in the batch. The values are Student/Organization or Employer.
-
The type of load factor. The default option is Class Size.
-
Select Enrollment Specific if you want a document considered on file if no Enrollment ID is specified on the document or an Enrollment ID is specified and it matches the Enrollment ID on the disbursement being evaluated. Select Student Specific if you want a document considered on file if the Student ID matches the Student ID on the disbursement being evaluated. When documents are configured as student specific, Anthology Student ignores any enrollment associated with the award. For example, documents like Proof of Graduation only need to be collected by an institution one time, while other documents may be enrollment specific. The documents that Anthology Student evaluates when automatically approved disbursements to pay are specific to the enrollment of the student. This means that the document is associated with the enrollment for which the disbursement is scheduled.
-
External means messages are transferred from Mailbox Manager to SAIG/COD/CPS. Internal means messages are transferred from a client's FTP/Azure storage to Mailbox Manager.
-
Indicates the nature of the change. For example, updated, deleted, or removed.
-
Select the recalculation type. Currently, the only available option is "Recalculate Pell by Award Year".
-
Select the recalculation type. The options are Recalculate Annual Award Year Pell and Recalculate Pell for Term EI. When you select Recalculate Annual Award Year Pell, the Award Year and Academic Year Start Date and End Date fields are displayed. The Award Year is required. When you select Recalculate Pell for Term EI, the Term field is displayed and required.
-
Indicates whether the pending charges is of type: Term or Payment Period.
-
Indicates the type of deposit.
-
The batch type.
-
The prerequisite type.
-
The type of education (such as college, high school, or ability to benefit).
-
Indicates whether the percentage to refund or retain comes from the Refund % field or the actual percentage completed by the student. Valid values are Pro-Rata and Percentage. For straight pro rata policies, the percentage of tuition earned by the institution correlates exactly to the percentage of the program that the student completed. For example, if the student completed 47% of the program before dropping, the institution retains 47% of the tuition.
-
Indicates the requirements rule type. The options are- Advanced - Rule Based, Advanced - Course Levels and Course, Attributes and Standard.
-
Indicates the requirement rule type is either simple or advanced.
-
Select a revenue Type to gather only revenue transactions associated with the selected revenue Type. The options are Deferred, Earned, and Include All. If you do not select the Type, the report will include all revenue transactions regardless of revenue transaction’s type.
-
The earnings detail record type. The values are Earned and Deferred. Only the Earned type will affect general ledger balances.
-
The adjustment type. The options are Future or Earned. Only an Earned type will affect general ledger balances.
-
Specifies the type of evaluation. The type of evaluation you can perform for a student depends on whether or not the type was selected for the academic calendar for their program version when it was configured for SAP.
-
Select Student to display or add school-defined fields for students. Select Course to add school-defined fields to courses.
-
The type of value you want to be specified in the field. Character specifies any alphabetic, numeric, or punctuation character. Date specifies a date in the format configured by your institution. Numeric specifies a numeric value greater than 0.
-
The type of transaction. For example, it displays Invoice for charges, Debit Memo for debit adjustments, Credit Memo for credit adjustments, and Payment for payments.
-
Indicates the type of entity.
-
Defines the frequency of the sequence billing process. Based on your selection, Sequence Billing is run for billing methods that are configured to use a fee schedule. For Type=Academic Year, Sequence Billing is run once per Academic Year. Example: You configured Academic Year 1 to have 900 hours and Academic Year 2 to have 600 hours. In addition, the billing method for the student is configured with a range of hours and to use the rate schedule at $5.00 per hour. When you select Academic Year as the Type and Academic Year 1 in Sequence Billing, the logic will gather the value in the ‘Hours in the Academic Year’ field (900) and multiply it times the rate ($5.00) to bill $4500.00 for that sequence. If you select Academic Year 2 to be billed, the logic will calculate $3000.00. For Type=Course, Sequence Billing is run once per course. For Type=Program/Enrollment, Sequence Billing is run one time only. Program billing can use the value populated in the ‘Hours Required’ or ‘Credits required’ field to calculate an amount to bill. For Type=Term, Sequence Billing is run once per term.
-
Enrollment Reporting file type: Error/Acknowledgement or Roster file.
-
Indicates whether you want to generate a statement for a batch or an individual student.
-
Indicates whether the process was for a single student or for a batch of students.
-
The registration bill generation type. The values are Batch and Student. Choose Batch to generate bills for multiple students based on selection criteria. Choose Student to generate bill for an individual student.
-
Indicates whether you want registration bill for an individual student or a batch of students.
-
Statement generation type, Batch or Student.
-
Indicates the type of the transaction; Refund or Transfer.
-
The following Term Types are available when you select Standard Term: - Fall - Spring - Summer - Winter
-
Select either Student or Group. The Student field is displayed if you select Student as the type. The Group field is displayed if you select Group as the type.
-
The type of transcript for the student. The values are C (College TR), S (Student TR), O (Other TR).
-
The type of transfer you wish to perform (Disbursement, Refund, or Both).
-
The job type options are: Remove from Disbursement Hold or Update TSM as Expired.
-
Indicates the type of record to be unlocked. Select Refunds or Stipends.
-
The type of filtering you want to perform. To filter the disbursements by a student, select Student. To filter by an award year, term, or find source, select Award Year/Fund Source. To filter all the disbursements by the identifier for the batch, select Disbursement Batch.
-
The employer code type.
-
The source of the aid.
-
Select the type of multiple disbursements. The options are Policies and Associations.
-
Determines the kinds of schedule changes that will start a payment recalculation notification. The types are: - Both Increases and Decreases - Decreases Only - Increases Only
-
Specifies the values or type of validation. If you want the field to free form without values or validation, select None. If you selected Date or Numeric for Type and you want a value in a specific range of dates or numbers, select Range. If you want the field to contain one or more values selected from a list, select Multi Select List. If you want the field to contain a single value selected from a list, select Value List.
-
Select the validation you can use to customize the field. The options are: - Character: Value List or no validation - Numeric: Range, Value List, or no validation - Date: Range or no validation
-
Specifies the values or type of validation. This field is enabled only when you select String, Numeric or Date option in the Type field. The options are: - None: Select this option if you want the extended property to be without values or validation. - Multi Select List: Select this option if you want the extended property to contain one or more values selected from a list. - Value List: Select this option if you want the extended property to contain a single value selected from a list. - Range: Select this option if you want the extended property to contain a value in a specific range. This option is only visible, if you have selected Numeric or Date option in the Type field.
-
Indicates whether the course is an equivalent course or a cross-referenced course.
-
The type of the payment.
-
The type of the job.
-
Select the type for which you want to generate the report.
-
The type of the question, such as Yes/No, Multiple Answer Single Select.
-
Select the student activity statement type. The options are: Batch, Group, and Student.
-
The type of building such as Room, Suite.
-
The Test Type options are: Score (percentage-based grading; max 8 digits numeric input; decimal values are allowed), Numeric (max. 10 numeric digits; decimal values are not allowed), Text (text result of the test; max. 6000 characters), and Date (date when the test was taken).
-
Select the specific type of notification: either a Refund (RFND), a Post Withdrawal Disbursement (PWD), or an Inadvertent Overpayment PWD (IOPWD).
-
Choose from (or all): Institutional Refund, Return of Title IV, Student Cash Payment Plan.
-
Indicate the type of transactions that have been released to the General Ledger. By default, it is set to Include All. The options are Include All, Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Invoice, Payment, and Revenue. You can select more than one option. Select the appropriate types to view transactions for the selected transaction types only.
-
Indicate the type of General Ledger posting details. By default, it is set to Include All. The options are Include All, Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Invoice, Payment, and Revenue. You can select more than one option.
-
Specify the Unique Entity Identifier (UEI) to be stored in Anthology Student. This field accepts 12 alpha/numeric characters. The Department of Education transitioned from the use of the DUNS Number to the UEI as the primary means of entity identification for Federal awards government-wide. UEIs are required in accordance with 2 CFR Part 25, and the transition from DUNS to UEI has resulted in the UEI being issued by the Federal Government in SAM.gov. This means entities no longer rely on a third party to obtain an identifier (i.e., a DUNS issued by Dun and Bradstreet).
-
The transactions that remain unapplied.
-
When selected, displays the unassigned tasks. Unassigned tasks can be generated by Anthology Student and then assigned to staff members based on their workload. Unassigned tasks can also be completed and closed by automated processes.
-
The date range of the unbilled rent for housing.
-
Indicates the amount of unbooked adjustments.
-
Indicates the amount of unbooked disbursements.
-
This option is set to accommodate incoming students who have not declared an area of study. The 'Undeclared' status serves as a placeholder for incoming students. If this option is selected, the 'Requires Areas of Study' option is disabled.
-
The unearned revenue to date for the earnings summary record.
-
The unit of measurement. They are configured by your institution and are the units used as a standard of measurement at your institution. They are used to quantify the load types for instructors.
-
The unit of measurement. They are configured by your institution and are the units used as a standard of measurement at your institution. They are used to quantify the load types for instructors.
-
The unit of measurement used as a standard of measurement at your institution. They are used to quantify the load types for instructors.
-
Specify the unit you want to use for the limit. The values are Credits, Enroll Status Credits, Enroll Status Hours, and Hours.
-
Indicates the units in which attendance is measured. Use the Minutes option for traditional classroom situations. Use the Quantity option for quantifiable goals such as the number of tasks completed.
-
The Unit Type column is used to determine the attendance unit the Length condition applies to up to the value selected. The options are Weeks, Days, and During Add/Drop.
-
The minutes or quantity in which attendance is measured. Use Minutes for traditional class room situations. Use Quantity for quantifiable goals, such as the number of tasks completed.
-
The attendance units used to determine the unit that the length condition applies to. Valid values are: - Hours Attended - Days - Hours - Scheduled - Weeks
-
Indicates if the number of days value represents 'Calendar days' or 'Class meeting days.
-
The policy units.
-
The number of refunds. This value is calculated based on the values that you specify in Calculation Based on Length column.
-
The number of attendance units. This value is calculated based on the values that you specify in Program Version Credits/Hours Per Year.
-
The number of refunds. This value is calculated based on the values that you specify in Calculation Based on Length column.
-
The unit of time (such as weeks or months).
-
The units attempted by the student for the term or payment period.
-
Indicates whether the GPA is included in the Units calculation.
-
The units earned by the student for the term or payment period.
-
The units earned by the student for the earnings detail record.
-
The unit of measurement. They are configured by your institution and are the units used as a standard of measurement at your institution. They are used to quantify the load types for instructors.
-
Unable to determine enrollment status for the last term of the FISAP reporting period. The student has no classes that qualify for the FISAP Report. This will cause the student to be excluded from the FISAP report.
-
Indicates whether the borrower knows the loan amount for the PLUS Application. True indicates that the borrower does not know the loan amount. False indicates that the borrower does know the loan amount.
-
Unlock a PWD notification that has been locked by another staff member.
-
The difference between the value for the cost of attendance and the value for Packaged EFC (in months). For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
The reason the student was unregistered from the list.
-
Select whether you want auto repackaging to reduce COA charges posted to the ledger card to a $0 amount if a student is not registered for courses for a term within the academic year. When you select "Yes", the "Billing Adjustment Days" field will be displayed.
-
Specifies if classes have been scheduled or unscheduled depending on whether the option is selected or cleared.
-
Amount of the unsubsidized Direct loan available to the student.
-
Aggregate Outstanding Principal Balance (OPB) for all unsubsidized loans held by the borrower that counts against the student's overall loan limits.
-
Financial Aid Administrators can use Professional Judgment to select this check box to authorize an FFEL or Unsubsidized Direct loan in the selected award year for a dependent student when the parent or parents have stopped providing financial support for the student and refuse to provide information on a FAFSA. This check box is only displayed and editable if the ISIR associated with the academic year qualifies the student as eligible for a Professional Judgment decision. Eligible ISIR reject codes are 15 plus any combination including the following: E, F, J, K, S, T, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10, and 12. For award years 2024-25 and later, you can select the Unsupported Dependent check box when a student's ISIR includes reject code 37 or 38.
-
Financial Aid Administrators may use Professional Judgment by selecting this check box to authorize a FFEL or Direct Unsubsidized loan (in the selected award year) to a dependent student when that student’s parent or parents have stopped providing financial support for the student and refuse to provide information on a FAFSA. The application creates and maintains an audit record that indicates the authorized user who selected the Unsupported Dependent check box to a student based on the Professional Judgment decision.
-
Indicates the URL to the TouchNet uPay page. TouchNet gateway provider URLs are not populated initially. You need to populate the URLs for TouchNet manually since the URLs are unique for each client's account.
-
Indicate the uPay site ID. This field is displayed when the Payment Gateway Provider is set to TouchNet.
-
When a COD file is reimported, a confirmation dialog prompts the user to specify whether the database should be updated. The Update Database column displays the selected option (Yes/No).
-
Select this check box to update the employer records.
-
Updates the external identifier. External identifier is the document type reference received from the integrated environment (Third party).
-
Indicates the field that is updated in the system when you apply the corresponding Notification of Change (NOC) code.
-
Indicates that class sections that start on or after the specified date are updated with the newly added book list or book. This is applicable whenever a book list or book is added to a course that has class sections scheduled in the future. For example, for two class sections - ACC101-A (having start date as May 1st 2024) and ACC101-B (having Start Date as May 20th 2024, when this checkbox's date is set to May 15th 2024 (which is a future date as of today, that is, 17th May), then section ACC101-B will be updated with the Booklist/Book, whereas section ACC101-A will not have the Booklist/Book.
-
Select Manual Configuration or Integrated HR to determine how HR configurations will be updated in Faculty Workload Management. The default is Manual Configuration.
-
Select this check box to update the last day of attendance (LDA) with the makeup date. This check box is enabled only when you select Allow Makeup Hours check box.
-
Indicates whether the Update Now option was selected for the ISIR Import.
-
Specify what the packaging status should be set to after auto repackaging.
-
Specify what the packaging status should be set to after auto packaging.
-
Select Manual Configuration or Integrated Payroll to determine how payroll configurations will be updated in Faculty Workload Management. The default is Manual Configuration.
-
Select the required check box to specify if the selected information will be updated for the student once it is matched for the specific status category.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to update the student courses.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to update the student requirement rules.
-
The update type for the course prefix. The values are - Add, Remove.
-
Indicates the date and time when the Degree Pathway was updated.
-
Indicates whether the record was updated (Yes/No).
-
Select to specify that applications can be uploaded.
-
Upon Status Change to LOA/SPN, Only Courses Registered Between LOA/SPN Boundaries Should be AffectedSelect this check box if you want only courses registered between the LOA/SPN boundaries to be affected upon the status change to LOA/SPN. For additional information on Upon Status Change to LOA/SPN, Only Courses Registered Between LOA/SPN Boundaries Should be Affected, see Background for Academic Records for Campuses.
-
The highest value in a Grade range.
-
The upper limit of the grade scale.
-
The web address for the person or institution.
-
The URL for the external content management software (such as the Perceptive Experience URL).
-
Indicate a valid URL. This field refers to the URL of the website you want to set up access for. It must be a unique, valid URL beginning with https. Http is not allowed.
-
The URL for the external content management software.
-
The authentication Web Address of the Workflow provider.
-
Indicate the URL of the tile.
-
Specify the HTTP POST URL for the contract template invite approval process used in the Microsoft Power Automate workflow.
-
Specify the HTTP POST URL for the faculty contract eSignature invite process used in the Microsoft Power Automate workflow.
-
Specify the HTTP POST URL for the generated faculty contract invite approval process used in the Microsoft Power Automate workflow.
-
Indicates the part of the URL that appears after the domain extension. It is intended to improve accessibility and usability.
-
The government agency sponsoring the J-1 participant in the government visitor program.
-
The international organization, such as the united nations, sponsoring the J-1 participant or exchange visitor.
-
The proof of funds submitted by the international organization.
-
Specifies that a student is a citizen of the United States (US). US Citizens are included by default by the 1098-T Processing Utility.
-
The proof of funds submitted by the sponsoring government agency.
-
Indicates whether the account status will be used in: Accounts: Used only to indicate an account status Collections: Used only to indicate a collection status Both: Used as an account status and a collection status
-
Indicates whether the subsidized usage limit applies (Yes/No).
-
If you selected Student Payments in the Type list, use the check box to specify that the loan amount should be multiplied by 50 percent. This is the net present value (NPV) for the institutional loan shown in the Other Receipts Column on the 90/10 Report.
-
Use the actual system amount of the fee/charge.
-
Select the check box to schedule stipends automatically. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Student Accounts.
-
Select the option to use a custom transcript for student batches. The default is No. This registry setting has been carried over from the legacy application. The web app provides the Reports functionality.
-
When you select this option, the student's billing address is used on the 1098-T output. If you do not select this option, or if there is no stored billing address, the address on the student master record is used on the 1098-T.
-
Select whether to use campus information for the TIN payer record.
-
Select the check box to enable the cashiering functionality. The cashiering function keeps track of money taken in and paid out by various departments or campuses in an institution. It ensures that payments get posted to a student's Ledger Card properly, even if the student made a payment at a campus other than the one in which the student is enrolled. You can also use this option when the Multi Factor Authentication is enabled.
-
Select the check box to enable the cashiering functionality. The cashiering function keeps track of money taken in and paid out by various departments or campuses in an institution. It ensures that payments get posted to a student's Ledger Card properly, even if the student made a payment at a campus other than the one in which the student is enrolled.
-
If you selected Yes in the Use Clock to Credit list, select Yes to specify that the program version is also subject to the updated conversion rate for students enrolling into the program with a start date for the program version after 06/30/2011. If you do not select Yes, Anthology Student uses the rate you specified for Conversion Rate – Prior 07/01/2011 for program versions after 06/30/2011. For example, you would select Yes for Program Version Use Clock to Credit and No in this list for program versions that are exempt from the updated clock to credit conversion rate.
-
Select "Use Concurrent Enrollments" to indicate that the SAP calculation combines the results of all concurrent enrollments when determining the SAP. In other words, the Overall Cumulative GPA for all enrollments is used in evaluating students for SAP instead of the Enrollment Cumulative GPA. For concurrent enrollments with a SAP Milestones policy and Scheduled Hours policy, the hours attended and hours attempted are calculated together for the concurrent enrollments within the date range being evaluated. The term and payment period fields become disabled when this option is selected.
-
Select the check box to use the corporate address on the transcript header for all transcript types, such as, Official and Unofficial.
-
Select this option if you want Anthology Student to use custom GPA calculation logic defined by your institution. Additionally, ensure that the logic is defined and available in your institution's Anthology Student database.
-
Select Yes to use the legacy data dictionary configuration for form labels. To modify the labels, go to the data dictionary in the legacy interface of Anthology Student and change those labels. Select No to use only internationalization resources (if configured). To customize English and Spanish labels, download the PO file, modify the label text, and upload the modified PO file in the standard interface of Anthology Student. When you change this General setting option, allow for some time to review the changes and then clear the cache. Note: The UI labels in the help system are based on the labels provided in the system default English internationalization configuration file.
-
Specify if you want to use the default criteria. Select Yes (recommended option) to enable Print Options, Aid statuses, and Balance Options.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to use policies to filter the documents so that staff members only work with tasks relevant to their role.
-
When selected, specifies that the address type is temporary or seasonal. It also specifies that Anthology Student displays a start date and end date field when the address type is selected for an address that is being added to the Related Addresses list for the student.
-
Indicates that EFT should be the default method by which the stipend is paid to the student. When this check box is selected, new stipends created for the student will be associated with EFT as the default method. This check box is disabled if the student has a bank account flagged for direct deposit.
-
Select whether or not you want to use existing load validation settings to process load validation batch.
-
When the Advanced Feature flag “Enable FA Credits for Enrollment Status and Enrollment Intensity” is set to “Yes” and the program version is set to a Title IV-eligible program, the Disbursement Approval Criteria form displays the "Use FA Credits for Non TIV Awards" check box. When the check box is selected, Anthology Student will allow a non-Title IV fund to use fields related to FA credits. When the check box is not selected (default), the system will not allow a non-Title IV fund to use fields related to FA credits.
-
Select whether or not you want to use flat fee for the billing method.
-
Select whether your institution will us floating term scheduling. The default value is No. The value specified in this field is stored in SyCampus.FloatingTerm. If the campus elects to use floating term, it can attach a single class to multiple terms or If the campus is not using floating term, a scheduled class is attached to only one term.
-
Indicates the ledger where the cash payment will be used. Select the main ledger, subsidiary ledger, or All.
-
Specifies whether the group can be used to define the cost of attendance (COA) awarding and disbursement rules for the auto-awarding engine.
-
Specifies whether the group can be used to define awarding and disbursement rules for the auto-awarding engine.
-
Select the check box if you want to use the Full Time Equivalency factor in Load Validation.
-
Select the check box to enable the Fund Source Order tab.
-
Use the graduate date stored on the student's enrollment folder.
-
Indicates the graduation date already saved should be used.
-
Used to display the next check number currently stored in the Great Plains checkbook master record. If the bank account is set up to get the next check number from Great Plains, it is so indicated on the Check Printing form and Anthology Student prevents you from changing the check number on the form.
-
Select the option to use a custom transcript for individual students. The default is No. This registry setting has been carried over from the legacy application. The web app provides the Reports functionality.
-
If you selected Student Payments in the Type list, select the check box to specify that the values on the individual institutional loan are used to calculate the total net percent value (NPV) amounts for the reporting period. When selected, the Number of Years, Discount Rate, and Collection Rate fields are displayed when you add a student payment plan on the Awards tab or Payment Schedule list.
-
Use the LDA value that is stored on the student's enrollment folder.
-
Specifies that you want to use the word Midterm as the code for the lesson instead of a code you specify. When you select Yes, the code for the lesson will be Midterm and the Code field is disabled.
-
If you want to use Midterm as the code, select Yes. If you would rather specfiy your own code, select No. If you select Yes, Midterm is displayed in the Code field and it is read-only.
-
Indicate whether the numbers you specify in the budget are for a month. If a value is displayed for an academic year when financial aid is being awarded, the value is multiplied by the number of months in the academic year.
-
Select the check box to create a stub loan period if the student has an overlapping loan period. If this option is not selected, the system does not consider the overlapping loan period, and loan periods are created without a stub loan period. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to use a configured rate schedule. If you enable this field, additional options such as Rate Schedule options and Transaction Codes options are displayed.
-
Select whether or not you want to configure amounts applicable to each grade or program.
-
Indicates that a clock hour program version is used to calculate a student's hours through real-time scheduling. When a program version is configured for real-time scheduling, you cannot configure an Excused Absence Policy because Excused Absence Policies display program versions that are configured for clock hours. You cannot configure an Earning Method with a revenue basis of Scheduled Hours when the student's program version is configured for real-time scheduling. The only exception is if there are no students enrolled in the program version. If Use Scheduled Hours is selected and students are enrolled, it cannot be cleared. You cannot use a weighted GPA if you use real-time scheduling.
-
Displays the secondary estimated family contribution (EFC) from the student's ISIR. N/A - indicates there is no value. O - indicates award previously based on secondary EFC. S - indicates award based on Secondary EFC. For award years 2024-25 and later, the EFC is replaced with the Student Aid Index (SAI).
-
Select whether your school uses a servicer such as Global Financial Systems.
-
Select the check box to use the state on the student's ISIR to determine the date of a disbursement (state laws may require disbursements to occur on specific dates or under specific conditions).
-
Indicates whether the Student Profile’s address or the student’s contact manager billing address will be used as the billing address.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to use student status grid to base the possible changes on your school-defined statuses rather than the system statuses. This field is enabled only when you have set Yes in the Enabled(Active) field.
-
Select Yes to specify that you want Anthology Student to use policies to filter the tasks so that staff members only work with tasks relevant to their role.
-
Select this check box to use term confirmation and automatically unconfirm a term if all courses for term are unregistered options as defined in the term confirmation.
-
Indicates that you will use the Term Group Billing range.
-
This option ensures when billing student fees, credits are aggregated across all terms in a group, across connected enrollments, and charged against the default billing term at the default connected enrollment. Only when the Billing Method Code is the same for both the connected enrollments and the Use Term Group Billing option is selected, the credits are aggregated across enrollments for tuition charges. If the Billing Method Code is not the same for both connected enrollments and the Use Term Group Billing option is selected, the credits get aggregated for the term group within the enrollment but not across the enrollments.
-
Select the check box to allow the academic start and end dates to be matched to the term start and end dates, even if holidays fall within an academic year, for term programs based on Financial Aid Terms configured in the system. For additional information, see Background for Campuses Financial Aid.
-
Select the check box to use the Title IV refund calculation. This option must be enabled if students receive government grants or loans (Pell, SEOG, and so on).
-
Enter the path to the folder that contains the items staff members can select when customizing their toolbar.
-
Select this check box to use unapproved transfer credits in the hypothetical Degree Progress Audit. If selected, it enables transfer credit statuses used in the hypothetical DPA field.
-
Select Yes if you want to use the course group for workload management. If you select Yes, Anthology Student displays the course group for your staff members to select when they configure compensation plans. If the field displays Yes and it is grayed out, the course group is already associated with a compensation plan. To change it back to No, you must first remove the course group from the compensation plan.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to use the Full Time Equivalency (FTE) Factors for the Non-Teaching Groups.
-
Indicates whether or not you want to use the Full Time Equivalency (FTE) Factors for the Course Group.
-
If you selected Student Payments in the list, select the check box if you are using an outside collections agency or vendor and specify the number of days between billing cycles. The number of days must be greater than or equal to zero.
-
Select this check box if you want this contact type for supervisor selection.
-
The name of the user who submitted the job.
-
The Anthology Student user who submitted the ISIR verification/correction.
-
Indicates whether the current SOC codes for a program or program version were assigned manually.
-
Select the staff member assigned to any group with more than Display Only Permissions in Financial Aid.
-
Specifies whether the process is user based. If you select Yes or No, Anthology Student displays a dialog so that you can select the staff members.
-
The name or user ID of the person who created the batch. In most cases, it will be the name of the servicer (such as Global).
-
FSA User ID.
-
Indicates the type of information provided by the user. The available values are - Date, Integer and Text.
-
Indicates if you want the user input to be a required field in the housing application.
-
If the campus is configured to use cashiering, select the check box if you want the staff member to use the cash drawer to post payments. If Active Directory is being used, Anthology Student validates the cashier in Active Directory. The form displays the current logged in user and domain as user@domain. The user name field is disabled when using Active Directory. The staff member is required to enter the domain password to continue. If Active Directory is not enabled, the staff member enters their user name and password for Anthology Student to continue.
-
Displays Yes if a staff member modified an amount in the record. Anthology Student does not change value until you save your changes.
-
Specify the user name assigned to this account by the payment gateway provider.
-
Specify the username for SQL Server Authentication.
-
Enter the name or characters to be used as username for future access.
-
The staff who will be notified when a scheduled job is completed.
-
Indicates the user required field.
-
Indicates the specified User ID assigned by the payment gateway provider.
-
Indicates if you want the user input to be a required field in the admission application.
-
Select the check box that corresponds with the duplicate criterion that will be used to search the student profile records to identify possible duplicates when new students are entered.
-
Indicates whether the Document Management Provider uses the interface. When you select: - Headland - OnBase or SchoolDocs as the Document Management Provider, this field is automatically set to No. As a result, the URL, Custom folder, and Capture Profile fields are disabled. - Hyland - Perceptive as the Document Management Provider, this field is automatically set to Yes. As a result, the URL, the Custom folder, and Capture Profile fields are enabled.
-
If you selected Standard terms of quarters, Standard terms of semesters, or Standard terms of trimesters in the Academic Calendar list and you selected Scheduled Academic Year in the Academic Year Type list, select either Header or Trailer. Anthology Student includes the summer header or trailer when it creates the academic years and matches the start and end dates with the summer header or trailer. For additional information, see the background for processing for summer packaging.
-
If a Summer term is configured or not.
-
Indicates how the building will be utilitized. The options are Class Scheduling, Examination or Both (used for both class secheduling and examinations).
-
The specific type of benefit provided to the student by the Veteran's Association.
-
Specifies the veteran affairs benefits for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specifies the veteran affairs certification types for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specifies the veteran affairs codes for which you want to generate the report.
-
The first day that the position is valid from or in use.
-
The first day that the position is valid from or in use. Valid from date must be within the job duration of the selected record.
-
The first day that the staff position is valid from or in use. Valid from date must be within the Position duration of the selected record. Duplicate records with the same date cannot be added.
-
Indicates whether your institution received a valid, signed promissory note. The values are Yes, No, and blank.
-
Indicates whether your loan has a valid, signed promissory note. The values are Yes or No.
-
The last date that the position is valid or will be in use.
-
The last date that the position is valid or will be in use. Valid to date must be within the job duration of the selected record.
-
The last date that the staff position is valid or will be in use. Valid to date must be within the Position duration of the selected record. Duplicate records with the same date cannot be added.
-
The valid date when the log was integrated was added or the status change was entered.
-
Select the option to validate current room occupancy. The options are: - End Date: Validates the number of students in a room based on the End Date specified in the Roommate Matching. - Date Range: Validates the number of students in a room based on the whole lease period specified in the Roommate Matching.
-
Select the check box if you want to check terms to determine whether partial terms exist and exclude them from the SAP calculation.
-
Select this check box to validate the student's eligibility for room assignment based on deposit status. This is a system-level override of the student validation for Deposit in the Roommate Matching.
-
Select this check box to validate the student's eligibility for room assignment based on packaging status. This is a system-level override of the student validation for Packaging Status in the Roommate Matching.
-
Indicates whether the record was validated.
-
Select the validation type from the drop-down list. When you validate loads using Assignment Status from the Processes tile, Hard specifies that you do not want to override failed validations. Soft specifies that you want to be able to override failed validations by selecting the Override check box.
-
Specifies the type of validation type. When you validate loads using Assignment Status from the Processes tile, Hard specifies that you do not want to override failed validations. Soft specifies that you want to be able to override failed validations by selecting the Override check box. Note: Faculty Workload Management displays a Soft value when the policy line belongs to the Parent (FTE).
-
The value choosen for the localization setting. Options are Enable or Disable.
-
If you selected Enter a Value for Configuration Type, specify the value. For example, if your insitution wants to require 30 credits for a second degree completed, specify 30.
-
Indicates the value of the settings. By default, the value is set to disabled. Once the value is set to enabled, it cannot be changed.
-
Indicates the value of the setting. The options are Yes or No. By default, the setting is configure to No.
-
Indicate the value based on the property field. This field changes from drop-down to text area according to the property selected.
-
The value list for the field.
-
The amount the faculty member should be paid for the pay period. Anthology Student calculates the value by multiplying the value in the Amount column by the value in the Rate column. For example, if the Amount is 1.5 and the Rate is 100, the Value is 150.
-
Indicates the value associated with the field. You can add a value to the settings.
-
The maximum value of class time that can be counted toward makeup hours.
-
Indicates the value associated with the field. You can add a value to the Literal field.
-
A string that specifies the value you want combined with the operator to determine the courses to be included. For example, if you selected Course Prefix Code for Entity and Start With for Operator and specify ART, Anthology Student all the courses with a prefix of ART.
-
Indicates the value associated with the field.
-
The status required for the document to meet the prerequisite. The list contains all the document statuses that your institution configured with Yes for Approved. If you select more than one value, any one of the selected statuses will meet the prerequisite.
-
Specifies the parameter value required to pass the rules.
-
The value associated to the transaction code.
-
Displays calculated values from the load validation process.
-
Indicates the measure or worth of the setting.
-
Displays the threshold for the number of seats.
-
Specifies the discount amount if Posting Type is Transaction Details based on the billing method selected for the tuition discount policy.
-
Specifies the discount amount if Posting Type is Aggregate based on the billing method selected for the tuition discount policy.
-
The value of the setting.
-
Indicates that the course is a variable credit course. Variable credit courses are highlighted in green and allow edits to the Credits and Hours fields.
-
Indicates that the course is a variable credits course.
-
If the course was configured as a variable credit course that allows edits to the Credits and Hours fields, copies the variable credit properties when selected.
-
Displays the variance value received on a Web Response file (CBWBYYOP). This field is blank when a Common Record Response file (CRCB) is imported. In cases where the Total FWS Amount imported from the CBWBYYOP differs from the latest "Accepted" status response in the Import Information section on the Campus-Based Programs form, or if the section has no data, the system compares this imported value to the form-level Total FWS Earnings field. Any discrepancy between these values is presented in the Variance field for user review.
-
Specifies the prospective vendors and their respective sub-vendors.
-
Select the Vendor. The options are Live and Testing. This field is displayed when Payment Gateway Provider is set to Paypal.
-
Specify the Vendor ID. This field is displayed when the Payment Gateway Provider is PayPal.
-
Specify the Vendor ID for PayPal, Division Business ID for ACI, or uPay Site ID for TouchNet.
-
Indicates the identifying reference number for transactions processed by external vendors. This field allows up to 23 characters long.
-
Indicates the identifying reference number for transactions processed by external vendors. This field allows up to 23 characters long.
-
The type of vendor. The options are Accomodation, Equipment, and Travel.
-
The place where graduation ceremony will be held.
-
The place where post-graduation reception event will be held.
-
Select the check box to specify that validation is required for the ISIR. The award year for a Pell Grant must also match the award year for the package. The verification status must be a value other than S (Selected), such as V (Verified).
-
Indicates whether the student’s ISIR is selected for verification. After the student is selected, he or she will remain selected for the current processing year. This data comes from the 'Student Is Selected for Verification' field on the ISIR record layout. Y = selected for verification N = Not selected for verification * = Selected for verification on a subsequent transaction
-
Indicates whether the student’s ISIR is selected for verification. The options are "Selected" (ISIR is selected for verification) amd "Not Selected" [ISIR is not selected for verification).
-
Value entered by the user during the ISIR verification process.
-
The name of the verification agent.
-
The verification agent's title.
-
The date of the verification.
-
Students who are selected for verification are placed in groups (V1, V4, etc.) to determine which information must be verified.
-
To include students who have been selected for verification, select the applicable Verification Group(s). To include students who have not been selected for verification, select Blank Group.
-
Three-digit verification number for a credit card.
-
Phone number for the verification agent.
-
Name of the verification representative.
-
Numeric code for the verification result. See Verification Result Description for details.
-
Description of the verification result: 1—Verification completed in person; no issues found 2—Verification completed using notary; no issues found 3—Verification attempted; issues found with identity 4—Verification attempted; issues found with HS completion 5—No response from applicant or unable to locate 6—Verification attempted; issues found with both identity and HS
-
Use the list to manually select a verification status for the student's FAFSA or ISIR. The field is displayed only if the origination status of the Pell grant is Batched to Send. The values are Blank for Not Selected and not verified, S for Selected not verified, E for Selected - Qualified Exclusion, N for Not Verified, V for Verified, and W for Without Documentation. During import, Anthology Student sets an ISIR selected for verification to the system status of S and an ISIR not selected to Blank. The Department of Education has defined Blank, Selected, Qualified Exclusion, Verified, or Without Documentation as valid statuses. The status is reported in the Pell origination extract procedure; however, the status of Selected does not send the verification tag in the export file. The use of Selected, although not valid on the origination extract, lets you manage the verification status for those students selected before extracting a Pell origination. Be aware that Selected, Qualified Exclusion will export as an S in the file to COD.
-
Verification Status of the ISIR record: S = Selected not verified, V = Verified
-
The verification statuses required for the student ISIR. The ISIR must have one of the statuses you select to meet the criteria.
-
Indicates whether the verification of the student's ISIR is complete. The column displays a 'Y' when the verification is complete. It displays an 'N' when the verification is not complete. After you have checked the ISIR and selected 'Accept as Verified' on the ISIR Verification Results form, the 'Verification Complete' field is updated from 'N' to 'Y'. If you have already performed the verification for this award year and received another ISIR for the same award year, the 'Verification Complete' column displays an 'X" and the 'Verification' column displays a 'Y'.
-
If the job is verified or not
-
Select an option for verified for which you want to generate the report.
-
Specify whether or not all the values in the template is verified.
-
Indicates that the field is used to verify that the password entered matches the password assigned by the payment gateway provider.
-
The program version code.
-
The program version name.
-
The start date of the program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in.
-
If the system is configured to Require the Start Date (under Settings > Academic Records > General > Require Start Date) the Version Start Date field will be flagged as required and the user must select a Version Start Date when adding a new enrollment.
-
The date that the student is expected to start the enrollment at your institution. The dates listed in the drop down field are from the Start Dates configured for the selected program version. The best practice is to select a Version Start Date when adding an enrollment to a student record.
-
The start date of the program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in. Only students whose program version start date is within the specified date range will be gathered.
-
The start date of the program version for the campus that the student is enrolling in. This field is disabled if you have specified Expected Start Term in Date and Student Status section.
-
Select the program version start date.
-
The start date of the program version.
-
Select the required LMS version. The options are: - LMS Version 1.0: Configures the LMS Data Exchange - LMS Version 2.0: Configures the LMS Vendor
-
The veteran status of the student.
-
Points awarded to veterans by the military after their service.
-
Name of person who has been assigned the role of Vice Chancellor by your institution.
-
Select the required employer contact type check box to be configured as View. You can also select all the options under employer contact type by checking the box beside View button.
-
Indicates that the selected Fee Schedule is available for selection from the Fee Schedule drop-down list on the registration feature.
-
If you select Yes for this option, only those documents that have not been received will appear in the grid. If you select No (default), all documents will appear.
-
View the history for the selected PWD notification.
-
Select the View load link to view and edit available values. This link is visible only for the Failed or Passed Load Validation Status. For any changes made to the pop-up, Anthology Student reflects in the View loads section of the Assignment Manager.
-
Select Yes to display only terms that are configured as active. Select No to display all terms.
-
Select the View Policy Lines link to view and edit available values.
-
Indicates that the schedule will be available online.
-
The date when the visa expires.
-
The date when the visa was issued.
-
The place where the visa was issued.
-
The visa foil number printed on the bottom right side of the visa document.
-
The visa type assigned to the international student. This value is required if you select a Transmission Status of Ready to Send (R) or DSO Review (D). While you can configure visa types, Anthology Student only transmits information for F1, M1, and J1 to SEVIS.
-
The visa type assigned to the dependent of the international student. The visa type must correspond to the visa type selected for the student. For example, if you selected F1 for the student, you must select F2 for the dependents. This value is required if you select a Transmission Status of Ready to Send (R) or DSO Review (D). While you can configure visa types, Anthology Student only transmits information for F2, M2, and J2 to SEVIS.
-
Select whether you want your institution's policy is to post voided transactions to the student's Ledger Card when a refund transaction is voided. If reverse general ledger entries are required for refunds, select Yes. This option may be assigned to individual response codes as necessary.
-
Indicates whether a waitlist is configured for the course or class section.
-
Select the option to determine the basis of the expiration date. The options are: - On Term Start Date - After Term Start Date - Before Term Start Date - On Add/Drop Date for Term - After Add/Drop Date for Term - Before Add/Drop Date for Term
-
Specify the number of days for the waitlist to expire.
-
The date when the configured waitlist is no longer valid.
-
The maximum number of students who can be waitlisted.
-
Select whether you want the system to treat the value in the “Max. Number Of Seats” field as a Number or as a Percentage. When you select Percentage, the system calculates the number of waitlist seats based on a percentage of the maximum number of seats configured for the class section. For example, if the “Max Number of Seats” is set to 10 and the “Waitlist Max Number of Seats Type” is set as Percentage, the system will calculate the maximum seats on the waitlist as 10% of the maximum number of seats in the class section. For a class section configured with 30 seats, the system will allow a waitlist of 3 seats.
-
The maximum number of waitlist seats allowed for the course.
-
The maximum number of reservation seats allowed for the course.
-
Select the option for the waitlist notification. The options are Automatic and Manual. If you select Manual, the Notification Expiration in Hours field is disabled.
-
The number of available seats on the waitlist.
-
The waitlist status of the student in the class section. For example, waitlisted, cleared, and so on.
-
The number of students waitlisted for a class.
-
Select the check box if you want to waive retake fees if the previous grade was a failing grade.
-
Select the check box if you want to waive retake fees if the previous grade was a passing grade.
-
Select the check box if you want to waive retake fees if the student registers in a course after the course start date. "Number of Days if Registered after Course Start" is editable when this field is selected.
-
Indicates the configurations associated with waived retake fees when the previous grade was a passing grade or failing grades or if the student enrolled after course start date.
-
The total credits or hours for courses that have been manually waived on the Degree Progress Audit.
-
Indicates if the course requisite has been waived.
-
The name of the person who has waived/un-waived the requisite.
-
Indicates the date and time when the requisite was waived/un-waived.
-
Indicates the waivers configured for stipend in Contact Manager Documents. They must be on file with the status code that has Approved = Y in a student’s Documents folder to allow the functionality for each waiver to be applied. Any time a waiver that is on file is moved to an Approved status, the logic will trigger the student to be queued for auto stipend evaluation.
-
Select Yes or No to indicate if the student has signed a waiver of placement assistance from your institution.
-
Indicates whether you want to retrieve students with no waiver or at least one waiver on file. Anthology Student includes students in the report with a document configured in their Documents list. (Select the Students tile > select the name in the Students list > expand Contact Manager > select the Documents tile.)
-
Select Yes or No to indicate if the student wants assistance in obtaining employment.
-
Indicates if the student wants assistance in employment placement.
-
The amount that triggers a message indicating that the cash drawer is approaching the allowable limit for total transaction for each session.
-
Displays the total number of courses with warnings in the degree pathway. For example, if a course has prerequisites or corequisites that have not been met, a red exclamation mark (!) is displayed for the course. A course can have more than one warning.
-
Select the mode to manage the web accounts mode in Process Duplicate Online Applicants. The options are New Account, Old Account, or Multiple Accounts.
-
The type of web alert to send (Advising Alert, Status Change, Meet With Advisor, etc.)
-
This notification allows the system to interact with the CMC Student Portal or any School web portal. This option will notify students that they have a Cash Payment Plan generated.
-
Indicates if the student received their PWD Notification via a web alert through Student Portal.
-
The Webhook URL.
-
The employer's website.
-
This field is enabled only if the Policy Unit is Weeks. The options are: - Calendar Days: You can total the number of days in the time period calculation and subtract holidays (if that option has been enabled) divided by seven. - Scheduled Instruction Days: You can calculate the number of weeks based on at least one class session per calendar week (Sun-Sat).
-
Specifies the days of the week the building remains open.
-
The number of weeks that the student should attend for the selected sequence. The total of all sequences or periods must equal the credits for a full academic year or loan period.
-
The number of weeks in the academic year. If you selected Non-standard terms, Standard terms of quarters, Standard terms of semesters, Standard terms of trimesters, or Credit hours without terms in the Academic Calendar list, the Department of Education (ED), defines the minimum as 30 weeks. If you selected Clock hours in the Academic Calendar list, ED defines the minimum as 26 weeks.
-
The number of weeks during the payment period.
-
Enabled only if Policy Units is set to Weeks. Indicates whether your institution defines a week as: Scheduled Instruction Days: With this option, the number of weeks is calculated based on at least one class session per calendar week (Sun-Sat). Calendar Days (default): With this option, the number of days in the time period calculation minus holidays is totaled and then divided by seven.
-
The number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. For weeks in academic years, the value for this field and the value in the field for weeks non-enrolled should total 52 weeks. For weeks in an academic year, a provision in the Higher Education Reconciliation Act (HERA) reduces the minimum of 30 weeks of instructional time for programs measured in clock hours to 26 weeks. The minimum for term and non-term credit hour programs is still 30 weeks.
-
The number of weeks in the academic year or loan period. For weeks in academic years, the value for this field and the value in the field for weeks non-enrolled should total 52 weeks. For weeks in an academic year, a provision in the Higher Education Reconciliation Act (HERA) reduces the minimum of 30 weeks of instructional time for programs measured in clock hours to 26 weeks. The minimum for term and non-term credit hour programs is still 30 weeks.
-
The number of weeks that the student should attend for the selected sequence. If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms and you need to make manual adjustments for transfer credits, prior coursework, or test credits, those should be subtracted from the final sequence. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
The number of weeks that the student should attend for the selected sequence. If the program was configured to use an academic calendar that uses clock hours or credit hours without terms and you need to make manual adjustments for transfer credits, prior coursework, or test credits, those should be subtracted from the final sequence. Anthology Student displays a message if the value you specify does not match the values Anthology Student determined are needed to complete the program.
-
The total number of weeks of instruction in the program’s academic year. This value is reported only when Published Program Length Measurement is W or M.
-
Number of weeks in financial aid academic years.
-
The number of weeks the student is not expected to attend. The total of the values for this field and the field for specifying weeks enrolled should be 52 weeks. Anthology Student uses the total to estimate the time between the start of one academic year and the start of the next academic year.
-
The number of weeks the student is not expected to attend. The total of the values for this field and the field for specifying weeks enrolled should be 52 weeks. Anthology Student uses the total to estimate the time between the start of one academic year and the start of the next academic year.
-
Weeks from the academic year to the payment period.
-
Specify the weight in percentage that the question holds. You can use for the questions that do not need to match directly but need to be considered in the roommate matching process. The sum of the weights assigned to such questions cannot exceed 100%.
-
Indicates if the GPA calculation is weighted or unweighted. Weighted uses the sum of quality points divided by credits attempted. Unweighted uses the sum of the grade points divided by the count of courses taken.
-
Indicates if the GPA calculation is weighted or unweighted. Weighted uses the sum of quality points divided by credits attempted. Unweighted uses the sum of the grade points divided by the count of courses taken.
-
Specifies the type of change in the system that triggers the activity. Anthology Student populates the list with the values appropriate for the value you selected in the Schedule Task For list. For example, if you selected Prospective Student, it displays events for prospective students.
-
Specifies whether or not the item is scheduled before or after the event you select in the Event list.
-
If Anthology Student is integrated with Anthology Finance & HCM indicates which product was used to add the staff member.
-
Select the check box to indicate that you want a wide column.
-
The Pell COA amount if the student lives at home with their parents.
-
The Less Than Half Time Pell COA amount if the student lives with a parent.
-
Date student withdrew from a program.
-
The Withdrawal date range for your search.
-
The status of the student's withdrawal.
-
Amount of earnings from work-study.
-
Specify the work-study hours per week available to prospective and enrolled students.
-
Specify the normal work days for the available job. This field accepts up to 7 characters which represent the days of week that the job requires.
-
Specify the normal work hours for the available job.
-
Credits that must be assigned to a sub-components based on the pre-determined work load for that component. For instance, a faculty member can earn higher credits for a lecture than a laboratory session.
-
The work telephone number for the student, staff, or person. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether phone numbers use parentheses and hyphens). When a student is placed in a job using student placement, the program automatically updates the number with the phone number for the employer. If it applies, the extension is also updated.
-
The work telephone number for the student. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether or not it uses parenthesis and hyphens). When a student is placed in a job using student placement, the program automatically updates the number with the phone number for the employer. If it applies, the extension is also updated.
-
The work telephone number for the student, staff, or person. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether phone numbers use parentheses and hyphens). When a student is placed in a job using student placement, the program automatically updates the number with the phone number for the employer. If it applies, the extension is also updated.
-
The work phone number of the person.
-
The payee's work phone number.
-
The Work Study Integration check box is displayed only when Anthology Student is integrated with an accounting system such as Anthology Finance & HCM. If the check box is selected for Anthology Finance & HCM, the Add Payment and Delete Payment buttons on the Work Study Payment form are disabled. If the check box is cleared (default), the Work Study integration is stopped, no records of work-study awards are exchanged between Anthology Finance & HCM and Anthology Student, and the Add Payment and Delete Payment buttons on the Work Study Payment form are enabled.
-
The work telephone number for the person. The format will depend on how your institution configured phone numbers (such as whether or not it uses parenthesis and hyphens). When a student is placed in a job using student placement, the program automatically updates the number with the phone number for the employer. If it applies, the extension is also updated.
-
If you selected Workflow or Hierarchy for Evaluation Type, this field is enabled so that you can select a hierarchy your institution configred using Configuration > Approval Management > Approval Hierarchy. Anthology Student uses the hierarchy for the approval process.
-
The School Status which invokes the respective workflow when it is set at the Application level.
-
Specifies the workflow provider for the process.
-
Enter the workflow schedule entity name to be used for the schedule.
-
The selectiom status assigned to applications.
-
Indicate the name of the Workspace. A Workspace is a dynamic webpage with a unique URL slug that when rendered, retrieves all the associated components for that workspace. It also renders the components on the page based on a specific region specification in a given order specified. This is name is visible when you assign a workspace to a staff group or, as a staff member, you pick as your default workspace.
-
Indicate the workspace URL slug.
-
Indicates the option to configure and customize the home screen. The options are Class Scheduling and Standard Homepage.
-
The Calendar year.
-
The budget year. The list displays 10 prior years and 4 future years.
-
Indicate the number of credits or hours for the first year of the specified program version.
-
Indicate the number of credits or hours for the second year of the specified program version.
-
Indicate the number of credits or hours for the third year of the specified program version.
-
Indicate the number of credits or hours for the fourth year of the specified program version.
-
Select the year for which you want to generate the report.
-
Total year-to-date Pell amount accepted by COD.
-
Indicates whether or not the student is also eligible for the Zell Miller scholarship. Yes indicates they are eligible. No indicates they are not.
-
Indicates student eligibility for the Zell Miller scholarship. The values are Yes, No, and Undetermined. The value must be Yes for a student to be eligible for the fund source. If the field is blank, no value was imported from the State of Georgia. If a value is displayed, you can override the value.
-
Select this check box to include zero balance when filtering summary and detail reports.
-
Any payment due from the student
-
Specifies whether or not you want to include zero balance in balance options.
-
The postal code for the address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
Select the condition for zip code or postal code for which you want to generate the report. The values are Contains, Is Equal To, Is Not Equal To, and Include All ZIP Code/Postal Codes.
-
The postal code for the address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
The payee's zip code or postal code.
-
The postal code for the address. If you are specifying an address, you must specify a value for City or State. If you specify a city or state or both, the list contains the valid zip codes.
-
Enter a numeric value to define secondary weighted criteria for zip code/postal code. This field is enabled only when you have selected No match use Secondary Criteria check box.
-
If zones are configured for your institution, the zone. Zones are calculated using the direct line distance between the ZIP code of each campus and the ZIP code of the student's address. Your institution can also configure options specific to a foreign country (outside of the ZIP code system).
-
Select the option whether or not you want to allow the assignment of zone based on student address zip code or campus zip code.
-
#
%
[
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
Y
Z
